JP6740285B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as “pachinko machine”) or a spinning drum type gaming machine (generally referred to as “pachi-slot machine”).

Conventionally, as a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is known a gaming machine that sets a setting state such as a winning lottery probability or an execution probability of various effects by a setting change operation by a game hall manager ( For example, Patent Document 1). Further, in a gaming machine having a setting function, there is described a gaming machine that judges whether the lottery probability indicated by the setting switch when the power is turned on and the lottery probability stored in a predetermined area of the RAM match (for example, Patent Document 2).

JP-A-6-91049 JP, 2017-56108, A

In the gaming machine, a plurality of storage areas are used properly according to the operating state, and it is necessary to initialize each storage area at an appropriate timing.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that appropriately controls a memory area according to an operating state.

The present invention, a game control means for executing a lottery process for performing a lottery of a special game which is beneficial to a player when a predetermined condition is established, in a regular process which is periodically executed at a predetermined cycle, Initializing means that is operated to initialize at least a part of the storage area of the storage means that can store the game-related information that the game control means has, and the setting values related to the control that the game control means performs. A setting machine that is operated to change, wherein the storage means is different from a first storage area capable of storing information relating to a game and the first storage area. A second storage area is provided at least, and the first storage area is used when a setting process in which the setting operation means is operable is executed and when an operation of the initialization means is detected at a predetermined timing. A storage area that can be initialized , and the second storage area is initialized when it is determined that the second storage area is abnormal, but the operation of the initialization unit is detected. And, in any case when the first storage area is determined to be abnormal, it is a storage area that is not initialized, and the game control means determines that the second storage area is abnormal. when the second memory area is initialized, the prohibit execution of the lottery process executed in the regular process, Oite during recovery from power failure that occurs after prohibiting the execution of the lottery process , if it is determined that the setting change operation is not performed, while allowing the execution of the regular process, the lottery process executed in the corresponding regular and executing disabled state, setting change operation has been performed When it is determined that the regular process is permitted, the lottery process performed in the regular process can be performed .

In the above configuration, the first storage area is initialized when the setting process operable by the setting operation unit is executed and when the operation of the initialization unit is detected at a predetermined timing, and the second storage region is initialized. The storage area is initialized when the second storage area is determined to be abnormal and the setting process is executed, and is not initialized when the operation of the initialization unit is detected. The area of the memory can be controlled appropriately according to. For example, as described in FIGS. 213 to 214, the area in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 detects the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 when the setting change mode (setting process) is executed and when the power is turned on. The area outside the game control area is initialized when the work area outside the game control area is determined to be abnormal and the setting change mode (setting process) is executed, and the RAM clear switch 954 is initialized. When the operation is detected, it is not initialized, so that the memory area can be appropriately controlled.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state where the door frame was opened from the main body frame and the main body frame was opened from the outer frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame as seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and seen from behind. It is a front view showing an example of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the front left. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main composition, and was seen from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main composition, and was seen from the back. It is the front view which cut the front component in the game board and the front unit in the center of the front and back direction inside the game territory. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the structure in the main control MPU. It is a figure which shows the structure of the arithmetic circuit in main control MPU. It is a figure which shows the structure of a serial communication circuit. It is a flow chart which shows an example of initialization processing. 22 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the initialization process of FIG. 21. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a character ratio calculation/display process. 25 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the accessory ratio calculation/display process of FIG. 24. It is a figure which shows an example of arrangement|positioning of the program (code) and data stored in ROM and RAM incorporated in the main control MPU. It is a figure which shows the structure of the data stored in the character ratio calculation area|region. It is a figure which shows the structure of a character ratio display. It is a figure which shows the structure of a driver circuit. FIG. 6 is a timing chart of data input to a driver circuit. It is a figure which shows the example of mounting of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the positional relationship between the main control MPU and a character ratio display. It is a figure which shows a load register selection table. It is a figure which shows a character generator decoding table. It is a state transition diagram of a driver circuit. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of a character ratio. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of a character ratio. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of base calculation area update processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation/display processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the update timing of a prize ball, and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of a prize ball, and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of a prize ball, and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of a prize ball, and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of a prize ball, and the calculation timing of a base value. 9 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the base calculation area update process. It is a flow chart which shows another example of base calculation and display processing. 9 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the base calculation area update process. It is a flow chart which shows another example of base calculation and display processing. 9 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the base calculation area update process. It is a flow chart which shows another example of base calculation and display processing. It is a figure which shows the structure of the data stored in the area|region for base calculation. It is a front view showing another example of a game board. 9 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the base calculation area update process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the base calculation area update process. It is a flow chart which shows another example of base calculation and display processing. It is a flow chart which shows another example of base calculation and display processing. It is a flow chart which shows another example of base calculation and display processing. It is a flow chart which shows another example of base calculation and display processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part power-on processing. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part 1ms timer interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a display selection process. It is a figure which shows an example of a display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of a display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of a display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of a display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of a display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of a display screen. 9 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the base calculation area update process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the base calculation area update process. It is a flow chart which shows another example of base calculation and display processing. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of base calculation area update processing. 9 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the base calculation area update process. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation processing 1. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation processing 2. 9 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation process 1. 9 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation process 2. It is a flow chart which shows another example of timer interruption processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation processing 3. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation processing 4. It is a flow chart which shows an example of base display processing. 9 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation processing 3. 9 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation processing 4. It is a flow chart which shows another example of base display processing. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows arrangement|positioning of a frame side discharge ball sensor. It is a figure which shows arrangement|positioning of a frame side discharge ball sensor. It is a figure which shows the example of connection of a discharge ball sensor and a main control board. It is a front view showing an example of a game board. It is a figure which shows the structure of a main control input circuit. It is a figure which shows the example of mounting of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the example of mounting of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the example of mounting of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a main control I/O port. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a main control I/O port. It is a timing diagram in the example of a structure of the main control I/O port shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the change of the state (section) concerning calculation of a base value. It is a figure which shows the example of the character displayed on a base display. It is a flow chart which shows an example of initialization processing. FIG. 102 is a flowchart illustrating a continuation of the initialization process in FIG. 101. It is a figure which shows the structure of the area|region for base calculation. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a base calculation process. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the base calculation process of FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of base display data generation processing. It is a flow chart which shows the modification of base calculation processing. It is a figure which shows the calculation of the base when a game state switches. It is a figure which shows the structure regarding a storage area among the internal structures of the main control MPU1311. It is a figure showing an example of a program of timer interruption processing and base calculation processing. It is a figure showing an example of a program of timer interruption processing and base calculation processing. It is a figure which shows an example of arrangement|positioning of the program (code) and data stored in ROM and RAM incorporated in the main control MPU. It is a figure showing an example of a game history recorded on a game machine. It is a figure which shows the example of an error screen. It is a figure which shows the example of an error signal. It is a figure which shows the example of an error. It is a figure which shows the example of an error. It is a figure which shows the example of an error. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part power-on processing. It is a figure which shows an example of a game history recording condition setting table. It is a figure showing an example of a game history. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a peripheral control board and its periphery. It is a block diagram showing a peripheral configuration of a peripheral control SRAM. It is a figure which shows the modification of a game history recording condition setting table. It is a figure which shows the modification of a game history. It is a figure which shows the modification of a game history. It is a figure which shows the modification of a game history. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of the pachinko machine which has a setting part. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine which has a setting part from the back in the opened state. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 130 from the back in the closed state. It is a figure which shows the setting part of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the modification of a setting part. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of the pachinko machine which has a setting part. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board which has a setting part from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine which mounted the game board shown in FIG. 135 from back. It is a flow chart which shows an example of initialization processing. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of setting change processing and setting display processing. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of setting change processing and setting display processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the procedure of special design and special electric auditors product control processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the procedure of special symbol change waiting processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the procedure of special symbol change pattern setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the procedure of change pattern selection judgment processing. (A) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the game state is a normal state and the result of the special lottery is out. (B) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the gaming state is a normal state and the result of the special lottery is a big hit. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the production|generation performed in the deviation|variation pattern 20 and 24 to 29 in the fluctuation pattern table of FIG. 144(A). It is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect executed in the deviation variation patterns 1, 2, and 30 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A). FIG. 150A is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect executed in the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A). FIG. 150A is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect executed in the deviation variation pattern 32 and the hit variation pattern 35 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A). (A) is an example of a variation pattern table that is selected when the game state is a time saving state and the result of the special lottery is out. (B) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the gaming state is a short-time state and the result of the special lottery is a big hit. It is a figure which shows the example of mounting of a main control board. It is a figure which shows another example of mounting of a main control board. FIG. 151 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A′ in FIG. 151(B). It is a figure which shows another example of mounting of a main control board. It is a flow chart which shows an example of initialization processing. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of setting confirmation processing. It is a timing diagram of a security signal. It is a flow chart which shows another example of initialization processing. It is a flowchart which shows another example of a setting confirmation process. It is another example of the fluctuation pattern table. It is an example of a final reserved color table. When the variation pattern is determined by the variation pattern table of FIG. 160 and the final retention color is determined by the final retention color table of FIG. 161, a table showing the appearance rate of each final retention color for each variation pattern of setting 1 is displayed. This is an example. When the variation pattern is determined by the variation pattern table of FIG. 160 and the final retention color is determined by the final retention color table of FIG. 161, a table showing the appearance rate of each final retention color for each variation pattern of setting 3 is displayed. This is an example. When the variation pattern is determined by the variation pattern table of FIG. 160 and the final retention color is determined by the final retention color table of FIG. 161, a table showing the appearance rate of each final retention color for each variation pattern of setting 5 is displayed. This is an example. It is an example of a notice production table. It is an example of a dialogue production table. It is another example of the notice production table. It is an example of a setting suggestion effect table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline of setting suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline of the setting suggestion production as a pre-reading production. (A) is an example of a setting confirmation mode effect restriction table, and (B) is an example of an error occurrence effect restriction table. It is an example of a new start winning effect restriction table. It is an example of a processing table 1. It is an example of a processing table 2. It is an example of a processing table 3. It is an example of a processing table 4. It is an example of a processing table 5. It is an example of a processing table 6. 9 is a flowchart of a power-on process of another example 1. 9 is a flowchart of a power-on process of another example 1. 9 is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process according to another example 1. 9 is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process according to another example 1. 9 is a flowchart of a performance display process of another example 1. It is a figure which shows the alerting|reporting aspect of example 1 of another. It is a figure which shows the notification priority of example 1 of another. 9 is a flowchart of a power-on process of another example 1. 9 is a flowchart of a power-on process of another example 1. 9 is a flowchart of main processing on the main control side of another example 1. 9 is a flowchart of initialization processing when a RAM is abnormal in another example 1. 9 is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process according to another example 1. 9 is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process according to another example 1. 9 is a flowchart of a setting process of another example 1. 9 is a flowchart of a setting display process of another example 1. 9 is a flowchart of a power-on setting process of the other example 1. 9 is a flowchart of a random number update process 2 of another example 1. 9 is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process according to another example 1. 9 is a flowchart of a switch input process 1 of another example 1. FIG. 198(A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a switch winning information data table of another example 1, and FIG. 198(B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a switch input level/edge data area of another example 1. is there. FIG. 199(A) is a diagram showing another configuration example of the switch winning information data table of another example 1, and FIG. 199(B) is another configuration example of the switch input level/edge data area of another example 1. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of a setting change/confirmation process of another example 1. FIG. 201(A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the switch input port 2 of another example 1, and FIG. 201(B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the setting status management area of another example 1. FIG. 202(A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on operation command of another example 1, and FIG. 202(B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on state command of another example 1, FIG. 202(C) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on return destination command of another example 1, and FIG. 202(D) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a set value command of another example 1. FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a transmission order of commands of another example 1. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a state transition of a setting state management area of another example 1. 9 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode of another example 1. 9 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting confirmation mode of another example 1. 9 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode of another example 1. 9 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode of another example 1. 9 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode of another example 1. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the jackpot determination threshold value table of example 1 of another. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the jackpot determination threshold value table of example 1 of another. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the jackpot determination threshold value table of example 1 of another. 9 is a flowchart of a power-on process of another example 2. 9 is a flowchart of a power-on process of another example 2. 9 is a flowchart of a set value confirmation process of another example 2. It is a flowchart of a power-on game area outside RAM confirmation process of the other example 2. It is a flow chart of RAM out-of-game area processing of another example 2. 9 is a flowchart of an outside-use-area RWM initialization process of another example 2. 9 is a flowchart of a power-on setting process of the second example. FIG. 220(A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a setting state management area of another example 2, and FIG. 220(B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on operation command of another example 2. 220(C) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on state command of another example 2. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of main processing on the main control side of another example 2. 9 is a flowchart of a power-off process of another example 2. 9 is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process of another example 2. 9 is a flowchart of a setting process of another example 2. 9 is a flowchart of a setting display process of another example 2. 14 is a flowchart of a power-on process according to another example 3. 14 is a flowchart of a power-on process according to another example 3. 13 is a flowchart of main processing on the main control side of the third example. 9 is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process for setting change process of the third example. It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process for normal games of another example 3. 13 is a flowchart of main processing on the main control side in another example 4. 14 is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process for setting change process of the other example 4. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the center accessory of the front unit of the game board and the front production unit, and was seen from the front. It is a front view showing a state in which the first design is luminescently displayed in the front effect unit. It is a front view showing a state in which a second design is luminescently displayed in the front effect unit. It is a figure which shows the structure of a light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the structure of the reflection part provided in the light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the structure of the reflection part provided in the light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the structure of a light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the pattern displayed on a light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the pattern displayed on a light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the pattern displayed on a light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the structure of a light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the pattern displayed on a light-guide plate. It is a figure showing a mode that the picture seen by plane is displayed by a light guide plate. It is a figure showing a mode that the picture seen by plane is displayed by a light guide plate. It is a figure showing a mode that a pattern which is stereoscopically viewed is displayed by a light guide plate. It is a figure showing a mode that a pattern which is stereoscopically viewed is displayed by a light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using a light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using a light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using a light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using a light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using a light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using a light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using a light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using a light guide plate. It is a circuit diagram around a synchronous serial interface of the main control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the connection of a serial/parallel conversion circuit and LED. It is a figure which shows arrangement|positioning on the main control board of the main control MPU and a peripheral component. It is a figure which shows arrangement|positioning of the port in the main control MPU. It is a figure which shows the output of data by a synchronous serial signal, and the timing of acquisition. It is a figure which shows another arrangement|positioning of the main control board in a main control board box. It is a figure which shows another arrangement|positioning of the main control board in a main control board box. It is a perspective view of a slot machine. FIG. 38 is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front member opened. FIG. 31 is a block diagram showing a configuration of various mechanical elements, electronic devices, operation members and the like included in the slot machine. It is a figure which shows the storage area provided by ROM, RAM etc. in this embodiment, and the detail of a ROM area. It is a figure which shows the detail of the RAM area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the data stored in the character ratio calculation area|region. It is a figure which shows the detail of the parameter information setting area of this embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a system reset activation process executed when the slot machine is reset. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of regular processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of information signal N output processing.

A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 9. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front, and FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the back. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame 3 opened from the main body frame and the main body frame 4 opened from the outer frame 2. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into the door frame 3, the game board 5, the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine from the door frame 3, the game board 5, FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 disassembled and seen from behind.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is openably and closably supported and is openably and closably attached to the outer frame 2, and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3 And a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game ball is hit by.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated from each other and extend in the left and right, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member. A left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 that connect both ends of 20 and extend vertically are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear widths. In addition, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the horizontal lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

The outer frame 2 connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to each other, and the curtain plate member 50 attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, and attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in front view. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30 are provided. The body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a square outer shape in a front view and having a through hole 111 penetrating in the front and back, and a game attached to the lower front portion of the door frame base unit 100. A dish unit 200 having an upper tray 201 and a lower tray 202 capable of storing balls, a top unit 350 attached to an upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a left side attached to a left front portion of the door frame base unit 100. A unit 400, a right side unit 450 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100, and a game ball stored in the upper plate 201 attached through the plate unit 200 to the lower right front part of the door frame base unit 100. A handle unit 500 that can be operated by the player to drive the game board 5 into the game area, and a dish unit 200 that is attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 and receives a game ball that has been hit into the game area. The foul cover unit 520 for discharging to the lower tray 202, the ball feeding unit 540 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 for feeding the game balls of the upper tray 201 to the ball launching device 680, and the door frame base unit 100. A glass unit 560 attached to the rear surface of the glass unit 560 to close the through-hole 111 and a security cover 580 that covers the lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 560 are provided.

The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped main body frame base 600, a part of which can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame base 600. It is attached to both upper and lower ends on the left side in front view, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, respectively, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 are attached. A body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge members 150 are rotatably attached respectively, a reinforcing frame 660 attached to a front side left surface of the body frame base 600, and a body frame base 600. A ball launching device 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5 mounted on the lower front surface of the game board 5, and the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 mounted on the right side surface of the main frame base when viewed from the front. , And a locking unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and a reverse L that is attached to the rear side along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 as viewed from the front and pays out the game ball to the player side. The character-shaped payout unit 800, the board unit 900 attached to the lower portion of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable on the rear side of the main body frame base 600. And a back cover 980 that covers the rear side.

Inside the back cover 980, a main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game played on the pachinko machine 1 is provided. The main control unit 1300 is provided with an accessory ratio display 1317. The character ratio display 1317 is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED. The accessory ratio display 1317 may be configured by a liquid crystal display device. The accessory ratio display 1317 may be provided on the payout control board unit 950 instead of the main control unit 1300.

Further, it is also possible to display the accessory ratio on the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, 244 without separately providing a display device for displaying the accessory ratio. In this case, if the character ratio is constantly displayed on any of the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, 244, the character ratio can be notified to the player, and the player can check the condition of the pachinko machine.

The character ratio can be calculated by the number of character acquisition balls divided by the total number of balls acquired, as will be described later. For example, a pachinko machine with a high numerical value of the character ratio (for example, 90%) receives a large number of prize balls depending on the jackpot. Since it has been obtained, it can be said that it is in good condition. On the other hand, a pachinko machine with a low numerical value of the accessory ratio (for example, 10%) has few jackpot games and few prize balls in the jackpot. Therefore, the player can select a pachinko machine to play in consideration of the numerical value of the character ratio.

As a mode of notifying the player of the character ratio, the numerical value of the character ratio may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. For example, if the accessory ratio is 70% or more, the numerical value is displayed in red and the frame lamp is lit or blinking in red, and if it is 69% to 30%, the numerical value is displayed in green and the frame lamp is lit or blinking in green. To do. The numerical value of the accessory ratio may be displayed in such a manner that it is not mistaken for a decorative design. For example, it may be displayed in a position that does not overlap the display position of the decorative pattern when it does not change, or may be displayed in a mode such that the size of the numeral indicating the accessory ratio is smaller than the decorative pattern. The display mode may be divided into any number of stages.

Further, the aspect of the decorative pattern displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 may be changed according to the numerical value of the accessory ratio to notify the player of the accessory ratio. For example, when the accessory ratio is 70% or more, the decorative design is displayed in red and the frame lamp is lit or blinking in red, and when 69% to 30%, the decorative pattern is displayed in green and the frame lamp is lit in green. Or flashes. The display mode may be divided into any number of stages.

Further, it may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 244 provided in the door frame 3. At that time, the above-described display mode may be changed, and not only the accessory ratio but also other information may be displayed. The other information includes the number of jackpots, the number of consecutive jackpots (so-called number of consecutive chans), the number of balls held, the remaining balance, and the like.

Further, not only the accessory ratio but also the continuous accessory ratio, the base value, and the like, which will be described later, may be displayed in different modes as described above. The character ratio, the continuous character ratio, and the base value may be displayed differently.

As shown in FIG. 13, the main control unit 1300 is enclosed in a transparent resin main control board box 1320 that is sealed and has a structure that cannot be opened without breaking once closed. The removed parts can be seen from the outside. Further, for example, when the back cover 980 is made of a transparent resin, the main control unit 1300 can be seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and the accessory ratio display 1317 provided on the main control unit 1300 is used for the pachinko machine. It can be seen from the back side of the machine 1. By enclosing the character ratio display 1317 in the main control board box 1320, it is possible to prevent unauthorized modification of the character ratio display 1317 for making the pachinko machine 1 look less gambling, and to improve the accuracy of the pachinko machine 1. You can display gambling.

If the back cover 980 is made of an opaque resin, the back cover 980 at the position of the accessory ratio display 1317 may be perforated or the position of the accessory ratio display 1317 may be made transparent so that the pachinko machine can play. The accessory ratio display 1317 may be viewed from the back side of the machine 1.

Even when the back cover 980 is made of a transparent resin, it is possible to flatten the surface of the back cover 980 at the position of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 or to make the back cover 980 thin so that the accessory The ratio indicator 1317 may be made easier to see from the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

Below the back surface of the pachinko machine 1, an outlet is provided for collecting game balls that have flowed out of the game area 5a via the outlet 1111 and the winning openings 2001, 2005, 2006 and the like, and discharging the collected balls to the outside of the pachinko machine 1. ing. The game balls discharged from the discharge port are supplied to the ball tank 802 through the island facility. The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is provided with a discharge ball sensor 3060 that detects a game ball discharged from the discharge port.

As shown in FIG. 13, the main control unit 1300 is provided with a display switch 1318. The main control board box 1320 is provided with a hole through which the display switch 1318 can be operated. It is advisable to display (print, stamp, seal, etc.) that the switch is a switch for operating the display of the accessory ratio on the printed circuit board near the display switch 1318 or on the main control board box 1320. Note that the display switch 1318 is preferably provided near the accessory ratio display 1317, but other boards (for example, the production control board 4700) may be used if the operation is easy, even if the operation ratio is not the main control unit 1300. Power supply device 4112), housing 4100, or front member 4200. It may be provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 or the relay board provided separately from the main control unit 1300, the power board in the power board box 930 on the frame side, or the payout control board unit 950. Further, as will be described later, the display switch 1318 may also serve as a RAM clear switch. By providing the display switch 1318 at a position where the player cannot operate it, it is possible to prevent the player from operating it by mistake.

The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 is an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to the upper part of the payout unit base 801 and extends leftward and rightward. A ball tank 802 that stores game balls supplied from a box-shaped island facility (not shown), and a game ball inside the ball tank 802 that is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802 to the left when viewed from the front. A tank rail 803 that extends to the left and right to guide, a ball guide unit 820 that is attached to the rear surface of the upper left side in front view of the payout unit base 801, and guides the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guide unit 820. The game balls that are detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 on the lower side and are guided by the ball guiding unit 820 are instructed from the payout control board 951 (see FIG. 17) accommodated in the payout control board unit 950. Based on the payout device 830 for paying out one by one, and guiding the game balls, which are attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801, and paid out by the payout device 830, and store the game balls in the upper plate 201 in the plate unit 200. Depending on, the upper full tank ball route unit 850 which discharges the game ball from either the normal discharge port or the full tank discharge port, and the normal discharge port of the upper full tank ball route unit 850 attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801 Guide the discharged game ball forward and guide it from the front end to the through ball passage 526 of the door frame 3 and guide the game ball discharged from the full tank discharge port forward to the front end of the door frame 3 A lower full tank ball path unit 860 having a full tank guide path for guiding to the full tank receiver 530.

The board unit 900 of the body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 mounted on the rear side of the body frame base 600, and a speaker for bass sound mounted on the rear side of the body frame base 600 on the front view left side of the board unit base 910. A speaker unit 920 having 921, a power supply board box 930 mounted on the rear side of the board unit base 910 on the right side when viewed from the front and housing a power supply board therein, and a power supply board box 930 mounted on the rear side of the speaker unit 920. The interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and the payout control board 951 which is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and which controls the payout of the game balls are housed. And a payout control board unit 950.

As shown in FIG. 8 and FIG. 9, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a into which the game ball is driven, and places the game ball emitted from the ball emitting device 680 at the upper part of the game area 5a. A front component member 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 for guiding to, a flat-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a, and a game panel 1100. It has a box-shaped substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower part of the rear side and opened upward, and a main control substrate 1310 attached to the rear side of the substrate holder 1200 for controlling the game of the pachinko machine 1. A main control unit 1300 and a table unit (not shown) having a plurality of winning openings attached to the game area 5a on the front side of the game panel 1100 and capable of receiving the game balls hit in the game area 5a. ) And a back unit 3000 mounted on the rear side of the game panel 1100 above the substrate holder 1200.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle lever 504 in a state where the game balls are stored in the upper plate 201, the game is played by the ball launching device 680 with the strength according to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504. The ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Then, when the game balls hit in the game area 5a are accepted in a winning opening (not shown), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 by the paying-out device 830 according to the accepted winning holes. .. Since the player's interest can be enhanced by paying out the game balls, the game balls in the upper plate 201 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall structure of game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board. 11 is a perspective view of the game board seen from the front right, FIG. 12 is a perspective view of the game board seen from the left front, and FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the game board seen from the back. Further, FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the front, and FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 16 is a front view in which the front component member and the front unit in the game board are cut at the approximate center in the front-rear direction within the game area.

The game board 5 of the present embodiment has a game area 5a in which a game ball is hit by the player operating the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500. In addition, the game board 5 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and the rear end of the game region 5a by partitioning the outer periphery of the game region 5a and having an outer shape of a substantially square shape in a front view. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 for partitioning, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 are driven by driving the game balls into the game area 5a. And a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 17) for controlling the contents of the game. On the front surface of the game panel 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game balls are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion inside the game area 5a (not shown).

In addition, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 visibly attached to the player side in the lower left corner of the front component member 1000, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of 1100, a main liquid crystal display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and attached to the front of the game panel 1100. The front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are further provided. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

The game panel 1100 is formed so that the outer periphery thereof is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and holds the transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 and the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110, and the front component member 1000. A frame-shaped panel holder 1120 is attached to the rear side and the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open to receive the game balls that have been driven into the playing area 5a, and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 at different positions in the playing area 5a. A first starting opening 2002 which is always open to receive a ball, a gate portion 2003 which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects passage of the game ball, and the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003. According to the result of the normal lottery by lottery, the second starting opening 2004 that allows the acceptance of the game balls, and the first special lottery by accepting the game balls into the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 It is provided with a first big winning opening 2005 and a second big winning opening 2006, in which the game balls can be accepted according to the lottery result or the second special lottery result. The second special winning opening 2006 is composed of two big winning openings, a second upper special winning opening 2006a and a second lower special winning opening 2006b, which are arranged in one flow path through which game balls flow (FIG. 16).

Further, the table unit 2000 is mounted right above the out port 1111 in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction, and has a starting port unit 2100 having a first starting port 2002 and a first special winning port 2005, and starting. The lower side unit 2200, which is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the mouth unit 2100 when viewed from the front and has three general winning openings 2001, is attached above the left end of the side unit lower 2200 when viewed from the front. Frame-shaped having a side unit upper 2300 and one general winning opening 2001, one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a second large winning opening 2006, which are attached to approximately the center in the game area 5a. The center accessory 2500 is provided.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120, has a box shape having an open front, and a back box 3010 having a square opening 3010a in the rear wall, and is arranged at a predetermined position in the back box 3010. A plurality of general winning opening sensors 3015 for detecting game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 of the cage unit 2000, and a lock attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 for detachably attaching the main liquid crystal display device 1600. A mechanism 3020, and a right ball passage unit 3030 attached to the right end in front view inside the back box 3010 for discharging the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 or the second starting opening 2004 of the center accessory 2500, A lower right ball passage unit for discharging the game balls received in the second big winning opening 2006 and the second out opening 2543c of the center accessory 2500, which is attached near the front end of the lower right corner in the front case inside the back box 3010. 3035.

Further, the back unit 3000 includes an upper relay board 3040 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, an upper relay board cover 3041 covering the rear side of the upper relay board 3040, and a rotatably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. The box-shaped production drive board box 3042, the production drive board 3043 housed in the production drive board box 3042, the panel relay board 3044 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, and the panel relay board 3044. And a panel relay board cover 3045 covering the rear side.

Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back left middle decoration unit 3050 which is attached upward from the vertical center on the left side in front view at the front end in the back box 3010, and a back unit below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. Rear lower movable production unit 3100 attached near the rear wall of the box 3010, upper back left movable production unit 3200 attached on the left side in front view above the opening 3010a in the rear box 3010, and the rear box A rear left movable effect unit 3300 mounted on the left side of the opening 3010a in the front view in 3010, and a back upper mounted on the rear box 3010 from the center in the left-right direction to the right end in the front view above the opening 3010a. A movable effect unit 3400 and a lower back movable effect unit 3500 attached below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and in front of the lower back movable effect unit 3100 are provided.

[2-1. Previous component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, has an inner shape that penetrates in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction, and defines the outer circumference of the game area 5a by the inner circumference of the inner shape. The front constituent member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 extending in a circular arc shape from a lower end on the left side in the front view in the clockwise direction along a circumferential direction in a clockwise direction in a front view, and an outer rail 1001 that passes through an upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view and extends to an upper right portion. An inner rail 1002 that is arranged inside the front component member 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from a lower center in the left-right direction in a front view to an obliquely upper left portion in a front view, and a lower end of the inner rail 1002 on the right side in a front view. The out guide portion 1003 is formed at the lowest position in the region 5a and is inclined so as to be lowered rearward.

Further, the front constituent member 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guiding portion 1003 in front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front constituent member 1000. From the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper portion is curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail. The upper end of 1001 is connected, and the stop part 1006 with which the game ball that has rolled along the outer rail 1001 abuts is provided.

The front component 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the inner rail 1002 and the front rail. The backflow preventing member is rotated only in the open position in which the outer rail 1001 and the outer rail 1001 are opened and is rotated and is biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position. 1007 is provided.

On the back surface side of the game board 5 near the exits of the rails 1001 and 1002 (preferably immediately after passing through the backflow prevention member 1007), a launch ball sensor 1020 for detecting a game ball hit in the game area 5a is provided. For example, the launch ball sensor 1020 is composed of a magnetic sensor and outputs a signal when it detects a game ball that has passed through the backflow prevention member 1007 and flowed into the game area 5a. The launch ball sensor 1020 may be provided at a position where the game ball always passes within the game area. By fixing the position of the launch ball sensor 1020 on the game board 5, the specifications can be shared among a plurality of models, and the inspection at the manufacturing site and the inspection after installation in the hall become easy.

The launch ball sensor 1020 provided upstream of the game area 5a, such as near the exits of the rails 1001 and 1002, detects an out ball before the winning opening sensor detects a winning of the gaming ball. That is, since the game ball is detected in the order of the out ball and the prize ball, the base value can be accurately calculated without detecting the prize ball caused by the game ball that is not counted as the out ball.

[2-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. The gaming panel 1100 has a flat panel panel 1110 whose outer periphery is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and which is formed of transparent synthetic resin, and holds the outer periphery of the panel panel 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 which is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface. On the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, an out port 1111 penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed at the lowest position in the game area 5a. Further, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of openings 1112 penetrating in the front-rear direction and for mounting the front unit 2000.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 holds the panel plate 1110 detachably from the rear side. Further, the panel holder 1120 has a plurality of mounting holes for mounting the back unit 3000 and a plurality of positioning holes formed on its rear surface.

In the state where the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000, the out port 1111 of the panel plate 1110 is opened to the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component member 1000. As a result, the game ball flowing down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1111 by the out guiding portion 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1111.

[2-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 15. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with its upper and front portions open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to decrease toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 can cover the lower portion of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side when assembled on the game board 5. Thereby, it is possible to receive all the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1111 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and are formed on the bottom surface. The discharged portion 1201 (see FIG. 14) can be discharged downward.

[2-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 15 and 17. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 for controlling game contents and payout of game balls, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. ..

The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, next, in order to open the main control board box 1320, the sealing mechanism is destroyed. Therefore, it is possible to leave a trace of the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, the unauthorized opening/closing of the main control board box 1320 can be found by looking at the traces of the opening/closing, and the deterrence of the unauthorized act on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

[2-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 12. As shown in the figure, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 1). The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 to display a game state (game state), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the function display unit 1400 includes a status indicator including one LED for displaying a game status, and two LEDs based on a result of a normal lottery selected by passing a game ball to the gate 2003. The normal symbol display which displays these two LEDs in a lighting mode according to the normal lottery result after the normal symbol is variably displayed by blinking control, and the variable display of the normal symbol relating to the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003. Of these, a normal hold indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds, which is the number of change displays for which the start condition for change display has not yet been established, and acceptance of a game ball into the first starting opening 2002 (start prize) After the first special symbol is variably displayed by blinking control of the eight LEDs based on the first special lottery result selected by (generation), these eight LEDs are displayed in a lighting mode according to the first special lottery result. The first special symbol display and the number of holdings which is the number of variable displays for which the start condition of the variable display has not yet been established among the variable displays of the first special symbol relating to the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting opening 2002. A first special holding number indicator consisting of two LEDs to display, and eight LEDs to blink based on the result of the second special lottery drawn by receiving the game ball into the second starting opening 2004 (occurrence of the start winning) A second special symbol display device for displaying these eight LEDs in a lighting manner according to the second special lottery result after the variable display of the second special symbol by controlling, and acceptance of the game ball into the second starting opening 2004. A second special holding number indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings, which is the number of fluctuation displays for which the start condition of the fluctuation display has not yet been established, among the fluctuation displays of the second special symbols pertaining to When the lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit" or the like, a round indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of times (the number of rounds) of opening and closing patterns of the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006. And is mainly equipped. In addition, a part of the display unit of the function display unit 1400 (for example, the first special symbol display unit) may be configured by a 7-segment LED.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of holdings, symbols, and the like can be displayed by appropriately turning on/off, blinking, and the like of the provided LEDs.

[2-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 15. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 is a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 17) that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. And a box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling a light emitting effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 for controlling an effect image (see FIG. 17). reference).

[2-7. Main liquid crystal display]
Next, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 in the approximate center. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is a full-color display device using a white LED as a backlight, and can display a still image or a moving image.

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 includes two left fixing pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side surface in front view and a right fixing piece 1601 protruding outward from the right side surface in front view. 1602, and. This main liquid crystal display device 1600 has a liquid crystal screen facing forward in two fixing grooves 3010c that are open to the left inner peripheral surface in a front view in a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion of a back box 3010 described later. After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 from the diagonal rear of the box 3010, the right fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, the right fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is moved downward. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it to.

[2-8. Overall structure of table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 10 to 12 and 14 to 16. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end projects forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end penetrates the opening 1112. And the panel plate 1110 projects rearward from the rear surface. In the table unit 2000 of the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are capable of accepting game balls that have been driven into the gaming area 5a and are always open, and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 are within the gaming area 5a. The first starting opening 2002 which is always open to receive the game ball at different positions, the gate portion 2003 which is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and the game ball is the gate The second starting opening 2004 that allows the game balls to be accepted according to the result of the ordinary drawing that is drawn by passing through the section 2003, and the lottery by accepting the game balls to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. According to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006, which can accept the game balls, are provided.

Three (here, four) general winning openings 2001 are arranged in the lower part of the game area 5a, and the other one is arranged in the vicinity of the upper right of the game area 5a when viewed from the front. The first starting port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is arranged substantially right below the hitting portion 1006 in the upper right of the front view in the game area 5a. The second starting port 2004 is arranged right below the gate unit 2003 to the right in front view. The general winning opening 2001, which is arranged in the vicinity of the upper right of the front view in the game area 5a among the plurality of general winning openings 2001, is arranged immediately above the second starting opening 2004. The first big winning opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the out opening 1111. The second special winning opening 2006 is arranged above the first special winning opening 2005 on the right side of the first starting opening 2002 in a front view.

The second special winning opening 2006 in the table unit 2000 is, as shown in FIG. 16, a second upper special winning opening 2006a and a second lower big winning opening 2006b arranged along one flow path through which game balls flow. It is composed by. The second special winning opening 2006 is arranged such that the second upper special winning opening 2006a is located near the lower right of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and the second lower special winning opening 2006b is viewed from the front of the second upper special winning opening 2006a. It is located below on the left side.

Further, the table unit 2000 is mounted right above the out port 1111 in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction, and has a starting port unit 2100 having a first starting port 2002 and a first special winning port 2005, and starting. The lower side unit 2200, which is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the mouth unit 2100 when viewed from the front and has three general winning openings 2001, is attached above the left end of the side unit lower 2200 when viewed from the front. Frame-shaped having a side unit upper 2300 and one general winning opening 2001, one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a second large winning opening 2006, which are attached to approximately the center in the game area 5a. The center accessory 2500 is provided.

[2-8a. Starter unit]
Next, the starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be described. The starting opening unit 2100 is arranged directly above the out opening 1111 in the vicinity of the lower end of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. The starting opening unit 2100 has a first starting opening 2002 and a first special winning opening 2005.

The starting opening unit 2100 is a flat plate-shaped unit base 2101 having a first special winning opening 2005 that is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and has a rectangular shape extending leftward and rightward and penetrating forward and backward, and a first of the unit bases 2101. A ball receiving portion 2102 that projects forward from the upper part of the center in the left-right direction above the special winning opening 2005 and forms a first starting opening 2002, and a first starting opening that is attached to the rear side of the unit base 2101. Sphere guide portion 2103 for guiding the game ball received in 2002 downward, a first start opening sensor 2104 attached to the ball guide portion 2103 for detecting the game ball received in the first start opening 2002, The first attacker unit 2110 is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101 so as to close the one big winning opening 2005.

The first attacker unit 2110 of the starting opening unit 2100 is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101 so as to close the first big winning opening 2005 from the rear side, and the front end is open to the front with substantially the same size as the first big winning opening 2005. The box-shaped unit case 2111 and the horizontally-long rectangular flat plate-shaped first big winning opening door whose lower side is rotatably supported at the front end of the unit case 2111 so that the first big winning opening 2005 can be opened and closed. A member 2112, a first attacker solenoid 2113 mounted in the unit case 2111 and driving the first special winning opening door member 2112 to open and close, and a member 2112 mounted in the unit case 2111 and received in the first special winning opening 2005. The first big winning opening sensor 2114 for detecting the game ball, the first starting opening sensor 2104, the first attacker solenoid, and the first big winning opening sensor 2114 and the main control board 1310 attached to the upper surface of the unit case 2111. A starter unit relay board 2115 for relaying the connection with and a starter unit decoration board (not shown) attached to the bottom of the unit case 2111 for illuminating the first special winning opening 2005. ing.

The ball receiving portion 2102 forming the first starting port 2002 is open upward with a size capable of receiving only one game ball at a time. The first special winning opening 2005 penetrating the unit base 2101 is open toward the front in a size capable of receiving a plurality of (for example, 4 to 6) game balls at a time.

In the starting opening unit 2100, the first starting opening 2002 formed by the ball receiving portion 2102 opens upward, and the game ball received in the first starting opening 2002 is united by the ball guiding portion 2103. After being guided to the rear side of 2101 and being detected by the first starting port sensor 2104, it can pass through the first attacker unit 2110 and be discharged downward. In the present embodiment, two first starting opening sensors 2104 are provided, and in the main control board 1310, when the two first starting opening sensors 2104 detect a game ball within a predetermined time range, the first starting opening is detected. In 2002, it is determined that the game ball has been accepted. Accordingly, it is possible to detect an illegal act by inserting an illegal tool into the first starting opening 2002.

In the starting opening unit 2100, by attaching the first attacker unit 2110 to the rear surface of the unit base 2101, the first special winning opening door member 2112 of the first attacker unit 2110 opens in the unit base 2101. It is inserted from the rear into the mouth 2005 to close the first special winning opening 2005. The first big winning opening door member 2112 is rotatably attached to the left and right ends of the lower side by the unit case 2111 in an upright state where the first big winning opening 2005 is closed, and the upper side is forward and By rotating so as to move downward, the first special winning opening 2005 can be changed from a closed state to an open state.

The first special winning opening door member 2112 of the first attacker unit 2110 is upright in a normal state (the first attacker solenoid 2113 is in a non-energized state) and closes the first special winning opening 2005. Then, when the first attacker solenoid 2113 is energized according to the game state, the first special winning opening door member 2112 rotates so that the upper side moves forward and downward, and the upper side moves slightly above the lower side. It will be located. That is, the first special winning opening door member 2112 is in a state of being inclined so as to be higher from the lower side of the first special winning opening 2005 toward the front.

In this state, when the game ball flows down in front of the first big winning opening 2005 and comes into contact with the first big winning opening door member 2112, the distribution direction of the game ball is from below due to the inclination of the first big winning opening door member 2112. It changes to the rear and is accepted by the first special winning opening 2005 to enter the unit case 2111. Then, the game ball received in the first special winning opening 2005 is discharged from the lower surface of the unit case 2111 after being detected by the first special winning opening sensor 2114.

[3. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control structure of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 951 attached to the main body frame 4, Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls a game operation (progress of a game). Peripheral control board 1510 is based on the command from the main control board 1310 and controls the various production devices in the game based on the peripheral control unit 1511, and based on the command from the peripheral control unit 1511, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the upper plate liquid crystal. A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls display of effect images on the display device 244 and the like. The payout control board 951 includes a payout control unit 952 that controls the payout of game balls and the like, and a launch control unit 953 that controls the launch of the game balls by rotating the handle lever 504.

[3-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is a main control MPU 1311 that is a microprocessor that incorporates a ROM 1313 that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM 1312 that temporarily stores data, and an input/output device (I Main control I/O port 1314 as an I/O device), a main control input circuit 1315 to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, a main control solenoid drive circuit 1316 for driving various solenoids, and a main control A RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM built in the MPU 1311. The main control MPU 1311 has a built-in ROM and RAM, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

The main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 has a first starting opening sensor 2104 for detecting the game ball received in the first starting opening 2002 and a second starting opening sensor for detecting the game ball received in the second starting opening 2004. 2551, a general winning hole sensor 3015 for detecting a game ball received in the general winning hole 2001, a gate sensor 2547 for detecting a game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003, and a gaming ball received in the first big winning hole 2005 The first big winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper big winning opening 2006a as the second big winning opening 2006, and the second upper big winning opening sensor 2554 for detecting the game ball received in the second lower big winning opening 2006b, and Detection signals from the second lower winning a prize sensor 2557, the discharge ball sensor 3060, the launch ball sensor 1020, the magnetic detection sensor for detecting the illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, etc. are respectively transmitted through the main control I/O port 1314. Is entered.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1311 outputs a control signal from the main control I/O port 1314 to the main control solenoid drive circuit, so that the starting opening solenoid 2550, the first attacker solenoid 2113, and the second upper attacker. A drive signal is output to the solenoid 2553 and the second lower attacker solenoid 2556, and the first special symbol display device, the second special symbol display device, and the first special symbol memory of the function display unit 1400 from the main control I/O port 1314. The drive signal is output to the display device, the second special symbol memory display device, the normal symbol display device, the normal symbol memory display device, the game state display device, the round display device, or the like.

In the present embodiment, the first starting opening sensor 2104, the second starting opening sensor 2551, the gate sensor 2547, the first big winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper winning opening sensor 2554, and the second lower winning opening sensor. A non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the sensor 2557, whereas a contact type ON/OFF operation type mechanical switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 3015. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so the first starting opening sensor 2104, the second starting opening sensor 2551, And the detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 2547 also frequently occurs. Therefore, a proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the first starting port sensor 2104, the second starting port sensor 2551, and the gate sensor 2547. In addition, when an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player (“big hit” game, etc.) occurs, the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are opened (or expanded), and the game ball is frequently played. In order to enter the ball, the detection of the game ball by the first special winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper special winning opening sensor 2554, and the second lower special winning opening sensor 2557 also frequently occurs. For this reason, the first big winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper big winning opening sensor 2554, and the second lower big winning opening sensor 2557 also use proximity switches with high durability and long life. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 where the game balls do not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3015 does not occur frequently. Therefore, the general winning opening sensor 3015 uses a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch.

In addition, the main control MPU 1311 transmits various kinds of information (game information) regarding games and various kinds of commands related to payout to the payout control board 951, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951. Or Further, the main control MPU 1311 sends various commands related to the control of the game effect executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the like and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port 1314. It is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1511. When the main control MPU 1311 receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951, the main control MPU 1311 shapes these various commands and sends them to the peripheral control unit 1511.

Various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power board in the power board box 930. The power supply board that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. ). With this capacitor, the main control MPU 1311 can store various information in the RAM 1312 in the power-off processing even when the power is turned off. This stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM 1312 when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 951.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board, and outputs a power failure notification signal as a power failure notification when those voltages become lower than the power failure notification voltage. This power failure notice signal is input to the main control MPU 1311 via the main control I/O port 1314 and is also output to the payout control board 951 and the like.

An accessory ratio indicator 1317 is attached to the main control board 1310 at a position visible from the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The character ratio display 1317 displays the character ratio calculated by the main control MPU 1311.

A display switch 1318 is provided on the main control board 1310. The display switch 1318 may be a push button switch that performs a momentary operation, but may be another type of switch. When the display switch 1318 is operated, the character ratio is displayed on the character ratio display 1317. The character ratio display 1317 may always display the character ratio, and the display contents may be switched by operating the display switch 1318.

FIG. 18 is a diagram showing the internal configuration of the main control MPU 1311.

The main control MPU 1311, CPU 13111, RAM 1312, ROM 1313, random number generation circuit 13112, parallel input port 13113, serial communication circuit 13114, timer circuit 13115, interrupt controller 13116, external bus interface 13117, clock circuit 13118, verification block 13119, unique. It has information 13120, an arithmetic circuit 13121, and a reset circuit 13122.

The CPU 13111 executes the program stored in the ROM 1313. The RAM 1312 stores data necessary for executing the program.

The main control MPU 1311 is provided with one or more random number generation circuits 13112. The random number generation circuit 13112 provides a random number for determining the lottery result of the result of the variable display game (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) and the effect contents of the variable display game. The random number generation circuit 13112 is, for example, a so-called hard random number generation unit that outputs a random number updated at the timing of a clock cycle (or a signal obtained by dividing the clock cycle) supplied to the main control MPU 1311. The hard random number generated by the random number generation circuit 13112 is used for a lottery for winning a special symbol, a lottery for a winning symbol of a special symbol variable display game, and a lottery for hitting a normal symbol.

The parallel input port 13113 is a port to which detection signals from various detection switches are input via the main control input circuit 1315.

The serial communication circuit 13114 transmits/receives various commands related to control of game production and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to/from the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port 1314. In addition, the serial communication circuit 13114 transmits/receives various kinds of information (game information) regarding a game, various kinds of commands regarding a payout of game balls, and the like to the payout control board 951 via the main control I/O port 1314. Further, the serial communication circuit 13114 transmits data for displaying the character ratio to the character ratio display 1317. The detailed configuration of the serial communication circuit 13114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The timer circuit 13115 is a timer for timer interrupt and various time control. The interrupt controller 13116 controls various interrupts to the CPU 13111 (general interrupts, NMI that cannot be masked by software). That is, when the interrupt controller 13116 detects an interrupt, it refers to the vector table defined for each type of interrupt and jumps to the address set in the vector table.

The external bus interface 13117 is an interface for connecting the internal bus of the main control MPU 1311 to an external device. From the external bus interface 13117, I/O request (IORQ), read (RD), write (WR), 16-bit address (A0 to A15), and 8-bit data (D0 to D7) can be input/output.

The clock circuit 13118 generates the internal clock of the main control MPU 1311 from the input external clock signal (for example, 32 MHz). Further, the clock circuit 13118 divides the input clock signal by the set number and outputs the result from the CLKO terminal to the outside. For example, you may output the clock signal supplied to the driver circuit 13171 (refer FIG. 28) of the accessory ratio display 1317.

The collation block 13119 is a functional block that collates using a predetermined code whether the ROM 1313 has been tampered with. The unique information 13120 is an ID unique to the main control MPU 1311, and is written in a non-rewritable manner at the time of manufacturing the chip.

The arithmetic circuit 13121 provides an arithmetic function that does not depend on a program recorded in the ROM 1313. This arithmetic function is fixedly written at the time of manufacturing the chip.

The reset circuit 13122 has an undesignated running prohibition circuit, a watchdog timer, and a user reset function. When the CPU 13111 accesses an address outside the predetermined range of the ROM 1313, the non-designated travel prohibition circuit estimates that the access is due to an unauthorized program and resets the operation of the main control MPU 1311. The watchdog timer outputs a time-out signal when a predetermined timer time has elapsed, and resets the operation of the main control MPU 1311. The user reset function resets the operation of the main control MPU 1311 by the reset signal input to the SRST terminal.

FIG. 19 is a block diagram showing a detailed configuration of the arithmetic circuit 13121.

The arithmetic circuit 13121 provides an arithmetic function that does not depend on a program with respect to an arithmetic result, and includes a multiplication circuit 132111 and a division circuit 131215.

The multiplication circuit 131211 is an arithmetic circuit that multiplies two values of a predetermined number of bits (for example, 16 bits) and outputs a product of 32 bits, and converts an input value (multiplier, multiplicand) into a product by a multiplication function. Functions as an output conversion circuit.

The CPU 13111 of the main control MPU 1311 stores a multiplier and a multiplicand of 16 bits or less in the multiplication input register A131212 and the multiplication input register B131213. The multiplication circuit 131211 reads the values stored in the two 16-bit multiplication input registers 131212 and 131213 at a predetermined timing, and stores the result obtained by multiplying the two values in the multiplication result register 131214. The CPU 13111 acquires the multiplication result from the multiplication result register 131214. The process from writing the values to the multiplication input registers 131212 and 131213 to storing the calculation result in the multiplication result register 131214 is configured to be completed in a predetermined time (for example, one clock), and the CPU 13111 causes the multiplication input register 131212. , 131213, and after the predetermined number of clocks has elapsed, the multiplication result can be obtained by referring to the multiplication result register 131214.

The division circuit 131215 is an arithmetic circuit that divides a dividend of a predetermined number of bits (for example, 32 bits) by a divisor of a predetermined number of bits (for example, 32 bits) and outputs a quotient of 32 bits and a remainder of 32 bits. It functions as a conversion circuit that outputs an input value (divisor, dividend) by performing quotient and remainder conversion by a function.

The CPU 13111 of the main control MPU 1311 stores the dividend of 32 bits or less in the division input register A 131216, and stores the divisor of 32 bits or less in the division input register B 131217. When the division circuit 131215 detects that values are stored in both of the two 32-bit division input registers 131216 and 131217, the division circuit 131215 reads the stored value at a predetermined timing and divides the dividend by the divisor. The division result register A131218 is stored, and the remainder is stored in the division result register B131212. When the division circuit 131215 reads the values stored in the division input registers 131216 and 131217, the division circuit 131215 may erase the read values and clear the registers. Further, the division circuit 131215 may read the values stored in the division input registers 131216 and 131217 and store the division result in the division result registers 131218 and 131219 at the timing when the start command is input. In this case, the values stored in the division input registers 131216 and 131217 do not have to be erased at the read timing. Further, the division input registers 131216 and 131217 may have values already stored therein (without clearing the stored values), or may be capable of overwriting values.

The CPU 13111 acquires the division result from the division result registers 131218 and 131212. The process from writing a value to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 to storing the calculation result in the division result registers 131218 and 131219 is configured to be completed in a predetermined time (for example, 32 clocks). The values can be stored in the registers 131216 and 131217, and after a predetermined number of clocks has elapsed, the quotient and the remainder can be acquired by referring to the division result registers 131218 and 131219, respectively.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as will be described later, a division process is necessary to calculate the base value, and since the division in which the CPU 13111 executes the program is executed by a plurality of multiplications and subtractions, a considerable time is required. It is something like this. Therefore, it is difficult to execute the base calculation process for each timer interrupt process, and it is difficult to display the base value without delay. On the other hand, by performing the division process using the arithmetic circuit 13121, the time required for calculating the base value can be shortened, and the base value can be calculated multiple times in one timer interrupt process (see FIGS. 75 and 80). .. In addition, since the CPU 13111 is not occupied for the division processing from the writing of the value to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 to the reading of the calculation result from the division result register A131218, other processing can be executed. The base calculation process during the timer interrupt process can be efficiently executed.

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the configuration of the serial communication circuit 13114.

The serial communication circuit 13114 has four data transmission/reception circuits, and each data transmission/reception circuit transmits/receives data for one channel to/from a predetermined device. In FIG. 20, only the data transmission circuit is shown, and the description of the data reception circuit (for example, one channel is mounted) is omitted.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the serial communication circuit 13114 is, as described above, the channel 0 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510, the channel 1 used for communication with the payout control board 951, and the accessory ratio. The three channels of channel 2 used for communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the display 1317 are used, and the channel 3 is unused.

The serial communication circuit 13114 includes a data register 3141, a transmission data register 3142, a parity generation circuit 3143, a transmission shift register 3144, a command status register 3145, a communication setting register 3146, a transmission trigger setting level register 3147, a baud rate register 3148 and a baud rate generation circuit. 3149.

The data input from the CPU 13111 is stored in the data register 3141 and then in the transmission data register 3142. The transmission data register 3142 is composed of a FIFO having a predetermined capacity (for example, 64 bytes). The transmission data register 3142 adds the error detection code generated by the parity generation circuit 3143 for each data transmission unit to the data to be transmitted and stores it in the transmission shift register 3144.

The baud rate generation circuit 3149 generates a transmission clock signal for transmitting data at the rate set in the baud rate register 3148 from the clock signal supplied from the clock circuit 13118. Then, the transmission shift register 3144 transmits data according to the transmission clock signal.

The command status register 3145 is a register referred to for confirming the transmission status.

The communication setting register 3146 stores a command for controlling data transmission. The transmission trigger setting level register 3147 stores a threshold value for controlling the amount of data in which the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 causes an interrupt. The baud rate register 3148 stores the baud rate setting for defining the data transmission rate. The communication setting register 3146, the transmission trigger setting level register 3147, and the baud rate register 3148 are set for each of the four channels as initial settings in step S28 of FIG.

Hereinafter, these settings will be described in detail. The communication format of each channel is set in the communication setting register. Specifically, the use/non-use of the FIFO (FIFO mode, normal mode), the number of stop bits, and parity (whether parity is used, even parity or odd parity) are set. For example, in channel 0 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510 and channel 1 used for communication with the payout control board 951, FIFO mode, stop bit=1 bit, 1×××1010B meaning even parity In the channel 2 used for communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317, the FIFO mode, stop bit=1 bit, and 1×××1000B which means parity unused are set.

In the FIFO mode, data is transmitted using the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142. Since the gaming machine is in a noisy environment, it is desirable to set the parity when transmitting data at a high speed outside the main control board 1310.

Since the accessory ratio indicator 1317 is mounted on the main control board 1310, it is less affected by noise as compared with communication with another board via an electric wire for communication. Also, since the amount of data to be transmitted and received is small, the communication speed may be low, and the need to use parity is scarce. In addition, along a pattern for transmitting a signal between the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 (for example, the left and right and/or the thickness direction of the signal line provided on the surface or the inner layer of the printed board). A ground pattern is provided in a layer adjacent to the above), and the noise superimposed on the signal transmission pattern can be reduced by the shield effect of the ground pattern.

The transmission trigger setting level register 3147 defines the amount of data that the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 causes an interrupt. Specifically, when the amount of transmission data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 is smaller than the set number of bytes, a predetermined bit of the status register corresponding to each channel is set. By determining the bit of the status register, it is possible to confirm whether or not the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 has a free space, and it is possible to determine the transmission timing of the data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142.

It should be noted that the relevant bit of the status register can be used to determine whether or not there is an abnormality in the transmission FIFO. For example, even if data is not written in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 for a predetermined period, if the relevant bit of the status register is not set, there is no vacancy in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142. Error processing (for example, error notification) may be executed after it is determined that data has not been transmitted from the FIFO.

The baud rate register 3148 defines the data transmission rate. For example, the channel 0 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510 is set to 19200 bps, the channel 1 used for communication with the payout control board 951 is set to 1200 bps, and the driver circuit 13171 of the character ratio display 1317 is set. The channel 2 used for communication with is set to 1200 bps.

In this way, the transmission rate is changed depending on the data transmitted on each channel. This is because the game ball is rolling inside the gaming machine, and the electronic circuit of the gaming machine is in an environment susceptible to noise. Therefore, data is transmitted to the payout control board 951 at a low speed so that the data for controlling the payout, which is directly related to the profit given to the player, is surely transmitted. On the other hand, since the peripheral control board 1510 has a large amount of data to be transmitted and is not related to a ball being thrown, it transmits data at a high rate. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 verifies whether the received command is abnormal, and when it is determined that the command is abnormal, the peripheral control board 1510 is not operated or abnormal processing (for example, communication error notification) is executed, and the command Request re-transmission. Then, when it is determined that the retransmitted command is normal, the state of the peripheral control board 1510 is restored using the normal command. Therefore, the communication with the peripheral control board 1510 can transmit data at a high rate. Furthermore, if the communication rate with the peripheral control board 1510 is lowered, the player can recognize the delay from the winning of the starting opening to the start of the fluctuation of the symbol, which may reduce the interest.

Communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 may be performed at a high rate (19200 bps, which is a data transmission rate with the peripheral control board 1510) or a low rate (1200 bps, which is a data transmission rate with the payout control board 951). Good. Communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 is performed at a high rate (a data transmission rate of 19200 bps with the peripheral control board 1510) and a low rate (a data transmission rate of 1200 bps with the payout control board 951). Rates between and may be adopted. This is because if the data transmission rate is increased, there is a possibility that other circuits may malfunction due to switching noise of the transistors of the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317. On the other hand, even if the transmitted data is abnormal due to noise, the same data is retransmitted for each timer interrupt unless the transmitted data is updated. If the retransmitted command is normal, the content displayed on the character ratio display 1317 is displayed. This is because there is no need to set the transmission rate to an extremely low value, since is returned to the normal state.

The command status register 3145 is a register referred to for confirming the transmission state, and for example, each bit is defined as follows.
Bit 7: SnTC is a flag indicating completion of transmission, where 0 indicates that transmission is in progress and 1 indicates that transmission is complete. Bit 6: SnTDBE In normal mode (communication mode not using FIFO), it is a flag indicating transmission data empty, where 0 indicates not transferred to the transmission shift register and 1 indicates transferred to the transmission shift register. That is, it is set when the data is transferred from the transmission data register 3142 to the transmission shift register 3144 and the transmission data is not stored in the transmission data register 3142.

In the SnTFT FIFO mode, it is a flag indicating the transmission FIFO trigger level, where 0 indicates that the amount of transmission data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 is equal to or higher than the trigger level and 1 indicates that it is stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142. The amount of transmitted data is below the trigger level. That is, it is set when the amount of transmission data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 is smaller than the number of bytes set in the transmission trigger level setting register. Therefore, at the time of communication in the FIFO mode, after confirming that the bit is 1, the data is written in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142.
Bits 5-2: Unused (fixed to 0)
Bit 1: SnTCL This is a bit for clearing the transmission buffer and break code transmission, emptying the transmission data, or setting the transmission FIFO trigger level (SnTFL), and is written from the outside. For example, when the contents of the buffer are forcibly cleared, the bit is set to 1. More specifically, it is used when a command is written in the FIFO, but the transmission of the written command is stopped due to some circumstances (for example, an abnormality has occurred). Even if bit 1 is set, the data in the transmission shift register is not cleared.

With the configuration described above, the serial communication circuit 13114 is capable of asynchronous communication (asynchronous communication), but outputs a clock signal for synchronous communication (not shown). In this case, the clock signal supplied to the communication counterpart (the driver circuit 13171 of the character ratio display 1317) is output from the serial communication circuit 13114, not the clock circuit 13118. Each transmission/reception circuit of the serial communication circuit 13114 may be capable of synchronous communication by setting at least one channel, and a start/stop synchronization serial communication circuit and a synchronous communication serial communication circuit may be separately provided.

Although not shown in the figure, the serial communication circuit 13114 outputs a signal (LOAD) indicating a data fetch timing used during synchronous communication.

[3-2. Discharge control board]
Returning to FIG. 17, the description of the control configuration of the pachinko machine will be continued. Although not shown in detail, the payout control board 951 for controlling the payout of gaming balls, etc., performs a payout control unit 952 for performing various controls related to payout, a firing control by a firing solenoid 682, and a ball by the ball feed solenoid 551. A firing control unit 953 that performs feed control, an error LED display that displays the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch that releases an error displayed on the error LED display, a ball tank 802, and a tank rail. 803, a ball guiding unit 820, and a game ball in the payout device 830, a ball removing switch for discharging the game ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 and starting a ball removing operation.

[3-2a. Dispensing control section]
Although not shown in detail, the payout control unit 952 that performs various kinds of control related to payout in the payout control board 951 has a built-in micro controller including a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. Issue control MPU which is a processor, issue control I/O port as an I/O device, external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the issue control MPU is operating normally, and issue A payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the device 830, and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU also has built-in functions for preventing fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 receives various kinds of information (game information) about a game from the main control board 1310 and various kinds of commands about payout in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port, or the main control board 1310. In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch being input from the payout control I/O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535 is input, the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, and the payout. Detection signals from the detection sensor 842 and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 are input.

The detection signals from the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 of the payout device 830 are input to the payout control input circuit and input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port. It

Further, detection signals from a door frame opening switch that detects opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 and a body frame opening switch that detects opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit, It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535 of the foul cover unit 520 is input to the payout control input circuit and input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 to the payout motor 834 via the payout control I/O, and a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on an error LED display. , The command for outputting to the error LED indicator via the payout control I/O port or transmitting the command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I/O port in a serial manner. Or, the number of balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 784 via the payout control I/O port. The external terminal board 784 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1. Among the signals output from the external terminal board 784, the signals generated by the main control board 1310 are output from the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 951 from the main control board 1310. The signal generated by the main control board 1310 may be output from the external terminal board 784 without passing through the payout control board 951.

The error LED display is a segment display and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and figures. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection is abnormal" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and That there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 951 and the board), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means "out of ball" (specifically, out of ball). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, the player is informed that there is no game ball in the payout device 830), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that "the ball is a ball" (specifically, the blade). Based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, the payout vane and the game ball are engaged with each other in the payout passage of the payout device 830 and the payout vane is difficult to rotate, and the number "3" is displayed. If it is, the fact that there is a “count switch error” (specifically, there is a malfunction in the payout detection sensor 842 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842) is displayed, and the number “5” is displayed. "Retry error" (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached the preset upper limit value) is displayed, and when the number "6" is displayed, "full retry" is displayed. Is displayed (specifically, the game ball stored in the foul cover unit 520 is full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535), and the number "7" is displayed. If it is, "CR is not connected" is notified (the electric connection is cut off in any part from the payout control board 951 to the CR unit), and the number "9" is displayed. Occasionally, it is informed that it is "in stock" (specifically, the number of game balls that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number of balls).

The ball lending request signal of the game ball from the ball lending button and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button are input to the CR unit. The CR unit serially transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951, and this signal is received by the payout control I/O port and input to the payout control MPU. To be done. In addition, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of game balls lent out and outputs a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the display unit, and this signal is displayed on the display unit. It is entered and displayed.

[3-2b. Firing controller]
Although not shown in detail, the firing control unit 953 that controls the firing by the firing solenoid 682 and the ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 551 is a firing control input to which detection signals from various detection switches regarding the firing are input. A circuit, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game area 5a based on this clock signal, and this firing reference pulse And a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 551 based on the firing reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 game balls are launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and outputs it to the firing solenoid drive circuit. A ball-sending reference pulse that is a predetermined number of times the firing reference pulse is generated and output to a ball-sending solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 500, a contact detection sensor 509 that detects whether or not a palm or a finger touches the handle lever 504, and a stop that detects whether or not the launch of a game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's intention. The detection signal from the button is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. Further, when the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, they are input to the firing control input circuit as a CR connection signal and then input to the firing timing control circuit. A signal from the handle operation sensor 507 which electrically adjusts the strength of the game ball to be shot toward the game area 5a according to the rotational position of the handle lever 504 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

This launch solenoid drive circuit inputs a drive current for launching a game ball toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotation position of the handle lever 504, based on a signal from the handle operation sensor 507, as a launch reference pulse. When triggered, the output is output to the firing solenoid 682. On the other hand, the ball feed solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 551 triggered by the input of the ball feed reference pulse, so that the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 are balled. One ball is received in the feed unit 540, and when the input of the ball feed reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped to send the accepted game ball to the ball launcher 680 side. Thus, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit to the firing solenoid 682 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 551 is controlled to be constant. ing.

The power supply board that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 951 includes a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various kinds of information in the RAM of the payout control board 951 in the power-off processing even when the power is cut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 951 when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on.

[3-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 17, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control section 1511 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and a main liquid crystal display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control section 1511. , And a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls drawing of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244.

[3-3a. Peripheral controller]
Although not shown in detail, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the effect control in the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, the peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and the high-quality performance And a sound ROM in which sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC is stored.

The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. built-in, and when various commands are received from the main control board 1310, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the lamp drive board serial I/O port to the production drive board 3043, or the game board. The game board side drive data for outputting the drive signal to the drive motor for operating the various effect units provided in 5 is transmitted from the game board decoration drive board serial I/O port to the effect drive board 3043, or the door. Door-side drive data for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as the vibration device 242 and the door lower right drive motor 272 provided in the frame 3, and a color provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3. Door-side drive emission data composed of a door-side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to an LED or the like is transmitted from the frame decoration drive board serial I/O port to the door frame 3 side. , Or control data (display command) indicating a screen to be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 from the liquid crystal control unit serial I/O port to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. In addition, the control signal (sound command) for extracting the sound information from the sound ROM is output to the sound source IC.

Detection signals from various position detection sensors for detecting the positions of various effect units provided on the game board 5 are input to the peripheral control MPU via the effect drive board 3043 attached to the rear surface of the back box. .. Further, the detection signals from the touch panel 246 and the production button pressing sensor 258 of the production operation unit 220 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

Further, the peripheral control MPU receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is operating normally from the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, and based on this operation signal, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 Watching for activity.

The sound source IC extracts the sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and uses the speaker 921 provided in the door frame 3, the main body frame 4, etc. Control is performed so that sound effects and the like flow. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box 1520 in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In the present embodiment, acoustic signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, 2.1ch surround signal, or 2ch surround signal) as sound information are output to the plurality of speakers on the door frame 3 side and the bass speaker 921 of the main body frame 4. By sending a 4.1 ch surround signal, etc., it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than before.

In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built in the peripheral control MPU, the peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown). Using WDT together, it diagnoses whether its own system is out of control.

The display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is performed by the serial input/output port, and in the present embodiment, the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km ( k) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, a plurality of initial data, door frame side lighting blink command, game board side lighting blink command, movable body drive command, and display command, which are output from the peripheral control MPU to the production drive board 3043 attached to the rear surface of the back box, The serial input/output port is set to 250 kbps as the bit rate in this embodiment.

This production drive board 3043 outputs a lighting signal or a flashing signal based on the received door frame side lighting blink command to the LED of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, or receives the game board side lighting blink command. A lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the above is output to the LED of each decorative board provided in the game board 5.

In addition, the production drive board 3043 sends a drive signal based on the received drive command to the vibration device 242 and the door lower right drive motor 272 provided in the door frame 3, each drive motor provided in the game board 5, and the like. Or output to.

[3-3b. Various control processing of peripheral control unit]
First, the peripheral controller power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control MPU (not shown) of the peripheral controller 1511 shown in FIG. 17 performs peripheral controller power-on processing as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the effect control program performs an initial setting process under the control of the peripheral control MPU (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the production control program performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU itself, a hot start/cold start determination process, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU first performs a process of initializing itself, but the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU is initialized in an extremely short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU enters a state in which the interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control command reception interrupt process described later, a command or pachinko related to control of game effect output from the main control board 1310. It becomes a state in which various commands such as commands relating to the state of the machine 1 can be received.

Following step S1000, the effect control program performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition processing, the calendar information for specifying the date and the time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC control unit, and the peripheral control RAM stores the calendar information storage unit as the current calendar information. And the current time information in the time information storage unit.

Following step S1002, the effect control program sets the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady process, which will be described later. Is set to 0 when not executed. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a peripheral control unit V blank signal which will be described later and is executed in response to the input of the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU can be received. The value 1 is set in the interrupt processing. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 0 to initialize the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG once.

Following step S1006, the effect control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (value 0), the process returns to step S1008 and it is repeatedly determined whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not. By repeating such a determination, a standby state is entered until the peripheral control unit steady process is executed.

When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, first, the steady process in-process flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 (step S1009). The steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

Subsequent to step S1009, the effect control program performs a 1 ms interrupt timer starting process (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is activated, and this 1 ms interrupt timer is activated The value 1 is set to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN to count the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. The 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the effect control program performs a lamp data output process (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the effect control program performs the DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. Here, the serial I/O port continuous transmission for the lamp drive board is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller of the peripheral control MPU.

Following step S1012, the effect control program performs effect operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this effect operation unit monitoring process, in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the operation button 220C is operated based on the detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 220. Based on the acquired various information, whether or not the operation button 220C is operated is monitored, and whether the operation state of the operation button 220C is reflected in the game effect is appropriately determined.

Following step S1014, the effect control program performs a display data output process (step S1016). In this display data output process, one screen (one frame) of drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM of the sound source built-in VDP in the display data creation process to be described later is displayed on the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side by the sound source built-in VDP. Output to the decorative substrate 233. As a result, various screens are drawn on the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side decorative board 233.

Following step S1016, the effect control program performs a sound data output process (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the effect control program outputs to the speaker 921 sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP in the sound data creation processing to be described later, and informs in addition to the music and sound effects. Sound data of a sound or a notification sound is output to the speaker 921.

Following step S1018, the effect control program performs a scheduler update process (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the effect control program updates various schedule data set in the peripheral control RAM. For example, in the scheduler update process, in order to instruct which number of screen data from the first screen data to be output to the sound source built-in VDP among the time-sequentially arranged screen data forming the screen generation schedule data, Update the pointer.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, in order to instruct which light emission data from the first light emission data among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data to be the light emission mode of each LED, , Update the pointer.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, the first sound of the sound command data instructing the sound data of music, sound effects, etc. The pointer is updated to instruct which sound command data to output to the sound source built-in VDP from the command data.

Further, in the scheduler update process, among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motors and the solenoids arranged in time series which constitute the electric drive source schedule data, the number of the drive data from the head drive data to the output target is set. Update the pointer to indicate what to do.

Following step S1020, the effect control program performs received command analysis processing (step S1022). In this received command analysis processing, the effect control program is information transmitted from the game board side decorative board 3053 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310, and the peripheral control command reception interrupt processing (command Receiving means) analyzes various commands received (command analyzing means).

Following step S1022, the effect control program performs a warning process (step S1024). In this warning process, when the command analyzed by the received command analysis process in step S1022 as described above includes various commands classified into predetermined notification displays, the production control program further notifies various abnormalities. The peripheral control ROM of the peripheral control unit 1511 stores the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electric drive source schedule data, etc., which are set in the abnormal display mode for execution. Alternatively, it is extracted from the peripheral control RAM and set in the peripheral control RAM. In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in order from the highest priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the other abnormality notifications are automatically changed. It is supposed to do. This allows multiple abnormalities to be monitored at the same time without losing the information that one abnormality has occurred after another abnormality has occurred and before the abnormality has been resolved. You can

Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has passed since the power was turned on, the command analyzed by the effect control program in the above-described received command analysis process (step S1022) is various commands classified into status display, for example, In the case of an error release navigation command (second error release command), by controlling in a mode different from the normal effect mode associated with the effect operation, for example, the game board side decorative board 3053 (effect device), the door frame side A decorative substrate 233 (rendering device) and a lamp (rendering device) are used to visually warn the outside, and a speaker is used to auditorily warn the outside (error notifying means). In this way, when a malicious player tries to input an error release navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch of the payout control board 951 despite the game state, Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to issue a warning to the outside, fraudulent acts on the main control board 1310 that may affect the progress of the game can be suppressed.

Next, following step S1024 described above, the effect control program performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the effect control program is stored in the calendar information and time information storage unit stored in the calendar information storage unit, which is acquired in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 and set in the peripheral control RAM. Update the time information. By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute, second, which is the time information stored in the time information storage unit, is updated, and the year, month, which is the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit based on the updated time information. The day is updated.

Following step S1026, the effect control program performs lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the pointer is instructed by the pointer in the emission control program, in which the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the emission data is arranged in time series constituting the emission mode generation schedule data. Based on the light emission data, the peripheral control of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a flashing signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided in the game board 5 is performed. Created by extracting from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the unit 1511 and setting in the peripheral control RAM, and lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided in the door frame 3 Door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is created by extracting it from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 and setting it in the peripheral control RAM.

Following step S1028, the effect control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the screen data arranged in time series that constitutes the screen generation schedule data, the screen data indicated by the pointer. From the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 and outputs it to the sound source built-in VDP. When the screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU, the sound source built-in VDP extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data to create sprite data and creates a game board side decorative board 3053. Also, drawing data for one screen (for one frame) to be displayed on the door frame side decorative substrate 233 is generated in the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the effect control program performs a sound data creation process (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer indicates the sound command data arranged in time series that constitutes the sound generation schedule data. The sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 and output to the sound source built-in VDP. When the sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU, the sound source built-in VDP extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM and controls the built-in sound source to generate a sound command. Sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated according to the track number defined in the data, and the output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

Following step S1032, the effect control program performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup process, the production control program copies the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU and the peripheral control RAM externally attached to the backup first area and the backup second area, respectively, and backs them up. The contents stored in the peripheral control MPU and the external peripheral control SRAM are copied and backed up in the backup first area and the backup second area, respectively.

Following step S1034, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e so that the peripheral control MPU is not reset.

Subsequent to Step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 to the in-steady-state processing flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral control unit regular processing (Step S1038), returns to Step S1006 again, and returns to the V blank signal detection flag VB. -FLG is set to the value 0 for initialization, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process described later. That is, in step S1008, the process waits until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1, and when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1, steps S1009 to step S1009 to step S1009. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. In this way, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has the value 1, the processes of steps S1009 to S1038 are performed. The processing of steps S1009 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing".

This peripheral control unit steady process starts with the production control program first setting the value 1 to the steady process in-process flag SP-FLG, assuming that the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed in step S1009, and 1 ms in step S1010. .., and then step S1036. Finally, in step S1038, the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed, and the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG is set to 0. Set to complete. The peripheral controller steady processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed in response to the input of the V blank signal from the sound source built-in VDP, which indicates that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU can be accepted. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. In the present embodiment, since the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side decorative board 233 is set to about 30 fps per second as described above, the V blank signal. The interval at which is input is about 33.3 ms (=1000 ms÷30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

Next, the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 61 is received is input from the sound source built-in VDP of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed at the timing will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether or not the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG has a value of 0 as shown in FIG. S1045). As described above, the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control steady processing of steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control power-on processing of FIG. The value is set to 0 when the processing is completed.

When the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, this routine is ended as it is. On the other hand, when the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control steady processing is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 (step S1050). This routine ends. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether to execute the peripheral control unit steady process, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, and the peripheral control. The value is set to 0 when the partial steady process is not executed.

Next, the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral controller steady process of the peripheral controller power-on process of FIG. 60 will be described. .. When the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times (step S44), as shown in FIG. S1100). As described above, this 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by this routine when the 1ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral controller steady process of the peripheral controller power-on process of FIG. This is a counter that counts the number of times a certain peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. In the present embodiment, since the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side decorative board 233 is set to about 30 fps per second as described above, the V blank signal. The interval at which is input is about 33.3 ms (=1000 ms÷30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is performed. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed 32 times before the execution of. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the second,..., And the 32 1 ms timer interrupts sequentially. Will occur.

In step S1100, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than 33 times, that is, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine is finished as it is. If the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process has the peripheral control unit V as the priority order of the interrupt processing. Although set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal occurrence. In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the V blank signal is generated, the 1 ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, and then the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is newly started by the first occurrence of the 1 ms timer interrupt. ing.

On the other hand, if the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral controller steady process of the peripheral controller power-on process of FIG. This means that the number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor/solenoid drive processing, the pointer is selected from the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order which form the electric drive source schedule data set in the peripheral control MPU and the peripheral control RAM. Drives electric drive sources such as various motors and solenoids according to the drive data instructed by, updates the pointer to the next drive data specified in time series, and executes the motor and solenoid drive processing every time. Update the pointer.

Following step S1104, movable body information acquisition processing is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, original position history information) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 are input. , Movable position history information, etc.) is created and set in the peripheral control RAM. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the peripheral control RAM, it is possible to acquire the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5.

Following step S1106, effect operation unit information acquisition processing is performed (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition processing, it is determined whether or not the detection signals from the various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 220 are input, so that history information of detection signals from the various detection switches (for example, operation The operation history information of the button 220C, etc.) is created and set in the peripheral control RAM. Whether or not the operation button 220C is operated can be obtained from the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the peripheral control RAM.

Following step S1108, drawing state information acquisition processing is performed (step S1110). In this drawing state information acquisition processing, history information of the LOCKN signal output from the door frame side effect receiver IC of the door frame side decorative substrate 233 is created and set in the peripheral control RAM. As described above, the LOCKN signal indicates that the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 of the door frame side decoration board 233 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. When judged, it is a signal that is output to inform that effect.

After step S1110, a backup process is performed (step S1112), and this routine ends. In this backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control RAM are copied and backed up in the backup first area and the backup second area, respectively, and the contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM are backed up. 1 area and backup 2nd area are copied and backed up respectively.

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effects of step S1104 to step S1108 described above as the progress of effects are executed within the period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady process in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 60, various processes related to the effect of step S1012 to step S1032 described above as the progress of the effect are executed within a period of about 33.3 ms. doing. In the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is started. Since this routine is terminated as it is, even if the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal occurrence, the peripheral control unit by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt will occur. After the start of the 1ms timer interrupt process is forcibly canceled, the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the occurrence of the V blank signal, and then the peripheral control is newly generated by the 1ms timer interrupt process. The 1ms timer interrupt process is started. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady process and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, which is the timer interrupt control, is maintained. Therefore, the progress state of the effect can be surely matched.

Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side decorative board 233, and the peripheral control MPU and the sound source built-in VDP are mounted. Even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change to some extent. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed. In order to execute the section V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt, It is possible to absorb a time lag caused by a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[3-4. LCD display controller]
Next, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 for controlling the drawing of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 in the peripheral control board 1510, although not shown in detail, is used as a microprocessor. A display control MPU, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, a VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) that controls the display of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and a main liquid crystal display. An image ROM that stores various data of screens displayed on the display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and an image RAM to which various data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied. And are equipped with.

This display control MPU has a built-in parallel I/O port, serial I/O port, etc., and controls VDP based on the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to display the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Drawing control of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is performed. When the display control MPU is operating normally, it outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU receives an in-execution signal from the VDP and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM includes various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, as well as control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511. And a plurality of non-resident area transfer schedule data corresponding to the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command). The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in time series, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. Has been done. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging the non-resident area transfer data, which defines the order when various data stored in the image ROM is transferred to the non-resident area of the image RAM, in time series. As the non-resident area transfer data, the screen data drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 or the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 according to the progress of the schedule data is stored in advance in various non-resident areas of the image RAM from the image ROM. The order of data transfer is specified.

The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the display control ROM one by one from the top screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM on the basis of the input screen data to extract the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate. Drawing data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 244 is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. Further, when the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, or the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs a running signal to that effect to the display control MPU. To do. A line buffer system is adopted for VDP. The "line buffer method" means that the drawing data for one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is held in the line buffer, and the line buffer stores the drawing data. This is a method of outputting the held drawing data for one line to the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244.

The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM becomes large, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, and the main liquid crystal display device cannot be ignored. This affects the speed of drawing on the display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is basic data that is data before expanding the sprite into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Here, the "sprite" will be described. The "sprite" is an image displayed as a unit on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. For example, when various characters (characters) are displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, or the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the data for drawing each person is called “sprite”. Accordingly, when displaying a plurality of persons on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, or the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to the person, the houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are set in a vertical position (hereinafter, referred to as "order of sprite superposition") when the positions arranged on the screen or when the sprites overlap with each other, and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the sub liquid crystal display device are set. 3114 or the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244.

It should be noted that the sprite is configured by laminating a plurality of rectangular areas each having 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". In the case of a small sprite, one sprite character can be used for expression, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged horizontally 2 x vertically 3 can be used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, a larger number of sprite characters can be used for expression. Thus, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 are main scans that sequentially set the display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixel from left to right when viewed from the front. And sub-scanning in which main scanning is repeated in a direction intersecting the one direction. When the drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is input to the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 performs main scanning, When the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 are viewed from the front, the pixels are sequentially output from left to right for one line of pixels. Then, when the output for one line is completed, the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 shift to the line immediately below as sub-scanning, and similarly, drawing data for the next line is input. Then, the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 are sequentially scanned one line from the left to the right as main scanning based on the drawing data for the next line. Output to each minute pixel.

[4. Game contents]
Next, the game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 10, FIG. 16 and FIG. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3, whereby the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. Is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5, and the game with the game ball is started. The game ball hit to the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the hitting strength. Note that the driving strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle lever 504, and can be driven more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction, and a maximum of 100 game balls per minute in a row, That is, it is possible to hit a game ball at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game balls serve as obstacle nails. By abutting, the flow velocity of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a wind turbine (not shown) that rotates by abutting the game ball is provided at an appropriate position.

When the game ball that has been driven into the upper part of the center character 2500 enters the left side in front view from the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center character 2500, a plurality of obstacle nails not shown. While coming into contact with, the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 flows down. Then, when the game ball flowing down the area on the left side of the center character 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 opening on the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center character 2500, the center character object passes through the warp passage 2521. It is supplied to the stage 2530 from the warp outlet 2522 opened in the frame of 2500 through the guide path 2523.

The game ball supplied from the warp exit 2522 to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530 and moves back and forth, and the central guiding portion 2531 at the center in the left-right direction or the side guiding portions 2532 on the left and right thereof. Is released backward from either of the. When the game ball is released into the game area 5a from the central guiding portion 2531 of the stage 2530, the central guiding portion 2531 is located immediately above the first starting port 2002, so the game released from the central guiding portion 2531. The sphere has a high probability of being received in the first starting opening 2002. When the game balls are received in the first starting opening 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. ..

When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is discharged from the side guiding portion 2532 into the game area 5a, it flows down toward the starting opening unit 2100. The game ball released from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received in the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, the first big winning opening 2005 in the open state, or the like.

By the way, when the game ball flowing down to the left side of the center character 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, the shelf 2302 of the upper side unit 2300 brings it to the center in the left-right direction, and the general winning opening of the lower side unit 2200. There is a possibility of being accepted in 2001, the first starting port 2002, or the like. When the game balls are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. ..

On the other hand, in the game area 5a, the game ball that has been driven into the upper part of the center character 2500 enters the right side of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center character 2500 that is higher than the highest part. ), and enters into the upper right distribution space 2541 of the right hitting game area 2540. Although illustration is omitted, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in the upper right circulation space 2541, and the game balls come into contact with the obstacle nails and flow while changing the downward direction in various ways. In the upper right distribution space 3541, a gate portion 2003 is provided at an upper portion, a general winning opening 2001 and a second starting opening 2004 normally closed by a second starting opening door member 2549 are provided.

The game ball flowing down in the upper right distribution space 2541 enters the lower right distribution space 2543 through the downstream right distribution passage 2542. The game ball that has entered the lower right distribution space 2543 has the second upper prize hole 2006a and the second lower prize hole 2006b that are lined up on the left and right as the second prize hole 2006. The upper surface of the door member 2552 and the second lower prize opening door member 2555 passes through the second attacker passage 2543a forming the bottom surface, and is lowered into the game area 5a from the left end of the discharge plate portion 2559 on the left side in front view. Is released. The downstream end of the second attacker passage 2543a (discharging plate portion 2559) is opened so that the game ball goes to the first special winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100, and when the first special winning opening 2005 is open. When the game ball is released from the second attacker passage 2543a into the game area 5a, the game ball is received at the first special winning opening 2005 with a high probability.

The game balls that circulate in the right flow passage 2542 and the lower right circulation space 2543 flow down while the increase in the circulation speed is suppressed by the plurality of deceleration ribs 2546. In rare cases, in the lower right circulation space 2543, the discharge passage 2543b that branches near the upstream end of the second attacker passage 2543a may enter, and the game ball that has entered the discharge passage 2543b is the game area 5a. It is discharged to the outside of the game board 5 through the second outlet 2543c without being returned inside.

When a game ball that hits right and enters the upper right distribution space 2541 passes through the gate unit 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2547, an ordinary random number updated in a predetermined numerical range in the main control board 1310. One ordinary random number is obtained from among the above, and the obtained ordinary random number is collated with a predetermined ordinary hit determination table to perform ordinary lottery. When the result of this normal lottery is “normal hit” when the time saving control described later is not executed, the second starting opening door member 2549 rotates only once in the counterclockwise direction in front view and the second starting opening. 2004 is opened, it is possible to accept the game ball into the second starting port 2004 for a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this example). On the other hand, when the time saving control is being executed, the ordinary lottery is performed to select whether the "normal win" is "first normal win", "second normal win", or "third normal win". When the ordinary lottery result of the ordinary lottery is “first ordinary hit”, “second ordinary hit”, or “third ordinary hit” when the time saving control is executed, the second starting door member 2549 is Front view After turning in the counterclockwise direction to open the second starting port 2004, the game ball can be received in the second starting port 2004 for a predetermined period, and then viewed from the front. The opening/closing control is performed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 5 to prevent the game ball from being received in the second starting port 2004 by turning the counterclockwise direction to close the second starting port 2004). Repeat) times. In addition, when the result of the normal lottery of the normal lottery is “first normal hit”, the second starting opening 2004 is set to a state in which the game balls can be accepted, and “0.3 seconds” is set as each period , "0.28 seconds", "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "0.3 seconds", when the ordinary lottery result of the ordinary lottery is "second ordinary winning" "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "1.1 seconds", "0.28 seconds" as the period of each of the five times when the second starting opening 2004 is set in a state in which the game ball can be received. , "0.3 seconds", and when the ordinary lottery result of the ordinary lottery is "third ordinary hit", the second starting opening 2004 is set to a state in which the game ball can be accepted. The period is set to "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "1.1 seconds", and "second ordinary hit" and "third ordinary" The hit is a hit that is more advantageous to the player than the "first ordinary hit" (it is easy to accept the game ball into the second starting opening 2004). When the game balls are received in the second starting opening 2004, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper plate 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. It

In the present embodiment, in the variable display of the normal symbol performed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2003, the normal symbol is changed after the variable symbol of the normal symbol is started to be displayed. A certain amount of time is set until the stop display is made (normal suggestion of a lottery result) (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as normal variation time). At the second starting port 2004, the second starting port door member 2549 rotates to be in the open state after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed. It should be noted that during execution of time saving control, which will be described later, control is performed such that the normal fluctuation time is shortened compared to normal (a state in which time saving control is not executed). Further, the opening time for rotating the second starting opening door member 2549 to open the second starting opening 2004 may be changed according to the game state, for example, the time saving control is executed. When there is no time saving control, the opening time of the second starting port 2004 may be changed to a longer time than when the time saving control is executed.

In addition, a new game ball is displayed on the gate unit until the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 and the normal symbol that is variably displayed on the normal symbol display is stopped (until the result of the normal lottery is suggested). When passing through 2003, it is not possible to newly start the variable display of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display device, so the variable display start of the ordinary symbol is ended until the variable display of the previous ordinary symbol ends (the ordinary lottery result I try to put it on hold until the suggestion ends. Specifically, the normal random number acquired by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball passing through the gate unit 2003 by the gate sensor 2547 is stored, and the variable display of the normal symbol can be started. Until the start of variable display of normal symbols is suspended. It should be noted that the number of ordinary random numbers that can be stored in the main control board 1310 has an upper limit of up to four, and if the number is more than that, even if a game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, it is discarded without being retained. .. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball received in the first starting opening 2002 is detected by the first starting opening sensor 2104, the main control board 1310 is updated within a predetermined numerical range. An advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit") is obtained by obtaining one first special random number from the one special random number and collating the obtained first special random number with a predetermined jackpot determination table. , "Small hit", etc.) is drawn. Then, based on the first special lottery result selected by lottery, the first special lottery result is obtained after the eight LEDs of the first special symbol display are controlled to blink for a predetermined fluctuation time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds). The first special lottery result is suggested to the player by displaying in a lighting mode according to (displaying a stop symbol corresponding to the first special lottery result after the first special symbol is variably displayed). In addition, in the first special lottery result which is drawn by the game balls being received in the first starting opening 2002, "outfall", "small hit", "2R big hit", "8R big hit", "10R big hit" Yes, it is determined which one of them by collating the obtained first special random number with the jackpot determination table, and further after the jackpot game is normal (low probability state: with a probability of about 1/395 in this example). Probability improvement control (high-probability state (also referred to as probability variation state): in this example, winning the big jackpot with a probability of about 1/44) that improves the probability of winning the jackpot (winning probability) Whether or not to execute (whether or not it is a probability variation big hit) and whether or not to execute time saving control (time saving state) that shortens the fluctuation time more than usual when at least the first special lottery result is off (whether it is a time saving big hit or not) Or) and a period for executing the time saving control (the number of times saving: special symbols (the number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol have changed)) are also determined. The winning probability of "small hit" is always constant regardless of the gaming state (about 1/300 in this example).

In addition, when the game ball received in the second starting port 2004 is detected by the second starting port sensor 2551, one of the second special random numbers updated in the predetermined numerical range in the main control board 1310. By obtaining the second special random number of, and by collating the obtained second special random number with a predetermined jackpot determination table, an advantageous game state advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit", "small hit", etc. The second special lottery result is generated. Then, based on the selected second special lottery result, the eight LEDs of the second special symbol display are controlled to blink for a predetermined fluctuation time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds), and then the second special lottery result. The second special lottery result is suggested to the player by displaying in a lighting mode corresponding to (displaying a stop symbol corresponding to the second special lottery result after the second special symbol is variably displayed). In addition, in the second special lottery result which is drawn by the game balls being received in the second starting opening 2004, "outfall", "2R jackpot", "4R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "6R jackpot", "6R jackpot", There are “7R jackpot”, “8R jackpot”, and “16R jackpot”, and it is determined which one of them by collating the obtained second special random number with the jackpot determination table, and further, after the jackpot game, the normal ( Low-probability state: In this example, the probability of winning the jackpot (winning probability) is higher than the probability of winning the jackpot with a probability of about 1/395). With a probability of about 1/44 to win the big hit) (whether it is a probability big hit or not) and at least the second special lottery result is a time saving control that shortens the fluctuation time more than usual when the result is off. Whether or not (time saving state) is executed (whether or not it is a time saving big hit) and the period for executing time saving control (time saving number: special symbol (number of fluctuations of first special striking symbol and second special symbol)), and also determine It is supposed to be done.

In the case where the special lottery results (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by receiving the game balls into the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 are the special lottery results that cause the advantageous gaming state. , After the lapse of a predetermined fluctuation time, display 8 LEDs of the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) in a lighting mode according to the special lottery result, and then the first big winning opening Any of 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 becomes a state in which a game ball can be received in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. When a game ball is received in the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 while the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 is open, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 A predetermined number from the payout device 830 (for example, 11 when the game balls are received in the first big winning opening 2005, or 15 when the game balls are received in the second big winning opening 2006). The game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, by allowing the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 to receive the game balls when the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 can receive the game balls, many games can be played. The ball can be paid out and the player can be entertained.

When the special lottery result is "small hit" or "2R big hit", the first special winning opening 2005 plays the game ball for a predetermined short time (for example, 0.2 seconds to 0.6 seconds). The open/close pattern of closing after receiving the open state is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, if the special lottery result is "4R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "6R jackpot", "7R jackpot", "8R jackpot", "10R jackpot", "16R jackpot", "16R jackpot" A predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006 is in an open state in which a game ball can be received, or the first special winning opening 2005 is predetermined. When either one of the number (for example, 7) of game balls is accepted or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is accepted into the second special winning opening 2006, the condition is satisfied. The opening/closing pattern (a single opening/closing pattern is referred to as one round) that brings the game ball into an unacceptable closed state is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, in the case of "4R jackpot", 4 rounds, in the case of "5R jackpot", 5 rounds, in the case of "16R jackpot", 16 rounds are repeated, and an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is generated. Further, when the special lottery result is "small hit" or "2R big hit", the opening/closing pattern (first big winning opening 2005 for a predetermined short time (for example, 0.2 seconds to 0.6 seconds)) In the meantime, it is difficult to practically enter the game ball into the first special winning opening 2005 in the opening/closing pattern in which the game ball is closed after being opened so that it can be received. On the other hand, the opening/closing pattern executed when the special lottery result is "4R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "6R jackpot", "7R jackpot", "8R jackpot", "10R jackpot", "16R jackpot" (A predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 is in an open state in which a game ball can be received, or the first big winning opening 2005. Either a predetermined number (for example, 7) of game balls is received or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is received in the second special winning opening 2006. If the above condition is satisfied, it is easy to enter the game ball into the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 in an open/close pattern in which the game ball is in an unacceptable closed state. If the special lottery results are "4R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "6R jackpot", "7R jackpot", "8R jackpot", "10R jackpot", "16R jackpot", the above first jackpot A predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the mouth 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006 is in the open state in which the game balls can be received, or the first special winning opening 2005 is predetermined. Either condition that the number of game balls (for example, 7) is accepted or a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) is accepted in the second special winning opening 2006 is satisfied. Then, the number of rounds in which the opening/closing pattern that puts the game balls into the unacceptable closed state is executed may be used as the actual special lottery result, and the number determined in advance in the first special winning opening 2005 as the special lottery result (for example, , 7) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are accepted into the second special winning opening 2006, the game ball is satisfied. Opening and closing patterns that make them into an unacceptable closed state and opening and closing patterns that are executed when the special lottery result is "small hit" or "2R big hit" (first big winning opening 2005 is a predetermined short time (for example, 0.2 seconds). (Between 0.6 seconds) and an opening/closing pattern in which the game ball is closed after it is in an open state in which the game ball can be received). For example, as a result of the special lottery, "8R jackpot to be substantially 4R" is provided, and a predetermined number (for example, 7) of game balls are received in the first big winning hole 2005, or the second big winning hole is received. If a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are accepted in 2006, or any one of the conditions is satisfied, after repeating an opening/closing pattern in which the game ball is in an unacceptable closed state four times, When the special lottery result is “small hit” or “2R big hit”, the opening/closing pattern (when the first special winning opening 2005 is for a predetermined short time (for example, 0.2 seconds to 0.6 seconds)), You may make it repeat 4 times the opening/closing pattern which closes after opening the game ball which can be received.

By the way, in the present embodiment, the second special winning opening 2006 is composed of the second upper special winning opening 2006a and the second lower special winning opening 2006b arranged side by side, and the second big winning opening 2006 is used. In the case of "big hit", for example, in the first round (1st R), the second upper special winning opening 2006a is opened to allow the game ball to be accepted, and the game ball is closed by satisfying the condition of being unacceptable, and then allowed to be accepted next. Until (during the interval), the second round special winning opening 2006b is opened to start the next round (2R) in which the game balls can be received, and when the second lower special winning opening 2006b becomes unacceptable, Since the interval period has elapsed in the meantime, the second upper special winning opening 2006a is opened again so that the game ball can be accepted. Then, the second upper special winning opening 2006a and the second lower special winning opening 2006b are alternately opened and closed until a predetermined number of rounds are exhausted. As a result, in the second attacker passage 2543a, during the "big hit", one of the second upper special winning opening 2006a and the second lower special winning opening 2006b is in a state in which the game ball can be received, so this state When you hit the right to distribute the game ball in the second attacker passage 2543a, the game ball will be always accepted in the second prize hole 2006, and the player will be able to entertain the player by not missing the game ball. You can

Further, in the present embodiment, in some of the above-mentioned various types of big hits, it is different whether or not to execute the time saving control after the big hit game is over, depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit. For example, when the first special lottery result in the non-time saving state (the state where the time saving control is not executed) is the 8R normal big hit in which the probability improvement control is not executed after the big hit game, the time saving control is not executed after the big hit game. On the other hand, when the first special lottery result is the 8R normal big hit in the time saving state (when the time saving control is being executed), the time saving control is executed after the big hit game. If the second special lottery result in the non-time saving state (the state where the time saving control is not executed) is the 2R normal big hit in which the probability improvement control is not executed after the big hit game, the time saving control is not executed after the big hit game. On the other hand, when the second special lottery result is the 2R normal big hit in the time saving state (when the time saving control is being executed), the time saving control is executed after the big hit game. Also, in the low probability non-time saving state (state in which neither probability improving control nor time saving control is executed: also called normal state), the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result execute probability improving control after the big hit game. If it is a 2R certainty variation big hit, the time saving control is not executed after the big hit game. On the other hand, in the state where the probability improvement control is being executed or the time saving control is being executed, that is, in the state other than the normal state, the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result execute the probability improvement control after the big hit game. When it is a big hit, the time saving control is executed after the big hit game.

In the present embodiment, by the variation display of the first special symbol executed by the first special symbol display by receiving the game ball into the first starting opening 2002, and by receiving the game ball into the second starting opening 2004, The variable display of the second special symbol executed by the two special symbol display devices is not executed at the same time, and only one of them is executed. Therefore, until the stop display of the first special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol display by receiving the game ball into the first starting opening 2002 (until the result of the first special lottery is suggested) and (2) Until the stop display of the second special symbol that is variably displayed on the second special symbol display due to the acceptance of the game ball into the starting port 2004 (until the result of the second special lottery is suggested), the first start When a new game ball is received in the mouth 2002 or the second starting mouth 2004, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is newly started on the first special symbol display device or the second special symbol display device. Because it is not possible, the variable display start of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started until the variable display of the previous special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) ends (first special lottery). It is put on hold until the result and the suggestion of the second special lottery result are completed. Specifically, the first special random number acquired by the main control board 1310 based on the fact that the first starting opening sensor 2104 has detected the game ball received in the first starting opening 2002, and the second starting opening sensor 2551. By the second special random number acquired by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball received in the second starting port 2004, and stored, special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) The variable display start of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is suspended until the variable display of the symbol) can be started. In addition, the number of the first special random number and the second special random number that can be stored in the main control board 1310 has an upper limit of up to four, and for more than that, the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 have a game. Even if the ball is accepted, it is discarded without holding it. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side due to the accumulation of reservations. Further, the first special random number and the second special random number stored in the main control board 1310 are designed to preferentially digest the second special random number. That is, if the second special random number is stored and the variable display start of the second special symbol is suspended regardless of the timing of accepting the game ball into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the first special The variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed over the symbol.

The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 (first special symbol display device, second special symbol display device) and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 may also be used). In the function display unit 1400, the main control board 1310 directly controls the suggestion of the special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 is that the above-mentioned eight LEDs constituting the special symbol display device (first special symbol display device, second special symbol display device) are repeatedly turned on and off for a predetermined time. It blinks and then stops in a predetermined lighting mode, and the special lottery result is suggested by the combination of the LEDs that are lit at this stop.

On the other hand, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, based on a control signal (variation pattern command, determination result notification command, etc.) from the main control board 1310, it is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, and the special lottery result of the special lottery result is displayed by the effect image. Suggestions are made. Specifically, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, a series of a series of decorative symbol patterns composed of a plurality of different symbols is displayed in a plurality of columns (for example, three columns of a left decorative symbol, a middle decorative symbol, and a right decorative symbol). The variable display of the decorative pattern row is started, and after that, it is sequentially stopped and displayed (in this example, the left decorative pattern → the right decorative pattern → the middle decorative pattern is stopped and displayed), and finally all the decorative pattern rows are stopped. When displayed, the result of lottery of the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) extracted by the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed is suggested to the player side. In other words, a plurality of decorative symbol rows fluctuate according to the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) based on the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) acquired when the start winning occurs. After being displayed, the effect image that is stopped and displayed so as to suggest the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) is displayed. The decorative symbols displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 are better than the first special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display and the second special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display. Since it is large and easy to see, the player generally pays attention to the decorative pattern displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

In addition, the time (LED blinking time (fluctuation time)) that suggests the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 and the time that suggests the special lottery result on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates and the final image is confirmed). (Time until is displayed) is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a shorter time.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the decoration body of the center accessory 2500 and the left side of the back are displayed in accordance with the lottery special lottery result. A middle decoration unit 3050, a back lower back movable effect unit 3100, a back upper left movable effect unit 3200, a back left movable effect unit 3300, a back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, a back lower front movable effect unit 3500, etc. are appropriately used. It is possible to perform a light emission effect, a movable effect, a display effect, and the like, and it is possible to entertain the player with various kinds of effects, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

[5. Various control processing of main control board]
Next, the processing executed by the main control board 1310 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. Specifically, the system/user reset process executed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, and the timer interrupt process executed in a predetermined cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) by the timer activated by the system/user reset process. explain.

[5-1. Initialization process]
21 and 22 are flowcharts showing the procedure of the initialization processing of the main control board in the embodiment of the present invention.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 executes the main control program to perform initialization processing. When the initialization process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets the protect of the RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 to write-enabled to make the RAM 1312 writable (step S10). Specifically, "00H" indicating write permission is output to the RAM protect register.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 activates the built-in watchdog timer (step S12). Specifically, first, "03H" indicating the mode setting is written in the watchdog timer control register, and further "03H" indicating the activation of the watchdog timer is written. Further, the watchdog timer is cleared and reset (step S14).

Then, it is determined whether a predetermined wait time has elapsed (step S16). Since the voltage does not rise immediately after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage, if the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage during the time from when the power is turned on to the predetermined voltage, the power failure monitoring circuit The power failure warning signal is input from. In the wait process, a predetermined monitor wait value is set, and the watchdog timer is activated, and the process waits for a predetermined time (for example, 200 milliseconds).

If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, the time required to activate the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.) has elapsed, so it is determined whether the RAM clear switch has been operated (step S18). .. When the RAM clear switch is operated, the data in the area other than the work area for calculating the character ratio (area for character ratio calculation 13128) out of the data backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 is erased (step S30). ), and proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is not operated, the data backed up in the internal RAM 1312 is not erased and it is determined whether the power failure flag is set (step S20). The power outage flag is a flag that is set when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off through normal processing such as the occurrence of a power outage (see step S56 in FIG. 22).

As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so the data backed up in the work area (other than the character product ratio calculation area 13128) is erased (step S30), the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is set, the power failure flag is cleared, and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 using the checksum calculated at the previous power shutdown and the checksum calculated in step S48. The stored checksum is compared (verified) (step S22).

As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data does not match the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so the data backed up in the work area ( Parts other than the character ratio calculation area 13128 are erased (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 match, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 is correct, so the data backed up in the work area is not erased, and the step S24 is performed. Proceed to.

Then, it is determined whether the work area for calculating the character ratio (area for character ratio calculation 13128) is normal by using the check code (step S24). If it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the character product ratio calculation work area may not be correct, so the data stored in the character product ratio calculation work area is deleted (step S26).

When one or a plurality of backup areas are provided in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128, the main area is first determined using a check code, and when it is determined that the main area is abnormal, the backup area 1 It is preferable that the data in the backup area, which is first determined to be normal, be copied to the main area after being determined in the order of 2, and N. After that, the data in the backup area may be erased or left as it is. When it is determined that the main area is normal, the data in the backup area may be erased or left as it is.

As for the character ratio calculation area, the data of the character ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted every predetermined time, separately from the check code determination result when the power is turned on. Also, a predetermined amount of operation (for example, a predetermined number of shot balls, a predetermined number of winning balls, a predetermined number of special symbol variation display game, a predetermined number of special symbol variation display game jackpot, etc.) The data in the ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 is different for each data type (the game control data 13132 and the role ratio calculation/display data 13136). Erase on condition. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control data 13132 is erased, but the backed up accessory ratio calculation/display data 13136 is not erased. If the character ratio calculation/display data 13136 can be deleted by operating the RAM clear switch, the character ratio calculated by the pachinko machine 1 can be deleted at any timing. Therefore, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up character ratio calculation/display data 13136 is prevented from being erased, and the character ratio calculation/display data 13136 is prevented from being erased by the operation of the attendant at the game hall. It is possible to prevent concealment of a state in which the accessory ratio is abnormal. Therefore, it is possible to easily detect the gaming machine that has been modified to have a high accessory ratio or a low accessory ratio.

The main control MPU 1311 executes the initial setting for setting the various setting registers of the main control MPU 1311 (CPU 13111) when the power recovery setting of the RAM work area or the RAM initialization processing is executed (step S28). In the initial setting of the main control MPU 1311, first, the CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) is initialized and interrupts are permitted. Further, the serial communication port and the test signal output port are initialized. Start the hardware random number generation circuit. Then, the serial communication circuit 13114 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510, the payout control board 951 and the accessory ratio display 1317 is set. Further, after the operation of the serial communication circuit 13114 is started, the driver circuit 13171 of the character ratio display 1317 is initialized.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a process of setting a power-on command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S32). In the power-on command creation processing, the game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control internal RAM 1312. To generate a power-on command, the power-on state reference command is set as reference command data, and the command addition data corresponding to the generated command is added.

The power-on command includes a power-on state buffer command and a special symbol/electric accessory operation number command. The power-on state buffer command is a command for notifying the gaming state at the time of return after power-off, and notifies the winning probability of the special lottery and the operation mode of the ordinary electric auditors. On the other hand, the special symbol/electrical accessory operation number command notifies the execution status of the variable display of the special symbol.

After that, the main control MPU 1311 permits execution of interrupt processing including timer interrupt processing (step S34). The initial setting of the pachinko machine 1 is completed by the processing from power-on of the pachinko machine 1 to step S34 (initial setting means).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the power failure notification signal (step S36) and determines whether the power failure notification signal is ON (step S38). When the power failure notice signal is not ON (result of step S38 is “No”), that is, the random number updating process is executed (step S40). In the random number updating process of step S46, a random number other than the random number for making the winning determination is mainly updated in the special lottery and the ordinary lottery. The random number updating process for determining the winning in the special lottery or the ordinary lottery is executed by a timer interrupt process described later. The processes from step S36 to step S40 are executed until the power failure notice signal is detected, and these processes are the main processes on the main control side (after initialization, normal means).

On the other hand, when the power failure advance notice signal is detected (the result of step S38 is “Yes”), the main control MPU 1311 executes power-off time processing (power-off time setting means). In the power-off process, a process of backing up data for returning to the state before the power outage is executed. Specifically, first, execution of interrupt processing is prohibited (step S42). As a result, timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is not performed, writing to the main control internal RAM 1312 can be prevented, and rewriting of game information can be protected. Further, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output port and stops the operation of the device controlled by the output from each port (step S44). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is set to the solenoid/power failure clear/ACK output port. Note that not all output ports need to be cleared, for example, the output ports for controlling solenoids and motors that consume a large amount of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, it is possible to reduce the power consumption in the time until the main board side power-off processing is completed, and to reliably complete the main board side power-off processing.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum for determining whether or not the data stored in the work area to be backed up is normally held (step S46). Further, the checksum calculation result is stored in the checksum area of the RAM 1312 (step S48). This checksum is used to judge whether the data backed up in the work area is normal.

Then, a check code (for example, a checksum) is calculated from the data in the work area for calculating the character ratio (area 13128 for calculating the character ratio) (step S50). If the check code has a fixed value, it is not necessary to calculate the check code in step S50. The check code may be calculated and stored each time the data is updated in the accessory ratio calculation/display process, instead of the main board power-off process.

Subsequently, the calculated check code (or a predetermined value used as the check code) is stored in a predetermined area of the accessory ratio calculating area 13128 (step S52).

Then, the data in the main area of the work for character role ratio calculation (area 13128 for character role ratio calculation) is copied to each backup area (step S54). At this time, the calculated check code is also copied. The backup may be appropriately executed (for example, each time data is updated) by the accessory ratio calculation/display processing, instead of the main board-side power-off processing.

In this way, by storing the data used for calculating the character ratio in the backup area together with the calculated (or predetermined value) check code, the data for calculating the character ratio is retained even when the power is cut off. , It is possible to calculate the ratio of the accessory in a long-term operation.

Further, a value indicating that the backup is normally performed is stored in the backup flag area as the power failure flag (step S56). This completes the storage of the game backup information. Finally, by outputting "01H" indicating the write prohibition to the RAM protect register, the writing of the RAM 1312 is prohibited (step S58), and the process waits until the power is restored (infinite loop).

[5-2. Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing will be described. The timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the initialization process shown in FIGS. 21 and 22. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first executes the main control program to set RBS (register bank selection flag) in the program status word to 1 and switches the register (step S70). The main control board 1310 in the present embodiment has banks 0 and 1 and is switched and used each time the timer interrupt processing is executed.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a switch input process (step S74). In the switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control internal RAM 1312. Specifically, detection signals from various sensors that detect a game ball that has entered a winning opening such as a general winning opening, a detection signal from a magnetic detection switch 3024 that detects fraud using a magnet, and a prize ball control processing. The payer ACK signal or the like from the payout control board 951 which informs that the payout control board 951 has normally received the prize ball command transmitted in (4) is read and stored in the input information storage area as input information. Further, in the switch input processing, the detection signals from the discharge ball sensor 3060 and the launch ball sensor 1020 are read to count the number of out balls.

Then, the main control MPU 1311 performs a timer updating process (step S76). In the timer update process, for example, the time when the special symbol display device 1185 lights according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process described later, the ordinary symbol and the ordinary electric auditors product control process are normally determined. In addition to the time when the normal symbol display device 1189 lights up according to the pattern variation display pattern, a payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 951 has normally received various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311). When determining whether or not the signal is input, time management such as the ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption period is set to 4 ms, so the fluctuation time is decremented by 4 ms each time this timer subtraction process is performed. Then, when the subtraction result becomes the value 0, the variation time of the variation display pattern or the normal symbol variation display pattern is accurately measured.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the random number update process 1 (step S78). In the random number update process 1, the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, the big hit symbol initial value determination random number and the small hit, which are updated in the non-winning random number updating process of step S40 in the system/user reset process (main control side main process) shown in the figure. The random number for determining the initial value for the symbol is also updated.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes prize ball control processing (step S80). In the prize ball control processing, the input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated based on the read input information, and is written in the main control built-in RAM 1312. Further, based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls, a self-check for creating a prize ball command for paying out game balls, and for confirming a connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. Create commands. The main control MPU 1311 transmits the created prize ball command and self-check command to the payout control board 951 as main pay serial data.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 determines the current game state, adds the number of prize balls paid out as a game value to the region corresponding to the current game state, and the role ratio calculation region 13128 of the main control internal RAM 1312. (See FIG. 26) is updated (step S81). The process of step S81 can be skipped when there is no prize ball to be paid out in step S80, and the load on the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes frame command reception processing (step S82). The payout control board 951 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame status 1 command, an error clear navigation command, and a frame status 2 command) classified into status displays by the payout control program. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error cancellation notification command based on a detection signal of the operation switch. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information that informs the payout control board 951 to that effect is stored in the output information storage area of the main control internal RAM 1312 as output information. Also, the main control MPU 1311 shapes the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (for example, a frame status display command, an error cancellation notification command, etc.), and transmits the above-mentioned transmission as transmission information. Store in the information storage area. Further, in the prize ball discharge processing, the number of discharged prize balls is recorded in the storage area (see FIG. 27) defined by the game state of the character ratio calculation area 13128.

The character product ratio calculation area update process (step S81) may be executed in any order as long as it is after the prize ball control process (step S80) and before the character product ratio calculation/display process (step S89). ..

Then, the main control MPU 1311 executes a fraudulent activity detection process (step S84). In the fraudulent activity detection process, an abnormal state regarding the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read out from the above-mentioned input information storage area and the gaming ball is detected by the count switch in the special winning opening 2005, 2006 when the jackpot is not in the gaming state, the main control program is executed. Creates a prize abnormality display command classified into notification display as an abnormal state, and stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a special symbol and special electric auditors product control process (step S86). In the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing, it is determined whether or not the big hit random number value matches the hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. Further, it is determined whether or not to shift to the probability variation state based on the big hit symbol random number value. Then, if the probability variation transition condition is satisfied, then the probability variation state is shifted to, while if the probability variation transition condition is not satisfied, it is shifted to a game state other than the probability variation state. Here, the “probability variation state” means a state (high probability state) in which the winning probability of the above-mentioned special lottery is set relatively higher than the normal gaming state (low probability state).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control process (step S88). In the normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control processing, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. When the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the random number for normal symbol hit determination is extracted, and it is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control ROM (" Ordinary lottery"). Then, it is determined whether to open/close the second starting opening door member 2549 according to the result of the lottery in the ordinary lottery. When the opening/closing operation is performed by this determination, the second starting opening door member 2549 is opened (or expanded), and the starting opening 2004 becomes a game state in which the game ball can be received, which is advantageous for the player. Shift to the state.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the display switch 1318 is operated. If the display switch 1318 is operated, the accessory ratio calculation/display processing (FIGS. 24 and 25) is called, and the accessory ratio is calculated. The prize ratio is calculated with reference to the number of prize balls stored in the calculation area 13128. Then, the calculated character ratio is displayed on the character ratio display 1317 (step S89). In this way, by calling the character ratio calculation/display process in the timer interrupt process and calculating the character ratio, the character ratio (the gambling property of the pachinko machine 1) based on the latest data can be confirmed.

It should be noted that, regardless of whether the display switch 1318 is operated, if the body frame opening switch (not shown) detects that the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the accessory ratio may be displayed. .. Further, when the display switch 1318 is operated while the main body frame opening switch (not shown) is detecting that the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the character product ratio is displayed on the character product ratio display 1317. Good. Since the display switch 1318 is provided on the back side of the game board, when the display switch 1318 is displayed, the main body frame 4 is normally open and the progress of the game is stopped. In this way, when the character ratio is calculated at the timing when the progress of the game is stopped, CPU resources are not consumed by division or subtraction for calculating the character ratio during the game, and the load on the CPU can be reduced.

Details of the accessory ratio calculation/display processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25. A specific example of the method of displaying the character ratio will be described later. When the display switch 1318 is operated, all kinds of values (characteristic ratio, continuous character ratio, cumulative total, total cumulative total) may be calculated, but the value is displayed every time the display switch 1318 is operated. You may calculate only the value that Further, the accessory ratio may be calculated regardless of whether the display switch 1318 is operated, and if the display switch 1318 is operated, the calculated accessory ratio may be displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317.

Even when the pachinko machine 1 detects fraud and stops the game, it executes the character ratio calculating area updating process (step S81) and the character ratio calculating/displaying process (step S89). Regardless of whether or not a fraud is detected, by executing these processes, it is possible to confirm the accessory ratio even during the fraud notification.

Then, the main control MPU 1311 executes an output data setting process (step S90). In the output data setting process, various signals are output from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1311. For example, when various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1311 based on the output information, a main payout ACK signal is output to the payout control board 951 or a big hit game. In the state, it outputs a drive signal to an attacker solenoid (first attacker solenoid 2113, second upper attacker solenoid 2553, second lower attacker solenoid 2556) that opens and closes the opening/closing member 2107 of the special winning openings 2005 and 2006. In addition to outputting a drive signal to the starting opening solenoid 2550 that performs the opening/closing operation of the starting opening (second starting opening door member 2549), the probability fluctuation information output signal, the special symbol display information output signal, the normal symbol display information output Various information (game information) signals relating to the game such as signals, information on time saving information output, start mouth winning information output signals, and security signals are output to the payout control board 951.

Further, in the output data setting process, a signal corresponding to the number of out balls counted in the switch input process (step S74) is output from the external terminal board 784. For example, a pulse signal of a predetermined length may be output from the external terminal board 784 every predetermined number of out balls (10 or the like).

In the output data setting process, the test signal to be output to the inspection device connected to the pachinko machine 1 is set. The test signal includes, for example, a signal indicating a game state, a normal symbol, and a signal indicating a stop symbol of a special symbol (information signal output means).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92). In the peripheral control board command transmission processing, transmission information such as commands and data is read from the above-described transmission information storage area, and the transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main circumference serial data. The transmission information stores various commands created by the timer interrupt processing which is the routine. One packet of the main circumference serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main circumference serial data includes a status indicating a type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And a sum value obtained by calculating the sum of the modes as numerical values, and the sum value is created at the time of transmission.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). The watchdog timer clear register WCL is set to be clear by setting a predetermined value in the watchdog timer clear register WCL. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns) the register bank. When the above process ends, the timer interrupt process ends, and the process returns to the process before the interrupt.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 executes the calculation processing of the character ratio and the continuous character ratio in the timer interrupt process, but the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 controls the character ratio and the continuous character. You may perform the calculation process of an object ratio. In this case, the main control board 1310 may send a command for displaying the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio to the peripheral controller 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, or the payout controller 952 to the peripheral controller 1511. A command for displaying the character ratio or the continuous character ratio may be transmitted.

[5-3. Character ratio calculation/display processing]
24 and 25 are flowcharts showing an example of the accessory ratio calculation/display processing. The main control MPU 1311 executes the accessory ratio calculation/display processing. The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 may execute the accessory ratio calculation/display processing. When the peripheral controller 1511 calculates the accessory ratio, the calculated accessory ratio may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. For example, when the calculated accessory ratio is within the predetermined range (or outside the range), the effect in the game may be changed. Specifically, when the character ratio exceeds a predetermined threshold value (threshold value smaller than the reference value), the notice effect may be changed to give a notice effect that is more interesting than the normal notice effect.

First, a check code is calculated from the main area of the character ratio calculating area 13128 of the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311 (step S140), and the calculated check code is stored in the character ratio calculating area 13128. It is determined whether they match (step S142). If the calculated check code and the check code stored in the character ratio calculation area 13128 match, the data in the main area is normal, and therefore the character ratio calculation process is executed and the character ratio is calculated from the data in the main area. The character ratio and the continuous character ratio are calculated and stored in the character ratio calculation area 13128 (step S156). Specifically, the character ratio is calculated by the number of character acquired balls/total number of acquired balls, and the continuous character ratio is calculated by the number of continuous character acquired balls/total number of acquired balls. It is recommended to round down or round off the fractional part (value below the decimal point) of the calculated character ratio and continuous character ratio. Then, the process proceeds to step S160.

In step S156, the updated value may be copied to the backup area every time the character ratio and/or the continuous character ratio of the character ratio calculation area 13128 is updated.

When the number of bits for storing the number of acquired balls is large and the number of bits that can be calculated by the main control MPU 1311, is insufficient, the lower bits of the number of acquired balls are omitted in the calculation of the character ratio, and the character ratio is calculated. May be calculated. For example, if the storage area for the number of acquired balls is 32 bits, a numerical value from 0 to 4,294,967,295 can be stored. However, when the main control MPU is an 8-bit processor and is capable of performing 8- or 16-bit arithmetic, the lower 16 bits from the most significant bit with a value of 1 out of the acquired number of spheres stored in 32 bits are extracted and operated. It is advisable to store in a special register (16 bits) and perform division. When the number of acquired balls is less than or equal to the maximum value of the number of bits that can be used for calculation (32767, which is the maximum value of 16 bits), the lower 16 bits may be extracted and used for calculation.

Further, if the total number of acquired balls is divided by 100 (rounding down the decimal point) and used as the dividend (divided number) to calculate the character ratio, it is possible to avoid calculation with a decimal.

Alternatively, the upper limit of the character ratio is set to 99, and when the calculated result of the character ratio is 100 or more, the upper limit may be set to 99.

On the other hand, if the calculated check code and the check code stored in the character role ratio calculation area 13128 do not match, the data in the main area is abnormal, so the character rate ratio is calculated from the data in the backup area 1. Try. Specifically, a check code is calculated from the backup area 1 of the character part ratio calculation area 13128 (step S144), and the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the character part ratio calculation area 13128. It is determined whether or not (step S146). If the calculated check code and the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 match, the data in the backup area 1 is normal, so the data in the backup area 1 is copied to the main area (step S148). ), the character ratio calculation process is executed, and the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are calculated from the data of the main area (step S156). Then, the process proceeds to step S160.

On the other hand, if the calculated check code and the check code stored in the character role ratio calculation area 13128 do not match, the data in the backup area 1 is abnormal, and the character ratio is calculated from the data in the backup area 2. Try. Specifically, a check code is calculated from the backup area 2 of the character part ratio calculation area 13128 (step S150), and the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the character part ratio calculation area 13128. It is determined (step S152). If the calculated check code and the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 match, the data in the backup area 1 is normal, so the data in the backup area 2 is duplicated in the main area (step S154). ), the character ratio calculation process is executed, the data of the main area is read, and the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are calculated (step S156). Then, the process proceeds to step S160.

If there is another backup area, similarly, it is determined whether the data in the backup area is normal, and the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated from the data in the normal backup area.

If the data in the main area and all the backup areas are abnormal, the work area for calculating the character ratio (area for character ratio calculation 13128) is initialized and the abnormality is notified (step S158).

Then, the check code is calculated from the main area (step S160), and the calculated check code is stored in the accessory ratio calculating area 13128 (step S162). The check code is calculated in the accessory ratio calculation/display processing by the RAM 1312 in the initialization processing because the power failure flag and the checksum are not calculated when the main board side is reset during the power-off processing. The backed up data is initialized, but if a check code is periodically calculated and stored in the character ratio calculation/display process, even if the pachinko machine is turned on again, the character ratio calculation work area This is because the data in the character role ratio calculation area 13128 can be left without being erased.

Then, 1 is added to the backup area allocation counter value to update it (step S164), and it is determined whether the backup area allocation counter value is an odd number (step S166). If the backup area allocation counter value is odd, the data in the main area is copied to the backup area 1 (step S168). On the other hand, if the backup area allocation counter value is even, the data in the main area is copied to the backup area 2 (step S170). It is possible to prevent the abnormal value from being written to a plurality of backup areas by allocating the copy destination of the data in the main area by the backup area allocation counter value and writing the data in only a part of the backup areas.

When three or more backup areas are provided, the backup areas for writing data may be allocated according to the remainder of the backup area allocation counter value divided by the number of backup areas.

Then, the calculated character ratio is displayed on the character ratio display 1317 (step S172). Specifically, using the calculated type of accessory character ratio and the calculated value, a conversion table (not shown) is referred to, and data to be displayed in each digit of the accessory character ratio indicator 1317 is acquired. The acquired data is sent to the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317. For example, if the type of accessory ratio is the accessory ratio (cumulative), A7 is displayed in the upper two digits, and if the calculated accessory ratio is 66%, 66 is displayed in the lower two digits.

The character ratio calculation processing (step S156) of the character ratio calculation/display processing reads the data of the number of acquired balls from the character ratio calculation area 13128 (that is, the character ratio calculation work area shown in FIG. 27). Data cannot be written in the storage area related to the number of acquired balls in the character ratio calculation area 13128. That is, as will be described later, when the processing of steps S156 and S172 is configured by a common program module, the common program module does not have the authority to write data in the storage area related to the acquired number of balls in the character ratio calculation area 13128. Data can be written in the storage area of the calculated accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio.

As described above, the data for calculating the character ratio in the character ratio calculation/display process is duplicated in the backup area, so if normal power-off processing is not executed due to an abnormal reset, etc. , The data for calculating the accessory ratio can be protected.

Note that the processes of steps S156 and S172 are common regardless of the type of gaming machine, and thus may be configured by one or a plurality of common program modules. In this case, the processing for determining whether the check code of the main area and the check code of the backup area are correct may be configured on the non-common side separately from the common program module. This is because the method of checking and backing up data differs depending on the model. However, if the method of checking and backing up data is shared between the models, it may be arranged in the common program module.

[6. Storage area configuration]
Next, the arrangement of programs and data stored in the ROM 1313 will be described. FIG. 26A is a diagram showing an example of an arrangement of programs (codes) and data stored in the ROM 1313 and the RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310.

The ROM 1313 has a game control code 13131, game control data 13132, debug (inspection function) code 13133, debug (inspection function) data 13134, character ratio calculation/display code 13135, and character ratio calculation/display. An area for storing the usage data 13136 is included. In the ROM 1313 of this embodiment, a game control area (first storage area) for storing programs and data related to the pachinko machine 1, such as a game control code 13131 and game control data 13132, and a debug (inspection function) code 13133. And a debug (inspection function) area (second storage area) for storing programs and data used for the purpose of outputting signals necessary for debugging (inspection function) of the pachinko machine 1 such as debug (inspection function) data 13134. And a character ratio calculation area (third storage area) for storing programs used for the purpose of character ratio calculation, such as character ratio calculation/display code 13135 and character ratio calculation/display data 13136. Has been assigned.

A free area (unused space) of 16 bytes or more is provided between the last address of the game control data 13132 and the start address of the debug (inspection function) code 13133, and when displayed in the dump list format. The game control area and the debug (inspection function) area can be easily distinguished. Similarly, a free area (unused space) of 16 bytes or more is provided between the last address of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 and the start address of the character ratio calculation/display code 13135. When displayed in the dump list format, the debug (inspection function) area and the accessory ratio calculation area can be easily distinguished. The value stored in the empty area may be a fixed value that is the same value, and may be set to a value different from the value set in the game area and the debug area or a value with low frequency. The value stored in the empty area may be an instruction such as a No Operation code that the CPU does nothing. In this way, when displayed in the dump list format, the game control area, the debug (inspection function) area, and the accessory ratio calculation area can be easily distinguished.

Further, even if the debug (inspection function) area and the accessory ratio calculation area are not separated, the accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135 and the accessory ratio calculation/display data 13136 may be stored in a part of the debug area. Good. That is, it is sufficient that the game control area and other areas are clearly distinguished. In this way, by clearly distinguishing the game control area from other areas, the character ratio calculation area (code for character ratio calculation/display 13135 or character) that is a process not directly related to the control of the progress of the game. The ratio calculation/display data 13136) is arranged separately from the game control area to avoid the risk that a defect (bug or the like) in the character product ratio calculation/display code 13135 affects the game control.

In the debug (inspection function) area, programs and data for the purpose not directly related to the game are stored. For example, various functions other than the game control of the pachinko machine 1 are used only when debugging the pachinko machine 1. A code 13133 for outputting the inspection signal is stored. The debug (inspection function) code 13133 is a program for outputting a debug (inspection function) signal. Further, in the character ratio calculation area, a program for calculating the character ratio, which is not directly related to the progress of the game, is stored.

The game control code 13131 is executed by the main control MPU 1311. Further, the game control code 13131 can be appropriately read from and written to the RAM 1312, but the game control area 13126 used by the game control code 13131 can only be read from the debug (inspection function) code. It is configured to be executable, and it is configured such that writing to the area cannot be performed. In this way, the game control area 13126 constitutes a game area accessible only from the game control code 13131. The process based on the debug (inspection function) code 13133 can be unilaterally called and executed during execution of the game control code 13131. However, from the debug (inspection function) code 13131 to the game control code 13131. Is configured so that it cannot be called and executed. As a result, since the independence of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 can be enhanced, even if the game control code 13131 is changed, the change in the debug (inspection function) code 13133 can be minimized. ..

Further, the character ratio calculation/display code 13135 is called from the game control code 13131 (for example, step S89 of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 23) and executed by the main control MPU 1311. The character ratio calculated by the character ratio calculation/display code 13135 is stored in the character ratio calculation area 13128 of the RAM 1312. The character ratio calculation area 13128 is provided separately from the game control area 13126 (outside the game control area), as shown in the figure. In this way, by designing the character ratio calculation/display code 13135 separately from the game control code 13131 and storing it in another area, the inspection of the character ratio calculation/display code 13135 and the game control code 13131. The inspection of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced, and the labor of inspection of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. Further, the accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135 can be commonly used by a plurality of models regardless of the model.

FIG. 26B is a diagram showing the details of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. The role ratio calculation area 13128 may be provided with a backup area 1 and a backup area 2 in which a copy of the data stored in the main area is stored, in addition to the main area in which the result of the role ratio calculation is stored. .. There may be one or more backup areas. A check code for detecting a data error is added to each area. The check code may be a checksum of data in each area or a predetermined value. The check code is set in the initialization process when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, set every time the data in the main area is updated in the accessory ratio calculation/display process, and the main control side power off process (Fig. 22 may be set in steps S50 to S54). In particular, if the check code is a fixed value, the check code is initialized when it is determined to be normal in the initialization process or when the data is erased, and the fixed value is set in the power-down process on the main control side (step S50 in FIG. 20). May be set. The check code may also be used as the power failure flag. That is, if a predetermined value is set for the check code in the main area, it may be determined that the power failure flag is set. Further, if a predetermined value is set in the power failure flag, it may be determined that the check code of each area is a correct value (that is, the data of each area is normal).

When it is determined that the main area is abnormal, it may be determined whether the backup area is normal, and the data in the backup area that is determined to be normal may be copied to the main area (step in FIG. 21). S24). In addition, in the power-down process on the main control side, the value of the main area may be duplicated in each backup area (step S54 in FIG. 22). Further, in the accessory ratio calculation/display processing, the updated data may be copied to the backup area every time the value in the main area is updated (steps S168 and S170 in FIG. 25).

An unused space is provided between the main area and the backup area 1 and between the backup area 1 and the backup area 2. By providing an unused space between each area, the address of each area can be kept away from each other, and each area can be distinguished by the high-order digit of the address.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a specific structure of a work area for storing each data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. The data of the number of balls acquired in the character ratio calculation area 13128 is written in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 23) when the main control MPU 1311 times, and the character ratio calculation process (step of FIG. 24) of the character ratio calculation/display process. It is read in S156). In this way, the character ratio calculation/display process reads the data of the number of acquired balls from the character ratio calculating area 13128, and the timer interrupt process (game control program) stores the data of the number of acquired balls in the character ratio calculating area 13128. By writing, it is possible to completely separate the game control program and the program for executing the character ratio calculation/display processing, and to share the program for the character ratio calculation/display processing even in gaming machines of different specifications. ..

In the character ratio calculation process (step S156 in FIG. 24) of the character ratio calculation/display process, the calculated character ratio and continuous character ratio are calculated as the character ratio and the continuous character in the character ratio calculation area 13128. Write to the ratio storage area. Data of the calculated accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio is read in the accessory ratio display processing (step S170 of FIG. 25) of the accessory ratio calculation/display processing when the accessory ratio is displayed. The game control program does not access the storage area for the character ratio and the continuous character ratio in the character ratio calculation area 13128.

FIG. 27A shows a work area structure in the simplest method. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27A, the number of accessory acquisition balls, the number of continuous accessory acquisition balls, the total number of acquisition balls, the accessory ratio, and the continuous accessory ratio are stored. The number of winning feature balls is the number of prize balls obtained by winning a winning role in an active feature (for example, the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 being opened, the second starting opening 2004 when the second starting opening door member 2549 is opening). is there. The number of consecutive winning character balls is the number of winning balls for winning a winning character while the winning character is continuously operating (for example, the winning opening is open in a series of big hits). The total number of acquired balls is the total number of prize balls paid out to the player. The character ratio can be calculated by the number of character acquisition balls/total number of acquisition balls. The continuous character ratio can be calculated by the number of balls acquired continuously/total number of balls acquired. The number of character acquisition balls, the number of continuous character acquisition balls, and the total number of acquired balls are updated in step S81 of the timer interrupt processing, and the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are calculated in step S91 of the timer interrupt processing. Is stored.

In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27(A), the number of character acquisition balls, the number of continuous character acquisition balls, and the total number of acquisition balls correspond to the total sum of FIG. It is a storage area of 4 bytes, and can store numerical values up to 16777215 or 429496295 in decimal. Since these data are not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a large storage area is prepared so that the data can be stored for a long time. The character ratio and the continuous character ratio are 1-byte storage areas and can store up to 255 decimal numbers.

FIG. 27B shows the structure of a work area using a ring buffer. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27(B), the number of acquired accessory balls, the number of other acquired balls, the number of consecutive accessory acquisition balls, the total number of acquired balls, the accessory ratio, and the continuous accessory ratio are stored. In addition, the storage area of each data is configured by a ring buffer having n storage areas for each predetermined number of prize balls (for example, n=10 storage areas for every 6000 prize balls), and the total winning balls are obtained. When the number reaches a predetermined number (6000), the write pointers for all the data move and the storage area where the data is updated changes. Then, after a predetermined number of prize balls worth of data are stored in the n-th storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area. In addition, when the data other than the total number of acquired balls (number of character acquisition balls, number of shot balls, number of winning balls, number of special symbol variation display games, number of jackpots of special symbol variation display games, etc.) becomes a predetermined number, The write pointer may be moved.

The write pointer and the read pointer of the ring buffer are common to all the data, and the write pointers of all the data strings move for each predetermined number of prize balls. The read pointer also moves as the write pointer moves. The read pointer points to the storage area immediately before the write pointer. This is because the accessory ratio is calculated using the latest data of 6000 prize balls.

The cumulative total of each data is the cumulative value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the cumulative total of the character ratio and the continuous character ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data. Yes, when the ring buffer completes a cycle and one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared to write new data, the cumulative value is calculated by excluding the data in the cleared area. The total cumulative total of each data is the cumulative total of the data collected in the past, and the total cumulative value of the character ratio and continuous character ratio calculated from the cumulative total is the value calculated from the total cumulative value of each data. That is, even if one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared to write new data after the ring buffer makes one cycle, the total cumulative value including the data in the cleared area is calculated.

In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27(B), the number of accessory acquisition balls, the number of continuous accessory acquisition balls, the character ratio, and the continuous character ratio are the same as those described in FIG. 27(A). The number of other winning balls is the number of winning balls due to winning of a prize other than the accessory (a winning opening that does not open or close, for example, a general winning opening 2001). The total number of acquired balls is the total number of prize balls paid out to the player, and the write pointer moves when this value reaches a predetermined number. As for the number of character acquisition balls, the number of other acquisition balls, the number of continuous character acquisition balls, and the total number of acquired balls, the data in the storage area having the write pointer is updated in step S81 of the timer interrupt processing, and the character ratio and the continuous character combination are acquired. The material ratio is calculated and stored in step S91 of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 27C shows the structure of a work area using a ring buffer. With the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27(C), more detailed data than that shown in FIG. 27(B) can be obtained, and the number of balls for ordinary electric accessory, the number of balls for special electric accessory, and the number of balls for starting opening acquisition are obtained. , Other winning prize winning ball number, continuous winning character number, total winning ball number, character ratio and continuous character ratio are stored. The storage area of each data is configured by a ring buffer having n storage areas for every predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 10 storage areas for every 6000 prize balls), and the total number of acquired balls is When the predetermined number (6000) is reached, the write pointer moves and the storage area where the data is updated changes. Then, after a predetermined number of prize balls worth of data are stored in the n-th storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area. In addition, when the data other than the total number of balls acquired (number of special electric accessory acquisition balls, number of launch balls, number of winning balls, number of special symbol variation display games, number of jackpots of special symbol variation display games, etc.) becomes a predetermined number Alternatively, the write pointer may be moved.

The cumulative total of each data is the cumulative value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the cumulative total of the character ratio and the continuous character ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data. Yes, when the ring buffer completes one cycle and is cleared in one storage area of the ring buffer for writing new data, the cumulative value is calculated excluding the data in the cleared area. The total sum of each data is the cumulative value of the data collected in the past, and the cumulative value of the character ratio and the continuous character ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data, and the ring buffer goes round and round. Even if the data is cleared in one storage area of the ring buffer for writing new data, the total cumulative value is calculated including the data in the cleared area.

Of the structure of the work area shown in FIGS. 27B and 27C, the number of winning balls in the ring buffer, the number of other winning balls, the number of consecutive winning balls, the total number of winning balls, the normal electric winning ball Each of the number, the number of balls for special electric accessory acquisition, the number of balls for starting mouth, and the number of balls for winning prize holes is a 2-byte storage area, and a decimal number up to 65535 can be stored. Number of balls acquired, number of other balls acquired, number of balls acquired consecutively, total number of balls acquired, number of balls normally acquired electric motors, number of balls acquired special electric auditors, number of balls acquired starting, and other winning balls The cumulative number is a storage area of 3 bytes each, and can store up to 16777215 decimal numbers. Since the total is the total of data for 6000 prize balls×n (60,000 prize balls when n=10), a large storage area is prepared. Number of balls acquired, number of other balls acquired, number of balls acquired continuously, total number of balls acquired, ratio of characters acquired, ratio of continuous characters acquired, number of balls acquired for normal electric characters, number of balls acquired for special electric characters, starting opening The total cumulative total of the number of acquired balls and the number of other winning prize winning balls is a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes, respectively, and a numerical value up to 16777215 or 4294962955 can be stored in decimal. Since the total sum is not erased unless data is abnormal, a larger storage area is prepared so that long-term data can be stored. In addition, the cumulative total and total cumulative total of the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are 1-byte storage areas, and can store up to 255 decimal numbers.

Of the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27(C), the total number of acquired balls, the character ratio, and the continuous character ratio are the same as those described with reference to FIG. 27(B). The number of other balls obtained is the number of prize balls obtained by winning a prize other than a prize (a prize opening that does not open and close). The number of balls for ordinary electric accessory winning is a prize ball obtained by winning a prize for an ordinary electric auditors product (the second starting opening 2004 when the second starting opening door member 2549 is open) based on the result of the lottery based on the ordinary symbols. Is a number. The number of special electric accessory winning balls is the number of prize balls due to winning the special electric winning object that is in operation (for example, the special winning opening 2005 or 2006 being opened) according to the result of the lottery based on the special symbol. The number of balls acquired in the starting opening is the number of prize balls acquired by winning a prize in the starting opening (first starting opening 2002). The number of other winning prize winning balls is the number of winning prize balls obtained by winning the winning prize (general winning prize 2001) that is not an accessory (does not operate) and does not trigger the special symbol lottery. The number of ordinary electric accessory winning balls, the number of special electric accessory winning balls, the number of starting opening winning balls, the number of winning prize winning balls, the number of consecutive winning winning characters, and the total number of winning balls are determined in step S81 of the timer interruption process. The data in the storage area where the write pointer is located is updated, and the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are calculated and stored in step S91 of the timer interrupt process.

In the data structure shown in FIG. 27A, when it is determined that the stored value is abnormal, the data in the character product ratio calculation area 13128 is deleted in step S116 of the initialization process. The data is not deleted at the trigger of. Therefore, the data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted every predetermined period (for example, one day, one week, or January). Similarly, the total sum shown in FIGS. 25B and 25C may be deleted every predetermined period.

In addition, the data of the character ratio calculation area 13128 and the calculated character ratio are abnormal values (for example, the character ratio exceeds 100%, and the calculated result of the character ratio greatly changes from the previous calculated value. , The number of balls acquired> the total number of balls acquired), the abnormal value may be deleted. Not only the abnormal value, but all data in the character product ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted. Further, when the data of the character role ratio calculation area 13128 or the calculated character role ratio is an abnormal value, it may be notified that it is abnormal. Further, the check code may be used to inspect the data in the backup area, the normal backup area data may be copied to the main area, and then the accessory ratio may be calculated again.

[7. Structure of character ratio display]
FIG. 28 is a diagram showing the configuration of the accessory ratio display 1317.

The accessory ratio indicator 1317 is composed of a driver circuit 13171 and a plurality of 7-segment LEDs 13172. For example, the 7-segment LED 13172 is composed of 4 digits.

The driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 may be housed in one package as one body, but both may be housed in another package.

The driver circuit 13171 and the main control MPU 1311 are connected by three signal lines (DATA, LOAD, CLOCK).

The DATA line transfers data displayed on the character ratio display 1317 and a signal for setting the operating state of the character ratio display 1317, and is connected to the serial communication circuit 13114 of the main control MPU 1311. The LOAD line transfers a signal indicating the data acquisition timing, and is connected to the serial communication circuit 13114 of the main control MPU 1311. The CLOCK line transfers a clock signal that defines the operation cycle of the driver circuit 13171 and is connected to the serial communication circuit 13114 of the main control MPU 1311.

The driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 are connected by four digit selection signal lines IDIG-0 to IDIG-3 and eight segment lighting signal lines ISEG-a to ISEG-Dp. The segment lighting signal lines ISEG-a to ISEG-Dp transmit a signal for lighting each LED element (7 segments and decimal point) of the 7-segment LED 13172. The digit selection signal lines IDIG-0 to IDIG-3 transmit a control signal indicating which digit of the 7-segment LED 13172 the signal transmitted through the segment lighting signal lines ISEG-a to ISEG-Dp is. The direction of the signal (current) shown in the drawing differs depending on whether the 7-segment LED 13172 is the common anode type or the common cathode type, but an example of the common anode type is shown.

To the R-EXT terminal of the driver circuit 13171, a resistor 13174 that determines the value of current flowing through each LED element of the 7-segment LED 13172 is connected. By changing the resistance value of the resistor 13174, the emission brightness of each LED element of the 7-segment LED 13172 can be changed.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing the configuration of the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317.

The driver circuit 13171 includes a 16-bit shift register 3171, a 16-bit data latch 3172, 8-bit data latches 3173A to D, an 8×4 data selector 3174, a decoder 3175, a 2×8 data selector 3176, a constant current driver 3178, a driver 3179, and It has a latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180, a Digit-Limit control unit 3181, a duty ratio control unit 3182, a data selector control unit 3183, a standby mode control unit 3184, and an oscillator 3185.

The 16-bit shift register 3171 takes in the serial data input to the DATA IN terminal, holds 16-bit data, and sends it as parallel data to the 16-bit data latch 3172. The four bits D15 (MSB) to D12 are data for selecting the operation mode (see FIG. 35) of the driver circuit 13171, and the four bits D11 to D8 are data for selecting a register corresponding to the operation mode. (See FIG. 33), and D7 to D0 (LSB) are data of the detailed setting.

The 16-bit data latch 3172 latches data at the timing of the LOAD signal, and controls D15 to D8 in each control unit (latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180, Digit-Limit control unit 3181, duty ratio control unit 3182, data selector control). Unit 3183, standby mode control unit 3184) and sends D7 to D0 to the 8-bit data latches 3173A to 3173A to D.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, the 16-bit shift register 3171 captures the serial data input to the DATA IN terminal at the rising timing of the CLOCK signal and shifts the data. The 16-bit data latch 3172 acquires 16-bit data as parallel data from the 16-bit shift register 3171 at the rising timing of the LOAD signal and latches the data. Then, D15 to D8 are sent to each control unit (latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180, Digit-Limit control unit 3181, duty ratio control unit 3182, data selector control unit 3183, standby mode control unit 3184). Further, the 16-bit data latch 3172 sends D7 to D0 of the latched data to the 8-bit data latches 3173A to D at the falling timing of the LOAD signal.

The LOAD signal is also input to the latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180. The latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180 acquires D15 to D8 and selects the 8-bit data latch 3173 which stores display data (8 bits of D7 to D0). Specifically, as shown in the load register selection table (see FIG. 33), when D15 to D8 are 00100010B, the latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180 determines that the data register 0, that is, 8 bits of Digit-A. A signal for selecting the 8-bit data latch 3173 is sent so that the data latch 3173A stores the data.

The 8-bit data latch 3173 is provided by the number of 7-segment LEDs 13172 (the number of display digits), and according to the selection signal from the latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180, fetches data to be displayed on each 7-segment LED, Hold. The 8-bit data latch 3173 sends the held data to the 8×4 data selector 3174.

The 8×4 data selector 3174 selects the data sent from each of the 8-bit data latches 3173A to 3D at a predetermined display timing of each digit and sends it to the decoder 3175 and the 2×8 data selector 3176.

The decoder 3175 converts the input data into a character to be displayed on the 7-segment LED 13172, using the character generator decoding table (see FIG. 34), and generates data for lighting each segment. The generated data is input to the 2×8 data selector 3176.

The 2×8 data selector 3176 refers to the decode setting, selects data from the decoder 3175 when the mode is set to use the decoder, and 8× when the mode is set to not use the decoder. 4 Select data from the data selector 3174. The selected data is input to the constant current driver 3178.

The constant current driver 3178 outputs a current signal for lighting each segment from the data output terminals OUTa to OUTDp using the data from the 2×8 data selector 3176. The current output from the constant current driver 3178 is controlled by the resistance value of the resistor connected to the R-EXT terminal, as described above.

The driver 3179 receives the sink current of the current output from the constant current driver 3178 to light each segment of the 7-segment LED 13172. The driver 3179 controls which of the 7-segment LEDs (digits) is displayed by controlling the current sink timing of the terminals DIG-0 to DIG-3.

The Digit-Limit control unit 3181 controls the number of display digits of the 7-segment LED 13172 controlled by the driver circuit 13171. That is, the driver circuit 13171 can control the number of digits to be turned on to 1 to 4 digits by setting from the outside. Specifically, by inputting data in which D15 to D8 are set to 00100001B and D7 to D0 are set to XXXXX11B, a setting is made to use all four digits in the digit register (DIGIREGREGISTER) of the Digit-Limit control unit 3181. Is written. It should be noted that x indicates that either H or L data may be used, and whether the input data is H or L does not affect the truth table.

The duty ratio controller 3182 controls the duty ratio when the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned on. That is, the driver circuit 13171 can control the duty ratio by an external setting, and controls the brightness at which the 7-segment LED 13172 lights up. The duty ratio controller 3182 controls the duty ratio by controlling the pulse width of at least one of the timing signals sent to the constant current driver 3178 and the driver 3179. Specifically, by setting D15 to D8 to 00100000B and inputting arbitrary data to D3 to D0, a duty register (DUTY REGISTER) of the duty ratio control unit 3182 has a 16-step duty of 0/16 to 15/16. The ratio setting is written.

The data selector control unit 3183 controls the setting of the decoder. That is, the driver circuit 13171 controls whether or not to use the decoder 3175 according to an external setting. Specifically, by inputting data in which D15 to D8 are set to 00100001B and D7 to D0 are set to 0001×××B, the setting for using the decoder is written in the decode register, and D7 to D0 is set to 0000××. By inputting the data of XXB, the setting of NO DECODER without using the decoder is written. The data selector control unit 3183 controls the 2×8 data selector 3176 to select the data from the decoder 3175 when the decoder is set to be used, and when the decoder is not set to 2 The ×8 data selector 3176 controls to select the data from the 8×4 data selector 3174.

The standby mode control unit 3184 controls the standby mode setting and the data clear setting. That is, the driver circuit 13171 can shift to the standby mode by an external setting. Specifically, the standby mode can be set by inputting data in which D15 to D12 are 0100B and D3 to D0 are 0000B. In the standby mode, the current setting is maintained as it is, the current output to the 7-segment LED 13172 is cut off, and the power consumption of the driver circuit 13171 is suppressed.

Further, the driver circuit 13171 can clear all the data held inside by the setting from the outside. Specifically, by inputting data in which D15 to D12 are set to 0100B and D3 to D0 are set to 0001B, all the data held in the register or the latch is cleared and initialized.

The oscillator 3185 generates a clock used in the driver circuit 13171.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a mounting example of the main control board 1310. In this figure, the configuration of the main control board box 1320 is shown by a solid line, and the configuration on the main control board 1310 is shown by a dotted line.

FIG. 31A shows the main control board box 1320 of the mounting example 1. The main control board box 1320 is made of a transparent resin that accommodates the main control board 1310 in a sealable manner so that the main control board box 1320 cannot be opened without breaking once it is closed. (Seal sticking, engraving, printing, etc.) and opening sticker are stuck. The opening seal is a seal for recording the history of opening the seal of the main control board 1310.

The mounting example 1 shown in FIG. 31B shows a state in which the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 shown in FIG. In the mounting example 1, the main control MPU 1311 is mounted on the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1311 may be mounted so that the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310 and the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 are the same.

The main control board 1310 is enclosed in a main control board box 1320 and constitutes a main control unit 1300. The main control MPU 1311 is arranged at a position where it can be confirmed from the outside that improper modification has not been made. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is arranged so that it can be easily confirmed from the outside that inappropriate modification has not been performed by not arranging parts around the main control MPU 1311.

The accessory ratio indicator 1317 is arranged on the main control board 1310 at a position visible from the outside. The orientation of the numbers displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 may be the same as the model number display of the main control MPU 1311 or the model number 1320 on the main control board box. Further, the accessory ratio display 1317, the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1311 may be mounted such that the longitudinal directions thereof are the same. In the case where the main control board 1310 is mounted on the gaming machine in a landscape orientation, the longitudinal direction of the accessory ratio display 1317 and the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 are the same as the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310. The accessory ratio display 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 may be mounted as described above. When the main control board 1310 is mounted on the gaming machine in a portrait orientation, the longitudinal direction of the accessory ratio display 1317, the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 and the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310 are 90 degrees. It is advisable to mount the accessory ratio display 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 so that they face each other.

Further, the connectors CN1 and CN2 for pulling out the signal line from the main control board 1310 are aligned with the accessory ratio indicator 1317 in the lengthwise direction, and end portions along the long side of the main control board 1310 (upper length in the figure). Although it is the upper end along the side, it may be mounted on the lower end along the lower long side or the end along the left and right sides). That is, it is desirable that the wirings (harnesses) connected to the connectors CN1 and CN2 overlap the accessory ratio display 1317 and that the connectors CN1 and CN2 be arranged at positions where the visual recognition of the accessory ratio display 1317 is not hindered. ..

Further, the model number display of the main control board box 1320 and the unsealing sticker attached to the main control board box 1320 are attached to a position that does not overlap with either the main control MPU or the accessory ratio display 1317.

By mounting the accessory ratio display 1317 in this way, the model number display of the accessory ratio display 1317 or the main control MPU 1311 is displayed in the correct direction, and the visibility of these is improved, and the manufacturing process or the game hall is improved. Even in the inspection after the installation, it is possible to check the ratio of the accessory and the presence or absence of the modification of the main control MPU 1311 without taking an unreasonable posture.

In another implementation example shown in FIG. 31C, the main control MPU 1311 and the accessory ratio display 1317 are mounted such that the directions of the numbers are the same, but circuits other than the main control MPU 1311 are mounted. The orientation of the model number display of the module (for example, IC) is different from the orientation of the model number display of the main control MPU 1311 and the numeral display of the accessory ratio display 1317. Further, the circuit modules other than the main control MPU 1311 may be arranged at positions overlapping the model number display of the main control board box 1320 and the opening seal attached to the main control board box 1320. This is because the circuit modules other than the main control MPU 1311 are less important when inspecting for unauthorized modification, and therefore, the meanings of arranging them on the main control board 1310 in the same direction are small.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a positional relationship between the main control MPU 1311 and the accessory ratio display 1317.

As shown in FIG. 32A, the signal line 13173 between the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 and the 7-segment LED 13172 may be unstable due to the influence of noise. Therefore, it is desirable to arrange the driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 as close to each other as possible.

For example, as illustrated, the distance between the driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 (the length L2 of the wiring 13173) is the distance between the main control MPU 1311 and the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 (the length of the wiring 13101). It is arranged so that it is shorter than L1). That is, L1 becomes larger than L2.

Further, as described above, no parts are arranged around the main control MPU 1311 in order to easily confirm from the outside that improper modification has not been made, as indicated by the dotted line. Therefore, the wiring length L1 becomes a certain length, but L2 is made as short as possible.

Note that the driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 may be housed in one package or another package, and in any case, they are mounted so that L1 is larger than L2.

32B is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the main control MPU 1311 and the accessory ratio display 1317 in another implementation example, and FIG. 32C is the same as the implementation example shown in FIG. 32B. It is sectional drawing of a printed circuit board.

As shown in FIG. 32B, ground patterns 13102 are provided on both sides of the signal line 13101 between the main control MPU 1311 and the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317. Further, in the printed circuit board, a prohibited area 13106 having no signal pattern is provided on the back surface and inner layer of the signal line 13101. It is preferable to provide a ground pattern 13107 as a guard pattern or a power supply pattern on at least one of the back surface and the inner layer of the printed circuit board in the prohibited area 13106.

Explaining the arrangement of other signal lines in this implementation example, for example, the signal line 13103 that supplies a clock signal from the oscillator to the main control MPU 1311 avoids the prohibited area 13106 (that is, the signal line 13103 and the signal line 13101 are separated from each other). It is arranged so that it does not intersect. Further, the signal line 13104 connected to the main control MPU 1311 may be arranged so as to pass through to the back surface or the inner layer by the through hole 13105. Also in this case, the signal line 13104 is arranged so as to avoid the prohibited area 13106 (that is, the signal line 13104 and the signal line 13101 do not intersect).

The main control board 1310 is generally composed of a two-layer board having patterns on the front and back surfaces and no inner layer from the viewpoint of preventing unauthorized modification. It can also be applied to a multi-layer substrate having inner layers (4 layers, 6 layers, etc.).

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a load register selection table of the driver circuit 13171.

The load register selection table is a table for determining a register that stores the data input to the driver circuit 13171.

The driver circuit 13171 of this embodiment has seven registers. The duty register is used by the duty ratio control unit 3182, and the duty ratio for lighting the 7-segment LED 13172 is set. For example, when D15 to D8 are 00100000B, the data set in D7 to D0 is data for setting the duty ratio and is written in the duty register of the duty ratio control unit 3182.

The decode register is used by the data selector control unit 3183 or the Digit-Limit control unit 3181, and the use of the decoder 3175, that is, the presence or absence of decoding and the number of display digits are set. The decode register and the digit number register may be configured as one register. For example, when D15 to D8 are 00100001B, the data set in D7 to D0 is data for setting the presence/absence of decoding or data for setting the number of display digits, and the data of the data selector control unit 3183 It is written in the register or the digit register of the Digit-Limit control unit 3181.

The data register is used by the 8-bit data latches 3173A to 3D, and the data to be displayed in each digit of the 7-segment LED 13172 is set. For example, when D15 to D8 are 00100010B to 00100101B, the data set in D7 to D0 is data for lighting the 7-segment LED and is written in the data register in the 8-bit data latches 3173A to D.

The duty ratio, the presence/absence of decoding, and the number of display digits set in the register described above do not need to be set each time the character product ratio is displayed, and may be set once. Therefore, the initial setting in step S28 of FIG. Is set as. If the initial setting is performed only once, the setting may be changed by the influence of noise or the like after the initial setting. Therefore, a predetermined condition (for example, every time the opening of the main body frame 4 is detected, the switch button is It may be reset each time is pressed. As a result, even if the setting is switched due to noise, correct display can always be performed.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a character generator decoding table. The character generator decode table is used by the decoder 3175 to convert input data into character data to be displayed on the 7-segment LED 13172. By using the character generator decode table, characters such as numbers and some alphabets can be displayed without considering the font. Further, when numbers are displayed, D5 to D0 match the displayed numbers, and therefore the calculation result can be input to the driver circuit 13171 without conversion and displayed on the 7-segment LED 13172.

The lighting of the decimal point of each digit of the 7-segment LED 13172 is controlled by D6.

FIG. 35 is a state transition diagram of the driver circuit 13171, and FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a display example of the character ratio display 1317.

The driver circuit 13171 of this embodiment has five states, namely, an initial state, a data input state, an LED lighting state (0000), an LED lighting state (lighting according to input data), and an LED lighting state (all lighting). Is being prepared.

There are blank, normal operation, register write, all lighting, and standby mode setting commands for controlling these five states. The blank instruction cuts off the output of the constant current driver 3178 and the output of the driver 3179. The normal operation command displays the 7-segment LED 13172 after the completion of each setting. When the normal operation command is input without setting the display data, the 7-segment LED 13172 displays the number 0 in all digits. The register write command sets the number of used digits, the duty ratio, the decoder used or not used, and the display data input. A register in which data is written is selected with D11 to D8, and the contents to be set in the register are input with D7 to D0 (see FIG. 33). The all-lighting command turns on the output of the constant current driver 3178 on the data side to light all the segments of the 7-segment LED 13172. The standby instruction includes a standby instruction that is divided into two depending on the parameter and transits to the standby state, and a clear instruction that transits to the initial state. The standby command maintains the setting at that time, stops the operation of the constant current driver 3178 and the driver 3179, cuts off the current output to the 7-segment LED 13172, and suppresses the power consumption of the driver circuit 13171. In addition, the clear instruction clears and initializes all the data held in the registers and latches, and turns off the display.

Since the blank command is also a kind of display command, in the present specification, "display" includes all states of the 7-segment LED, all segments, and all the segments.

A display example in each state described above will be described with reference to FIG. 36.

When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the driver circuit 13171 has not been initialized or the display data has not been set, and thus the game machine is in the initial state (ALL BLANK), and the 7-segment LED 13172 is displayed as shown in FIG. All segments of are turned off and become non-illuminated. Further, in the state where the main body frame 4 is closed and the game can be performed, the character ratio display 1317 cannot be visually recognized. Therefore, it is preferable to set the standby mode and turn off the 7-segment LED 13172 to reduce the power consumption of the gaming machine.

Then, when the display data is input after the control data is set in the various control registers in the driver circuit 13171 and the initial setting is completed, the 7-segment LED 13172 displays a predetermined display. As the predetermined display, as shown in FIG. 36(B), "-" may be displayed in all digits or all segments may be lit. This predetermined display may allow the normal operation of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 to be confirmed.

Further, when the body frame 4 is opened, a predetermined display may be provided on all digits so that it can be confirmed that the accessory ratio display 1317 is operating normally. For example, as shown in FIG. 36(B), "-" may be displayed in all digits, or all segments may be lit.

When the display switch 1318 is operated and the display data is input to the driver circuit 13171, the LED is turned on (lighting corresponding to the input data). Specifically, the character ratio display state is entered, a code indicating the display content is displayed in the left two digits of the 7-segment LED 13172, and a numerical value of the character ratio is displayed in the right two digits. In the example shown in FIG. 36(C), “y175” is displayed, indicating that the accessory ratio 1 is 75%. In addition, when the displayed accessory ratio is an abnormal value outside the specified range, it is advisable to display such an indication. For example, all digits (or numbers) are displayed by blinking, or the decimal point is lit or blinked.

When the display switch 1318 is further operated and the display data is input to the driver circuit 13171, the display content of the 7-segment LED 13172 is changed. That is, another type of accessory ratio is displayed. Also in this case, the code indicating the display content is displayed in the left two digits, and the numerical value of the accessory ratio is displayed in the right two digits. In the example shown in FIG. 36(D), "y263" is displayed, indicating that the accessory ratio 2 is 63%. Also in this case, similarly to the above, it is preferable to display such that it is possible to identify that the displayed accessory ratio is an abnormal value outside the specified range. A more specific display example of the accessory ratio will be described later with reference to FIG.

Then, when the main body frame 4 is closed, a predetermined display for confirming the normal operation of the accessory ratio display 1317 is displayed (FIG. 36(E)), and after the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned on. It may be turned off to reduce power consumption of the gaming machine. The state in which the character ratio is not displayed is the same as that after completion of the initial setting, but may be different, as long as it is distinguishable from the character ratio display.

FIG. 36(E) is a display example when the character ratio display 1317 or the main control MPU 1311 has an abnormality and the character ratio cannot be displayed. The decimal point may be illuminated or blinking, or may be displayed differently for each digit. The abnormal display may be different from that shown in the figure, and may be any form that can be distinguished from the normal accessory ratio display to indicate that the accessory ratio cannot be displayed.

Further, in any state, when the all-lighting command is input, all the segments of the 7-segment LED 13172 are lighted. When a blank command or a standby command is input in any state, all the segments of the 7-segment LED 13172 are turned off while the data is retained. When a data clear command is input in any state, all the data held in the registers and latches are cleared, all the segments of the 7-segment LED 13172 are turned on, and the state returns to the initial state.

[8. Display of character ratio]
Next, a method of calculating and displaying the accessory ratio will be described.

As described above, the character ratio is displayed on the character ratio display 1317 provided on the main control board 1310. As described above, the character ratio display 1317 is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED or a liquid crystal display device, displays the numerical value of the character ratio in the lower two digits, and the numerical value type in the upper two digits. Is displayed.

Alternatively, the accessory ratio indicator 1317 may be configured by a 2-digit 7-segment LED. In this case, the numerical value of the accessory ratio and the type of the numerical value may be alternately displayed.

The display mode of the numerical value of the character ratio may be displayed differently depending on the result of comparison between the character ratio and a predetermined reference value. For example, when the accessory ratio exceeds a predetermined reference value, the numerical value is blinked or the color is changed (normally green, and when the standard is exceeded, red, etc.). By changing the display mode according to the result of comparison with the reference value, it is possible to easily recognize that the accessory ratio is abnormal.

The accessory ratio indicator 1317 may be composed of one or a plurality of LED lamps. When the character ratio display 1317 is composed of one LED lamp, the result of comparison between the character ratio and a predetermined reference value is displayed in a different manner. For example, when the accessory ratio is smaller than the reference value, it is displayed in green, and when the accessory ratio is larger than the reference value, it is displayed in red. Further, when the accessory ratio is smaller than the reference value, it is turned on, and when the accessory ratio is larger than the reference threshold, it is displayed by blinking.

When the character ratio display 1317 is composed of a plurality of (for example, 10) LED lamps, one LED lamp is set to 10% to display the character ratio. For example, if the accessory ratio is 70% or more and less than 80%, seven LEDs are turned on. In this case, it may be displayed in different display modes (display colors) depending on the display content (proportion of character role or ratio of continuous character product, display of latest data or display of medium term data, etc.).

If the total number of acquired balls is less than 6000, the collection period of the prize ball data may be short and the value of the accessory ratio may not have converged. Therefore, display in different display modes (display color, blinking, etc.) You may. It is desirable that the display mode when the total number of acquired balls is less than the threshold value is different from the display mode when the total number of acquired balls exceeds the reference value.

The character ratio display 1317 may switch and display the latest data display, the medium-term data display, and the long-term data display. The latest data display is the accessory ratio calculated by using the previous counter value currently being written in the ring counter shown in FIGS. The medium-term data display is the ratio of the accessory character calculated by using the cumulative total in the ring counter shown in FIGS. The long-term data display is the accessory ratio calculated using the total sum in the ring counter shown in FIGS.

The accessory ratio display 1317 may also be used as the function display unit 1400. The function display unit 1400 normally displays the game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, but when the main body frame opening switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, The control board 1310 switches the display so that the function display unit 1400 displays the accessory ratio. Although the display of the function display unit 1400 is switched by opening the main body frame 4, it is preferable to continue the progress of the game. By continuing the progress of the game, when the main body frame 4 is closed, it is possible to quickly switch from the accessory ratio display to the game state display. For example, when the main frame 4 is opened during the special symbol variable display game, the accessory ratio is displayed, but when the main frame 4 is closed before the change time elapses, the variable display for the remaining time may be performed. it can. Since the special symbol displayed on the function display unit 1400 is synchronized with the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the decorative symbol is stopped at the timing when the special symbol variable display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped. Therefore, even if the function display unit 1400 displays the accessory ratio, the player can be configured so as not to feel uncomfortable.

The character ratio display 1317 may display a character other than the character ratio. For example, the number of winnings or the number of prize balls paid out for each type of winning hole per unit time may be displayed. The unit time may be switched between 1 minute, 10 minutes, 1 hour, 10 hours, etc. by operating the display switch 1318.

The character ratio display 1317 may display the base. The base is the ball payout rate in normal times excluding special prizes (big hits), and can be calculated by the number of safe balls divided by the number of out balls. The number of shot balls (the number of out balls) is detected by the shot ball sensor 1020. As described above, the launch ball sensor 1020 is provided near the exits (backflow prevention members 1007) of the rails 1001 and 1002 that guide the game balls from the ball launch device to the game area 5a (see FIGS. 10 and 16). The number of out balls may be detected by the discharged ball sensor 3060. As described above, the discharge ball sensor 3060 is provided at the discharge port for discharging the game balls flowing out from the game area 5a to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 4). In addition, an out-passage ball sensor 1021 (see FIG. 53) for detecting a game ball passing through the out-port 1111 provided in the lower part of the game area 5a is provided, and the number of game balls detected by the out-passage ball sensor 1021 and The number of out balls may be detected by the total of the number of game balls detected by the starting opening sensors 2104 and 2551 and the number of game balls detected by the various winning opening sensors 3015, 2114, 2554 and 2557. Further, a launch supply ball sensor (not shown) that detects a game ball supplied to the ball launching device 680, and a game ball that has been hit by the ball launching device 680 but has not reached the game area 5a (so-called foul ball). With a foul ball sensor (not shown) for detecting the number of foul balls subtracted from the number of game balls supplied to the ball launch device 680 detected by the launch supply ball sensor, the number of out balls (the number of launched balls) is calculated. It may be detected.

The number of out balls may be counted by any of the methods described above. That is, it suffices to provide either the discharge ball sensor 3060 or the launch ball sensor 1020 among the illustrated sensors.

The number of safe balls is equal to the number of prize balls paid out. Further, the base may be defined as a payout rate for each game state (during normal game, during electric support, during probability change, during time reduction), and calculated by the number of safe balls divided by the number of out balls for each game state. .. By displaying the base on the character ratio display 1317, it is possible to confirm the deviation from the design value of the pitching performance during operation for each gaming machine on the spot. Moreover, since the exit performance can be confirmed without using the hall controller, the inspection for each gaming machine becomes easy at the time of the on-site inspection of the gaming hall.

The character ratio display 1317 is for information on other base prizes and prize balls (the number of prizes to the general prize hole 2001, the number of prize balls due to the prize, the number of prizes at the starting hole 2002 and the number of prize balls due to the prize, The number of winnings in the special winning openings 2005 and 2006, the number of prize balls due to the winnings, and the like) may be displayed.

The character ratio display 1317 may always display the character ratio, or may display the character ratio by operating the display switch 1318. For example, when the display switch 1318 which is a push button switch is pressed, the display of the accessory ratio is started, and after the display for a predetermined time, the display is turned off. If the display switch 1318 is operated while the main body frame opening switch (not shown) is detecting that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, even if the character product ratio is displayed on the character product ratio display 1317. Good. That is, even if the display switch 1318 is operated unless the body frame is open, the character ratio display 1317 does not display the character ratio.

Further, the display content may be changed every time the display switch 1318 is operated. For example, as shown in FIG. 37, when the display switch 1318 is operated once, A7, which means the character ratio (cumulative), is displayed in the upper two digits, and the character corresponding to a predetermined number (eg, 60,000) of prize balls is displayed. Display the ratio in the last two digits. When the display switch 1318 is operated once again, the upper two-digit display is switched to A6, which means the continuous character ratio (cumulative), and the ratio of the continuous character for a predetermined number (for example, 60,000) of prize balls is lowered to 2. It may be displayed in digits (FIG. 37(B)). Further, when the display switch 1318 is operated once, y7, which means the character ratio (6000 prize balls), is displayed in the upper two digits, and the character ratio based on the latest data is displayed in the lower two digits (the latest data display). (FIG. 37(C)). When the display switch 1318 is operated once again, the display of the upper two digits is switched to y6 which means the character ratio (total), and the character ratio for a predetermined number (for example, 60,000) of prize balls is reduced to the lower two digits. It may be displayed (medium-term data display) (FIG. 37(D)).

The display switch 1318 may not be provided as an independent switch, but may be used also as a RAM clear switch provided on the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control board 1510. That is, the switch functions as a RAM clear switch when operated when the power is turned on, and functions as a display switch 1318 when operated while the pachinko machine 1 is operating. By consolidating the functions of the RAM clear switch and the display switch 1318 into one switch, the number of switches operated by the staff in the amusement hall is one, and erroneous operations by inexperienced staff can be reduced.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to accurately calculate the accessory ratio of the gaming machine in operation and to confirm the gambling property of the gaming machine in operation.

Also, since the data of the number of prize balls is accumulated as the character product ratio calculation/display data 13136, and the character product ratio calculation/display data 13136 is deleted when the check code is abnormal, an incorrect character product ratio is displayed. Can be avoided.

Further, since the character ratio calculation/display data 13136 is deleted under a condition different from the condition for deleting the data related to the progress of the game backed up in the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311, the accurate prize ball number data is held. , You can calculate the exact character ratio.

Further, since the character ratio calculation/display data 13136 is not deleted by the operation of the RAM clear switch, the character ratio calculation/display data 13136 can be prevented from being accidentally deleted by the operation of the attendant at the game hall. Since the object ratio calculation/display data is not erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch, the data is not erased by the erroneous operation of the staff at the game arcade. Further, since the game hall cannot intentionally delete the character ratio calculation/display data, the reliability of the character ratio displayed is increased, and the concealment of the state where the character ratio is high can be prevented.

[9. Show base]
[9-1. Basic configuration of gaming machine displaying base]
Up to this point, an example of a pachinko machine that calculates and displays the accessory ratio has been described. Next, an example of a pachinko machine that calculates and displays a base value will be described. In this embodiment, the pachinko machine that calculates and displays the base value is described exclusively, but the accessory ratio may be calculated and displayed together with the base value.

In the pachinko machine described below, as described above, when a game ball wins the starting opening (first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004), random number lottery is performed and a special symbol variable display game is executed. .. The variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol variation display game is a variation pattern of a relatively short time (a regular variation pattern of about 10 seconds, a shortened variation pattern of about 2 to 5 seconds that is easily selected when the number of holdings is large). Alternatively, there is a relatively long time variation pattern (variation pattern such as super reach exceeding 1 minute). When the base value is calculated by the pachinko machine, since the notification of the base value requires less urgency than the notification of the error, it can be notified at the timing when the special symbol variable display game is switched to the next variable display game. However, when the variable display time is long, when a predetermined condition is satisfied without waiting for the end of one special symbol variable display game (for example, the number of out balls (the number of shot balls) or the number of prize balls (the number of payout balls)). It is preferable to calculate the base value and update the display when the number) changes. Therefore, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the game (for example, during the special symbol variable display game) (for example, the number of out balls (the number of shot balls) or the number of prize balls (the number of payout balls)). ) Changes, the base value is calculated and displayed. Next, a specific configuration of the pachinko machine that performs such an operation will be described.

FIG. 38 is a block diagram showing the configuration around the main control board 1310 of the pachinko machine 1 for calculating and displaying the base value.

The pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 38 has substantially the same configuration as the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 17, but the configuration indicated by reference numeral 1317 is a base display rather than a character ratio display. The base display 1317 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment may use a 4-digit 7-segment LED as shown in FIG. 4 and FIG. 28, and may have a different number of digits (eg, 2 digits). A 7 segment LED may be used.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment obtains data of the number of prize balls and the number of out balls in the character object ratio calculation area updating process (step S81) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 23) executed by the main control MPU 1311. In the accessory ratio calculation/display process (step S89), the base value is calculated and displayed. Note that, in the following description, the "role portion ratio calculation area update processing" in step S81 of FIG. 23 is read as "base calculation area update processing", and the "role portion ratio calculation/display processing" in step S89 is referred to as "base". Calculation/display processing” will be replaced with the description. Further, the “characteristics ratio calculation area 13128” shown in FIG. 26 is replaced with the “base calculation area 13128”, and the “characteristics ratio calculation/display code 13135” is replaced with the “base calculation/display code 13135”. The description will be made by replacing "accompaniment ratio calculation/display data 13136" with "base calculation/display data 13136".

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update processing, the current game state is determined, the number of prize balls paid out as a game value is added to the area corresponding to the current game state, and the base calculation area 13128 of the main control internal RAM 1312 is updated. To do. In particular, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 39, in order to calculate the base value every timer interrupt period, the total number of prize balls is calculated by using the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80). Is directly updated (step S814), and the total number of out balls is directly updated using the number of out balls (step S822).

First, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The gaming state is in the state of special prize, which means that the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 are open and the player can obtain a lot of prize balls, but the opening and ending times of the big hit game are included. Good. When the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 repeatedly open and close in one big hit, the time from the closing of the special winning opening to the next opening (closing interval) may be included. That is, during the special prize in step S810, it means that the condition device is operating, for example, from the determination of the jackpot symbol of the special symbol variable display game to the end of the ending. It may also include all the times during the right-handing instruction.

Further, at the starting ports 2002 and 2004, the special prize may include a time saving period, a positive change (during ST), and a power support period. Furthermore, during a time saving period, during a probable change (during ST), and in a game state other than during electric power support, a predetermined time after the opening of the starting port 2004 is closed (for example, until a ball winning the starting port is detected as an out ball). Up to the required few seconds) may be included in the prize.

The electrically operated accessory provided in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is classified into two types from the viewpoint of calculating the base value. As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special prize regarding the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 is during the operation of the condition device (for example, from the determination of the big hit symbol of the special symbol variable display game to the end of the ending), Since the base value is calculated based on the number of prize balls and the number of out balls other than during the special prize, normal winning (so-called big hit) to the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 is not used for calculating the base value. On the other hand, in the starting port 2004 (so-called electric tulip) having an opening/closing member, winning balls and prize balls other than during special prize (low probability or non-time saving) are used for calculating the base value. In other words, some of the electrically operated auctions (big prize holes 2005 and 2006) are used to calculate the base value based on the number of award balls and the number of award balls, regardless of the gaming state (whether a prize is being won or not). The other accessory (starting port 2004) is not used, and whether the winning ball number and the winning ball number are used for the calculation of the base value or not is switched depending on the gaming state (whether the prize is being won or not). It will be. Not to use the number of prize balls and the number of prize balls in the calculation of the base value means that the paid prize balls are not counted in (the number of prize balls other than the special prize which is the dividend in the calculation of the base value). Even if a winning signal is input, it also includes not creating edge information for paying out a prize ball according to the winning signal.

Further, the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 may be opened (as a so-called small hit) even when the condition device does not operate. Generally, a small hit occurs during an hour and a short time, and it is unlikely that a game ball will win a prize because it is opened for a short time, so it does not affect the calculation of the base value. However, a small hit may be generated during a period other than during the special prize (normal time), and the game ball may be opened only during a time when the possibility of winning the prize is high. In this case, the winning balls and winning balls to the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 in the small hits other than during the special prize may be used for the calculation of the base value. In this way, the expected value (design value) of the base value can be changed by controlling the probability of small hits other than during the prize. That is, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine that can flexibly comply with the standard of the base value and improve the degree of freedom in design.

If the game state is during the special prize, the base calculation area update process is terminated without updating the number of prize balls or the number of out balls, because the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a prize, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S811). The number of prize balls acquired in the base calculation area update process may be the number of prize balls determined to be paid out. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the created payout command may be used. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the payout command that has been transmitted may be used. Further, the number of prize balls may correspond to the payout command in which the main control board 1310 transmits the payout command to the payout control board 951 and receives the confirmation of receipt (ACK) from the payout control board 951. Further, the main control board 1310 may send a payout command to the payout control board 951 and the number of prize balls (the number of paid prize balls) received from the payout control board 951 to report the completion of payout. This variation will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44.

Then, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls to update the total number of prize balls (step S814). It should be noted that it may be determined whether there is a prize ball, and if there is no prize ball, the process of updating the total prize ball number may be skipped. Further, the game balls have won the starting openings 2002 and 2004, but the upper limit value is the hold, and the prize balls are paid out even when the winning in the starting opening is not held, so the total number of prize balls is updated. Further, in a gaming state in which no prize ball is generated even if a game ball is won in the winning opening (for example, when a specific error occurs), the prize ball due to the prize is not generated, and the number of prize balls to be acquired is Since it is 0, the total number of prize balls is not updated. The total prize ball number is recorded in the total prize ball number storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control internal RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 39, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated every time the number of prize balls is calculated.

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the total number of out balls is updated so that the acquired number of out balls is added to the total number of out balls (step S822). As described above, the number of out-balls is detected by the launch ball sensor 1020, the discharge ball sensor 3060, etc., and the switch input processing of step S74 reads the detection signals of these sensors, and if there is a detection signal of the sensor, the out ball count is output. The number of balls=1 is acquired. The total number of out balls is recorded in a total out ball storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 39, the total number of out balls used for calculating the base value is updated every time an out ball is detected. In this way, the base calculation process is executed for each timer interrupt process, the total number of out balls is updated, and the base value is calculated and displayed in the base calculation display process (FIG. 40). Therefore, the base value is displayed without delay. It is possible to judge whether the base is normal or abnormal without delay.

It should be noted that, as in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area updating process (FIG. 46) described later, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal, and if the number of prize balls is abnormal, an abnormality notification command is generated. Alternatively, the prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Further, as in steps S824 to S825, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up. When the prize ball abnormality notification timer times out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is generated. May be stopped.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 executes the base value calculation process in the timer interrupt process, but the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 may execute the base value calculation process. In this case, the main control board 1310 may send a command for notifying the base to the peripheral control section 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, or the command for notifying the base to the peripheral control section 1511 from the payout control section 952. May be sent.

In addition, in one timer interruption process, even if the information of both the winning and winning balls to the winning opening is acquired, the number of winning balls is changed to the total number of winning balls (or the number of winning balls buffer in the embodiment described later). Then, the number of out balls is added to the total number of out balls (or an out ball number buffer in an embodiment described later). In addition, in one timer interrupt process, even if the information of winning a prize for a plurality of winning holes is acquired, the total number of award balls due to a plurality of winning awards is the total award ball number (or, in the embodiment described later, the award ball number buffer). ). Therefore, the base value can be accurately calculated and displayed. For example, when winning is detected for a winning opening sensor with a winning opening of 5 winning balls and a winning opening sensor with a winning opening of 3 winning balls, a total of 8 winning balls are obtained. (Or prize ball count buffer).

Further, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the prize ball number buffer) only when the launch of the game balls is detected. In other words, only the number of prize balls relating to a prize detected within a predetermined time from the detection of the launch ball sensor 1020 may be added to the total prize ball number (or prize ball number buffer). Further, the operation of the firing control unit 953 or the ball launching device 680 is detected, and while the firing control unit 953 or the ball launching device 680 is operating (further, the launching control unit 953 or the ball launching device 680 stops operating. It is also possible to add only the number of prize balls related to the winning detected within a predetermined time (for example, after 5 seconds) to the total prize ball count or the prize ball count buffer. Further, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the prize ball number buffer) when the player operates the firing handle. That is, only the number of prize balls related to winning detected within a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the time when the touch detection sensor 509 of the handle unit 500 is detected to be touched by a palm or a finger is calculated as the total prize ball number ( Alternatively, it may be added to the prize ball number buffer). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the prize ball from being reflected in the base value due to an abnormality in detecting the prize ball in a state where the game ball has not been fired or fraudulent activity, and to prevent an incorrect display of the base value. Further, by using the contact detection sensor 509, it is not necessary to newly provide a sensor for detecting the launch of the game ball, so that it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

In the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 39, the base is calculated by excluding the number of prize balls and the number of out balls in the special prize, but the number of prize balls due to winning in the general winning opening and the starting mouth is counted even in the special prize. The base value may be calculated by counting the number of out balls excluding the number of balls that have won the special winning opening.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation/display process (step S89). In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 40, the base value is calculated every time (every timer interrupt cycle).

First, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated and the base calculation/display processing ends. On the other hand, if the total out ball count is not 0, the total prize ball count is divided by the total out ball count to calculate the base value (step S903). When the total number of prize balls is 0, 0 is calculated as the base value, but the base value may not be calculated. Furthermore, if an abnormal base value is calculated (for example, if the total number of prize balls is larger than the total number of outs and a value of 1 (100%) or more is calculated as the base value), the base value is not calculated. Good. When the base value is expressed as a percentage, the base value is calculated by multiplying the total prize ball count/total out ball count by 100. Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) to be stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217.

The predetermined number multiplied by the total number of prize balls stored in the division input register A131216 controls the number of digits of the calculated base value. For example, if this predetermined number is 100, the base value is calculated to the nearest hundredths, and the base value is not calculated below the decimal point. Further, if this predetermined number is 10,000, the base value is calculated to a decimal two digits with a percentage of 100. That is, when the quotient output from the arithmetic circuit is divided by 100, the base value of the fractional two-digit 100 fraction can be calculated.

Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. In the wait time of 32 clocks from the writing of data to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 to the reading of the data from the division result register A131218, the main control MPU 1311 does not perform any processing but waits for other processing. You may go. For example, a random number for determining a big hit may be updated between the writing of data to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 and the reading of data from the division result register A131218. More specifically, since the hard random number generated by the random number generation circuit 13112 is updated at the timing of the clock cycle (or the signal obtained by dividing the clock cycle) supplied to the main control MPU 1311, the wait time Also the hard random number is updated.

That is, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, even while the arithmetic circuit 13121 is executing the base arithmetic processing, other processing related to the game can be executed in parallel. The other process related to the game includes at least a process of updating a random number for determining the winning or losing. Further, during the calculation (division) process in the calculation circuit 13121, the random number that affects the result of the game is updated once or more.

Further, when the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 causes an error, and therefore it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S908) to notify the player or hall employee of the base. The base notification command may simply notify the base value or may notify the abnormality of the base value. The abnormality of the base value is, for example, a case where the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. It should be noted that the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages based on the degree of deviation of the base value by providing a plurality of allowable ranges.

There are various methods of reporting the base, and one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more methods may be used. For example, the base display (7-segment LED) 1317, the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, 244, etc. may notify the value of the base constantly or at a predetermined timing. Notifying the player of the base value may allow the player to check the condition of the pachinko machine. In that case, you may apply the display mode demonstrated by the accessory ratio to a base value. When notifying the value of the base, the calculated base value is displayed as a percentage on the above-mentioned display device or display device. The value after the decimal point may be rounded down, rounded off, or rounded up. For a display device capable of displaying an image such as a liquid crystal display device 1600, 3114, or 244, the first decimal place is displayed to display more detail. May be.

When displaying the base value on the base display 1317 formed of 7-segment LEDs, the main control MPU 1311 inputs display data to a predetermined register provided in the driver circuit 13171 of the base display 1317. That is, the main control MPU 1311 generates the display data set in the register of the driver circuit 13171 as the base notification command. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, the main control MPU 1311 designates a digit for displaying a numerical value in D15 to D8 by “data n setting”, and designates a display content in D7 to D0. Is generated and written in the shift register 3171.

Further, when displaying the base value on the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, 244, a predetermined reference value (for example, 50%) is provided for the base value, and when the reference value is exceeded, the display mode may be changed. .. For example, it is displayed by blinking a numerical value or changing the color (normally green, above standard, red, etc.). Furthermore, the display mode of the base value may be changed in multiple stages. Specifically, the displayed base value is 30% or more, 25% or more and less than 30%, 20% or more and less than 25%, 15% or more and less than 20%, 10% or more and less than 15%, and less than 10%. It is also possible to divide the display into a plurality of stages and change the emission color such as white, blue, and yellow at each stage for display. Also, at each stage, a self-deprecating comment may be displayed when the base value is low, such as "I feel good," "I'm feeling down," "It's not so good," "It's amazing in some sense." If the base value exceeds the reference value, the pachinko machine is operating differently than expected, and there is a possibility that fraud is being made. For this reason, it is desirable to display a warning such as red. Further, the display mode may be the same as or similar to a weak error that does not stop the progress of the game. Here, the same means that at least one of the display, the lamp, and the sound is the same.

Further, the range of the base value (whether the base value is high or low, whether it is an abnormal value or a normal value, etc.) may be notified by various lamps, liquid crystal display devices, sounds, and the like. Further, if the base cannot be calculated (Yes in step S902) and there is no base value calculated in the past, a base notification command for displaying the base notification not possible on the liquid crystal display device may be generated. By sending a notification command to the generated sub-board, the production device controlled by the sub-board can notify the state of the base, so a wider variety of notifications can be performed than the notification on the main board, and the load on the main board can be reduced. Can be reduced. Also, by notifying that the base display is not possible when nothing is displayed on the base display 1317, it is possible to distinguish between the failure of the base display 1317 and the absence of the base value to be displayed. Further, by displaying the abnormality of the base value on the liquid crystal display device, the abnormality of the base value can be known without looking at the back side of the game board provided with the base display 1317.

The function display unit 1400 may also serve as the base display 1317. In this case, it is advisable to use a specific LED lamp (or 7-segment LED) of the function display unit 1400 for constant notification. Further, it may be notified at a predetermined timing (for example, when the main body frame 4 is opened, while the special symbol variable display game is not executed, the timing at which the special symbol variable display game ends).

The base information may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer installed in the game arcade. In this case, when the base information is output at a predetermined timing (for each predetermined number of prize balls and each predetermined number of out balls) as in a base calculation/display process (FIG. 47, FIG. 49, etc.) described later. Good.

The base information output from the external terminal board 784 may be a binary (high, low) signal indicating whether the calculated base value is higher or lower than a predetermined threshold value. Further, a signal having a length indicating the outline of the calculated base value may be output (for example, 30 ms pulse when the base value is 30% or more and less than 40%). Further, the number of continuous pulses that indicates the outline of the calculated base value may be output (for example, three continuous pulses when the base value is 30% or more and less than 40%).

The base notification command may be generated even when the base value is not updated, and the base notification command may not be generated when the base value is not updated. Even if the base notification command is not generated, the display of the base value is continued.

Further, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 56 and the like, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal, and a base notification command for notifying the abnormality of the base value is generated to notify the player or the hall employee of the base abnormality. You may notify.

Further, whether to inform the player of the base may be determined according to the game state (game state). This is because if the player is constantly informed of the base value, the player's attention may be neglected regarding the effect of the special symbol variable display game, which is the original pleasure of the pachinko machine, and the player's consciousness may be dispersed. Is.

Further, the effect of the special symbol variable display game that is being executed or will be executed in the future may be changed based on the calculated base value. For example, a plurality of display selection tables may be prepared, and effects may be selected from different display selection tables (see FIGS. 64 to 68) depending on the base value.

Further, during the special symbol variable display game, the base value may exceed or fall below a predetermined threshold value (for example, 30%). Therefore, the effect of the special symbol variable display game may be changed when the threshold value is exceeded or dropped during the special symbol variable display game. The effect may be changed in the same manner or may be changed in the different manner when the base value exceeds and rises above a predetermined threshold value.

FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an example of the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value. As shown in FIG. 23, in the present embodiment, the number of prize balls is updated in the base calculation area update process in step S81, and the base value is calculated in the base ratio calculation/display process in step S89.

Therefore, the main control MPU 1311 detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls defined for each winning hole in the prize ball control process (step S80), and calculates the base. The award ball number buffer is updated in the area updating process (step S81). After that, the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation/display processing (step S89), and the payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951 in the output data setting processing (step S90).

When the payout control board 951 stores the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. When the payout control board 951 pays out the prize balls according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of ball payout. The number of unpaid prize balls among the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is backed up by the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951. When the payout control board 951 backs up the number of unpaid prize balls, the payout control board 951 needs to send a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310, but it is not necessary to notify the main control board 1310 of the completion of ball payout. Absent. On the other hand, when backing up the number of unpaid prize balls in the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951 needs to notify the main control board 1310 of the completion of ball payout, but a payout command reception confirmation is transmitted to the main control board 1310. No need.

In the pachinko machine according to the embodiment described above, the base value is calculated during the game without delay, and the state of the game machine can be known in real time. Therefore, the abnormality of the gaming machine can be detected early. For example, when it is determined that the base is abnormal when the base value is lower or higher than a predetermined threshold, the base value is calculated multiple times during one special symbol variable display game, and the base value is abnormally crossed over the predetermined threshold. Even if it is determined that, the base value calculation processing is continuously executed without stopping the game regardless of the abnormality determination. For example, in the special symbol variable display game, there are short time ones such as normal variation and long time ones such as reach variation, and the base value is calculated between the start and end of one special symbol variable display game. When the condition to be satisfied is satisfied multiple times, the base value may be calculated each time, and the base value may be updated and displayed each time. This limits the calculation of the base value during the special symbol variable display game (for example, the base value is calculated and updated only once at the end of variable display), and depending on the calculation timing of the base value, the change in the base value may be long. This is because the time may not be noticed, the information necessary for operating the hall may not be output at an appropriate timing, and the hall may be annoying.

Further, if the game ball that has been launched does not win the starting opening or the general winning opening, the base value decreases. In this state, the player is losing money, so, for example, an additional effect is added to the effect that is being performed on the liquid crystal (for example, an effect related to winning or losing that is not related to a change in the base value, or an appearance that accompanies a change in the base value. A notice effect with a high expectation of a big hit (a notice effect that is not related to a change in the base value, a notice effect with a high expectation such as the next notice effect, or a change in the base value. A notice effect having a high degree of expectation (for example, the base value is displayed in a rainbow display) may be performed among the specific effects that appear. As a result, the player can reduce the discomfort felt by not winning at the starting opening and the general winning opening, and can be motivated to continue the game.

On the other hand, if most of the game balls that have been shot win the starting opening or the general winning opening (if more than the average value of the number of past winnings), the base value rises. In this state, even if the result of the big hit lottery is out of the way, since the player is paid out more game balls than usual, the player's disappointment is reduced. The effect of the variable display game may be changed to an effect with low expectations.

[9-2. Variations on the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value]
Next, with reference to FIG. 42 to FIG. 44, variations of the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value will be described. The outline of the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value in each variation is as follows.
・Figure 41: Calculation of number of prize balls → Update of number of prize balls → Calculation of base value → Transmission of payout command ・Figure 42: Calculation of number of prize balls → Update of number of prize balls → Transmission of payout command → Calculation of base value ・Figure 43: Calculation of number of prize balls →Send payout command →Update number of prize balls →Base value calculation ・Figure 44: Calculate prize ball number → Send payout command →Check command reception →Update number of prize balls →Calculate base value ・Figure 45: Calculate number of prize balls →Send payout command →Payout completion notification→Award ball number update→Base value calculation In addition to the base calculation area update processing shown in FIG. 39 and the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. It is applicable to any of the base calculation area update processing and the base calculation/display processing.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 42, unlike the procedure of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 23, the base calculation area update processing (step S81) is executed at the illustrated position, and the base ratio calculation is performed after the output data setting processing (step S90). The display process (step S89) is executed.

That is, the main control MPU1311 detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls defined for each winning port in the prize ball control process (step S80), and the base calculation area. In the update process (step S81), the total number of prize balls (or the prize ball number buffer in the embodiment described later) is updated. After that, a payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951 in the output data setting process (step S90), and the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation/display process (step S89).

When the payout control board 951 stores the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. When the payout control board 951 pays out the prize balls according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of ball payout. As described above, depending on whether the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951 backs up the unpaid award ball number among the award ball numbers calculated in the award ball control processing (step S80), the payout command reception confirmation or Either of the ball payout completion may be omitted.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 43, unlike the procedure of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 23, after the output data setting processing (step S90), the base calculation area update processing (step S81) and the base ratio calculation/display processing (step S89). To execute.

That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls defined for each winning port in the prize ball control process (step S80), and outputs the output data setting process. In step S90, the payout command is sent to the payout control board 951. After that, in the base calculation area update process (step S81), the total number of prize balls (or a prize ball number buffer in an embodiment described later) is updated with the number of prize balls corresponding to the transmitted payout command, and the base ratio is calculated. The base value is updated in the display process (step S89). The prize ball number buffer may be updated with the number of prize balls corresponding to the created payout command (even if the payout command has not been transmitted), instead of the number of prize balls corresponding to the transmitted payout command.

When the payout control board 951 stores the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. When the payout control board 951 pays out the prize balls according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of ball payout. As described above, depending on which of the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951 backs up the unpaid prize ball number among the prize ball numbers calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80), the payout command reception confirmation or Either of the ball payout completion may be omitted.

The timing at which the main control MPU 1311 receives the command reception confirmation or the ball payout completion notification from the payout control board 951 depends on the processing speed of the payout control board 951 and the operating speed of the payout device 830. The order of the step S81) and the base ratio calculation/display processing (step S89) does not matter.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 44, unlike the procedure of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 23, after the payout command reception confirmation is received from the payout control board 951, the base calculation area update processing (step S81) and the base ratio calculation/display processing are performed. (Step S89) is executed.

That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls defined for each winning port in the prize ball control process (step S80), and outputs the output data setting process. In step S90, the payout command is sent to the payout control board 951.

When the payout control board 951 stores the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310.

When the main control MPU 1311 receives the payout command reception confirmation from the payout control board 951, in the base calculation area update processing (step S81), the total number of prize balls is calculated as the number of award balls corresponding to the payout command for which the command reception confirmation is received. Alternatively, in the embodiment described later, the award ball number buffer) is updated, and the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation/display process (step S89).

When the payout control board 951 pays out the prize balls according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of ball payout. In the procedure shown in FIG. 44, the data of the number of unpaid prize balls is not lost when a power failure occurs, and therefore the payout control board 951 backs up the data of the number of unpaid prize balls. Therefore, although it is necessary to confirm the command reception from the payout control board 951 to the main control board 1310, the ball payout completion notification may be omitted.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 45, unlike the procedure of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 23, after the ball payout completion notification is received from the payout control board 951, the base calculation area update processing (step S81) and the base ratio calculation/display processing are performed. (Step S89) is executed.

That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls defined for each winning port in the prize ball control process (step S80), and outputs the output data setting process. In step S90, the payout command is sent to the payout control board 951.

When the payout control board 951 stores the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. When the payout control board 951 pays out the prize balls according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of ball payout.

When the main control MPU 1311 receives the ball payout completion notification from the payout control board 951, in the base calculation area update process (step S81), the total number of prize balls (or in the embodiment described later, the number of prize balls that have been paid out). The prize ball number buffer) is updated, and the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation/display process (step S89).

Note that in the procedure shown in FIG. 44, the data of the number of unpaid prize balls is not backed up when a power failure occurs, so the main control board 1310 backs up the data of the number of unpaid prize balls. Therefore, the payout control board 951 needs to notify the main control board 1310 of the ball payout completion, but the command reception confirmation may be omitted.

As described above, the pachinko machine of the present embodiment updates the number of prize balls and the number of out balls, which are parameters used in the calculation of the base value, when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, in the processing shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, the number of prize balls is updated when the winning opening sensor detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input processing (step S74). In the process shown in FIG. 43, when the payout command is transmitted, the number of prize balls is updated. Further, in the process shown in FIG. 44, the number of prize balls is updated when the receipt of the payout command is confirmed. In the process shown in FIG. 45, the number of prize balls is updated when the payout of prize balls is completed.

In the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, there is a possibility that the number of prize balls during the prize cannot be accurately counted due to the difference between the timing of determining whether the gaming state is in the prize and the update timing of the number of prize balls. In particular, the problem becomes serious when the time from the winning of the winning hole to the updating of the number of prize balls is long. For this reason, a flag is attached to the winning prize during the special prize, and the flag is carried over to the number of prize balls, the payout command, the reception confirmation, and the payout completion notification according to the prize. Then, by using the flag, it is determined whether or not the prize ball is in the special prize at each stage. In this way, the number of prize balls in the special prize can be accurately counted and updated even if it takes a long time from the winning of the prize to the update of the number of prize balls.

In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the number of prize balls and the number of out balls are updated at these occasions, and the base value is calculated and displayed. That is, since the base value can be known from the gaming machine alone, the time required for nail adjustment in the manufacturing process and the inspection process can be shortened, and the gaming machine can be manufactured efficiently.

Further, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine is out of balls and cannot pay out the prize balls, the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951 holds the number of unpaid balls.

When the main control board 1310 holds the number of unpaid balls, when the winning port sensor detects a winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning port in which the winning is detected is not yet determined. Add to the number of payout balls. A predetermined upper limit may be set for the number of unpaid balls, but the upper limit may not be set. In this case, each time the number of prize balls to be paid out is calculated, the prize ball number buffer or the total prize ball number for calculating the base value may be updated. Further, the number of prize balls may be updated after the payout command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951.

On the other hand, when the payout control board 951 holds the number of unpaid balls, when the winning port sensor detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning port in which the winning is detected. Is sent to the payout control board 951. Even when the pachinko machine is out of balls and cannot pay out the prize balls, the payout command is transmitted, and the number of unpaid balls is held in the payout control board 951. In this case, each time the payout command is transmitted, the prize ball number buffer or the total prize ball number for calculating the base value may be updated.

In addition, when the payout control board 951 receives the payout command, the number of prize balls for calculating the base value may be updated. A predetermined upper limit may be set for the number of prize balls, but the upper limit may not be set. In addition, the number of prize balls for calculating the base value may be updated each time the prize balls are actually paid out. The payout control board 951 transmits the number of prize balls for calculating the base value to the main control board 1310, and the main control board 1310 calculates the base value using the received number of prize balls.

In addition, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 47, without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1, every predetermined number of winnings (for example, 10 times) or every predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). , Steps S891 and S892 may be executed.

As described above, the number of prize balls for calculating the base value can be updated at various timings, but when the number of prize balls is updated, the base value is calculated without delay, and the base indicator 1317 displays the real time. May be displayed, or the base value may be calculated and displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, every one minute).

[9-3. Timing of update of prize balls and calculation of base value]
Next, variations of the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base calculation display process (step S89) will be described with reference to FIGS. The outline of the calculation timing of the base value in each variation is as follows.
・FIG. 39 and FIG. 40: Calculate the base value every timer interrupt cycle. ・FIG. 46 and FIG. 47: Calculate the base value for each predetermined number of prize balls. ・FIG. 48 and FIG. 49: The base value for each predetermined number of out balls. Calculation-Figures 50 and 51: Base value is updated when one of the number of prize balls and the number of out balls reaches a predetermined number.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 46, the number of prize balls is recorded in the prize ball number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when the number of prize balls satisfies the predetermined condition (step S813). Note that, in FIG. 46, the same portions as those in the base calculation area update processing (FIG. 39) described above are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether the prize is being awarded. If the gaming state is during the special prize, it is a prize ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, and therefore the process proceeds to step S824 without updating the prize ball number or the out ball number. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a prize, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S811).

Then, it is determined whether or not there are prize balls, that is, whether or not the acquired number of prize balls is 1 or more (step S812). As a result, if there is no prize ball, the process proceeds to step S818 without updating the prize ball number. On the other hand, if there is a prize ball, the acquired prize ball number is added to the prize ball number buffer (step S813). It should be noted that the number of prize balls may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer installed in the game hall each time it is added to the prize ball number buffer, and the number of prize balls described below becomes equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold Th1. In this case, the threshold value Th1 may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer. Here, the prize ball number buffer is an area provided in the main control built-in RAM 1312 for calculating the base value, and the number of prize balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 is temporarily stored.

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S815). For example, the abnormal number of prize balls means that many prize balls are present at a predetermined time other than during the special prize (for example, in consideration of the number of prize balls at the general winning opening and the starting opening, there are 10 or more winnings per minute). Sphere) is obtained. It should be noted that it is also possible to provide an allowable range of a plurality of stages and judge the degree of abnormality in a plurality of stages based on the degree of deviation from the reference value of the number of prize balls. When the number of prize balls is abnormal, the acquired number of prize balls does not have to be added to the prize ball number buffer in step S813, and the number of prize balls added to the prize ball number buffer in step S813 is subtracted. Good.

As a result, if the number of prize balls is abnormal, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816) to notify the player or the hall employee that the prize balls are abnormal. There are various methods of reporting abnormality, and one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more methods may be used. For example, various lamps, liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, 244, sounds, and the like may be used to notify the abnormality of the number of prize balls. Further, the abnormal number of prize balls may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer installed in the game hall. Furthermore, the number of prize balls determined to be abnormal may not be used for calculating the base value. In this case, prize balls may be paid out to the player. In addition, when the number of prize balls is determined to be abnormal and is notified by the notifying means (sound, lamp, LED, liquid crystal display device, information output from the external terminal board 784, etc.) described above, the number of prize balls determined to be abnormal is determined. It may be used to calculate the base value. Further, the game may be temporarily stopped. Specifically, the main control board 1310 initializes all the data in the main control built-in RAM 1312 and all the data in the RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 even if the RAM clear switch is not operated. Then, in the initial state, the game is started from the operation confirmation. As another method of stopping the game, after temporarily stopping the game (for example, stopping the variable display of the special symbol), the error notification is stopped, and then the game is resumed by returning to the original state. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit outputs a power failure detection signal without detecting a drop in the power supply voltage, and the main control MPU 1311 backs up all the data in the main control built-in RAM 1312 and stops the game. Then, after the error notification is finished, the data in the main control internal RAM 1312 is restored from the backup area and the game is restarted. At this time, since the peripheral control unit 1511 waits for a command from the main control board 1310 in the same state, the suspended game is restarted by restarting the operation of the main control board 1310. However, since 100 game balls (that is, out balls) may be launched into the game area 5a and all the game balls may enter the general winning opening or the starting opening, the abnormality in the number of winning balls is notified. It is desirable that the mode to be carried out is such that the degree of urgency is lower than that of a normal error (such as a magnetic sensor error) and that the mode of operation is quiet (for example, a lower volume or a lower light amount than a normal error notification). Also, the display time may be the same as a normal error or may be a short time. In some cases, the notification time may be set to 0 second and notification may not be performed.

Then, the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817), and counting of the prize ball abnormality notification time is started.

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the total number of out balls is updated so that the acquired number of out balls is added to the total number of out balls (step S822).

Then, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer started in step S817 has timed up (step S824). When the prize ball abnormality notification timer times out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped (step S825). In step S824, the end of the notification is determined by the time of the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality for a predetermined time, but the notification end is determined so that the prize ball abnormality is notified by the predetermined number of shot balls. May be. Further, the abnormality may be continuously notified until the hall employee confirms.

In the base calculation area update processing shown in FIG. 46, it is determined in step S985 whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal. However, after the number of out balls is acquired, the number of prize balls is abnormal in comparison with the number of out balls. Whether (that is, whether there is an abnormality in the base value) may be determined. For example, when the number of award balls exceeding the number of out balls is counted in a predetermined time, or considering the number of award balls of a general winning opening or a starting mouth, an out ball is won at a high rate (for example, 50% or more). If you are.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation/display processing (step S89). In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 47, the base value is updated at the timing when the number of prize balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 47, the same parts as those in the base calculation/display processing (FIG. 40) described above are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). Various methods can be used to determine whether the prize ball count buffer value is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1. For example, the award ball number buffer value may be compared with the threshold value Th1 or may be determined by the value of a predetermined bit of the award ball number storage area (specifically, the award ball number storage area is 8 bits. If it is configured and the most significant bit becomes 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more). In addition, the determination result obtained by comparing the number of award balls and the threshold Th1 is recorded in a flag in the base calculation area update process (FIG. 46), and in the base calculation/display process (FIG. 47), the award number buffer value is calculated by the flag. May be determined to be equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1.

If the prize ball count buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the time to calculate the base value, and the base calculation/display processing ends.

On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or larger than the threshold value Th1, the threshold value Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold value Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). That is, in a gaming situation in which the number of prize balls counted from a predetermined starting point satisfies a predetermined condition (the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or more than the threshold Th1), the fractional part of the prize ball number is set. Remaining (fraction number subtracted threshold Th1 from prize ball number buffer is left in prize ball number buffer), other part is stored in memory (threshold Th1 is added to total prize ball number) and used for calculation of base value To execute the process. Specifically, when the threshold value Th1 is 100, the prize ball number buffer value is 99, and when five prize balls are generated by winning the general winning opening, the prize ball number buffer value is 104. However, 100 pieces are moved to the total number of prize balls and used for the calculation of the base value, and the remaining four pieces are left in the prize ball number buffer. In this case, the count of the four prize balls left in the prize ball number buffer is used for calculating the base value when the prize ball number buffer value becomes equal to or more than the threshold Th1. Further, although the threshold value Th1=100 has been described, other numerical values such as 1000 may be used. However, if a large threshold Th1 is set such that the base is not calculated even if a big hit is obtained, the detection of fraud may be delayed, so the threshold Th1 is equal to or less than the number of prize balls paid out in one big hit (a plurality of types). If there is a big jackpot (for example, a big jackpot of 4 rounds and 8 rounds), it is better to set it to the minimum value or less of the number of award balls. Also, from the viewpoint of detecting fraud early, it is preferable to update the base value frequently. For example, the threshold value Th1 is preferably 10 instead of 100, because the base value is updated frequently.

It should be noted that steps S891 and S892 may be executed every predetermined number of winnings (for example, 10 times) without comparing the prize ball number buffer value with the threshold value Th1. Further, steps S891 and S892 may be executed every predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) without comparing the prize ball number buffer value with the threshold Th1. This predetermined time may be measured by a timer operated by the main control MPU 1311, or may be measured by the output of RTC (real time clock).

Then, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated and the base calculation/display processing ends. On the other hand, if the total out ball count is not 0, the total prize ball count is divided by the total out ball count to calculate the base value (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) to be stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. If the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error (or indefinite), so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

In addition to the case where the total number of out balls is 0 and the calculated base value becomes an abnormal value, the base value may not be calculated and the base calculation area 13128 may not be updated. For example, when the total number of out balls is less than or equal to the total number of prize balls, the base value is 100% or more, and the number of prize balls is equal to or more than the number of shot balls (out balls), and the game is normally performed. Since it is not in the state in which it is not present, it is not necessary to store a numerical value in the division input registers 131216 and 131217 and to calculate the base value. When the base value is calculated and the value read from the division result register A131218 is 100% or more, the base calculation area 13128 may not be updated with the value read from the division result register A131218.

Further, the abnormality of the base value may be determined with 1500% as the threshold value. Since the theoretical upper limit of the base value of a pachinko machine with a maximum number of prize balls of 15 for the winning hole is 1500%, a base value exceeding 1500% is an impossible value and the gaming machine is abnormal. It can be determined that there is. Also in this case, the base value may not be calculated, or the base calculation area 13128 may not be updated with the value read from the division result register A131218.

Further, the threshold value for determining the abnormality of the base value may be another value. A normal value (for example, 30% to 50%) of the base value in the normal operation of the pachinko machine is set, and if it is out of the range of the normal value, the base calculation area 13128 is set to the value read from the division result register A131218. It is not necessary to update the display of the base value without updating.

Although the case where the base value is not displayed has been described above, the abnormal base value may be displayed even if the calculated base value is an abnormal value.

Note that the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are the same as the total number of balls since the pachinko machine 1 started operating, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 52. It may be initialized at a timing (for example, every predetermined number of prize balls or every predetermined number of out balls).

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S908) to notify the player or hall employee of the base.

As described above, the pachinko machine of the present embodiment determines whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal each time the number of prize balls is acquired, and thus fraud can be detected early. This is because in a normal game, a large number of game balls (for example, 50% of the number of shot balls) are not won in the general winning opening 2001 and the starting openings 2002 and 2004 with a high probability. Therefore, an abnormality in the winning of the winning opening (general winning opening 2001 or starting openings 2002, 2004) that is always open is determined and notified.

Further, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the base value is calculated when the number of prize balls satisfies the predetermined condition, so that the accurate base value can be displayed at an appropriate timing.

In the example shown in FIG. 46 and FIG. 47, the base value is calculated at the timing when the number of prize balls reaches a predetermined number, so that the calculation amount required for calculating the base value (for example, the base value is calculated for each prize ball) (for example, The load on the main control MPU 1311) can be reduced. When a new base value is calculated, a base notification command for notifying the calculated base value is generated to notify the new base value, but until then, the conventional base value is notified. To be done.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 48, the out-ball number is recorded in the out-ball number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when the out-ball number satisfies the predetermined condition (step S819). Note that, in FIG. 48, the same step numbers are given to the same portions as the above-described base calculation area update processing, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether the prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether there is a prize ball (step S812). If the result of determination in step S812 is that there are prize balls, the acquired prize ball number is added to the total prize ball number (step S814). That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 48, every time the number of prize balls is calculated, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated.

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S815). If the number of prize balls is abnormal, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817). ).

Then, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818). The acquired number of out balls is added to the out ball count buffer (step S819).

After that, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up (step S824), and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to stop the prize ball abnormality notification ( Step S825).

In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the base value is calculated for each predetermined number of prize balls. For this reason, for example, when a game ball is won in the starting opening and it is determined that the prefetch effect is to be generated, and the display mode of the hold display is displayed in a mode different from usual (blinking display, red hold, etc.), The player expects that the special symbol variable display game corresponding to the prefetched hold will be a big hit, but if the special symbol variable display game is lost, the player will be discouraged. Even in such a case, if the base value is calculated for each predetermined number of prize balls as in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned discouragement of the player can be reduced. This is because the calculation of the base value is delayed from the prize ball generation timing, and the base value increased by the prize ball due to winning the start opening is notified. That is, even when it is determined that the look-ahead effect is executed at the time of winning at the starting opening, even if the number of prize balls paid out at the time of winning at the starting opening is added, the above-described predetermined number (for example, threshold Th1=100) is obtained. If not reached, the base value is not updated. That is, the base value displayed to the player has not changed. However, since the prize ball was obtained, the base value should rise (only the lower numerical value changes due to the number of display digits, and the display may not change). For this reason, even if the above-mentioned prefetching effect is off, the player thinks that the base value will increase later (that is, the condition is good), and can suppress a decrease in interest. In other words, even if it is determined to execute the prefetching effect, the base value is not updated when the prize ball buffer value does not reach the predetermined number (threshold Th1). Further, when it is determined that the prefetch effect is executed and the prize ball buffer value reaches the predetermined number, the calculation of the base value may be delayed until the prize ball buffer value reaches the predetermined number next time. ..

The player may be allowed to select whether to delay the calculation of the base value or to calculate without delay. For example, at the start of the game, the operation button 220C can be selected. The base value calculation timing may be determined by lottery. Further, when it is decided to perform the prefetching effect, it is preferable to execute an effect capable of notifying the delay of the calculation of the base value. It should be noted that if the reserved storage of the special symbol variable display game has reached the upper limit, the jackpot lottery is not executed even if the winning is made at the starting opening. Even in this case, since the prize balls are paid out in accordance with the winning of the winning opening, the number of the prize balls is counted and used for the calculation of the base value. In addition, when a specific error is made, even if the winning opening is won or the general winning opening is won, it is treated that there is no winning, and if the winning balls are not paid out, the number of winning balls is not counted, and depending on the winning, the base value Is not updated.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation/display processing (step S89). In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 49, the base value is updated at the timing when the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. Note that, in FIG. 49, the same steps as those of the base calculation/display processing described above are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of out balls stored in the out ball number buffer is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). Various methods can be used to determine whether the out-ball count buffer value is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold Th2. For example, the number of out balls and the threshold value Th2 may be compared, or the determination may be made based on the value of a predetermined bit of the storage area for the number of out balls (specifically, the storage area for the number of out balls is composed of 8 bits. , If the most significant bit becomes 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more). In addition, the determination result obtained by comparing the number of out balls and the threshold Th2 in the base calculation area update process (FIG. 48) is recorded in a flag, and in the base calculation/display process (FIG. 49), the number of out balls is predetermined by the flag. It may be determined whether or not the threshold Th2 is equal to or more than the threshold Th2.

If the out-ball count buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the time to calculate the base value, and the base calculation/display processing is ended.

On the other hand, if the out-ball count buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the threshold Th2 is added to the total out-ball count (step S899), and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out-ball count buffer (step S900). Note that steps S899 and S900 may be executed every predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) without comparing the out-ball count buffer value with the threshold Th2.

Then, the total prize ball count is divided by the total out ball count to calculate a base value (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) to be stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic operation circuit 13121 causes an error, so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

The total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are cumulative values from when the pachinko machine 1 started to operate, but the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are the same timing (for example, a predetermined prize). It may be initialized for each number of balls or for each predetermined number of out balls.

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S908) to notify the player or hall employee of the base. The base notification command may be one that simply notifies the base value, one that notifies the base value with a specific effect, or one that notifies the abnormality of the base value.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the base value can be updated and displayed every time the number of out balls (the number of shot balls) reaches a predetermined number. Therefore, the base value can be displayed at an appropriate timing. In addition, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which fun is pursued.

In addition, the number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls each time a prize ball (winning prize detection, payout command transmission, payout command arrival, prize ball payout completion, etc.) is awarded. This is because the base value may not be calculated correctly if it is confirmed whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied when adding the number of prize balls (for example, whether there is an out ball corresponding to the prize ball). For example, even if the shooting is not carried out for a predetermined time (about 1 minute), the ball-hanging (grape) state caused by the game ball catching on the nail arranged in the game area is resolved, and the game ball is delayed in the winning opening. This is because there are cases where a prize is won. Therefore, it is desirable to update the number of prize balls regardless of whether or not there are out balls.

When both the out-ball number and the out-ball number buffer value are smaller than the threshold Th2, it may be displayed that the out-ball number buffer value is a fraction smaller than the threshold Th2, or the out-ball number buffer value may be displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 48 and FIG. 49, the base value is calculated at the timing when the number of out balls reaches a predetermined number, and thus the calculation of the base value is required more than the case of calculating the base value every time the out balls are detected. The amount of calculation (for example, the load on the main control MPU 1311) can be reduced. When a new base value is calculated, a base notification command for notifying the calculated base value is generated to notify the new base value, but until then, the conventional base value is notified. To be done.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 50, the number of prize balls is recorded in the prize ball number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. , Record the number of out balls in the out ball buffer. Note that, in FIG. 50, the same portions as those in the base calculation area update processing described above are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether the prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether there is a prize ball (step S812). Then, if there is a prize ball, the acquired prize ball number is added to the prize ball number buffer (step S813).

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S815). If the number of prize balls is abnormal, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817). ).

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the acquired number of out balls is added to the out ball number buffer (step S819).

After that, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up (step S824), and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to stop the prize ball abnormality notification ( Step S825).

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation/display process (step S89). In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 51, the base value is updated at a timing when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 51, the same steps as those of the base calculation/display processing described above are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the time to update the total prize ball number, and the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or larger than the threshold value Th1, the threshold value Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold value Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out-ball number buffer value is added to the total out-ball number (step S893), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Note that steps S891 to S894 may be executed for each predetermined number of winnings or for each predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value with the threshold Th1.

Then, it is determined whether the number of out balls stored in the out ball number buffer is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). If the out-ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th2, it is not the time to update the total out-ball number, and the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the out ball count buffer value is greater than or equal to the threshold Th2, the prize ball count buffer value is added to the total prize ball count (step S897), and the prize ball count buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold Th2 is added to the total out ball count (step S899), and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out ball count buffer (step S900).

Then, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation/display processing ends. On the other hand, if the total out ball count is not 0, the total prize ball count is divided by the total out ball count to calculate the base value (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) to be stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic operation circuit 13121 causes an error, so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S908) to notify the player or hall employee of the base. The base notification command may simply notify the base value or may notify the abnormality of the base value. The base notification command may be generated each time the base value is calculated, or the base value may be calculated or the base notification command may not be generated.

In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 51, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of prize balls or the total number of out balls is not updated. That is, if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, and the base value maintains the same value. On the other hand, if the total number of prize balls or the total number of out balls is updated, the base value is updated to a different value.

FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a specific structure of a work area for storing each data in the base calculation area 13128.

The data of the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls of the base calculation area 13128 is based on the base calculation area update processing and the base calculation/display processing (FIG. 39, FIG. 46, FIG. 47, FIG. 48) executed by the main control MPU 1311. 49, 51, etc.) and read by the base calculation/display processing (FIG. 40, FIG. 47, FIG. 49, FIG. 51, etc.). Further, the data of the award ball count buffer and the out ball count buffer of the base calculation area 13128 is written in the base calculation area update process (FIG. 46, FIG. 48, FIG. 50, etc.) executed by the main control MPU 1311 to calculate the base calculation. -Read by display processing (FIG. 47, FIG. 49, FIG. 51, etc.). Therefore, the base calculation area update process and the base calculation/display process can be configured separately from the timer interrupt process (game control program), and the game product ratio calculation/display process is shared by game machines with different specifications. it can.

FIG. 52A shows an example of a work area structure of the simplest method. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52A, the prize ball number buffer, the total prize ball number, the out ball number buffer, the prize ball number buffer, the specific prize ball number buffer, the total out ball number and the base are stored. The prize ball number buffer temporarily stores the number of prize balls paid out to the player other than during the special prize, and is based on the condition that the number of prize balls satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, every predetermined number of prize balls). Is used to calculate The total number of prize balls is the total number of prize balls paid out to the player other than during the special prize. The out-ball number buffer is the number of game balls shot by the player other than during the prize, and is used to calculate the base when the out-ball number satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, every predetermined number of out-balls). To be The winning ball number buffer temporarily stores the number of balls winning the general winning opening and the starting opening. The specific winning ball number buffer temporarily stores the number of balls won in a specific general winning opening or a starting opening. The winning ball number buffer is used when the number of out balls is counted by the number of balls passing through the outlet (FIGS. 55 and 56). The specific winning ball number buffer is used when the number of out balls is corrected by the number of winning balls to the specific general winning opening (FIGS. 71 and 72 ). The total number of out balls is the total number of game balls shot by the player other than during the special prize. The base is calculated by total prize balls/total out balls×100, and is a numerical value expressed as a percentage, and is calculated in step S903 of the base calculation/display processing.

In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52(A), the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls correspond to each area of the total accumulation of FIG. 52(B) described later, and each has a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes. It is possible to store numerical values up to 16777215 or 429496295 in decimal. Since these data are not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a large storage area is prepared so that the data can be stored for a long time. The base is a 1-byte storage area corresponding to the total sum of the base of FIG. 52(B), which will be described later, and can store up to 255 decimal numbers. It should be noted that a capacity that allows the base value to be recorded with a decimal number may be allocated.

FIG. 52B shows another example of the structure of the work area using the ring buffer. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52(B), a prize ball number buffer, a total prize ball number, an out ball number buffer, a prize ball number buffer, a specific prize ball number buffer, a total out ball number and a base are stored. Each data item is the same as the description in FIG. 52(A). The storage areas for the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are n storage areas for each predetermined number of prize balls (or for each predetermined number of out balls, for each predetermined time) (for example, for every 6000 prize balls). It is composed of a ring buffer having (n=10 storage areas), and when the number of prize balls reaches a predetermined number (6000), the write pointers for all the data are moved to change the storage area where the data is updated. .. Then, after a predetermined number of prize balls worth of data are stored in the n-th storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area. The writing pointer may be moved when the data other than the number of prize balls (number of out balls, predetermined time, etc.) reaches a predetermined number.

The write pointer and the read pointer of the ring buffer are common to all the data, and the write pointers of all the data strings move for each predetermined number of prize balls. The read pointer also moves as the write pointer moves. The read pointer points to the storage area immediately before the write pointer. This is because the base value is calculated using the latest data for 6000 prize balls.

The total number of total prize balls and total number of out balls is the total value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the value of the base total is the total number of total prize balls and total out balls. It is a value calculated from the value, and when the ring buffer goes round and one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared to write new data, the data in the cleared area is excluded and the cumulative value is Recalculated. The total sum of each data is the total value of all data collected in the past, the value of the base total sum calculated from the total value is the value calculated from the total sum of each data, and the ring buffer Even if one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared to write new data in one cycle, the total cumulative value including the original data in the cleared area is calculated.

In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52B, the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls in the ring buffer are each a storage area of 2 bytes, and a decimal number up to 65535 can be stored. Since the total is the total of data for 6000 prize balls×n (60,000 prize balls when n=10), a large storage area is prepared. The total of the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls is a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes, respectively, and a decimal number of 16777215 or 429496295 can be stored. Since the total sum is not erased unless data is abnormal, a larger storage area is prepared so that long-term data can be stored. The base total and the total total are each 1-byte storage areas, and can store up to 255 decimal numbers. It should be noted that a capacity that allows the base value to be recorded with a decimal number may be allocated.

In the data structure shown in FIG. 52A, the stored data is not deleted, so even if the data in the base calculation area 13128 is deleted every predetermined period (for example, one day, one week, one month). Good. Similarly, the total sum shown in FIG. 52B may be deleted every predetermined period.

If the data in the base calculation area 13128 or the calculated base value is an abnormal value, the abnormal value may be deleted. Not only the abnormal value, but all data in the base calculation area 13128 may be deleted. Further, it may be notified that the data of the base calculation area 13128 or the calculated base value is abnormal. Further, the check code may be used to inspect the data in the backup area, the normal backup area data may be copied to the main area, and then the base value may be calculated again.

[9-4. Display base value]
The base value calculated as described above may continue to be displayed while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, but in the state where the main body frame 4 is closed and the game is possible, the base display 1317 is visually recognized. Since it is not possible, the 7-segment LED 13172 may be turned off to reduce the power consumption of the gaming machine. Naturally, the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base calculation/display process (step S89) are executed even when the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned off.

The base display 1317 may always display the base value or may display the base value by operating the display switch 1318. For example, when the display switch 1318 which is a push button switch is pressed, the display of the base value is started, and after the display for a predetermined time, the display is turned off. The base value may be displayed on the base display 1317 if the display switch 1318 is operated while the main body frame opening switch (not shown) is detecting that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2. That is, even if the display switch 1318 is operated unless the main body frame 4 is open, the base display 1317 does not display the accessory ratio.

Further, when the main body frame 4 is opened, a predetermined display may be provided on all digits so that it can be confirmed that the base display 1317 is operating normally. For example, as shown in FIG. 36(B), "-" may be displayed in all digits, or all segments may be lit.

Then, when the body frame 4 is closed, a predetermined display for confirming the normal operation of the base display 1317 is displayed (FIG. 36(E)), and the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned off after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed. , It is good to reduce the power consumption of the game machine. This base non-display state is the same as that after completion of the initial setting (FIG. 36(B)), but may be a different mode and may be a mode that can be distinguished from the displayed base value.

The function display unit 1400 may also serve as the base display 1317. The function display unit 1400 normally displays the game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, but when the main body frame opening switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, The control board 1310 switches the display so that the function display unit 1400 displays the base value. Even if the display of the function display unit 1400 is switched by opening the main body frame 4, the progress of the game may be continued. By continuing the progress of the game, it is possible to quickly switch from the base display to the display of the game state when the main body frame 4 is closed. For example, when the main frame 4 is opened during the special symbol variable display game, the base value is displayed, but when the main frame 4 is closed before the elapse of the variable time, the variable display for the remaining time can be performed. .. Since the special symbol displayed on the function display unit 1400 is synchronized with the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the decorative symbol is stopped at the timing when the special symbol variable display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped. Therefore, even if the function display unit 1400 displays the base value, the player can be configured not to feel uncomfortable.

Further, even when the main body frame 4 is closed, the calculated base value (in the above-described embodiment, the character ratio) may be displayed on the base display (character ratio display) 1317. In this way, the base value (characteristics ratio) can be confirmed without opening the main body frame 4, so that the reduction in the operation of the gaming machine can be suppressed. Further, it is not necessary to determine whether the body frame 4 is open. Further, in the island facility in which the pachinko machines are installed on both sides, when the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine on one side is opened, the back side of the pachinko machines installed on the other side can be seen. In such a gaming machine, by opening the main frame 4 of the pachinko machine on one side, it is possible to check the bases (proportion of character parts) of the two pachinko machines installed back to back. Further, when the base value is displayed even when the main body frame 4 is closed, the base value is displayed in a form that can be recognized by the player (for example, on a display device for displaying the effect of the special symbol variable display game or a display device attached to the frame). Should be displayed. This is because the base value can be used as a barometer indicating the condition of a pachinko machine and is worth seeing by the player. When the base value is calculated by the main control board 1310, a signal for displaying the base value may be transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. When the payout control board 951 calculates the base value, a signal for displaying the base value may be transmitted from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510. Further, a signal for displaying the base value may be transmitted via the relay board.

Further, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the light amount (luminance) of the base display 1317 does not change even when shifting to the energy saving mode. This is because if the light amount of the base display 1317 is reduced during the energy saving mode, it becomes difficult to confirm the base value by the base display 1317 when adjusting the pachinko machine other than the opening time.

Specifically, the gaming machine of the present embodiment is in a standby state when a predetermined time elapses after the game balls do not win any of the winning openings and the reserved storage of the special symbol variable display game is exhausted. .. In the standby state, the peripheral control unit 1511 continuously outputs the BGM that is output in so-called normal fluctuation. Furthermore, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed in the standby state, the demo state is entered. In the demo state, a video showing the motif of the game machine is played, and the game machine is explained. Furthermore, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses in the demo state, the energy saving mode is entered (it is not necessary to distinguish between the demo state and the energy saving mode). In the energy saving mode, in order to suppress power consumption, the light amount of the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, 244 and various lamps controlled by the peripheral control unit 1511 is reduced. However, since the power consumption of the display devices (the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317) controlled by the main control board 1310 is smaller than the power consumption of the entire pachinko machine, it is necessary to reduce the light amount of these display devices. Good. Further, if the light quantity of the function display unit 1400 is not reduced, a player who is going to play on an empty table can easily see the result of the last lottery.

Also, even if the game ball does not win at the starting opening or general winning opening, if the game ball is launched toward the game area and an out ball is detected, the displayed base value can be recalculated and updated. There is a nature. If the number of prize balls does not increase even if the number of out balls increases when the game balls are fired, the calculated base value will decrease, but some players will be in revenge.

By informing such a player of the state of the game on the function display unit 1400 that also serves as the base display 1317, the interest of the game can be revived. That is, even if the player shifts to the demo mode or the energy saving mode, the display mode of the display unit that displays the base value is maintained at the light amount before the shift to the demo mode or the energy saving mode, or the light amount is increased so that the player can It is good to be able to confirm the base value properly.

In this way, we explained the maintenance or increase of the light quantity of the display unit that displays the base value, but with an emphasis on the reduction of energy consumption, even if the light quantity of the display unit that displays the base value is decreased or turned off. Good. For example, a predetermined operation during the energy saving mode (a firing stop button that forcibly stops the firing, an operation button that changes the displayed effect, a RAM clear button that clears the contents of RAM, a power supply to the game machine It is preferable to reduce the light amount of the display device on which the base value is displayed, when the operation of the operation means provided in the gaming machine such as the supply adjustment button for switching the presence/absence of) is detected. Furthermore, not only during the energy saving mode, but when performing the above-mentioned predetermined operation, the light amount of both the lamps that reduce power consumption and the display that displays the base value is reduced or turned off during the energy saving mode. Good.

When reducing or turning off the light amount of both the lamp and the display unit that displays the base value, the light amount of the lamp that reduces power consumption during the energy saving mode is reduced before the display unit that displays the base value. It may be turned on or off. In this case, the amount of light of a lamp or the like that consumes a large amount of power is first reduced, and the effect of greatly reducing the amount of power consumed is achieved. In addition, the display unit that displays the base value may be turned off or turned off before the lamp, etc., and the light intensity of the display unit that displays the base value may be turned off. Produce an effect. In addition, the lamps that reduce power consumption and the display that displays the base value may be simultaneously reduced or turned off during the energy saving mode. In this case, the amount of power consumption can be reduced and the energy saving effect is high. .. In addition, before and after the time (meaning “previously” and “simultaneously”) in these explanations includes the order of the timing of internal processing and the order of appearance by the player.

Further, the display mode of the base value may be set in a plurality of stages, and the display mode of each stage may be changed. Specifically, the displayed base value is 30% or more, 25% or more and less than 30%, 20% or more and less than 25%, 15% or more and less than 20%, 10% or more and less than 15%, and less than 10%. Divide into multiple stages. The indicator for displaying the base value may be configured by multi-color LEDs, and the emission color may be changed to white, blue, or yellow at each stage for display. In addition, the display that displays the base value is composed of a liquid crystal display device, and the base value is low at each stage, such as "I feel good," "I'm feeling down," "It's not dangerous," "It's amazing in a sense," etc. Occasionally you may display self-deprecating comments. Further, the effect of adding a comment as described above may be executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 on which the decorative pattern is displayed, without changing the display mode of the display device that displays the base value.

[9-5. Calculation of base value using number of spheres passing through the exit]
Next, further variations of the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base calculation display process (step S89) will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56. In the processing described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 56, the number of out balls is calculated using the number of winning balls and the number of balls passing through the out mouth, and the base value is calculated. The outline of the calculation timing of the base value in each variation is as follows.
54 and FIG. 40: Calculate the base value every timer interrupt period. FIG. 55 and FIG. 56: Calculate the base value for each predetermined number of prize balls and each predetermined number of out balls. The base value for each predetermined number of prize balls. The description of the pattern for calculating and the pattern for calculating the base value for each predetermined number of out balls is omitted, but it can be realized by combining FIGS. 54 to 56.

If the out-ball passing ball sensor 1021 provided near the out-port 1111 detects the out-ball, there is a problem that an accurate out-ball number cannot be counted. This means that the game ball shot toward the game area 5a flows out of the game area 5a via the general winning opening 2001, the starting opening 2002, and the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 in addition to the out opening 1111. Therefore, the out-passage ball sensor 1021 cannot accurately count the number of game balls shot toward the game area 5a. Therefore, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the number of winning balls and the number of balls passing through the outlet are accurately calculated, and the base value is accurately calculated.

FIG. 53 is a front view showing another example of the game board.

The game board of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment has a structure similar to that of the game board shown in FIG. 10, but is provided at the bottom of the game area 5a and passes through the out port 1111 to flow out from the game area 5a (out. An out-passage ball sensor 1021 for detecting the number of pass-through balls is provided. The out-passage ball sensor 1021 may be installed at a position where the player can see through the out-port 1111. By placing the out-mouth passing ball sensor 1021 at a position where the player can see through the out-port 1111, it can be made aware that the out-balls are being counted, that is, the base is being calculated.

Further, the out-passage ball sensor 1021 may be installed at a position not seen by the player, such as a collecting gutter in which game balls flowing down from the game area 5a through the out-port 1111 are aligned. If the player places the ball in a position invisible to the player, the player does not need to be aware of the counting of out balls. Further, by providing the out-passage ball sensor 1021 on the back side of the out-port 1111 it is possible to sufficiently secure a place for disposing the liquid crystal display device and the accessory (movable body), and to improve the degree of freedom in designing the game board 5. it can. In addition, in order to prevent double counting of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the out-passage ball sensor 1021 is rolling on a rolling surface so that the game ball that has passed through the out-passage ball sensor 1021 does not bounce. It is better to make it sloped or curved.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 54, the number of prize balls, the number of out-pass balls, and the number of prize-winning balls are acquired in order to calculate the base value using the number of out-pass balls at each timer interrupt cycle. In FIG. 54, the same step numbers are assigned to the same portions as the base calculation area update processing described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether the prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize is acquired (step S811), and the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated every time the number of prize balls is calculated. It should be noted that it may be determined whether there is a prize ball, and if there is no prize ball, the process of updating the total prize ball number may be skipped.

After that, the number of out-passing balls is acquired (step S818), and the number of winning balls is acquired (step S820). Then, the sum of the number of balls passing through the outlet and the number of winning balls is added to the total number of out balls (step S822). That is, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 54, the total number of out balls used for calculating the base value is updated every time an out ball or a winning ball is detected.

It is to be noted that, as in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area update process (FIG. 46) described above, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal, and if the number of prize balls is abnormal, an abnormality notification command is generated. Alternatively, the prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Further, as in steps S824 to S825 of FIG. 46, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up. When the prize ball abnormality notification timer times out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated. The ball abnormality notification may be stopped.

After recording the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54, the base value can be calculated by the base calculation/display process shown in FIG.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 55, the number of prize balls is recorded in the prize ball number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. , The number of out-passing balls is recorded in the out-ball number buffer, and the number of winning balls is recorded in the winning ball number buffer. In FIG. 55, the same parts as those in the base calculation area updating process described above are designated by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether the prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether there is a prize ball (step S812). Then, if there is a prize ball, the acquired prize ball number is added to the prize ball number buffer (step S813).

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S815). If the number of prize balls is abnormal, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817). ).

After that, the number of out-out passage balls is acquired (step S818), and the acquired number of out-out passage balls is added to the out-ball number buffer (step S819). Then, the number of winning balls is acquired (step S820), and the obtained number of winning balls is added to the winning ball buffer (step S821).

After that, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up (step S824), and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to stop the prize ball abnormality notification ( Step S825).

In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54, the sum of the acquired out-passage ball count and the winning ball count is added to one storage area (total out ball count), and the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 55 is performed. Then, the acquired number of out-passing balls and the number of winning balls are added to another storage area (out-ball number buffer, winning-ball number buffer). In this way, the number of out-passing balls and the number of winning balls may be recorded in one storage area or in another storage area.

Further, in the base calculation area update processing shown in FIG. 55, when the acquired number of out-passing balls and the number of winning balls are recorded in different storage areas, the number of out-balls is increased by 1 when the winning hole is won. The counting of the number of spheres passing through the outlet and the counting of the number of winning spheres are performed simultaneously (within one timer interrupt process), but the base value is calculated after updating both the out-number-of-balls buffer and the winning sphere-number buffer. At that time, if both the out ball count buffer and the winning ball count buffer cannot be updated in one timer interrupt process, the number of out-passing balls is given priority, or the winning ball count is given priority. It is better not to be decided by lottery, but to be decided in advance. At that time, if the process related to the prize ball is prioritized over the other processes, the prize ball payout process can be executed quickly, but it may be appropriately determined according to the specifications of the gaming machine.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation/display process (step S89). In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 56, the base value is updated at a timing when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 56, the same parts as those in the base calculation/display processing described above are designated by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the time to update the total prize ball number, and the process advances to step S896. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or larger than the threshold value Th1, the threshold value Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold value Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out-ball number buffer value is added to the total out-ball number (step S893), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Note that steps S891 to S894 may be executed for each predetermined number of winnings or for each predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value with the threshold Th1.

Then, it is determined whether the sum of the number of out-out passage balls stored in the out-ball number buffer and the number of winning balls stored in the winning ball number buffer is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S896). ). The total of the number of out-passing balls and the number of winning balls is the number of game balls that have flowed into the game area and is the number of out balls. If the result of determination is that the calculated out-ball number is smaller than the threshold value Th2, it is not the time to update the total out-ball number, so the flow proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the calculated number of out balls is greater than or equal to the threshold Th2, the award ball number buffer value is added to the total award ball number (step S897), and the award ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold Th2 is added to the total number of out balls (step S899), the winning ball number buffer is set to 0, the winning ball number buffer value is added to the out ball number buffer, and the threshold Th2 is subtracted (step S901). .. Note that steps S896 to S901 may be executed for each predetermined number of winnings or for each predetermined time without comparing the number of out balls (out ball number buffer value + winning ball number buffer value) with the threshold Th2.

Then, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation/display processing ends. On the other hand, if the total out ball count is not 0, the total prize ball count is divided by the total out ball count to calculate the base value (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) to be stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic operation circuit 13121 causes an error, so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S908) to notify the player or hall employee of the base.

In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 56, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of prize balls or the total number of out balls is not updated. That is, if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, and the base value maintains the same value. On the other hand, if the total number of prize balls or the total number of out balls is updated, the base value is updated to a different value.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the number of winning balls is added to the number of out-passing balls to calculate the number of out balls, so the number of out balls is accurately counted, and the base value is accurately calculated. it can. Further, by confirming the base value in the manufacturing process or the inspection process of the gaming machine, it is possible to confirm whether the winning opening switch, the base display 1317 and the process for calculating the base value are normal.

[9-6. Notification of abnormalities in the base]
The process described above is for generating a command for notifying the calculated base value. Next, a process for determining an abnormality in the base value and notifying the abnormality will be described.
-FIG. 57: A base value is calculated every time a timer interrupt cycle is performed.-FIG. 58: A base value is calculated for each predetermined number of prize balls and each predetermined number of out balls. A pattern for calculating a base value for each predetermined number of prize balls, a predetermined pattern. The description of the pattern for calculating the base value for each out-ball number is omitted, but it can be realized by combining FIG. 57 and FIG. 58.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation/display process (step S89). In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 57, the base value is calculated every time (every timer interrupt cycle).

First, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated and the base calculation/display processing ends. On the other hand, if the total out ball count is not 0, the total prize ball count is divided by the total out ball count to calculate the base value (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) to be stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic operation circuit 13121 causes an error, so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

Then, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal (step S907). The abnormality of the base value is, for example, a case where the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. It should be noted that the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages based on the degree of deviation of the base value by providing a plurality of allowable ranges. If the base value is abnormal, a base notification command is generated (step S908) to notify the player or hall employee of the base. On the other hand, if the base value is not abnormal, the base calculation/display processing ends. The method of notifying the abnormality of the base can be the same as the method of notifying the base described above.

For example, one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more may be used. Specifically, the base display (7-segment LED) 1317, the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, and 244 may be used to notify the abnormality of the base value. By notifying the player of the abnormality in the base value, the player may be able to confirm the abnormality of the pachinko machine. The calculated base value may be displayed as a percentage notation on the above-mentioned display device or display device to notify the abnormality of the base value. The value after the decimal point may be rounded down, rounded off, or rounded up. For a display device capable of displaying an image such as a liquid crystal display device 1600, 3114, or 244, the first decimal place is displayed to display more detail. May be.

Further, when displaying the base value on the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, 244, if the base value is abnormal, the display mode may be changed. For example, the value is displayed by blinking it or changing its color (normally green, red when abnormal, etc.). Furthermore, the display mode of the base value may be changed in multiple stages. Specifically, the displayed base value is 30% or more, 25% or more and less than 30%, 20% or more and less than 25%, 15% or more and less than 20%, 10% or more and less than 15%, and less than 10%. It is also possible to divide the display into a plurality of stages and change the emission color such as white, blue, and yellow at each stage for display.

Further, the range of the base value (whether the base value is high or low, whether it is an abnormal value or a normal value, etc.) may be notified by various lamps, liquid crystal display devices, sounds, and the like. The function display unit 1400 may notify the abnormality of the base value. Further, the information on the abnormality of the base may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer installed in the game hall.

Note that the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 57 is performed, for example, as shown in FIGS. 50 and 55, at the timing when the number of award balls and the number of out balls satisfy a predetermined condition. It may be used in combination with the base calculation area update processing to be updated.

FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation/display processing (step S89). In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 58, the base value is updated at a timing when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 58, the same steps as those of the base calculation/display processing described above are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the time to update the total prize ball number, and the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or larger than the threshold value Th1, the threshold value Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold value Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out-ball number buffer value is added to the total out-ball number (step S893), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Note that steps S891 to S894 may be executed for each predetermined number of winnings or for each predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value with the threshold Th1.

Then, it is determined whether the number of out balls stored in the out ball number buffer is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). If the out-ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th2, it is not the time to update the total out-ball number, and the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the out ball count buffer value is greater than or equal to the threshold Th2, the prize ball count buffer value is added to the total prize ball count (step S897), and the prize ball count buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold Th2 is added to the total out ball count (step S899), and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out ball count buffer (step S900).

Then, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation/display processing ends. On the other hand, if the total out ball count is not 0, the total prize ball count is divided by the total out ball count to calculate the base value (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) to be stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic operation circuit 13121 causes an error, so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

Then, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal (step S907). The abnormality of the base value is, for example, a case where the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. It should be noted that the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages based on the degree of deviation of the base value by providing a plurality of allowable ranges. If the base value is abnormal, a base notification command is generated (step S908) to notify the player or hall employee of the base. On the other hand, if the base value is not abnormal, the base calculation/display processing ends.

In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 58, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of prize balls or the total number of out balls is not updated. That is, if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, and the base value maintains the same value. On the other hand, if the total number of prize balls or the total number of out balls is updated, the base value is updated to a different value.

In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 58, for example, as shown in FIGS. 39 and 54, the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are directly updated using the acquired number of prize balls and the number of out balls. It is preferable to use it in combination with the base calculation area updating process.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, when the calculated base value is abnormal, the abnormality is notified, so the player can know the state of the gaming machine, and the hall employee It is possible to know the possibility of unauthorized operation on the gaming machine. Further, it is possible to detect and notify an abnormality of the gaming machine which cannot be detected by the conventional error detection.

[9-7. Notification of change in bass]
Next, an example of the gaming machine for notifying the change of the calculated base value will be described.

The base value calculated by a pachinko machine naturally goes up and down. Since the base value represents the condition of the gaming machine, the player who is playing the game cares about the change of the base value as well as the base value itself. Therefore, it is desired to inform the player of the change in the base value. When a display that serves as a guide for the upper and lower sides of the base value appears, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation/display processing (step S89). In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 59, the history of the calculated base value is recorded in order to compare the history of the current base value with the history of the past base value. In FIG. 59, the same steps as those of the base calculation/display processing described above are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the time to update the total prize ball number, and the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or larger than the threshold value Th1, the threshold value Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold value Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out-ball number buffer value is added to the total out-ball number (step S893), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Note that steps S891 to S894 may be executed for each predetermined number of winnings or for each predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value with the threshold Th1.

Then, it is determined whether the number of out balls stored in the out ball number buffer is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). If the out-ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th2, it is not the time to update the total out-ball number, and the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the out ball count buffer value is greater than or equal to the threshold Th2, the prize ball count buffer value is added to the total prize ball count (step S897), and the prize ball count buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold Th2 is added to the total out ball count (step S899), and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out ball count buffer (step S900).

Then, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation/display processing ends. On the other hand, if the total out ball count is not 0, the total prize ball count is divided by the total out ball count to calculate the base value (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) to be stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic operation circuit 13121 causes an error, so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

Then, it is determined whether the base value management timer has timed out (step S904). If the base value management timer has not expired, it is not the time to store the base value in the base history, and the base calculation/display processing ends. On the other hand, if the base value management timer is up, the base value is stored in the base history (step S905), and the base value management timer is reset (step S906).

The base value management timer is a timer used to record the base value every predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes), and stores the current base value in the base history every time the base value management timer times out. The base history is stored in the base calculation area 13128. Only one base history may be stored in the base calculation area 13128, or a plurality of base histories may be stored in the base calculation area 13128. When storing a plurality of base histories in the base calculation area 13128, a ring buffer may be configured in the base calculation area 13128 to store, for example, a predetermined time×10 base values. Further, as shown in FIG. 52, a ring buffer for the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls is configured in the base calculation area 13128, and for example, a predetermined time×n number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are stored, The base value may be calculated if necessary.

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S908) to notify the player or hall employee of the base.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the display selection process. The display selection process is called from the display data creation process (step S1030) of the peripheral controller power-on process (FIG. 60).

First, the MPU of the peripheral controller 1511 selects a specific base history (for example, the latest past base value) stored in the base calculation area 13128, and the selected base history value is smaller than the current base value. It is determined whether or not (step S10301). As a result, if the selected base history value is smaller than the current base value, the base decrease duration measuring timer is referred to, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the decrease of the base value. (Step S10302). Then, if the predetermined time has not elapsed since the start of lowering the base, the effect table in which the base is lowering is selected (step S10303). On the other hand, if the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of lowering the base, the effect table in which the lowering of the base continues is selected (step S10304).

On the other hand, if the selected base history value is not smaller than (equal to or larger than) the current base value, the base decrease duration measuring timer is reset (step S10305) and the display selection table during base rising is selected (step S10306). ).

In the display selection process described above, in step S10301, it is determined whether or not the current base value is smaller than the base history value. However, by comparing the current base value and the base history value, it is determined whether it is large, equal, or small. You may. Since the base value is obtained by division, it is generally a decimal value. Therefore, it is preferable to determine whether the base history value and the current base value are equal in consideration of a predetermined allowable range (for example, 3%).

64 to 68 are diagrams showing examples of the display selection table. These display selection tables are used to select the effect of the special symbol variable display game by the random number selected with the winning of the start opening (or before the start of the special symbol variable display game). The display selection tables 1 shown in FIGS. 64 to 66 are selected when the base value is increasing or the base value is not changed, and the display selection tables 2 and 3 shown in FIGS. 67 and 68 are used when the base value is decreasing. Selected. In particular, the display selection table 3 shown in FIG. 68 is selected after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the base value started to decrease.

Each display selection table includes each item of effect number, effect content, change time, remarks, and distribution. The effect number is an identifier for uniquely identifying the effect selected in the display selection table. The effect content is the name of the effect. The fluctuation time is the time from the start to the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol due to the effect. The remark is information that describes the outline of the effect so that the designer can understand it. The distribution is the probability that the effect is selected, and is defined by the numerator with 65536 as the denominator.

The display selection table 1 (out) shown in FIG. 64 is selected when the result of the big hit lottery is out and the base value is increasing or there is no change, and the display selection table 1 (out of 1) shown in FIG. Is selected when the result of the big hit lottery is a normal big hit that does not derive a probability variation state and the base value is increasing or there is no change. The display selection table 1 (2 per hit) shown in FIG. 66 is selected when the result of the big hit lottery is a positive variation big hit for deriving a positive variation state and the base value is increasing or there is no change.

The display selection table 2 shown in FIG. 67 is selected while the base value is decreasing. Further, the display selection table 3 shown in FIG. 68 is selected when the base value has decreased even after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the base value started to decrease.

As shown in the figure, the display selection tables 2 and 3 include freeze effects 1 and 2 which are effects in which the symbols do not change, and the freeze effect is selected with a high probability. The freeze effect is displayed when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses after the effect is determined.

Further, if the base value is decreased even after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the base value started to decrease, the display selection table 3 is used to select an effect, and the selected effect is selected. You may switch.

Further, whether to display a specific effect for notifying the change of the base value may be determined according to the game state (game state). This is because if the player is constantly informed of the change in the base value, the player's attention will be neglected for the effect of the special symbol variable display game, which is the original pleasure of the pachinko machine, and the player's consciousness may be dispersed. Because there is.

For example, during execution of the special symbol variable display game (game situation in which the result of the jackpot lottery is not shown), the effect of the special symbol variable display game is preferentially executed, and when it is not changing, the base value rises. It is advisable to display a specific effect (an effect that serves as a guide for the change in the base value) at the time of descending or descending.

The particular effect may be displayed at a timing when the time when the special symbol variable display game is not executed continues for a predetermined time. This is because, if the particular effect is displayed immediately after the special symbol variation display game ends, the player's sense of tension continues and fatigue is accumulated. When the game ball wins the starting opening in the state where the specific effect is displayed, the display of the specific effect is stopped and the effect of the special symbol variable display game is executed. This is because the jackpot lottery is performed upon the winning of the winning opening, and the special symbol variable display game is started. Therefore, it is better to let the player pay attention to the special symbol variable display game.

The specific effect may be displayed even in a situation where the number of prize balls has not reached the predetermined number (threshold Th1) or the number of out balls has not reached the predetermined number (threshold Th2). Further, the specific effect may be displayed according to the result of the lottery, but may be executed without fail if the same condition is satisfied.

Further, the particular effect may not be displayed when the base value rises, and may be displayed only when the base value falls. This is because if the player is informed of the increase in the base value, the player's expectation rises, and if the base value does not rise to the extent expected by the player, the player may be discouraged due to the gap with the expectation. is there. On the other hand, if the player is informed of the decrease in the base value, some players will increase their fighting spirit in order to increase the base value.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display selection table is changed during the decrease of the base value and other times (during the increase, during the steady state), but the display is divided into three states of the base value during the decrease, during the steady state and during the increase. A selection table may be defined to inform the player that the base is rising. In this case, it is preferable to determine whether the base value is in a steady state (whether the base history value is equal to the current base value) in consideration of a predetermined allowable range (for example, 3%).

Further, the particular effect may be displayed during the special symbol variable display game. In this case, the base value is more likely to drop when displayed during a special symbol variable display game than when displayed during the special symbol variable display game.

In the state where the game ball does not win the starting opening and the special symbol variable display game is not played, the base value is normally lowered. If the special symbol variable display game is not played for a predetermined time, a demo screen is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

FIG. 69(A) is a display example of normal reach, in which the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped at 7, and the middle symbol is changing. FIG. 69(B) is a display example of the special reach 1. The left symbol and the right symbol displayed at the upper left of the screen are stopped at 7, and the middle symbol is changing. In the center of the screen, the player and the opponent are playing a game of rock-paper-scissors, and the middle pattern is determined by the result of the rock-paper-scissors. FIG. 69(C) is a display example of the special reach 2, in which the left symbol and the right symbol displayed at the upper left of the screen are stopped at 7 and the middle symbol is changing. In the center of the screen, the player and the opponent are playing a match, and the middle symbol is determined by the result of the match.

FIG. 69D is a display example of the freeze effect 1, in which the stopped decorative design is displayed in the center of the screen, and the base value is lowered at a position that does not disturb the recognition of the decorative design (for example, the lower right part of the screen). Is displayed in a recognizable manner. FIG. 69(E) is a display example of the freeze effect 2, in which the stopped decorative design is displayed in the center of the screen, and the base value is lowered at a position (for example, the lower part of the screen) that does not interfere with the recognition of the decorative design. Display a continuation that can be recognized. In the freeze effect, the display indicating the decrease in the base value may be any position as long as it does not interfere with the recognition of the decorative pattern. Further, the display indicating the decrease in the base value may be displayed at a position overlapping the decorative pattern. For example, a display that pops up in the center of the display screen may be used.

The example of displaying the degree of change in the base value on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 has been described above, but the lighting mode of the decoration lamp may be changed. Further, instead of the tendency of the base value to rise and fall, the change in the base value may be displayed numerically.

The change in the displayed base value is the total sum of the base values calculated before the specified time even in the comparison result of the base value calculated in the time interval before the specified time and the base value calculated in the current time interval. May be the result of comparison between the latest total base value and the total.

[9-8. Calculation based on a specific general winning hole]
Next, a process of accurately calculating the base value in consideration of the winning of a specific general winning opening will be described.

In a pachinko machine, a player aims to win at a specific winning opening (for example, a large winning opening 2005, 2006 that is in an open state) in which a gaming ball is easy to win during a big hit. Adjust the firing strength. Even during a big hit, you can aim a big winning hole 2005 by shooting a game ball at the same place as a so-called normal hit, or aim at the big winning hole 2006 by so-called right hit, which has maximized the strength of the shot. There are variations. In such variations, a game board may be designed such that a starting opening or a general winning opening is arranged downstream of the special winning opening and a ball spilled from the big winning opening is picked up.

Here, the downstream (lower part) of the pachinko machine that is hit right during a big hit will be described in detail. During the big hit, the player makes a right-hand hit in order to put the game ball into the big winning opening that has been opened. Most of the game balls shot toward the game area enter the open special winning opening 2006. As described above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10 and FIG. 16, the general winning opening 2001 is provided on the right side of the special winning opening 2005, and the game ball that has been hit to the right is open. When no prize is won in the big prize hole 2006, the general prize hole 2001 is won. That is, it can be said that the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the special winning opening 2005 is won only when the right-handed game ball does not enter the opening large winning opening 2006.

The base value is the number of prize balls paid out by winning the start opening and the general winning opening when 100 game balls are shot toward the game area 5a (that is, payout for 100 out balls). To show the ratio of the number of prize balls that have been put out), the number of game balls that have flowed into the game area but are unlikely to win at the starting opening and general winning openings (high probability of winning at the big winning opening) It is assumed that when calculated as (out sphere number), it deviates from the actual base value when calculated as the base value.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the special winning opening 2005 is defined as a specific general winning opening, and the number of balls won in the particular general winning opening during the special prize is excluded from the number of out balls. To calculate the base value.

The outline of the calculation timing of the base value in each variation of the gaming machine in which the base value is calculated in consideration of a specific general winning opening is as follows.
70 and FIG. 40: Calculate base value every timer interrupt period. FIG. 71 and FIG. 72: Calculate base value for each predetermined number of prize balls and each predetermined number of out balls. Base value for each predetermined number of prize balls. Although the description of the pattern for calculating and the pattern for calculating the base value for each predetermined number of out balls is omitted, it can be realized by combining FIG. 70 to FIG.

FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 70, in order to calculate the base value by using the out ball count corrected by the number of winning balls to a specific general winning opening in each timer interrupt cycle, Get the number of balls and the number of specific winning balls. Note that, in FIG. 70, the same portions as those in the base calculation area update processing described above are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether the prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize is acquired (step S811), and the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 70, every time the number of prize balls is calculated, the total number of prize balls used for the calculation of the base value is updated. It should be noted that it may be determined whether there is a prize ball, and if there is no prize ball, the process of updating the total prize ball number may be skipped.

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the number of winning balls (specific winning ball number) to a specific general winning opening is acquired (step S820). Then, a value obtained by subtracting the specific winning ball count from the out ball count is added to the total out ball count (step S822). That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 70, the total number of out balls used for calculating the base value is updated every time an out ball or a winning ball is detected.

It is to be noted that, as in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area update process (FIG. 46) described above, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal, and if the number of prize balls is abnormal, an abnormality notification command is generated. Alternatively, the prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Further, as in steps S824 to S825 of FIG. 46, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up. When the prize ball abnormality notification timer times out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated. The ball abnormality notification may be stopped.

After recording the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 70, the base value can be calculated by the base calculation/display process shown in FIG.

FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 71, the number of prize balls is recorded in the prize ball count buffer and the out ball count is calculated in order to calculate the base value at a timing when the number of prize balls and the number of out balls satisfy predetermined conditions. Record the number in the Out Ball Buffer. Note that, in FIG. 71, the same step numbers are assigned to the same portions as the base calculation area update processing described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether the prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether there is a prize ball (step S812). Then, if there is a prize ball, the acquired prize ball number is added to the prize ball number buffer (step S813).

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S815). If the number of prize balls is abnormal, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817). ).

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the acquired number of out balls is added to the out ball number buffer (step S819). Then, the number of winning balls is acquired, it is determined whether or not the winning opening for the acquired number of winning balls is a specific general winning opening, and the number of winning balls to the specific winning opening is acquired (step S820). Then, the acquired number of winning balls for the specific winning a prize hole is added to the specific winning ball number buffer (step S823).

After that, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up (step S824), and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to stop the prize ball abnormality notification ( Step S825).

FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation/display processing (step S89). In the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 72, the base value is calculated in consideration of the specific winning ball number recorded in the specific winning ball number buffer. Note that, in FIG. 72, the same step numbers are assigned to the same portions as the above-described base calculation/display processing, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the time to update the total prize ball number, and the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or larger than the threshold value Th1, the threshold value Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold value Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out-ball number buffer value is added to the total out-ball number (step S893), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Note that steps S891 to S894 may be executed for each predetermined number of winnings or for each predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value with the threshold Th1.

Then, it is determined whether the sum of the number of out-out passage balls stored in the out-ball number buffer and the number of winning balls stored in the winning ball number buffer is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). ). The total of the number of out-passing balls and the number of winning balls is the number of game balls that have flowed into the game area and is the number of out balls. If the result of determination is that the calculated out-ball number is smaller than the threshold value Th2, it is not the time to update the total out-ball number, so the flow proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the calculated number of out balls is greater than or equal to the threshold Th2, the award ball number buffer value is added to the total award ball number (step S897), and the award ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the specific winning ball count is subtracted from the total out ball count, the threshold Th2 is added (step S899), the winning ball count buffer is set to 0, and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out ball count buffer (step S900).

Then, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation/display processing ends. On the other hand, if the total out ball count is not 0, the total prize ball count is divided by the total out ball count to calculate the base value (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) to be stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic operation circuit 13121 causes an error, so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

Then, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal (step S907). The abnormality of the base value is, for example, a case where the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. It should be noted that the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages based on the degree of deviation of the base value by providing a plurality of allowable ranges. If the base value is abnormal, a base notification command is generated (step S908) to notify the player or hall employee of the base. On the other hand, if the base value is not abnormal, the base calculation/display processing ends.

In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 72, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of prize balls or the total number of out balls is not updated. That is, if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, the base value remains the same value, and if the number of total prize balls or the total number of out balls is updated, The base value is updated to a different value. The base value may be calculated at the timing when one of the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls is updated, or the base value may be calculated at the timing when both of them are updated.

Further, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, since the base value is calculated by excluding the game balls that have flowed into the game area but are unlikely to win the starting opening and the general winning opening, the deviation from the actual base value Can accurately calculate small base values.

Further, the case where the general winning hole 2001 is located downstream of the big winning hole 2006 in the pachinko machine that hits right during the big hit was explained, but the invention according to the present embodiment aims at the big winning hole 2005 by hitting normally during the big hit. It can be applied to a pachinko machine or a gaming machine in which a start opening or a general winning opening is arranged downstream of the special winning opening 2005.

Further, the game area 5a is provided with special winning openings 2005 and 2006 that normally do not accept game balls, but are capable of accepting game balls according to the jackpot lottery result. The prize balls due to winning in the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 may be excluded from the calculation of the base value. In this case, the game ball wins the starting openings 2002 and 2004, the special symbol variable display game starts, and after the special symbol is fixed, the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 are opened (big hit opening), the big winning opening The detected out-balls are excluded from the out-ball count as a special prize during the period from the closing of 2005 and 2006 until the start of the next special symbol variable display game (big hit ending). In this way, the number of prize balls and the number of out balls in the special prize can be counted without determining in step S810 of FIG. 39 or the like whether or not the special prize is being awarded. When the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 are repeatedly opened and closed with one big hit, the time between the closing of the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 (closing interval) may be included in the prize. That is, during the special prize, it means that the condition device is operating, for example, from the determination of the big hit symbol of the special symbol variable display game to the end of the ending. It may also include all the times during the right-handing instruction. Further, at the starting ports 2002 and 2004, the special prize may include a time saving period, a positive change (during ST), and a power support period. Furthermore, during a time saving period, during a probable change (during ST), and in a game state other than during electric power support, a predetermined time after the opening of the starting port 2004 is closed (for example, until a ball winning the starting port is detected as an out ball). Up to the required few seconds) may be included in the prize.

Further, in the game area 5a, a second starting port 2004 is arranged which normally does not accept a game ball, but is capable of accepting a game ball according to the lottery result of a normal symbol. The prize balls due to winning in the second starting opening 2004 may be excluded from the calculation of the base value. In this case, the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 to perform a lottery of ordinary symbols, the ordinary symbol variable display game starts, and after the regular symbol is fixed until it is opened (opening), the second starting opening 2004 The detected out-ball is excluded from the out-ball count as a special prize during the period from the closing of the game until the start of the next normal symbol variable display game (ending). In addition, when the second starting opening 2004 repeats opening and closing according to the lottery result of the normal symbol, the time between the closing of the second starting opening 2004 and the next opening (closing interval) may be included in the prize. In this way, all winnings to the second starting opening 2004 can be excluded from the calculation of the base value, not only during the time saving.

As described above, the number of prize balls and the number of out balls other than during the special prize (big hit, shortened time, etc.) can be accurately counted without determining in step S810 of FIG.

By doing so, the number of out balls and the number of prize balls can be accurately excluded while the player is making a right hit, and the base value can be accurately calculated.

Also, depending on the pachinko machine, it is recommended to play the game by left-handed hitting in a state where neither big hits nor shorter working hours (so-called normal state), and playing by right-handing during big hits or shorter working hours. In such a gaming machine, there are provided a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002 for winning when left-handed, a general winning opening 2001, and a second starting opening 2004 for winning when right-handed. In such a gaming machine, the number of winning openings from the left side of the game area 5a (the area where the game ball rolls when left-handed) and the right side of the game area 5a (the area where the game ball rolls when right-handed) and The winning rate at each winning opening differs depending on the arrangement and the arrangement position of the nails. In other words, the base value when left-handed and the base value when right-handed are different.

The base value of the pachinko machine is set on the assumption that the player hits left in a normal state. However, as described above, when the base value is different between left-handed and right-handed (for example, when the base value of right-handed in a normal state is designed to be lower than that of left-handed) In the normal state, when the player hits right, a low base value is calculated.

Hall judges that the pachinko machine with a low base value is abnormal and inspects it, or determines that it is a game machine with poor payout performance. Even in a pachinko machine that is judged to have poor payout performance (lower than the expected base), the hole determines that the player is left-handed, so there is a starting opening that acts on the base when left-handed. Make adjustments to increase the winning rate at the general winning openings. Then, adjust the nail with an abnormality to increase the base value. If a player left-handed with the game machine adjusted in this way, many prize balls can be obtained even in the normal state. In other words, you can win a lot of lots for a small amount. That is, even if the base when left-handed is the same as what the hole assumed, the hole is misunderstood and adjustments are made to increase the entry rate of the starting opening and the general winning opening that are won when left-handed. Since there is a possibility that the hole will be disadvantaged due to such a player's bad faith, it is necessary to accurately calculate the base value for left hitting and the base value for right hitting.

By the way, a pachinko machine that performs right-handing during time saving, a second starting port 2004 that opens and closes depending on a game state, and a gate unit 2003 for performing a normal symbol lottery for opening the second starting port 2004, when right-handing It is arranged in the area where the game balls roll. In addition, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 by hitting the right in the normal state, even if the normal symbols are drawn, the probability of winning the universal symbol is extremely low so that the second starting opening 2004 does not open. Even if the symbol lottery is won, the opening time of the second starting port 2004 is shortened, and it is difficult to win the second starting port 2004 in the normal state.

Here, in order to increase the base value in the right-handed state in the normal state, the rate of entry into the second starting opening 2004 is increased. However, since the second starting port 2004 is generally set to be more advantageous than the first starting port 2002, increasing the rate of entry into the second starting port 2004 puts pressure on the profit of the hall. Therefore, it is advisable to count the game balls that have passed through the gate unit 2003 in the normal state and calculate the corrected base value using the number of passed balls of the gate unit 2003 when calculating the base value.

Specifically, the number of game balls that have passed through the gate unit 2003 in the normal state is subtracted from the number of out balls (the number of game balls hit toward the game area 5a) as the number of specific winning balls. A high base calculated value can be obtained by reducing the number of out balls. For example, when a considerable number of game balls pass through the gate unit 2003, an extremely high base value is calculated. Note that the degree of correction processing may be appropriately determined based on the design value (performance) of the gaming machine.

Further, the passage of the gate portion 2003 is monitored, and when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 (when a predetermined number (for example, three) of the game balls passes through the gate portion 2003 without winning the starting opening) (A condition may be added), and the number of out-balls counted in a predetermined time or a predetermined number of shots after (or before and after) passing through the gate unit 2003 does not have to be used in the calculation of the base value. By doing so, the base value can be calculated more accurately. When the passage of the gate portion 2003 is detected, a display or voice such as "Please return to the left-handed state" may be output without actively notifying the player that it is not reflected in the calculation result of the base value. Further, when the passage of the gate portion 2003 is detected, it may be notified to the hall that the player is right-handed. For example, a specific lamp may be turned on, a lighting mode may be changed, or a right-hand hit may be output from the external terminal board 784 to a hall computer installed in a game arcade.

As described above, by removing the number of passing balls of the gate portion 2003 provided on the right side of the game area 5a (the area where the game balls roll when hitting the right) from the number of out balls, the player hits the ball right in the normal state. The base value at time can be corrected to a large value. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the variation of the calculated value of the base due to the game style of the player.

[9-9. Initialize base value]
Considering the role of the base value of confirming the operation status of the pachinko machine 1, it is desirable that the calculated base value be held for a long time. Further, it is desirable that the calculated base value cannot be easily erased. Therefore, the base calculation/display data 13136 is deleted under a condition different from the condition for deleting the data related to the progress of the game backed up in the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311. As a result, it is possible to hold accurate data on the number of prize balls and calculate an accurate accessory ratio.

Specifically, the base calculation/display data 13136 is not erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch (first operation), but the backup power supplied to the main control MPU 1311 is shut off, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 is changed. By the second operation of shutting off, all the data backed up in the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311 can be erased. The second operation may be provided with one switch for realizing this operation, or an employee of the gaming shop may remove the connector of the power supply line for backup supplied to the main control board 1310, and the pachinko machine 1 The power of may be shut off.

In other words, two operations are prepared to erase the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311, and only the data related to the progress of the game is erased in the first operation, but the calculated base value in the second operation. And erase all data including data related to the progress of the game.

With such a configuration, the base calculation/display data 13136 is not erased due to an erroneous operation of an attendant in the amusement hall, so that the reliability of the displayed accessory ratio is improved and the concealment of the state where the accessory ratio is high can be prevented. ..

[9-10. Calculation based on consideration of winning anomalies]
FIG. 73 and FIG. 74 are flowcharts of the base calculation area update processing considering the winning abnormality.

In the pachinko machine 1, in addition to the abnormality in the number of prize balls determined in step S815 described above, an abnormality in winning may be detected. For example, when a winning is detected other than during the opening of the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 due to the jackpot being derived in the special symbol variable display game, or the starting opening 2004 due to the winning being derived in the normal symbol variable display game. If a winning is detected during the period other than when the game is open, the winning is abnormal. That is, the abnormality in the number of prize balls determined in step S815 is an abnormal operation detected from the number of prize balls, and is mainly a case where many prize balls are obtained in a predetermined time. On the other hand, the prize winning abnormality is an abnormal operation detected from the number of prize balls, and is mainly a case where a prize cannot be won or a large number of prizes are detected in a predetermined time.

Since the winning ball related to this winning abnormality is counted as an out ball, it is desirable to correct this amount and accurately calculate the base. Therefore, in the base calculation area update processing in consideration of the winning abnormality, the total number of out balls is corrected so as to reduce the number of winning balls related to the detected winning abnormality.

It should be noted that, usually, the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 and the starting opening 2004 are won only during the special prize, so the winning balls to these winning openings are not counted as out balls for calculating the base, There is no need to consider abnormalities.

FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update processing, the current game state is determined, the number of prize balls paid out as a game value is added to the area corresponding to the current game state, and the base calculation area 13128 of the main control internal RAM 1312 is updated. To do. In particular, the base calculation area update processing shown in FIG. 73 is similar to the base calculation area update processing shown in FIG. 39, in order to calculate the base value every timer interrupt cycle, the prize ball control processing (step S80). The total number of prize balls is directly updated using the number of prize balls calculated in (step S814), and the total number of out balls is directly updated using the number of out balls (step S822). Note that, in FIG. 73, the same step numbers are assigned to the same portions as the base calculation area update processing described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether the prize is being awarded.

If the game state is during the special prize, the base calculation area update process is terminated without updating the number of prize balls or the number of out balls, because the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a prize, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S811). The number of prize balls acquired in the base calculation area update process may be the number of prize balls determined to be paid out. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the created payout command may be used. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the payout command that has been transmitted may be used. Further, the number of prize balls may correspond to the payout command in which the main control board 1310 transmits the payout command to the payout control board 951 and receives the confirmation of receipt (ACK) from the payout control board 951. Further, the main control board 1310 may send a payout command to the payout control board 951 and the number of prize balls (the number of paid prize balls) received from the payout control board 951 to report the completion of payout. This variation has been described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44.

Then, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls to update the total number of prize balls (step S814). It should be noted that it may be determined whether there is a prize ball, and if there is no prize ball, the process of updating the total prize ball number may be skipped. Further, the game balls have won the starting openings 2002 and 2004, but the upper limit value is the hold, and the prize balls are paid out even when the winning in the starting opening is not held, so the total number of prize balls is updated. Further, in a gaming state in which no prize ball is generated even if a game ball is won in the winning opening (for example, when a specific error occurs), the prize ball due to the prize is not generated, and the number of prize balls to be acquired is Since it is 0, the total number of prize balls is not updated. The total prize ball number is recorded in the total prize ball number storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control internal RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 73, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated every time the number of prize balls is calculated.

Then, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818). Then, it is determined whether or not the winning abnormality is detected (step S826). Then, the number of game balls corresponding to the winning determined to be abnormal is acquired (step S827). Specifically, as described above, when the winning of the special winning opening 2005, 2006 is detected, other than during the special prize (conditional device is operating) caused by the jackpot being derived in the special symbol variable display game, , If the winning in the starting opening 2004 is detected although it is not open due to the winning being derived in the normal symbol variable display game, it is determined that the winning is abnormal.

It may be determined that the winning prize is abnormal when one winning ball related to the winning abnormality is detected, or the winning prize is abnormal when a predetermined number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality are detected. Further, if a predetermined number of consecutive winning prize balls are detected, it may be determined that the winning prize is abnormal. If a predetermined number of winning balls are detected within a predetermined time, it is determined that the winning prize is abnormal. You may.

Then, the total number of out balls is updated so that the acquired number of out balls is added to the total number of out balls (step S822). As described above, the number of out-balls is detected by the firing ball sensor 1020, the discharge ball sensor 3060, etc., and the detection signals of these sensors are read and acquired in the switch input process of step S74. At this time, the value obtained by subtracting the number of winning balls related to abnormal winning from the number of acquired out balls may be added to the total number of out balls, or after the acquired number of out balls is added to the total number of out balls The number of abnormally winning balls may be subtracted from the total number of out balls. The total number of out balls is recorded in a total out ball storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 73, the total number of out balls used to calculate the base value is updated every time an out ball is detected. In this way, the base calculation process is executed for each timer interrupt process, the total number of out balls is updated, and the base value is calculated and displayed in the base calculation display process (FIG. 40). Therefore, the base value is displayed without delay. It is possible to judge whether the base value is normal or abnormal without delay.

It should be noted that, as in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area updating process (FIG. 74) described later, it is determined whether the number of prize balls is abnormal, and if the number of prize balls is abnormal, an abnormality notification command is generated. Alternatively, the prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Further, as in steps S824 to S825, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up. When the prize ball abnormality notification timer times out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is generated. May be stopped.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 executes the base value calculation process in the timer interrupt process, but the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 may execute the base value calculation process. In this case, the main control board 1310 may send a command for notifying the base to the peripheral control section 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, or the command for notifying the base to the peripheral control section 1511 from the payout control section 952. May be sent.

In addition, in one timer interruption process, even if the information of both the winning and winning balls to the winning opening is acquired, the number of winning balls is changed to the total number of winning balls (or the number of winning balls buffer in the embodiment described later). Then, the number of out balls is added to the total number of out balls (or an out ball number buffer in an embodiment described later). In addition, in one timer interrupt process, even if the information of winning a prize for a plurality of winning holes is acquired, the total number of award balls due to a plurality of winning awards is the total award ball number (or, in the embodiment described later, the award ball number buffer). ). Therefore, the base value can be accurately calculated and displayed. For example, when winning is detected for a winning opening sensor with a winning opening of 5 winning balls and a winning opening sensor with a winning opening of 3 winning balls, a total of 8 winning balls are obtained. (Or prize ball count buffer).

Further, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the prize ball number buffer) only when the launch of the game balls is detected. In other words, only the number of prize balls relating to a prize detected within a predetermined time from the detection of the launch ball sensor 1020 may be added to the total prize ball number (or prize ball number buffer). Further, the operation of the firing control unit 953 or the ball launching device 680 is detected, and while the firing control unit 953 or the ball launching device 680 is operating (further, the launching control unit 953 or the ball launching device 680 stops operating. It is also possible to add only the number of prize balls related to the winning detected within a predetermined time (for example, after 5 seconds) to the total prize ball count or the prize ball count buffer. Further, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the prize ball number buffer) only when the player operates the firing handle. That is, only the number of prize balls related to winning detected within a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the time when the contact detection sensor 509 of the handle unit 500 is detected to be touched by a hand or finger is calculated as the total prize ball number ( Alternatively, it may be added to the prize ball number buffer). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the prize ball from being reflected in the base value due to an abnormality in detecting the prize ball in a state where the game ball has not been fired or fraudulent activity, and to prevent an incorrect display of the base value. In this case, if the contact detection sensor 509 is used, it is not necessary to newly provide a sensor for detecting the launch of the game ball, so that the cost increase of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). The base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 74 records the number of out balls in the out ball number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when the number of out balls satisfies the predetermined condition (step S819). In FIG. 74, the same step numbers are assigned to the same portions as the base calculation area update processing described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether the prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether there is a prize ball (step S812). If the result of determination in step S812 is that there are no prize balls, the process proceeds to step S818 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there are prize balls, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S815). If there is no abnormality in the number of prize balls, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). .. That is, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 74, every time the number of prize balls is calculated, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated.

On the other hand, if the number of prize balls is abnormal, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817).

Then, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818). The acquired number of out balls is added to the out ball count buffer (step S819). Then, it is determined whether or not a winning abnormality is detected (step S826), and the number of game balls corresponding to the winning determined to be abnormal is acquired (step S827).

After that, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up (step S824), and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to stop the prize ball abnormality notification ( Step S825).

In the base calculation region update processing shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, the out balls are corrected by the number of all the winning balls related to the prize abnormality, but the out balls are corrected for the prize balls related to the specific type of prize abnormality, and the other balls are corrected. It is not necessary to correct the out ball in the winning ball related to the particular type of winning abnormality. For example, depending on the type of prize ball related to the prize abnormality, the prize ball may or may not be paid out for the prize ball. Whether or not the prize balls are to be paid out for this abnormal prize winning may be determined for each winning opening. In this case, with respect to the winning abnormality in which the winning balls are not paid out, the winning balls are not counted as the total out balls and should not be used for the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, with respect to a prize abnormality in which prize balls are paid out, it is preferable that the prize balls are counted as total out balls, and the prize balls to be paid out are also counted as the total number of prize balls to be used for calculation of the base value. Even if the prize balls are paid out abnormally, the prize balls may not be counted as total out balls, the prize balls to be paid out may not be counted as the total number of prize balls, and may not be used for the calculation of the base value.

For example, as a result of maintenance of a game machine failure (clearing a ball clogging, etc.), a hall employee may manually insert a game ball into the starting opening to compensate for the exit ball so that the player does not lose it. In this case, prize balls are paid out for winning the start opening. The winning in the starting opening is detected as an abnormal prize, but a prize ball is paid out. When the prize balls are paid out in this way, it should be reflected in the base value, and therefore it is not necessary to determine that the prize is abnormal. In this case, the prize balls are paid out at the winning openings (starting openings 2002, 2004) reflected in the calculation of the base value, the winning abnormality is not judged, and the prize balls are not paid at the other winning openings (large winning openings 2005, 2006). It is advisable to judge the prize winning without paying out. The number of prize balls to be determined for abnormality in winning is smaller than the number of prize holes for which abnormality in winning is not determined (three prize balls for starting mouth, 15 prize balls for major prize). For this reason, although the winning a prize is judged to be abnormal at the special winning opening, even if the abnormal winning is not judged at the starting opening, it is not a big security hole from the viewpoint of protection against fraudulent acts. In this way, by determining the prize winning abnormality, it is possible to prevent the inconsistency between the out ball and the number of prize balls. In particular, by correcting the number of out balls by using the number of winning balls relating to a prize winning that does not generate an award ball, it is possible to match the number of winning balls with the out ball that causes the winning ball.

As described above, it is possible to determine the winning abnormality with various winning openings, but a specific example of mounting on a pachinko machine will be described.

First, the prize winning abnormality may not be determined at the general winning opening 2001, but the prize winning abnormality may be determined at a winning opening other than the general winning opening 2001 (large winning openings 2005, 2006, starting openings 2002, 2004). Since it is difficult to simultaneously win a plurality of game balls at the general winning a prize, it is possible to improve the security resistance of the gaming machine against fraudulent activity, and to open and close the large winning a prizes 2005 and 2006 and the starting prize 2002 ( The player can be compensated for the exit by entering the general winning opening 2001 (4 in total), which is provided more than the total of 3). In addition, since the general winning hole 2001 can be easily identified by the employee in the hall, the operation for maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 and compensation for the exit is easy. The reason why the employees of the hall can easily identify the general winning opening 2001 is that the general winning openings 2001 are often arranged in a game area collectively (in a divided area), and the electric prize (the large winning opening is large). This is because the decoration members (appearance) are different from those of 2005, 2006, the starting ports 2002 and 2004). In addition, when the number of prize balls for one prize in the general winning opening is small, there is an effect that the security resistance of the gaming machine against fraud is improved. It should be noted that the abnormality determination may not be made only for a specific general winning opening (for example, the left end), and the abnormality abnormality may be made for other general winning openings.

In addition, the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 having a large number of prize balls do not determine a prize winning abnormality, and the prize winning openings other than the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 (general winning openings 2001, starting openings 2002 and 2004 having a small number of prize balls) are won. You may judge abnormality. Since there are a large number of prize balls for one prize, the base value changes greatly even if the number of prize balls is small. Therefore, it is convenient that the change of the base value can be easily inspected when inspecting the pachinko machine. It should be noted that the abnormality determination may not be made only by using a specific special winning opening (for example, the large winning opening 2005 in which a game ball can be easily inserted by hand), and the abnormality may be determined by another large winning opening (for example, 2006). ..

Further, the winning openings may not be determined at the starting openings 2002 and 2004, but the winning openings may be determined at winning openings other than the starting openings 2002 and 2004 (general winning openings 2001, big winning openings 2005 and 2006). Since the number of prize balls for winning one ball is smaller than that for the large winning port, the starting port can improve the security resistance of the gaming machine against the goto and can compensate the player for the ball. It should be noted that the winning abnormality may not be determined only by a specific starting opening (for example, the starting opening 2002 provided at the center of the game board is easy to understand the position), and the other starting openings 2004 may determine the winning abnormality.

In addition, at the special winning opening and the starting opening, the opening/closing member of the winning opening is in a position visible from the front of the pachinko machine, that is, the winning opening where the employee of the hall can easily operate the opening/closing member determines a winning a prize. Alternatively, the prize-winning opening/closing member may be in a position where it cannot be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine, that is, the prize-winning opening at which it is difficult for an employee of the hall to operate the opening-closing member may determine the prize-winning abnormality. For example, the opening/closing member that is vertically positioned in the closed state is inclined to an oblique position, so that the opening/closing member has a structure in which the opening/closing member picks up the game ball (so-called electric tulip), which is easy for the employee of the hall to operate. On the other hand, in the closed state, the prize hole is closed by the flat plate member, and when the flat plate member is retracted inward, the entrance to the prize hole is opened (so-called belochu) Is difficult to operate. In this way, the security level is relaxed only to the winning holes used to compensate the player for the ball, so that it is easy for the employee of the hall to understand and the security tolerance of the gaming machine can be improved.

In addition, the detected winning abnormality may be notified. The method for notifying the prize winning abnormality may be the same as the method for notifying the prize ball number abnormality described above (for example, outputting a security signal to an external terminal board, displaying a warning on a display device such as a liquid crystal display, a game board or a frame). It is advisable that the notification of the winning abnormality is looser than the notification of other abnormalities, such as the lighting or blinking of the decoration lamp, the output of the sound, the sound effect, and the warning sound. Specifically, the abnormality notification time is short, the characters that notify the abnormality are small, the lamp does not light when the abnormality is notified, and the abnormality notification sound is lower than the volume of the notification sound of other abnormalities (suppressed). ) Good.

Further, in the notification of the prize abnormality, the abnormality notification is given for a predetermined time after the prize abnormality is detected, and even if the prize abnormality is further detected during the predetermined time, the predetermined time is not extended and is set first. The notification may be ended or the mode of the notification may be changed in a predetermined time. In this way, when the winning abnormality occurs continuously for a predetermined time (for example, several minutes), it can be determined that the hall is maintaining the gaming machine, not the cheating by the player. Therefore, if the winning abnormality is notified only for a predetermined time and the notification is not continued thereafter, it is possible to improve the work efficiency without hindering the maintenance work of the gaming machine by the hall. Further, it can be seen that by changing the notification mode after a predetermined time, the maintenance work of the gaming machine is not disturbed and the work is correctly continued. Specifically, the notification by the display device or the lamp is continued, but the notification by sound may be stopped (or the volume may be decreased).

In summary, the gaming machine of the present embodiment has a correction means for correcting the number of out balls according to the number of winning balls, and the correcting means divides the plurality of winning openings into a plurality of types (starting opening, large winning opening). However, for the first type of winning port, the number of out balls is corrected based on the winning ball detected when the predetermined condition is not established (during special prize), and for the second type of winning port, the predetermined type The number of out balls is not corrected based on the winning balls detected except when the condition is established (during special prize). As a result, as described above, it is possible to prevent the deviation of the number of out balls when compensating the player due to the maintenance of the gaming machine, and it is possible to accurately calculate the number of out balls. Further, an abnormal base value may be calculated due to a malfunction of the game machine, and the base value can be adjusted as an adjustment (maintenance). This allows an accurate base value to be calculated and displayed.

Up to this point, the abnormal prize detection and the exceptional handling of the abnormal prize detection (when not detected) have been described. However, the gaming balls determined to be abnormal prizes are not the prize balls acquired in the game, but the pachinko machine's Since there is a high possibility that it will be used for maintenance (adjustment of the base value), it is desirable that the winning ball for which a winning abnormality has been determined is not reflected in the number of out balls and should not be used for calculating the base value.

Further, the winning abnormality detected in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIGS. 73 and 74 may be notified. For example, in the injustice detection process (step S84) of the timer interrupt process, a prize abnormality display command is created with the prize abnormality as an abnormal state, and is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92). The notification of the winning abnormality may be performed when one winning ball related to the winning abnormality is detected, or may be performed when a predetermined number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality are detected. Further, if a predetermined number of winning balls related to the prize abnormality are continuously detected, the prize abnormality may be notified, or if a predetermined number of prize balls related to the prize abnormality are detected within a predetermined time, the prize winning abnormality is detected. You may notify.

Further, the notification of the prize winning abnormality may be ended after a predetermined time has elapsed, or may be ended when the prize opening is subsequently opened (the condition device is activated).

It should be noted that it is not necessary to notify the prize winning abnormality.

[9-11. Base value calculation processing that takes advantage of the characteristics of arithmetic circuits]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the arithmetic circuit 13121 performs the division process for calculating the base value, so that the base value can be calculated without interfering with other processes than the CPU 13111 executing the division by the program. The base calculation process described up to this point does not take advantage of this characteristic.

That is, in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing (FIG. 23) related to the calculation of the base value, in the switch input processing (step S74), the detection signals from the discharge ball sensor 3060 and the discharge ball sensor 1020 are read to determine the number of out balls. Is calculated, and the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80). After that, in the base calculation area update process (step S98), the number of award balls and the number of out balls of the base calculation area 13128 are updated.

Then, in the base calculation/display process (step S89), the base value is calculated with reference to the number of prize balls and the number of out balls stored in the base calculation area 13128, and the calculated base value is displayed on the base display 1317. indicate.

Since the timer interrupt process is executed every predetermined time, the predetermined process must be completed for each timer interrupt, so in a slow division process by a program, a time-consuming process is included in the timer interrupt process. That is, it was difficult to include the base calculation process of multiple times in the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, by performing the division process using the arithmetic circuit 13121, the time required for calculating the base value can be shortened, the base value can be calculated plural times in one timer interrupt process, and the base value can be displayed without delay.

In addition, the CPU 13111 is not occupied for the division processing from the writing of the value to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 to the reading of the operation result from the division result register A131218. That is, the wait time of 32 clocks from the input timing of the dividend and the divisor to the output timing of the quotient can be effectively utilized, and other processing can be performed during this time. In other words, since the input timing of the dividend and the divisor are different from the output timing of the quotient, the flexibility of the base value calculation processing in the timer interrupt processing is improved.

FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing that makes use of the characteristics of the arithmetic circuit. The timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 75 is the same as the above-described timer interrupt process (FIG. 23) except for the base calculation process (steps S97 and S98), and the description of the same process will be omitted.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first switches the register by executing the main control program (step S70).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a switch input process (step S74). In the switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control internal RAM 1312. Specifically, the number of out balls is read by reading a detection signal from a sensor that detects a winning ball, a detection signal from a switch that detects fraudulent activity, a detection signal from a discharge ball sensor 3060, or a launch ball sensor 1020. Is counted.

Then, the main control MPU 1311 executes the base calculation process 1 (step S97). In the base calculation process 1, the total number of out balls is updated using the number of out balls counted in step S74, and the base value is calculated. Details of the base calculation process 1 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 76 and 78.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the timer updating process (step S76) and the random number updating process 1 (step S78).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes prize ball control processing (step S80). In the prize ball control processing, the input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated based on the read input information, and is written in the main control built-in RAM 1312. In addition, a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes base calculation processing 2 (step S98). In the base calculation process 2, the total number of prize balls is updated using the number of prize balls calculated in step S80, and the base value is calculated. Details of the base calculation process 2 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 77 and 79.

Then, the main control MPU1311 is a frame command reception process (step S82), fraud detection process (step S84), special symbol and special electric auditors product control process (step S86), normal symbol and ordinary electric auditors product The control process (step S88) is executed. Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes an output data setting process (step S90) and a peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). The watchdog timer clear register WCL is set to be clear by setting a predetermined value in the watchdog timer clear register WCL. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns) the register bank. When the above process ends, the timer interrupt process ends, and the process returns to the process before the interrupt.

FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation process 1 (step S97).

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the gaming state is in the special prize (step S9701). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether the prize is being awarded. If the gaming state is during the prize, it is an out ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, and therefore the base is not calculated and the base calculation process 1 is ended. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a prize, the number of out balls detected in the switch input process (step S74) is acquired (step S9702), and the acquired out ball number is added to the total out ball number. The number of out balls is updated (step S9705). When the number of out balls cannot be acquired or the acquired number of out balls is 0, the base calculation process 1 may be immediately terminated. In this way, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without wastefully calculating the base value.

Then, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated and the base calculation process 1 is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, a value obtained by multiplying the total number of prize balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. It is stored (step S9708). After a lapse of a predetermined time (32 clocks), the calculation result (total prize ball count/total out ball count) is read from the division result register A131218 and set as a base value (step S9709).

Then, similarly to step S908 described above, a base notification command is generated (step S9710) to notify the player or the hall employee of the base (base value or abnormality of the base value). The base notification command is a display command for the peripheral control unit 1511 when the base value is notified by the display device (liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, 244) or the speaker 921 controlled by the peripheral control unit 1511 or the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. Or sound output command. When the base display 1317 or the function display unit 1400 controlled by the main control board 1310 is used for notification, these display devices are composed of 7-segment LEDs or LED lamps, so the base notification command is sent to the LED element. It is a drive signal. Specifically, when the 7-segment LED is driven by the driver, the drive signal including the character code set in the driver (character generator in the driver) is the base notification command. When the 7-segment LED is directly driven, the drive signal for turning on each LED element is the base notification command.

FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation process 2 (step S98).

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the gaming state is in the special prize (step S9801). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether the prize is being awarded.

As a result, if the gaming state is during the special prize, it is a prize ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, and therefore the base is not calculated and the base calculation process 2 is ended. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S9802), and the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls. The total number of prize balls is updated (step S9809). When the number of prize balls cannot be acquired or the acquired number of prize balls is 0, the base calculation process 2 may be immediately terminated. In this way, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without wastefully calculating the base value.

Then, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9810). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated, and the base calculation process 2 ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, a value obtained by multiplying the total number of prize balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. It is stored (step S9812). When the total number of prize balls is 0, 0 is calculated as the base value, but the base value may not be calculated. Further, when the total number of prize balls is larger than the total number of outs, a value of 1 (100%) or more is calculated as the base value, but the base value may not be calculated. After a lapse of a predetermined time (32 clocks), the calculation result (total number of prize balls/total number of out balls) is read from the division result register A131218 and set as a base value (step S9813).

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S9814) to notify the player and the hall employee of the base.

Since the base calculation process shown in FIGS. 76 and 77 is executed for each timer interrupt process, the base value can be calculated and displayed without delay. Note that the base calculation process 1 and the base calculation process 2 may not be executed for each timer interrupt process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process at every predetermined time (for example, one minute of a longer period than the timer interrupt process). By not executing the base calculation display process for each timer interrupt process, the calculation amount (for example, the load of the main control MPU 1311) required for calculating the base value can be reduced as compared with the case of calculating the base value for each timer interrupt process.

Next, another example of the base calculation process (steps S97 and S98) will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 79. In the base calculation process shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, the base value is calculated for each predetermined out ball number and each predetermined prize ball number.

FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation process 1 (step S97).

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the gaming state is in the special prize (step S9701). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether the prize is being awarded. If the gaming state is during the prize, it is an out ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, and therefore the base is not calculated and the base calculation process 1 is ended. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a prize, the number of out balls detected in the switch input process (step S74) is acquired (step S9702), and the acquired out ball number is added to the out ball number buffer. The sphere count buffer is updated (step S9703). When the number of out balls cannot be acquired or the acquired number of out balls is 0, the base calculation process 1 may be immediately terminated. In this way, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without wastefully calculating the base value.

Then, it is determined whether the number of out balls stored in the out ball number buffer is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S9704). Various methods can be used to determine whether the number of out balls is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold Th2. For example, the out-ball-count buffer value may be compared with the threshold Th2, or the determination may be made based on the value of a predetermined bit of the out-ball-count storage area (specifically, the out-ball-count storage area is 8-bit). If it is configured and the most significant bit becomes 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more).

If the out-ball count buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the time to calculate the base value, and the base calculation process 1 is ended.

On the other hand, if the out ball count buffer value is greater than or equal to the threshold Th2, the total out ball count is updated so that the out ball count buffer value is added to the total out ball count (step S9705), and the out ball count buffer is set to 0. It is set (step S9706).

Then, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated and the base calculation process 1 is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, a value obtained by multiplying the total number of prize balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. It is stored (step S9708). After a lapse of a predetermined time (32 clocks), the calculation result (total prize ball count/total out ball count) is read from the division result register A131218 and set as a base value (step S9709).

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S9710) to notify the player or hall employee of the base.

FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation process 2 (step S98).

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the gaming state is in the special prize (step S9801). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether the prize is being awarded. Then, if the gaming state is during the special prize, it is a prize ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, and therefore the base is not calculated and the base calculation processing 2 is ended. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S9802), and there is a prize ball, that is, the acquired number of prize balls is 1 or more. Is determined (step S9803). As a result, if there are no prize balls, the process proceeds to step S9808 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there is an award ball, it is determined whether or not the number of award balls is abnormal (step S9805). If the number of award balls is not abnormal, the acquired award number is added to the award ball number buffer. The sphere count buffer is updated (step S9804).

On the other hand, if the number of prize balls is abnormal, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S9806) to notify the player or the hall employee that the prize balls are abnormal. There are various methods of reporting abnormality, and one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more methods may be used. Specifically, various methods described in step S816 of FIG. 46 can be used.

Abnormality in the number of prize balls means, for example, that there are many prize balls at a predetermined time other than during the special prize (for example, considering the number of prize balls at the general winning opening and the starting opening, 10 or more winnings per minute). Sphere) is obtained. It should be noted that it is also possible to provide an allowable range of a plurality of stages and judge the degree of abnormality in a plurality of stages based on the degree of deviation from the reference value of the number of prize balls.

Then, the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S9807), and counting of prize ball abnormality notification time is started.

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or larger than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S9808). Various methods can be used to determine whether the prize ball count buffer value is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1. For example, the award ball number buffer value may be compared with the threshold value Th1 or may be determined by the value of a predetermined bit of the award ball number storage area (specifically, the award ball number storage area is 8 bits. If it is configured and the most significant bit becomes 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more).

If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the time to calculate the base value, and therefore the base is not calculated, and the base calculation process 2 is ended.

On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or larger than the threshold Th1, the total prize ball number is updated so that the prize ball number buffer value is added to the total prize ball number (step S9809), and the prize ball number buffer is set to 0. It is set (step S9810).

It should be noted that the number of prize balls may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer installed in the game hall each time it is added to the prize ball number buffer, and the number of prize balls described below becomes equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold Th1. In this case, the threshold value Th1 may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer. Here, the prize ball number buffer is an area provided in the main control built-in RAM 1312 for calculating the base value, and the number of prize balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 is temporarily stored.

Then, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9811). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated, and the base calculation process 2 ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, a value obtained by multiplying the total number of prize balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. It is stored (step S9812). After a lapse of a predetermined time (32 clocks), the calculation result (total number of prize balls/total number of out balls) is read from the division result register A131218 and set as a base value (step S9813).

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S9814) to notify the player and the hall employee of the base.

After that, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer started in step S9807 has timed out (step S9815). When the prize ball abnormality notification timer times out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped (step S9816). In step S9815, the end of the notification is determined by the time of the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality for a predetermined time, but the notification end is determined so that the prize ball abnormality is notified by the predetermined number of shot balls. May be. Further, the abnormality may be continuously notified until the hall employee confirms.

FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing another example of timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 80 is the same as the timer interrupt process (FIG. 23, FIG. 75) described above except the base calculation process (steps S93 and S94) and the base display process (step S95), and therefore the description of the same process will be described. Is omitted.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first switches the register by executing the main control program (step S70).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a switch input process (step S74). In the switch input process, the detection signals from the discharge ball sensor 3060 and the launch ball sensor 1020 are read to count the number of out balls.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the base calculation process 3 (step S93). In the base calculation process 3, the total number of out balls is updated using the number of out balls counted in step S74, and the parameter for calculating the base value is written in the arithmetic circuit 13121. Details of the base calculation process 3 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 81 and 84.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the timer updating process (step S76) and the random number updating process 1 (step S78).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes prize ball control processing (step S80). In the prize ball control processing, the input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated based on the read input information, and is written in the main control built-in RAM 1312. In addition, a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes base calculation processing 4 (step S94). In the base calculation process 2, the total number of prize balls is updated using the number of prize balls counted in step S80, and a parameter for calculating the base value is written in the arithmetic circuit 13121. Details of the base calculation process 4 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 82 and 85.

Then, the main control MPU1311 is a frame command reception process (step S82), fraud detection process (step S84), special symbol and special electric auditors product control process (step S86), normal symbol and ordinary electric auditors product The control process (step S88) is executed.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the base display process of reading from the arithmetic circuit 13121 and generating a command for notifying the base (step S95).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes an output data setting process (step S90) and a peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). The watchdog timer clear register WCL is set to be clear by setting a predetermined value in the watchdog timer clear register WCL. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns) the register bank. When the above process ends, the timer interrupt process ends, and the process returns to the process before the interrupt.

FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation process 3 (step S93). The base calculation process 3 shown in FIG. 81 is obtained by removing the steps after step S9709 from the base calculation process 1 shown in FIG.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the gaming state is in the special prize (step S9701). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether the prize is being awarded. If the gaming state is during the prize, it is an out ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, and therefore the base is not calculated and the base calculation process 1 is ended. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a prize, the number of out balls detected in the switch input process (step S74) is acquired (step S9702), and the acquired out ball number is added to the total out ball number. The number of out balls is updated (step S9705). When the number of out balls cannot be acquired or the acquired number of out balls is 0, the base calculation process 3 may be immediately terminated. In this way, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without wastefully calculating the base value.

Then, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated and the base calculation process 3 is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9708).

FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation process 4 (step S94). The base calculation process 4 shown in FIG. 82 is obtained by removing the steps after step S9813 from the base calculation process 2 shown in FIG.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the gaming state is in the special prize (step S9801). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether the prize is being awarded. Then, if the gaming state is during the special prize, it is a prize ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, and therefore the base is not calculated and the base calculation processing 2 is ended. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S9802), and the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls. The total number of prize balls is updated (step S9809). When the number of prize balls cannot be acquired or the acquired number of prize balls is 0, the base calculation process 1 may be immediately terminated. In this way, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without wastefully calculating the base value.

Then, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9810). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated, and the base calculation process 2 ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, a value obtained by multiplying the total number of prize balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9812).

Note that, in step S9708 of FIG. 81, the total number of out balls is not stored in the division input register B131217, but in step S9812 of FIG. 82, a value obtained by multiplying the total number of prize balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is input to the division input register A131216. , And the total number of out balls may be stored in the division input register B131217.

FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing an example of the base display process (step S95).

The main control MPU 1311 reads out the calculation result (total prize ball count/total out ball count) from the division result register A131218 and sets it as the base value (step S8901). After that, a base notification command is generated (step S8902) to notify the player or hall employee of the base.

Since the base calculation processing shown in FIGS. 81 and 82 and the base display processing shown in FIG. 83 are executed for each timer interrupt processing, the base value can be calculated and displayed without delay. Note that the base calculation process 1 and the base calculation process 2 may not be executed for each timer interrupt process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process for every predetermined time (for example, 1 minute).

Next, another example of the base calculation process (steps S97 and S98) will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 85. In the base calculation process shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, the base value is calculated for each predetermined out ball number and each predetermined prize ball number.

FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation process 3 (step S93). The base calculation process 3 shown in FIG. 84 is the base calculation process 1 shown in FIG. 78 with steps S9709 and subsequent steps removed.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the gaming state is in the special prize (step S9701). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether the prize is being awarded. If the gaming state is during the prize, it is an out ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, and therefore the base is not calculated and the base calculation process 1 is ended. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a prize, the number of out balls detected in the switch input process (step S74) is acquired (step S9702), and the acquired out ball number is added to the out ball number buffer. The sphere count buffer is updated (step S9703). When the number of out balls cannot be acquired or the acquired number of out balls is 0, the base calculation process 3 may be immediately terminated. In this way, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without wastefully calculating the base value.

Then, it is determined whether the number of out balls stored in the out ball number buffer is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S9704). Various methods can be used to determine whether the number of out balls is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold Th2. For example, the out-ball-count buffer value may be compared with the threshold Th2, or the determination may be made based on the value of a predetermined bit of the out-ball-count storage area (specifically, the out-ball-count storage area is 8-bit). If it is configured and the most significant bit becomes 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more).

If the out-ball count buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the time to calculate the base value, and the base calculation process 1 is ended.

On the other hand, if the out ball count buffer value is greater than or equal to the threshold Th2, the total out ball count is updated so that the out ball count buffer value is added to the total out ball count (step S9705), and the out ball count buffer is set to 0. It is set (step S9706).

Then, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated and the base calculation process 1 is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9708).

FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation process 4 (step S94). The base calculation process 4 shown in FIG. 85 is the base calculation process 2 shown in FIG.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the gaming state is in the special prize (step S9801). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether the prize is being awarded. Then, if the gaming state is during the special prize, it is a prize ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, and therefore the base is not calculated and the base calculation processing 2 is ended. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S9802), and there is a prize ball, that is, the acquired number of prize balls is 1 or more. Is determined (step S9803). As a result, if there are no prize balls, the process proceeds to step S9808 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there is an award ball, it is determined whether or not the number of award balls is abnormal (step S9805). If the number of award balls is not abnormal, the acquired award number is added to the award ball number buffer. The sphere count buffer is updated (step S9804).

On the other hand, if the number of prize balls is abnormal, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S9806) to notify the player or the hall employee that the prize balls are abnormal. There are various methods of reporting abnormality, and one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more methods may be used. Specifically, various methods described in step S816 of FIG. 46 can be used.

Abnormality in the number of prize balls means, for example, that many prize balls (for example, 10 or more prizes per minute in consideration of the number of prize balls at a general winning opening or a starting opening) are obtained at a predetermined time other than during the special prize. If you are. It should be noted that it is also possible to provide an allowable range of a plurality of stages and judge the degree of abnormality in a plurality of stages based on the degree of deviation from the reference value of the number of prize balls.

Then, the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S9807), and counting of prize ball abnormality notification time is started.

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or larger than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S9808). Various methods can be used to determine whether the prize ball count buffer value is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1. For example, the award ball number buffer value may be compared with the threshold value Th1 or may be determined by the value of a predetermined bit of the award ball number storage area (specifically, the award ball number storage area is 8 bits. If it is configured and the most significant bit becomes 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more).

If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the time to calculate the base value, and therefore the base is not calculated, and the base calculation process 2 is ended.

On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or larger than the threshold Th1, the total prize ball number is updated so that the prize ball number buffer value is added to the total prize ball number (step S9809), and the prize ball number buffer is set to 0. It is set (step S9810).

It should be noted that the number of prize balls may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer installed in the game hall each time it is added to the prize ball number buffer, and the number of prize balls described below becomes equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold Th1. In this case, the threshold value Th1 may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer. Here, the prize ball number buffer is an area provided in the main control built-in RAM 1312 for calculating the base value, and the number of prize balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 is temporarily stored.

Then, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9811). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated, and the base calculation process 2 ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, a value obtained by multiplying the total number of prize balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9812).

It should be noted that, in step S9708 of FIG. 84, the total number of out balls is not stored in the division input register B131217, but in step S9812 of FIG. 85, a value obtained by multiplying the total number of prize balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is input to the division input register A131216. , And the total number of out balls may be stored in the division input register B131217.

FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing another example of the base display process (step S95).

The main control MPU 1311 reads out the calculation result (total prize ball count/total out ball count) from the division result register A131218 and sets it as the base value (step S8901). After that, a base notification command is generated (step S8902) to notify the player or hall employee of the base.

After that, it is determined whether the award ball abnormality notification timer started in step S9807 of the base calculation process 4 has timed up (step S8903). When the prize ball abnormality notification timer times out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped (step S8904). In step S8903, the end of the notification is determined by the time of the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality for a predetermined time. However, the notification end is determined so that the prize ball abnormality is notified by the predetermined number of shot balls. Good. Further, the abnormality may be continuously notified until the hall employee confirms.

As shown in FIGS. 75 and 80, in the timer interrupt processing of this embodiment, before the timer interrupt processing ends (before the timer interrupt cycle elapses and the next timer interrupt processing starts), the arithmetic circuit The input value (divisor, dividend) to the arithmetic circuit 13121 is written at the timing when the division result can be read from 13121. Specifically, the write timing of the input value (divisor, dividend) to the arithmetic circuit 13121, the first half of the timer interrupt process, or before the random number update process (step S78), a special symbol or a normal symbol It is better before the control process (steps S86 and S88).

Further, the presence or absence of execution of the process for calculating the base value may be determined by the number of game media (prize balls) given to the player. That is, from the viewpoint of the number of prize balls determined for each winning opening, whether to use the number of prize balls or the number of out balls for the calculation of the base value may be switched. For example, the prize ball of the winning opening that gives the maximum prize ball to one winning ball does not have to be used for the calculation of the base value.

Specifically, the number of prize game media (prize balls paid out for one prize ball) to be awarded when a game medium defined for each winning opening provided in the game area is 1 or 3 In the case of three types, that is, five and five, the maximum number of prize balls and the corresponding number of out balls need not be used for the calculation of the base value. This is because when a prize with a large number of prize balls is used to calculate the base value, the change in the calculated base value becomes large, and the lower digits of the calculated base value are rounded by the processing means (rounding, rounding up, rounding down, etc.). Even if the value is displayed, the displayed value may change frequently. This is because, in such a case, it becomes difficult to determine whether the pachinko machine is exhibiting a predetermined performance (for example, whether the pachinko machine is in accordance with the set payout rate) by the hole.

Further, it is not necessary to use the minimum one award ball number and the corresponding out ball number for the calculation of the base value. This is because the change in the base value due to winning with a small number of prize balls is small, so even if the one prize ball is not used in the calculation of the base value, the lower digit of the base value calculated by the processing means is rounded. This is because, when displayed (rounded up, rounded up, rounded down, etc.), the displayed base value may not change, and therefore processing that does not contribute to the change in display may be omitted.

Further, although the case where the number of prize balls is the maximum and the case where the number is the minimum is described, the intermediate number of prize balls between the maximum and the minimum need not be used for the calculation of the base value. In this case, since the maximum and minimum award balls are used to calculate the base value, the maximum and minimum awards are averaged to show the award ball number and out ball number that represent the operation of the entire pachinko machine, A base value can be indicated.

Although the pattern of the number of prize balls is three, the pattern is not limited to three and may be a pattern of the number of prize balls other than five or seven.

Furthermore, if the winnings of the number of prize balls of a specific type (one of the above-mentioned minimum value, three of the intermediate value, five of the maximum value, etc.) are not used for the calculation of the base value, the prize is won. All winnings in the gaming state when detected need not be used for calculating the base value. For example, when the winning in the winning opening that gives five prize balls is not used in the calculation of the base value, in the gaming state in which the winning in the winning opening is detected, the winning is performed until the end of the gaming state. Do not use winnings in the mouth or other winnings to calculate the base value. In addition, even after the start of the gaming state, the winning of the winning hole and the other winning holes are not used for the calculation of the base value retroactively.

In addition, when the gaming state when the winning is detected again does not need to be used for the calculation of the base value, the gaming state when the winning is detected is changed to another gaming state. The winnings up to need not be used to calculate the base value. This is whether the pachinko machine is normal (for example, whether it is according to the set payout rate) by not using the number of prize balls and the number of out balls in the gaming state where the change in the calculated base value is large, in the calculation of the base value. This is to eliminate the possibility of delaying the judgment of.

It should be noted that it is not necessary to use the maximum (or minimum, intermediate) prize ball for one winning ball when the number of prize balls changes depending on the gaming state, in the calculation of the base value.

Next, a specific process in which the number of prize balls and the number of out balls are not used in the calculation of the base value depending on the number of game media (prize balls) described above will be described.

In the switch input process (step S74), when the detection signal from each winning opening sensor is input to the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1311 may determine whether to use the winning for calculating the base value. .. For prizes that are determined not to be used in the calculation of the base value, the total prize balls and total out balls for calculating the base value are not updated, or the base value calculation process is not executed. To do. More specifically, for example, in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 75, in the base calculation process 1 (step S97), the number of winning balls to be excluded from the calculation of the base value is set to 0 and excluded from the number of out balls to calculate the base. In the process 2 (step S98), the number of prize balls excluded from the calculation of the base value may be set to 0 and not added to the total number of prize balls. If all the detected winnings are not used for the calculation of the base value, the base calculation process 1 (step S97) and the base calculation process 2 (step S98) of FIG. 75 may not be executed.

Further, in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 80, in the base calculation process 3 (step S93), the number of winning balls to be excluded from the calculation of the base value is set to 0 and excluded from the number of out balls, and the base calculation process 4 (step S94). In, the number of prize balls excluded from the calculation of the base value may be set to 0 and not added to the total number of prize balls. If all the detected winnings are not used for the calculation of the base value, the base calculation process 3 (step S93), the base calculation process 4 (step S94) and the base display process (step S95) of FIG. 80 are not executed. May be.

As a method of excluding the number of winning balls determined not to be used in the calculation of the base value from the number of out balls, a method similar to the method of correcting an out ball due to an abnormal winning described with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74 may be adopted.

In this case, since it is determined from the number of winning balls whether or not the detected winning is used for calculating the base value, the base calculation process 1 (step S97), the base calculation process 2 (step S98), and the base calculation process 3 ( In step S93) and the base calculation process 4 (step S94), it is not necessary to determine whether a prize is being awarded.

In this way, by excluding the number of out balls and the number of winning balls for a given winning from the calculation of the base value, the process is executed without skipping, so it is easy to check whether the process is being executed accurately especially in the development stage. Can be confirmed. In addition, by not performing the process of calculating the base value and updating the base value, the process of the main control MPU 1311 is reduced, and other processes (lottery process, process of determining variation pattern, etc.) are accurately executed. it can.

In other words, even if there are multiple awards with different degrees of advantage, even if the maximum award is given to the player, it is not used in the calculation of the base value, and the base value is displayed without being changed by the award of the prize. It Further, the calculated base value is displayed without change until at least the gaming state in which the maximum prize is awarded is completed.

[9-12. Different configuration of gaming machine displaying base]
FIG. 87 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, unlike the pachinko machine control configuration shown in FIG. 17, as the discharge ball sensor 3060, the board side discharge ball sensor 3060A is provided on the game board 5, and the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B is the main frame. 4 is provided. Either one of the board side discharge ball sensor 3060A and the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be provided, or both of them may be provided.

As described above, the board side discharge ball sensor 3060A is the out-passage ball sensor 1021 that detects a game ball passing through the out-port 1111 provided at the bottom of the game area 5a (see FIG. 53). The output signal of the board side discharge ball sensor 3060A is input to the main control board 1310 and is input to the main control MPU 1311 as described later with reference to FIG. In this case, the number of game balls detected by the out-passage ball sensor 1021, the number of game balls detected by the start port sensors 2104, 2551, and the number of game balls detected by the various winning hole sensors 3015, 2114, 2554, 2557. The sum of the number and the number of balls is the number of out balls.

As described above, the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B is provided at the discharge port for discharging the game balls flowing out from the game area 5a to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 4). The output signal of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 and a connector that connects the main body frame 4 and the game board 5.

When both the board side discharge ball sensor 3060A and the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B are provided, the count result of the board side discharge ball sensor 3060A and the count result of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B are compared, and two count results are obtained. An error may be notified when a difference of a predetermined value or more occurs. In addition, an error may be notified when the difference between the two counting results within the predetermined time exceeds a predetermined value.

In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the display switch 1318 is not an indispensable component, and the display contents (provisional section display and fixed section display) of the base display 1317 can be switched at predetermined time intervals as described later ( The base value may be displayed or the display content may be switched by operating the display switch 1318 (see FIG. 99).

The configuration other than the above is the same as the control configuration of the pachinko machine shown in FIG.

88 and 89 are views showing the arrangement of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B.

FIG. 88 shows an example of a mechanism in which the out balls are aligned in one line in the ball passage 960 provided in the main body frame 4 on the back surface side of the game board, and the out balls are counted by one frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B. .. The game ball rolling in the game area 5a flows into the main body frame 4 on the back surface side of the game board 5 via the outlet 1111, the general winning opening 2001, and the special winning openings 2005 and 2006. The main body frame 4 is provided with a sphere flow passage 960 that allows the discharged game balls to flow down to the right side in front view and is aligned in one line. The frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B counts the game balls arranged in one line.

FIG. 89 shows an example of a mechanism in which the out balls aligned in the ball passage 960 provided on the back surface of the game board are caused to flow down by two rows and counted by the plurality of discharge ball sensors 3060. The game ball rolling in the game area 5a flows into the main body frame 4 on the back side of the game board 5 through the out port 1111, the general winning opening 2001, the starting openings 2002 and 2004, and the special winning openings 2005 and 2006. The main body frame 4 is provided with a ball passage 960 that allows the discharged game balls to flow down from the left and right to the vicinity of the center and is aligned in two lines. Each of the two frame side discharge ball sensors 3060B provided counts the game balls arranged in each line.

The frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B is provided at the position shown in FIG. 53, FIG. 88, and FIG. 89, but it may be unitized with the ball flow passage 960 and configured to be detachable from the main body frame 4. Further, the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be detachable from the main body frame 4.

FIG. 90 is a diagram showing a connection example of the discharge ball sensor and the main control board.

The output line of the board side discharge ball sensor 3060A is connected to the connector 13101 provided on the main control board 1310 via the relay board, and the output signal of the board side discharge ball sensor 3060A is input to the main control MPU 1311. The output line of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B is connected to the connector 13102 provided on the main control board 1310, and the output signal of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B is input to the main control MPU 1311.

The connector 13101 to which the output line of the board side discharge ball sensor 3060A is connected is preferably provided on the upper side of the main control board 1310, and the connector 13102 to which the output line of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B is connected is the main control board 1310. It is good to be provided under the.

The connector 13101 to which the output line of the board side discharge ball sensor 3060A is connected and the connector 13102 to which the output line of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B is connected are provided separately. The output line of 3060A and the output line of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be connected to one connector (for example, 13102).

The output line of the board side discharge ball sensor 3060A may be connected to the main control board 1310 without passing through the relay board. The output line of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be directly connected to the main control board 1310. The output line of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be connected to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. The output line of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be connected to the main control board 1310 via a relay board (not shown). After connecting the output line of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B to the payout control board 951 or the relay board, it is connected to the main control board 1310 via a connector (for example, a floating connector) that connects the game board 5 and the main body frame 4 You may.

Further, the pachinko machine of this embodiment is provided with a plurality of magnetic detection sensors 1030. The output signal of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 is input to the main control MPU 1311 as described later with reference to FIG.

FIG. 91 is a front view showing an example of the game board 5, and particularly shows the arrangement of the magnetic detection sensors 1030 provided on the game board 5.

The magnetic detection sensor 1030 is a sensor that detects illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, and is in the vicinity of a sensor that detects a prize in each of the various winning openings 2001, 2002, 2004, 2005, 2006 (the position of a star in the figure). It is provided in. The detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 is indicated by a broken line on the game board 5 and partially overlaps.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the magnetic detection sensor 1030 is also provided near the outlet 1111. This is to prevent an incorrect calculation of the base value. That is, when the player brings the magnet close to the out port 1111 and operates the discharge ball sensor 3060, the number of out balls is counted more than it actually is, and the base value decreases. For this reason, a game shop may perform maintenance work on the pachinko machine 1 so as to restore the base value to a predetermined standard value. In a pachinko machine that has undergone maintenance work based on a base value that is different from the actual base value, the number of balls in the normal state will increase, allowing the player to play in a more advantageous state than usual and obtain a large number of balls. A magnetic detection sensor 1030 is provided in the vicinity of the outlet 1111 in order to calculate an accurate base value and prevent the illegal payout of the ball. In addition to the vicinity of the outlet 1111, the magnetic detection sensor 1030 may be provided at a position where the discharge ball sensor 3060 may malfunction due to magnetism.

The magnetic detection sensor 1030 provided near the outlet 1111 preferably has a wider detection range than the other magnetic detection sensors 1030 as illustrated. This is because, as shown in FIG. 89, when a plurality of discharge ball sensors 3060 detect an out ball, the magnetism is detected within a sufficient range capable of covering the plurality of discharge ball sensors 3060. Further, the magnetic detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 provided near the outlet 1111 may include another winning opening (for example, a large winning opening 2005 provided above the outlet 1111).

FIG. 92 is a diagram showing the structure of the main control input circuit 1315. The main control input circuit 1315 includes a discharge ball sensor 3060 and a winning opening sensor (general winning opening sensor 3015, first starting opening sensor 2104, second starting opening sensor 2551, first big winning opening sensor 2114, second upper big winning opening). The sensor 2554, the second lower special winning opening sensor 2557, etc.) and the magnetic detection sensor 1030 are received and input to the main control MPU 1311.

The main control input circuit 1315 includes an interface circuit 1331 and a buffer circuit 1332. The interface circuit 1331 performs level conversion and shaping (for example, chattering removal) of signals input from various sensors and outputs the signals. The buffer circuit 1332 outputs the input signal to the data bus at the timing instructed by the main control MPU 1311.

Specifically, the output signal from each sensor is input to any one of the terminals A1 to A8 of the interface circuit 1331, and the signal level-converted and shaped by the interface circuit 1331 is output from the terminals Y1 to Y8 and is output to the buffer. The signal is input to one of the terminals A1 to A8 of the circuit 1332. The buffer circuit 1332 outputs the signals input to the Y1 to Y8 terminals to the data bus at the timing when the chip select signals CS4 and CS5 of the main control MPU 1311 are input. As a result, the detection result of each sensor is taken into the main control MPU 1311.

The interface circuit 1331 includes an abnormality detection circuit and a power supply monitoring circuit. The abnormality detection circuit of the interface circuit 1331 monitors the inputs of the terminals A1 to A8, and the input signal to each terminal is at a level lower than a predetermined threshold value (for example, 4V) or a predetermined threshold value (for example, power supply voltage- 0.1V), a disconnection of the connection line to the switch or a short circuit of the switch is detected, and when the input of any terminal exceeds the normal range defined by the predetermined threshold value, the abnormal signal E And outputs a signal of a level at which each sensor is OFF, from the Y1 to Y8 terminals, regardless of the input signal to the A1 to A8 terminals. The power supply monitoring circuit of the interface circuit 1331 monitors the power supply voltage VS, and when the power supply voltage becomes lower than a predetermined threshold value (for example, 12V-20%) and the power supply abnormality is detected, the abnormality signal E is output. At the same time, irrespective of the input signals of the terminals A1 to A8, the signals of the level in which each sensor is OFF are output from the terminals Y1 to Y8. That is, even if an ON level signal is input from the sensor, the output of the interface circuit corresponding to the input becomes the OFF level. For this reason, the main control MPU 1311 does not determine that the signal output from the sensor is valid (the output of the sensor is invalid). As a result, the main control MPU 1311 does not need to determine whether or not to process the input signal depending on whether or not the power supply of the switch has dropped, and the processing load can be reduced and the output signals of Y1 to Y8 can be reduced. Regardless of the states of the input signals A1 to A8, a signal of a level at which each sensor is turned off can be output.

As will be described later, when the main control MPU 1311 detects an abnormal signal, the main control MPU 1311 does not calculate the base value (see FIG. 105). The interface circuit 1331 receives a signal from the sensor used for calculating the base value (number of discharged balls, number of prize balls) and a signal from a sensor not used for calculating the base value (gate sensor 2547, etc.). .. The interface circuit 1331 outputs an abnormal signal when any of the input signals becomes abnormal. Therefore, even if an abnormality is detected in the sensor that is not related to the base calculation, the base calculation is not executed and the display content of the base display 1317 is maintained and does not change.

That is, the main control input circuit 1315 monitors the signal from the sensor used for the calculation of the base value and the signal from the sensor not used for the calculation of the base value, and when either signal becomes abnormal, An abnormal signal is output to stop the calculation of the base.

93, 94, and 95 are diagrams showing mounting examples of the main control board 1310. 93A shows an example in which the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334, and FIG. 93B shows that the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are one. An example of connection to the driver circuit 1334 is shown. FIG. 94 shows the arrangement on the main control MPU 1311, the base display 1317, and the main control board 1310. FIG. 95(A) is a front view of the main control board 1310 housed in the main control board box 1320, FIG. 95(B) is a bottom view, and FIG. 95(C) is a right side view.

As shown in FIGS. 93A and 93B, the main control I/O port 1314 includes a latch circuit 1333 and a driver circuit 1334.

In the example shown in FIG. 93A, the display data of the function display unit 1400 and the display data of the base display 1317 are output from the main control MPU 1311 and taken into different latch circuits 1333. Then, the display data is output from the different driver circuit 1334 to the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317.

In the example shown in FIG. 93B, the display data of the function display unit 1400 and the display data of the base display 1317 are output from the main control MPU 1311 and taken into one latch circuit 1333. Then, the display data is output from one driver circuit 1334 to the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317.

In the example shown in FIGS. 93A and 93B, the reset signal from the reset circuit 1335 and the clock signal from the clock oscillator 1336 are input to the main control MPU 1311. It is preferable that the signal line from which the display data of the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 is output from the main control MPU 1311 and the signal line of the reset signal or the clock signal do not intersect.

The connector 13101 is a connector to which the output line of the board side discharge ball sensor 3060A is connected, and is preferably provided on the upper side of the main control board 1310. To the connector 13101, not only the output line from the board side discharge ball sensor 3060A, but also the other winning opening sensors 3015, 2104, etc., and the output line from the magnetic detection sensor 1030 are connected. The connector 13102 is a connector to which the output line of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B is connected, and is preferably provided below the main control board 1310. The signal from the discharge ball sensor 3060 input to the connectors 13101 and 13102 is input to the main control MPU 1311 via the interface circuit 1331 and the buffer circuit 1332.

FIG. 94 is a diagram showing an arrangement on the main control board 1310 of components arranged between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317. FIG. 94 is a diagram showing a printed circuit board that constitutes the main control board 1310 from the back surface side. The solid line is the pattern on the back surface side, the broken line is the pattern on the component surface side, and the dotted line is the component mounted on the component surface of the printed circuit board. Indicates. Illustration of the ground pattern and the power supply pattern is omitted.

The data lines (D1 to D8) output from the main control MPU 1311 are input to the latch 2 (1333) and passed through the driver 2 (1334) to the segment on the cathode side of each digit of the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317. Connected to the terminal.

In addition, a part of the data lines (D1 to D4) output from the main control MPU 1311, is input to the latch 1 (1333) and passes through the driver 1 (1334) to each digit of the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317. Connected to the common terminal on the anode side of.

A chip select signal for controlling the operation timing of the latch circuit 1333 is output from the main control MPU 1311. Specifically, the latch circuit 2 (1333) is a timing when the chip select signal CS2 of the main control MPU 1311 is input. Then, the data for controlling the blinking of each segment is fetched from the data lines (D1 to D8). The latch circuit 1 (1333) fetches data for controlling blinking of each digit from the data lines (D1 to D4) at the timing when the chip select signal CS3 of the main control MPU 1311 is input.

The reset signal from the reset circuit 1335 and the clock signal from the clock oscillator 1336 are input to the main control MPU 1311. The reset signal is also input from the reset circuit 1335 to each latch circuit 1333. The latch circuit 1333 clears the latched data by the reset signal.

The data lines (D1 to D8) between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 are arranged so as not to intersect the signal lines for the reset signal and the clock signal. Similarly, although not shown, the data lines (D1 to D8) between the main control MPU 1311 and the function display unit 1400 are arranged so as not to intersect the signal lines for the reset signal and the clock signal.

This is because, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the base display 1317 is controlled by dynamic lighting, so a pulse signal is transmitted through the data line between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317, and the main control MPU 1311 and The level of the data line between the base display 1317 and the base display 1317 changes frequently. In particular, a large current required to drive the LED element flows between the driver circuit 1334 and the base display 1317. Therefore, the data line between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 (particularly between the driver circuit 1334 and the base display 1317) becomes a cause of noise. When the data line between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 and the signal line of the reset signal or the clock signal intersect, noise is placed on the signal line of the reset signal or the clock signal, and the pachinko machine 1 malfunctions. there's a possibility that. The intersection of the signal lines may occur at the intersection of the wiring patterns on the front surface and the back surface of the printed circuit board or at the intersection of the wiring patterns of the inner layer and the surface layer (front surface, back surface).

Specifically, by inputting a reset signal to the main control MPU 1311 at a timing that should never occur, the main control MPU 1311 may be reset during the game, and the game may be stopped or the game state may be erased. .. If the game state is erased at a timing that should never occur, the normal power-off process is not executed and is reset. Therefore, the data stored in the RAM 1312 is cleared, the jackpot is ended, and the fluctuation display is displayed. The game ends in the middle, or the suspension of the special symbol variable display game or the normal symbol variable display game is deleted.

The main control board box 1320 is partially low in height and high in other portions depending on the height of components mounted on the main control board 1310 and interference with other members when assembled. Has become. For example, as shown in FIG. 95, the height of the main control MPU 1311 is high, so that the position where the main control MPU 1311 is mounted has the height of the main control board box 1320 and the position where the main control MPU 1311 is mounted. In the area on the left side of the main control board box 1320, the height of the main control board box 1320 is increased, and components such as a relatively tall electrolytic capacitor are mounted. On the other hand, the height of the main control board box 1320 is low in the area on the right side of the location where the main control MPU 1311 is mounted, and components such as ICs with a short height are mounted (a tall component cannot be arranged). The area where the main control board box 1320 is high and in which high-height components can be mounted is indicated by hatching. Further, in the area where the connectors 13101 and 13102 are attached, the main control board box 1320 is formed to have a height that is equal to or lower than the surface on which the mating connector is inserted/removed (preferably the same height as the board surface). It is recommended that the cable (connector) to be connected to the board of (2) is not hindered from being inserted or removed.

In this way, by partially changing the height of the main control board box 1320 according to the height of the components mounted on the board, it is possible to suppress the goto act of mounting an unauthorized component (circuit) on the main control board. it can.

In FIG. 95, the base display 1317 is arranged in the upper right part of the main control board 1310, but even if the main body frame 4 is opened by a predetermined angle for the sake of maintenance, the base is displayed at a position where it is difficult for the player to see the display contents. A display 1317 may be provided. For example, when the player can visually check the display contents of the base display 1317 when the main body frame 4 is opened by a predetermined angle for maintenance during operation (check whether or not there is a game ball in the supply tank). Often does not understand how to read the display on the base display 1317 correctly, the player may be required to explain the display contents on the base display 1317 in order to prevent such complication. In addition, the base display 1317 may be arranged at a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the display contents. Also, by arranging the base display 1317 in this way, it is possible to suppress inquiries from the player. That is, the base indicator 1317 displays the base value of 52,000 operation balls at the maximum, but the base value in the short-time game by the player is different, so that a claim about the ball-out rate may occur. There is. By arranging the base display 1317 in this way, complaints from the player can be suppressed. The above is the same with the character ratio display 1317 described above, and the character ratio display 1317 may be arranged at a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the display content.

As shown in the figure, the base display (7-segment LED) 1317 has a low height, and thus is mounted in a region where the height of the main control board box 1320 is low.

FIG. 96 is a diagram showing the configuration of the main control I/O port 1314. As shown in FIG. 93A, the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334. It is a circuit diagram. In this embodiment, an example in which the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are light emitting diodes (LEDs) will be described, but they may be lamps (light bulbs) or other light emitting elements. The main control I/O port 1314 is arranged between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 or the function display unit 1400, and outputs the display data output from the main control MPU 1311 to the base display 1317 or the function display unit 1400. To do.

As described above, the main control I/O port 1314 includes the latch circuit 1333 and the driver circuit 1334.

The latch circuit 1333 takes in the input data at the timing of the clock signal, holds it until the next clock signal or clear signal is input, and outputs it. The driver circuit 1334 operates the switching transistor according to the input signal, and outputs the power supply voltage (+12 V) input to the VCC terminal of the driver circuit 1334, respectively.

Specifically, the latch circuit 1333 captures the bus data input to the D1 to D8 terminals at the rising timing of the clock signal CK and outputs the bus data to the driver circuit 1334 from the Q1 to Q8 terminals, respectively. The driver circuit 1334 operates the switching transistors according to the signals input to the I1 to I8 terminals, and changes the voltages of the O1 to O8 terminals, respectively. The outputs O1 to O8 of the driver circuit 1334 are connected to the segment terminals of the 7-segment LED which forms the base display 1317 and the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400.

For example, in order to turn on the 7th segment LED (7seg1) of the first digit of the base display 1317, the driver 2 (1334) outputs the bus data D1 to D8 captured in the latch 2 (1333) at the rising timing of CS1. Output as segment data (LOW when lit). The driving timing of the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317 is determined by the timing of the voltage applied to the common terminal. That is, at the rising timing of CS0, the driver 1 (1334) outputs the bus data D1 to D4 fetched by the latch 1 (1333) as common data (HIGH when driven). Specifically, if the bus data D1 is HIGH at the rising timing of CS0, COM1 output from the driver 1 (1334) becomes HIGH, and the first-segment 7-segment LED (7seg1) of the base display 1317 is turned on. Driven.

In addition, since the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400 is turned on, the bus data D1 to D8 fetched by the latch 3 (1333) is transferred to the segment data (LOW is turned on when the driver 3 (1334) operates at the rising timing of CS2. ) Is output. The drive timing of the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400 is determined by the timing of the voltage applied to the common terminal (LED-C1). That is, the driver 4 (1334) outputs the bus data D1 to D4 fetched by the latch 4 (1333) as common data (HIGH when driven) at the rising timing of CS3. Specifically, if the bus data D1 is HIGH at the rising timing of CS3, the O1 terminal of the driver 4 (1334) becomes HIGH, and the 7-segment LED (LED-C1) of the function display unit 1400 is driven.

In this embodiment, since the 7-segment LED of both the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400 is the common anode type, a current flows from the driver 1 to the driver 2 through the 7-segment LED. Therefore, when the segment is turned on, the outputs of the drivers 1 and 4 are VCC (+12V), and the outputs of the drivers 2 and 3 are GND (0V).

The latches 1 and 4 (1333) on the common side output the data input from the data bus to the Q1 to Q8 terminals as they are, but the latches 1 and 4 (1333) have a decoder function and have a data bus. A signal may be output from any one of the terminals Q1 to Q8 in accordance with the binary data acquired from.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93A and FIG. 96, signal output timings when the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334 will be described.

The segment data sent from the driver 2 (1334) to the base display 1317 and the common data sent from the driver 1 (1334) to the base display 1317 are output in the same timer interrupt processing. Further, segment data sent from the driver 3 (1334) to the function display unit 1400 and common data sent from the driver 4 (1334) to the function display unit 1400 are also output in the same timer interrupt processing. That is, since the common data and the segment data are sent to the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400 via different signal lines, both the display data on the base display 1317 and the display data on the function display unit 1400 are It is output in one timer interrupt process.

Then, in the next timer interrupt process, common data for selecting the next digit (group of LEDs) is output, and segment data for controlling lighting of each LED is output at the same timing as the output of the common data.

The display data on the base display 1317 and the display data on the function display unit 1400 are generated by another process in the timer interrupt process and output at another timing in the timer interrupt process. That is, the main control MPU 1311 executes the base calculation/display code 13135 outside the game control area to generate and output the display data to the base display 1317. On the other hand, the main control MPU 1311 executes the game control code 13131 in the game control area to generate and output display data to the function display unit 1400. These data are generated by another program (code) and output at different timing.

Next, a modification of the signal output timing when the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334 will be described.

The segment data sent from the driver 2 (1334) to the base display 1317 and the common data sent from the driver 1 (1334) to the base display 1317 are output in the same timer interrupt processing. Similarly, the segment data sent from the driver 3 (1334) to the function display unit 1400 and the common data sent from the driver 4 (1334) to the function display unit 1400 are output in the same timer interrupt process. The timer interrupt process for outputting the data to be sent to the base display 1317 is executed at a different timing from the timer interrupt process for outputting the data to be sent to the function display unit 1400, and may be executed subsequently.

The processing of outputting a signal to the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 is executed according to programs (game control code 13131, base calculation/display code 13135) stored in different areas of the RAM 1312, but the same processing is performed. In order to prevent the common signal from being transmitted at the timing, it is advisable to use control data common to the two codes so that the common signal transmission timings do not overlap. For example, a common counter commonly used by the game control code 13131 and the base calculation/display code 13135 is provided. For example, when the common counter is 0 to 3, a common signal is output to the function display unit 1400 and the common counter is used. Is controlled to output a common signal to the base display 1317.

The process of outputting the common signal and the process of outputting the segment signal may be configured separately or in one subroutine. The game control code 13131 for executing the process of outputting the data to be sent to the function display unit 1400 and the base calculation/display code 13135 for executing the process of outputting the data to be sent to the base display 1317 are respectively It is preferable to call the subroutine at a timing determined by the program and output a signal to the function display unit 1400 or the base display 1317. In this case, the output of the data sent to the function display unit 1400 and the output of the data sent to the base display 1317 are not performed in the same timer interrupt process. The game control code 13131 and the base calculation/display code 13135 are executed in one timer interrupt process, but the subroutine is called by different timer interrupt processes.

As shown in FIGS. 93A and 96, when the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334, a display (function display unit 1400) provided outside the main control board 1310. Even if noise is mixed in, the influence on the display (base display 1317) inside the main control board 1310 and the circuit of the main control board 1310 can be suppressed.

FIG. 97 is a diagram showing the configuration of the main control I/O port 1314. As shown in FIG. 93(B), the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to the common driver circuit 1334 on the common side. 6 is a circuit diagram of an example of FIG. The main control I/O port 1314 is arranged between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 or the function display unit 1400, and outputs the display data output from the main control MPU 1311 to the base display 1317 or the function display unit 1400. To do.

As described above, the main control I/O port 1314 includes the latch circuit 1333 and the driver circuit 1334. The configuration of the circuit included in the main control I/O port 1314 is the same as the above-described circuit configuration, and therefore the difference from the configuration example shown in FIG. 96 will be described below.

In the example shown in FIG. 97, the operation for lighting the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317 is the same as in the example shown in FIG. 96, but the common of the function display unit 1400 is the common signal with the base display 1317. It is common.

In order to turn on the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400, the bus data D1 to D8 taken in by the latch 3 (1333) is set as the segment data (LOW when turned on) by the driver 3 (1334) at the rising timing of CS2. Output. The drive timing of the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400 is determined by the timing of the voltage applied to the common terminal (LED-C1). That is, at the rising timing of CS0, the driver 1 (1334) outputs the bus data D1 to D4 fetched by the latch 1 (1333) as common data (HIGH when driven).

In this way, by making the driver circuit common to the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400, the circuit scale can be reduced. By reducing the number of parts, the failure rate is reduced, the size of the board can be reduced, and the board unit (including the main control board 1310 and the main control board box 1320) can be easily miniaturized. In the pachinko machine, the main control board 1310 does not use an inner layer pattern (printed board having three or more layers), but uses a two-layer board having a pattern only on the front surface and the back surface. Therefore, even if components can be physically arranged on the main control board 1310 composed of a two-layer board, an area for routing the wiring pattern cannot be secured, and the board must be larger than a multilayer board having three or more layers. Therefore, downsizing by reducing the number of parts is important.

FIG. 98 is a timing chart in the configuration example of the main control I/O port 1314 shown in FIG. In FIG. 98, a dotted line perpendicular to the time axis indicates a timer interrupt processing delimiter (timer interrupt processing start timing).

In the timer interrupt process, the main control MPU 1311 outputs the digit selection data to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS0. The latch 1 (1333) selected by CS0 fetches D1 to D4 from the data bus at the rising timing of CS0, and the driver 1 (1334) receives common data (at the time of driving) corresponding to the digit designated by D1 to D4. Outputs HIGH).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 outputs the data of the segment turned on in the function display unit 1400 to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS2. The latch 3 (1333) selected by CS2 fetches D1 to D8 from the data bus at the rising timing of CS2, and the driver 3 (1334) receives the segment data (LOW is lit) designated by D1 to D8. The output is performed and the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400 is turned on.

After that, the main control MPU 1311 outputs the data of the segment turned on by the base display 1317 to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS1. The latch 2 (1333) selected by CS1 fetches D1 to D8 from the data bus at the rising timing of CS1, and the driver 2 (1334) receives the segment data (LOW is lit) designated by D1 to D8. Then, the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317 is turned on.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets all data on the data bus to 0 at the timing of outputting CS0, CS1 and CS2. As a result, the digit selection data set in the latch 1 (1333) and the display data set in the latches 2 and 3 (1333) are erased, and the 7-segment LED is turned off.

In the next timer interrupt processing, the main control MPU 1311 outputs the next digit selection data to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS0, and repeats the above-described processing to output the digit selection data and the display data. In this way, the base display unit 1317 and the function display unit 1400 share the common driver circuit, time-divisionally output segment data, and the common display unit 1310 and the base display unit 1317 function together. The LED element with the display unit 1400 can be turned on.

As shown in FIGS. 93B and 97, since the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to the common driver circuit 1334, the circuit scale of the main control board 1310 can be reduced and high-density mounting (for example, It is possible to easily mount components on the main control substrate 1310, which does not allow the use of a multilayer substrate or the close placement of components.

Further, in order to control both the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 with common common data in one timer interrupt process, the function display unit 1400 and the base display can be controlled during the period when the common data is being output. The segment data is output at a timing different from that of 1317. Therefore, both the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 can be controlled by a common common data line while the display of both the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 can be controlled within one timer interrupt process. ..

In the case shown in FIG. 98, the display data of the function display unit 1400 is output first, and the display data of the base display 1317 is output later. Each display data is latched at the rising timing of the chip select (CS2, CS1) and erased at the rising timing of the chip select (CS0) corresponding to the erase data. Therefore, as shown in the figure, when the display data of the function display unit 1400 is output first and the display data of the base display unit 1317 is output later, the display time of the function display unit 1400 is the display time of the base display unit 1317. It will be longer. This lengthens the lighting time in one cycle of the LED of the function display unit 1400 arranged on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1 and increases the brightness, thereby reducing the visibility due to being directly illuminated by the illumination of the hall. This is to prevent it. In addition, since the base display 1317 is arranged on the back side that is darker than the front side of the pachinko machine 1, even if the LED emits light with low brightness, the visibility of the base display 1317 is small. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the first LED and the second LED controlled by the main control MPU 1311 are provided, and the emission brightness of the first LED is higher than the emission brightness of the second LED.

Contrary to the above, the display data of the base display 1317 is output first, the display data of the function display unit 1400 is output later, and the display time of the base display 1317 is displayed by the function display unit 1400. May be longer than time.

FIG. 99 is a diagram showing changes in the state (section) for calculating the base value.

On the base display 1317 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the provisional section display and the fixed section display are switched and displayed at intervals of a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). In the provisional section display, the base value of the section being measured is displayed. Specifically, "bA." is displayed in the upper two digits to indicate that the base value A is being displayed, and the base value A being measured is displayed in the lower two digits as a two-digit percentage. When the integer part of the percentage of the base value A is 99, "99" is displayed, when it is 100 or more, "99." is displayed, and when it is 0, "00" is displayed. Therefore, even if the number of digits displayed on the base display 1317 is two, it can be displayed so that whether the base value A is 0% or 100% can be understood.

In addition, in the provisional section display, when the number of low-probability/non-time saving out balls is less than a predetermined number (for example, 6000), the upper two digits (or all four digits) are displayed by blinking (for example, a cycle of 0.6 seconds). Then, it turns on for 0.3 seconds and turns off for 0.3 seconds), indicating that the accurate base value cannot be measured. On the other hand, when the number of low-probability/non-time saving out balls is equal to or larger than a predetermined number (for example, 6000), the upper two digits are lit and displayed to indicate that the accurate base value can be measured.

In the confirmed section display, the base value of the previous section is displayed. Specifically, it indicates that “bb.” is lit up in the upper two digits to display the base value B, and the lower two digits indicate the base value of the immediately preceding section (below the last period. The base value B), which is the final two-digit value, is lit and displayed with a two-digit percentage. When the integer part of the percentage of the base value B is 99, "99" is displayed, when it is 100 or more, "99." is displayed, and when it is 0, "00" is displayed. Therefore, even if the number of digits displayed on the base display 1317 is two, it can be displayed so that whether the base value B is 0% or 100% can be understood.

In the first section, the previous section is a test section, so the base value is not measured. Therefore, in the confirmed section display, “bb.” is blinkingly displayed in the upper two digits and “−−” is blinkingly displayed in the lower two digits.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the base value is not calculated as a predetermined number (for example, 256) of which the number of out balls is less than 500 after the first power-on, as a test section. This is because when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on for a predetermined number of times and the predetermined number of shots are launched, the exit ball may vary within the probability distribution range, the base value is not stable, and a meaningful base value cannot be measured. .. Therefore, in the test section, the base value is not displayed on the base display 1317 and the base value is indefinite. Specifically, in the provisional section display, “bA.” is displayed in the upper two digits, “−−” is displayed in the lower one digit, and “bb.” is displayed in the upper two digits in the fixed section display. , "---" is displayed in the last digit. In the test section, all the digits of the base display 1317 are displayed in blinking to show that an accurate base value cannot be measured. The base value may be calculated in the test section, and the calculated base value may not be displayed on the base display 1317, and the base value may be indefinite.

Here, when the power is turned on for the first time, the power is turned on for the first time after the completion of the pachinko machine 1 or immediately after the initialization of the work area for base calculation (S26 in FIG. 101, S8013 in FIG. 108) is executed. It is in a state. In addition, the power-on state generally used in this specification is a power-on state other than the first power-on time.

Further, all the LEDs of all the digits of the base display 1317 may be blinked for a predetermined time after the power is turned on or a predetermined time after the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are ended (from the OFF operation of the setting key 971). ..

In the inspection of the data in the base calculation area 13128, which will be described later, when an abnormality is detected in the data and the data is erased, the calculation of the base value is restarted from the test section.

In each section other than the test section, when the total number of out balls in all game states (big hit, normal game, short time, non-time saving, high probability, low probability, etc.) reaches 52000, the next interval Switch to and measure a new base value. Note that the number of out balls in one section is not 52,000 and may be any other number as long as it is a predetermined value. For example, assuming that the operating time of the pachinko machine 1 per day is 10 hours, 60000 which is the operating time per day (the number of out balls) may be adopted as the number of out balls in one section. It is also possible to adopt 50,000 or 100,000, which is a sharp number.

The number of out balls in one section may be changed as appropriate. For example, a setting switch (DIP switch, rotary switch, etc.) may be provided on the main control board 1310, and the number of out balls in one section may be set according to the setting of the switch. The switch is provided on the main control board 1310 provided on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 or on another board connected to the main control board 1310. Further, when the setting of the switch is changed, the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) of the RAM 1312 is initialized and the calculation of the base value is restarted from the test section, or even when restarted from the beginning of the current section. Good. Since pachinko machines are often operated immediately after being introduced as a new machine, the number of out balls in one section is set to a large number, and after the business period elapses, the number of out balls in one section is set to a small number. That is, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a setting means capable of setting the operation that determines the length of the section that is the unit of calculation of the base value, and when the power is turned on for the first time, based on the operation set by the setting means. The length of one section is set.

Note that, as the confirmed section display, an example in which the section immediately before the provisional section currently being measured is displayed will be described, but the base values of a plurality of confirmed sections (for example, the sections 1 to 3 sections before) are switched and displayed. You may. At this time, even if the display is switched between the provisional section → the confirmed section 1 → the confirmed section 2 → the confirmed section 3 every predetermined time, the provisional section → the confirmed section 1 → the confirmed section 2 → by the operation of the display changeover switch provided separately. The confirmed section 3 may be switched and displayed.

In this case, the first two digits of the base display 1317 in the fixed section display are not “bb.” but “b1”, “b2”, and “b3” so that the displayed section can be understood in each fixed section. Different display is recommended.

In this way, the base display 1317 switches and displays the base value of the section currently being measured and the base value of the immediately preceding section or sections at predetermined time intervals. Further, a display capable of distinguishing the display contents is displayed on a part of the base display 1317, and the measured base value is displayed on the other part.

FIG. 100 is a diagram showing an example of characters displayed on the base display 1317.

As described above, the base display 1317 is composed of a multi-digit (for example, four-digit) 7-segment LED, and displays a number or a character by lighting or blinking the segment of each digit. Numbers 0 to 9 can be displayed, and letters A, b, c, d, E, F, L and-signs can also be displayed. Furthermore, the decimal point can be displayed at the same time as numbers and letters. The case where the numeral 6 is displayed at the same time as the decimal point and the case where the numeral 9 is displayed are illustrated.

101 and 102 are flowcharts showing an example of initialization processing of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

The initialization process shown in FIGS. 101 and 102 is different from the initialization process described above with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22, and the check code calculation process (step S50) and the check code storage process (step S52) are deleted. Therefore, the calculation of the check code of the base calculation area is executed by the base calculation process (step S8038) of the timer interrupt process. The same steps as those in the initialization process described above with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 executes the main control program to perform initialization processing. The main control MPU 1311 first sets the protect of the RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 to write-enabled, and sets the RAM 1312 in a state in which writing is possible (step S10). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 activates the built-in watchdog timer (step S12), and determines whether a predetermined wait time (time required for activating the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.)) has elapsed. The determination is made (step S16). If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch has been operated (step S18). When the RAM clear switch is operated, the data in the area other than the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 is erased (step S30), and step S24. Proceed to. On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is not operated, the data backed up in the internal RAM 1312 is not erased and it is determined whether the power failure flag is set (step S20).

As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so the data (other than the base calculation area 13128) backed up in the work area is erased (step S30). , And proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is set, the power failure flag is cleared, and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 using the checksum calculated at the previous power shutdown and the checksum calculated in step S48. The stored checksum is compared (verified) (step S22).

As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data does not match the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so the data backed up in the work area ( The areas other than the base calculation area 13128 are erased (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 match, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 is correct, so the data backed up in the work area is not erased, and the step S24 is performed. Proceed to.

Then, it is determined using the check code whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal (step S24). If it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may not be correct, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is erased (step S26).

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a case in which at least a part of the RAM 1312 is initialized, the operation of the RAM clear switch (step S18) and the power failure flag abnormality in which the power failure flag is not set (step S20). , The RAM checksums do not match, the RAM abnormality (step S22), and the base calculation work abnormality (step S24). Of these, as shown in the figure, when the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, and when the power failure flag is abnormal or the RAM is abnormal, the game control area 13126 (the game work area and the game stack area are set). However, the base calculation area 13128 (including the base calculation work area and the base calculation stack area) is not cleared. Further, in the case of the base calculation work abnormality, the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is cleared, and the game control area 13126 is not cleared.

Note that, unlike the illustrated one, in the case of a power failure flag abnormality, a RAM abnormality, and a base calculation work abnormality, since the validity of the data stored in the RAM 1312 is not guaranteed, the game control area 13126 and the base calculation area 13128. The entire RAM area including may be cleared. If all RAM areas are cleared in the case of a work for base calculation, if the memory configuration is such that the data indicating the game state is lost and normal processing cannot be executed, the work area for base calculation and the stack area for base calculation Only initialize it. Further, when the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared and the base calculation area 13128 is set as described above. You don't have to clear it.

If one or a plurality of backup areas are provided in the base calculation area 13128, the main area is first determined using a check code, and if it is determined that the main area is abnormal, the backup areas 1, 2 , N in this order, and the data in the backup area initially determined to be normal may be copied to the main area. After that, the data in the backup area may be erased or left as it is. When it is determined that the main area is normal, the data in the backup area may be erased or left as it is.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 is erased under different conditions for each data type (the game control area 13126 and the base calculation area 13128). To do. That is, by the operation of the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control area 13126 is erased, but the backed up base calculation area 13128 is not erased. When the base calculation area 13128 can be erased by operating the RAM clear switch, the base value calculated by the pachinko machine 1 can be erased at an arbitrary timing. Therefore, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up base calculation area 13128 is not erased, and the base calculation area 13128 is prevented from being erased by the operation of an attendant at the game arcade, thereby concealing an abnormal base value. It can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to reliably detect the gaming machine that has been modified to have a high or low base value.

The main control MPU 1311 performs initial setting processing (step S28) for setting to various setting registers of the main control MPU 1311 (CPU 13111) when the RAM work area power recovery setting or RAM initialization processing is executed, peripheral control board. A power-on command setting process (step S32) for transmitting to 1510 is executed, and execution of interrupt processing including timer interrupt processing is permitted (step S34). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the power failure notification signal (step S36) and determines whether the power failure notification signal is ON (step S38). If the power failure notice signal is not ON (result of step S38 is "No"), random number update processing is executed (step S40).

On the other hand, when the power failure advance notice signal is detected (the result of step S38 is “Yes”), the main control MPU 1311 executes power-off time processing (power-off time setting means). In the power-off processing, first, the execution of interrupt processing is prohibited (step S42), the output port is cleared, and the operation of the device controlled by the output from each port is stopped (step S44). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum for determining whether or not the data stored in the work area to be backed up is normally held (step S46), and the checksum calculation result is checked in the RAM 1312. It is stored in the thumb area (step S48).

Then, the data in the main area of the base calculation work (base calculation area 13128) is copied to each backup area (step S54). At this time, the calculated check code is also copied. The backup may be appropriately executed (for example, each time data is updated) by the base calculation process instead of the process when the main board side power is turned off. In this way, by storing the data used to calculate the base value in the backup area together with the calculated (or predetermined value) check code, the data for calculating the base and the calculated base value even when the power is cut off. Can be held and the base value for long-term operation can be calculated.

The check code checked in step S24 is calculated in step S8038 (FIG. 106) of the base calculation process. Further, in a modified example described later, it is calculated in step S50 (FIG. 22) of the initialization process.

Further, as a power failure flag, a value indicating that backup is normally performed is stored in the backup flag area (step S56), and "01H" indicating write prohibition is output to the RAM protect register to prohibit writing to the RAM 1312 (step S56). S58), waits until the power is restored (infinite loop).

FIG. 103 is a diagram showing the configuration of a base calculation area 13128 in which the accessory ratio calculation area shown in FIG. 26(A) is replaced in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment.

The base calculation area 13128 is configured by a partial area of the RAM 1312, and as described above, is provided separately from the game control area 13126 (outside the game control area).

The base calculation area 13128 includes a storage area for a base value A, a base value B, a section counter, a total out ball count, a low probability/non-time saving out ball count, and a low probability/non-time saving award ball count.

The storage area of the base value A is composed of 1 byte and stores the base value of the provisional section currently being measured. The storage area of the base value B is composed of 1 byte and stores the base value measured in the section immediately before the provisional section. The storage area of the section counter is composed of 1 byte, and stores a value indicating the section where the base value is currently being measured. The section counter is updated each time the section is switched, and is used to control display contents that differ depending on the section. The section counter may be controlled so that it does not exceed 0, 1, or 2, that is, 2. Specifically, the section counter=0 in the test section, the section counter=1 in the first section, and the section counter=2 after the second section. Further, the section counter may be controlled so that the value is from 0 to 255 and does not become larger than 255, and the section counter=2 or more after the second section.

The storage area for the total number of out balls is composed of 2 bytes, and stores all the number of out balls that do not depend on the gaming state (that is, a value indicating the operation of the gaming machine). The total out ball count is used to determine the switching of intervals, which is the base measurement unit. In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the base value in each section is measured with one day of operation as one section. Therefore, 2 bytes (65536) are allocated to the storage area for the total out ball count. As described above, the total number of out balls is a storage area for counting all the number of out balls that do not depend on the gaming state for each section, and the total number of out balls in the above-described embodiment (the number of out balls in the prize) The total value from the start of operation of the pachinko machine 1) is different.

The storage area for low probability/non-time saving out balls is composed of 2 bytes or more (preferably 4 bytes), and the out balls for calculating the base value (out balls in a game state other than during the prize) Store. The storage area for the low-probability, non-time saving prize balls is composed of 2 bytes or more (preferably 4 bytes), and stores the number of prize balls for calculating the base value (the number of prize balls in a game state other than during special prize). Store. It should be noted that the storage area for the low probability/non-time saving out ball count and the storage area for the low probability/non-time saving award ball count need only be 2 bytes or more, but considering the calculation process of the base value, the same byte count will be used. It is better to do.

The storage capacity (byte number) of each storage area described above is merely an example, and may be determined according to the number of out balls in one section.

When the main area and the backup area of the base calculation area 13128 are provided, a storage area having the same configuration is provided in the RAM 1312.

FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

The timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 104 is different from the timer interrupt process described above with reference to FIG. 23, and a base calculation process (step S801) is provided instead of the accessory ratio calculation area update process of step S81, and the role of step S89 is provided. The material ratio calculation/display processing is deleted. The same steps as those in the timer interrupt processing described above with reference to FIG. 23 are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first executes the main control program to set RBS (register bank selection flag) in the program status word to 1 and switches the register (step S70).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a switch input process (step S74), a timer update process (step S76), a random number update process 1 (step S78), and a prize ball control process (step S80).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the current game state, adds the number of prize balls paid out as a game value to the region corresponding to the current game state, and the base calculation region 13128 () in the main control internal RAM 1312 ( (See FIG. 103), and the base value is calculated (step S801). Details of the base calculation process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106. The base calculation process (step S801) may be executed in any order as long as it is after the prize ball control process (step S80), but in order to surely execute each timer interruption, it is preferable to execute the base calculation process in an earlier order. ..

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311, the frame command reception process (step S82), fraud detection process (step S84), special symbol and special electric auditors product control process (step S86), normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control process ( Step S88), output data setting processing (step S90), and peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92) are executed.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns) the register bank. When the above process ends, the timer interrupt process ends, and the process returns to the process before the interrupt.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the base value is measured by the timer interrupt process, so that the base value during the game can be measured in real time.

105 and 106 are flowcharts showing an example of the base calculation process.

The base calculation process (step S801) is called by the timer interrupt process and is executed by the main control MPU 1311.

By executing the base calculation program, the main control MPU 1311 first determines whether or not there is an error in the calculation of the base value (step S8011). For example, as described above, the winning opening sensor (general winning opening sensor 3015, first starting opening sensor 2104, second starting opening sensor 2551, first big winning opening sensor 2114, second upper big winning opening sensor 2554, second If there is an abnormality in the lower winning a prize sensor 2557) or the discharge ball sensor (board side discharge ball sensor 3060A, frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B), the base signal is accurately calculated by the abnormality signal output from the interface circuit 1331. It is determined that there is an error that cannot be made. Also, if it is determined that a fraudulent activity is being performed (for example, the magnetic detection sensor detects magnetism, the vibration detection sensor detects vibration, or the radio wave detection sensor detects radio waves), the base value is correct. It is determined that there is an error that cannot be calculated. When it is determined that there is this error, the display on the base display 1317 may be turned off. In step S8011, for an error accompanying a game stop (for example, magnetism, vibration, radio wave error, etc.), it is determined to be an error (YES), and an error not accompanied by a game stop (for example, prize ball abnormality, door opening, etc.) Failures that are not directly related to the calculation of the base or the base (such as replenishment of supply and full tank error) may be determined not to be an error (NO). That is, it is not necessary to execute the base calculation process even if some of the abnormal states of a plurality of types are abnormal and not to execute the base calculation process if there is another abnormality.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the number of out balls (step S8014). As described above, the number of out-balls is detected by the launch ball sensor 1020, the discharge ball sensor 3060, etc., and the switch input processing of step S74 reads the detection signals of these sensors, and if there is a detection signal of the sensor, the out ball count is output. The number of balls=1 is acquired. When the out-balls are detected by the plurality of discharged-ball sensors 3060, the total value of the numbers detected by the sensors is acquired as the out-ball number. That is, a plurality of out-spheres may be detected in one timer interrupt process.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the number of prize balls (step S8015). As for the number of prize balls, as described above, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control processing of step S80 is acquired. The number of prize balls acquired in the base calculation process may be the number of prize balls determined to be paid out. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the created payout command may be used. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the payout command that has been transmitted may be used. Further, the number of prize balls may correspond to the payout command in which the main control board 1310 transmits the payout command to the payout control board 951 and receives the confirmation of receipt (ACK) from the payout control board 951. Further, the main control board 1310 may send a payout command to the payout control board 951 and the number of prize balls (the number of paid prize balls) received from the payout control board 951 to report the completion of payout. This variation is as described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the out ball is detected in step S8014 (step S8016). If the out ball is not detected, the process relating to the out ball is not executed and the process proceeds to step S8022. On the other hand, if the out ball is detected, the detected out ball number is added to the total out ball number stored in the base calculation area 13128 (step S8017).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter stored in the base calculation area 13128 and determines whether or not it is currently a test section (step S8018). The test section is a section in which the number of out balls is a predetermined value less than 500 from the first power-on of the pachinko machine (or initialization of the base calculation area 13128), and the value of the section counter is 0, which is the initial value. Has become. Therefore, if the section counter value is 0, it can be determined that the section is a test section. Since it is not necessary to calculate the base value in the test section, the process advances to step S8028. On the other hand, if it is not the test section, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is in the special prize (step S8019). The determination as to whether the prize is being awarded can be determined in the same manner as in step S810 of FIG. 39 described above. The state of the game is in the special prize means that the big winning holes 2005 and 2006 are open due to the big hit, and the player can get a lot of prize balls, including the opening time and the ending time of the big hit game. May be. When the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 repeatedly open and close in one big hit, the time from the closing of the special winning opening to the next opening (closing interval) may be included. That is, during the special prize in step S810, it means that the condition device is operating, for example, from the determination of the jackpot symbol of the special symbol variable display game to the end of the ending. It may also include all the times during the right-handing instruction.

Further, at the starting ports 2002 and 2004, the special prize may include a time saving period, a positive change (during ST), and a power support period. Furthermore, during a time saving period, during a probable change (during ST), and in a game state other than during electric power support, a predetermined time after the opening of the starting port 2004 is closed (for example, until a ball winning the starting port is detected as an out ball). Up to the required few seconds) may be included in the prize. It should be noted that the so-called "hidden game state", which is a high-probability game state but does not become short-time (electric power support), is not included in the special prize, and is the same as the normal state (low-probability/non-time-saving state). The base value may be calculated using the number of prize balls or the number of out balls. In this case, the base value may be calculated separately in each of the normal game state and the latent game state, and the base value may be displayed so that it can be discriminated which of the base displays is displayed.

Even if the latent game state is a high probability, it is a game state that does not let the player recognize that it is a high probability state, but if the latent game state is excluded from the calculation of the base value, if the frame is opened during business In some cases, the player may look at the base display 1317 and recognize that the player is in a latent game state (that is, a high probability). In other words, when the employee of the hall grooms the ball in the winning port or throws the ball in the outlet while the frame is open, the player can know the gaming state depending on whether the base display changes. Such a problem can be avoided by calculating the base value without distinguishing between the normal game state and the latent game state.

On the other hand, when operating a hole, it may be necessary to manage the base value in a low probability/non-time saving state, and if the base value is calculated including the latent game state, it may not be possible to manage it according to the operating mode of the hole. .. Such a problem can be avoided by excluding the latent game state and calculating the base value. The same problem can be avoided by calculating the base value separately for the normal game state and the latent game state. That is, since the normal game state and the latent game state are different game states from the beginning, it may be desirable to manage (inspect) the base value separately for each game state depending on the business mode of the hall. ..

When the base value is calculated by dividing the normal game state and the latent game state, even if the base value is calculated using the dedicated calculation process for each game state, the base value is calculated using the common calculation process. You may. By calculating the base value using the common calculation processing, the processing load on the CPU can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced.

The electrically operated accessory provided in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is classified into two types from the viewpoint of calculating the base value. As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special prize regarding the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 is during the operation of the condition device (for example, from the determination of the big hit symbol of the special symbol variable display game to the end of the ending), Since the base value is calculated based on the number of prize balls and the number of out balls other than during the special prize, normal winning (so-called big hit) to the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 is not used for calculating the base value. On the other hand, in the starting port 2004 (so-called electric tulip) having an opening/closing member, winning balls and prize balls other than during special prize (low probability or non-time saving) are used for calculating the base value. In other words, some of the electrically operated auctions (big prize holes 2005 and 2006) are used to calculate the base value based on the number of award balls and the number of award balls, regardless of the gaming state (whether a prize is being won or not). The other accessory (starting port 2004) is not used, and whether the winning ball number and the winning ball number are used for the calculation of the base value or not is switched depending on the gaming state (whether the prize is being won or not). It will be.

Further, the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 may be opened (as a so-called small hit) even when the condition device does not operate. Generally, a small hit occurs during an hour and a short time, and it is unlikely that a game ball will win a prize because it is opened for a short time, so it does not affect the calculation of the base value. However, a small hit may be generated during a period other than during the special prize (normal time), and the game ball may be opened only during a time when the possibility of winning the prize is high. In this case, the winning balls and winning balls to the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 in the small hits other than during the special prize may be used for the calculation of the base value. In this way, the expected value (design value) of the base value can be changed by controlling the probability of small hits other than during the prize. That is, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine that can flexibly comply with the standard of the base value and improve the degree of freedom in design.

If the gaming state is a prize, it is an out ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, and therefore the process proceeds to step S8022 without updating the low probability/non-time saving out ball number. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a prize, the number of out balls detected in step S8014 is to be used for the base calculation, so the number of low probability/non-time saving out balls stored in the base calculation area 13128 is detected. The calculated number of out balls is added (step S8020). Then, the update flag is set to 1 (step S8021). The update flag is set to 1 when an out ball or prize ball other than the prize is detected each time the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) is executed, and indicates the timing at which the base value should be calculated (steps S8026 to S8027). reference).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not a prize ball is detected in step S8015 (step S8022). If no prize ball is detected, the process relating to the prize ball is not executed, and the process proceeds to step S8026. On the other hand, if a prize ball is detected, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a prize (step S8023). The determination as to whether or not a special prize is being held may be the same as in step S8019.

If the gaming state is during the special prize, it is a prize ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, and therefore the process proceeds to step S8026 without updating the low-probability/non-time saving prize ball number. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a prize, the number of prize balls detected in step S8015 is to be used for the base calculation, so the number of low probability/non-time saving prize balls stored in the base calculation area 13128 is detected. The number of prize balls is added (step S8024). Then, the update flag is set to 1 (step S8025).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the update flag is 1 (step S8026). If the update flag is 1, an out ball or a prize ball other than the prize is detected in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process), and thus the low probability/non-time saving award ball is set to a low probability/non-time saving out ball. The base value is calculated by dividing by the number and stored in the storage area for the base value A in the base calculation area 13128 (step S8027).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter and determines whether the test section is in progress (step S8028). Then, when the section counter value is 0, indicating that it is the test section, it is determined whether it is the timing to end the test section (step S8029). The test section is a section in which the number of out balls is a predetermined value less than 500 from the first power-on of the pachinko machine (including initialization of the base calculation area 13128), and the section counter indicates that it is a test section. If the total number of out balls is equal to or more than the predetermined value, it can be determined that it is the timing to end the test section.

As a result, if it is not the timing to end the test section, in order to continue the test section, the base calculation area 13128 is not updated and the process proceeds to step S8034. On the other hand, if it is in the test section and the timing to end the test section, the test section is shifted to the first section, and thus the process proceeds to step S8032. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 adds 1 to the section counter (step S8032). The section counter changes from 0 representing the test section to 1 representing the first section. Then, the total number of out balls, the number of low probability/non-time saving short out balls, and the number of low probability/non time saving award balls are initialized to 0 (step S8033). By this process, the test section is ended and the first section is started.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S8028 that the section counter value is not 0 and the test section is not in progress, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the total out-ball number is 52000 or more (step S8030). If the total number of out balls is less than 52000, the process proceeds to step S8034 to continue the current section.

On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is 52000 or more, the section is ended, and the processing for starting a new section (steps S8031 to S8033) is executed. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 reads the base value A from the base value A storage area in the base calculation area 13128 and writes it in the base value B storage area (step S8031). After that, 1 is added to the section counter (step S8032). As described above, the section counter is controlled so as not to become a value of 0, 1, or 2, that is, larger than 2. Therefore, when the section counter value is 2, even if 1 is added to the section counter. The section counter value does not increase and remains 2. Then, the total number of out balls, the number of low-probability/non-time saving out balls, and the number of low-probability/non-time saving award balls are initialized to 0 (step S8033), and the process proceeds to the next section.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the update flag is 1 (step S8034). If the update flag is 1, data for displaying the newly calculated base value is generated (step S8035). Details of the base display data generation process will be described later with reference to FIG. After that, the main control MPU 1311 sets the update flag to 0 (step S8036).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 increments the display switching counter by 1 (step S8037). The display switching counter is used to switch and display the provisional section display and the confirmed section display described in FIG. 99 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 5 seconds). The predetermined time for switching between the provisional section display and the fixed section display is a cycle of blinking display (blinking display controlled in step S8051 of FIG. 107) when the number of low probability/non-time saving out balls in each section is less than 6000. It is better to set it to a sufficiently long time. This is because if the blinking and the display switching are of the same cycle, it becomes difficult to understand the blinking display (that is, whether the low-probability/non-time saving out ball count is less than 6000). This is to make it easier to understand whether it is switching.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a check code (for example, a checksum) from the data in the base calculation area 13128 (step S8038). As the check code calculation method, the same calculation method as the check code calculation processing in step S50 of the initialization processing (FIG. 22) is used. Further, when the check code is set to a fixed value without being calculated, it may be a value of a plurality of bytes in which adjacent bits of the check code do not have the same value (for example, if there are 2 bytes, A55AH (1010010101011010B)). To). Further, instead of setting a fixed value in continuous areas, they may be arranged separately. For example, the first fixed value is stored at the beginning of the base calculation area 13128, the second fixed value is stored at the middle, and the third fixed value is stored at the end. When the check code has a fixed value, it is preferable that the check code is configured with a larger number of bytes than the check data calculated to improve the possibility of determining the RAM abnormality.

As described above, according to the base calculation processing of the present embodiment, the base value is calculated and displayed for each timer interrupt processing, and therefore the base value is not delayed at each timing of occurrence of prize balls and occurrence of out balls ( It can be displayed (in real time) and can judge whether the base value is normal or abnormal without delay. Since the capacity of the base calculation area 13128, which is a storage area used for base calculation, is extremely smaller than the capacity of the game control area 13126, a check code is issued at the end of each base calculation process. Even if it is calculated, the influence on the processing load of the main control MPU 1311 is small.

Also, for the prize balls, when the base value is calculated and displayed using the expected number of prize balls to be paid out based on the generated winning signal, the timing when the base value is calculated and displayed and the timing when the prize balls are paid out Is different. That is, the payout device is abnormal and the prize balls are not paid out (the supply of the payout device has failed due to a supply replenishment, the upper plate is full, a failure of the payout number counting sensor provided in the prize ball passage, a failure of the payout motor, etc.). The base value is calculated and displayed even if (for example, stop) occurs.

In the base calculation process described above, the base value is calculated each time the base calculation process is called from the timer interrupt process by using the number of out balls detected in the timer interrupt process and the calculated number of prize balls. The base value may be calculated each time the ball sensor 3060 detects an out ball and each time the various winning hole sensors detect a winning ball. That is, in one timer interrupt process, the base value calculation process is called multiple times and the base value is calculated multiple times. This makes it possible to distinguish which of the preceding and succeeding sections is to be calculated as the base value even when the above-mentioned section switching timing (the number of out balls is 52000) arrives in one base calculation process. , Can display accurate base value in real time.

Further, as in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area update processing (FIG. 46) described above, it is determined whether the number of prize balls is abnormal, and if the number of prize balls is abnormal, an abnormality notification command is generated. Alternatively, the prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Further, as in steps S824 to S825, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up. When the prize ball abnormality notification timer times out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is generated. May be stopped.

FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing an example of the base display data generation process.

The base display data generation process is called and executed from step S8035 of the base calculation process.

The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether the display switching counter is smaller than 1250 by executing the base display data generation program (step S8041). Since the timer interrupt process described above is executed every 4 milliseconds, when the display switching counter reaches 1250, 5 seconds have elapsed since the display switching counter was initialized to 0. In step S8053, the display switching counter is initialized to 0 when it reaches 2499. Therefore, the processing in steps S8042 to S8045 is executed while the display switching counter is 0 to 1249, and the display switching counter is in the range 1250 to 2499. Executes the processing of steps S8046 to S8049. Therefore, in the base display data generation process of this embodiment, the display data of the base display 1317 is switched every 5 seconds.

If the display switching counter is smaller than 1250, data for displaying "bA." in the upper two digits of the base display 1317 is generated (step S8042). After that, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter stored in the base calculation area 13128 and determines whether or not it is currently a test section (step S8043). Since the base value has not been calculated in the test section, data for displaying "--" in the last two digits is generated (step S8044). On the other hand, if it is not the test section, data for displaying the base value A currently being measured in the provisional section is generated (step S8045).

If it is determined in step S8041 that the display switching counter is 1250 or more, data for displaying "bb." in the upper two digits of the base display 1317 is generated (step S8046). After that, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter stored in the base calculation area 13128, and determines whether it is currently the test section or the first section (step S8047). Since the base value has not been measured in the past fixed section in the test section or the first section, data for displaying "---" in the last two digits is generated (step S8048). On the other hand, if it is neither the test section nor the first section, data for displaying the base value B measured in the latest fixed section is generated (step S8049).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the low probability/non-time saving out ball number stored in the base calculation area 13128 and determines whether the low probability/non-time saving out ball number is less than 6000 (step S8050). ). If the low probability/non-time saving out ball count is less than 6000, the base value may not be stable because the operating number (out ball count) after starting the base value measurement in the relevant section is small. The base display 1317 is controlled so that the display blinks (step S8051). On the other hand, if the number of low probability/non-time saving out balls is 6000 or more, control is performed so that the display of the base display 1317 is turned on without blinking (step S8052).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the display switching counter is 2499 or more (step S8053). If the display switching counter is smaller than 2499, the display switching counter is not initialized and the process proceeds to step S8055. On the other hand, if the display switching counter is 2499 or more, one repetition is completed, and the display switching counter is initialized to 0 (step S8054).

Lastly, the main control MPU 1311 generates a display pattern in which the generated display data and the lighting mode (lighting or blinking) are designated (step S8055).

As described above, in the timer interrupt process (base calculation process) executed at predetermined time intervals, the contents displayed on the base display 1317 are switched by using the display switching counter that is updated regularly, so that the current time in the provisional section is increased. The base value A being measured and the base value B measured in the past in the confirmed section can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, since blinking is displayed in the range where the base value is not stable in each section, it is possible to easily confirm whether the base value is in the stable range or in the unstable range by the display of the base display 1317.

FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing a modified example of the base calculation process. The modification shown in FIG. 108 is the same as the base calculation process shown in FIG. 105, except that the process for checking the base calculation work (steps S8012 and S8013) is added. In FIG. 108, the calculation of the base value A (step S8027) of the base calculation process will be described, but the processes of steps S8028 to S8038 are the same as those of FIG. 106 described above.

By executing the base calculation program, the main control MPU 1311 first determines whether or not there is an error in the calculation of the base value (step S8011).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 uses the check code to determine whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal (step S8012). If it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may not be correct, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is erased (step S8013).

If one or a plurality of backup areas are provided in the base calculation area 13128, the main area is first determined using a check code, and if it is determined that the main area is abnormal, the backup areas 1, 2 , N in this order, and the data in the backup area initially determined to be normal may be copied to the main area. After that, the data in the backup area may be erased or left as it is. When it is determined that the main area is normal, the data in the backup area may be erased or left as it is.

In the example shown in the figure, after determining whether there is an error in the calculation of the base value (step S8011), it is determined whether the base calculation area 13128 is normal (step S8012). It may be determined whether 13128 is normal (step S8012), and after performing necessary processing based on the determination result, whether there is an error in the calculation of the base value (step S8011).

Subsequent processing (from step S8014) is the same as that in FIGS. 105 and 106 described above, and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

In the base calculation process shown in FIG. 108, it is determined for each timer interrupt (that is, every 4 milliseconds) whether or not the data in the base calculation region 13128 is normal. It is possible to suppress the display of various base values.

Next, a method of determining an abnormality in the base calculation area 13128 in the pachinko machine of this embodiment will be described. The value used for calculating the base value and the calculated base value are the base calculation area 13128 of the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 (the “role ratio calculation area 13128” shown in FIG. 26 is called the “base calculation area 13128”). It is stored as (reread) and determines whether the data is normal at a predetermined timing. There are the following variations in which processing (timing) the normal/abnormal determination step and the check code calculation step are performed.
101 and 106: The check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) is determined when the power is turned on.
21 and 22: The check code calculated when the power is turned off is determined when the power is turned on (initialization process).
106 and 108: The check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) is determined in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process).

(A case where the check code is calculated for each timer interrupt and judged when the power is turned on)
First, the process of determining the check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 and 106.

When the initialization process is as shown in FIGS. 101 and 102 and the base calculation process is as shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the base calculation area 13128 is obtained in step S8038 of the base calculation process (FIGS. 105 and 106). A check code (for example, a checksum) is calculated from the data.

Further, in step S24 of the initialization process (FIGS. 101 and 102), it is determined using the check code whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal. As a result, if it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is erased (step S26).

When the data in the base calculation area 13128 is erased, the state related to the calculation of the base value is initialized, so the calculated base value is cleared and the calculation of the base value is started from the test period.

If one or a plurality of backup areas are provided in the base calculation area 13128, the main area is first determined using a check code, and if it is determined that the main area is abnormal, the backup areas 1, 2 , N, and the data in the backup area initially determined to be normal may be copied to the main area to restore the data in the base calculation area 13128. After that, the data in the backup area may be erased or left as it is. When it is determined that the main area is normal, the data in the backup area may be erased or left as it is.

In this case, the check code is determined less frequently, and the consumption of the calculation resource (main control MPU 1311) required for the abnormality determination can be reduced.

(A case where the check code is calculated when the power is turned off and judged when the power is turned on)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22, a process of determining the check code calculated when the power is turned off when the power is turned on (initialization process) will be described.

When the initialization processing is as shown in FIGS. 21 and 22 and the base calculation processing is as shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, in step S50 of the power-off processing of the initialization processing (FIGS. 21 and 22), A check code (for example, a checksum) is calculated from the data in the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128).

In step S24 of the initialization process (FIGS. 21 and 22), it is determined using the check code whether the work area for base calculation (base calculation area 13128) is normal. As a result, if it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is erased (step S26).

In this case, the calculation of the check code in step S8038 of the base calculation process may be omitted.

In this case, the frequency of check code calculation and determination is low, and the consumption of calculation resources (main control MPU 1311) for abnormality determination can be reduced.

(A case where the check code is calculated by timer interrupt processing and judged)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 106 and 108, a process of determining the check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) will be described.

When the base calculation process is as shown in FIGS. 108 and 106, a check code (for example, a checksum) is calculated from the data of the base calculation area 13128 in step S8038 of the base calculation process (FIGS. 108 and 106).

In step S8012 of the base calculation process (FIGS. 108 and 106), it is determined using the check code whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal. As a result, if it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may not be correct, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is erased (step S8013).

In this case, the initialization process is as shown in FIGS. 101 and 102, and the steps of determining whether the base calculation work area is normal in steps S24 and S26 may be omitted.

In this case, the abnormality in the base calculation area 13128 can be detected more quickly than in the case described above.

When a fixed value is used for the check code instead of the checksum, the check code setting and determination timing may be the same as the checksum calculation and determination timing. Alternatively, both the checksum and the fixed value may be used as the check code for the determination.

FIG. 109 is a diagram showing the calculation of the base value when the game state is switched.

One game ball was won while the starting opening 2004 (electric tulip) was open, and then the variable display game for a predetermined number of times ended, the time saving state ended, and the normal state returned. After that, in the normal state, it is further assumed that the game ball wins the opening opening 2004 that is open.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display device in accordance with the winning of the start opening 2004. That is, the variable display game in which the second special symbol is variably displayed in connection with any winning in the starting opening 2004 is performed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the out ball in the special prize is not used for the base calculation, the first winning ball to the starting opening 2004 is not added to the low probability/non-time saving out ball number, The second winning ball is added to the low probability non-time saving out ball number.

Although the end of the time saving state has been described above, the same applies to the end of the probability variation due to ST.

In addition to the end of the time saving state described above, the same phenomenon occurs when a big hit occurs in the special symbol variable display game. In a normal state, it is assumed that one game ball wins during opening of the starting port 2004 (electric tulip), then a big hit state starts, and further, a game ball wins at the opening port 2004 being opened.

Also in this case, the variable display game in which the second special symbol is variably displayed in association with the winning in any of the starting openings 2004 is executed. On the other hand, since the out ball in the special prize is not used for the base calculation, the first winning ball at the starting opening 2004 is added to the low probability/non-time saving out ball number, but the second winning ball is low probability.・It is not added to the number of untimely out balls.

Furthermore, the same phenomenon occurs when a specific error occurs. In a normal state, it is assumed that one game ball wins while opening the starting opening 2004 (electric tulip), a specific error occurs after that, and a game ball wins the starting opening 2004 that is still open. .. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a specific error occurs (when it is determined that there is an error in which the base value cannot be accurately calculated due to the abnormal signal output from the interface circuit 1331), the out Do not use the sphere for the base calculation.

Also in this case, the variable display game in which the second special symbol is variably displayed in association with the winning in any of the starting openings 2004 is executed. On the other hand, since the out ball during the occurrence of a specific error is not used in the base calculation, the first winning ball at the starting opening 2004 is added to the low probability/non-time saving out ball number, but the second winning ball. Is not added to the low probability/untimely out ball count.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of gaming balls won during the operation of the electric accessory under specific conditions (at the end of time saving, at the time of a big hit of the special symbol variation display game, at the time of occurrence of a specific error, etc.) Regarding, there are cases where it is used for calculating the base value and cases where it is not used for calculating the base value, and the variation of the special figure can be started in any winning.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, regarding the look-ahead effect of the special symbol variable display game that is being held, the first winning that is won in the starting opening 2004 in the time saving state is not the target of the look-ahead effect and is in the normal state. The second prize that has won may be the target of the look-ahead effect. On the contrary, the first prize won in the time saving state at the start opening 2004 may be the target of the look-ahead effect, and the second prize won in the normal state may not be the target of the look-ahead effect.

Although the timing of changing from the time saving state to the normal state has been described, the same applies to the timing of changing from the positive change state (ST) or the power support state to the normal state.

[10. Memory switching in processing outside the game control area]
Next, switching of the memory used by the CPU in processing outside the game control area (for example, base calculation processing) will be described.

FIG. 110 is a diagram showing the configuration related to the storage area in the internal configuration of the main control MPU 1311.

The main control MPU 1311 is configured as a whole as shown in FIG. 18, but FIG. 110 shows the configuration regarding the storage area in detail.

In the main control MPU 1311, a RAM 1312, a ROM 1313, and a CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142 are provided as storage areas for storing data. The in-CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142 temporarily stores exclusively data when the program is executed by the CPU 13111 (for example, a flag indicating a state of a calculation result, a program execution state, data input to and output from the CPU 13111). The CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142 temporarily stores, for example, a random number value updated in the random number update process (step S40 in FIG. 22) or an intermediate value in the random value update calculation. Further, the address of the subroutine to be executed and the address of the jump destination are temporarily stored in the auxiliary storage unit 13142 in the CPU, and the processor core 13141 executes the process corresponding to the stored address. Furthermore, a value input to a port from various switches connected to the main control board 1310 (for example, a value in the middle of creating edge information of a signal input from the switch or a detection result of edge information) is temporarily stored. To store.

Further, when a random number is acquired and stored in the holding storage area at the time of winning the start mouth, the random number value is temporarily stored in the auxiliary storage unit 13142 in the CPU, and the temporarily stored random value is stored in the holding storage area of the RAM 1312. Remember. Further, when a random number at the time of winning the starting opening is obtained and pre-reading determination (judgment determination at the time of winning the starting opening) is performed based on the value of the random number, the random number temporarily stored in the auxiliary storage unit 13142 in the CPU is used. The pre-reading determination may be performed based on the numerical value, or the random number value stored in the reserved storage area may be (re)read to any storage area of the auxiliary storage unit 13142 in the CPU to perform the pre-reading determination.

The in-CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142 is provided separately from the memory space configured by the RAM 1312 and the ROM 1313 and specified by an address, and is specified by the name (for example, Area 0) of each storage area included in the in-CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142. .. The in-CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142 includes a switching unit 13143, a switching register 13144, and a plurality of auxiliary storage areas 13145A to 13145C.

Each of the auxiliary storage areas 13145A to 13145A to C is composed of a plurality of storage areas (Area0 to 6) having a predetermined number of bits (for example, 1 byte or 2 bytes), and a group is provided for each storage area of a predetermined number (7 in the figure). Each group is configured to be accessible from the processor core 13141. That is, when the auxiliary storage area 13145A is selected, the processor core 13141 can access only the auxiliary storage area 13145A and cannot access the other auxiliary storage areas 13145B and 13145C.

The selection of the auxiliary storage area 13145 can be performed by collectively switching a plurality of storage areas for each group by one CHANGE command, as described later. For example, the instruction CHANGE 0 selects the auxiliary storage area 13145A of the group 0, and the auxiliary storage area accessible by the processor core 13141 is switched to the group 0.

The auxiliary storage area 13145 is composed of three groups in the illustrated example, but may be any number as long as it is two or more. That is, at least two auxiliary storage areas 13145 are provided with the same configuration.

The storage area (Area0-5) of the auxiliary storage area 13145 is a storage area provided separately from the RAM 1312 for temporarily storing data during program execution, and even one (1 byte=8 bits) can be used. Therefore, it is possible to use a plurality of sets (for example, 2 bytes=16 bits in which Area0 and Area1 are combined). Therefore, 8-bit data or 16-bit data can be stored in the auxiliary storage area 13145 without generating an excessive capacity in the storage area. Further, the storage area (Area 6) is set as a storage area used with a capacity of an integral multiple (for example, 2 bytes) of other storage areas, and cannot be used by being divided into 1-byte storage areas. In this way, the auxiliary storage area 13145 is configured by the storage areas having a plurality of capacities, and the storage area that can be used in any combination is provided. Therefore, the storage area is properly used according to the application (for example, data length) in the arithmetic processing. be able to. For example, if the address space is represented by 16 bits, the address can be designated by one (or a set of combined storage areas). Therefore, the argument of the instruction can be reduced and the instruction can be executed with a small number of clocks.

The switching unit 13143 switches the group of storage areas that the processor core 13141 can access according to the value stored in the switching register 13144.

The switching register 13144 is a storage area for storing data for determining the accessible auxiliary storage area 13145, and is an area accessible by the processor core 13141 regardless of the selection of the auxiliary storage area 13145. The switching register 13144 has, for example, data for identifying the auxiliary storage area 13145 to be selected (for example, 2-bit data for switching four areas), and an abnormality flag indicating that switching has not been normally performed. (If the abnormality flag is set, the switching instruction will be executed again) and the unauthorized access flag that is set when an abnormality occurs in which the value of the unselected auxiliary storage area 13145 has changed is stored. It is good.

Further, the switching register 13144 may store a flag (for example, a carry flag, a parity/overflow flag, a zero flag, a sine flag, etc.) indicating the state of the calculation result.

In addition to the switching register 13144, a storage area accessible by the processor core 13141 may be provided regardless of the selection of the auxiliary storage area 13145. For example, a program counter indicating the address where the program is being executed and a stack pointer indicating the start address of the stack area provided in the RAM 1312 may be provided.

FIG. 111 is a diagram showing an example of a program of the timer interrupt process and the base calculation process, and shows a specific example of a portion for calling the base calculation process from the timer interrupt process and returning from the base calculation process.

In the timer interrupt process (FIG. 104), the base calculation process is called in step S801, but the interrupt is prohibited by the DI instruction before the base calculation process is started. The base calculation process can be performed without interrupting the process from the DI command to the EI command due to an interrupt.

Then, the PUSH instruction saves the data in the switching register 13144 to the game control stack area 13137 (see FIG. 113). After that, the program is executed from the start address xxxx of the base calculation process by the CALL instruction.

In the base calculation process, before starting the processes shown in FIGS. 105 to 108, the auxiliary storage area 13145 is used in the base calculation process of the callee from the group 0 used in the timer interrupt process of the caller by the CHANGE command. Switch to group 1. Thus, one CHANGE command can switch a plurality of storage areas for each group, and a single command (that is, a small number of steps) can switch a plurality of storage areas at once.

In addition, the LD instruction writes the stack pointer value being used in the timer interrupt process to an arbitrary address (for example, zzzzz) of the RAM 1312 and saves the stack pointer value. Then, the LD instruction writes the address yyyy of the base calculation stack area 13138 into the stack pointer to change the stack area.

After the preparation for executing the base calculation processing is completed, the processing is executed from step S8011 of FIG. 105 or FIG. After the base calculation process is completed (after step S8038 in FIG. 106), the stack pointer value used in the timer interrupt process is restored from the address zzzz of the RAM 1312 by the LD instruction. After that, the CHANGE instruction switches the auxiliary storage area 13145 from the group 1 used in the call-destination base calculation processing to the group 0 used in the caller's timer interrupt processing, and then the RET instruction changes the caller's timer interrupt processing. Return. In general, the instruction for switching the auxiliary storage area 13145 and the instruction for restoring the data saved in the stack have different roles, but in this embodiment, after returning from the base calculation processing to the timer interrupt processing, The auxiliary storage area 13145 is switched by returning the data saved in the stack to the switching register 13144. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the auxiliary storage area 13145 does not have to be switched to the group 0 by the CHANGE command after the base calculation processing is completed, but the auxiliary storage area 13145 may be surely switched by the CHANGE command.

As described above, the CHANGE instruction switches the auxiliary storage area 13145 by changing the argument (operand), but a different instruction may be provided for each auxiliary storage area 13145.

After that, when returning from the base calculation processing, the data of the switching register 13144 saved in the game control stack area 13137 is restored to the switching register 13144 by the POP instruction. It should be noted that for saving and restoring the data of the switching register 13144, other instructions (for example, the data transfer instruction LD, the exchange instruction EX) may be used without using the push operation instructions PUSH and POP.

After that, the interrupt is permitted by the EI instruction, the timer interrupt process is continued, the timer interrupt process is ended by RETI, and the process returns to the main process on the main control side (steps S36 to S40 in FIG. 21).

Note that the DI instruction may inhibit the interrupt at the beginning of the timer interrupt process, and the EI instruction may permit the interrupt at the end of the timer interrupt process. Further, the interrupt may be prohibited when the timer interrupt processing is started by directly operating the interrupt enable flag regardless of the DI instruction or the EI instruction, and the interrupt may be permitted at the execution timing of the RETI instruction.

Further, since the timer interrupt process is originally executed in a state in which the interrupt is disabled, it is not necessary to further disable the interrupt or enable the interrupt in the timer interrupt process. In the illustrated program example, the interrupt prohibition by the DI command is to set the interrupt-prohibited state to the interrupt-prohibited state for some reason. In this case, since the interrupt disabled state should be continued until the end of the timer interrupt processing, the EI instruction should be executed at the end of the timer interrupt processing, not immediately after the POP instruction.

In the example described above, the saving of the switching register 13144 was executed by the timer interrupt processing of the calling source, and the switching of the auxiliary storage area 13145 and the stack area were executed by the base calculation processing of the calling destination. One process may be executed by either the caller or the callee when the process moves to the outside of the game control region and when the process returns to the inside of the game control region. An example of switching the auxiliary storage area 13145 by the timer interrupt processing of the calling source will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 112 is a diagram showing another example of the program of the timer interrupt process and the base calculation process, and shows a specific example of a part that calls the base calculation process from the timer interrupt process and returns from the base calculation process.

In the timer interrupt process (FIG. 104), the base calculation process is called in step S801, but the interrupt is prohibited by the DI instruction before the base calculation process is started. By the interruption between the DI instruction and the EI instruction, the base calculation processing can be performed without interrupting the processing during the interruption.

Then, the PUSH instruction saves the data in the switching register 13144 to the game control stack area 13137 (see FIG. 113). After that, the CHANGE instruction switches the auxiliary storage area 13145 from the group 0 used in the call source timer interrupt processing to the group 1 used in the call destination base calculation processing. Thus, one CHANGE command can switch a plurality of storage areas for each group, and a single command (that is, a small number of steps) can switch a plurality of storage areas at once.

After that, the program is executed from the start address xxxx of the base calculation process by the CALL instruction.

In the base calculation process, before starting the processes shown in FIGS. 105 to 108, the stack pointer value being used in the timer interrupt process is written to an arbitrary address (for example, zzzzz) of the RAM 1312 by the LD instruction, and the stack pointer value is written. To evacuate. Then, the LD instruction writes the address yyyy of the base calculation stack area 13138 into the stack pointer to change the stack area.

After the preparation for executing the base calculation processing is completed, the processing is executed from step S8011 of FIG. 105 or FIG. After the base calculation process is completed (after step S8038 in FIG. 106), the stack pointer value used in the timer interrupt process is restored from the address zzzz of the RAM 1312 by the LD instruction.

After that, when returning from the base calculation process, the CHANGE command switches the auxiliary storage area 13145 from the group 1 used in the base calculation process of the callee to the group 0 used in the timer interrupt process of the call source, and the game is played by the POP command. The data in the switching register 13144 saved in the control stack area 13137 is restored in the switching register 13144. It should be noted that for saving and restoring the data of the switching register 13144, other instructions (for example, the data transfer instruction LD, the exchange instruction EX) may be used without using the push operation instructions PUSH and POP.

As described above, since the auxiliary storage area 13145 returns to the state before calling the base calculation process by the restoration of the switching register 13144, it is not necessary to switch the auxiliary storage area 13145 by the CHANGE command. However, the auxiliary storage area 13145 may be surely switched by the CHANGE command.

After that, the interrupt is permitted by the EI instruction, the timer interrupt process is continued, the timer interrupt process is ended by RETI, and the process returns to the main process on the main control side (steps S36 to S40 in FIG. 21).

Note that, similarly to the above, the interrupt may be prohibited by the DI instruction at the beginning of the timer interrupt processing and the interrupt may be permitted by the EI instruction at the end of the timer interrupt processing. Further, the interrupt may be prohibited when the timer interrupt processing is started by directly operating the interrupt enable flag regardless of the DI instruction or the EI instruction, and the interrupt may be permitted at the execution timing of the RETI instruction.

Further, since the timer interrupt process is originally executed in a state in which the interrupt is disabled, it is not necessary to further disable the interrupt or enable the interrupt in the timer interrupt process. In the illustrated program example, the interrupt prohibition by the DI command is to set the interrupt-prohibited state to the interrupt-prohibited state for some reason. In this case, since the interrupt disabled state should be continued until the end of the timer interrupt processing, the EI instruction should be executed at the end of the timer interrupt processing, not immediately after the POP instruction.

Although the example in which the timer interrupt process, the base calculation process, and the auxiliary storage region 13145 are switched has been described with reference to FIG. 111, the inspection process executed by the debug (inspection function) code 13133 may also switch the auxiliary storage region 13145. In this case, it is preferable to switch the auxiliary storage area 13145 to the auxiliary storage area 13145 for inspection processing at the head of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 by a CHANGE command. Further, initialization processing (step S10 of FIG. 21 to step S34 of FIG. 22), main control side main processing (steps S36 to S40 of FIG. 21), and power-off processing (steps S42 to S58 of FIG. 21), The auxiliary storage area 13145 may be switched depending on the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 23, FIG. 75, FIG. 80, etc.) and a different auxiliary storage area 13145 may be used for each processing.

Furthermore, when only two auxiliary storage areas 13145 are provided, processing executed in the game control area (for example, main control side main processing, timer interrupt processing, etc.) and outside the game control area (for example, debug ( Inspection function) area, base calculation area, etc.) (for example, debug processing, base calculation processing, etc.) to switch the auxiliary storage area 13145, and use different auxiliary storage areas 13145 inside and outside the game control area. Good.

In this case, the same auxiliary storage area 13145 is used for the main control side main process and the timer interrupt process, but since the main control side main process in execution is interrupted and the timer interrupt process is started, the timer interrupt process is executed. The value of the auxiliary storage area 13145 is temporarily stored in the game control stack area 13137 at the start of the process (for example, at the beginning of the timer interrupt process), and at the end of the timer interrupt process (for example, at the end of the timer interrupt process). The value temporarily stored in the game control stack area 13137 may be returned to the auxiliary storage area 13145.

For example, since the auxiliary storage area 13145 has a plurality (bytes) of storage area, when saving one unit (byte or word) to the stack area, the number of instructions for saving increases. Similarly, the number of instructions for recovering data from the stack area increases. Further, in this case, if the processing order is mistaken for saving data to the stack area and restoring data from the stack area, different data may be read from the stack area, and the subsequent processing may not be performed correctly. .. Therefore, by providing an instruction to collectively save all of the plurality of storage areas of the auxiliary storage area 13145 to the stack area and to collectively restore all of the plurality of storage areas of the auxiliary storage area 13145 from the stack area, The above problem can be solved.

Furthermore, if all the storage areas of the auxiliary storage area 13145 are saved in the stack area, the stack area may overflow and the data outside the area planned as the stack area (such as the stack area for other purposes) may be rewritten. is there. Therefore, in addition to an instruction to collectively store all the storage areas of the auxiliary storage area 13145 in the stack area, an instruction to collectively save a plurality of arbitrarily specified storage areas in the auxiliary storage area 13145 to the stack area It is also possible to provide an instruction to collectively restore to a plurality of arbitrarily designated storage areas of the auxiliary storage areas 13145 saved in the stack area and execute the instructions.

In this way, when moving to the processing outside the game control area, it switches to another auxiliary storage area 13145, and when moving to the processing inside the game control area, it switches to the original auxiliary storage area 13145, so it is stored in the auxiliary storage area 13145. The processing can proceed without saving the created data in the RAM 1312 (eg, stack area).

In addition, since the switching register 13144 is saved in the RAM 1312 (for example, stack area) when moving to the processing outside the game control area, and the switching register 13144 is recovered from the RAM 1312 when moving to the processing inside the game control area. The auxiliary storage area 13145 can be switched when moving to the processing in the game control area, and the data in the auxiliary storage area 13145 can be recovered without being recovered from the RAM 1312.

Also, when moving to processing outside the game control area, it switches to another stack area, and when moving to processing inside the game control area, it switches to the original stack area, so the stack area used for processing inside the game control area is , The processing inside and outside the game control area can be completely divided without being updated in the processing outside the game control area.

In addition, the value stored in the switching register 13144 when shifting to processing outside the game control area is saved in the RAM 1312 (for example, stack area), and the value saved when shifting to processing inside the game control area is used for switching Since the register 13144 is restored, the value related to the execution result of the program in the game control area is not updated in the processing outside the game control area, and the processing inside and outside the game control area can be completely separated.

FIG. 113A is a diagram showing an example of an arrangement of programs (codes) and data stored in the ROM 1313 and the RAM 1312 incorporated in the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310. In the arrangement on the memory shown in FIG. 113, the stack area omitted in the arrangement on the memory described above with reference to FIG. 26 is illustrated in the RAM 1312, but the RAM 1312 shown in FIG. 26 also has the stack area.

In the ROM 1313, a game control code 13131, a game control data 13132, a debug (inspection function) code 13133, a debug (inspection function) data 13134, a base calculation/display code 13135, and a base calculation/display data 13136. Contains the storage area. In the ROM 1313 of this embodiment, a game control area (first storage area) for storing programs and data related to the pachinko machine 1, such as a game control code 13131 and game control data 13132, and a debug (inspection function) code 13133. And a debug (inspection function) area (second storage area) for storing programs and data used for the purpose of outputting signals necessary for debugging (inspection function) of the pachinko machine 1 such as debug (inspection function) data 13134. And a base calculation area (third storage area) for storing programs used for the purpose of calculating the base value, such as the base calculation/display code 13135 and the base calculation/display data 13136.

A free area (unused space) of 16 bytes or more is provided between the last address of the game control data 13132 and the start address of the debug (inspection function) code 13133, and when displayed in the dump list format. The game control area and the debug (inspection function) area can be easily distinguished. Similarly, an empty area (unused space) of a predetermined length is provided between the final address of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 and the start address of the base calculation/display code 13135. If the predetermined length is 16 bytes or more, it is desirable that the debug (inspection function) area and the base calculation area can be easily distinguished when displayed in the dump list format, but the predetermined length may be shorter than 16 bytes. It should be noted that the value stored in the empty area may be a fixed value that is the same value, and may be set to a value different from the value set in the game control area or the debug area or a value with low frequency. The value stored in the empty area may be an instruction such as a No Operation code that the CPU does nothing. In this way, when displayed in the dump list format, the game control area, the debug (inspection function) area, and the base calculation area can be easily distinguished.

Further, the base calculation/display code 13135 and the base calculation/display data 13136 may be stored in a part of the debug area without dividing the debug (inspection function) area and the base calculation area. That is, it is sufficient that the game control area and other areas are clearly distinguished. In this way, by clearly distinguishing the game control area from other areas, a debug area (code for debug (inspection function), data for debug (inspection function)) that is a process not directly related to control of the progress of the game. ) And a base calculation area (base calculation/display code 13135 and base calculation/display data 13136) are arranged separately from the game control area, and a defect (bug, etc.) in the base calculation/display code 13135 is caused in the game control. Avoids the risk of affecting.

In the debug (inspection function) area, programs and data that are not directly related to the game are stored. For example, various functions other than the game control of the pachinko machine 1 are used only when debugging the pachinko machine 1. A code 13133 for outputting the inspection signal is stored. The debug (inspection function) code 13133 is a program for outputting a debug (inspection function) signal. In addition, a program for calculating a base value, which is not directly related to the progress of the game, is stored in the base calculation area.

The game control code 13131 is executed by the main control MPU 1311. The game control code 13131 can be read from and written to the RAM 1312 as appropriate, but the game control area 13126 used by the game control code 13131 can only be read from the debug (inspection function) code 13133. Is configured to be executable, and it is configured such that writing to the area cannot be performed. In this way, the game control area 13126 constitutes a game control area accessible only from the game control code 13131. The process based on the debug (inspection function) code can be unilaterally called and executed while the game control code 13131 is being executed, but the game control code 13131 is changed from the debug (inspection function) code to the game control code 13131. It is configured so that it cannot be called and executed. As a result, since the independence of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 can be enhanced, even if the game control code 13131 is changed, the change in the debug (inspection function) code 13133 can be minimized. ..

The base calculation/display code 13135 is called from the game control code 13131 (for example, step S89 of timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 23) and executed by the main control MPU 1311. The base value calculated by the base calculation/display code 13135 is stored in the base calculation area 13128 of the RAM 1312. As illustrated, the base calculation area 13128 is provided separately from the game control area 13126 (outside the game control area). In this way, by designing the base calculation/display code 13135 separately from the game control code 13131 and storing it in another area, the base calculation/display code 13135 and the game control code 13131 can be inspected. This can be performed separately, and the labor of inspection of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. Further, the base calculation/display code 13135 can be commonly used by a plurality of models without depending on the model.

The RAM 1312 is provided with a game control area 13126, a debug area, a base calculation area 13128, a game control stack area 13137, a debug stack area, and a base calculation stack area 13138.

The game control area 13126 is an area in which data used by the game control code 13131 is stored, and can be read and written from the game control area 13126. In the game control area 13126, data cannot be written from the debug (inspection function) code 13133 and the base calculation/display code 13135, but read access is possible, and the debug (inspection function) code 13133 and base calculation are performed. -The display code 13135 can refer to the data stored in the game control area 13126.

The debug area is an area in which data used by the debug (inspection function) code 13133 is stored. The debug area is accessible from the game control code 13131 and the base calculation/display code 13135, but only the reading of data is permitted and the writing of data is prohibited. The base calculation area 13128 is an area for storing data used by the base calculation/display code 13135. The base calculation area 13128 is accessible from the game control code 13131 and the debug (inspection function) code 13133, but only the reading of data is permitted and the writing of data is prohibited.

The game control stack area 13137 is an area in which data used by the game control code 13131 is saved. The debug stack area is an area in which data used by the debug (inspection function) code 13133 is saved. The base calculation stack area 13138 is an area in which data used by the base calculation/display code 13135 is saved. Each stack area is used exclusively for temporarily saving the data stored in the auxiliary storage unit 13142 in the CPU. Each stack area can be switched by changing the value of the stack pointer managed by the CPU 13111. The stack pointer is a storage area that specifies the start address of the stack area.

FIG. 113B is a diagram showing details of the base calculation area 13128. The base calculation area 13128 may be provided with a backup area 1 and a backup area 2 in which a copy of the data stored in the main area is stored, in addition to the main area in which the base calculation result is stored. There may be one or more backup areas. A check code for detecting a data error is added to each area. The check code may be a checksum of data in each area or a predetermined value. The check code is set in the initialization process when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, set every time the data in the main area is updated in the base calculation/display process, or the power-down process in the main control side (see FIG. 22). It may be set in steps S50 to S54). In particular, if the check code is a fixed value, the check code is initialized when it is determined to be normal in the initialization process or when the data is erased, and the fixed value is set in the power-down process on the main control side (step S50 in FIG. 20). May be set. The check code may also be used as the power failure flag. That is, if a predetermined value is set for the check code in the main area, it may be determined that the power failure flag is set. Further, if a predetermined value is set in the power failure flag, it may be determined that the check code of each area is a correct value (that is, the data of each area is normal).

When it is determined that the main area is abnormal, it may be determined whether the backup area is normal, and the data in the backup area that is determined to be normal may be copied to the main area (step in FIG. 21). S24). In addition, in the power-down process on the main control side, the value of the main area may be duplicated in each backup area (step S54 in FIG. 22). Further, in the base calculation/display processing, the values in the main area may be copied to the backup area at the end of the base calculation/display processing. It suffices to copy the entire main area or only the area of the updated value to the backup area when at least a part of the main area is updated (steps S168 and S170 in FIG. 25).

An unused space is provided between the main area and the backup area 1 and between the backup area 1 and the backup area 2. By providing an unused space between each area, the address of each area can be kept away from each other, and each area can be distinguished by the high-order digit of the address.

[11. Record of game history]
Next, an example of a pachinko machine that records and outputs a game history will be described.

[11-1. Basic configuration of gaming machine for recording gaming history]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1511 determines from the prepared effects a plurality of effects suitable for the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310, and displays the determined effects on the main liquid crystal display. It is displayed on the device 1600. At that time, when the peripheral control unit 1511 decides to present a specific effect (for example, two kinds of specific effects out of three kinds of super reach) out of a plurality of prepared effects, the switching of the game state is started. As to how many times the special symbol variable display game is played, the specific effect is displayed (in other words, at what rotation the effect appears), the main liquid crystal display device 1600 together with the progress status of the game. To display.

Specifically, according to the game history shown in FIG. 114, Super Reach 1 appears at 34:10:25, and the result of the special symbol variable display game is lost. At 127:10:54. Super Reach 2 appeared, the result of the special symbol variable display game was lost, Super Reach 2 appeared at 428th rotation at 11:30, and the result of the special symbol variable display game was a sudden change jackpot. Is displayed.

The jackpot history display (e.g., a jackpot on the 15th rotation and a jackpot on the 50th rotation) can be confirmed on the data display provided in the hall, but the specific effect that appears before the jackpot cannot be confirmed. Some players can judge whether the pachinko machine 1 is in good condition or out of order from the appearance of a particular effect (for example, if the super reach 2 appears within 50 revolutions after the end of the big hit, it is considered that the big hit is won in a short time). In order to meet such expectations of the player, the degree of appearance of the effect is visually displayed. In addition, when the player is confirming the degree of appearance of the effect, the player does not shoot the game ball, so if a display that shows the degree of appearance of all the prepared effects is displayed, the player It takes time to confirm the degree of appearance, and the operation of the gaming table may decrease. Therefore, it is preferable to display only a specific reach effect (a reach effect with a high expectation for a big hit) of the reach effects. Also, the appearance history for each effect may be confirmed by operating a predetermined operation means (operation button 220C or the like).

As a specific process, when the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a variation pattern command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1511 stores information on the number of variations and the effect produced. Further, the peripheral control unit 1511 updates the information on the number of times of fluctuation and the produced effect based on the received fluctuation pattern command. Then, when a predetermined operation means (operation button 220C or the like) is operated, not all of the displayed effects but the number of fluctuations required until the limited specific effect is displayed is added and displayed. It suffices to perform processing.

Further, when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1 that is in operation, the pachinko machine 1 outputs error information to notify the employee of the hall. The form of this notification is such that the error screen shown in FIG. 115(A) is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or the detailed error screen shown in FIG. 115(B) is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and the cause of the error is displayed. Is output, an alarm sound is output, and the error signal shown in FIG. 116 is output from the external terminal board 784. Further, typical errors in the pachinko machine 1 include those shown in FIGS. 117, 118, and 119. The error that occurs in the pachinko machine 1 is reported outside the pachinko machine 1 so that employees in the hall can know the cause. For example, a code defined for each error type may be displayed on the status display LED included in the function display unit 1400. Specifically, when the cable connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is defective, “0” is displayed on the status display LED included in the function display unit 1400, and the LED in the right side of the door is displayed. Lights blue.

However, the error occurs due to various causes such as a slight failure of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, disconnection of the connector), a serious failure requiring replacement of parts, an error caused by fraudulent activity, and the like.

The pachinko machine 1 in which an error has occurred must search for the cause of the error, recover from the error, and operate. It takes time and cost to search for the cause of the error, and stopping the operation of the pachinko machine 1 due to the error causes a decrease in sales. Therefore, if the hall can know the detailed information of the error that occurred, the error can be resolved early and the operation stop time of the pachinko machine 1 can be shortened.

More specifically, the hall uses a hall computer to determine the state of the pachinko machine 1 based on a signal output from the external terminal board 784. However, in order to search for the cause of the error, in addition to the signal output from the external terminal board 784, preferably, "the number of winnings in the general winning opening", "the number of winnings in the large winning opening", "the number of passing gates", and "the variation of the normal symbol" are desirable. Game history information such as "number" is required. If the pachinko machine 1 malfunctions, it will be solved by repairing or replacing parts, so it is not a big problem, but if a game ball is acquired by cheating, the chance that a normal player will profit will decrease, May interfere with the business of the company, and eventually the hall may become difficult to manage.

When such game history information is output from the external terminal board 784, the number of terminals of the connector used for the external terminal board 784 increases and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 increases. In addition, events such as "general winning award", "big award winning", "gate passing", and "normal symbol changes" occur frequently, so when you output all the data from the pachinko machine 1, the data A high-performance hall computer is required to analyze the data, which increases the burden on the hall.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment stores data, which is not output as a real-time signal from the external terminal board 748, inside the pachinko machine 1 so that the stored data can be referred to later. By doing so, it became possible to check the details of the process leading up to the error.

In addition, the time of occurrence of events (number of prizes for general winning a prize, number of prizes for award winning prize, number of passing gates, number of normal symbols, etc.) that occurred in the process up to the occurrence of these errors is recorded. You can understand how many events have occurred. For example, an abnormality such as the number of winnings at the general winning opening being 50 per minute can be seen.

Note that if the date and time of occurrence is recorded for each event, the amount of data used to search for the cause of error increases, and it takes time to search for the cause of error. Therefore, when a predetermined number of events or more occur in a predetermined time (for example, one minute), it may be output as error information and notified.

For example, in any game state, you can win the general prize hole, so if you receive more than a predetermined number of prizes in a predetermined time, you may output error information and notify, but the big prize hole is won only during the jackpot game Therefore, it is advisable to set a predetermined time from the start of the big hit game to the end, and output error information when a predetermined number or more of special winning openings have been won in a predetermined time.

In the pachinko machine described below, the peripheral control unit 1511 records the game history and outputs it as data in a predetermined format.

FIG. 120 is a flow chart showing an example of peripheral control unit power-on processing according to this embodiment. The peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 120 has a game history recording process (step S1023) added to the peripheral control unit power-on process described above with reference to FIG.

In the game history recording process, the peripheral control unit 1511 records the game history in the memory when the received command is a predetermined command based on the analysis result of the command received from the main control board 1310. The game history is recorded as the date and time of event occurrence in the format shown in FIG. 122, for example. The memory in which the game history is recorded may be a DRAM, but in consideration of retaining the stored contents even when the power is cut off, it is preferable to record the SRAM in which the refresh operation is unnecessary and the power consumption is low.

The game history recording process (step S1023) may be executed before the process related to game control (steps S1024 to S1032). By executing the game history recording process at an early stage of the peripheral control unit steady process, the game history can be accurately recorded even if the process related to the game control is stopped midway and some of the effects are not executed. That is, even if some effects are not executed (even if all the effects are not executed), the result of the lottery already performed on the main control board 1310 does not change, and the privilege given to the player also changes. Therefore, the game history is recorded with priority over the production. Further, since the game history recording process is not affected by the process related to the game control, the game history recording process can be shared by a plurality of pachinko machines.

Next, the process when the memory capacity of the recorded game history reaches the upper limit will be described. When the data amount of the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, the game history recording process is executed, but the game history recorded in the memory does not have to be updated. That is, the information recorded in the memory does not change. In this way, by executing the game history recording process even if there is no free space in the memory for recording the game history, it is not necessary to confirm the free state of the memory for recording the game history, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can be used every time. The processing of can be reduced.

If the memory capacity of the recorded game history reaches the upper limit, the game history recording process may be executed to update the game history recorded in the memory. In this case, a ring buffer having a plurality of (for example, 10) storage areas may be provided in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, and the oldest game history may be erased to record the latest game history. Even in this case, it is not necessary to check the empty state of the memory for recording the game history, and the processing of the peripheral control unit 1511 each time can be reduced.

Further, when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, step S1023 may be skipped and the game history recording process may not be executed. By not executing the game history recording process when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, it is possible to prevent the useless process from being executed. Therefore, other processes performed by the peripheral control unit 1511 (effect control, lamp) Control and sound control can be executed reliably, and new processing (for example, processing that is executed over a plurality of peripheral control unit steady processing due to lack of processing time) by utilizing the available processing time Alternatively, a process (for example, a process of switching the selection table) that is executed once in the peripheral control unit steady process may be executed because it does not have to be executed every time.

The received command may be analyzed (step S1022) immediately after the interrupt timer activation process (step S1010), and the game history recording process (step S1023) may be executed.

FIG. 121 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a game history recording condition setting table.

In the game history recording condition setting table, of the commands received by the peripheral control unit 1511 from the main control board 1310, the type of the command recorded as the game history, that is, the event recorded as the game history is registered.

For example, the following command types are registered in the game history recording condition setting table, and the conditions for generating the command and the purpose of recording the game history are as follows.

For example, the start mouth 1 winning command and the start mouth 2 winning command are transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the winning of the game ball to the starting mouth 2002 and the starting mouth 2004 is detected, respectively. The control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls to each starting opening. Further, the special symbol 1 symbol type command, the special symbol 2 symbol type command, respectively, the command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 at the start of variation of the special symbol, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the special symbols 1 and 2. The number of fluctuations can be counted.

Further, the power-on command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the power is turned on, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire a ram clear operation or the like. The variation start state command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1511 from the main control board 1310 when the variation of the special symbol is started, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the state of the variation start of the special symbol. The states that can be distinguished by the state command at the start of change are four states: low probability/time saving, low probability/non-time saving, high probability/time saving, and high probability/non-time saving. The number of fluctuations made can be counted. Here, the low probability is a state in which the probability that the jackpot is derived in the jackpot lottery associated with the special symbol variation display game is a normal probability, and the high probability is the jackpot in the jackpot lottery associated with the special symbol variation display game. Is a state in which the probability of being derived is higher than usual. As for the time saving, the probability that the above-mentioned second starting door member 2549 is opened (or expanded) has a higher probability than the non-time saving, and the time from the start of the fluctuation of the normal symbol to the determination is usually. The frequency with which the second starting opening door member 2549 is opened (or expanded) is shorter than the non-time saving state, such as shortening. Along with that, the probability that an effect with a short time of one special symbol variable display game is selected becomes high.

The special winning opening 1 winning command (for each winning) and the big winning opening 2 winning command (for each winning), respectively, from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the game ball wins the big winning opening 2005 and the big winning opening 2006, respectively. The command is transmitted, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls to each special winning opening.

The special winning opening 1 winning command (below the specified winning prize) and the big winning entrance 2 winning command (below the specified winning prize) are won at the special winning opening 2005 and the big winning opening 2006, respectively, until the end of the round. If not, a command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when a predetermined time has passed from the closing of each special winning opening (for example, after one second and before the next opening), and the peripheral control unit 1511 You can get the winning status in one round for each big winning hole. The special winning opening 1 winning command (greater than the specified winning prize) and the special winning opening 2 winning command (greater than the specified winning prize) are rounded when the number of game balls exceeds the specified number at the special winning opening 2005 and the big winning opening 2006, respectively. When is finished, a command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when a predetermined time has passed from the closing of each special winning opening (for example, after one second and before the next opening), and the peripheral control unit 1511 is You can get the status of winning in one round to each big winning opening. It should be noted that this command is transmitted when a predetermined time has elapsed from the closing of each of the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 when the predetermined number of winning balls (for example, 10) defined in one round are detected and the big winning opening is detected. This is because there is a possibility that an undetected game ball will be present in the special winning opening when the game is closed, and the situation of the winning is accurately grasped even in such an over-winning.

The jackpot OP command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the jackpot occurs (that is, when the condition device is activated or the accessory continuous operation device is activated), and the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires a change to the jackpot state. Yes, you can count the number of jackpots. The transition destination command at the end of the jackpot operation is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 at the end of the jackpot state, and the end of the jackpot state and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the situation after the jackpot.

The small hit OP command is for opening the big winning opening in a relatively short time (for example, the opening time for one time is 1.8 seconds or the total opening time for multiple times is less than 1.8 seconds). Therefore, when the accessory continuous operation device does not operate (so-called small hit), a command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can count the number of small hits.

The normal symbol stop command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1511 from the main control board 1310 when the normal symbol is stopped, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the stop symbol of the normal symbol and can count the number of variations of the normal symbol. The universal figure gate passage command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the number of game balls passing through the gate unit 2003.

Even if the special symbol or the normal symbol is not selected by lottery even if the player wins the starting opening or passes through the gate (such as when there is no overflow or memory), the main control board 1310 puts the starting opening 1 into the peripheral control unit 1511. The hour command, the start opening 2 winning command and the universal figure gate passing command are transmitted. Therefore, the peripheral control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls at the starting opening and the number of balls passing through the gate unit.

The error display command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when an error occurs, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the timing of error occurrence and count the number of error occurrences.

The general winning opening 1 winning command, the general winning opening 2 winning command, and the general winning opening 3 winning command are respectively transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when a game ball wins each general winning opening 2001, and the surroundings. The control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls to each general winning opening 2001. It should be noted that the general prize-winning command may be determined by the number of the general prize-winning holes 2001 provided in the game area 5a, and the case where three general prize-winning holes 2001 are provided has been exemplified above. As shown in FIG. 10 and FIG. 16, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with four general winning a prizes 2001, and thus four types of general winning a prize winnings from a general winning prize 1 winning command to a general winning prize 4 winning command. The command is defined.

FIG. 122 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the game history recorded in the memory.

The game history includes a history number, an event, and an event occurrence date and time, and is preferably recorded in the memory in order of the event occurrence time. As the event occurrence date and time, the time when the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the command from the main control board 1310 may be recorded as the event occurrence date and time, and the main control board 1310 notifies the peripheral control unit 1511 of the time when the event occurrence is detected. Then, the peripheral control unit 1511 may record the event occurrence time notified from the main control board 1310. In the illustrated game history, the date and time of event occurrence is recorded with the granularity up to the minute, but may be recorded up to the second.

By analyzing the game history of the form shown in FIG. 122, it is possible to know the details of the event (for example, the change of the game state, the result of the variable display game, etc.) that has occurred in association with the command transmitted from the main control board 1310. .. For example, the power-on command of history number 1 occurred at 15:30 on March 15, 2016, RAM was cleared from the content of the command, and the game started with a low probability/non-time saving state. I understand. That is, the hall starts business at 15:30, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and after a while, the player starts striking (for example, after igniting a cigarette) and wins the general winning opening 2001. I understand. In addition, the special figure 1 fluctuation start event of history number 4 occurs at 15:34 on March 15, 2016, from the content of the special symbol 1 symbol type command (type of stop symbol) received, special symbol variation You can see the result of the display game. The special figure 1 fluctuation start event of history number 6 occurs at 15:34 on March 15, 2016, from the content of the special symbol 1 symbol type command (type of stop symbol) received, the special symbol variable display game You can see the result of. Although the result of the special symbol variable display game is not shown in FIG. 122, each special symbol variable display game is represented by the numerical value indicating the result of the variable display game included in the symbol type command received at the start of the variation of the special symbol. The result of the variable display game (miss, normal 4 rounds, high probability 4 rounds, high probability 16 rounds, etc.) may be recorded as the game history.

Next, a method for the hole to refer to the information (game history) recorded in the memory will be described.

First, a history output interface 1590 for outputting the information recorded in the memory from the peripheral control unit 1511 is provided. When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the history reference command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1511 outputs the game history recorded in the memory from the history output interface 1590.

In addition, when a data collection terminal is connected to the pachinko machine 1 and the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a history reference command from the data collection terminal, the peripheral control unit 1511 outputs the game history recorded in the memory from the history output interface 1590. The history output interface 1590 may be composed of a history output terminal provided in the peripheral control unit 1511 or may be provided separately from the peripheral control unit 1511. The data collection terminal may be held by the hall for data management of the pachinko machine 1.

The connection between the data collection terminal and the pachinko machine 1 may be a cable connection via the history output interface 1590 or a wireless connection via short-range wireless (for example, Bluetooth (registered trademark)).

The command that triggers the peripheral control unit 1511 to output a game history is a command that is not transmitted during a normal game even after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, even a history reference command dedicated to the game history output (FIG. 121). The command when a special condition (operation) is performed with a command not defined in the above may be used as the history reference command. The special condition (operation) is, for example, operating the RAM clear button while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. Further, even with a command transmitted during a normal game, a history reference command may be transmitted under the condition of an event that cannot occur (or is unlikely to occur). For example, this is the case when 50 prizes are won in the starting opening or the general winning opening in one minute. Further, the game history may be output when the commands used for the game control are received in a special order which is not normally possible.

The operation history may be displayed by providing an operation panel (keyboard) and a display (liquid crystal display device) on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (a place invisible to the player).

FIG. 123 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the peripheral control board and its periphery.

The peripheral control board 1510 performs effect control based on various commands from the main control board 1310, and sends effect display drive board 4450 and control information and various information (various data) via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. A liquid crystal display that performs drawing control of the peripheral control unit 1511 that communicates with the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, and that controls sound such as music and sound effects that flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. It has a control unit 1512 and a real-time clock (hereinafter, referred to as “RTC”) control unit 4165 that holds calendar information that specifies the date, and time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second.

As shown in FIG. 123, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on process executed when the power is turned on, and after a predetermined time has passed from the power-on. Peripheral control ROM 1511b for storing various control programs such as sub-control programs for controlling performance operations to be executed, various data, various control data and various schedule data, and V blank from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later. Various information that continues over the peripheral control unit steady process executed each time a signal is input (for example, schedule data that defines a screen to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and light emission modes of various LEDs and the like are specified. Peripheral control RAM 1511c for storing information for managing schedule data and the like, and various information continued across days (for example, information for managing the history of the jackpot gaming state and a special effect flag) Peripheral control SRAM 1511d that stores information for managing) and peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511e (hereinafter, referred to as "peripheral control external WDT 1511e") for monitoring whether peripheral control MPU 1511a is operating normally Have) and.

The peripheral control RAM 1511c loses its contents when power is cut off for a long time (when power is cut off for a long time), whereas the peripheral control SRAM 1511d has a large capacity (not shown) provided on the power supply board 931. By supplying the backup power from the electrolytic capacitor (hereinafter referred to as “SRAM electrolytic capacitor”), the stored contents can be retained for about 50 hours. Since the electrolytic capacitor for SRAM is provided on the power supply board 931, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, so the peripheral control SRAM 1511d retains the stored contents. You can't do it and lose its contents.

Further, a part of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is powered by a backup power supply 1513 different from the backup power supply supplied from the power supply board 931. The game history is recorded in the area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d to which power is supplied by the backup power supply 1513, and the stored contents can be retained even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. The backup power supply 1513 is composed of a secondary battery such as a lithium ion battery, and preferably has a power supply capability capable of holding data in at least a part of the area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d for several weeks to one month.

FIG. 124 is a block diagram showing the configuration around the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

The area for storing the game history in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d may be configured in a package different from the peripheral control CPU including the peripheral control MPU, or may be configured in the package of the peripheral control CPU together with the peripheral control MPU.

FIG. 124(A) shows the peripheral configuration of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d in which the area for storing the game history is formed by a package different from the peripheral control CPU. As shown in the figure, the effect control area to which power is not supplied from the backup power supply 1513 is provided outside the peripheral control CPU package, and the game history storage area to which power is supplied from the backup power supply 1513 is provided outside the peripheral control CPU package. To be

When the pachinko machine 1 is reset by operating the RAM clear switch, the data in the peripheral control SRAM (effect control area) 1511d in the peripheral control CPU is cleared, but the peripheral control SRAM (game history storage outside the peripheral control CPU) The data in the (work area) 1511d is not cleared.

FIG. 124(B) shows a peripheral configuration of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d which constitutes an area for storing a game history in the package of the peripheral control CPU. As shown in the figure, both the effect control area to which power is not supplied from the backup power supply 1513 and the game history storage area to which power is supplied from the backup power supply 1513 are provided in the peripheral control CPU package.

Even in the configuration shown in FIG. 124B, when the pachinko machine 1 is reset by operating the RAM clear switch, the data in the peripheral control SRAM (effect control area) 1511d in the peripheral control CPU is cleared, but the peripheral control is performed. The data in the peripheral control SRAM (game history storage area) 1511d outside the CPU is not cleared. Therefore, the effect control area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d and the game history storage area are preferably physically separated.

In the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the area for storing the game history may be configured by a flash memory instead of the SRAM. By storing the game history in the flash memory, the game history can be held even in the pachinko machine 1 to which power is not supplied, without providing the backup power supply 1513.

In either of FIGS. 124A and 124B, the pachinko machine 1 has means for initializing the data in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. The means for initializing the data in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d may be any method other than the normal data initialization method of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while operating the RAM clear switch. Good. For example, if a history clear switch is provided in addition to the RAM clear switch and the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while operating the history clear switch, the stored game history is initialized. In this case, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while operating both the RAM clear switch and the history clear switch, both the stored game state information and the game history are initialized. The history clear switch may be directly connected to the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while operating the RAM clear switch and the RAM clear switch is continuously operated for a predetermined time after the power is turned on, both the stored game state information and the game history are initialized. May be turned into.

When initializing the game history stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the main control board 1310 transmits a command different from the normal power-on command to the peripheral control board 1510.

The main control board 1310 continues to send power-on commands to the peripheral control board 1510 while the RAM clear switch is being operated, and the peripheral control board 1510 receives power-on commands a predetermined number of times within a predetermined time. When it does, or when the power-on command is continuously received, the game history stored in the peripheral control SRAM (game history storage area) 1511d may be initialized. By providing the means for initializing the data in the game history storage area in this way, the latest information can be accurately recorded and analyzed even if the gaming machine continues to operate in the hall for one year, for example.

The peripheral control external WDT 1511e is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is out of control, and when the timer is up, it is reset by hardware. That is, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not output the clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period (until the timer expires), the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period, it restarts the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, so that it is not reset.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a has a plurality of built-in parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. When receiving various commands from the main control board 1310, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. Lamp light emitting data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided in the lamp from a lamp drive board serial I/O port through a peripheral control output circuit (not shown) The game board side motor drive data for transmitting to the drive board 4170 or outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid that operates various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 is serial for the motor drive board. Door side motor drive data for transmitting from the I/O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit or outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source provided in the door frame 3 is a frame decoration drive The signal is transmitted from the amplifier board motor serial I/O port to the frame decoration drive amplifier board through the peripheral control output circuit and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and to a plurality of LEDs and the like provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3. Door side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal is driven from the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port through the peripheral control output circuit and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 to the frame decoration drive. Send it to the amplifier board.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). In addition, from the detection signal from the rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotational direction) of the dial operation unit 401 provided in the effect operation unit 220, and the pressing detection switch for detecting the operation of the pressing operation unit 405. Detection signal is serialized by a door side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized production operation unit detection data is output from the door side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. , The frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control input circuit, to the serial operation I/O port for detecting the effect operation unit of the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photosensors) for detecting original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are game board sides (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. It is serialized by the serial transmission circuit, and the serialized movable body detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit to the motor control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a through the peripheral control input circuit. There is. The peripheral control MPU 1511a is configured to exchange various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input/output of the motor drive board serial I/O port.

As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the event that occurred during the game is recorded as the game history according to the command transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, so the event occurs during the game. The event can be analyzed later (for example, after the opening of the hall), and the performance and failure of the gaming machine can be grasped. Further, the game history is stored in the non-volatile memory (SRAM to which the backup power source is input), so that the game history can be confirmed even after the gaming machine is restarted.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 121, 122, etc., various information is recorded together with the time of occurrence. Further, for example, in the case of winning the starting opening 1, (1) the fact that the winning opening 1 was won, (2) the time when the winning opening 1 was won, and (3) the event that occurred before winning the starting opening 1. Thus, more information than the information output from the external terminal board 748 shown in FIG. 116 is stored inside the pachinko machine 1. This is because the minimum necessary information (information indicating the fact that (1) the winning opening has been won) is output from the external terminal board 784 in a special case (for example, the cause of an error). This is because the information stored inside the pachinko machine 1 can be confirmed when the investigation is performed). This is because, if all of the information stored inside when winning the prize at the starting opening is output from the external terminal board 784, the output amount of information related to the operation of the pachinko machine 1 may increase, which may impose a burden on the hall. Is. That is, when an event occurs, more information than the information output from the external terminal board 784 is recorded inside the pachinko machine 1, and a part of the information recorded inside is pachinko machine via the external terminal board 784. The information stored in the pachinko machine 1 can be confirmed by outputting the information to the outside of the machine 1.

[11-2. Compact plan 1]
Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine that records and outputs the game history will be described. It should be noted that some of the modifications described below are a modification of a part of the above-described embodiment and form a part of the embodiment.

In the above-described embodiment, the event (command type) that has occurred and the date and time when the event occurred are recorded for a predetermined command that is predetermined from among the commands that are transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. However, the capacity of the SRAM 1511d that records the game history is finite, and it is difficult to record all of the huge amount of events that occur during the game for a long time. Therefore, in the modified example 1 (compact plan 1), the change in the state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of counting events occurring in the state are recorded.

FIG. 125 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the game history recording condition setting table of the first modification.

In the game history recording condition setting table of the first modification, the commands recorded as the game history are defined separately for counting commands and commands that trigger state changes, and commands for which both attributes are set. There is also. Note that the countable information column and the acquirable state change column are provided for convenience of description, and when the game history recording condition setting table is installed in the pachinko machine 1, only the command type column is required. ..

When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the command in which the counting attribute is set, the peripheral control unit 1511 counts the number of events that triggered the command issuance as a result of the command analysis. Further, when the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a command in which an attribute that triggers a state change is received, as a result of command analysis, the state of the game history recorded in the memory is renewed, and a record for counting the number of events. To add.

For example, a power-on command, a variation start state command, a jackpot OP command, a jackpot operation end transition destination command, and an error display command are commands issued by a state change, respectively, power-on, special symbol variation display start, It can be grasped as the switching of the state of jackpot state start, jackpot state end, and error state occurrence.

Also, the number of events that triggered the issuance of the counting command is counted using the counting command. Specifically, the start opening 1 winning command and the start opening 2 winning command can count the number of winning balls to each starting opening. Special symbol 1 symbol type command, special symbol 2 symbol type command can count the number of fluctuations of each special symbol. With the big winning opening 1 winning command (for each winning) and the big winning opening 2 winning command (for each winning), the number of winning balls to each big winning opening can be counted. With the big winning opening 1 winning command (below the specified winning) and the big winning opening 2 winning command (below the specified winning), it is possible to count the number of rounds that have ended below the specified winning number. With the big winning opening 1 winning command (greater than the specified winning) and the big winning opening 2 winning command (greater than the specified winning), the number of rounds that have exceeded the specified winning number (that is, over winning) can be counted.

The small hit OP command can count the number of small hits. The normal symbol stop command can normally count the number of fluctuations of the symbol. The universal figure gate passage command can acquire the number of game balls that have passed through the gate portion. The error display command can count the number of errors that have occurred. The general winning opening 1 winning command, the general winning opening 2 winning command, and the general winning opening 3 winning command can count the number of winning balls to each general winning opening.

FIG. 126 is a diagram showing a game history recorded in the memory of the first modification.

The game history of the modified example 1 is the state change event that triggered the state change of the pachinko machine 1, the state after the state change event, the time when the state change event occurs, and the state from a predetermined starting point. And the cumulative number of count events detected by the end of (until the next state change event). The number of counting events recorded as the game history may be the number of counting events detected during the state (from the previous state change event to the state change event). The predetermined starting point is the time of initialization of the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. The states where the counting events are recorded separately are assumed to be 5 states of low probability/non-time saving state, low probability/time saving state, high probability/non-time saving state, high probability/time saving state, and jackpot state. The state may be further subdivided.

Next, details of the game history recording process in the first modification will be described. In the game history shown in FIG. 126, as a counting event, the number of winning openings 1 winning, the number of winning 2 starting openings, the number of fluctuations of one special symbol, the number of fluctuations of two special symbols, the number of winning one general winning opening, the number of two winning general winnings The number of general winning openings 3 winning, the number of major winning openings 1 winning, the number of major winning openings 2 winning, the number of passing gates, and the number of normal symbol variations are recorded. The number of events other than those shown in the figure may be counted.

A storage area for the cumulative number of each counting event of 2 bytes is sufficient. In particular, data that is not derived very often and whose cumulative number does not increase (for example, the number of general winning awards) may be 1 byte, and other data may be 2 bytes. In this case, the 1-byte data and the 2-byte data may be arranged in the order of 2 bytes and 1 byte (or 1 byte and 2 bytes) without being mixed.

When a state change event occurs, the type of the state change event, the state after the occurrence of the event, the date and time of the occurrence of the event are recorded, and a new record is created in the game history. Then, the counting event after the state change is recorded in a new record.

The count result of the count event in the current state may be recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and stored in a new record created in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d after the state change. Although a new record in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is created when the state changes, a new record may be created at the start of the period in which counting events are counted. In this case, data may not be stored in the new record created while counting events are counted, but 0 may be stored as an initial value. Also, a new record may be created at the end of the period in which counting events are counted. In this case, immediately after creating a new record, the counting result of the counting event of the period is stored in the new record.

When the game state changes and the data recorded in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) is stored in the game history storage area (peripheral control SRAM 1511d), the data is read from the game history storage area and recorded in the work area. Numerical values are added and stored in the game history storage area. On the other hand, when the number of count events detected during the state (from the previous state change event to the state change event) is recorded as a game history, the count value of the count event is stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d as a game. Store in the history storage area.

That is, each time a state change event occurs, the count value in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is updated. Therefore, the count result in the current state recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c is recorded in the peripheral control RAM 1511c until the next state change event occurs, and the stored contents are backed up when a power failure occurs. , Will be initialized by normal ram clear operation. Specifically, for example, in the low-probability/non-time saving state, the game history information in which the number of winnings to the starting opening 1 is 50 is recorded in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) is the pachinko machine of the first modification. In 1, the game state is changed and then recorded in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. In other words, if the game state does not change, the game history is not recorded in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. For this reason, when the power is cut off and the ram clear operation is performed in the low probability/non-time saving state, the number of winnings of 50 prizes is initialized to 0.

Further, the counting result of the counting event in the current state may be written in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. That is, every time a count event occurs, the count value in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is updated. In this case, the count result in the current state recorded in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is not initialized by the normal ram clear operation, but is initialized by the game history initialization operation described above.

Further, even when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, the game history recording process may be executed. In this case, in the current state, the recording of the game history in the peripheral control RAM 1511c is continuously executed, and the cumulative number of counting events may not be stored from the peripheral control SRAM 1511d when the state changes. Alternatively, the game history (cumulative number of counting events) in the oldest state may be deleted and the cumulative number of counting events in the immediately preceding state may be recorded. In this case, a ring buffer may be configured in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

By executing the game history recording process even if there is no free space in the memory for recording the game history, it is not necessary to check the free state of the memory for recording the game history, and the processing of the peripheral controller 1511 is reduced each time. it can. Also, since the cumulative number of counting events in the current state is recorded in the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the latest game history can be confirmed.

Further, when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, step S1023 may be skipped and the game history recording process may not be executed. By not executing the game history recording process when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, it is possible to prevent the useless process from being executed and reduce the process of the peripheral control unit 1511.

As described above, in the first modification, the state switching of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and the number of counting events (each winning number, the number of fluctuations, etc.) in each state during the switching is recorded, so that the game of the SRAM 1511d is recorded. A long game history can be recorded without increasing the capacity of the history storage area.

In addition, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 of Modification 1 is also characterized in that more information is recorded internally than the information output from the external terminal board 784.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the modified example 1, the condition for creating a new record in the game history is a change in the game state, and if the game state does not change, it is stored in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Information (game history) is not written. In other words, if fraud is performed in a state in which a new record cannot be created in the game history storage area (while the same gaming state continues), it may be difficult to find fraud. As described above, the hall can confirm the information written in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d in order to analyze the information (game history) written in the memory, but in the pachinko machine 1 of the modified example 1. Unless the game state changes, information is not written in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, so even if the information is read from the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the current state information (game history) cannot be confirmed. Even in such a case, a check function may be provided to detect fraud early.

Specifically, the first record (the latest record of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d) in which the game history of the latest state is recorded and the second record (the record of the peripheral control RAM 1511c) in which the game history of the current state is recorded. An error may be notified if the result of comparison with the above satisfies a predetermined condition.

For example, in a high-probability/time saving state or a jackpot gaming state, in a pachinko machine 1 that shoots a game ball so as to roll on the right side of the game area 5a, so-called right hitting, transitions from a high probability/time saving state to a jackpot gaming state. If, after the jackpot game state is over, the state changes to a high-probability/time-saving state, even if the state is switched, the player usually hits right, so there is a possibility of winning the general winning opening on the left side of the game area 5a. Extremely low. In this case, the number of winnings to the general winning opening may be compared between the jackpot gaming state and the subsequent high probability/time saving state, and when a difference is detected, an error may be notified. The allowable value of the difference in the number of winning balls to the general winning opening between the states is set to one, and an error may be notified when a difference of two or more occurs. This is because when the hand is released from the firing handle, the firing force becomes uneven, and the game ball may roll on the left side of the game area 5a.

Instead of the error notification, the security signal may be transmitted from the external terminal board 784 shown in FIG. Since the early fraud detection check function described above detects an error from the game state of the pachinko machine 1 by predicting a game (for example, a high probability/time saving state, the player may hit the right), an unskilled player may There is a possibility that an error will be detected if you make an unexpected hit. For this reason, the pachinko machine 1 may not notify the error and may only output the security signal from the external terminal board 784 and not notify the player. By doing so, the clerk in the hall can confirm the possibility of an error from a place away from the pachinko machine 1 without the player being aware of it, and prevent troubles with the player.

As described above, since the error detection function of the pachinko machine 1 is not perfect, the cause of the error can be checked by analyzing the game history outside the pachinko machine 1.

[11-3. Compact plan 2]
In the above-described modification 1, among the commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the state change event records the state change of the pachinko machine 1, and the number of counting events in each state during the change. Was recorded. However, the number of events in each changing state may not be important, and it may be sufficient if the number of events for each type of state that occurs repeatedly is sufficient. Therefore, in the modified example 2 (compact plan 2), the state of the pachinko machine 1 and the cumulative number of counting events for each state are recorded.

In the second modification, the game history is recorded using the same game history recording condition setting table (FIG. 125) as in the first modification.

FIG. 127 is a diagram showing a game history recorded in the memory of the second modification.

As shown in FIG. 127, the game history of the modified example 2 is composed of a history of state events and the total number of count events for each state. The history of state events includes the state change event that triggered the state change of the pachinko machine 1, the state after the state change event, and the time at which the state change event occurred. In the pachinko machine 1 of the modified example 2, the cumulative number of counting events is recorded in the five states of low probability/non-time saving state, low probability/time saving state, high probability/non-time saving state, high probability/time saving state, and jackpot state. It The counting event (and the command related to the event) recorded in the modified example 2 includes a starting opening 1 winning number (starting opening 1 winning command), a starting opening 2 winning number (starting opening 2 winning command), special Symbol 1 fluctuation number (special symbol 1 symbol type command), special symbol 2 fluctuation number (special symbol 2 symbol type command), general winning a prize 1 winning number (general winning a prize 1 winning command), general winning a prize 2 winning number (general) Prize hole 2 prize command), general prize mouth 3 prize number (general prize mouth 3 prize command), big prize mouth 1 prize number (large prize mouth 1 prize command), big prize mouth 2 prize number (large prize mouth 2 prize command) ), the number of passing gates (general figure gate passing command), the number of normal symbol variations (normal symbol stop command).

The number of counting events other than the above may be counted, and the state in which the counting events are recorded separately may be further subdivided.

Next, the details of the game history recording process in the second modification will be described. In the game history shown in FIG. 127, when a state change event occurs, the type of the state change event, the state after the event has occurred, and the date and time when the event occurred are recorded in the state event history. When a change in the state of the gaming machine is detected by the state change event, the cumulative number of counting events counted in the state before the change is recorded in the non-volatile memory, and the counting event described above is corresponding to the state after the change. Start recording the cumulative number of.

The count result of the counting event in the current state is recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and after the state change, the game history storage area (cumulative value of the state) of the SRAM 1511d is read out and stored in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. The recorded values may be added and stored in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, every time a state change event occurs, the cumulative value of the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated using the value before the state change recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Therefore, the count result in the current state recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c is initialized by a normal ram clear operation, although the stored contents are backed up when a power failure occurs.

Further, the counting result of the counting event in the current state may be written in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, every time a counting event occurs, the cumulative value in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated. In this case, the counting result in the current state recorded in the SRAM 1511d is not initialized by the normal ram clear operation, but is initialized by the game history initialization operation described above.

As described above, in the second modification, the state change of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and the counting event (the number of winnings, the number of fluctuations, etc.) for each type of state is recorded, so that the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is recorded. It is possible to record a long game history without increasing the capacity of.

[11-4. Compact plan 3]
In Modification 2 described above, of the commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the status change of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded at the status change event, and the cumulative number of counting events for each status is recorded. However, the timing at which the state is switched may not be important in some cases, and it may be sufficient if the number of events for each type of state is sufficient. Therefore, in the modified example 3 (compact plan 3), the switching of the states of the pachinko machine 1 is not recorded, but the cumulative number of counting events for each state is recorded.

In Modification 3, the game history is recorded by using the same game history recording condition setting table (FIG. 125) as in Modification 1.

In Modification 3, the same event as the event recorded in Modification 1 is recorded using the game history recording condition setting table shown in FIG.

FIG. 128 is a diagram showing a game history recorded in the memory of Modification 3.

As shown in FIG. 128, the game history of Modification 3 is composed of the cumulative number of counting events in each state. Furthermore, the game history of modification 3 includes the accumulated time of each state. The cumulative time is included in order to allow the hall to estimate the number of times an event has occurred (for example, the number of jackpots) from the cumulative time. The states in which the counting events are recorded separately are five states of low probability/non-time saving state, low probability/time saving state, high probability/non-time saving state, high probability/time saving state, and jackpot state, but they are further subdivided. Counting events may be recorded.

The counting event (and the command related to the event) recorded in the modified example 3 includes a starting opening 1 winning number (starting opening 1 winning command), a starting opening 2 winning number (starting opening 2 winning command), special Symbol 1 fluctuation number (special symbol 1 symbol type command), special symbol 2 fluctuation number (special symbol 2 symbol type command), general winning a prize 1 winning number (general winning a prize 1 winning command), general winning a prize 2 winning number (general) Prize hole 2 prize command), general prize mouth 3 prize number (general prize mouth 3 prize command), big prize mouth 1 prize number (large prize mouth 1 prize command), big prize mouth 2 prize number (large prize mouth 2 prize command) ), the number of passing gates (general figure gate passing command), the number of normal symbol variations (normal symbol stop command). The number of counting events other than the above may be counted.

Next, the details of the game history recording process in the second modification will be described. In the game history shown in FIG. 128, when a state change event occurs, the cumulative number of counting events described above is recorded corresponding to the state of the gaming machine changed by the state change event.

The count result of the counting event in the current state is recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and after the state change, the game history storage area (cumulative value of the state) of the SRAM 1511d is read out and stored in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. The recorded values may be added and stored in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, every time a state change event occurs, the cumulative value in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated. Therefore, the count result in the current state recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c is initialized by a normal ram clear operation, although the stored contents are backed up when a power failure occurs.

Further, the counting result of the counting event in the current state may be written in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, every time a counting event occurs, the cumulative value in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated. In this case, the counting result in the current state recorded in the SRAM 1511d is not initialized by the normal ram clear operation, but is initialized by the game history initialization operation described above.

As described above, in the second modification, the state change of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and the counting event (the number of winnings, the number of fluctuations, etc.) for each type of state is recorded, so that the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is recorded. It is possible to record a long game history without increasing the capacity of.

As described above, in the modified examples 1 to 3, when the event is recorded in the game area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) by the game history recording process, and the condition for writing in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is satisfied. First, the data of the work area is written in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. Further, in a normal ram clear operation, the information written in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is not erased (initialized), but the information recorded in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) is erased (initialized).

Here, I will briefly touch on the sales of the hall. In many cases, the business hours of the hall are set, for example, the opening time is 10:00 and the closing time is 23:00. Therefore, in a time zone in which a large number of players are present, such as a time zone just after the opening of the store or a time zone in the evening, it may be difficult for the clerk to monitor whether the game player is playing an illegal game. However, as the closing time approaches, the number of players also decreases, and if there is a high probability/time saving pachinko machine near the closing time, the high probability/time saving pachinko machine is initialized for the next day's business, and low probability/ May be in an untimely state. In this case, since the number of players is small, it is possible to monitor a pachinko machine with a high probability and a short working time, and it is possible to know whether the latest game is illegal. In other words, in consideration of the situation that the latest gaming history is not required for some pachinko machines, it is possible to provide an efficient gaming machine by allowing the clerk to select whether or not to leave the latest information.

Specifically, by initializing the pachinko machine 1 by the ram clear operation, the game history stored in the work area for the event that occurred after the most recent event is erased, and the game history is stored for the event that occurred before the most recent event. The game history stored in the area is retained. That is, although the pachinko machine records information that is not output from the external terminal board 784, information that is recorded in the work area that is erased by the RAM clear operation and information that is recorded in the game history storage area that is not erased by the RAM clear operation. The game history is recorded separately. By doing this, if you want to keep a record of all the events recorded in the work area, the clerk may cause the state change of the pachinko machine, if you want to delete the event record recorded in the work area, The clerk may perform the ram clear operation. By clearing all the game history by ram clear operation, it was decided to delete only the game history stored in the work area related to the event that occurred after the most recent event, as described above, before the most recent event. This is because the clerk does not see the events that have occurred up to this point (it cannot be seen because there are many gamers).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, not only the recording of the information that the winning opening is won, but also the winning of the general winning opening unrelated to the lottery is temporarily recorded in the work area, so the special symbol ( In the symbol that starts changing by winning the start opening, even if the symbol indicating the winning lottery result is shown in the stop mode of this symbol) does not change, while the game ball is being launched in the game area 5a, the game is played. It is characterized by collecting history. In other words, it can be said that the game history recording process is not a process that is executed when the winning lottery is triggered, but a process that may be executed while the pachinko machine is powered on.

Further, in the low probability/non-time saving state, the game ball is shot so that the game ball wins the starting opening 2002, as in the case of so-called left-handed or staggered hit. In such a case, the player should appropriately win the starting opening 2002 and the general winning opening 2001. However, when there is no winning in the general winning opening 2001 (or very few), but a large number of game balls are winning in the starting opening 2002, or conversely, there is no winning in the starting opening 2002 (or very few). However, if a large number of game balls are won in the general winning opening 2001, there is a possibility that fraud is being made. Therefore, the first winning opening and the second winning opening where the game balls win at the same time are set as monitoring targets, and the number of winnings to the first winning opening is a predetermined multiplication factor of the number of winnings to the second winning opening. When exceeding, an error may be notified.

Further, instead of the error notification, the security signal may be transmitted from the external terminal board 784. The above-mentioned detection method may detect an error when an unskilled player makes an unexpected hit. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 may not notify the error and only output the security signal from the external terminal board 784 and not notify the player. By doing so, the clerk in the hall can confirm the possibility of an error from a place away from the pachinko machine 1 without the player being aware of it, and prevent troubles with the player.

In addition, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is also characterized in that information accumulated in a plurality of games is collected as a game history. Since there is an upper limit to the recordable amount of game history data, if it is recorded for each game (1 change), many games (long time) cannot be recorded, so that it is possible to retain the record of more games. There is.

[12. Game performance setting function]
Next, an example of a pachinko machine having a setting function will be described. The pachinko machine of this embodiment has a setting function for changing the operating ratio of the condition device, for example, as the game performance.

[12-1. Basic configuration of pachinko machine with setting function]
FIG. 129 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine having the setting unit, and FIG. 130 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine having the setting unit seen from the back side in the open state, and FIG. 130 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 130 as seen from the back side in a closed state, and FIG. 132 is a view showing a setting unit of the pachinko machine shown in FIG.

The pachinko machine shown in FIG. 129 has a setting board 970 for setting the gaming performance of the pachinko machine. The setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951, and the payout control unit 952 acquires the operation state of each switch and controls the display of the setting display 974.

As shown in the front view of FIG. 132(A), a setting key 971 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode is provided on the setting board 970, and a setting for changing a set value. A change switch 972, a setting confirmation switch 973 for confirming and inputting the changed setting value, and a setting display 974 for displaying the set or selected setting value are provided. The setting board 970 functions as a setting change operation unit that receives an operation for changing settings.

In the present embodiment, operation signals of the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, and the setting confirmation switch 973 on the setting board 970 are fetched by the payout control unit 952. Further, the setting display unit 974 is controlled by the payout control unit 952. The confirmed setting is transmitted from the payout controller 952 to the main control board 1310. The main control board 1310 may control the components on the setting board 970, as described later.

The setting key 971 is for changing a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode by inserting a predetermined key into a keyhole (key insertion portion) and maintaining a short-circuited or open state of a contact by an operation of turning the key to a setting position. This is a switch that outputs a signal that triggers. The setting key 971 may be omitted and other switches may also be used. In this case, by operating (long-pressing) the setting change switch 972 for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started, and the setting change switch 972 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is operated. The setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode may be ended by long pressing.

The setting change mode may be started or ended by operating the RAM clear switch 954. For example, the setting change mode is started by turning on the power while operating the RAM clear switch 954 and continuing (long-pressing) the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) or more. Further, the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 954, and if the continuous operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is less than the predetermined time, the RAM clear processing is executed. Furthermore, the setting change mode may be terminated by pressing the RAM clear switch 954 for a long time during the setting change mode.

In this way, even an employee who does not have the key for the setting key 971 can change the setting, which makes it easy to handle the pachinko machine 1 in the hall. Further, since the operation time of the setting change switch 972 is detected, the operation may be detected at the fall of the setting change switch 972.

The setting change switch 972 is composed of, for example, a push button switch, and is operated to sequentially switch and select set values (1 to 6). That is, when the setting change switch 972 is pressed once, the set value is increased by 1, and when the setting change switch 972 is operated when the setting value=6, the setting value=1. The setting value may be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972. It should be noted that the set value is not limited to 6 levels, but may be less (for example, 2 levels) or higher (for example, 8 levels).

Further, the setting key 971 may serve as the setting change switch 972 without providing the setting change switch 972. In this case, the setting key 971 can be operated in three steps, and the key can be inserted/removed at the neutral position (normal position). When turned to the left, it becomes an operation for starting the setting change mode, and when turned to the right, the setting to be set. This is an operation for selecting a value (when it is turned to the right, it functions as a setting change switch 972). The setting key 971 performs an alternative operation capable of holding the left position and the neutral position, and performs a momentary operation in which the right position is not held (returns to the neutral position when the key is released).

The set value changes the operating ratio of the condition device (that is, the probability of winning the special symbol). The set value=1 has a low hit probability, and the set value=6 has a high hit probability. Also, depending on the set value, the ratio of probability variation big hits, the ratio of time saving (ST) after big hits, the number of time saving, the number of rounds and counts of big hits, the probability of hitting a general figure, the general winning opening, the starting opening and the big winning opening. Various parameters relating to the game such as the number of prize balls may be changed to change the number of prize balls that the player can obtain.

The setting confirmation switch 973 is composed of, for example, a momentary type switch, and is a switch for confirming the setting value selected by the operation of the setting change switch 972 and inputting it to the pachinko machine 1. The setting confirmation switch 973 may be a push button switch or a momentary type toggle switch as long as it is a momentary type switch. The setting change switch 972 and the setting confirmation switch 973 may be configured by switches having different operation methods (operation directions) and shapes so that they are not operated by mistake. For example, the setting change switch 972 may be a push button switch, and the setting confirmation switch 973 may be a momentary toggle switch.

Note that the setting selected by the operation of returning the setting key 971 to the normal position may be confirmed without providing the setting confirmation switch 973. In addition, the selected set value may be set in response to the operation of another switch or sensor provided in the pachinko machine 1. For example, operation of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, contact detection by the contact detection sensor 509 by touching the handle lever 504, operation of the stop button of the handle unit 500, operation of the operation button 220C, ball lending button. The selected setting may be confirmed by the operation of, the operation of the return button, the detection of the winning of the game ball into the starting openings 2002 and 2004, or the like. The operation unit that substitutes the setting confirmation switch 973 may be a switch that can be operated by the player (used for the game) or a switch that cannot be operated by the player (provided on the back side of the pachinko machine).

That is, in the illustrated example, three switches (including setting keys) are provided on the setting board 970 in order to set the game performance in the pachinko machine 1, but the setting board 970 has one or two switches. It is enough to provide it.

Furthermore, the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, and the setting confirmation switch 973 may not be provided, and the setting change operation may be performed only by the RAM clear switch 954. For example, the setting change mode is started by turning on the power while operating the RAM clear switch 954 and continuing (long-pressing) the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) or more. Further, the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 954, and if the continuous operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is less than the predetermined time, the RAM clear processing is executed. Further, instead of the setting change switch 972, a setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 for less than a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) in the setting change mode, and instead of the setting confirmation switch 973, a RAM clear switch. The set value can be confirmed by operating (long-pressing) 954 for a predetermined time or longer. Further, the setting change mode may be terminated by long-pressing the RAM clear switch 954 after the setting is confirmed.

The setting indicator 974 is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, displays the setting value selected by operating the setting change switch 972, and displays the current setting value by a predetermined operation (for example, operating the setting key 971). .. The setting indicator 974 may be configured by LEDs having a settable value, instead of the 7-segment LED. In this case, the LED corresponding to the set value is turned on to display the set value.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the payout control board 951 is provided with an error type indicator by a 7-segment LED for displaying the type of payout error. The error type indicator and the setting indicator 974 are also used, The selected set value or the current set value may be displayed on the error type display. In this case, it is preferable to change the display mode so that the display of the error type and the display of the set value can be distinguished. For example, the dot may be turned off in displaying the error type, and the dot may be turned on in displaying the set value. Further, the display of the error type may be a lighting display (not blinking), and the display of the set value may be a blinking display.

In the illustrated example, the setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951, but may be connected to a power supply board (not shown) in the power supply board box 930. By providing the setting board 970 together with the power supply board (or inside the power supply board box 930), the setting key 971 and the power switch 932 which are operated when changing the settings are arranged in the vicinity, and the operability of the setting change is improved. Can be improved.

Further, as described later, the setting board 970 may be connected to the main control board 1310.

As yet another form, the setting board 970 may not be an independent board, but may be a part of the payout control board 951, the power supply board, or the main control board 1310. That is, the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, the setting confirmation switch 973, and the setting display 974 may be mounted on any of the payout control board 951, the power supply board, or the main control board 1310.

As shown in FIG. 130, the setting board 970 is attached to the right side surface of the lower portion of the main frame 4 (that is, not the game board 5 but the frame side) of the pachinko machine 1, and as shown in FIG. 131. When the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, at least a part of the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2. In the state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the interval between the setting board 970 and the right frame member 40 is narrow, and thus it is difficult to operate the keys and switches on the setting board 970 in this state. As described above, the right frame member 40 hides the setting key 971, prevents the key from being inserted into the key hole of the setting key 971, and makes it difficult to change the setting that makes it difficult to operate the setting board 970 (setting changing operation unit). Functions as a means. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, with the main body frame 4 accommodated in the outer frame 2, the setting key 971 as at least a part of the setting board 970 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval. However, the entire setting board 970 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval. In this case, the keys and switches may be arranged vertically so that the width of the setting board 970 does not exceed the width of the right frame member 40. As described above, when the entire setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval, the setting is performed while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation (that is, the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2). This makes it difficult to operate the board 970 and suppress an illegal act by the player changing the setting of the pachinko machine 1.

The member (setting changing obfuscation means) that faces the setting board 970 in the state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 is the right frame member 40 in the illustrated example, but may be another member. For example, the cover provided on the outer frame 2 may be arranged at a position facing the setting substrate 970 at a narrow interval when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2. Further, a cover that moves in association with opening and closing of the main body frame 4 is provided, and when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the cover may be arranged at a position facing the setting substrate 970 at a narrow interval. ..

The setting change-prohibiting means configured by a member provided so as to face the setting board 970 may be a cover that covers the setting board 970. In this case, it is preferable to cover the setting key 971 that triggers the setting change mode with a double cover. For example, an inner cover that covers the setting board 970 and an outer cover that covers various control boards including the setting board 970 are provided. Further, an inner cover that covers the keyhole of the setting key 971 and an outer cover that covers the setting board 970 may be provided. More specifically, the setting board 970 is housed in the setting board case, and the setting board case has a first cover for preventing an inadvertent operation of the setting key 971 and the switches 972 and 973 (at least the setting key 971). A body (for example, a door-like lid that can be opened during operation) is provided. Further, the outer frame 2 is provided with a second cover body that covers various control boards including the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310. The second cover body may be provided on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 to cover various control boards. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the setting change mode from being started by an inadvertent operation, and it is possible to suppress an illegal act by an unauthorized player changing the settings of the pachinko machine 1.

The distance that the setting board 970 faces a member such as the right frame member 40 in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 is determined by the head portion of the key inserted into the key hole of the setting key 971 (the key head to be gripped during operation). ) Is shorter than the length.

The setting board 970 may be arranged in the vicinity of the power switch 932 so that the setting key 971 and the power switch 932 which are operated when changing the settings are arranged in the vicinity. In this way, the operability when starting the setting change mode can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 131, a power switch 932 for energizing the pachinko machine 1 is provided in the power board box 930, and the main control RAM 1312 of the pachinko machine 1 is initially set in the payout control board unit 950. A RAM clear switch 954 for changing the configuration is provided. As described above, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a plurality of switches that are not operated during the game and can be operated from the back side, but the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 described above are operated from the back side. It is provided at a position where it can be viewed and operated. On the other hand, the setting key 971 (preferably also the setting change switch 972 and the setting confirmation switch 973) is provided at a position where it is difficult to visually recognize and operate from the back side while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. Since the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 are frequently operated in the manufacturing process, the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 are provided at positions that can be operated from the back side while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. On the other hand, the setting key 971 suppresses an illegal act of changing the setting of the pachinko machine 1 by operating the setting board 970 during a game by hiding the setting key 971 so that it is difficult to operate while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the switch on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is arranged so as to achieve both convenience and suppression of fraud.

Similarly, since the current set value of the pachinko machine 1 is important information for the selection of the player's table, it is desirable that the player does not know it. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 131, similarly to the setting key 971, the setting display 974 may face the right frame member 40 at a narrow interval so that the display cannot be seen. Normally, in the state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 and the setting key 971 is not operated, the setting display 974 is turned off so that the player cannot know the set value. Is desirable. As described above, the right frame member 40 functions as a visibility-improving means that hides the display content of the setting display 974 and makes it difficult to visually recognize the display content of the setting display 974 (setting status display unit).

FIG. 132(B) is a view of the setting board 970 viewed from above with the main body frame 4 housed in the outer frame 2. In this state, since the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 at a narrow interval, the head of the key 975 inserted into the key hole of the setting key 971 interferes with the right frame member 40, and the setting key 971 of the setting key 971. The key 975 cannot be inserted into the keyhole.

On the other hand, when the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the right frame member 40 is not located in front of the key hole of the setting key 971 and the key 975 can be inserted into the key hole of the setting key 971.

The display surface of the setting display 974 faces the side surface of the pachinko machine 1 and faces the right frame member 40 in the state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2. Therefore, from the front by the player. It is difficult to confirm the current set values for the pachinko machine.

FIG. 133 is a diagram showing a modification of the setting board 970.

Also in this modification, similarly to the above-described example, the setting board 970 is provided with the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, the setting confirmation switch 973, and the setting display 974. However, in this modified example, the setting key 971 is laterally arranged on the setting board 970, and the key 975 is inserted from the side of the setting board.

Therefore, the setting board 970 of this modification is installed not on the side surface side of the main body frame 4 but on the back surface side so that the keyhole faces the side surface. Then, as shown in FIG. 133(B), when the setting board 970 is viewed from above, the side surface (that is, the keyhole) of the setting board 970 is the right frame member 40 with the main body frame 4 accommodated in the outer frame 2. , The head of the key 975 inserted into the key hole of the setting key 971 interferes with the right frame member 40, and the key 975 cannot be inserted into the key hole of the setting key 971.

In the modification shown in FIG. 133, the board of the pachinko machine 1 can be arranged in the same direction as the other boards, and even if the difficulty of the board arrangement is reduced, the setting board 970 is operated during the operation of the pachinko machine 1, It is possible to suppress fraudulent acts that change the settings of the pachinko machine 1.

Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine having the setting unit will be described. In this modification, the setting board 970 is provided on the game board 5 instead of the main body frame 4 and is connected to the main control board 1310.

FIG. 134 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine of the present modified example, FIG. 135 is a perspective view of the game board having a setting unit as seen from the rear, and FIG. 136 is shown in FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine which mounted the game board shown from the back.

The setting board 970 is provided with a setting key 971, a setting change switch 972, a setting confirmation switch 973, and a setting display 974. The setting board 970 may be that shown in FIG. 132A or FIG. 133A.

In the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 134, the setting board 970 for setting the gaming performance of the pachinko machine is connected to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1311 acquires the operation state of each switch, and the main control MPU 1311. Controls the display on the setting display 974.

The function and configuration of the setting board 970 and each component on the setting board are the same as those in the above-described embodiments, and common description will be omitted.

The main control board 1310 is provided with a base display 1317 composed of 7-segment LEDs. Therefore, the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 may be used together to display the selected setting value or the current setting value on the base display 1317. On the base display 1317, normally, the base value of the provisional section (section currently being measured) and the base value of the final section (straight section) are switched and displayed at predetermined time intervals. On the other hand, in the setting change mode, the selected (next set) set value is displayed, and while the setting is being confirmed (see FIG. 152), the current set value is displayed.

In this case, the display mode may be changed so that the display of the base value and the display of the set value can be distinguished. For example, the base value may be displayed using 4 digits, but the set value may be displayed using only a predetermined 1 digit (for example, the rightmost digit) and “−” may be displayed. Digits that are not used for displaying the set value may be displayed with other numbers, characters, or symbols instead of "-" as long as they are not used for displaying the base value. When displaying the set value, characters that are not used in displaying the base value may be displayed. For example, the set value is displayed in 6 stages of alphabets A, b, C, d, E, and F.

Further, in the setting change mode, it is preferable that the setting value is blinked while the setting value is being selected, and the confirmed setting value is lit. Also, the current set value may be displayed in a lighted state. Also, in the base display, the upper two digits indicate the type of display data, and no number is displayed. Therefore, the setting value may be displayed using the most significant digit. When the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are used in common, the setting value is preferentially displayed during the setting change mode and the setting confirmation. Therefore, the base value is calculated, but the base value is displayed. Not done. After that, when the confirmation of the setting change mode and the set value is completed, the base display 1317 restarts the display of the base value.

When the base display 1317 is also used as the setting display 974, the process of outputting the display content to the setting display 974 is executed by the game control code 13131 in the game control area, and the display content is displayed on the base display 1317. The output process is executed by the base calculation/display code 13135 outside the game control area. However, a part of the base calculation/display code 13135 (for example, a process of outputting display data to the driver circuit) may be provided in the game control area. By making the processing common, the capacity of the program can be reduced and the memory can be saved.

On the other hand, the process of outputting the display content to the setting display unit 974 is executed by the game control code 13131 in the game control region, and the process of outputting the display content to the base display unit 1317 is for the base calculation/display outside the game control region. By executing the code 13135, the processing inside and outside the game control area can be completely separated, and the security can be improved.

Further, the process of changing the setting and confirming the setting may be executed outside the game control area.

That is, whether the setting display 974 is provided separately from the base display 1317 or is also used as the base display 1317, both cases are included in the scope of the invention described in this specification. As described above, by displaying the plurality of displays provided on the main control board box 1320 so as not to be confused while confirming the setting change mode and the setting value, it is possible to prevent an erroneous operation at the time of changing the setting and an erroneous recognition of the setting value.

Even when the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are not combined, the display of the base display 1317 may be turned off or all of them may be turned on while the setting display 974 is displaying the set value. Even in this case, when the confirmation of the setting change mode and the set value is completed, the base display 1317 restarts the display of the base value. By not displaying a plurality of displays on the main control board box 1320 while confirming the setting change mode and the set value, it is possible to prevent an erroneous operation at the time of changing the setting and an erroneous recognition of the set value.

In the illustrated example, the setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310, but the setting board 970 may not be an independent board but may be formed on a part of the main control board 1310. That is, the main control board 1310 may be equipped with the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, the setting confirmation switch 973, and the setting display 974.

The setting board 970 may be enclosed in the main control board box 1320 together with the main control board 1310. When the setting board 970 is enclosed in the main control board box 1320, the main control board box 1320 has holes or cutouts for operating the setting keys 971, the setting change switch 972, and the setting confirmation switch 973 on the setting board 970. Is provided.

When the setting board 970 is enclosed in the main control board box 1320, the structure of the main control board box 1320, that is, the opening/closing direction differs depending on the direction of the key hole of the setting key 971 on the setting board 970. Specifically, when the key 975 is inserted from the front side of the board vertically to the board, the main control board box 1320 is separated vertically to the setting board 970 by the front surface and the back surface of the setting board 970 or the front side box body ( Alternatively, it is preferable that the cover) and the back side box body have a structure in which one side can be opened and closed with a hinge. On the other hand, when the key 975 is inserted in the direction in which the board extends from the side, the main control board box 1320 includes the front side box body (or cover) of the setting board 970 and the back side box body in the extending direction of the setting board 970. It is preferable to have a structure in which it is slid in the (insertion direction of the key 975) to be separated.

In this modification, the operation signals of the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, and the setting confirmation switch 973 on the setting board 970 are fetched by the main control MPU 1311. Further, the setting display unit 974 is controlled by the main control MPU 1311.

As shown in FIG. 135, the setting board 970 is attached to the right side surface (left side in FIG. 135) of the game board 5 that constitutes the pachinko machine 1, and as shown in FIG. 136, the game board 5 is attached. When the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, at least a part of the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2. When the body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the distance between the setting board 970 and the right frame member 40 is small. Therefore, when the body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the keys on the setting board 970 and It is difficult to operate the switch. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, with the main body frame 4 accommodated in the outer frame 2, the setting key 971 as at least a part of the setting board 970 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval. However, the entire setting board 970 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval. In this case, the keys and switches may be arranged vertically so that the width of the setting board 970 does not exceed the width of the right frame member 40. As described above, when the entire setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval, the setting is performed while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation (that is, the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2). By operating the board 970, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts that change the settings of the pachinko machine 1.

The member (setting changing obfuscation means) that faces the setting board 970 in the state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 is the right frame member 40 in the illustrated example, but may be another member. For example, the cover provided on the outer frame 2 may be arranged at a position facing the setting substrate 970 at a narrow interval when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2. Further, a cover that moves in association with opening and closing of the main body frame 4 is provided, and when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the cover may be arranged at a position facing the setting substrate 970 at a narrow interval. ..

The distance that the setting board 970 faces a member such as the right frame member 40 in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 is determined by the head portion of the key inserted into the key hole of the setting key 971 (the key head to be gripped during operation). ) Is shorter than the length.

Further, as shown in FIG. 136, a power switch 932 for energizing the pachinko machine 1 is provided in the power board box 930, and the main control RAM 1312 of the pachinko machine 1 is initialized in the payout control board unit 950. A RAM clear switch 954 for changing the configuration is provided. As described above, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a plurality of switches that are not operated during the game and can be operated from the back side, but the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 described above are operated from the back side. It is provided at a position where it can be viewed and operated. On the other hand, the setting key 971 (preferably also the setting change switch 972 and the setting confirmation switch 973) is provided at a position where it is difficult to visually recognize and operate from the back side while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. Since the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 are frequently operated in the manufacturing process, the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 are provided at positions that can be operated from the back side while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. On the other hand, the setting key 971 suppresses an illegal act of changing the setting of the pachinko machine 1 by operating the setting board 970 during a game by hiding the setting key 971 so that it is difficult to operate while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the switch on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is arranged so as to achieve both convenience and suppression of fraud.

Similarly, since the current set value of the pachinko machine 1 is important information for the selection of the player's table, it is desirable that the player does not know it. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 136, similarly to the setting key 971, the setting display 974 may face the right frame member 40 at a narrow interval so that the display cannot be seen. Normally, in the state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 and the setting key 971 is not operated, the setting display 974 is turned off so that the player cannot know the set value. Is desirable. As described above, the right frame member 40 functions as a visibility-improving means that hides the display content of the setting display 974 and makes it difficult to visually recognize the display content of the setting display 974 (setting status display unit).

In the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 134, a view of the setting board 970 viewed from above with the main body frame 4 accommodated in the outer frame 2 is as shown in FIG. 132(B) and FIG. 133(B). .. In this state, since the setting board 970 and the keyhole of the setting key 971 face the right frame member 40 at a narrow interval, the head portion of the key 975 inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 and the right frame member 40 interfere with each other. However, the key 975 cannot be inserted into the key hole of the setting key 971.

The display surface of the setting display 974 faces the side surface of the pachinko machine 1 and faces the right frame member 40 in the state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2. Therefore, from the front by the player. The current settings of the pachinko machine cannot be confirmed.

Next, processing related to setting change will be described.

FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing an example of the initialization process. The initialization process shown in FIG. 137 is different from the initialization process described above with reference to FIG. 21 in that the RAM clear process is performed when the setting key is operated (steps S17 and S30) and the CPU initialization process (steps). The difference is that the setting change process is performed in S28). The same steps as those in the initialization process described above with reference to FIG. 21 are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 executes the main control program to perform initialization processing. The main control MPU 1311 first sets the protect of the RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 to write-enabled, and sets the RAM 1312 in a state in which writing is possible (step S10). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 activates the built-in watchdog timer (step S12), and determines whether a predetermined wait time (time required for activating the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.)) has elapsed. The determination is made (step S16). If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has been operated and its output is on (step S17). When the setting key 971 is operated, the data of the set value among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 and the game state (for example, the probability changing state, the time saving state, the reserved storage of the special symbol or the normal symbol, the prize ball) Information) and other data are erased (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24.

On the other hand, when the setting key 971 is not operated, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch is operated (step S18). When the RAM clear switch is operated, the data in the area other than the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 is erased (step S30), and step S24. Proceed to. On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is not operated, the data backed up in the internal RAM 1312 is not erased and it is determined whether the power failure flag is set (step S20).

As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so the data (other than the base calculation area 13128) backed up in the work area is erased (step S30). , And proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is set, the power failure flag is cleared, and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 using the checksum calculated at the previous power shutdown and the checksum calculated in step S48. The stored checksum is compared (verified) (step S22).

As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data does not match the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so the data backed up in the work area ( The areas other than the base calculation area 13128 are erased (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 match, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 is correct, so the data backed up in the work area is not erased, and the step S24 is performed. Proceed to.

Then, it is determined using the check code whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal (step S24). If it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may not be correct, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is erased (step S26).

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, as a case where at least a part of the RAM 1312 is initialized, the operation of the setting key 971 (step S17), the operation of the RAM clear switch (step S18), and the power failure flag are set. There are a power failure flag error that has not been performed (step S20), a RAM error in which the RAM checksums do not match (step S22), and an error in the base calculation work (step S24). Of these, as shown in the figure, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected when the power is turned on, the set value and the game state in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) (For example, probability change state, time saving state, reserved storage of special symbols and ordinary symbols, information regarding prize balls), data other than that is cleared, and base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is not cleared. .. If the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, and if the power failure flag is abnormal or the RAM is abnormal, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared to calculate the base. The area 13128 (including the base calculation work area and the base calculation stack area) is not cleared. Further, in the case of the base calculation work abnormality, the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is cleared, and the game control area 13126 is not cleared.

Note that, unlike the illustrated one, in the case of a power failure flag abnormality, a RAM abnormality, and a base calculation work abnormality, since the validity of the data stored in the RAM 1312 is not guaranteed, the game control area 13126 and the base calculation area 13128. The entire RAM area including may be cleared. If all RAM areas are cleared in the case of a work for base calculation, if the memory configuration is such that the data indicating the game state is lost and normal processing cannot be executed, the work area for base calculation and the stack area for base calculation Only initialize it. Further, when the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared and the base calculation area 13128 is set as described above. You don't have to clear it.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 is calculated for each data type (game control area 13126 (setting value, game state data), for base calculation). Area 13128) Erase under different conditions. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control area 13126 other than the set value is erased, and the set value and the base calculation area 13128 are not erased. This is because if the set value is erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch, it is necessary to reset the set value for each RAM clear operation, and maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 in the hall becomes complicated. Therefore, the setting value is not erased by operating the RAM clear switch.

For the processing after step S28, either of FIG. 22 and FIG. 102 may be adopted as necessary. The difference between FIG. 22 and FIG. 102 is the presence/absence of a process (steps S50 and S52) of calculating and storing a check code from the data of the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) when the power is shut off.

138 and 139 are flowcharts showing an example of the setting change processing and the setting display processing. In FIG. 138, the setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951 (or is configured integrally with the payout control board 951. 139) and FIG. 139 shows the processing when the setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310 (or is configured integrally with the main control board 1310).

First, a setting change process in which the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 138(A) cooperate with each other will be described.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, (1) the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting key 971 is operated on and whether the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. Whether the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 can be determined by a detection signal from the body frame opening switch. Considering the arrangement position of the setting key 971, since the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 in order to operate the setting key 971, the determination of the opening of the main body frame 4 may be omitted. ..

When the setting key 971 is operated to be on and the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the payout control unit 952 starts the setting change mode. In this way, the payout control unit 952 functions as a setting change permissible state generating means. As conditions for starting the setting change mode other than the above, the operation of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, the detection by the contact detection sensor 509 by touching the handle lever 504, the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit (prepaid card) It is not necessary to start the setting change mode when there is a balance on the card) or a balance inserted in the cash sand. Further, even when the pachinko machine 1 detects some possibility of fraudulent activity (for example, a magnetic error), it is better not to start the setting change mode. The determination of these conditions may be performed by the main control MPU 1311 instead of the payout control unit 952 after receiving the setting change start command. In such a case, it is presumed that the pachinko machine 1 is not maintained by the hall, and there is a possibility that an unauthorized player is performing a setting change operation. Therefore, it is better not to shift to the setting change mode. ..

(2) When the setting change mode starts, the payout controller 952 sends a setting change start command to the main control board 1310.

(3) Upon receiving the setting change start command from the payout control unit 952, the main control MPU 1311 executes the RAM clearing process before the setting change. The RAM clear process before changing the setting is a game control area 13126 (including a game work area and a game stack area), in which a game state (for example, a probability variation state, a time saving state, a special symbol or a normal symbol reserve storage) , Information about prize balls), data other than that is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is not cleared. The set value does not have to be cleared in this step because it is set to the initial value later in step (6).

(4) After that, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a setting change start command to the peripheral control unit 1511.

(5) Upon receiving the setting change start command from the main control MPU 1311, the peripheral control unit 1511 notifies that the setting change mode is in progress. The notification in the setting change mode is to perform an initial operation of the accessory or to perform a predetermined display on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. The peripheral control unit 1511 may not perform the initial operation of the accessory. For example, when displaying the procedure or state of setting change on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, if the initial operation of the accessory is performed during the setting change, the display of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 will be partially hidden. This is because it disturbs the change work.

The main control MPU 1311 may also notify the setting change mode in accordance with the notification of the setting change mode by the peripheral control unit 1511. For example, the display of the function display unit 1400 may be displayed in a special mode that does not appear during a normal game (for example, all LEDs for displaying special symbols are turned off or turned on) to stop the progress of the game. .. Further, the main control MPU 1311 may notify the setting change mode by stopping the detection of a winning ball or an out ball and stopping the progress of the game. As a result, the base value is not calculated in the setting change mode. In addition, the main control MPU 1311 stops the output of the firing permission signal, stops the firing of the game ball controlled by the firing control device, and functions as the firing disabling means to notify the setting change mode. Good. When stopping the firing of the game ball during the setting change mode, the firing of the game ball during the firing stop period may be regarded as an error, and the error may be detected when the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during the period. ..

(6) Next, the main control MPU 1311 resets the set value to 0. As described above, the set value can be selected from 1 to 6, the set value=0 is not set, and the set change mode cannot be ended at the set value=0, so that the game (game ball Shooting, fluctuation display game, etc.) does not start.

(7) After that, every time the player operates the setting change switch 972, the payout controller 952 displays the selected set value on the setting display 974.

(8) The payout controller 952 determines whether the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2. Although the opening of the main body frame 4 is also determined in the procedure (1) described above, it may be determined at least once before determining the operation of the setting confirmation switch 973. In this way, the payout control unit 952 functions as a setting change permissible state generation unit that determines whether the setting change condition is satisfied before the setting change is confirmed.

(9) Further, the payout control unit 952 determines whether or not the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated.

(10) When the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2 and the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated, the payout control unit 952 confirms the selected setting value and the setting value is confirmed. Is displayed on the setting display 974. The set value confirmation display may display a value (for example, 8) that cannot be selected as the set value, or the confirmed set value may be displayed by blinking for a predetermined time.

(11) After that, the payout control unit 952 determines whether or not the setting key 971 is turned off.

(12) If the setting key 971 is turned off, the setting change mode is ended, and therefore the payout control unit 952 sends a setting change end command to the main control board 1310. By this setting change end command, the confirmed set value is notified to the main control MPU 1311.

(13) Upon receiving the setting change end command from the payout control unit 952, the main control MPU 1311 transmits the setting change end command to the peripheral control unit 1511.

(14) Upon receiving the setting change end command from the main control MPU 1311, the peripheral control unit 1511 ends the notification of the setting change. At the same time, if the main control MPU 1311 notifies that the setting is being changed, this also ends.

Note that the notification (including the game stop and the firing stop) may be released immediately after the setting change mode ends, or may be released after a predetermined time has elapsed. If the notification performed in step (5) is considered to be a notification to the outside (players, hall employees), the notification may be canceled immediately after the setting change mode ends. However, if the notification given in step (5) is caught from the viewpoint of discovering the wrongdoing, the notification may be canceled after the setting change mode ends and a predetermined time has elapsed. This is because if the setting is changed, a predetermined display is displayed for a predetermined time or the game is stopped, so that it is easy to detect that an unauthorized player has changed the setting during business hours. is there.

When stopping the firing of the game ball in a predetermined period after the end of the setting change mode, the firing of the game ball during the firing stop period is regarded as an error, and the error is detected when the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during the period. You may.

(15) After that, the main control MPU 1311 executes the RAM clear processing after the setting change. RAM clear processing after this setting change, in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area), the setting value and the game state (for example, probability change state, time saving state, special symbol or normal symbol) Data of the reserved memory and information about prize balls) is cleared, other data is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is not cleared. That is, in the RAM clearing process after the setting change, unlike the RAM clearing process before the setting change, the set value is not initialized.

Then, the setting change mode ends.

In this way, the setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951 and functions as a child board of the payout control board 951 (or the setting board 970 is configured integrally with the payout control board 951). The main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 cooperate with each other to execute the setting change process.

In the process described above, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting key 971 is operated, but the main control MPU 1311 may determine. In this case, the signal related to the operation of the setting key 971 from the payout control unit 952 to the main control board 1310 is transmitted by serial communication, a predetermined pulse signal (a pulse having a predetermined frequency is transmitted a predetermined number of times), or a power supply voltage is transmitted. However, a signal of an intermediate potential other than the ground voltage may be output. In order to prevent an illegal act of short-circuiting the terminal of the setting key 971 and activating the setting change mode, a signal related to the operation of the setting key 971 is output from the main control unit 952 by a signal that cannot occur when the terminal is short-circuited. This is because it is preferable to transmit to the substrate 1310.

Next, a setting display process in which the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 138(B) cooperate with each other will be described.

When the setting key 971 is turned on while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation (energized), the payout controller 952 detects the operation of the setting key 971 and starts the setting display mode.

(1) In the setting display mode, the payout controller 952 determines whether the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2. Considering the arrangement position of the setting key 971, since the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 in order to operate the setting key 971, the determination of the opening of the main body frame 4 may be omitted. ..

(2) When it is determined that the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, the payout control unit 952 transmits a set value request command to the main control board 1310.

(3) Upon receiving the set value request command from the payout control unit 952, the main control MPU 1311 reads the set value stored in the main control RAM 1312 and sends the set value notification command to the payout control unit 952.

(4) The payout controller 952 displays the set value notified by the set value notification command from the main control MPU 1311 on the setting display 974.

In the above description, the set value stored in the main control board 1310 (main control RAM 1312) is displayed on the setting display 974, but the payout control unit 952 stores the set value and stores it in the payout control unit 952. The set value may be displayed on the setting display 974.

Next, the setting change process by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 139(A) will be described.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, (1) the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting key 971 is operated to be on and whether the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. In this way, the main control MPU 1311 functions as a setting change permissible state generating means. Whether the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 can be determined by a detection signal from the body frame opening switch. The detection signal of the main frame opening switch is transmitted to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. The payout control board 951 may send a main frame opening detection command to the main control board 1310 based on the received detection signal of the main frame opening detection switch. Further, the payout control board 951 may output the received detection signal of the main frame opening detection switch to the main control board 1310 as it is. Considering the arrangement position of the setting key 971, since the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 in order to operate the setting key 971, the determination of the opening of the main body frame 4 may be omitted. ..

If the setting key 971 is turned on and the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main control MPU 1311 starts the setting change mode. As conditions for starting the setting change mode other than the above, the operation of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, the detection by the contact detection sensor 509 by touching the handle lever 504, the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit (prepaid card) It is not necessary to start the setting change mode when there is a balance on the card) or a balance inserted in the cash sand. Further, even when the pachinko machine 1 detects some possibility of fraudulent activity (for example, a magnetic error), it is better not to start the setting change mode. In such a case, it is presumed that the pachinko machine 1 is not maintained by the hall, and there is a possibility that an unauthorized player is performing a setting change operation. Therefore, it is better not to shift to the setting change mode. ..

(3) When the setting change mode starts, the main control MPU 1311 receives the setting change start command from the payout controller 952 and executes the RAM clearing process before the setting change. The RAM clear process before changing the setting is a game control area 13126 (including a game work area and a game stack area), in which a game state (for example, a probability variation state, a time saving state, a special symbol or a normal symbol reserve storage) , Information about prize balls), data other than that is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is not cleared. The set value does not have to be cleared in this step because it is set to the initial value later in step (6).

(4) After that, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a setting change start command to the peripheral control unit 1511.

(5) Upon receiving the setting change start command from the main control MPU 1311, the peripheral control unit 1511 notifies that the setting change mode is in progress. The notification in the setting change mode is to perform an initial operation of the accessory or to perform a predetermined display on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. The peripheral control unit 1511 may not perform the initial operation of the accessory. For example, when displaying the procedure or state of setting change on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, if the initial operation of the accessory is performed during the setting change, the display of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 will be partially hidden. This is because it disturbs the change work.

The main control MPU 1311 may also notify the setting change mode in accordance with the notification of the setting change mode by the peripheral control unit 1511. For example, the display of the function display unit 1400 may be displayed in a special mode that does not appear during a normal game (for example, all LEDs for displaying special symbols are turned off or turned on) to stop the progress of the game. .. Further, the main control MPU 1311 may notify the setting change mode by stopping the detection of a winning ball or an out ball and stopping the progress of the game. As a result, the base value is not calculated in the setting change mode. In addition, the main control MPU 1311 stops the output of the firing permission signal, stops the firing of the game ball controlled by the firing control device, and functions as the firing disabling means to notify the setting change mode. Good. When stopping the firing of the game ball during the setting change mode, the firing of the game ball during the firing stop period may be regarded as an error, and the error may be detected when the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during the period. ..

(6) Next, the main control MPU 1311 resets the set value to 0. As described above, the set value can be selected from 1 to 6, the set value=0 is not set, and the set change mode cannot be ended at the set value=0, so that the game (game ball Shooting, fluctuation display game, etc.) does not start.

(7) After that, each time the player operates the setting change switch 972, the main control MPU 1311 displays the selected set value on the setting display 974.

(8) The main control MPU 1311 determines whether the body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2. Although the opening of the main body frame 4 is also determined in the procedure (1) described above, it may be determined at least once before determining the operation of the setting confirmation switch 973. As described above, the payout control unit 952 determines whether or not the setting change conditions are satisfied before the setting change is confirmed (in particular, whether the detection signal of the main frame opening switch is input from the payout control board 951). Functions as a permissible state generating means.

(9) Further, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated.

(10) The main control MPU 1311, when the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 and the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated, confirms the selected setting value and confirms that the setting value is confirmed. This is displayed on the setting display 974. The set value confirmation display may display a value (for example, 8) that cannot be selected as the set value, or the confirmed set value may be displayed by blinking for a predetermined time.

(11) After that, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the setting key 971 is turned off.

(13) If the setting key 971 is turned off, the setting change mode ends, so the main control MPU 1311 sends a setting change end command to the peripheral control unit 1511.

(14) Upon receiving the setting change end command from the main control MPU 1311, the peripheral control unit 1511 ends the notification of the setting change. At the same time, if the main control MPU 1311 notifies that the setting is being changed, this also ends.

Note that the notification (including the game stop and the firing stop) may be released immediately after the setting change mode ends, or may be released after a predetermined time has elapsed. If the notification performed in step (5) is considered to be a notification to the outside (players, hall employees), the notification may be canceled immediately after the setting change mode ends. However, if the notification given in step (5) is caught from the viewpoint of discovering the wrongdoing, the notification may be canceled after the setting change mode ends and a predetermined time has elapsed. This is because if the setting is changed, a predetermined display is displayed for a predetermined time or the game is stopped, so that it is easy to detect that an unauthorized player has changed the setting during business hours. is there.

When stopping the firing of the game ball in a predetermined period after the end of the setting change mode, the firing of the game ball during the firing stop period is regarded as an error, and the error is detected when the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during the period. You may.

(15) After that, the main control MPU 1311 executes the RAM clear processing after the setting change. RAM clear processing after this setting change, in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area), the setting value and the game state (for example, probability change state, time saving state, special symbol or normal symbol) Data of the reserved memory and information about prize balls) is cleared, other data is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is not cleared. That is, in the RAM clearing process after the setting change, unlike the RAM clearing process before the setting change, the set value is not initialized.

Then, the setting change mode ends.

In this way, the setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310 and functions as a child board of the main control board 1310 (or the setting board 970 is configured integrally with the main control board 1310). Since the main control board 1310 acquires the detection signal of the main frame opening switch from the payout control board 951, the setting change process cannot be executed only by the main control board 1310, and the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 cooperate with each other. Is executing the setting change process.

Next, a setting display process in which the setting board 970 and the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 139(B) cooperate with each other will be described.

When the setting key 971 is turned on while the pachinko machine 1 is operating (energized), the main control MPU 1311 detects the operation of the setting key 971 and starts the setting display mode.

In the setting display mode, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2. Considering the arrangement position of the setting key 971, since the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 in order to operate the setting key 971, the determination of the opening of the main body frame 4 may be omitted. ..

When it is determined that the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, the main control MPU 1311 reads the set value stored in the main control RAM 1312 and displays it on the setting display unit 974.

When the pachinko machine 1 detects an error in the setting change mode in the setting change processing described with reference to FIGS. 138(A) and 139(A), the setting change mode may be invalidated and the setting change mode may be temporarily stopped. Then, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and then turned on again to restart the stopped setting change mode. The setting change mode may be restarted from the stage at which the setting is stopped due to the error detection, or from the beginning of the setting change mode (the setting value=0 in the state where no setting value is selected).

The setting value may be changed by recording the history a predetermined number of times. Specifically, the date and time when the setting is fixed and the fixed setting value are stored in the main control RAM 1312 or the RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511. When storing the history of set values in the peripheral controller 1511, it is preferable to store the history in the RAM in the RTC provided in the peripheral controller 1511 because the stored contents are backed up even when the pachinko machine 1 is powered off. Further, the recorded change history of the set value can be output. For example, a history of changes in the recorded set values may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 by a predetermined operation.

If the set value is changed, the base value measurement section may be changed. That is, when the set value is changed, even if the total out-ball number of the section whose base value is currently being measured is less than 52000, the section is ended and the next section is started. Since the game performance of the gaming machine is changed by the set value, by changing the section by changing the set value, it is possible to calculate a base value that does not mix different game performances, and to grasp the transition of the base value due to the change of the set value. ..

Further, when the set value is changed, the section for measuring the base value may be continued without changing the section for measuring the base value. The set value changes the operating ratio of the conditional device, but it is also possible to design the base value so that it does not change significantly by changing the set value. In such a case, it is not necessary to change the base value calculation section by changing the set value.

If both the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the ON operation of the setting key 971 are detected when the power is turned on, the setting change mode may be activated. With regard to the RAM clear switch 954 and the ON operation of the setting key 971, it is less likely that the operation of the setting key 971 will be erroneously performed in view of the operation method and the arrangement of the operating means, so the setting change mode is activated. Is considered to be the operator's intention. Further, in the setting change mode, the stored contents of the main control RAM 1312 other than the game state and the base value are cleared, so even if the RAM clear is desired, it is considered sufficient to activate the setting change mode. ..

On the other hand, when both the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the ON operation of the setting key 971 are detected when the power is turned on, the RAM clear may be performed without starting the setting change mode. This is because it is considered that the operator at least wants to clear the RAM when both are operated. Further, when both the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the ON operation of the setting key 971 are detected when the power is turned on, the setting change mode may not be activated and the RAM may not be cleared. This is because, from the viewpoint of file safety against erroneous operations, it is preferable not to accept operations that the operator's intention is not clear.

In the RAM clear of the procedure (3) or (15) described above, the data of the game state is maintained, but the reserved storage of the special symbol may be erased. Where the setting value changes the operating ratio of the condition device, the determination result of the random number in the special symbol lottery may change. For this reason, it is preferable to erase the reserved storage of the special symbol and perform a new lottery.

On the other hand, the special symbol lottery (extracting the random number per hit) is performed when the game ball is won in the starting opening, but the determination of the lottery result is performed at the start of the variable display game, so the condition after changing the set value is used. It is only necessary to judge the random number value stored and stored. Therefore, you may maintain the reserved storage of special symbols.

Further, in the RAM clear of the procedure (3) or (15) described above, the main control RAM 1312 may be initialized in the same area as the area erased due to the operation of the RAM clear switch 954. That is, in the RAM clear process in the setting change mode, the backed up game control area 13126 other than the set value is erased (the game state data is also erased), and the set value and the base calculation area 13128 are not erased. Normally, setting changes are made between the time the hall is closed and the next day it is opened, so erase the game state data (probability change state, time saving state, reserved storage of special and normal symbols, information about prize balls, etc.) This is because there is no need to maintain it without doing so.

[12-2. Production on a pachinko machine with a setting function]
[12-2-1. Special symbols and special electric accessory control processing]
Hereinafter, details of the processing by the main control MPU 1311 will be described. First, the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing will be described. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing. The special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing is executed in the processing of step S86 in the main control side timer interrupt processing. Hereinafter, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are also collectively referred to as a starting port. Further, the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are collectively referred to simply as big winning openings. In addition, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are collectively referred to as a special symbol.

In the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing, acceptance of the game ball to the starting opening, that is, triggered by the start winning (start condition is satisfied), a big hit for each start memory information (start information) where this start condition is satisfied A random number for determination is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the random number for determination of big hits matches a big hit determination value stored in advance in the ROM with built-in control (lottery means). Then, based on the result of the lottery, it is determined whether or not the jackpot gaming state is generated, and if the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (the predetermined winning condition is met), it is normal. It shifts from the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state. Hereinafter, the procedure of the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 140.

When the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing is started, the main control MPU 1311 first determines whether or not the game ball B has won the special winning opening (step S100). When the game ball B wins the special winning opening (the result of step S100 is "yes"), the special winning opening winning designation command is set (step S102).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not a game ball has won in the starting opening (step S112). Then, whether or not the game ball has won the starting opening is determined by the presence or absence of the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002 or the second starting opening sensor 2511 in the switch input processing (step S74) in the main control side timer interrupt processing. It is performed based on the input information which is read and stored in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

When the game ball wins the starting opening (the result of step S114 is "yes"), the main control MPU 1311 executes the starting opening winning time process (step S116). In the starting mouth winning process, the starting mouth winning command transmitted when a new game ball is won at the starting mouth is set, or the random number for jackpot determination is extracted and stored in a predetermined area, or a special symbol. The process for executing the prefetching effect is executed.

Subsequently, the main control MPU1311 executes the corresponding process based on the special symbol/electric auditor product operation number, which is a game progress state variable in which the type of branch process executed according to the progress of the game is designated (step S124). The game progress state variable is stored in the game progress state storage area of the main control RAM and is updated in each branch process executed according to the progress of the game. In the process of step S124, the process proceeds to the branching process designated based on the value of the game progressing state variable stored in the game progressing state storage area, and when the transitioned branching process is finished, the special symbol and the special electric accessory control The process ends. The values of the game progress status variables stored in the game progress status storage area are game information, and thus are backed up in the power-off process at the main control side.

In the process of step S130, based on the value of the game progress state variable, as a branch process, a special symbol variation waiting process (step S130), a special symbol variation process (step S132), a special symbol big hit determination process (step S134), Special symbol disengagement stop process (step S136), special symbol jackpot stop process (step S138), interval process before opening big winning opening (step S140), big winning opening opening process (step S142), big winning opening closing process (step) S144) or the special winning opening opening end interval processing (step S146) is executed.

In the special symbol variation waiting process (step S130), based on the game ball B entering the starting opening, the process of starting the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display device is performed.

In the special symbol changing process (step S132), a process for controlling the variable display of the special symbol is performed. In the special symbol big hit determination process (step S134), based on the game ball entering the starting opening, it is determined whether or not the special symbol that has been fixedly stopped causes the big hit game state.

In the special symbol deviation stop process (step S136), when the big hit game state is not generated, the variable display of the special symbol is stopped, and a process of notifying that effect is performed. In the special symbol big hit stop process (step S138), when the big hit game state is generated, the variable display of the special symbol is stopped and a process of notifying that effect is performed.

In the special winning opening pre-opening interval process (step S140), a process for generating a big hit game state and notifying that the big hit operation is started is performed. In the special winning opening opening process (step S142), a process related to a big hit operation that makes it easy for a game ball to enter each special winning opening by opening the special winning opening is performed.

In the process for closing the special winning opening (step S144), a process related to a big hit operation that makes it difficult for a game ball to enter the special winning opening is performed by changing the opening of the special winning opening from the closed state. In the winning opening opening end interval process (step S146), when the big hit operation is finished, a process of notifying the fact is performed.

[12-2-2. Special symbol fluctuation waiting processing]
Subsequently, the details of the special symbol variation waiting process (step S130) in the special symbol and the special electric auditors product control process will be described. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of special symbol variation waiting processing. In the special symbol variation waiting process, the variation display of the special symbol is executed in a state where it is not executed, and when the variation display is suspended, preparation for starting the variation display of the special symbol is performed.

The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether or not the variation of the special symbol is suspended (step S420). Specifically, it is determined whether the number of special symbol operation holding balls is not 0. Note that the number of special symbol operation holding balls is stored for each starting opening when a plurality of starting openings are provided. When the variation of the special symbol is not held (the result of step S420 is “no”), the variation display of the special symbol is not started, and this process is ended.

On the other hand, when the variable display of the special symbol is suspended (result of step S420 is “yes”), the main control MPU 1311 sets a reserved ball number designating command as command data (step S438).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a special symbol/flag setting process (step S442). In the special symbol/flag setting process, a special lottery is executed based on a random number for jackpot determination acquired at the time of winning at the starting opening.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 executes a special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S444). In the special symbol variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern is set based on the result of the special lottery. Details of the special symbol variation pattern setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 126.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 creates a variation pattern command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Specifically, first, as the command value, the upper byte of the special figure variation pattern reference command corresponding to the special symbol identification flag is set (step S452). Further, the fluctuation pattern value stored in the fluctuation pattern area is set as the lower order command data (step S458). Further, by acquiring the fluctuation type classification value from the fluctuation type classification area (step S460) and adding the fluctuation type classification value to the command value set in the process of step S452, the upper byte of the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the fluctuation type Is calculated (step S462). The command data of the fluctuation pattern command thus created is stored in a predetermined area.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 sets a symbol type command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S466). Further, the variable state specification command is set in the command buffer (step S474).

Each command created by the above processing is set in the command buffer. The reserved ball number designating command set in the command buffer is transmitted by the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92) in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[12-2-3. Special symbol variation pattern setting process]
Next, details of the special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S444) in the special symbol variation waiting process will be described. The special symbol variation pattern setting process is a process for setting a variation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of special symbol variation pattern setting processing.

The main control MPU1311 first acquires the special symbol operation holding ball number (step S530). The special symbol operation reserved sphere number is stored in the special symbol operation reserved sphere number buffer. Further, the main control MPU 1311 sets a big hit flag from the big hit flag area (step S538).

Then, the main control MPU1311 executes a variation pattern selection determination process for selecting a variation pattern of the special symbol based on the special symbol operation holding ball number and the big hit flag (step S542). Details of the variation pattern selection determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 143.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the fluctuation pattern value extracted by the fluctuation pattern selection determination processing (step S544). Then, the special symbol variation time data is searched for data (variation time value) corresponding to the variation pattern value (step S546).

Further, the main control MPU 1311 executes a variation type determination process for selecting the variation type defined in the variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol (step S548). The fluctuation type classification value acquired by the fluctuation type determination processing is set (step S550).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 searches the variation time addition value data for a variation time addition value corresponding to the variation type type value (step S552). The variable time addition value is the addition time corresponding to the fluctuation type, and corresponds to, for example, the addition time according to the number of pseudo consecutive times. Then, the main control MPU 1311 adds the fluctuation time addition value searched in the process of step S552 to the reference fluctuation time value searched in the process of step S546 to obtain the final fluctuation time (step S554). .. Finally, the final variation time is stored in the special symbol/electric accessory operation timer area (step S556), and the special symbol variation pattern setting process ends.

[12-2-4. Variation pattern selection judgment processing]
Next, details of the variation pattern selection determination process (step S542) will be described. FIG. 143 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the variation pattern selection determination process. The variation pattern selection determination process is a process for selecting a variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol.

The main control MPU 1311 first acquires the fluctuation information source table based on the fluctuation table number (step S340). The fluctuation table number is a value for selecting (obtaining) the fluctuation information source table from the fluctuation information source address table. The fluctuation information source table, depending on the gaming state, etc. (hit fluctuation selection information status table), out (defect fluctuation selection information status table), reach (reach fluctuation selection information status table), reach probability (special symbol reach probability) Table) and variation type (variation type determination data table) are table data for storing table information.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a hit determination value for deriving the result of the special lottery (step S346). It is determined whether or not the big hit is won by determining whether or not the hit determination value matches the big hit value (step S350). When the big hit is won (the result of step S350 is "yes"), the big hit flag and the big hit symbol type are acquired (step S354).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a variable information number search process based on the big hit flag and the big hit symbol type (step S358). In the variation information number search process, the variation information number for determining the hitting variation pattern selection value data table is acquired from the jackpot variation selection information type table. The main control MPU 1311 acquires the variation pattern random number 1 from the big hit variation selection information type table based on the obtained variation information number (step S360).

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1311 has not won the big hit or the small hit (the result of step S350 is “no”), it is determined whether or not the reach is generated in the variable display corresponding to the start winning (step). S372).

When the reach is not generated in the fluctuation display (result of step S372 is “no”), the main control MPU 1311 acquires the fluctuation pattern random number 1 from the deviation fluctuation selection information reservation table based on the number of reserved balls (step). S376).

On the other hand, when the reach is generated in the variation display (result of step S372 is “yes”), the main control MPU 1311 acquires the variation pattern random number 1 from the reach variation selection information state table based on the state flag. (Step S382).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the variation information number search process based on the variation pattern random number 1 acquired in the process of step S360, step S378, or step S382 (step S388). Then, the fluctuation pattern selection value data table is acquired by the fluctuation information number search process, and the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is acquired from the fluctuation pattern selection value data table (step S392). Further, the variation information number search process is executed based on the variation pattern random number 2 and the variation pattern selection value data table (step S394). A variation pattern is selected based on the result of the variation information number search process (step S396), and this process ends.

In this embodiment, the variation pattern is selected in two stages by two types of random numbers, the variation pattern random number 1 (steps S360, S372, S378) and the variation pattern random number 2 (step S392). First, the type of fluctuation pattern (a fluctuation pattern group such as XX system reach) is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number 1. Furthermore, from the variation pattern group selected by the variation pattern random number 1 based on the variation pattern random number 2, the variation pattern (value set in the variation pattern command) to be finally displayed in a variable manner is selected. The method of lottery is not limited to two stages, and a method of lottery in three or more stages may be used, or a variation pattern may be directly selected by one variation pattern random number.

[12-3. Explanation of production in pachinko machine with setting function]
Hereinafter, the effect in the pachinko machine 1 having the setting function will be described. Specifically, a setting suggesting effect that suggests the current setting will be described. In the pachinko machine 1 having the setting function, for example, the higher the setting, the larger the number of payouts of game balls with respect to the number of special lottery. Specifically, for example, the higher the setting, the higher the jackpot winning probability in the uncertain variation state (for example, setting 1:1/300, setting 2:1/290, setting 3:1/280, setting 4:1/270. , Setting 5: 1/250, setting 6: 1/230, etc.). Therefore, since the player wants to play a game with the pachinko machine 1 set as high as possible, the desire to play the game is enhanced by the setting suggestion effect being installed.

Hereinafter, in this chapter, for convenience of description, the main control MPU 1311 is assumed to directly select a variation pattern with one variation pattern random number in the variation pattern selection determination processing of step S542. Specifically, in this chapter, the main control MPU 1311 executes the following processing in step S542.

In step S542, the main control MPU 1311, the current game state (whether in the time saving state (state in which the time saving control is being executed) or in the normal state other than the time saving state), and the result of the special lottery (winning the big hit) Yes or No) and a fluctuation pattern table according to the above. When the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the main control MPU 1311 obtains a variation pattern random number, and based on the obtained variation pattern random number and distribution of each variation pattern in the selected variation pattern table, A fluctuation pattern is selected from the selected fluctuation pattern table. Further, if the result of the special lottery is out, further determine the reach occurrence, to obtain the random number for the variation pattern, the random number for the obtained variation pattern, and the distribution of each variation pattern in the selected variation pattern table, Based on the above, the fluctuation pattern is selected from the selected fluctuation pattern table.

FIG. 144(A) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the game state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is out. FIG. 144(B) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the game state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is a big hit.

The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the ROM 1313 of the main control board 1310, for example. The variation pattern table includes, for example, a variation pattern type column, a variation time column, a corresponding effect content column, and a variation pattern determination random number distribution column. The fluctuation pattern type column stores information for specifying the type for identifying the fluctuation pattern in the table. The fluctuation time column stores information that specifies the fluctuation time in the corresponding fluctuation pattern type. The corresponding effect content column stores information that specifies the effect content executed in the corresponding variation pattern.

The distribution random number column for fluctuation pattern determination stores the distribution for which the corresponding fluctuation pattern is selected for each setting. In addition, the variation random number column for variation pattern determination of the variation pattern table (that is, the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A) and FIG. 149(A) described later) selected when the special lottery result is out of alignment is used when the reach occurs. For each of the above and when the reach is not generated, the distribution for which the corresponding fluctuation pattern is selected is stored for each setting.

[12-4. Setting suggestion production executed after temporary display of special lottery results]
First, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern stored in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A) will be described. First, the effect executed in the deviation variation patterns 24 to 29 will be described with reference to FIG. 144 as well.

FIG. 144 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect executed in the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24-29 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A). In the variation of the deviation variation pattern 20, after a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be missed after the SP reach 1 is executed is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the special lottery result is subsequently removed. The confirmation display indicating that is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. On the other hand, in the variation of the deviation variation patterns 25 to 29, after the temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be out after the SP reach 1 is executed is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, The setting suggestion effect is executed, and thereafter, a confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is out is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

As described above, in the variation patterns 25 to 29, even if the temporary display is performed by performing the setting suggestion effect after performing the temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be out of order. The player can expect the subsequent occurrence of the setting suggestion effect and maintain the sense of expectation. Further, when the setting suggestion effect is generated due to the deviation, even if the special lottery result is missed, it is possible to suppress the player's discouragement due to the result of the special lottery, and to enhance the uplifting feeling.

In the variation of the deviation variation pattern 24, a temporary indication indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be missed after the SP reach 1 is executed is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and then the setting suggestion effect is displayed. Although the gasse effect that suggests execution is executed, the final display indicating that the special lottery result is out is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 without performing the setting suggestion effect itself.

The SP reach is a reach effect in which a high proportion is selected when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, and a low proportion is selected when the result of the special lottery is out. In other words, there is a high expectation of a big hit for fluctuations in the SP reach.

The effects that are executed in the deviation pattern 20 and 24-29 will be specifically described below. In addition to the contents described below, sound output from various speakers, light emission from various lamps, operation of various movable bodies, and/or display on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the like are simultaneously executed in each effect. May be.

In the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24-29, the pre-reach effect is first executed. In the pre-reach effect, all the decorative patterns in the main liquid crystal display device 1600 change. Subsequently, in the out-of-range variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29, the normal reach effect is developed. In the normal reach effect, the decorative pattern in the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is in the reach state. Specifically, for example, among the three decorative symbols (for example, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol), the left symbol and the right symbol stop at the same symbol, and the middle symbol is in a changing state.

Subsequently, in the outlier variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29, the SP reach 1 is developed, and the first half effect of the SP reach 1 is executed. In SP reach 1, for example, one main character and one enemy character are displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and a rock-paper-scissors game is played. In the first half effect of the SP reach 1 in the deviation pattern 20 and 24-29, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 executes an effect in which the main character loses to the enemy character in a rock-paper-scissors game. It should be noted that during SP reach, the decorative pattern may be displayed in a position smaller than the pre-reach effect and the normal reach effect, and close to the periphery of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, for example.

Then, in the deviation pattern 20 and 24-29, it develops to the latter half production of SP reach 1. In the second half effect of the SP reach 1 in the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29, for example, a so-called revival effect is executed, and at the start of the second half effect, for example, the voice of the main character such as "Still still!" On the liquid crystal display device 1600, an effect in which the main character and the enemy character play a rock-paper-scissors game again is executed. In the second half effect of the SP reach 1 in the deviation pattern 24 to 29, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 executes an effect in which the main character loses to the enemy character again in a rock-paper-scissors game.

Then, provisional display in which the special lottery result is out is performed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Specifically, for example, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, one combination of the decorative symbols in the detached state (for example, the left symbol and the right symbol of the decorative symbol are the same as the symbol stopped in the reach state, and the middle symbol is (A different pattern from the same symbol) is displayed in a manner that it is shaking with a small width.

Subsequently, in the deviation pattern 20, after the temporary display, a finalized display indicating that the special lottery result is out is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 without any other effect. In the deviation variation pattern 24, the setting suggestion gasse effect is executed after the temporary display, and then a confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is out is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. On the other hand, in the deviation pattern 25 to 29, the setting suggestion effect is executed after the temporary display, and then the final liquid crystal display device 1600 displays a confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is out. In the final display, for example, on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the same combination of decorative symbols displayed in the temporary display is displayed in a completely stopped state. In the provisional display and the confirmation display, the decorative pattern is displayed, for example, in the central portion of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in the same size as in the pre-reach effect and the normal reach effect.

In the setting suggestion gasse effect in the deviation pattern 24, for example, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, an effect in which one main character discovers two enemy characters and follows the enemy character but cannot catch the enemy character is executed. Like the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 24 in FIG. 144(A), it is desirable that the distribution of variation patterns in which the setting suggestive gaze effect is executed is equal or approximately equal in all settings. This is because if the distribution is not uniform, the setting suggestion gasse effect suggests the setting.

In addition, it is desirable that the proportion of the out-of-order variation pattern 24 in the total variation distribution executed by the SP reach 1 is low (for example, 20% or less). This is because if the distribution is high, the setting suggestion gase effect frequently occurs when the SP reach 1 is developed, which may reduce the player's expectation for the occurrence of the setting suggestion effect.

In the setting suggestion effect in the deviation pattern 25 to 29, for example, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, one protagonist character discovers two enemy characters, chases and catches the enemy characters, and then three people play a rock-paper-scissors game. The effect is performed.

In the setting suggestion effect in the deviation pattern 25, the effect in which all three go out and become Aiko is executed in the rock-paper-scissors game with three people. Further, in FIG. 144(A), the deviation variation pattern 25 is set so as to be distributed only in the low setting (settings 1, 2, and 3). That is, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation pattern 25 is an effect in which the low setting is confirmed.

In the example of FIG. 144(A), the distribution of the deviation pattern 25 has the same value as the distribution of the deviation pattern 26 and the like in the high setting (settings 4, 5, and 6), but the low setting confirmation effect is When it occurs, the player may stop the game early. Therefore, the allocation of the deviation variation pattern 25 may be set lower than the allocation of other setting confirmation effects in other settings, or the deviation variation pattern. 25 itself may not be present.

In the setting suggestion effect in the deviation pattern 26, an effect in which all three of the scissors throw out and become Aiko is executed. Further, in FIG. 144(A), the deviation variation pattern 26 is set so as to be distributed only in the high setting (settings 4, 5, and 6). That is, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation pattern 26 is an effect in which the high setting is determined.

In the setting suggestion effect in the deviation pattern 27, an effect in which all three play a par and become Aiko in a rock-paper-scissors game with three people is executed. Further, in FIG. 144(A), the deviation variation pattern 27 is determined so as to be distributed only in the even setting (settings 2, 4, and 6). That is, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation pattern 27 is an effect in which the even number setting is confirmed.

In the setting suggestion effect in the deviation pattern 28, the effect that all three people put out different hands in a rock-paper-scissors game with three people is executed. Further, in FIG. 144(A), the deviation variation pattern 28 is set so as to be distributed only in odd-numbered settings (settings 1, 3, and 5). That is, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation pattern 28 is an effect in which the odd number setting is fixed.

In addition, for example, when the odd number setting and the even number setting have different characteristics, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the effect by installing the odd number setting finalizing effect or the even number setting finalizing effect as described above. ..

Specifically, for example, the jackpot winning probability in the normal state is high (6 is the highest and 1 is the lowest) in the order of settings 6, 4, 2, 5, 3, 1 and settings 5, 3, 1, 6, 4, The ratio of the probability variation big hits of the big hits in the order of 2 is high (5 is the highest and 2 is the lowest), and the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 are set in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. It is assumed that the jackpot winning probability and the probability variation ratio in each setting are set so that the ratio of the total payout amount of game balls to the winning number of the game balls to is high (6 is the highest and 1 is the lowest).

In this case, the even-numbered setting has a higher probability of jackpot winning in the normal state than the odd-numbered setting, but the probability of probability change is low, that is, the number of game balls required to win the so-called initial winning tends to be small, The total amount of game balls that can be obtained in a single condominium from the first hit tends to be small. On the other hand, the odd number setting has a higher probability of winning the jackpot in the normal state than the even setting, but the probability of probability of change is high, that is, the number of game balls required to win the first hit tends to increase, but the first hit It is easy for the total amount of game balls to be obtained in a single condominium from to increase. In such a case, one player may prefer the odd-set payout tendency, and another player may prefer the odd-set payout tendency. The player's interest in the production increases. Further, the even number setting may have a feature such that a big hit with a small number of rounds is more likely to be selected, instead of a higher jackpot winning probability in the normal state, as compared with the odd number setting.

In the deviation patterns 25 to 29 described above, the effects up to the start of the setting suggestion effect are the same, but the contents of the setting suggestion effect are different (the results of the rock-paper-scissors game with three players are different). In addition, it is desirable that the three-player rock-paper-scissors game production be used only in the deviation pattern 25 to 29. As a result, the player can recognize that the setting suggestion effect has started at the time when the three-player rock-paper-scissor game effect has started, and the uplifting feeling is further enhanced.

It should be noted that, for example, the deviation pattern 25 is a variation pattern in which an effect for confirming the high setting is executed, but may be a variation pattern in which an effect suggesting that the high setting is likely to be executed is executed. Specifically, for example, if the variation pattern 25 is distributed even in the low setting and the distribution is lower than the distribution of the variation pattern 25 in the high setting (for example, 50% or less), the effect in the deviation pattern 25 is produced. Is not an effect in which a high setting is determined, but an effect that suggests that there is a high possibility of a high setting.

In addition to the variation pattern in which the effect in which the high setting is confirmed is executed, a variation pattern in which the effect suggesting that the possibility of the high setting is high as described above is executed may be set. The above is the same for the low setting final effect, the odd setting final effect, the even setting final effect, the highest setting final effect, and the like.

In addition, according to the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(B) (variation pattern table at the time of normal and jackpot winning), when the special lottery result is a jackpot in the normal state, other than the hit variation pattern 34 in which the maximum setting is confirmed. The setting suggestion effect of is not executed. Further, the distribution of the variation patterns in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed is higher than that in the case where the special lottery result is out of alignment. Thereby, the setting suggestion effect is an effect mainly executed when the special lottery result is out of alignment, and the player can obtain an expectation even when the special lottery result is out of alignment.

[12-5. Setting suggestion production using shortened variation]
The deviation pattern 30 will be described below with reference to FIG. 146 as well. FIG. 146 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect executed in the deviation variation patterns 1, 2, and 30 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A).

In the deviation variation patterns 1, 2, and 30, the shortening variation is executed. The shortened variation is, for example, a variation in which the variation time is shorter than other variation patterns, and after the variation of the decorative pattern is started on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, all the decorations are not developed into the reach state. It is a fluctuation that the design stops. In the normal variation, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the decorative design is stopped in the order of, for example, the left design, the right design, and the middle design, but in the shortened variation, all the decorative designs may be stopped at the same time.

Subsequently, in the deviation variation patterns 1, 2, and 30, after performing a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be missed, a confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is missed is performed. The description of the temporary display and the confirmation display is the same as the above description, and therefore will be omitted.

The deviation variation pattern 30 has a variation time that is different from the variation times of all the other variation patterns in which the shortened variation such as the deviation variation patterns 1 and 2 is executed. In the example of FIG. 144(A), the fluctuation time of the deviation pattern 1 is 2 seconds, the fluctuation time of the deviation pattern 2 is 5 seconds, and the fluctuation time of the deviation pattern 30 is 3.5 seconds. .. Further, in FIG. 144(A), the deviation variation pattern 30 is set so as to be distributed only in the highest setting (setting 6). That is, when the deviation pattern 30 is executed, the highest setting is confirmed.

The distribution of the out-of-range fluctuation pattern 30, which is a fluctuation pattern in which the shortened fluctuation is executed and suggests the setting, is extremely low as compared with the distribution of other fluctuation patterns in which the shortened fluctuation is executed (for example, the other fluctuation pattern). Is less than or equal to 10% of the minimum distribution of). Further, in each fluctuation pattern in which the shortened fluctuation is executed, it is desirable that the execution time of the temporary display and the fixed display are the same and only the time of the shortened fluctuation is different. Further, it is desirable that the difference between the variation time of the deviation variation pattern 30 and the variation time of the variation pattern in which another shortened variation is executed is recognizable by the player (for example, 1.5 seconds or more). ..

As a result, at the time when the shortened fluctuation is executed, the player assumes a fluctuation time such as the deviation fluctuation patterns 1 and 2 that are often distributed, but when the deviation fluctuation pattern 30 is executed, the predicted fluctuation time is You can recognize the difference and enjoy the performance in which the highest setting is finalized. In particular, in the example of FIG. 144(A), the variation pattern including the shortening variation is selected only when there is no reach, and thus the player loses his/her expectation when the shortening variation is executed and is interested in the shortening variation. I can't have it anymore. However, by executing the setting suggestion effect using the shortening variation in this way, the player can have a sense of expectation for the shortening variation that is selected only when there is no reach, and suppresses the decline in interest. can do.

Further, in the deviation variation patterns 1, 2, and 30, the contents displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 are the same, but only the shortening variation time is different. This allows the player to concentrate on the effect so as not to miss the highest setting confirmation effect.

The deviation variation pattern 30 is a variation pattern in which the maximum setting is determined and the shortened variation is executed. However, with respect to each setting other than the maximum setting, the variation in which the setting is determined and the shortened variation is executed There may be patterns. In this case, for example, the variation time of each variation pattern is preferably different from the variation time of the other deviation variation pattern in which the shortened variation is executed.

[12-6. Setting suggestion production executed before temporary display of special lottery results]
Hereinafter, the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 147 is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect executed in the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A). In FIG. 144, the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 are determined so that they are distributed only in the highest setting (setting 6). That is, when the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 are executed, the highest setting is determined.

In the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34, for example, the special movie 1 flows in the main liquid crystal display device 1600 at the same time when the variation starts. The special movie 1 is an effect that occurs only in the deviation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34, that is, an effect in which the highest setting is determined.

In the deviation variation pattern 31, after the end of the special movie 1, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be out is displayed, and then a confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is out is displayed. In the winning variation pattern 34, after the special movie 1 is finished, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is a win is performed, and then a confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is a win is performed.

The deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 are different from the deviation variation patterns 25 to 30, and the setting suggestion effect is started before the temporary display (specifically, for example, at the same time as the variation starts). As a result, the player can obtain an uplifting feeling waiting for the notification of the jackpot lottery result in the state where the maximum setting is confirmed. In addition, particularly when the display time of the special movie 1 is long (for example, 30 seconds or more), it is possible to appeal to other players that the setting of the pachinko machine 1 is the highest setting, and thus the player. Can feel a sense of superiority to the other player, and it becomes easier for the hall to appeal to the other player that the highest setting is used.

[12-7. Setting suggestion production that jackpot winning or high setting is confirmed]
Hereinafter, the deviation variation pattern 32 and the hit variation pattern 35 will be described with reference to FIG. 148. FIG. 148 is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect executed in the deviation variation pattern 32 and the hit variation pattern 35 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A). In FIG. 144(A), the deviation variation pattern 32 is set to be distributed only in the high setting (settings 4, 5, and 6). That is, when the deviation pattern 32 is executed, the highest setting is confirmed.

In the deviation variation pattern 32 and the hit variation pattern 35, for example, the special movie 2 flows in the main liquid crystal display device 1600 at the same time when the variation starts. The special movie 2 is an effect that is generated only by the deviation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34.

In the deviation pattern 32, after the end of the special movie 2, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be missed is displayed, and then a confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is missed is performed. In the winning variation pattern 35, after the special movie 2 is finished, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is a win is performed, and then a confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is a win is performed.

Therefore, when the special movie 2 occurs, one of the high setting and the big hit in the fluctuation is determined. In other words, if the special lottery result is missed after the occurrence of the special movie 2, the high setting is confirmed, so that the player can suppress the disappointment that the special lottery result is missed, and by extension, the high setting. It is possible to obtain an uplifting feeling by fixing.

Further, particularly when the display time of the special movie 2 is long (for example, 30 seconds or more), the player can feel superiority to other players, and the special movie 2 is further generated. If the result of the special lottery is wrong, the hole is likely to appeal to other players that they are using the high setting.

[12-8. Setting suggestion production in time saving state]
The variation pattern selected when the gaming state is in the shortened state will be described below. FIG. 149(A) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the game state is a time saving state and the result of the special lottery is out. FIG. 149(B) is an example of the variation pattern table selected when the gaming state is a time saving state and the result of the special lottery is a big hit.

In the example of FIG. 149(A), the higher the setting, the larger the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 3 and the smaller the allocation of the deviation variation pattern 2 at the time of deviation without reach. Further, the fluctuation time of the deviation pattern 2 is shorter than the fluctuation time of the deviation pattern 3. For example, if the higher the setting, the higher the jackpot winning probability, assuming that the variation patterns are the same in all settings, the higher the setting, the easier it is to win the jackpot in a shorter time, The number of payouts of game balls may increase, which may lead to a burden on the hall.

However, as in the example of FIG. 149(A), the higher the setting, the more the variation patterns having a long variation time are distributed, so that the number of payouts of the game balls by the big hit per unit time in each setting can be made uniform. it can. In addition, the higher the setting, the higher the selection rate of the out-of-bounds variation pattern 3, which has a long variation time, among the variation patterns including shortened variations. Therefore, the out-of-bounds variation pattern 3 also functions as a variation pattern suggesting a high setting. You can

Similarly, even when the reach-out occurs, the higher the setting, the larger the distribution of the out-of-range variation pattern 11 having the long variation time and the smaller the distribution of the out-of-range variation pattern 12 having the short variation time. Further, also at the time of winning the big hit, similarly, the higher the setting is, the larger the distribution of the hit variation pattern 2 having a long fluctuation time and the smaller the distribution of the hit fluctuation pattern 3 having a short fluctuation time.

As described above, for example, if the higher the setting, the higher the jackpot winning probability, assuming that the variation patterns are the same in all settings, the higher the setting, the easier it is to win the jackpot. In other words, the lower the setting, the longer it takes to win the big hit, and the more game balls are shot before the big hit is won. For example, the lower the setting, the greater the distribution of the fluctuation patterns with long fluctuation times, and the smaller the selection rate of the fluctuation patterns with shorter fluctuation times, the smaller the player's ability to stop the game ball from firing during fluctuation. It is possible to equalize the number of game balls fired per unit time in the setting.

It should be noted that a predetermined sound effect may be output or a predetermined light emission effect may be executed at the timing at which the setting is suggested in the various setting suggestion effects described in this chapter. Note that the predetermined sound effect and the predetermined light emission effect may be dedicated to be executed only during the setting suggestion effect. Further, particularly in the setting suggesting effect in which the high setting or the highest setting is determined, it is preferable to execute the output of a predetermined effect sound or the predetermined light emitting effect that is executed only by the setting suggesting effect.

In addition, it is desirable that the distribution of the variation pattern in which the high setting or the maximum setting is fixed or the effect suggesting that the possibility is high is executed is extremely low as compared with the distribution of the other variation patterns. If the variation pattern is highly distributed, the player loses his/her expectation unless the high setting suggestion effect or the highest setting suggestion effect is executed, even though the player is playing for only a short game time, and as a result, the game is played early. This is because there is a risk of canceling.

Moreover, it is desirable that the distribution of the variation pattern in which the low setting or the minimum setting is fixed or the effect suggesting that the setting is high is executed is extremely low as compared with the distribution of the other variation patterns. This is because if the distribution of the variation patterns is high, the low setting suggesting effect and the minimum setting suggesting effect are frequently executed, and the player may lose his/her expectation and eventually stop the game early.

Further, although the setting suggestion effect suggesting the setting group such as the high setting, the low setting, the highest setting, the odd number setting, and the even setting has been described, the setting group in the setting suggesting effect is not limited to these. The setting suggestion effect may be executed for an arbitrary group of one or more settings. For example, the settings 1 and 2 may be set as low setting, the settings 3 and 4 may be set as intermediate setting, and the settings 5 and 6 may be set as high setting, or there may be a group including only the setting 5.

[12-9. Other forms of pachinko machines with setting functions]
FIG. 150 is a diagram showing a mounting example of the main control board 1310. In this figure, the configuration of the main control board box 1320 is shown by a solid line, and the configuration inside the main control board box 1320 is shown by a dotted line.

In the above description, the setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951, and the payout control unit 952 obtains the operation state of each switch and controls the display of the setting display 974, but in the following description, The setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1311 acquires the operation state of each switch and controls the display of the setting display 974.

FIG. 150A shows a main control board box 1320 of this mounting example. The main control board box 1320 is made of a transparent resin that accommodates the main control board 1310 in a sealable manner such that it cannot be opened without being destroyed once it is closed. The main control board box 1320 is provided with a hole 1318A for operating the display switch 1318, a hole 954A for operating the RAM clear switch 954, and a hole 971A for operating the setting key 971.

FIG. 150B shows a state where the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970 are housed in the main control board box 1320 shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 150(B), on the main control board 1310, a base display 1317, a display switch 1318 and a RAM clear switch 954 are mounted in addition to the main control MPU 1311 and a driver circuit (not shown). The RAM clear switch 954 may not be mounted on the main control board 1310, but may be mounted on another control board (for example, a payout control board 951 or a power supply board). In this case, the main control board box 1320 is not provided with the hole 954A.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, two operation units (RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971) that trigger RAM clearing are provided in the main control board box 1320. As will be described later, the storage area of the main control RAM 1312 in which the data is erased differs when the RAM clear switch 954 alone is operated and when the setting key 971 is operated.

The setting board 970 is provided in the vicinity of the main control board 1310, and the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 are electrically connected so that signals can be transmitted. The setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 may be connected to each other directly by a connector or by an electric wire. On the setting board 970, a setting key 971 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, and a setting display 974 for displaying a set or selected set value are mounted. A setting change switch 972 for changing the set value and a setting confirmation switch 973 for confirming and inputting the changed setting value may be mounted on the setting board 970.

The outputs of various switches 971, 972, 973 provided on the setting board 970 are sent to the main control board 1310 and input to the ports of the main control MPU 1311.

Further, the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970 may perform serial communication, and the driver circuit of the setting display 974 may be mounted on the setting board 970.

Since the main control board box 1320 is arranged on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the setting indicator 974 on the setting board 970 is mounted at a position visible from the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

The main control board 1310 may authenticate the setting board 970 in the initialization process (FIGS. 21 and 22). For example, an authentication code for each manufacturer of the pachinko machine is set on the setting board 970, and the main control board 1310 reads the authentication code set on the setting board 970 and collates it. If the setting board 970 cannot be authenticated, the pachinko machine 1 cannot start a game. That is, although the game ball can be shot toward the game area 5a, the prize ball is not paid out even if the prize is won and the variable display game is not executed. The authentication code may be set for each pachinko machine model, or may be set for each pachinko machine serial number. The authentication code can be set by, for example, setting the authentication code by a DIP switch, a jumper wire, a jumper pin, a pattern short-circuit provided on the setting board 970 or a logic circuit (for example, a logic circuit in which the authentication code is set). A small capacity FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array) may be mounted on the setting board 970.

The main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311) may be able to identify whether the board mounted in the main control board box 1320 is the setting board 970 or the dummy board 979. For example, the setting control board 970 and the dummy board 979 output different signals to the main control board 1310 so that the main control MPU 1311 recognizes whether the connected board is the setting board 970 or the dummy board 979. To do. Specifically, the setting substrate 970 outputs +5V, and the dummy substrate 979 outputs 0V (ground level). The signals from the setting board 970 and the dummy board 979 are input to a specific port of the interface circuit 1331 circuit of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1311 determines the connected board based on the input signal to the port.

In this way, by changing the code of the setting board 970 for each manufacturer (each model), it is possible to prevent the setting board 970 from being erroneously mounted on the main control board box 1320. Further, by setting the authentication code in the logic circuit on the setting board 970, it is possible to prevent the setting board 970 from being illegally replaced.

FIG. 150C shows a state where the main control board 1310 and the dummy board 979 are housed in the main control board box 1320 shown in FIG.

As described above, in recent years, some pachinko machines 1 have a game performance setting function. This setting function can change the performance of the pachinko machine related to prize balls obtained by the player, such as the jackpot probability in the special symbol variable display game, and the setting function can change the performance of the pachinko machine 1 in accordance with the business policy of the hall. On the other hand, conventional pachinko machines that do not have a setting function are sufficient, and some halls do not require a setting function. Therefore, the manufacturer of the pachinko machine needs to design and produce both the pachinko machine that does not have the setting function and the pachinko machine that has the setting function. It is required to efficiently design and produce pachinko machines.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 having no setting function, the dummy board 979 is mounted in the mounting space of the setting board 970 so that the pachinko machine 1 can be produced in the same manner as when the setting board 970 is mounted. To Further, the main control board 1310 can be shared between the pachinko machine having no setting function and the pachinko machine having the setting function.

Although the dummy substrate 979 is not mounted with devices such as the setting key 971 and the setting display 974 mounted on the setting substrate 970, it may have a pattern for mounting these devices. That is, the pattern for mounting the device is provided on the dummy substrate 979, but the device is not mounted on the pattern.

The dummy board 979 does not have to be a printed board, but may be a member (for example, a unit formed of a resin case) that can be attached to the main control board box 1320 at the same position as the setting board 970.

Further, since the driver circuit of the setting indicator 974 is mounted on the main control board 1310, the output of the driver circuit of the setting indicator 974 is not open or ground on the dummy substrate 979, but is terminated by the dummy resistor. Good. This prevents damage to the driver circuit due to overcurrent. When the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970 perform serial communication, the dummy board 979 may terminate the serial communication with the main control board 1310.

When the dummy board 979 is mounted, the hole 971A is not provided in the main control board box 1320. A small door that can move so as to close the hole 971A is provided in the main control board box 1320 so that it can be operated from the inside of the main control board box 1320 and cannot be operated from the outside. The main control board box 1320 may be shared with the non-pachinko machine, the pachinko machine having a setting function, and the like.

An authentication code for the main control board 1310 to authenticate may be set on a dummy board 979 described later. Further, the dummy board 979 does not need to be authenticated by the main control board 1310, and the authentication code may not be set. The main control board 1310 and the dummy board 979 may perform serial communication, and the main control board 1310 may authenticate the dummy board.

The variations of the operating means mounted on the setting board 970 described above are summarized as follows.

(1) With the setting change switch 972 and with the setting confirmation switch 973 In this case, the key 975 is inserted into the setting key 971 and turned to the setting position (and the RAM clear switch 954 is pressed), and the pachinko machine is operated. Operate the power switch of 1 to turn on the power. Then, after operating the setting change switch 972 to select a setting value to be set, the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated.

(2) With the setting change switch 972 and without the setting confirmation switch 973 In this case, the key 975 is inserted into the setting key 971 and turned to the setting position (and the RAM clear switch 954 is pressed), and the pachinko machine is operated. Operate the power switch of 1 to turn on the power. Then, after operating the setting change switch 972 to select the setting value to be set, the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position.

(3) Without the setting change switch 972 and with the setting confirmation switch 973 In this case, with the key 975 inserted into the setting key 971 and turned to the setting position (and further, with the RAM clear switch 954 pressed), the pachinko machine Operate the power switch of 1 to turn on the power. Then, after operating the RAM clear switch 954 to select the setting value to be set, the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated. Instead of operating the RAM clear switch 954, the setting key 971 may be turned to the right to select a setting value to be set.

(4) Without the setting change switch 972 and without the setting confirmation switch 973 In this case, the key 975 is inserted into the setting key 971 and turned to the setting position (and the RAM clear switch 954 is pressed), and the pachinko machine is operated. Operate the power switch of 1 to turn on the power. Then, after operating the RAM clear switch 954 to select the setting value to be set, the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position. Instead of operating the RAM clear switch 954, the setting key 971 may be turned to the right to select a setting value to be set.

151 and 152 are diagrams showing another mounting example of the main control board 1310. In this figure, the configuration of the main control board box 1320 is shown by a solid line, and the configuration inside the main control board box 1320 is shown by a dotted line.

The mounting examples shown in FIGS. 151 and 152 differ from the mounting example shown in FIG. 150 in that the main control board box 1320 is provided with a small door 1321.

FIG. 151A shows a main control board box 1320 of this mounting example. The main control board box 1320 is made of a transparent resin that houses the main control board 1310 in a sealable manner so that it cannot be opened without breaking once it is closed, as described above. The main control board box 1320 has a hole 1318A for operating the display switch 1318, a hole 954A for operating the RAM clear switch 954, and a setting mode switch for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to the setting change mode. Holes 976A are provided for operating 976.

The hole 976A is normally covered with the small door 1321. The small door 1321 is provided with a key unit 1322. By inserting a key 975 into the key hole of the key unit 1322 and operating it, the small door 1321 is opened from the main control board box 1320, and the hole 976A is exposed. The mode switch 976 can be operated.

As shown in FIG. 152A, in the normal state in which the key 975 can be inserted and removed, the bar 1323 is at the maximum protruding position from the key unit 1322, the bar 1323 is inserted into the seat 1324, and the bar 1323 and the seat 1324 are inserted. Engage with each other to lock the small door 1321 in the closed position. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 152(B), when the key 975 is inserted into the key hole and a rotating operation is performed, the bar 1323 retracts from the maximum protruding position, and the engagement between the bar 1323 and the seat 1324 is released. With the hinge 1325 as an axis, the small door 1321 can be opened. When the small door 1321 is open (FIG. 152(B)), the hole 976A is exposed and the setting mode switch 976 can be operated.

FIG. 153 is a diagram showing still another mounting example of the main control board 1310. In the mounting example shown in FIG. 153, a key unit 1322 is provided on a back cover 980 that covers the back side of the pachinko machine 1. That is, by inserting and operating the key 975 in the keyhole of the key unit 1322, the back cover 980 is opened from the main body frame base 600, and the main control board box 1320 (setting mode switch 976 provided on the setting board 970) is operated. It will be possible.

That is, in the normal state where the key 975 can be inserted and removed, the back cover 980 is fixed by closing the back surface side of the main body frame base 600, and the main control board box 1320 is accommodated in the back cover 980. On the other hand, when the key 975 is inserted into the key hole and rotated, the back cover 980 can be opened from the main body frame base 600, and the main control board box 1320 housed inside the back cover 980 is exposed on the back surface side. The setting mode switch 976 can be operated.

When the key unit 1322 is provided on the back cover 980, the main control board box 1320 (main control board 1310) may have the configuration shown in FIG. 151(C). Specifically, the main control board box 1320 is made of a transparent resin that accommodates the main control board 1310 in a sealable manner such that it cannot be opened without being destroyed once it is closed. The main control board box 1320 has a hole 1318A for operating the display switch 1318, a hole 954A for operating the RAM clear switch 954, and a setting mode switch 976 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to the setting change mode. A hole 976A is provided for operating the. The main control board box 1320 accommodates a main control board 1310 and a setting board 970. On the main control board 1310, a main display MPU, a driver circuit (not shown), a base display 1317, a display switch 1318, and a RAM clear switch 954 are mounted. The RAM clear switch 954 may not be mounted on the main control board 1310, but may be mounted on another control board (for example, a payout control board 951 or a power supply board). In this case, the main control board box 1320 is not provided with the hole 954A.

The setting board 970 is provided close to the main control board 1310, and the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 are electrically connected so that signals can be transmitted. The setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 may be connected to each other directly by a connector or by an electric wire. On the setting board 970, a setting mode switch 976 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to the setting change mode, and a setting display 974 for displaying the set or selected set value are mounted. A setting change switch 972 for changing the set value and a setting confirmation switch 973 for confirming and inputting the changed setting value may be mounted on the setting board 970.

[12-10. Details of setting change process]
FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing an example of the initialization process. The initialization process shown in FIG. 154 differs from the initialization process described above with reference to FIG. 101 in that the RAM clear process is performed when the setting key 971 is operated (steps S17 and S30). The same steps as those in the initialization processing described above with reference to FIGS. 21 and 101 are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 executes the main control program to perform initialization processing. The main control MPU 1311 first sets the protect of the RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 to write-enabled, and sets the RAM 1312 in a state in which writing is possible (step S10). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 activates the built-in watchdog timer (step S12), and determines whether a predetermined wait time (time required for activating the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.)) has elapsed. The determination is made (step S16). If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 954 is operated (step S18).

The RAM clear switch 954 may be detected immediately after the power is turned on (for example, before step S12), the detection result may be stored in a predetermined register, and the stored value may be determined in step S18. By detecting the RAM clear switch 954 immediately after the power is turned on, even if the RAM clear switch 954 is operated only for a short time after the power is turned on, the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 can be surely detected.

When the RAM clear switch 954 is operated, it is determined whether the setting key 971 is operated and its output is on (step S17). If the setting key 971 is not operated, it is a normal RAM clear operation, so the process proceeds to step S30 to initialize a predetermined area of the built-in RAM 1312. On the other hand, when the setting key 971 is operated, that is, when the power is turned on while both the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated, the setting change mode is entered. That is, since it is necessary to operate the two switches and the power switch to start the setting change mode, it is possible to prevent an erroneous operation in which the setting change mode is accidentally started.

In the setting change mode, first, the set value is displayed (step S60). Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 reads out the current setting value from the main control RAM 1312 and generates data to be displayed on the setting display 974. Then, the security signal is output (step S61). Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 generates data for outputting a security signal. The security signal is a signal output from the external terminal board 784 when the pachinko machine 1 detects an abnormality, but it is extremely rare to put the pachinko machine 1 in the setting change mode during a game, and fraudulent acts are possible. This is because the hall computer should be notified if the setting change mode is entered during business hours.

The security signal is output from the start of the setting change mode to the predetermined period after the end of the setting change mode, regardless of whether the security signal is output for a predetermined time from the start of the setting change mode or between the start and the end of the setting change mode. You may output. By outputting the security signal for a predetermined period after the end of the setting change mode, the period in which an abnormality can be detected becomes longer, and the security can be further improved.

After that, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the setting change operation is performed depending on whether or not the setting change switch 972 is operated (step S62), changes the set value in accordance with the operation of the setting change switch 972, and writes it in the main control RAM 1312. (Step S63). For example, when the setting change switch 972 is configured by a push button switch, when the setting change switch 972 is pressed once, the set value is changed by one step. When the setting key 971 also serves as the setting change switch 972, when the setting key 971 is turned to the right once, the set value is changed by one step. Then, the main control MPU 1311 generates data for displaying the changed set value on the setting display 974 (step S64).

Then, it is determined whether to end the setting change mode and confirm the set value (step S65). Specifically, when the main control MPU 1311 detects the operation of the setting confirmation switch 973, the setting change mode is ended and the process proceeds to step S30. Further, the setting change mode may be ended by an operation of returning the setting key 971 to the normal position. Further, the setting change mode may be ended by the operation of another switch or sensor provided in the pachinko machine 1.

In the above-described process, after the setting change mode ends, or when it is determined in step S17 that the setting key is not on, the process proceeds to step S30, but may proceed to step S20. In this case, after the setting change mode ends, it is determined whether the power failure flag is set (step S20), it is determined whether the checksums match (step S22), the power failure flag is not set, and the check is performed. If the thumbs do not match, a predetermined area of the internal RAM 1312 is initialized. If it is determined in step S17 that the setting key is not on, the process proceeds to step S30.

After the setting change mode ends, in step S30, the data of the set value among the data backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312, the work area for base calculation (base calculation area 13128), the game state (for example, the probability change state, Time saving state, reserved storage of special symbols and ordinary symbols, information on prize balls) is left, other data is erased, and the process proceeds to step S24. The data on the gaming state may be erased without remaining. In this case, the storage area erased by the RAM area erased after the setting change operation is the same as the storage area erased by the RAM clear operation.

On the other hand, if the operation of ending the setting change mode is not detected, the process returns to step S62, and the setting change operation is further detected.

If the operation of the setting key 971 is not detected in step S17, the set value data and the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) are backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 in step S30. ), the other data is erased, and the process proceeds to step S24.

If the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is not detected in step S18, the main control MPU 1311 does not erase the data backed up in the internal RAM 1312, and determines whether the power failure flag is set (step S20). ..

As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so the main control MPU 1311 erases the data (other than the base calculation area 13128) backed up in the work area. Then (step S30), the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is set, the main control MPU 1311 clears the power failure flag and uses the checksum calculated at the previous power-off to calculate the check calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312. The sum and the checksum stored in step S48 are compared (verified) (step S22).

As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data does not match the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so the main control MPU 1311 backs up in the work area. The stored data (other than the base calculation area 13128) is erased (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 match, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 is correct, so the data backed up in the work area is not erased, and the step S24 is performed. Proceed to.

In step S24, the main control MPU 1311 uses the check code to determine whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal. If it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may not be correct, so the main control MPU 1311 erases the data stored in the base calculation work area (step S26).

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a case where at least a part of the RAM 1312 is initialized, the operation of the setting key 971 (step S17), the operation of only the RAM clear switch (step S18), and the power failure flag are set. There are a power failure flag error that has not been set (step S20), a RAM error where the RAM checksums do not match (step S22), and an error in the base calculation work (step S24). Of these, as shown in the figure, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected when the power is turned on, the set value and the game state in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) (For example, probability change state, time saving state, reserved storage of special symbols and ordinary symbols, information regarding prize balls), data other than that is cleared, and base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is not cleared. .. If the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is detected when the power is turned on, but the operation of the setting key 971 is not detected, or if the power failure flag is abnormal or the RAM is abnormal, the game control area 13126 (game work area and game stack) (Including the area) is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (including the base calculation work area and the base calculation stack area) is not cleared. Further, in the case of the base calculation work abnormality, the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is cleared, and the game control area 13126 is not cleared.

Note that, unlike the illustrated one, in the case of a power failure flag abnormality, a RAM abnormality, and a base calculation work abnormality, since the validity of the data stored in the RAM 1312 is not guaranteed, the game control area 13126 and the base calculation area 13128. The entire RAM area including may be cleared. If all RAM areas are cleared in the case of a work for base calculation, if the memory configuration is such that the data indicating the game state is lost and normal processing cannot be executed, the work area for base calculation and the stack area for base calculation Only initialize it. Further, when the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared and the base calculation area 13128 is set as described above. You don't have to clear it.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 is calculated for each data type (game control area 13126 (setting value, game state data), for base calculation). Area 13128) Erase under different conditions. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control area 13126 other than the set value is erased, and the set value and the base calculation area 13128 are not erased. This is because if the set value is erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch, it is necessary to reset the set value for each RAM clear operation, and maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 in the hall becomes complicated. Therefore, the setting value is not erased by operating the RAM clear switch.

For the processing after step S28, either of FIG. 22 and FIG. 102 may be adopted as necessary. The difference between FIG. 22 and FIG. 102 is the presence/absence of a process (steps S50 and S52) of calculating and storing a check code from the data of the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) when the power is shut off.

In the initialization process described above, the setting confirmation process is not executed, but is executed in the setting confirmation process called from the timer interrupt process described later (FIGS. 155 and 156). However, the setting confirmation process is executed in the initialization process. You may execute. By executing the setting confirmation processing in the initialization processing, the setting confirmation can be permitted only when the power is turned on, and it is possible to prevent the setting value from being confirmed by an inadvertent operation during operation of the pachinko machine 1.

In this case, an operation unit for confirming the setting (for example, a push button switch) is provided separately from the setting key 971 (the setting change switch 972 may have the function of the operation unit for confirming the setting), and when the power is turned on. When the setting confirmation operation unit is operated, the current setting value is read from the main control RAM 1312, data for displaying on the setting display unit 974 is generated, and the setting value is displayed on the setting display unit 974. Good to do. Also in this case, the security signal may be output along with the display of the set value.

The main control board 1310 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment may not immediately execute the RAM clear processing even if the RAM clear switch 954 is operated. Specifically, when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated and the power is turned on while the setting key 971 is turned on, the main control RAM is cleared after the setting change mode ends (step S30). That is, the main control MPU 1311 suspends the RAM clearing process and executes the RAM clearing process after a predetermined condition is satisfied (end of the setting change mode). It can be said that during the setting change mode, the main control MPU 1311 is controlled so as to store the execution of the RAM clear processing. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 954 is operated and the power is turned on without operating the setting key 971, the main control RAM is cleared without starting the setting change mode (step S30).

The clearing (initialization) of the main control RAM 1312 has been described above in detail. Next, the clearing of the RAM of the payout control unit 952 mounted on the payout control board 951 will be described.

After the setting change mode, the main control RAM 1312 is cleared in step S30, but the RAM of the payout control unit may be cleared together with this. Further, the RAM of the payout controller 952 does not have to be cleared. Further, whether to clear the RAM of the payout control unit may be switched by an operation. For example, when the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 954 with the setting key 971 turned on, the main control RAM 1312 and the RAM of the payout control unit 952 are cleared, and the setting key 971 is turned on, When the power is turned on without operating the RAM clear switch 954, the main control RAM 1312 is cleared and the RAM of the payout controller 952 is not cleared. In this way, by changing the operation method, a part of the main control RAM 1312 can be cleared, and the RAM of the payout control unit 952 can execute processing that is not cleared.

When clearing the main control RAM 1312 and the RAM of the payout control unit 952, the timing of clearing the main control RAM 1312 differs from the timing of clearing the RAM of the payout control unit 952 depending on whether or not the setting key 971 is operated. May occur. That is, when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated to turn on the power while the setting key 971 is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 is cleared after the setting change mode ends (step S30). On the other hand, when the payout control unit 952 detects the operation of the RAM clear switch 954, it immediately clears the RAM. Therefore, depending on the condition (operation), the RAM of the payout control unit 952 may be cleared, but the main control RAM 1312 may not be cleared.

Further, not only when the RAM clear switch 954 is provided on the main control board 1310, but also in the pachinko machine 1 provided on the payout control board 951 and the power supply board 931, the RAM clear switch 954 is operated while changing the set value. The RAM of the payout controller 952 may be cleared when the power is turned on. That is, the payout control unit 952 does not clear the RAM by the RAM clear command from the main control board 1310, but the payout control unit 952 detects the level of the signal of the RAM clear switch 954 when the power is turned on, and the RAM clear switch 954 operates. It is determined whether or not it is operated, and whether or not to clear the RAM of the payout control unit 952 is determined. If the payout control board 951 is provided with a RAM clear switch, it is possible to cope with various models without changing the control program on the frame side.

[12-11. Details of setting confirmation process]
FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

The timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 155 is compared with the timer interrupt process described above with reference to FIG. 23, and a base calculation process (step S801) is provided in place of the accessory ratio calculation area update process of step S81. The material ratio calculation/display processing is deleted. Further, a setting confirmation process (step S802) for displaying a set value indicating the game performance of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the operation ratio of the condition device) is added. The same steps as those in the timer interrupt processing described above with reference to FIGS. 23 and 104 are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first executes the main control program to set RBS (register bank selection flag) in the program status word to 1 and switches the register (step S70).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a switch input process (step S74), a timer update process (step S76), a random number update process 1 (step S78), and a prize ball control process (step S80).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the current game state, adds the number of prize balls paid out as a game value to the region corresponding to the current game state, and the base calculation region 13128 (in the main control internal RAM 1312 ( (See FIG. 103) to calculate the base value (step S801, see FIGS. 105 and 106 for details of the base calculation process). The base calculation process (step S801) may be executed in any order as long as it is after the prize ball control process (step S80), but in order to surely execute each timer interruption, it is preferable to execute the base calculation process in an earlier order. ..

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311, the frame command reception process (step S82), fraud detection process (step S84), special symbol and special electric auditors product control process (step S86), normal symbol and ordinary electric auditors product control process ( Step S88) is executed.

Then, the setting confirmation process (step S802) for displaying the set value indicating the gaming performance of the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the setting confirmation processing, the current setting value is displayed on the setting display 974 by the employee of the hall performing a predetermined operation. Details of the setting confirmation processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Subsequently, an output data setting process (step S90) and a peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92) are executed.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns) the register bank. When the above process ends, the timer interrupt process ends, and the process returns to the process before the interrupt.

FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting confirmation processing of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. The setting confirmation process is called and executed from step S802 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 155).

In the setting confirmation process, first, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the setting confirmation operation is being performed (step S8061). Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key 971 is operated. If the setting key 971 is operated when the power is turned on, it triggers a shift to the setting change mode (step S17 in FIG. 154), and if it is operated during operation, it is a setting confirmation operation, and the current setting can be displayed.

If the operation of the setting key 971 is not detected, since the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position, data for not displaying the setting value is generated and the setting value is hidden (step S8065).

On the other hand, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected, it is determined whether the setting display condition is satisfied (step S8062).

As a setting display condition, whether the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 is determined by the output of the frame opening switch. Since the setting key 971 is installed on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the setting key 971 cannot be operated unless the outer frame 2 is open. However, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected even when the outer frame 2 is closed, it is estimated that some abnormality (failure or cheating) has occurred in the pachinko machine 1. In this case, the setting is performed. It is better not to display. Further, since the setting display device 974 is installed on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the setting display device 974 cannot be viewed unless the outer frame 2 is open, and it is not necessary to display the setting.

The set value may be displayed at any time during the operation of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, a setting display condition that allows display at a specific time may be provided. For example, the set position may be displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) after the power is turned on. In this case, it is preferable to operate a timer that measures the elapsed time from power-on (or CPU initial setting in step S28) and display the set value until the timer expires.

In addition, setting display conditions may be provided that enable setting values to be displayed in a specific game state. For example, the setting display condition cannot be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol or during the big hit game. That is, the setting display condition is set so that the set value can be displayed during the period other than during the special symbol variation and the big hit. The set value may not be displayed in the game state other than the above. In this case, when the setting key is operated during the special symbol variation game or during the jackpot game, the set value may be displayed at the timing when the special symbol variation game or the jackpot game ends.

If it is determined that the setting display condition is satisfied, a security signal is output (step S8063). Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 generates data for outputting a security signal. The security signal is a signal output from the external terminal board 784 when the pachinko machine 1 detects an abnormality, but it is rare that the pachinko machine 1 confirms the setting during the game, and becomes a forerunner of cheating. This is because the hall computer should be notified if the setting confirmation operation is performed during business hours.

The security signal may be output for a predetermined period of time from the start of setting value display, from the start of setting value display to the end, or from the start of setting value display to a predetermined period after the end of setting value display. Good. By outputting the security signal for a predetermined period after the display of the set value, the period in which the abnormality can be detected becomes longer, and the security can be improved.

In the illustrated setting confirmation process, the security signal is transmitted when the setting display condition is satisfied, but even when the setting display condition is not satisfied, the security signal is transmitted when the setting confirmation operation (operation of the setting key 971) is detected. Good.

Then, the set value is displayed (step S8064). Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 reads out the current setting value from the main control RAM 1312 and generates data to be displayed on the setting display 974.

If the setting display conditions are not met, the conditions are checked until the setting display conditions are met, but it may not be possible to get out of the loop for a long time. The confirmation process may be terminated. For example, after it is determined that the set value is not displayed because the special symbol variation display is in progress, when the special symbol variation display ends within a predetermined time, the setting display condition is satisfied when the special symbol variation display ends. And the set value is displayed. When the setting condition is not satisfied, the setting confirmation process may be immediately ended without repeating the confirmation of the setting condition.

At this time, the fact that the set value is not being displayed may be included in the special symbol variation display start condition. In this way, the new special symbol variation display is not started while the set value is displayed, and the new special symbol variation display is started after the set value is hidden.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the set value can be confirmed at a predetermined timing, the set value can be confirmed without disturbing other displays. In particular, when the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are both used, the setting value is preferentially displayed during setting confirmation, so the base value is calculated but the base value is not displayed. In a game state in which a large number of prize balls are paid out in a short time, it may be desired to confirm a change in the base value. Therefore, the set value can be displayed without disturbing the real-time display of the base value.

[12-12. Output of security signal accompanying setting change and setting confirmation]
FIG. 157 is a timing diagram of the security signal output in accordance with the setting change and the setting confirmation.

As described above, the security signal is output at the time of confirming the setting change mode and the setting (S61 of FIG. 154, S8063 of FIG. 156).

In the setting change mode, as shown in FIG. 157(A), a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 for a predetermined time from the start of the setting change mode. The predetermined time (T seconds) during which the security signal is output may be at least the time that the hall computer can recognize the security signal, and may be 1 second or less, or may be several tens of seconds.

Further, the security signal may be output during the period from the start to the end of the setting change mode instead of the predetermined time from the start of the setting change mode.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 157(B), the security signal may be output to the setting change mode for a predetermined time (T seconds) at the timing of the RAM clearing process executed along with the setting change mode.

At the time of confirming the setting, as shown in FIG. 157(C), a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 for a predetermined time from the start of confirming the setting. The predetermined time (T seconds) during which the security signal is output may be at least the time that the hall computer can recognize the security signal, and may be 1 second or less, or may be several tens of seconds.

Further, the security signal may be output during the period from the start to the end of the setting confirmation (the period during which the set value is displayed), instead of the predetermined time from the start of the setting confirmation.

When the pachinko machine 1 detects an error, as shown in FIG. 157(D), a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 for a predetermined time (T seconds) from the error detection. When the pachinko machine 1 detects an error during the setting confirmation, as shown in FIG. 157(E), the security signal is output for a predetermined time after the error is detected. That is, the security signal caused by the setting confirmation and the security signal caused by the error detection are continuously output for more than the predetermined time (T seconds) (the predetermined time from the error detection). Even if an error is detected during the setting confirmation, the output time of the security signal does not have to be extended. That is, even if an error is detected during the output of the security signal, the security signal resulting from the error detection is not output and is absorbed by the security signal being output.

Since the pachinko machine 1 does not detect an error in the setting change mode, the security signal caused by the setting confirmation does not overlap with the security signal caused by the error detection. That is, even if an error occurs during the setting change mode, the security signal output time is not extended, but if an error occurs during setting confirmation, the security signal output time is extended.

[12-13. Another example of setting confirmation processing]
Another example of the setting confirmation process will be described below. In the above description, the example in which the setting confirmation process is performed in the timer interrupt process in the peripheral control unit steady process is mainly described, but in the following, the setting confirmation process is performed in the initialization process when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1. An example will be described.

Specifically, for example, if the setting key is on when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the process proceeds to the setting confirmation process. Hereinafter, the details of the processing will be described. Note that the timer interrupt process executed by the peripheral control MPU in this chapter is assumed to be the timer interrupt process in FIG. 23 (that is, the timer interrupt process not including the setting confirmation process in step S802).

FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing another example of the initialization process. Differences from FIG. 154 will be described. When determining in step S18 that the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (step S18: No), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting key 971 is operated and its output is on (step S18). S29).

When determining that the output of the setting key 971 is ON (step S29: Yes), the main control MPU 1311 moves to the setting confirmation process in step S807, and then moves to step S20. The setting confirmation process in step S807 will be described later. When determining that the output of the setting key 971 is off (step S29: No), the main control MPU 1311 proceeds to step S20.

FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing another example of the setting confirmation processing (setting confirmation processing in step S807). Differences from FIG. 156 will be described. The main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting display condition is satisfied without performing the process of step S8061 (step S8062). When determining that the setting display condition is satisfied (step S8062: Yes), the main control MPU 1311 outputs a security signal (step S8063) and displays the setting value (step S8064). When determining that the setting display condition is not satisfied (step S8062: NO), the main control MPU 1311 executes the process of step S8062 again.

Following the processing of step S8064, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting key 971 is operated and its output is off (step S8071). When determining that the output of the setting key 971 is ON (step S8071: No), the main control MPU 1311 executes the determination of step S8071 again after a predetermined time elapses. When determining that the output of the setting key 971 is off (step S8071: Yes), the main control MPU 1311 hides the setting value (step S8075), and ends the setting confirmation process. That is, when the setting key 971 is turned on and the power is turned on without pressing the RAM clear button, the setting confirmation state is entered.

In addition, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during the special symbol change, the number of pending memories managed by the main control board 1310, the remaining change time in the special symbol, and the like are stored as they are. After that, when the setting confirmation processing is performed at the next power-on (when the power is turned on with the setting key 971 being in the ON state), after the setting confirmation processing is completed (the setting is performed without turning the power OFF). After returning the key 971 to the initial position), the special symbol variation restarts. At this time, for example, the effect (effect using the display device, effect using the lamp, sound effect using the speaker, effect using the movable body, etc.) that has been executed together with the special symbol variation is the special symbol. No change will take place after the change resumes.

Moreover, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during the special symbol change, and the setting confirmation process is performed at the next power-on, when the special symbol change is restarted after the setting confirmation process, the special symbol change is performed. The presentation that was being executed may be restarted. For example, the suspended effect using the display device, the lamp, and the speaker is restarted. In addition, regarding the effect using the movable body, for example, after restarting the special symbol variation or returning the movable body to the initial position when the power is turned on, it is determined that the movable body is operated in the effect pattern of the effect. If so, the movable body is operated according to the effect pattern.

In other words, if the movable body moves to the setting confirmation state when it is not in the initial position, it is returned to the initial position once when the power is turned on or when the setting confirmation processing is completed, and then based on the variation pattern of the special symbol variation If the decided effect includes an effect of moving (moving) the movable body, the movable body may be moved (moved). When the movable body moves (moves) to the setting confirmation state, the operation pattern of the operation (movement) may not be executed, or the movable body may be returned to the initial position once. The movable body may be operated as long as the pattern can be operated even from above.

Moreover, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during the special symbol change, and the setting confirmation process is performed at the next power-on, when the special symbol change is restarted after the setting confirmation process, the special symbol change is performed. Among the effects that were being executed together with the effect using the display device, the effect using the lamp, and the sound effect using the speaker are restarted, the movable body is set to the initial position after the restart of the special symbol fluctuation or when the power is turned on. There is no need to perform the returning and the effect using the movable body.

In addition, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during the special symbol variation, and the setting confirmation process is performed at the next power-on, when the special symbol variation is restarted after the setting confirmation process is finished, the main liquid crystal display device. The variation of the decorative pattern displayed in 1600 may be restarted (the effect originally planned to be resumed), or the variation of the decorative pattern may be until the symbol is determined (or until the swing fluctuation immediately before the symbol is determined). ) The decoration pattern may be made transparent to perform high-speed fluctuation, or the decoration pattern may be hidden until the time of the symbol determination (or until the fluctuation fluctuation immediately before the time of the symbol determination). In addition, at the time of design determination, for example, a combination of decorative designs planned before the power is turned off is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Further, in this case, at the end of the special symbol change after resumption, a combination of predetermined decorative symbols, a combination of decorative symbols displayed when the initial power is turned on, or a special decorative symbol that is not displayed during normal special symbol variation The combination (eg, “XXX” or the like) may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

The power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during the change of the special symbol, the setting confirmation process is performed at the next power-on, and the setting key 971 is in the off state when the setting confirmation process ends and returns to the normal state. The same initial operation as when the power is turned on (that is, when the power is normally turned on) (for example, a predetermined operation of the movable body, an operation of confirming a predetermined light emission of the LED, etc.) may be performed. (You may make it restart the above-mentioned production etc. after performing this initial operation).

Further, when the pre-reading effect is being performed during the change of the special symbol, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off, and when the setting confirmation process is performed at the next power-on, for example, the special after the setting confirmation process is finished. When resuming the symbol variation, the prefetch effect, and the prefetch effect for the special symbol variation that was suspended immediately before turning off the power is not executed (specifically, for example, it is performed before turning off the power source). The special zone that was displayed during the change of the special symbol that was being displayed (for example, a special stage that shows the player that the expectation of a big hit is high across multiple changes, from rival horse production to horse racing production described later. Evolving zone (a special zone where the horse racing performance has a higher expectation of itself (for example, a relatively higher expectation than the dialogue performance described later)) Waiting display and the special The display effect in the zone is deleted, or when the mode of the hold display is, for example, blue instead of normal white, it is returned to normal white). However, pre-reading effect may be executed for the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning after the setting confirmation process is completed.

Further, when the pre-reading effect is being performed during the change of the special symbol, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off, and when the setting confirmation process is performed at the next power-on, for example, the special after the setting confirmation process is finished. At the time of resumption of the symbol change, the look-ahead effect during the special symbol change is stopped (specifically, for example, the special zone displayed during the change of the special symbol that was performed before the power was turned off). The display on standby or the display effect in the special zone is erased, or if the mode of the hold display is blue instead of normal white, it is returned to normal white). The look-ahead effect may be restarted from the change in the special symbol (the erased display may be returned to the original, or if the effect pattern promotes the look-ahead effect at the start of fluctuation, the look-ahead effect may be restored in the display mode after promotion. Good). In this case, the pre-reading effect executed from the next special symbol change is restarted, for example, as if the pre-reading effect during the special symbol change was not stopped. That is, before turning off the power of the pachinko machine 1, the look-ahead effect that was scheduled to be executed after the next special symbol change is executed. Moreover, a new pattern of the prefetching effect may be set, and the effect of the new prefetching pattern may be executed from the next special symbol variation.

[12-14. Another example of setting suggestion production]
Hereinafter, an example of processing in which execution of the setting suggestion effect is restricted will be described. In the following description, it is assumed that the jackpot probabilities of the settings 1 to 6 in the normal time are 1/240, 1/230, 1/220, 1/210, 1/200, and 1/190, respectively. It is assumed that the jackpot probabilities of setting 1 to setting 6 at time are 1/48, 1/46, 1/44, 1/42, 1/40, and 1/38, respectively. In addition, it is assumed that the probability change rate at the time of jackpot winning is 50%.

[12-14-1. Variation pattern table]
FIG. 160 is another example of the fluctuation pattern table. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the ROM 1313 of the main control board 1310, for example. In the description of FIG. 142 and the like, the example in which the variation pattern table exists for each winning type of the special lottery result has been described, but in the example of FIG. 160, the variation pattern for each winning type of the special lottery result in one variation pattern table. Is defined. Further, in the example of FIG. 160, it is assumed that a common variation pattern table is used in all settings.

The variation pattern table in FIG. 160 shows correspondences between the winning type of the special lottery result, the variation pattern identifier, the outline of the effect of the variation pattern, and the selection rate. As described above, in the example of FIG. 160, information on the variation pattern of each special lottery result is stored in one variation pattern table. Therefore, the main control MPU 1311 selects the variation pattern corresponding to the winning type corresponding to the winning according to the selection rate indicated by the variation pattern table. Note that, as in the example of FIG. 144, the variation time of each variation pattern may be defined in the variation pattern table.

In addition, the movie reach described in the overview column is a reach production that is highly selected when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, and extremely low when the result of the special lottery is out. Is. In other words, there is a high expectation of a big hit for fluctuations when movie reach is executed. Also, when a movie reach occurs, a predetermined movie is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

Also, in the summary column, when the winning type is “out”, the “+1 symbol” means that the decorative symbol that has changed to the end after the decorative symbol stops in the reach state is in the reach state. It shows that it stops after passing one decorative pattern. Specifically, for example, after the reach state is reached with the decorative design “7”, the decorative design that has fluctuated to the end stops at “8”. When the winning type is “big hit”, the “+1 symbol” means that the decorative symbol has stopped in the reach state, and then the decorative symbol that has fluctuated to the end has passed once through the reachable decorative symbol and has stopped once. After the appearance, the decoration pattern is stopped as the same as the reach state decoration pattern. Specifically, for example, after the reach is reached with the decorative pattern "7", it seems that the decorative pattern that has been changed to the end is temporarily stopped at "8", and then the decorative pattern is stopped at "7". And notify the big hit.

In the overview column in the example of FIG. 161, “+1 symbol” is selected only when the winning type is “big hit (non-probable change)” of the big hits, but in case of “big hit (probable change)” Only may be selected, or may be selected in the case of “big hit (non-probable change)” and “big hit (probable change)”. The “+1 symbol” may be selected only when the winning type is “out”.

Further, “+pseudo 1” and “+pseudo 2” described in the summary column indicate that two consecutive pseudo continuous effects and three consecutive pseudo continuous effects are executed, respectively. Pseudo continuous effect is an effect that the operation of changing the decorative design and ending the variation of the decorative design is executed a plurality of times during one change of the first special design display or the second special design display. .. “Ending the variation of the decorative design” means, for example, a mode in which a part or the whole of the decorative design is stopped and displayed, a mode in which the player recognizes that the variation of the decorative design is once finished, and the decorative design. In some cases, the pseudo-relational pattern (the pattern in which the pseudo-relation is determined if this symbol is stopped) is stopped, and the like. It should be noted that the pseudo continuous effect in which the operation is performed N times (N is a natural number of 1 or more) is referred to as N consecutive pseudo continuous effects, and the Mth decorative pattern variation in the N consecutive pseudo continuous effects (M is 1 or more N The following natural number) is referred to as the M-th consecutive pseudo continuous effect. Also, while the first special symbol display device or the second special symbol display device is changing once, while actually suggesting to the player that the operation may be executed again, the operation is actually executed again. The effect that is not performed is called “pseudo-gase effect”. Further, hereinafter, the pseudo continuous effect is also simply referred to as “pseudo continuous effect”.

Pseudo continuous production occurs or continues, that is, the operation of changing the decorative design and ending the variation of the decorative design is performed again during one change of the first special design display or the second special design display. When it is determined that the peripheral control MPU, at least one of the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design may stop the pseudo continuous design. In the following example, the peripheral control MPU stops a character such as "continue!" in the middle decorative pattern as a pseudo continuous pattern. It should be noted that, for example, a combination of specific decorative symbols (for example, all of the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are odd or even and the reach does not occur) may be the pseudo continuous symbol. The pseudo gasse effect can be executed, for example, when the outline of the effect is “normal fluctuation” or the like. Further, for example, even in a variation pattern in which “+pseudo 1” is executed, a pseudo gasse effect may be executed that suggests the occurrence of the third pseudo-pseudo in “+pseudo 2”.

[12-14-2. Final reserved color table]
FIG. 161 is an example of the final reserved color table. The final reserved color table is stored in the peripheral main control ROM, for example. The final hold color table is, for example, the display color of the hold display at the end of the change for each change pattern (the winning type of the special lottery result, the change pattern identifier, and the outline of the effect of the change pattern) (hereinafter, the final hold color. (Also referred to as a selection rate).

It should be noted that the main liquid crystal display device 1600 includes a reserved display area that indicates the number of first special random numbers and second special random numbers that are being held. In the startup mouth winning time process of step S116 of FIG. 142, a reservation number designation command for designating the number of reserves of the first special random number and the second special random number is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control MPU displays, in the hold display area, the hold number indicated by the hold number designation command.

Specifically, when a game ball wins the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 (the starting condition is satisfied), the number of holdings (holding storage number) specified by the holding number designation command increases. , Adds and displays one hold display in the hold display area. On the other hand, when the variable display of decorative symbols (variable display of special symbols) based on the hold display is started (start condition is satisfied), the hold number (hold storage number) specified by the hold number designation command decreases. , The hold display in the hold display area is erased.

Note that there may be a plurality of display modes in the hold display. For example, as the plurality of display modes, there is a display mode of a hold display in a plurality of colors (white, blue, green, red, rainbow). Hereinafter, it is assumed that the big hit expectation degree of the special lottery result corresponding to the pending display becomes higher in the order of the pending display colors of white, blue, green, red, and rainbow. Particularly, in the example of FIG. 161, the iridescent hold display is selected only when the result of the special lottery is a big hit.

That is, the peripheral control MPU selects the final reserved color corresponding to the selected variation pattern according to the selection rate indicated by the final reserved color table. In addition, the peripheral control MPU responds to the hold display by changing the display mode of the hold display during the display period from displaying the hold display in the hold display area to deleting the hold display, for example. It is possible to execute a pending announcement effect that suggests a big hit expectation degree for a variable display of decorative patterns (variable display of special symbols).

Further, in the present embodiment, during the display period of the hold display, it is possible to execute the hold change effect that suggests that the display mode of the hold display may change. In addition, the hold change effect and the hold notice effect during the display period of the hold display and before the change corresponding to the hold is also referred to as a hold prefetch effect.

For example, the peripheral control ROM holds a pending notice table (not shown) that defines the timing of changing the display mode of the pending display. Specifically, for example, the pending notice table defines, for each final pending color, the change timing of the display mode of the pending display and the display mode (display color) of the pending display at the time of winning and each change timing. The start time, the change time, and the end time of the special symbol fluctuation after the winning prize and before the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the winning prize are an example of the change timing.

It is desirable that the display mode of the hold display at each change timing is a hold color having a big hit expectation degree equal to or lower than the big hit expectation degree of the final hold color. Further, it is desirable that the jackpot expectation degree indicated by the hold display is not demoted at each change timing (for example, it is desirable that the blue hold display does not change to the white hold display). It should be noted that there may be different pending notice tables for each number of pending memories at the time of winning.

Note that, for example, at the start of the special symbol fluctuation that was held before the hold display, it is an example of the change timing of the display mode of the hold display described above. Also, for example, during the special symbol change corresponding to the hold display. The timing of changing the display mode of the hold display may be provided.

Note that the pre-reading effect including the hold pre-reading effect is executed based on the pre-determination command transmitted from the main control MPU 1311 to the peripheral control board 1510 in the pre-determination process performed in the starting mouth winning time process of step S116 of FIG. 142. It

Hereinafter, the pre-determination process in the starting mouth winning process for the first special symbol will be described. Since the same applies to the preliminary determination process in the starting mouth winning process for the second special symbol, only the first special symbol will be described here. In the pre-determination process, the main control MPU 1311 compares the pre-determination table (not shown) with the special random number, the pattern random number, the reach random number, and the variation random number to determine whether or not to be a big hit. The type of big hit, if not the big hit, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600, or the mode type of the game effect to be executed is specified.

Then, the specified pre-determination information (whether or not it is a big hit, if it is a big hit, the type of big hit, if it is not a big hit, whether the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600, Depending on the type of the game effect to be executed), the type of the acquired special random number (first special random number), and the number of reserved memories (the value of the number of reserved counters) stored corresponding to the acquired special random number. Set the predetermination command. For example, in the production pre-judgment process for the first special symbol, the specified pre-judgment information, that the first special random number has been acquired, and the first reserved memory number, set the first special symbol pre-judgment command ..

Then, by sending a pre-determination command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the number of reserved memories stored corresponding to the starting opening in which the start winning is generated, a special symbol based on the generated starting winning. Whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit, if it is a big hit, the kind of big hit, if it is not a big hit, a reach effect is executed as a game effect executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, or is executed. The peripheral control IC 1510a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 can grasp the preliminary determination information such as the mode type of the game effect to be performed before starting the variable display according to the start winning.

FIG. 162 shows the appearance rate of each final retained color for each variation pattern of setting 1 when the variation pattern is determined by the variation pattern table of FIG. 160 and the final retained color is determined by the final retained color table of FIG. 161. Is an example of a table showing FIG. 163 is an example of a table showing the appearance rate of each final reserved color for each variation pattern of setting 3 in the same case. FIG. 164 is an example of a table showing the appearance rate of each final reserved color for each variation pattern of setting 5 in the same case. According to FIGS. 162 to 164, the higher the setting, the higher the appearance rate of the display mode of the higher-ranked jackpot expectation hold display. The higher the expectation of jackpot for each color, the higher the setting. It should be noted that these appearance rates and expectations are calculated based on the jackpot probability of each setting described above, and regarding the final reserved color table, the final reserved color table of FIG. 161 is used in all settings. It is supposed to be.

The peripheral control ROM may hold a final reserved color table that is different for each setting. In this case, for example, in the display mode of the same hold display, the selection ratio of the last hold color table of the last hold color is set such that the higher the setting, the higher the jackpot expectation. Thereby, for example, when a big hit is won in the special symbol variation corresponding to the red reserved display, the expectation to the higher setting is also increased, so that the player can obtain a feeling of uplifting.

Further, for example, in the display mode of the hold display other than white that is selected most, for the display mode of the same hold display, the final hold color of the final hold color table is set so that the lower the setting, the higher the big hit expectation degree becomes. The selection rate may be set (specifically, for example, the jackpot expectation degree in the case where the hold display mode is red is 50% in the setting 1 with the low setting, and 30 in the setting 6 with the high setting. Set to be%). As a result, for example, even if you do not win the big hit in the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the red reserved display, the degree of expectation for the high setting is high, so you can suppress the discouragement of the player and continue the game. Can be promoted.

Further, for example, in the display mode of the hold display other than the most selected white, for the display mode of the same hold display, the final hold color of the final hold color table is set so that the jackpot expectation is almost common in all settings. The selection rate of may be set. As a result, for example, it becomes difficult to estimate the setting from the combination of the final holding color and the special lottery result, and the player can concentrate only on the expectation for the special lottery result from the display mode of the hold display. In addition, for example, in the case where the big symbol is not won in the special symbol variation corresponding to the display mode of red, it is possible to prevent the possibility of the low setting from increasing.

[12-14-3. Notice production table]
FIG. 165 is an example of a notice production table. The notice production table is stored in the peripheral control ROM, for example. The notice production table holds, for example, the selection rate of the notice production for each variation pattern (specified by the winning type of the special lottery result, the identifier of the variation pattern, and the outline of the production of the variation pattern).

In the example of FIG. 165, the notice effect includes a dialogue effect, a weather change effect, and a rival horse effect. The dialogue production is, for example, a dialogue in which a predetermined character is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in the variation and says a dialogue. The weather change effect is, for example, an effect in which the weather in the background of the decorative pattern displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 changes in the change. The rival horse effect is an effect in which a rival horse of a horse brought up by the hero character appears on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in the variation.

Note that the setting suggestion effect can be executed using the notice effect, and the notice effect table stores the selection rate of each notice effect depending on whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed. In the example of FIG. 165, “without set” indicates that the setting suggestion effect is not executed, and “with set” indicates that the setting suggestion effect is executed. The peripheral control MPU determines the notice effect to be executed based on the variation pattern and the selection rate of the notice effect table.

In each notice effect in each variation pattern of the notice effect table, it is desirable that the selection rate without the setting suggestion effect is sufficiently higher than the selection rate with the setting suggestion effect. If the selection rate with setting suggestion effect is high, setting suggestion effect frequently occurs. This is because, if the frequency of occurrence of the setting suggesting effect suggesting the high setting is low in this state, the player is likely to stop the game in a short time. In other words, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1, which is a low setting, is significantly reduced, which may impose an excessive burden on the hall. On the contrary, for example, when the frequency of the setting suggesting effect suggesting the high setting is high, the number of players who speculate that the setting of the other pachinko machines 1 in the hall is low increases and the other pachinko machines 1 operate. There is a risk that the rate will drop and the hall will be overloaded.

Note that the selection rate of the variation patterns in the variation pattern table is determined so that the jackpot expectation degree improves as the number of pseudo-repetitions increases, but, for example, the appearance rate of the setting suggestive effect does not change substantially depending on the number of pseudo-repetitions. The selection rate of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect in the notice effect table is determined. That is, for example, with respect to the variation patterns whose outlines are “SP reach”, “SP reach+pseudo 1”, and “SP reach+pseudo 2”, the pseudo setting suggestion effect is set so that the appearance rates of the setting suggestion effect are substantially the same. The selection rate of whether or not to execute is determined. As a result, for a variation pattern with a small number of pseudo-repetitions, the jackpot expectation is low, but the occurrence rate of the setting suggestive effect is not low compared with a variation pattern with a large number of pseudo-repetitions, so the player has a low number of pseudo-repetitions. It is possible to be interested in the fluctuation of a small fluctuation pattern.

In addition, the selection rate of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect in the notice effect table may be determined so that the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect becomes higher as the number of times of pseudo repetition increases, or as the number of pseudo repetitions decreases, The selection rate of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect may be determined in the notice effect table so that the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect is high. In addition, when the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect is increased as the number of pseudo-repetitions is decreased, the above-mentioned problem may occur. Also, it is preferable to set the numerical values to be substantially equal (specifically, for example, if there is a dialogue effect set when the variation pattern 5 is selected at the time of leaving, 15/256, and if there is a dialogue production effect when the variation pattern 6 is selected, 16/256, etc.).

Also, a variation pattern with a high jackpot expectation degree (or an effect that is not a variation pattern with a high jackpot expectation degree, but has a relatively high expectation degree of the produced effect (for example, an effect in which the jackpot expectation degree is a predetermined value or more) ), the selection rate of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect may be determined in the notice effect table so that the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect becomes higher. Specifically, for example, in order of “normal fluctuation”, fluctuation including “normal reach”, fluctuation including “SP reach”, and fluctuation including “movie reach”, the appearance rate of the setting suggestive effect becomes high, The selection rate of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect in the notice effect table may be determined.

Further, in the example of FIG. 165, there is a possibility that the setting suggestion effect will occur in all the notice effects (speech effect, weather change effect, and rival horse effect), but for example, the notice effect in which the setting suggestion effect does not occur is May exist.

Also, if the outline of the variation pattern is the same, the special lottery result is a big hit without a certainty change than the big lottery with a certainty change, so that the appearance rate of the setting suggestive effect is higher, The selection rate of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect in the notice effect table may be determined. As a result, the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect is high when the big hit without probability change is won, and it is possible to reduce the player's discouragement that the probability change is not given. In the above example, the three types of notice effects, that is, the line effect, the weather change effect, and the rival horse effect have been described, but needless to say, the number is not limited to three.

[12-14-4. Dialogue production]
Hereinafter, the details of the dialogue production among the announcement productions will be described. When the dialogue control without the setting suggestion presentation is selected as the notice presentation, the peripheral control MPU causes the character A to appear on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, for example, after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) from the start of the variation. , "What day is it today?" is displayed as the dialogue of character A. Then, the peripheral control MPU causes the character B to appear on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, for example, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) from the display of the character A's dialogue, and the character B's dialogue is "Come...". Is displayed. Note that, for example, the dialogues of the character A and the character B may indicate a big hit expectation degree of the variation.

On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU selects the dialogue of the character B (the dialogue suggesting the setting) from the dialogue production table described below when the dialogue production with the setting suggestion production is selected as the notice production. The peripheral control MPU causes the main liquid crystal display device 1600 to display, for example, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the change (for example, 2 seconds later, that is, the same timing as the timing when the character A appears in the case without the above setting suggestion effect). The character A appears and the dialogue of the character A is displayed as "what day is it today?" The peripheral control MPU causes the main liquid crystal display device 1600 to display the character B, for example, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) from the display of the character A's words, and displays the selected character B's words. In addition, the dialogue of the character A may be a dialogue that directly expresses a set value such as "Do you know the setting of this stand today?"

FIG. 166 is an example of a dialogue production table. The speech production table is stored in the peripheral control ROM, for example. The dialogue production table holds the production type of dialogue production and the selection rate of the dialogue contents of the character B for each setting. In addition, the effect type includes “a pattern that is halfway together” and “a pattern that suddenly branches”, and there is a “Kamonane” dialogue and a “determined dialogue” for each of the two patterns. ..

Each of the dialogues belonging to the "halfway together pattern" includes the same dialogue halfway and then branches to a different dialogue. In the example of FIG. 166, all the dialogues that belong to the “halfway together pattern” start with “Cha...” and then branch to different dialogues. On the other hand, dialogues that belong to the "suddenly branched pattern" are branched to different dialogues from the beginning. In addition, it is preferable that the selection rate of the dialogue belonging to the “halfway together pattern” is higher than the selection rate of the dialogue belonging to the “suddenly branched pattern”. This is to pull expectations.

The lines belonging to "Kamone system" are lines that suggest the current setting but do not announce the setting definitely. For example, “But, I feel like it was an even number of days...” is a line of “Kamone system” that suggests even number setting. "But it feels like it was an even number of days..." is a line in the "kamon" series, so the selection rate is determined so that it may appear even in odd settings. However, it is assumed that the selection rate of the dialogue in the odd setting is sufficiently lower than the selection rate of the dialogue in the even setting. Similarly, with respect to the dialogues of other "Kamonese", the selection rate of the dialogue in the setting suggested by the dialogue is sufficiently higher than the selection rate of the dialogue in the other setting.

On the other hand, the dialogue belonging to the "determined system" is the dialogue that definitely announces the setting. For example, "Ah! I remembered! Even days!" is a "determined line" that definitely announces even settings. Therefore, the selectivity of the dialogue in the odd setting is 0, and the selectivity exceeds 0 only in the even setting.

In addition, it is desirable that the selection rate of the dialogue belonging to the "Kamone system" is higher than the selection rate of the dialogue belonging to the "determined system". If the selection rate of dialogue belonging to the "determined system" is high, there is a sufficient possibility that the player will be definitively notified of the high setting within a short time after the game starts. This is because there is a certain number of players who presume that the setting of the pachinko machine 1 is not good, which may reduce the operation of other game machines.

In addition, in the dialogue production when performing a specific reach production such as SP reach or movie reach, or in the dialogue production when performing pseudo-relation, the dialogue for suggesting the setting of the character B is written in red (in the big hit expectation suggestion production, etc. The dialogue of the normal production may be displayed in white. As a result, it becomes easier for the player to distinguish the dialogue of the expected suggestion production from the dialogue of the set suggestion production, so that two types of production (setting suggestion production and expectation suggestion production) coexist without making the player feel unnatural. Can be made. The expectation suggestion effect is an effect that indicates that the jackpot expectation degree in the special symbol variation is a predetermined value, and specifically, a notice effect that suggests an expectation for the jackpot within one variation, or a plurality of notice effects. Includes look-ahead production that suggests expectations for jackpots across fluctuations in.

Although not shown, the peripheral control MPU may determine the setting suggestion effect by a lottery table similar to the speech effect table, although not shown for the weather change effect and the rival horse effect. For example, in the setting suggestion effect in the weather change effect, a thundercloud is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and a number such as "246?" is displayed due to a thunderlight (an effect of "Kamonane system" that suggests even setting). In the setting suggestion effect in the rival horse effect, the combined horse effect by the horse raised by the main character and the rival horse is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and for example, a number such as “135?” is displayed on the number of the rival horse. Yes (the production of "Kamone system" that suggests odd settings).

In the above example, "What day is it today?" was displayed as the dialogue for character A in the dialogue production, but in addition to this dialogue, character A "what was the test last week?", Character B is like “66 points! (“Definite system” that confirms setting 6)” and “I think it was 55 points (“Kamonane system” that suggests setting 5)” You may make it provide several variation with respect to production (for example, dialogue production). In that case, it is preferable that the B effect (for example, the effect of listening to the test score) is more reliable than the A effect (for example, the effect of listening to the date) with respect to the setting suggestion. Specifically, for example, although the expectation level of setting 6 is 30% when "I feel like it was a day with 6 ... (Kamone system)" in A production, but in B production " It is good to set the expectation level, which is setting 6 when the score is 66 points...

[12-14-5. Another example of notice production table]
FIG. 167 shows another example of the notice production table. In the example of FIG. 167, the notice production table 173 holds the selection ratio of the notice production for each variation pattern. Unlike the example of FIG. 165, the notice production table of FIG. 167 does not hold information on whether or not the setting suggestion production is executed. That is, the peripheral control MPU selects only the type of the notice effect according to the selection rate corresponding to the variation pattern of the notice effect table in FIG. 167.

Then, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not to execute the setting suggestive effect, based on the variation pattern and the type of the selected notice effect. FIG. 168(A) is an example of a setting suggestion effect table showing distribution of setting suggestive effect execution presence or absence when the outline of the change pattern is “normal change” and “speech effect” is selected as the notice effect. is there. FIG. 168(B) is an example of a setting suggestion effect table showing distribution of whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed when the outline of the variation pattern is “normal reach+1 symbol” and “speech effect” is selected as the notice effect. Is. A setting suggestion effect table for all combinations of variation patterns and notice effects as shown in FIG. 168 is stored in the peripheral control ROM in advance.

In the above example, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not to execute the setting suggestive effect after determining the content of the notice effect, but determines whether or not to execute the setting suggestive effect and then determines the content of the notice effect. You may. By using such a method, although the amount of data is larger than in the table shown in FIG. 165, the appearance rate and reliability of the effect can be set in detail. In addition, the table shown in FIG. 165 and the processing shown in this another example may be combined.

[12-14-6. Specific example of setting suggestion production]
FIG. 169 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the outline of the setting suggestion effect. 169 (A), (B), (C) in the order of production, the setting suggestion in the case where "4, 5 or 6 is a day!" is selected as the dialogue for character B in the dialogue production It is an outline of the production.

In FIG. 169(A), the special symbol variation starts. In FIG. 169(B), after the start of the special symbol variation, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 displays the character B's dialogue "It is a day with 4 or 5 or 6!". In FIG. 169(C), the dialogue is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 until the end of the special symbol variation.

169(A), (D), and (E) in order are the outlines of the setting suggestion effects when "6 is the day with 6!" is selected as the words of character B in the dialog effects. is there. 169 (A), (D), in the production proceeding in the order of (E), while the setting suggestion production starts from the start of the special symbol variation, the setting suggested in the setting suggestion production is during the end of the special symbol variation. has been edited. Specifically, in FIG. 169(D), after the start of the special symbol variation, the main character liquid crystal display device 1600 displays the character B's dialogue “4, 5 or 6 is the day!”. In FIG. 169(E), at the end of the special symbol variation, the character B's dialogue “It's a day with 6!” is displayed. That is, the setting suggested by the character B's dialogue has been promoted.

Specifically, for example, one or more scenarios indicating the timing of dialogue change and the dialogue at each timing, and the selection rate of each scenario are set for each dialogue (finally displayed dialogue) in the dialogue production table. It may be defined for each. The peripheral control MPU displays the dialogue at the timing when the dialogue is changed according to the selected scenario.

In this case, it is desirable that the dialogue production table does not hold a scenario in which the suggested setting may be demoted. Specifically, for example, the dialogue production table may not hold a scenario in which the dialogue "It's an even number of days!" is displayed after the dialogue "It's a day with 4 or 5 or 6!" desirable.

Further, in the example of FIG. 169, only the setting suggesting effect is performed in the special symbol variation, but other effects (for example, an effect suggesting a jackpot expectation degree) may be executed in parallel. Although the example in which the dialogue of the character B is promoted at the end of the special symbol change is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be promoted before the end of the special symbol change. Although character A appears before the words of character B, character A speaks to character B, but the illustration is omitted.

FIG. 170 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the outline of the setting suggestion effect as the prefetch effect. In FIG. 170(A), the game ball B has been won in the first starting opening 2002 during the special symbol change in the state where the special symbol change is not held. Subsequently, in FIG. 170(B), immediately after the game ball B is won in the first starting opening 2002, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 displays the character B's dialogue “4, 5 or 6 is the day!”. To be done. In this case, since the remaining time of the special symbol that has already changed becomes indefinite, the character B may be displayed immediately without displaying the character A, or the character B may be displayed after a lapse of a predetermined time from winning. Alternatively, the character A may be displayed first and then the character B may be displayed. In addition, in FIG. 170(B), the number of holdings indicated by the display in the holding display area is increased by one.

Subsequently, in FIG. 170(C), all the decorative symbols are stopped, and the special symbol variation ends. Further, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 still displays the character B's dialogue "It's a day with 4 or 5 or 6!". Subsequently, in FIG. 170(D), the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning is started. Further, at the same time as the start of the special symbol variation, the dialogue of character B displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 changes to “the day when 5 or 6 is attached!”. That is, the setting indicated by the dialogue of character B has been promoted.

Subsequently, in FIG. 170(E), all the decorative symbols are stopped, and the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning is finished. At the end of the change of the special symbol corresponding to the winning, the dialogue of the character B displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 changes to “It is a day with 6!”. That is, the setting indicated by the dialogue of character B has been promoted.

Note that, for example, the peripheral control ROM holds a dialogue prefetching effect table (not shown) that defines the dialogue of the character B and the change timing of the dialogue. Specifically, for example, the dialogue prefetch production table defines the dialogue change timing of the character B and the dialogue of the character B at the time of winning and at each change timing. The start time, the change time, and the end time of the special symbol fluctuation after the winning prize and before the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the winning prize are an example of the change timing. It is desirable that the setting suggested by the dialogue should not be demoted at each change timing. It should be noted that a different dialogue prefetching effect table may exist for each of the number of reserved memories when winning. When the peripheral control MPU determines to execute the prefetching effect based on the preliminary determination command, the peripheral control MPU executes the prefetching effect by referring to the prefetching effect table at a predetermined ratio, for example. In addition, in the case of promotion, in FIG. 170, promotion is performed one step at a time (“4 or 5 or 6 is the date!”, “5 or 6 is the date!”, “6 is the date. !" in the order of "!") may be promoted in multiple stages at once. Specifically, for example, in FIG. 170, the dialogue (E) may be displayed without displaying the dialogue (D).

The setting suggestion effect may be executed under a specific situation other than the above. For example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed when the condition of the continuous reservation is satisfied. The holding sequence means that the next big hit is realized by a special random number that is held until the end of the big hit game. In this case, for example, the setting suggestion effect is executed after the holding is performed and before the jackpot game is finished. Further, for example, when the specific variation pattern continues for a predetermined number of times, the setting suggestion effect may be executed in the predetermined number of special symbol variations.

[12-15. Restriction of setting suggestion]
Hereinafter, the limitation of the setting suggestive effect under a specific condition will be described.

[12-15-1. Limitation of setting suggestion production after special state]
First, the limitation of the setting suggestion effect after the special state will be described. Below, both the setting confirmation mode and the error occurrence are examples of special states. The setting confirmation mode is a mode for displaying the set value, which starts when it is determined in the setting confirmation process that the setting display condition is satisfied (step S8062: YES).

FIG. 171(A) is an example of the effect confirmation table in the setting confirmation mode. FIG. 171(B) is an example of an error occurrence effect restriction table. The setting confirmation mode effect restriction table and the error occurrence effect restriction table are stored in the peripheral control ROM, for example.

[12-15-1-1. Limitation of setting suggestion after setting confirmation mode]
First, the effect confirmation table in the setting confirmation mode will be described. In the setting confirmation mode effect restriction table, when the setting confirmation mode is started while the change (hereinafter referred to as setting suggestion change) determined to execute the setting suggestion effect is being executed or is being held, A restriction flag indicating whether or not to limit the setting suggestion effect is stored.

In the setting confirmation mode, the effect restriction table is set in the setting confirmation mode before the start of the setting suggestion effect (that is, when the effect related to the setting suggestion is not executed (displayed) although the setting suggestion effect is determined to be performed). A record 1701 that stores a restriction flag in the case where is started, and after the start of the setting suggestion effect in the setting suggestion variation (that is, when the effect related to the setting suggestion is determined to be performed (displayed)) A record 1702 that stores a restriction flag when the setting confirmation mode is started.

When the setting confirmation process shown in FIG. 159 is performed, the game is stopped at the start of the setting confirmation mode, and when the setting confirmation process shown in FIG. 156 is performed, the game proceeds even during the setting confirmation mode. .. Accordingly, the setting confirmation mode effect restriction table stores a column 1703 that stores a restriction flag when the game is stopped when the setting confirmation mode starts, and a restriction flag when the game progresses even during the setting confirmation mode. And a column 1704.

Further, if the game progresses even during the setting confirmation mode, a new setting suggestion variation may be suspended by the game ball winning the starting opening during the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, the column 1704 includes a column 1705 that stores a restriction flag in a new setting suggestion change corresponding to winning at the starting opening in the setting confirmation mode. Each restriction flag in the setting confirmation mode effect restriction table indicates, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is manufactured or in a hall or the like, an operation medium provided in the pachinko machine 1 (an operation medium that cannot be operated by the player. It can be set depending on the operation medium that can be operated). In the setting confirmation mode, when a game ball enters the starting opening, the lottery information may not be acquired and the prize ball may not be executed for the game ball. However, even in such a case, in the special symbol fluctuation that is already held, it is executed during the setting confirmation mode or after the setting change mode ends.

When the game is stopped at the start of the setting confirmation mode, one of the fields 1706 and 1707 has a value of 1 and the other has a value of 0, the fields 1708 to 1711 have a value of 0, and the fields 1712 and 1713 One value is 1 and the other value is 0, and the values of the fields 1714 to 1717 are 0.

Further, when the game progresses even in the setting confirmation mode, the value of the field 1706 and the field 1707 is 0, the value of one of the field 1708 and the field 1709 is 1 and the value of the other one is 0, and the field 1710. And one of the values of the field 1711 is 1 and the other is 0, the values of the fields 1712 and 1713 are 0, one of the fields 1714 and 1715 is 1 and the other is 0, The value of one of the fields 1716 and 1717 is 1 and the value of the other is 0.

The peripheral control MPU executes the restriction pattern of the setting suggestion effect in accordance with the restriction flag in each state defined in the setting restriction mode start effect restriction table and the error occurrence effect restriction table. Hereinafter, these restriction patterns will be described.

(1) About the case where the setting confirmation mode is started before the setting suggesting effect is started, and the game is stopped when the setting confirmation mode is started.

(1-1) The setting suggestion effect is executed after the game is restarted (the value of the field 1706 is 1 and the value of the field 1707 is 0). By executing the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to inform the player that the setting confirmation mode has been executed instead of the setting change mode in which the setting change processing is executed, and a sense of security that the result of the game is not affected. Can be given.

(1-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed after the game is restarted (the value of the field 1706 is 0 and the value of the field 1707 is 1). For example, when a voice or an image indicating that the setting is being confirmed is output to the various speakers and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 during the setting confirmation mode, the setting suggestion effect is not executed in this way to set the state during the setting confirmation mode. However, it is possible to provide the player with an expectation that the setting may have been changed to a high setting.

(2) Regarding the setting suggestion effect of the setting suggestion variation when the setting confirmation mode is started before the start of the setting suggestion effect, and the game progresses even during the setting confirmation mode.

(2-1) The setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1708 is 1 and the value of the field 1709 is 0). Since the game progresses even during the setting confirmation mode, the operation is not lost. When the sound and image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress are output to various speakers and the main liquid crystal display device 1600, these sound and image are given priority over the sound and image in the setting suggestion effect. Output. At this time, in order not to make the player feel uncomfortable, an image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 so that a part or all of the setting suggestion effect is displayed. .. In addition, in order to provide the player with an expectation that "when the setting suggestion effect was displayed" and "the setting suggestion effect suggesting the high setting may have been displayed", all of the setting suggestion effects are provided. An image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 so as to be hidden.

(2-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed (the value of the field 1708 is 0 and the value of the field 1709 is 1). For example, when the player confirms the setting value, if the setting suggestion by the setting suggesting effect and the actual setting are different (for example, when the setting value is 1, a high setting such as "is it a high setting?" If a suggestion effect is generated), the player may feel distrust of the gaming machine, and such a situation can be avoided by not executing the setting suggestion effect.

(2') New setting suggestion fluctuation corresponding to winning at the starting mouth in the setting confirmation mode when the setting confirmation mode is started before the start of the setting suggestion production and the game progresses even during the setting confirmation mode About setting suggestion production of.

(2'-1) The setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1710 is 1 and the value of the field 1711 is 0). By executing the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to notify the player that the setting confirmation mode is executed instead of the setting change mode, and it is possible to give a sense of security that the result of the game is not affected.

(2'-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed (the value of the field 1710 is 0 and the value of the field 1711 is 1). For example, if the hall shifts to the setting confirmation mode because the hall is in doubt, the setting value may be changed thereafter. When the setting suggestion effect is executed in such a case, the setting suggestion effect is different from the actual setting (for example, the setting confirmation effect is changed to a different setting while the display confirming the even number setting is performed). There is a possibility that an odd number setting will be confirmed in the subsequent setting suggestion effect), so a trouble may occur between the hall and the player. By not executing the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to avoid such a situation.

It is desirable that the image, the sound, the light, and the like indicating the above-mentioned setting confirmation state be displayed regardless of the value of the above-mentioned field. In addition, since it may be assumed that a new winning is valid even when the game is stopped after shifting to the setting confirmation state, in that case, the same process as the process of advancing the game may be performed.

(3) The setting confirmation mode starts while the setting suggestion is changing and after the setting suggestion effect is started (when the setting suggestion effect is displayed and after the setting suggestion effect is displayed and the display of the setting suggestion effect is finished). And, about the case where the game is stopped when the setting confirmation mode starts.

(3-1) The setting suggestion effect is restarted after the game is restarted (the value of the field 1712 is 1 and the value of the field 1713 is 0). If the setting suggestion effect that has been started is canceled, the player may feel distrust that the setting may have been changed, and by restarting the setting suggestion effect after restarting the game, Occurrence of a situation can be avoided.

(3-2) The setting suggestion effect is not restarted after the game is restarted (the value of the field 1712 is 0 and the value of the field 1713 is 1). For example, when a voice or an image indicating that the setting is being confirmed is output to the various speakers and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 during the setting confirmation mode, the setting suggestion effect is not executed in this way to set the state during the setting confirmation mode. However, it is possible to provide the player with an expectation that the setting may have been changed to a high setting.

(4) The setting confirmation mode starts while the setting suggestion is changing and after the setting suggestion effect is started (when the setting suggestion effect is displayed and after the setting suggestion effect is displayed and the setting suggestion effect is displayed). And, about the setting suggestion effect of the setting suggestion variation when the game progresses even in the setting confirmation mode.

(4-1) The setting suggestion effect is continued (the value of the field 1714 is 1 and the value of the field 1715 is 0). Since the game progresses even during the setting confirmation mode, the operation is not lost. When the sound and image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress are output to various speakers and the main liquid crystal display device 1600, these sound and image are given priority over the sound and image in the setting suggestion effect. Output. At this time, in order not to make the player feel uncomfortable, an image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 so that a part or all of the setting suggestion effect is displayed. (The image related to the setting suggestion effect and the image indicating the setting confirmation mode do not overlap with each other, or the image related to the setting suggestion effect does not overlap with the character indicating the setting confirmation mode such as “during setting confirmation mode”. ). Note that this display and the like can be performed in the same manner even when an error described later occurs. The term "does not overlap" as used herein means that the appearances from the player do not overlap, not the image data actually set in the RAM.

In addition, in order to provide the player with an expectation that "when the setting suggestion effect was displayed" and "the setting suggestion effect suggesting the high setting may have been displayed", all of the setting suggestion effects are provided. An image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 so as to be hidden.

(4-2) The setting suggestion effect is stopped (the value of the field 1714 is 0 and the value of the field 1715 is 1). For example, when the player confirms the setting value, if the setting suggestion by the setting suggesting effect and the actual setting are different (for example, when the setting value is 1, a high setting such as "is it a high setting?" If a suggestion effect is generated), the player may feel distrust of the gaming machine, and such a situation can be avoided by not executing the setting suggestion effect.

(4') New in response to winning at the starting mouth during the setting confirmation mode when the setting confirmation mode starts during the setting suggestion variation and after the setting suggestion production starts, and the game progresses during the setting confirmation mode. About setting suggestion production of various setting suggestion changes.

(4'-1) The setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1716 is 1 and the value of the field 1717 is 0). By executing the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to notify the player that the setting confirmation mode is executed instead of the setting change mode, and it is possible to give a sense of security that the result of the game is not affected.

(4'-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed (the value of the field 1716 is 0 and the value of the field 1717 is 1). For example, if the hall shifts to the setting confirmation mode because the hall is in doubt, the setting value may be changed thereafter. When the setting suggestion effect is executed in such a case, the setting suggestion effect is different from the actual setting (for example, the setting confirmation effect is changed to a different setting while the display confirming the even number setting is performed). Since a display confirming the odd number setting is displayed in the setting suggestion effect later), a trouble may occur between the hall and the player. By not executing the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to avoid such a situation.

In the case where the game progresses even in the setting confirmation mode, when the setting confirmation mode spans a plurality of fluctuations, for example, the peripheral control MPU, for example, based on the notification from the main control MPU 1311, after the setting confirmation mode is started. When the first symbol is determined or the next variation starts, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation mode. When it is determined that the mode is the setting confirmation mode, the peripheral control MPU performs the setting suggestion effect along with the change corresponding to the hold if the newly won hold is the setting suggestion change. By executing the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to inform the player that the setting confirmation mode has been executed instead of the setting change mode in which the setting change processing is executed, and a sense of security that the result of the game is not affected. Can be given.

Further, the peripheral control MPU may not execute the setting suggestion effect in this case. When the player confirms the setting value, if the setting suggestion by the setting suggesting effect is different from the actual setting (for example, when the setting value is 1, it suggests a high setting such as "is it a high setting?" When the effect occurs, the player may feel distrust of the gaming machine, and such a situation can be avoided by not executing the setting suggestion effect.

In this way, when the setting suggestive effect is performed and when the setting suggestive effect is not performed, the effect is exerted on both sides. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that meets the needs of the business style of.

[12-15-1-2. Limitation of setting suggestion performance when an error occurs]
Next, the effect occurrence time limit table will be described with reference to FIG. 171(B). When an error occurs during execution or suspension of a change (hereinafter referred to as “setting suggestion change” in this chapter) that is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect, the error effect production limit table is used to suggest the setting suggestion effect. Stores a restriction flag indicating whether or not to restrict.

The error occurrence effect restriction table includes a record 1801 that stores a restriction flag when an error occurs before the setting suggestion effect starts, and an error occurs during the setting suggestion change and after the setting suggestion effect starts in the setting suggestion change. And a record 1802 that stores the restriction flag in the case of doing so.

The error includes a strong error that is reported by stopping the game and a weak error that is reported while the game is in progress. The error that detects the illegal magnetism in the firing ball sensor 1020 and the game area 5a is an example of a strong error. The full tank error (an error indicating that the game ball stored in the foul cover unit 520 is full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535) is an example of a weak error.

Therefore, an error production effect restriction table, a column 1803 for storing a restriction flag corresponding to an error notified when the game is stopped, and a column 1804 for storing a restriction flag corresponding to an error notified while the game is in progress. ,including.

Further, if the game progresses even while the error is occurring, a new setting suggestion variation may be suspended by the game ball winning the starting opening while the error is occurring. Therefore, the column 1804 includes a column 1805 that stores a restriction flag in a new setting suggestion change corresponding to the winning of the starting opening during the error.

The restriction flag in the error occurrence effect restriction table is, for example, at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 1 or in a hall or the like, an operation medium provided in the pachinko machine 1 (a player can operate an operation medium that cannot be operated by the player). It may be an operation medium).

In the error occurrence effect restriction table, one of the fields 1806 and 1807 has a value of 1 and the other has a value of 0, and one of the fields 1808 and 1809 has a value of 1 and the other has a value of 0. One of the fields 1810 and 1811 has a value of 1 and the other has a value of 0, one of the fields 1812 and 1813 has a value of 1 and the other has a value of 0, and one of fields 1814 and 1815 has a value of The value of 1 and the other is 0, and the value of one of the fields 1816 and 1817 is 1 and the value of the other is 0.

The peripheral control MPU executes the restriction pattern of the setting suggestion effect according to the restriction flag of each case defined in the error occurrence effect restriction table. Hereinafter, these restriction patterns will be described.

(1) About the case where an error starts before the start of setting suggestion production, and the game is stopped when the error occurs (strong error).

(1-1) The setting suggestion effect is executed after the game is restarted (the value of the field 1806 is 1 and the value of the field 1807 is 0). By executing the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to inform the player that the setting has not been changed when the error is released by the hall clerk, and give a sense of security that the result of the game is not affected. it can.

(1-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed after the game is restarted (the value of the field 1806 is 0 and the value of the field 1807 is 1). As a result, when an error occurs, a situation may occur that is disadvantageous to the player that the setting suggestion effect is not executed. Therefore, the player can proceed with the game without causing an error, Can proceed smoothly and reduce the burden on the hall.

(2) Regarding the setting suggestion effect of the setting suggestion change when an error occurs before the start of the setting suggestion effect, and the game progresses even after the occurrence of the error (weak error).

(2-1) The setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1808 is 1 and the value of the field 1809 is 0). As a result, the game progresses even while the error occurs, so the operation of the gaming machine is not reduced. Further, since the setting suggestion effect is generated even when the error occurs, the interest of the player can be improved. When the voice and the image indicating that an error is occurring are output to the various speakers and the main liquid crystal display device 1600, these voice and the image are output prior to the voice and the image in the setting suggestion effect. To do. At this time, in order not to make the player feel uncomfortable, an image indicating that an error is occurring is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 so that a part or all of the setting suggestion effect is displayed. In addition, in order to provide the player with an expectation that "when the setting suggestion effect was displayed" and "the setting suggestion effect suggesting the high setting may have been displayed", all of the setting suggestion effects are provided. An image indicating that an error is occurring may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 so as to be hidden.

(2-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed (the value of the field 1808 is 0 and the value of the field 1809 is 1). As a result, when an error occurs, a situation may occur that is disadvantageous to the player that the setting suggestion effect is not executed. Therefore, the player can proceed with the game without causing an error, Can proceed smoothly and reduce the burden on the hall.

(2') Setting suggestion When an error occurs before the start of production, and the game progresses even while the error is occurring (weak error), a new setting suggestion corresponding to winning at the starting mouth during the error occurring About setting suggestion of fluctuation.

(2'-1) The setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1810 is 1 and the value of the field 1811 is 0). As a result, the game progresses even while the error occurs, so the operation of the gaming machine is not reduced. Further, since the setting suggestion effect is generated even when the error occurs, the interest of the player can be improved.

(2'-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed (the value of the field 1810 is 0 and the value of the field 1811 is 1). As a result, the setting suggestion effect is not executed for the winning during the error, so that the player cancels the launch of the game ball and releases the error early.

(3) In the case where an error occurs during the setting suggestion change and after the start of the setting suggestion effect, and the game is stopped when the error occurs (strong error).

(3-1) The setting suggestion effect is restarted after the game is restarted (the value of the field 1812 is 1 and the value of the field 1813 is 0). If the setting suggestion effect that has been started is canceled, the player may feel distrust that the setting may have been changed, and by restarting the setting suggestion effect after restarting the game, Occurrence of a situation can be avoided.

(3-2) The setting suggestion effect is not restarted after the game is restarted (the value of the field 1812 is 0 and the value of the field 1813 is 1). As a result, when an error occurs, a situation may occur that is disadvantageous to the player that the setting suggestion effect is stopped, so that the player can proceed with the game so as not to generate an error, Can proceed smoothly and reduce the burden on the hall.

(4) Regarding the setting suggestion effect of the setting suggestion change when the error occurs during the setting suggestion change and after the start of the setting suggestion effect, and the game progresses even when the error occurs (weak error).

(4-1) The setting suggestion effect is continued (the value of the field 1814 is 1 and the value of the field 1815 is 0). As a result, the game progresses even while the error occurs, so the operation of the gaming machine is not reduced. Further, since the setting suggestion effect is generated even when the error occurs, the interest of the player can be improved. When the voice and the image indicating that an error is occurring are output to the various speakers and the main liquid crystal display device 1600, these voice and the image are output prior to the voice and the image in the setting suggestion effect. To do. At this time, in order not to make the player feel uncomfortable, an image indicating that an error is occurring is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 so that a part or all of the setting suggestion effect is displayed. Also, in order to provide the player with the expectation of "when the setting suggestion effect was displayed" and "when the setting suggestion effect indicating the high setting was displayed", all of the setting suggestion effects should be hidden. Then, an image indicating that an error is occurring may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

(4-2) The setting suggestion effect is stopped (the value of the field 1814 is 0 and the value of the field 1815 is 1). As a result, when an error occurs, a situation may occur in which the setting suggestion effect is stopped, which is a disadvantage for the player. Therefore, the player is allowed to proceed with the game without causing an error, and the game is It is possible to proceed smoothly and reduce the burden on the hall.

(4') New in response to winning in the starting mouth during error occurrence in the case where an error occurs during setting suggestion variation and after the start of setting suggestion production, and the game progresses even while the error occurs (weak error) About setting suggestion production of various setting suggestion fluctuations.

(4'-1) The setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1816 is 1 and the value of the field 1817 is 0). As a result, the game progresses even while the error occurs, so the operation of the gaming machine is not reduced. Further, since the setting suggestion effect is generated even when the error occurs, the interest of the player can be improved.

(4'-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed (the value of the field 1816 is 0 and the value of the field 1817 is 1). As a result, the setting suggestion effect is not executed for the winning during the error, so that the player cancels the launch of the game ball and releases the error early.

In this way, when the setting suggestive effect is performed and when the setting suggestive effect is not performed, the effect is exerted on both sides. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that meets the needs of the business style of.

[12-15-2. Limitation of performance in new starting prize]
Hereinafter, the limitation of the effect in the variation corresponding to the new start winning in the state where the special symbol variation and the new variation can be held will be described. FIG. 172 is an example of a new start winning effect restriction table. The new start winning effect control table is stored in the peripheral control ROM, for example.

The new start winning effect control table includes, for example, a condition column, a reference processing table column, and a flag column. The conditions in the condition column are defined by an assumption regarding the effect of the previous change and an effect restriction in the effect in the new start winning based on the assumption. The pre-variation in this chapter is the variation just before the variation corresponding to the new start winning. The conditions for the effect of the previous change include a case in which only the expected suggestion effect that the special lottery result corresponding to the change is a big hit is performed, and a case in which the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are performed.

Further, as the effect restriction of the prefetch effect in the new start winning, only the setting suggestion effect in the prefetch effect is restricted (that is, the setting suggestion effect is not executed), and both the setting suggestion effect and the expectation suggestion effect in the prefetch effect are restricted (that is, the setting). There is no suggestion effect and expected suggestion effect), and neither setting suggestion effect nor expectation suggestion effect in the look-ahead effect is restricted (that is, setting suggestion effect and look-ahead effect are executed).

The reference processing table column stores the identifier of the processing table, which is included in the corresponding conditions and which is referred to when executing the prefetching effect restriction in the new start winning. The flag column stores a flag indicating which condition is to be executed and which process table is used to determine the process for the prefetch effect in the new start winning.

It should be noted that 1 is stored in the flag column corresponding to any one of the processing tables 1 to 3, and 0 is stored in the flag column corresponding to the other two of the processing tables 1 to 3. Further, 1 is stored in the flag column corresponding to any one of the processing tables 4 to 6, and 0 is stored in the flag column corresponding to the other two of the processing tables 4 to 6. The flag in the new start winning effect control table is, for example, at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 1 or in a hall or the like, an operation medium provided in the pachinko machine 1 (an operation medium that cannot be operated by the player or an operation medium that can be operated by the player). It doesn't matter).

Peripheral control MPU, when there is a new start winning in the state of being able to hold the new fluctuation during the special symbol change, and when it is determined that only the expected suggestion effect is executed in the previous change, the new start winning effect limit table The condition indicated by the condition column corresponding to the flag column in which the value in the “previous change effect” column is “expectation suggestion only” and which stores 1 as the value is executed. Further, the peripheral control MPU refers to the processing table corresponding to the flag column to determine the content of the look-ahead effect in the variation corresponding to the new start winning.

Similarly, the peripheral control MPU, if there is a new start winning in the state of being able to hold the new fluctuation during the special symbol fluctuation, and the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in the previous change, the new start prize. The value in the “previous change effect” column of the effect restriction table is a flag field corresponding to “expectation suggestion+setting suggestion”, and a flag column storing 1 as a value The content of the look-ahead effect in the variation corresponding to a different starting winning is determined.

Hereinafter, each condition shown in the condition column will be described. The first condition (condition for selecting the processing table 1) is to limit only the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect restriction of the variation corresponding to the new start winning when the expected suggestion effect is executed in the previous variation. Is to be done. Under the first condition, since the expectation suggesting effect is performed in the previous change, the player is more uplifted by the expectation for the big hit. When the setting suggestion effect is executed as the look-ahead effect of the change corresponding to the new start winning in such a state, the player's consciousness is directed also to the setting suggestion effect, so that in the effect of the previous change. The uplifting feeling may be reduced. In addition, the player may confuse the setting suggestion effect with the expectation suggesting effect, and may make the player delight. Therefore, the occurrence of these situations can be suppressed by executing the first condition.

Further, in the first condition, the expected suggestion effect is performed in the previous change, but in this state, when the setting suggestion effect is executed as the look-ahead effect of the change corresponding to the new start winning, the player Even if it is assumed that there is a deviation in the previous variation, the variation corresponding to the new starting winning can still be expected, so that the player can be provided with a sense of security.

For example, when selecting an effect based on the notice effect table of FIG. 165, the peripheral control MPU determines whether the effect is determined by the table, and whether or not the flag in the condition column indicating that the setting suggestion effect is subsequently limited is 1. Whether or not it is restricted is determined, and if 1 (restricted), even if set is selected, the process of rewriting and displaying without set is performed to limit the setting suggestive effect. To do. That is, the peripheral control MPU can limit the setting suggestion effect by using the advance notice effect table shown in FIG. 165 by performing the determination process after determining the effect. That is, since the pachinko machine 1 does not need to hold the effect table for each effect restriction type, the amount of data can be reduced. Similarly to the expected suggestion effect described later, when the peripheral control MPU selects a prefetch hold display other than white using the final hold color table of FIG. 161, when the expected suggestion effect is limited, The selected hold display is rewritten to white and displayed.

The second condition (condition under which the processing table 2 is selected) is set suggestive effect and expected suggestive effect as a look-ahead effect restriction of a change corresponding to a new start prize when only the expected suggestive effect is executed in the previous change. It is to limit both sides of the production. Under the second condition, since the anticipation suggestive effect is performed in the previous change, the player is more uplifted by the expectation for the big hit. When the setting suggestion effect and the term attitude suggestion effect are executed as the look-ahead effect of the change corresponding to the new start winning prize in such a state, the player's consciousness is directed toward these effects as well, There is a risk that the uplifting feeling in the production of the pre-variation may be reduced. Therefore, the occurrence of these situations can be suppressed by executing the second condition.

The third condition (condition for selecting the processing table 3) is a setting suggestive effect and an expected suggestion as a look-ahead effect restriction of a change corresponding to a new starting winning prize when only the expected suggestive effect is executed in the previous change. It is not to limit any of the production. Under the third condition, since the expectation suggestive effect is performed in the previous change, the player is more uplifted by the expectation for the big hit. In such a state, the setting suggestion effect is executed as the look-ahead effect of the change corresponding to the new start winning, so that in addition to the uplifting feeling for the jackpot, the uplifting feeling for the setting suggesting effect (in particular, the high setting confirmation suggesting effect) Alternatively, a case where a high setting confirmation effect or the like is executed) can be given to the player.

The fourth condition (condition for selecting the processing table 4) is a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect restriction of a change corresponding to a new start winning when the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in the previous change. Only is to be limited. In the fourth condition, the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are performed in the previous change, so that the player may be able to win the jackpot due to the previous change, and (especially the high setting suggestion effect or the high setting confirmation effect). If it is executed), I feel a sense of elation, due to the setting suggestion. In such a state, if the setting suggestion effect is executed as the look-ahead effect of the change corresponding to the new start winning, there is a possibility that the feeling of uplifting the expectation for the big hit in the hold of the previous change may decrease. ..

Specifically, for example, when setting 4 or more is set in the setting suggestion effect of the previous change, and setting 5 or more is set in the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect of the change corresponding to the new start winning, The setting suggestion production contains a lot of inaccurate information (although it is originally setting 5 or more, it also suggests the possibility of setting 4). In such a case, the player infers that it contains a lot of inaccurate information not only in the setting suggestion effect in the previous change but also in the expectation suggesting effect (specifically, for example, the display mode is red. There is a possibility that the big hit expectation is not high even for the hold, which means that the uplifting feeling for the expectation suggestive effect may be reduced. Execution of the fourth condition can suppress the occurrence of such a situation.

The fifth condition (condition for selecting the processing table 5) is a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect restriction of the change corresponding to a new start winning when the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in the previous change. It is to limit both the expectation suggestion production. In the fifth condition, since the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are performed in the previous change, when the setting suggestion effect is performed in the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning, the setting suggestion effect is performed a plurality of times in a short period of time. There is a possibility that the player will guess the set value with high accuracy (for example, if odd number setting suggestion effect and high setting suggestion effect are performed, setting 5 is highly likely). In such a state, if the player determines that the setting is low, the pachinko machine 1 may stop playing, and if it is determined that the setting is high, another pachinko machine in the hall may be stopped. The operation of the machine 1 may be reduced. Execution of the fifth condition can suppress the occurrence of such a situation.

Also, especially, if the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are performed in the previous change, and the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are performed as the look-ahead effect even in the change corresponding to the new start winning, many effects occur in a short period of time. However, the player may be confused. Execution of the fifth condition can suppress the occurrence of such a situation.

The sixth condition (condition for selecting the processing table 6) is a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect restriction of the change corresponding to a new start winning when the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in the previous change. Also, neither of the expectations suggestive effects is limited. Under the sixth condition, since the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are performed in the previous change, the player assumes the expectation degree of the expectation suggestion effect in the setting suggested by the setting suggestion effect. In this state, the setting suggestive effect and the expected suggestive effect are performed in the change corresponding to the new start winning, so that there is a possibility that the expectation degree due to these two expected suggestive effects is raised.

Specifically, for example, when the setting suggestion effect suggesting the setting 4 or more is executed in the previous variation and the setting suggestion effect suggesting the setting 5 or more is executed as the look-ahead effect in the new start winning, the player Expectation at setting 4 or higher is assumed for the expectation suggestive effect in the previous change. However, after that, since the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect in the new starting winning suggests the setting degree of 5 or higher, the expectation degree of the expected suggestion effect is assumed to be the setting degree of 5 or higher. The feeling of uplifting increases.

In this way, since the effect is exhibited for each prefetching effect restriction content corresponding to the new start winning, by making it possible for the hall etc. to set such prefetching effect restriction content, the needs of the business style of the hall etc. It is possible to provide a game machine adapted to.

Hereinafter, each processing table and the prefetch effect executed with reference to each processing table will be described. Each processing table is stored in the peripheral control ROM, for example.

FIG. 173 is an example of the processing table 1. First, common contents of each processing table will be described. Each processing table stores the winning type in the pre-change special lottery result, the processing content related to the new starting winning corresponding to the winning classification, and the processing number that is the identifier of the processing content.

It should be noted that the processing content held in each processing table defines the processing content for the prefetch effect that is not a restriction target. Specifically, for example, as the look-ahead effect restriction of the variation corresponding to the new starting winning, the processing content of the processing table 1 which is a table referred to when restricting only the setting suggestion effect indicates the expected suggestion effect. The processing content is defined. Similarly, as the look-ahead effect restriction of the variation corresponding to the new start winning, the processing content of the processing table 3 which is a table referred to when restricting both the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect includes the expected suggestion effect and the expected suggestion effect. The processing content for the setting suggestion effect is defined.

Therefore, the peripheral control MPU determines the look-ahead effect to be restricted in the new start winning and the processing table to be referenced based on the flag of the new start winning effect restriction table, and is not the restriction object based on the processing table. The processing for the prefetch effect is determined.

It should be noted that processing tables 3 and 6 to be described later store flags for selecting the processing content related to a new start winning from a plurality of processing content. The flag in the processing table may be, for example, an operation medium provided in the pachinko machine 1 when the pachinko machine 1 is manufactured, a hall, or the like (an operation medium that the player cannot operate or an operation medium that the player can operate). ), it is possible to set.

Hereinafter, the processing contents related to the new starting winning defined by the processing table 1 will be described. The processing table 1 is a table that is referred to when only the expected suggestion effect is executed in the previous change and only the setting suggestion effect is restricted as the look-ahead effect restriction of the change corresponding to the new start winning. Hereinafter, an example in which the hold prefetching is performed as the prefetching effect of performing the expectation suggestion will be described.

The process of process number 1 is a process related to a new start winning when the pre-variation winning type is a big hit with a time reduction. In the process of process number 1, when the peripheral control MPU has a new starting winning hold display mode that is a specific mode with a high jackpot expectation level (for example, blue, green, red, etc. hold display mode), , At the start of the big hit opening screen that was won in the previous variation, the mode for displaying the new starting winning hold is returned to the default (the white display mode in the final reserved color table in FIG. 161). However, when the hold is not displayed in the hold display area at the start of the big hit opening screen, the hold display of the particular mode is deleted like other hold displays. Further, the peripheral control MPU does not return the mode of the new starting winning pending display to the specific display mode (that is, the default display) at the time saving transition after the jackpot. The peripheral control MPU does not return the mode of the new start winning hold display to the specific display mode even if the new winning hold is not exhausted at the end of the time saving (i.e., Keep the default display).

The process of process number 2 is a process related to a new starting winning when the pre-variation winning type is a big hit without time saving. In the process of process number 2, the peripheral control MPU, when the mode of the new starting winning hold display is a specific mode with a high jackpot expectation degree, for example, at the start of the big hit opening screen that was won in the previous fluctuation, The mode of the new starting winning hold display is returned to the default. However, when the hold is not displayed in the hold display area at the start of the big hit opening screen, the hold display of the particular mode is deleted like other hold displays. Further, even when the normal state is controlled after the jackpot game is over, the mode of the new start winning pending display is not returned to the specific display mode (that is, the default display is left as it is).

The process of process number 3 is a process relating to a new starting winning when the pre-change winning type is a small hit. In the process of the process number 3, the peripheral control MPU does not change the mode of the new starting winning hold display (that is, the hold display continues, specifically, for example, if the blue hold display mode is blue, The hold display mode is continuously displayed). Further, the peripheral control MPU may return the mode of the new starting winning hold display to the default when the opening screen of the small hit that was won in the previous variation is started. However, when the hold is not displayed in the hold display area at the start of the small hit opening screen, the hold display in the particular mode is erased like other hold displays.

The process of the process number 4 is a process related to a new starting winning when the pre-change winning type is out of order. In the process of process number 4, the peripheral control MPU does not change the mode of the new starting winning hold display (that is, the hold display continues, specifically, for example, in the case of a blue hold display mode, blue is displayed. The hold display mode is continuously displayed).

FIG. 174 is an example of the processing table 2. The processing table 2 is a table that is referred to when only the expected suggestion effect is executed in the previous change and both the setting suggestion effect and the expected suggestion effect are restricted as the look-ahead effect restriction of the change corresponding to the new start winning. is there. Since the processing table 2 is a table that is referred to when both the setting suggestion effect and the expected suggestion effect are restricted as the look-ahead effect restriction for the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning, regardless of the jackpot type of the previous fluctuation, It is defined that no special processing is executed for the look-ahead effect in the variation corresponding to the new start winning.

FIG. 175 is an example of the processing table 3. The processing table 3 is a table that is referred to when only the expected suggestion effect is executed in the previous change and when neither the setting suggestion effect nor the expected suggestion effect is restricted as the look-ahead effect restriction of the change corresponding to the new start winning. is there.

The processes of process numbers 5 to 6 are processes related to a new starting prize when the pre-variation winning type is a big hit with a time reduction. One of the processes of process numbers 5 to 6 can be selected by the flag. In the processes of process numbers 5 to 6, the process of the expected suggestion effect as the prefetch effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of the process number 1.

In the process of process number 5, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning. Before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting winning, specifically, for example, during the fluctuation of the previous fluctuation, during the jackpot game won by the previous fluctuation, or during the time saving associated with the jackpot won by the previous fluctuation. The second special symbol is being held, etc. By the process of process number 5, when the player recognizes that the setting suggestion effect has started before the start of the pre-variation, etc., the player can not forget that the setting suggestion effect will be performed. it can.

In the process of process number 6, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the change corresponding to the new start winning. It should be noted that, since the jackpot with a time saving is won in the previous change, the change corresponding to the new winning is highly likely to start after the end of the time saving (the game ball is in the second starting opening 2004 during the time saving). If there is a high frequency of winning, and if there is a suspension of the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation, the second special symbol variation is executed in preference to the first special symbol variation). Therefore, by the process of the process number 6, the setting suggestion effect is executed after the time saving, so that the player's disappointment due to the end of the time saving can be reduced.

The processes of process numbers 7 to 8 are processes related to a new starting winning when the pre-variation winning type is a big hit without time saving. One of the processes of process numbers 7 to 8 can be selected by the flag. In the processes of process numbers 7 to 8, the process of expectation suggestion effect as the prefetch effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of process number 2.

In the process of process number 7, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning. “Before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning” is specifically, for example, during the change of the previous change, during the big hit game won by the previous change, or the like. Although the player feels disappointed that he has won the jackpot but did not win in a short time, due to the processing of processing number 7, if the setting suggestion production starts at the latest during the jackpot game, he is disappointed. You can enjoy a big hit game in a reduced state.

In the process of process number 8, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the change corresponding to the new start winning. By the process of the process number 8, the setting suggestion effect starts immediately after the jackpot is over, so that it is possible to reduce the player's discouragement that the time saving has not been given.

The processes of process numbers 9 to 10 are processes related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous change is the small hit. One of the processes of process numbers 9 to 10 can be selected by the flag. In the processes of process numbers 9 to 10, the process of expectation suggestion effect as the prefetch effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of process number 3.

In the process of process number 9, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect as the prefetch effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning. The “before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning” is specifically, for example, during the change of the previous change, during the opening of the small hit won by the previous change, or during the small hit. In the case of a small hit, the player may be discouraged because only a small privilege is given to the player, but by the processing of the processing number 9, the setting suggestion effect is started at an early timing, and the player is discouraged. Can be reduced.

In the process of process number 10, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the change corresponding to the new start winning. Since the series of digestion time for a small hit is shorter than the series of digestion time for a big hit, if the player recognizes that the setting suggestion production has started before the start of the previous change, etc. Players may feel distrustful if they do not perform. By the processing of the processing number 10, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling such distrust.

The processes of process numbers 11 to 13 are processes related to a new start winning when the pre-variation winning type is out of order. One of the processes of process numbers 11 to 13 can be selected by a flag. In the processes of process numbers 11 to 13, the process of the expected suggestion effect as the prefetch effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of the process number 4.

In the process of process number 11, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the change corresponding to the new start winning.

In the process of process number 12, the peripheral control MPU only performs the new start when the mode of the hold display in the hold prefetch effect of the previous change is a specific mode with a high jackpot expectation (for example, green or red). During the change corresponding to the winning, the setting suggesting effect as the look-ahead effect in the new starting winning is executed. Note that the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect is not changed, that is, no special processing is performed, but the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect is controlled to be different (for example, a dialogue suggesting the setting by the character B appears. The timing may be delayed by a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 2 seconds), or may be advanced by a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 2 seconds) from the normal timing. By the processing of the processing number 12, it is possible to reduce such discouragement for a player who feels disappointing that he/she deviates from the appearance of the pending display with a high jackpot expectation in the previous change. it can. Note that in FIG. 175 and in FIG. 178 described later, the old hold is a hold corresponding to the previous fluctuation, and the new hold is a hold corresponding to the new start winning.

In the process of process number 13, when the mode of the hold display is a specific mode with a high jackpot expectation level (for example, green or red), the peripheral control MPU suggests setting as a look-ahead effect in the new start winning. Do not execute the performance. By the processing of the processing number 13, although the mode of the hold display in which the big hit expectation degree is high appears in the previous variation, the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect does not appear even in the change corresponding to the new start winning. , It is possible to prevent the player from being absorbed in the game.

FIG. 176 is an example of the processing table 4. The processing table 4 is a table that is referred to when the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in the previous change and only the setting suggestion effect is restricted as the look-ahead effect restriction of the change corresponding to the new start winning. ..

The process of the process number 14 is a process related to a new starting winning when the pre-variation winning type is a big hit with a time saving. In the process of process number 14, the process of expectation suggestion effect as the prefetch effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of process number 1.

The process of process number 15 is a process related to a new starting winning when the pre-variation winning type is a big hit without time saving. In the process of the process number 15, the process of the expected suggestion effect as the prefetch effect corresponding to the new starting winning is the same as the process of the process number 2.

The process of the process number 16 is a process related to a new starting winning when the pre-change winning type is a small hit. In the process of process number 16, the process of expectation suggestion effect as the prefetch effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of process number 3.

The process of the process number 17 is a process related to a new start winning in the case where the pre-variation winning type is out of order. In the process of the process number 16, the process of the expected suggestion effect as the prefetch effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of the process number 4.

Since the processing table 4 is a table that is referred to when limiting only the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect restriction of the change corresponding to the new start winning, a new start is performed regardless of the jackpot type of the previous change. It is defined that no special process is executed for the setting suggestion effect in the variation corresponding to the winning.

FIG. 177 is an example of the processing table 5. The process table 5 is referred to when the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in the previous change, and both the setting suggestion effect and the expected suggestion effect are restricted as the look-ahead effect restriction of the change corresponding to the new start winning. It is a table that is played. Since the processing table 5 is a table that is referred to when limiting both the setting suggestion effect and the expected suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect restriction of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning, regardless of the type of jackpot of the previous fluctuation, It is defined that no special processing is executed for the look-ahead effect in the variation corresponding to the new start winning.

FIG. 178 is an example of the processing table 6. The processing table 6 is referred to when the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in the previous change, and neither the setting suggestion effect nor the expectation suggestion effect is restricted as the look-ahead effect restriction of the change corresponding to the new start winning. Table.

The processes of process numbers 18 to 21 are processes related to a new start winning when the pre-variation winning type is a big hit with a time reduction. One of the processes of process numbers 18 to 21 can be selected by a flag. In the processes of process numbers 18 to 21, the process of the expected suggestion effect as the prefetch effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of the process number 1.

In the process of process number 18, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning. Before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting winning, specifically, for example, during the fluctuation of the previous fluctuation, during the jackpot game won by the previous fluctuation, or during the time saving associated with the jackpot won by the previous fluctuation. The second special symbol is being held, etc. By the processing of the processing number 18, when the player recognizes that the setting suggestion effect has started before the start of the pre-variation, etc., it is possible for the player not to forget that the setting suggestion effect is performed. it can.

In the process of process number 19, the peripheral control MPU is set in the setting suggesting effect as the prefetching effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning, rather than the setting suggested in the setting suggesting effect of the previous change. Is better (specifically, for example, it is informed that the setting 4 or more is settled in the setting suggestion effect of the previous variation, and the setting as the prefetch effect is performed before the variation corresponding to the new start winning is started. Only when it is informed that the setting 5 or more is settled in the suggestion effect), the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect is executed before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning. Before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting winning, specifically, for example, during the fluctuation of the previous fluctuation, during the jackpot game won by the previous fluctuation, or during the time saving associated with the jackpot won by the previous fluctuation. The second special symbol is being held, etc.

By the processing of the processing number 19, the player can see the high setting suggestion effect at the latest during the big hit with time saving, so that a double uplifting feeling due to the big hit with time saving and the high setting indication can be obtained. Further, for example, it is notified that the setting 5 or more is settled in the setting suggestion effect of the previous variation, and the setting 4 or more is set in the setting suggestion production as the prefetching effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning. If it is notified, the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect is a wasteful effect that does not provide new information to the player before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning, By the processing of number 19, such a useless effect can be omitted. On the contrary, for example, when it is informed that the setting 4 or more is settled in the setting suggestion effect of the pre-variation, the setting suggestion effect 5 as the prefetch effect is set before the change corresponding to the new start winning is started. Since the player is likely to continue playing the game even if it is not notified that the above is settled, the setting suggestion effect is likely to be useless effect, and the process of process number 19 causes such useless effect. The production can be omitted.

In the process of process number 20, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the change corresponding to the new start winning. By the process of process number 20, since the setting suggestion effect often starts immediately after the time saving ends, the player's disappointment with respect to the end of the time saving state can be reduced.

In the process of the process number 21, the peripheral control MPU is set in the setting suggesting effect as the look-ahead effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning, rather than the setting suggested in the setting suggesting effect of the previous change. Only when the above is better, the setting suggestion effect is executed during the change corresponding to the new start winning. By the processing of the processing number 21, it is possible to omit the useless setting suggestion effect described in the processing of the processing number 19 or reduce the player's disappointment with respect to the end of the time saving state.

The processes of process numbers 22 to 25 are processes related to a new start winning when the pre-variation winning type is a big hit without time saving. One of the processes of process numbers 22 to 25 can be selected by the flag. In the processing of processing numbers 22 to 25, the processing regarding the expected suggestive production as the prefetching production corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the processing of the processing number 2.

In the process of process number 22, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect as the prefetch effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning. “Before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning” is specifically, for example, during the change of the previous change, during the big hit game won by the previous change, or the like. Although the player feels disappointed that he has won the jackpot but did not win in a short time, if the setting suggestion production starts at the latest during the jackpot game by the processing of processing number 22, the player will be disappointed. You can enjoy a big hit game in a reduced state.

In the process of process number 23, the peripheral control MPU is set in the setting suggesting effect as the prefetching effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new starting winning, rather than the setting suggested in the setting suggesting effect of the previous change. Only when is better, the setting suggestion effect as the prefetch effect is executed before the change corresponding to the new start winning is started. “Before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning” is specifically, for example, during the change of the previous change, during the big hit game won by the previous change, or the like. By the processing of the processing number 23, if the setting suggestion effect starts at the latest during the big hit game, the big hit game can be enjoyed with the discouragement reduced.

In the process of process number 24, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the change corresponding to the new start winning. By the processing of the processing number 24, the setting suggestion effect starts immediately after the big hit ends, so that it is possible to reduce the player's discouragement for not having entered in a short time.

In the process of process number 25, the peripheral control MPU is set to be more suggestive in the setting suggestion effect as the prefetching effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning than the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect of the previous change. Only when the above is better, the setting suggestion effect is executed during the change corresponding to the new start winning. By the processing of the processing number 21, it is possible to omit the useless setting suggestion effect as described in the processing of the processing number 19 or reduce the player's disappointment for not having entered in a short time. Further, if the setting suggested in the setting suggestion production as the look-ahead production is not better than the setting suggested in the setting suggestion production of the previous variation before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning, If the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect is executed before the change corresponding to the new start winning is started, the player who is disappointed not to rush in a short time will show the useless setting suggestion effect. There is a risk that the person will be stroked in reverse.

The processes of process numbers 26 to 29 are processes relating to a new starting winning prize when the winning type of the previous change is a small hit. One of the processes of process numbers 26 to 29 can be selected by the flag. In the processes of process numbers 26 to 29, the process of expectation suggestion effect as the prefetch effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of process number 3.

In the process of process number 26, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect as the prefetch effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning. The “before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning” is specifically, for example, during the change of the previous change, during the opening of the small hit won by the previous change, or during the small hit. In the case of a small hit, the player may be discouraged because only a small privilege is given to the player, but by the processing of the processing number 26, the setting suggestion effect is started at an early timing, and the player is discouraged. Can be reduced.

In the process of process number 27, the peripheral control MPU is set in the setting suggesting effect as the prefetching effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning, rather than the setting suggested in the setting suggesting effect of the previous change. Only when the above is better, the setting suggestion effect as the prefetch effect is executed before the change corresponding to the new start winning is started. The “before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning” is specifically, for example, during the change of the previous change, during the opening of the small hit won by the previous change, or during the small hit. By the processing of the processing number 27, it is possible to omit the useless setting suggestion effect described in the processing of the processing number 19 or reduce the discouragement of the player due to the small merit given to the small hit.

In the process of process number 28, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the change corresponding to the new start winning. Since the series of digestion time for a small hit is shorter than the series of digestion time for a big hit, if the player recognizes that the setting suggestion production has started before the start of the previous change, etc. Players may feel distrustful if they do not perform. By the processing of the processing number 28, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling such distrust.

In the process of the process number 29, the peripheral control MPU is set to be suggested in the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning, rather than the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect of the previous change. Only when the above is better, the setting suggestion effect is executed during the change corresponding to the new start winning. By the processing of the processing number 29, it is possible to omit the useless setting suggestion effect described in the processing of the processing number 19, or reduce the player's discouragement that only a small merit is given in the small hit. Further, if the setting suggested in the setting suggestion production as the look-ahead production is not better than the setting suggested in the setting suggestion production of the previous variation before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning, If the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect is executed before the change corresponding to the new start winning is executed, a more useless setting suggestion effect is given to the player who is disappointed that only a small merit is given in the small hit. It will be shown, and the player may be stroked backwards.

The processes of process numbers 30 to 34 are processes relating to a new starting winning when the pre-variation winning type is out of order. One of the processes of process numbers 30 to 34 can be selected by a flag. In the processes of process numbers 30 to 34, the process of expectation suggestion effect as the prefetch effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of process number 4.

In the process of process number 30, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the change corresponding to the new start winning. By the processing of the processing number 30, it is possible to reduce the player's discouragement due to the deviation from the previous variation.

In the process of process number 31, the peripheral control MPU only performs the new start when the mode of the hold display in the hold prefetch effect of the previous change is a specific mode with a high jackpot expectation (for example, green or red). During the change corresponding to the winning, the setting suggesting effect as the look-ahead effect in the new starting winning is executed. Note that the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect is not changed, that is, no special processing is performed, but the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect is controlled to be different (for example, a dialogue suggesting the setting by the character B appears. The timing may be delayed by a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 2 seconds), or may be advanced by a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 2 seconds) from the normal timing. By the processing of the processing number 31, it is possible to reduce such discouragement for a player who feels disappointment that he/she has come off despite the appearance of the hold display with high jackpot expectation in the previous change. it can.

In the process of process number 32, the peripheral control MPU sets the previous fluctuation when the pending display mode in the pending prefetch effect of the previous fluctuation is a specific mode with a high jackpot expectation (for example, green or red). If the setting suggested as a look-ahead production is better than the setting suggested in the suggestion presentation before the change corresponding to the new start prize is given, the new start prize is provided only if During the change corresponding to, the setting suggestion effect as the prefetch effect in the new start winning is executed. By the processing of the processing number 32, the player's disappointment with respect to the fact that the previous change, which was the mode of the hold display with a high jackpot expectation degree, is off, can be reduced by the setting suggestion effect.

In the process of process number 33, the peripheral control MPU only applies to the new start winning prize if the mode of the hold display in the pre-change pending hold look-ahead effect is not a particular mode with a high jackpot expectation (eg, green or red). During the change corresponding to, the setting suggestion effect as the prefetch effect in the new start winning is executed. By the processing of the processing number 33, such a discouragement can be reduced by the setting suggestion production for the player who has been disappointed because the expectation for the big hit cannot be obtained in the pre-holding pending look-ahead production.

In the process of the process number 34, the peripheral control MPU is a case where the mode of the hold display is not a specific mode with a high jackpot expectation degree (for example, green or red), and the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect of the previous change. Therefore, if the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect as the prefetch effect is better before the start of the change corresponding to the new start prize, only when the change corresponding to the new start prize is changed, A setting suggestion effect is executed as a look-ahead effect in the new start winning. By the processing of the processing number 34, a situation in which the player's irritation that the mode of the pending display of the previous variation has a low expectation and suggests the low setting in the setting suggestion effect in the variation corresponding to the new start winning is amplified. Can be suppressed.

In the above-described process, even if the setting suggestion effect is not limited as a look-ahead effect restriction of the variation corresponding to the new start winning, in the following cases, the peripheral control MPU will not It is not necessary to execute the production. For example, when the new start winning is performed during the big hit, the peripheral control MPU does not have to execute the setting suggestion effect. This is because immediately after the big hit game, the player is likely to continue the game without giving an incentive by the setting suggestion effect.

As in the example of the processing table 3 and the processing table 6, the effect can be exerted in each process related to the new start prize determined by each process number, so that the hole etc. can set the process related to the new start prize. With this, it is possible to provide a game machine that meets the needs of a business style such as a hall.

Further, for example, the new start winning is just before the end of the ST state (probably changing state that continues until a big jackpot is won or a predetermined number of special symbol fluctuations are executed) (specifically, for example, until the ST state ends. The number of remaining fluctuations of the symbol is 4 or less, which is the maximum number of reserved special symbols, or the number of remaining fluctuations of the special symbol until the end of the ST state is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, etc.) In the case of being hit, the peripheral control MPU does not have to execute the setting suggestion effect. Immediately before the end of the ST state, the player's greatest concern is whether or not to win the jackpot in the ST. When the setting suggestion effect starts as a look-ahead effect related to a new starting winning in such a state, the player misunderstands the setting suggestion effect as an effect with a high expectation of a big hit, and a situation occurs in which the player is delighted. May occur. The above-described processing can suppress the occurrence of such a situation.

In addition, for example, the special state variation of the predetermined number of times after the ST state ends and shifts to the normal state (specifically, for example, four special symbol variations, which is the maximum number of special symbols reserved, or from the ST state) Immediately after shifting to the normal state, the second starting port 2004 may be opened, and in consideration of it, a predetermined number (for example, 5 times) of special symbol variations) is performed before the new start. When the start winning is performed, the peripheral control MPU does not have to execute the setting suggestion effect. Immediately after the end of the ST state, the player's greatest concern is whether or not to win the jackpot immediately. In particular, immediately after the end of the ST state, there is a high possibility that a variation corresponding to the suspension of the second special symbol which is easy to win the big hit of the type having a great advantage for the player is executed. When the setting suggestion effect starts as a look-ahead effect related to a new starting winning in such a state, the player misunderstands the setting suggestion effect as an effect with a high expectation of a big hit, and a situation occurs in which the player is delighted. May occur. The above-described processing can suppress the occurrence of such a situation.

In addition, when it is determined that a setting suggestion effect that is completed independently in each of a plurality of holds is executed, one setting suggestion effect that spans the changes corresponding to the plurality of holds is executed. The setting suggestion effect may be changed.

[12-16. Another example of setting change/confirmation processing]
Hereinafter, another embodiment of the pachinko machine having a setting changing function will be described. In the embodiment described below, the setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972. However, the original function of the RAM clear switch 954 for initializing the main control RAM 1312 and In order to describe the function separately from the setting change function, the operation for changing the set value may be described as the setting change switch 972.

179 and 180 are flowcharts of power-on processing executed by the main control MPU 1311 when power is turned on. The power-on process shown in FIGS. 179 and 180 is another example of step S10 of FIG. 21 to step S34 of FIG.

First, the main control MPU 1311 fetches the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 and the signal level of the setting key 971 from the input port, and stores the fetched level data in the register (step S201). The main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are operated in steps S212 and S214 after the peripheral control board 1510 is surely activated. Therefore, if an employee of the hall mistakenly interrupts the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 while waiting for the peripheral control board 1510 to start up, the RAM of the hall is cleared in an unintended state. The switch 954 and the setting key 971 are determined. For this reason, the input state (level) of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is stored in a temporary storage means such as a register at an early stage after the start of the power-on process, and after the peripheral control board 1510 ends the standby state. By determining the states of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 stored in a temporary storage means such as a register, even if an employee in the hall mistakenly interrupts the key operation at an early stage after the power is turned on, the power is turned on. The operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 during the closing operation is surely detected.

The ON level of the RAM clear switch 954 and the ON level of the setting key 971 may be different. For example, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 may be switched between positive and negative logic so that the RAM clear switch 954 is ON at the high level and the setting key 971 is ON at the low level. The RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 may change the voltage determined to be ON. By doing so, it is possible to change the signal level by irradiating the pachinko machine 1 with a radio wave and make it difficult to carry out an illegal act of activating the setting change mode. Further, as described later, in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, it is not necessary to monitor the signal level of the sensor for fraud detection.

Then, it is determined whether the set value is within a predetermined range (step S202). For example, in the pachinko machine 1 that can be selected in the stages of setting 1 to 6, the value of the work in which the set value is stored corresponds to 0 to 5 (setting 1=0, setting 6= In the case of 5), if a value of 5 or less is stored, it is determined to be within the predetermined range.

If the set value is not within the predetermined range, a value indicating RAM abnormality (08H) is recorded in the set state management area, and initialization by the reset signal of the pachinko machine 1 is waited (step S203). Since the set value is not in the range where the checksum is calculated and is not erased by the RAM clear operation, the abnormal set value is not corrected. Therefore, when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the set value, and if there is an abnormality, processing relating to a normal game such as a special figure or a general figure is not executed.

In addition, the set value is not only determined when the power is turned on, but also when winning at the starting opening, when starting the variable display game, and when the game state is switched (from normal state to big hit state, from low probability state to high probability state) , Non-time saving state to time saving state). This prevents the lottery from being performed based on the incorrect set value, even if the set value becomes an abnormal value by mistake.

If the set value is determined to be abnormal, the game is stopped, the power is turned on again, or until the set value is changed, the state of the set value abnormality (RAM abnormality) is maintained .. When it is determined that the set value is abnormal, a predetermined value may be set. As the predetermined value, the value corresponding to the setting 6 indicating the highest setting or the value corresponding to the setting 1 indicating the lowest setting may be used to update the storage area of the setting value.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the RAM abnormality can be eliminated only through the setting change mode, and the RAM abnormality cannot be eliminated only by turning the power on again. This is because the RAM abnormality may occur due to fraud in addition to the malfunction, and if the RAM abnormality caused by fraud can be resolved by a power-on operation, the RAM abnormality can be easily resolved. On the other hand, if the RAM abnormality cannot be eliminated without going through the setting change mode, the RAM abnormality cannot be eliminated without operating the power switch 932, the setting key 971, and the RAM clear switch 954. Since it includes the operation of the setting key 971 that can be operated only by the employee of the hall having the key, the security performance against fraudulent acts can be improved.

In addition, in order to deal with the illegal act of illegally changing the setting value to an indefinite value, if the setting value is determined to be abnormal, if the value is updated to the value corresponding to the setting 1 indicating the lowest setting, the security of the gaming machine is improved. It is effective because it can improve the sex.

As shown in FIG. 201(B), the setting state management area is a storage area in which the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded. For example, a normal game state (game startable state), setting confirmation mode, setting change mode , The abnormality of the main control RAM 1312 is recorded.

On the other hand, if the set value is within the predetermined range, the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited for (step S204).

Then, the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the main control RAM 1312 at the time of the previous power shutdown and the checksum calculated at the previous power shutdown and stored in step S48 are compared (verified). Note that a check code having a fixed value may be used instead of the checksum. Further, it is determined whether the value of the backup flag area is normal. If the value of the power failure flag indicating that the power has been normally backed up is stored in the backup flag area, the data in the RAM is normally backed up when the power failure occurs (step S205).

If either the checksum or the value of the backup flag area is abnormal as a result of the determination, the value (08H) indicating the RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S206), and the entire area of the main control RAM 1312 (setting The area including the value is also initialized) (step S207), and the process proceeds to step S216. Although erasing the data stored in the entire area of the main control RAM 1312 or in a predetermined area is called “initialization”, “RAM clear” is also used in the same meaning.

On the other hand, if the values of the checksum and the backup flag area are normal, the setting change operation (RAM clear switch 954 is ON, setting key 971 is ON) is performed based on the value (content) of the setting key stored in the register. It is determined. If it is not a setting change operation (both the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 or both are OFF), the setting state management area is set to determine whether the state is being changed before the power is turned on. It is determined whether or not the value (02H) indicating the change is recorded (step S208).

As a result, if the setting change operation is stored in the register, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are set to the setting change mode when the power is turned on, and the setting change operation should be started. It can be determined that the state. If a value (02H) indicating that the setting is being changed is recorded in the setting state management area, it can be determined that the power is turned on after a power failure during the setting changing operation. When it is determined that the mode is changed to the setting change mode based on the value stored in the register or the value stored in the setting state management area, the value (02H) indicating the setting change state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S209), the clear area of the main control RAM 1312 that should be initialized when the RAM is normal is initialized (step S210), and the process proceeds to step S216.

In step S208, when the mode is changed to the setting change mode based on the value stored in the setting state management area, a value indicating the setting change state (02H) is recorded in the setting state management area in step S209. At this time, since it is not necessary to set the same value (setting change state (02H)) again, when it is determined that the mode is changed to the setting change mode based on the value stored in the setting state management area, the setting is changed to the setting state management area. It is not necessary to record the value (02H) indicating the state.

On the other hand, if the setting change operation is not set in the register and the value (02H) indicating that the setting is being changed is not recorded in the setting state management area, the setting change operation should not be started. In order to determine whether or not the state is RAM abnormal, it is determined whether or not a value indicating RAM abnormality (08H) is recorded in the setting state management area (step S211).

As a result, if a value indicating RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, it is determined that the state before power-on is RAM abnormal (main control RAM 1312 is abnormal), and the process proceeds to step S216. On the other hand, if the value indicating RAM abnormality is not recorded in the setting state management area, the state before power-on is not RAM abnormal (main control RAM 1312 is abnormal), so the ON level of the RAM clear switch 954 is stored in the register. It is determined whether it has been done (step S212).

As a result, if the ON level of the RAM clear switch 954 is stored in the register, the RAM clear switch 954 is operated to ON when the power is turned on, so the RAM in the game control area excluding the set value and the setting state management area. In order to initialize the area (clear area when RAM is normal), the process proceeds to step S210.

On the other hand, if the register does not store the level of the ON operation of the RAM clear switch 954, the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated when the power is turned on, so the power-on state buffer is set (step S213). The contents set in the power-on status buffer are transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 as a power-on status command for notifying the gaming status managed by the main control MPU 1311 when the power is restored.

Then, it is determined whether the ON level of the setting key 971 is stored in the register (step S214). As a result, if the ON level of the setting key 971 is stored in the register, the setting key 971 has been operated when the power is turned on and the setting confirmation operation should be started. Therefore, the setting confirmation mode is indicated in the setting state management area. The value (01H) is recorded (step S215).

After that, the device built in the main control MPU 1311 is initialized (step S216), and a power-on operation command for notifying the operation of each unit at power-on is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S217). The power-on operation command is one of the power-on commands described in step S32 of FIG. Then, the main control RAM 1312 is initialized to the state when the power is turned on (step S218).

Then, it is determined whether or not the value (00H) indicating the game startable state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S219). If a value indicating the game startable state is recorded in the setting state management area, the normal game can be started, so the flow proceeds to step S220, and the initial setting is continued. On the other hand, if the value indicating the game startable state is not recorded in the setting state management area, the normal game cannot be started, so the initial setting is finished and the process proceeds to step S224.

In step S220, initial setting at the time of starting a game or initial setting at the time of power failure recovery is performed. After that, the power-on state command for notifying the state of each part when the power is turned on is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S221). Then, a power-on return destination command for notifying the state of the special symbol at the time of power failure recovery is stored in the buffer for transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S222). The power-on state command and the power-on return destination command are one of the power-on commands described in step S32 of FIG. The various commands stored in the buffer are transmitted in the timer interrupt process.

Further, the set value command for notifying the set value is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S223), the interrupt is permitted (step S224), and the process proceeds to the normal main loop (for example, step S36 in FIG. 22).

181 and 182 are flowcharts of the timer interrupt process executed by the main control MPU 1311. Unlike the timer interrupt process shown in FIGS. 24, 75, 80, 104, and 155, the timer interrupt process shown in FIGS. 181 and 182 executes the setting change process within the timer interrupt process.

First, the main control MPU 1311 updates the LED common counter (LED_CT) (step S230). The LED common counter is a counter that determines which common terminal of the base display 1317 is turned on, that is, the digit to be displayed. In the present embodiment, an example in which the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are combined is described, but the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 may be separately provided. In this case, LED common counters may be provided as many as the number of displays.

Then, switch input processing is executed (step S231). The switch input process is the same as step S74 of FIG.

Next, it is determined whether or not an initial value (a value indicating a game startable state) is recorded in the setting state management area (step S232). If the initial value (the value indicating the game startable state) is recorded in the setting state management area, it is not necessary to execute the setting change/confirmation process (after step S234) in the timer interrupt process, so the normal timer interrupt process (For example, after step S76 in FIG. 23) is executed (step S233). In the normal timer interrupt process of step S233, a performance display process (FIG. 183) described later is executed. On the other hand, if the initial value (value indicating the game startable state) is not recorded in the setting state management area, the normal game process is not executed by the timer interrupt process, and the setting change/confirmation process is executed.

In the setting change/confirmation processing, first, OFF is output from the LED common port, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784, and the game interruption signal is set to ON (step S234). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of timer interrupt processing, the time until the LED common signal is turned on, that is, the LED turn-off time is secured, and the ghost phenomenon in which the display before and after the display switching of the LED appears mixed To prevent LED flickering.

Then, it is determined whether or not the value (08H) indicating the RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S235). If the value indicating the RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the process proceeds to step S245 without executing the process of changing/checking the setting value. On the other hand, if the value indicating the RAM abnormality is not recorded in the setting state management area, it is determined whether or not the operation of changing/checking the setting value is performed (steps S236 and S237). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value (02H) indicating the setting change is recorded in the setting status management area (step S236).

Then, if the setting change switch 972 is operated, the setting value is incremented by 1 (step S238), and the process proceeds to step S245. If the result of adding the set values exceeds the upper limit, it is returned to the initial value. On the other hand, if the value indicating the setting change is not recorded in the setting state management area (the value indicating the setting confirmation is recorded in the setting state management area) or the setting change switch 972 is not operated, the setting key It is determined whether the OFF edge of the output level of 971 is detected (step S239). When the OFF edge of the output level of the setting key 971 is detected, since the setting key 971 is operated to the normal position, the setting change/confirmation mode end processing is executed (steps S240 to S244). On the other hand, if the OFF edge of the output level of the setting key 971 is not detected, the setting change/confirmation mode is not ended and the process proceeds to step S245.

In the setting change/confirmation mode end processing, as shown in FIG. 182, an initial value (a value indicating a game startable state) is recorded in the setting state management area (step S240), and initial setting at the time of game start or power failure recovery In order to send a power-on state command to the peripheral control board 1510 for notifying the state of each part (low probability/high probability, gaming state such as time saving/non-time saving) when the power is turned on (step S241). To the buffer (step S242). Then, the power-on return destination command for notifying the state of the special symbol at the time of return after the power failure is stored in the buffer for transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S243). Specifically, a counter value indicating the processing state of special symbols/special electric auditors (state of each processing relating to special symbols/special electric auditors (standby, changing, determination, big hit, etc.)) is transmitted as a command. .. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 can determine the game state regarding the special symbol and the operation state of the special electric accessory when the power is restored. Then, the set value command for notifying the set value is stored in the buffer for transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S244), and the process proceeds to step S245.

It should be noted that the command for notifying the set value may be transmitted not only in the setting change/confirmation mode end processing at power-on, but also at the start of fluctuation or switching of the gaming state. At this time, the command of the set value transmitted when the power is turned on and the command transmitted during the normal game at the start of fluctuation may be the same command or different commands (for example, the value of the upper byte is different).

When the set value command is made different at the time of turning on the power and at the time of the normal game, the peripheral control board 1510 issues a series of commands (change pattern command, pattern command, etc.) including the set value at the start of the special symbol variable display game. When received, it is determined whether the command is missing. By changing the content of the command at the timing when the command is transmitted (when the power is turned on, during a normal game, etc.), the peripheral control board 1510 is not the set value that was correctly received when the power was turned on, or other than the set value when the fluctuation starts. It is possible to determine whether the variation pattern command or the pattern command is missing.

In step S245, it is determined whether or not a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is stored in the setting status management area. If a value indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting status management area, the base display 1317 (or the setting display 974 if it is a separate body) is set to display an error (step S246). On the other hand, if the value indicating the RAM abnormality is not recorded in the setting status management area, the setting for displaying the current setting value on the base display 1317 (or the setting display 974 in the case of a separate body) is performed (step S247).

After that, ON is output to the common terminal of the LED of the base display 1317, and the base display 1317 is turned on by the segment signal output according to the setting in step S246 or S247 (step S248). As described above, after the timer interrupt process is started, the setting value change operation is determined (step S237), and thereafter, ON is output to the common terminal of the LED for each timer interrupt to display the setting value (display of the setting value). Switch). The set value will be displayed without setting operation as a trigger. Specifically, the setting change/confirmation process is being executed by not performing the process related to the setting change/confirmation as the process when the power is turned on, but by performing it in the same timer interrupt process as when the normal game is started. Even if the power is restored after the setting key 971 is returned to the original state after the power outage occurs, the setting when the power outage occurs even if the setting key 971 and the setting change switch 972 are not operated at the same position as when the power outage occurs It is possible to return to the state of change/confirmation processing. Further, in the setting change/confirmation processing, it is possible to make common the processing executed in the normal game processing such as command transmission processing and control of dynamic lighting of LEDs.

Then, the command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S249), and the timer interrupt processing ends. That is, in step S249, the command stored in the buffer in steps S242, S243, S244, etc. is actually output from the main control board 1310 as serial data.

In the timer interrupt process described above, the process is branched depending on whether the normal game is executed or the setting change mode (or setting confirmation mode) is executed (step S232 of FIG. 181), but a plurality of timer interrupt processes May be provided, and different timer interrupt processing may be activated in the normal game state and the setting change mode and/or setting change mode. The plurality of timer interrupt processes may include a part of common processes (for example, a common subroutine is called in each timer interrupt process), or all of them may be configured by different routines. That is, the timer interrupt process 1 (for setting change/confirmation) is called in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, and the timer interrupt 2 (for normal game) is called in the normal game state, which is common to these two timer interrupt processes. It has a process (module) to be executed and a dedicated process (module) to be executed only by one timer interrupt process. Commonly executed processes include, for example, a switch input process for capturing the output of various detection switches such as a winning opening sensor and a peripheral board command process for transmitting a command to the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, the register bank may be shared by the process executed in the normal game and the process executed in the setting change mode. When bank 0 is used for main processing on the main control side, bank 1 is used for both timer interrupt processing. Since two timer interrupt processes do not start at the same time, one register bank can be shared. That is, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 has two or more registers that can be switched by banks, and the main control side main processing is repeatedly executed and the timer interrupt processing is periodically executed. 1 (during normal game) and timer interrupt processing 2 (setting change mode) that is periodically executed, and is common to at least two of the main processing on the main control side, timer interrupt processing 1 and timer interrupt processing 2. Use the bank registers.

The timer interrupt process executed in the normal game and the timer interrupt process executed in the setting change mode may have the same execution cycle, but may execute in different cycles. The sampling of the switch in the timer interrupt process executed in the setting change mode is only the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971, so that the execution cycle of the timer interrupt process in the normal gaming state is 4 ms, but the setting is executed in the setting change mode. The execution cycle of the timer interrupt process may be early (for example, 2 ms) or late (for example, 8 ms). If the execution cycle of the timer interrupt process executed in the setting change mode is delayed, the cycle of the dynamic lighting control of the LED that displays the set value will be delayed, and the display mode of the set value will differ from the base display during the normal game. become. If there are 8 LED commons and the timer interrupt processing execution cycle is 8 ms, the display cycle is 64 ms (display ON is 8 ms, OFF is 56 ms), and the timer interrupt processing execution cycle is 4 ms. The cycle becomes 32 ms (display ON is 4 ms, OFF is 20 ms), the OFF time becomes longer in proportion to the execution cycle of the timer interrupt processing, and the LED flickering becomes larger, and the display mode with the base display during the normal game is increased. And can be recognized differently.

Further, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is activated at the time of power activation, the timer interruption processing 1 for setting change/confirmation is permitted and the timer interruption processing 2 for normal game is prohibited. On the other hand, when the power source is started in the normal game state (when the mode is not changed to the setting change/confirmation mode), the timer interrupt processing 1 for setting change/confirmation is prohibited and the timer interrupt processing 2 for normal game is permitted. When the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the timer interruption processing 1 for setting change/confirmation is prohibited and the timer interruption processing 2 for normal game is permitted.

FIG. 183 is a flowchart of the performance display process executed by the main control MPU 1311. In the performance display process, the performance (eg, base value) of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the base display 1317.

The performance display process is executed in the timer interrupt in the normal game state described above. Specifically, it is executed by the normal interrupt processing of step S233 of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 181 or the base display output processing of step S2087 of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG.

First, the main control MPU 1311 saves the stack address in the game control area, sets the stack address outside the game control area (step S260), and saves the register used in the game control area in the register save buffer (step S260). S261). The save destination of the register used in the game control area in step S261 may be a work area of the main control RAM 1312 outside the game control area. The save destination of the register used in the game control area may be a stack area of the main control RAM 1312 outside the game control area.

Then, it is determined whether the initial power-on flag is normal (step S262). The first power-on flag is a flag indicating whether the area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized (that is, whether the power is turned on for the first time), and when the area outside the game control area is initialized, 5AH is set. To be done. That is, if the value of the first power-on flag is 5 AH, it can be determined that the main control RAM 1312 at the time of first power-on is initialized (that is, the area outside the game control area is also initialized).

Then, it is determined whether the value of the parameter used to display the base value is within a predetermined range (step S263). For example, if the value of the LED common counter for switching the display digit of the base display 1317 is other than 0 to 3, it is determined that the value of the parameter is abnormal, and the main control RAM 1312 outside the game control area is stored in step S264. initialize.

If the power failure flag is not normal or the value of each parameter is not within the predetermined range, the main control RAM 1312 outside the game control area is initialized and set to the power failure flag 5AH (step S264), and the process proceeds to step S265. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is normal and the value of each parameter is within the predetermined range, the various winning hole sensors 3015, 2114, 2554, 2557 and the discharge ball sensor 3060 are detected, and the base value is calculated ( Step S265).

Then, it is determined whether it is the switching time of the base value calculation section (step S266), and if the switching time has come, the display mode is switched (step S267). Then, display data is created according to the display mode and stored in the buffer (step S268). Then, the display is controlled for each section. For example, display control for each section includes display of a test section with less than 500 out balls, blinking display when the number of low-probability/non-time saving out balls is less than a predetermined number (for example, 6000) ( Step S269).

After that, the value of the register is restored from the register save buffer (step S270), the stack address in the game control area is restored (step S271), and the performance display process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 184, a notification mode of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. As described above, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, when the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal when the power is turned on, or during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, a notification is given to the hall staff to inform the pachinko machine of the pachinko machine. Notify the state in an easy-to-understand manner.

The notification mode described below (for example, the display mode of the function display unit 1400) is output in the mode selected in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. These notifications are controlled by selecting a notification pattern together with the display setting on the base display 1317 in steps S246 and S247 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 181). Specifically, the setting display process of step S2069 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 190 is executed. A dedicated module for displaying the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 may be provided to execute the process.

First, when the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, it is controlled by the command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in step S249 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 181). It should be noted that the abnormality of the main control RAM 1312 is given priority over the notification of other abnormality or status.
Function display unit 1400 All lights off or all LEDs flash at the same cycle at high speed Main liquid crystal display device 1600 Sound of displaying "RAM error" (sound effect) RAM abnormality notification sound is output (RAM abnormality notification sound changes settings) (It may be the same as the notification sound other than the mode and setting confirmation mode)
Sound (sound) Outputs the sound of "RAM error" Volume Volume maximum volume decoration LED that does not depend on the volume of the peripheral control board box 1520 or the volume setting by the player Predetermined frame lamp (top lamp is installed on the door frame 3 Including, excluding bulb and stock notification LED) blinks in red Display panel decoration LED all off External output (security signal) Output test signal (gaming machine error signal) Output re-notification release condition By setting change on main control board 1310 RAM cleared, or power was reapplied to the peripheral control board 1510.

Next, the setting change notification when the main control RAM 1312 is activated in the setting change mode will be described. The setting change notification is controlled by the command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in step S249 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 181).
Function display unit 1400 All lights up, or all LEDs flash at medium speed in the same cycle Main liquid crystal display device 1600 Sound of character "in setting change" (sound effect) Sound of notification of setting change mode (sound) " The sound "Setting is being changed" is output a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 times). Maximum volume frame decoration LED that does not depend on the volume of the peripheral control board box 1520 or the volume setting by the player. A predetermined frame lamp provided on the door frame 3 ( Blinking white, including top lamp, excluding bulb burnout and stock notification LED) Display panel decoration LED all off External output (security signal) Output test signal (game machine error signal) Release condition to re-notify output Peripheral control board 1510 "A001H" was received as the power-on operation command.

Next, the setting confirmation notification when the main control RAM 1312 is activated in the setting confirmation mode will be described. The setting confirmation notification is controlled by the command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in step S249 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 181).
Function display unit 1400 All lights up, or all LEDs blink at the same cycle at low speed Main liquid crystal display device 1600 Displaying the character "Setting confirmation" (sound effect) Outputs a confirmation sound of setting confirmation mode (Notification of setting confirmation mode) The sound may be the same as the notification sound in the setting change mode)
Sound (Voice) The sound of "setting confirmation" is output a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 times). Volume is set on the maximum volume frame decoration LED door frame 3 which does not depend on the volume of the peripheral control board box 1520 or the volume setting by the player. Predetermined frame lamp (including top lamp, excluding bulb burnout and stock notification LED) blinks in white Display panel decoration LED all off External output (security signal) Output test signal (game machine error signal) Output re-notification cancellation condition The peripheral control board 1510 receives "A001H" as a power-on operation command and a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed.

Regarding the notification of the three states described above, it is preferable that the abnormality of the main control RAM 1312 is notified with the highest priority, and the notification is given with priority in the order of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. More specifically, the priority may be determined in the order shown in FIG. Priority 1 has a high notification priority, and priority 9 has a low notification priority. That is, when a plurality of notifications should be given, notifications with a high priority (small numbers) are given. In addition, if the notifications of the same priority are satisfied and the notifications conflict, even if the notifications are switched by switching the conflicting notifications, the notification that is satisfied first is performed and the notification is canceled. If the competing notifications satisfy the conditions, the competing notifications may be performed. Specifically, in priority 3, the RAM clear notification and the setting confirmation notification do not occur at the same time, so the notifications do not conflict. In priority 4, the excess ball abnormality notification and the normal electric auditors prize winning abnormality notification may occur at the same time, and the two notifications may conflict with each other.
Priority 1: RAM error notification when a RAM abnormality is detected Priority 2: Setting change notification priority in setting change mode 3: RAM clear when the main control RAM is initialized by operating the RAM clear switch 954 Notification (except RAM clear by setting change)
Priority 3: Setting confirmation notification priority in setting confirmation mode 4: Excessive prize ball abnormal notification when prize balls are paid out by a predetermined number or more Priority 4: Ordinary electric auditors are continuously inactive for a predetermined number or more Normal electric auditors product prize abnormality notification priority 5 when a winning prize is detected or when a predetermined or more prizes are detected during one operation of the ordinary electric baking products: The difference between the winning number and the discharging number of the special winning opening Of the discharge abnormality when the number of times exceeds a predetermined number 6: Priority of vibration sensor abnormality notification when vibration is detected 7: Door opening abnormality notification priority when opening of the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4 is detected 8: Magnetic sensor abnormality notification priority when the magnetic sensor detects magnetism 9: When more than a predetermined number of winnings are continuously detected when the special winning opening is not operated, or when a single big hit hits a predetermined winning or more Big winning mouth prize notification when detected

Next, details of the above-described power-on process (FIGS. 179 and 180) will be described. 186 and 187 are flowcharts of the power-on process executed by the main control MPU 1311 when the power is turned on.

First, the main control MPU 1311 starts from the process of the address 8000 which is the start address of the program code when the reset signal is released by turning on the power. The protect invalidity and the prohibited area invalidity of the main control RAM 1312 are set in the RAM protect register (step S2000). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating a use area of the main control RAM 1312 and resetting the access control unit when it determines that an prohibited area other than the designated area is accessed. In order to release the reset function by accessing the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312, the prohibited area is set to be invalid so that the entire area of the main control RAM 1312 can be accessed. It should be noted that an unused area in the main control RAM 1312 is designated as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is enabled, and when access to the designated prohibited area is detected, the main control MPU 1311 is reset. Good.

Next, the simple clear mode timer of a predetermined time is set to the watchdog timer (step S2001) and the watchdog timer is cleared (step S2002). After that, the power failure clear signal is set to ON (step S2003), and the power failure clear signal is set to OFF (step S2004). By once setting the power failure clear signal to ON and then setting it to OFF, the power failure signal stored in the latch can be set to a normal value.

Next, the levels of the signals of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are read from the PF port and stored in the register (step S2005). The main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are operated, so that the hall control unit 1510 waits until the peripheral control board 1510 is activated. If the employee of the above mistakes the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 by mistake, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are determined in a state not intended by the employee of the hall. Therefore, the input state (level) of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is stored in a register or the like which is a temporary storage means at an early stage after the power-on process is started, and the peripheral control board 1510 ends the standby state. Even if an employee of the hall accidentally interrupts the key operation at an early stage after the power is turned on, the state of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 stored in the register or the like which is a temporary storage means is determined later. The operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 during the power-on operation is surely detected.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power failure notice signal is in the power failure state (step S2006). If the power failure notice signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine is not normal, and therefore the process waits until the power supply voltage stabilizes in step S2006.

Then, it is determined whether the set value is within a predetermined range (step S2007). For example, in the pachinko machine 1 that can be selected in the stages of setting 1 to 6, the value of the work in which the set value is stored corresponds to 0 to 5 (setting 1=0, setting 6= In the case of 5), if a value of 5 or less is stored, it is determined to be within the predetermined range.

If the set value is not within the predetermined range, the set value is initialized to 0 (step S2023), the value indicating RAM abnormality (08H) is recorded in the set state management area (step S2024), and the reset signal of the pachinko machine 1 is set. Wait for initialization by. Since the set value is not in the range where the checksum is calculated and is not erased by the RAM clear operation, even if the set value is an abnormal value, it is not corrected. Therefore, when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the set value, and if there is an abnormality, the normal game is not activated. In the hall where the pachinko machine is installed, you want to initialize the game state while maintaining the set value (for example, clear the latency probability variation (high probability non-time saving) and return to the normal state with low probability time saving) In some cases, a RAM clear operation may be performed. When the setting value is initialized by the RAM clear operation during business hours, the setting value is reset and the power is cut off to continue the business, the setting change mode is started, and the original setting value is reset. There is a need. In order not to cause such trouble, the RAM clear operation maintains the set value without clearing it.

On the other hand, if the set value is within the predetermined range, the sub-start waiting timer (for example, about 2 seconds) is started, and the watchdog timer is continuously cleared until the timer expires. Waits for activation (step S2008). The waiting for activation of the peripheral control board 1510 may be any time after the power is turned on until the first command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, not after the setting value is determined.

After that, it is determined again whether or not the power failure notice signal is in the power failure state (step S2009). If the power failure notice signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine 1 is abnormal, and thus the process waits in step S2009.

Also, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, and the determination result is stored in the register (step S2010). Specifically, a checksum calculated and stored from the data (excluding the data saved in the stack) used as the game control area in the area backed up in the internal RAM 1312 at the time of the previous power shutdown, The checksum calculated using the same area is compared, and if they are different, it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 has an abnormality. In addition, if the value of the power failure flag indicating that the power is properly backed up (the processing at the time of power failure was normally executed) is not stored in the backup flag area, the data in the main control RAM 1312 is normally backed up when the power failure occurs. It is determined that the main control RAM 1312 has an abnormality because the power-off processing has not been normally performed.

Then, if there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the information in the setting state management area is saved (step S2011), and the value indicating RAM abnormality (08H) is temporarily recorded in the setting state management area (step S2012). ..

Then, the bits of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 of the register value in which the value of the PF port is recorded are masked (step S2013). After that, it is determined using the value stored in the register whether the setting key 971 has been operated to be ON and the RAM clear switch 954 has been operated to be ON when the power was turned on (step S2014). If the setting key 971 is turned ON and the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON, it is determined that the setting change operation is performed, and the process proceeds to step S2030 in FIG. 187.

On the other hand, if the setting key 971 is not operated and the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated, it is determined whether or not the setting change mode was set when the power failure occurred (step S2015). For example, when the value of the setting status management area saved in S2011 is the setting change mode (02H), it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the setting change mode.

When it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the setting change mode, the process proceeds to step S2030 in FIG. 187.

On the other hand, when it is determined that no power outage has occurred during the setting change mode, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2016). Specifically, the determination can be performed using the determination result stored in the register in step S2010 described above. As a result, if there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process proceeds to step S2031 in FIG. 187.

On the other hand, if there is no abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, it is determined whether a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing (step S2017). For example, when the value of the saved setting status management area is a value indicating RAM abnormality (08H), it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing.

When it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, the process proceeds to step S2036 in FIG. 187. On the other hand, when it is determined that the power failure has not occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, the value (00H) indicating the normal game state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2018). By recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2018, the value (08H) indicating the RAM abnormality temporarily recorded in the setting state management area in step S2012 is returned to the normal state. Also, by recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2018, the values in the setting state management area when jumping from step S2016 and S2019 to step S2031 are different, so that the programs can be shared by both and The size can be reduced.

Then, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 954 has been operated to be ON when the power is turned on by using the value stored in the register (step S2019). If the RAM clear switch 954 has been operated to ON, it is determined that the RAM clear operation has been performed, and the process proceeds to step S2031 in FIG. 187.

In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the processing is distributed based on the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 and the value recorded in the setting state management area. For example, when it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, 08H is recorded in the setting state management area, and 08H is maintained until the power is cut off, so that the normal game process cannot be executed. At this time, if the power is turned off and then the setting is changed to turn on the power, the RAM abnormality can be cleared. That is, when it is determined in step S2014 that both the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated (setting change operation), the setting state management area changes from a value indicating RAM abnormality (08H) to a value indicating setting change. It is updated to (02H) (step S2030), and the RAM abnormal state ends. As described above, the recovery from the RAM abnormality is always via the setting change. In other words, it is determined whether or not the setting change operation is performed before it is determined whether the state at the time of the power failure is the RAM abnormality. Therefore, the RAM abnormality can be resolved only when the setting value is changed.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated, in order to recover the state before the occurrence of the power outage, the information on the game state at the time of the power outage is stored in the power-on state buffer (step S2020).

After that, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has been operated to be ON when the power is turned on, using the value stored in the register (step S2021). If the setting key 971 has been operated to ON, it is determined that the setting confirmation operation has been performed, and the value (01H) indicating the setting confirmation mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2022). It proceeds to step S2036. That is, if only the setting key 971 is operated (if the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated), the setting confirmation mode is entered regardless of whether the state at the time of power failure is during setting confirmation.

Since steps S2018 to S2022 are processing executed when at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is not operated, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 954 is operated (step S2019) and the setting key 971. Any of the operation determination (step S2021) may be performed first. That is, as shown in the figure, the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 may be determined (step S2019) and then the operation of the setting key 971 may be determined (step S2021), or the operation of the setting key 971 may be determined (step S2021). The operation of the RAM clear switch 954 may be determined (step S2019).

Next, FIG. 187, which is a continuation of the power-on process (FIG. 186), will be described.

If YES is determined in step S2014 or step S2015, the value (02H) indicating the setting change mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2030). Then, the area other than the set value and setting state management area in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and the stack area in the game control area are initialized (step S2031). After that, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2032). Specifically, since the determination result in step S2010 described above is stored in the register, in step S2032, the determination can be performed based on the determination result stored in the register.

When it is determined that there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game control area (step S2033), and by the RAM abnormality initialization processing, the game control area of the main control RAM 1312. The RAM (work area and stack area) used outside is initialized (step S2034). The details of the RAM abnormal initialization process will be described later with reference to FIG. 189. Then, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game control area is restored (step S2035).

After that, the functions of the devices (CTC, SIO, etc.) built in the main control MPU 1311 are initialized (step S2036), and the hardware random number (for example, winning random number) built in the main control MPU 1311 is activated (step S2037). Then, the power-on setting process is executed (step S2038). Details of the power-on setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Finally, the timer interrupt is set to enable (step S2039), and the process proceeds to the main process on the main control side (FIG. 188).

FIG. 188 is a flowchart of the main processing on the main control side executed by the main control MPU 1311. The main processing on the main control side is executed after step S2039 of the power-on processing (FIG. 187).

First, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a power failure notice signal and determines whether a power failure has occurred depending on whether the power failure notice signal is ON (step S2040). If the power failure notice signal is not ON, the power is being supplied normally, so the random number updating process 2 is executed (step 2041). Details of the random number update process 2 will be described later with reference to FIG. In the random number updating process 2, a random number other than the random number for making a winning decision is mainly updated in the special lottery and the ordinary lottery.

On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is detected, the power-off processing (steps S2042 to S2046) is executed. In the power-off process, a process of backing up data for returning to the state before the power outage is executed. Specifically, first, interruption is prohibited (step S2042). As a result, timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is not performed, writing of data to the main control internal RAM 1312 is prohibited, and rewriting of game information is protected. Further, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output port and stops the operation of the device controlled by the output from each port (step S2043). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is output to the solenoid/power failure clear/ACK output port. Note that not all output ports may be cleared, and for example, output ports for controlling solenoids and motors that consume a large amount of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, it is possible to reduce power consumption until the main-board-side power-off process is completed, and to reliably complete the main-board-side power-off process.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum for determining whether or not the data stored in the work area to be backed up is normally held, and stores the checksum in a predetermined checksum storage area of the main control RAM 1312. (Step S2044). This checksum is used to judge whether the data backed up in the work area is normal. The target area for which the checksum is calculated is the work area in the game control area, which may be changed after the power is turned on and before the main processing on the main control side is executed. And the value of the setting status management area), the backup flag, and the value of the checksum area may be excluded.

Further, as the power failure flag, a value (5AH) indicating that the power-off processing has been normally executed is stored in the backup flag area (step S2045). This completes the storage of the game backup information. Finally, the RAM protection valid (write prohibited) and the invalidation of the prohibited area are written in the RAM protect register to prohibit writing to a predetermined area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2046), and wait until the power is restored. (infinite loop). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating a use area of the main control RAM 1312 and resetting the access control unit when it determines that an prohibited area other than the designated area is accessed. In order to cancel the reset function by accessing the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312, the prohibited area is set to be invalid to enable access to all areas of the main control RAM 1312. It should be noted that an unused area in the main control RAM 1312 is designated as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is enabled, and when access to the designated prohibited area is detected, the main control MPU 1311 is reset. Good.

FIG. 189 is a flowchart of the RAM abnormal time initialization processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. The RAM abnormality initialization processing is executed in step S2034 of the power-on processing (FIG. 187).

First, the main control MPU 1311 stores the stack pointer value in the SP save buffer outside the game control area (step S2050), sets the game control area outside stack pointer value in the stack pointer (step S2051), and registers all registers. The value is stored in the register save buffer outside the game control area (step S2052).

After that, it is determined whether initialization is performed at the first power-on based on the value of the first power-on flag at power-on (step S2053). The first power-on means the power-on as a pachinko machine for the first time, and the power-on after the backup power supply is cut off and the data backed up in the main control RAM 1312 is erased. For example, if the connection line between the main control board 1310 and the backup power supply (for example, installed in the main body frame 4) is disconnected, the backup power supply to the main control RAM 1312 is cut off and the data in the main control RAM 1312 cannot be held.

If the initialization is performed when the power is first turned on, the process proceeds to step S2056. On the other hand, if the initialization is not performed when the power is first turned on, it is determined whether or not the base calculation target discharge ball is out of a predetermined range (step S2054). If the base calculation target discharge ball is outside the predetermined range, the process proceeds to step S2056. On the other hand, if the discharge ball of the base calculation target is within the predetermined range, it is determined whether the display parameter of the performance display monitor is within the normal range (step S2055). Then, if the display parameters of the performance display monitor are within the normal range, the RAM abnormal initialization process is terminated, and the process returns to the calling source.

On the other hand, if the display mode of the performance display monitor is out of the normal range, 00H is written and initialized in all work areas outside the use area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2056), and 00H is written in all stack areas outside the use area. Is written and initialized (step S2057), a predetermined value (for example, 5 AH) is set to the initialization flag at power-on (step S2058), and the process returns to the calling source.

190 and 191 are flowcharts of the timer interrupt processing executed by the main control MPU 1311.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2060). The main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for calculation, one of which can be used as a register group of bank 0, and the other of which can be used as a register group of bank 1 for performing bank switching. Without being configured, the registers in both banks cannot be used. Register bank 0 is used in the main processing on the main control side, and register bank 1 is used in the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, the instruction to switch the bank to 1 is executed at the start of the timer interrupt processing, but it is not necessary to execute the instruction to switch the bank to 0 at the end of the timer interrupt processing. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the state of the bank in the flag register (for example, the register in which the Z flag and the C flag are set), and the flag register is saved in the stack area at the start of the interrupt and the RET Execution of an instruction returns from the stack area. Therefore, by executing the RET instruction, the bank flag of the register stored in the flag register also returns to its original state. When the configuration in which the bank state is not stored in the flag register is adopted, the bank switching instruction is executed at the end of the timer interrupt processing, and the bank is returned to bank 0.

Since the flag register also stores a flag for controlling whether or not to allow an interrupt, it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after setting interrupt permission. The flag for controlling the availability of interrupts is set to the interrupt disabled state after stacking the flag register at the start of the timer interrupt process. Therefore, the interrupt is not enabled unless the interrupt is permitted (EI instruction or the like) during the timer interrupt processing or the RETI instruction is executed.

Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. When the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, it is set to 0 (step S2061).

Next, switch input processing 1 is executed (step S2062). In the switch input processing 1, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, ON edges are created, and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312.

The switch input process 1 in step S2062 is a process related to a winning signal, and the switch input process 2 in step S2080 described later is a process related to input of a fraud detection sensor (magnet sensor, radio wave sensor, vibration sensor, etc.). Therefore, in the timer interrupt processing executed in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, since it is determined as NO in step S2604, the winning is detected, but the fraud is not detected. Even if the winning is detected, the payout of the prize balls, the variable display, etc. are not executed. This is because the setting change operation and the setting confirmation operation are performed by the employees of the hall, and it is considered preferable that the illegality is not detected in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, and the illegality is not detected.

Even in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, some fraud detection sensors (for example, radio wave sensors) may be detected in the switch input process 1 to monitor a particular type of fraud. In this way, it is possible to detect a fraud in which a person who intends to perform a fraudulent act (master Goto) forcibly activates the setting change mode by irradiating a radio wave.

Subsequently, the random number update process 1 is executed (step S2063). In the random number update process 1, the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are updated. In addition to these random numbers, in order to change the initial values of the big hit symbol determining random numbers and the small hit symbol determining random numbers updated in the random number updating process 2 of the main control side main process shown in FIG. 188, respectively. Update the random number for initial value determination.

Then, it is determined whether or not a value (00H) indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting status management area (step S2064). If the value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the process proceeds to step S2080 in FIG. On the other hand, if the value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, the LED common port is turned off (step S2065). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of timer interrupt processing, the time until the LED common signal is turned on, that is, the LED turn-off time is secured, and the ghost phenomenon in which the display before and after the display switching of the LED appears mixed To prevent LED flickering.

After that, the security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2066), and the test signal is output (step S2067). In step S2067, only the gaming state error signal should be turned on, and the others should be turned off.

Then, the setting process is executed (step S2068). The details of the setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After that, the setting display process is executed (step S2069). The details of the setting display process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, peripheral board command transmission processing for outputting the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit is executed (step S2070). The transmission information storage area is a storage area for temporarily storing the generated transmission command. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read in step 2070 and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a transmission information storage area which is a transmission buffer of a multi-byte FIFO format, and sequentially transmits the values stored in the transmission information storage area to the peripheral control board 1510.

Then, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2071). Since the watchdog timer uses the simple clear mode, the watchdog timer is cleared by setting 1 word. After that, the bank of the register is switched by a return instruction (for example, RETI) (step S2072), and the process before the interrupt is returned.

Next, FIG. 191 will be described. When it is determined in step S2064 of FIG. 190 that a value indicating the start of a game is recorded in the setting state management area, the main control MPU 1311 detects the state of the sensor (switch) for fraud detection, switch input processing 2 Is executed (step S2080). Specifically, when a detection signal or the like from a magnetic detection switch 3024 that detects fraudulent activity using a magnet is read and a predetermined level (ON level or OFF level) continues for a predetermined time, the input information storage area is displayed. Remember. Based on the detection state of each fraud detection sensor generated in the switch input process 2, it is determined whether or not fraud is detected in the fraud detection process of step S2084. In addition, in the fraud detection process (step S2084), in addition to the fraud detection by the fraud detection sensor, a prize abnormality such as a special winning opening and an excessive winning of ordinary electric auditors is also determined.

After that, the timer updating process is executed (step S2081). In the timer update process, for example, the time when the special symbol display 1185 lights according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and the special electric auditors product control process, the normal symbol and the normal symbol variation determined by the normal electric auditors product control process. In addition to the time when the normal pattern display 1189 lights up according to the display pattern, a payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 951 has normally received various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311) is input. When determining whether or not the ACK signal input determination time is set, the time management such as the ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption period is set to 4 ms, so the fluctuation time is decremented by 4 ms each time this timer subtraction process is performed. Then, when the subtraction result becomes the value 0, the variation time of the variation display pattern or the normal symbol variation display pattern is accurately measured.

Subsequently, a prize ball control process is executed (step S2082). In the prize ball control processing, the input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated based on the read input information, and is written in the main control RAM 1312. Further, based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls, a self-check for creating a prize ball command for paying out game balls, and for confirming a connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. Create commands. The main control MPU 1311 transmits the created prize ball command and self-check command to the payout control board 951 as main pay serial data.

Subsequently, a frame command reception process is executed (step S2083). The payout control board 951 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame status 1 command, an error clear navigation command, and a frame status 2 command) classified into status displays by the payout control program. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error cancellation notification command based on a detection signal of the operation switch. In the frame command receiving process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, the information for notifying the payout control board 951 is stored in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. Further, the main control MPU 1311 shapes the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (for example, a frame status display command, an error cancellation notification command, etc.), and the above-mentioned transmission information storage area Remember. Specifically, in the frame command reception process, in order to give a notification corresponding to the command received from the payout control board 951, the command received from the payout control board 951 conforms to the system of commands transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Thus, the command is stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO) like other generated commands. When the command from the payout control board 951 is normally received, a signal for controlling the output of the main ACK signal is generated. The main ACK signal is directly output from the output port to the payout control board 951 instead of the serial communication circuit.

Subsequently, a fraudulent activity detection process is executed (step S2084). In the fraudulent activity detection process, an abnormal state related to fraud (magnetism, vibration, prize winning abnormality, etc.) is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read out from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and when it is not in the big hit game state, it is detected by the count switch that the game balls are entering the special winning openings 2005 and 2006, the main control program Creates a prize abnormality display command classified into notification display as an abnormal state, and stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Subsequently, a switch passing command output process of creating a command corresponding to the detection of passage of various switches related to the winning switch and the starting opening switch and setting it in the transmission information storage area is executed (step S2085).

Then, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game control area (step S2086), and the base display output process is executed (step S2087). Unlike other processing, the base display output processing is processing that is executed using the second area outside the game control area, and is common processing that is not affected by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, in order to ensure the independence of the base display output process, before and after the execution of the base display output process, the predetermined data such as the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game control area, and the base display is saved. It is not updated in the output process. Then, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game control area is restored (step S2088).

Then, the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing is executed (step S2089). In the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing, it is determined whether or not the big hit random number value matches the hit determination value stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance, and the probability variation state is set based on the big hit symbol random value. It is determined whether or not to move. When the big hit random number value matches the hit determination value, it is determined whether or not the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 are opened and closed. When the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 are opened and closed by this determination, the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 are opened (or expanded) to allow the game balls to be received in the special winning openings 2005 and 2006. As a result, the game state shifts to an advantage for the player. If the probability variation transition condition is satisfied, then the probability transition state is entered, while if the probability variation transition condition is not satisfied, the game state other than the probability variation state is entered. Here, the “probability variation state” means a state (high probability state) in which the winning probability of the above-mentioned special lottery is set relatively higher than the normal gaming state (low probability state).

Then, the normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control processing is executed (step S2090). In the normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control processing, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. When the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the random number for normal symbol hit determination is extracted, and it is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control ROM (" Ordinary lottery"). Then, it is determined whether to open/close the second starting opening door member 2549 according to the result of the lottery in the ordinary lottery. When the opening/closing operation is performed by this determination, the second starting opening door member 2549 is opened (or expanded), and the starting opening 2004 becomes a game state in which the game ball can be received, which is advantageous for the player. Transition to the state.

Then, the output data setting process is executed (step S2091). In the output data setting process, various signals are output from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1311. For example, when various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1311 based on the output information, a main payout ACK signal is output to the payout control board 951 or a big hit game. In the state, it outputs a drive signal to an attacker solenoid (first attacker solenoid 2113, second upper attacker solenoid 2553, second lower attacker solenoid 2556) that opens and closes the opening/closing member 2107 of the special winning openings 2005 and 2006. In addition to outputting a drive signal to the starting opening solenoid 2550 that opens and closes the starting opening (second starting opening door member 2549), as output information to the hall computer, information output signal during probability change, special symbol display information Various information (game information) signals related to games such as output signals, normal symbol display information output signals, time saving information output information, starting mouth winning information output signals, and security signals are output to the external terminal board 784.

Further, in the output data setting process, a signal corresponding to the number of out balls counted in the switch input process 2 (step S2080) is output from the external terminal board 784. For example, a pulse signal of a predetermined length may be output from the external terminal board 784 every predetermined number of out balls (10 or the like).

In the output data setting process, a test signal to be output to the inspection device connected to the pachinko machine 1 is set. The test signal includes, for example, a signal indicating a game state, a normal symbol, and a signal indicating a stop symbol of a special symbol.

Then, it progresses to step S2070 of FIG.

FIG. 192 is a flowchart of the setting process. The setting process is executed in step S2068 of the timer interruption process when the setting state management area does not have the value (00H) indicating the normal gaming state, and mainly executes the process of changing the setting value.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2100). If the value indicating the RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the process returns to the calling process without executing the setting process.

When it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the setting process will be repeatedly executed, so the process related to the special symbol or the normal symbol is not executed, and the game cannot be performed at all. This RAM abnormality is a setting change state when the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated to activate the setting change mode when the power is turned off and then the power is turned off and then the power is turned on again. And the RAM abnormality is eliminated. Then, by returning the setting key 971 to the original position, the setting change mode ends and the normal game can be started.

Further, when the power is turned on again, if the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated other than to activate the setting change mode, the value (08H) indicating the RAM abnormality in the setting state management area is maintained, RAM abnormal condition continues, normal game cannot be started. In other words, in order to eliminate the RAM abnormality and enter the normal game state, it is necessary to go through the setting change mode without fail.

On the other hand, if the value indicating the RAM abnormality is not recorded in the setting state management area, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position (step S2101). Specifically, it is detected whether the setting key 971 has an edge from ON to OFF, or whether a predetermined period has passed since the setting key 971 changed from ON to OFF.

When it is determined that the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position, the output time is set in the security signal output timer (step S2102), the setting state management area is initialized (step S2103), and the power-on setting process is executed. (Step S2104), the process returns to the calling process.

When the operation for ending the setting change mode (setting key 971 is turned off) is performed, the delay time until the security signal is turned off after the setting change mode is ended by setting the output time value in the security signal output timer. Set up. Therefore, even if the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends in a short time (for example, within one timer interrupt processing), only the shortest output signal of the security signal is set as the output time value in the security signal output timer. It can be secured and the hall computer can reliably detect the security signal.

Further, when a fraud is detected during the delay time until the security signal is turned off, the security signal may be output for a period or time corresponding to the newly detected fraud while maintaining the security signal.

Furthermore, if a power failure occurs during the delay time until the security signal is turned off, when the power is restored and hot start is performed in the normal game state, the security signal for the remaining time is output and the RAM clear switch is operated to clear the RAM. Alternatively, when the RAM is cleared due to a RAM abnormality, the security signal for the remaining time is not output. This is because the security signal output timer value is reset by the initialization of the main control RAM 1312 and the output of the security signal is stopped.

When the power is turned on after a power failure occurs during the output of the security signal, one of the five patterns of hot start, RAM clear, setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, and RAM abnormal state continuation occurs.

When the mode is changed to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the activated mode ends and the security signal is output until the delay time elapses. If the RAM abnormality continues, the setting change operation has not been performed even when the power is restored, so that the security signal due to the continuous RAM abnormality is output. In case of hot start, the security signal is output for the remaining time.

Even when the security signal is continuously output, the output of the security signal is stopped by the power-on reset signal when the power is turned on, and the timer interrupt processing is performed after the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, during the startup waiting time of the peripheral control board 1510). After the shift, the output of the security signal is restarted. That is, in the following cases, even when the security signal is continuously output after a power failure occurs during the security signal output, a period during which the security signal output is stopped is provided for a predetermined period after the power is restored.
-When power is restored by hot start after a power failure occurs during security signal output due to illegal detection, etc.-After a power failure occurs during security signal output due to RAM failure, power is restored and RAM failure continues. When: ・The power is restored after a power failure occurs while the security signal is being output in the setting change mode, and the setting change mode continues.・The power is restored after a power failure occurs while the security signal is being output in the setting confirmation mode. And the setting confirmation mode continues

In this way, even when the security signal is continuously output after a power failure occurs while outputting the security signal, the security signal output is stopped for a predetermined period after the power is restored, so that the security signal is generated on the hall computer side. It is possible to determine whether there is an abnormality or the state associated with the output of the security signal is released.

In the setting confirmation mode in which only the setting key 971 is operated, the security signal is output until the setting confirmation mode ends, regardless of the remaining time when the security signal is output, and the delay time after the setting confirmation mode ends. The output of the security signal is stopped after a lapse of time. In addition, the same processing as the setting confirmation mode may be performed in the setting change mode in which the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting key 971 has not returned to the OFF position, it is determined whether or not the value (02H) indicating the setting change is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2105), and the setting change switch 972 is operated. It is determined whether it has been done (step S2106). The setting change switch 972 may also be configured to be used as the RAM clear switch 954. As a result, when it is determined that the value indicating the setting change is recorded in the setting status management area and the setting change switch 972 is operated, the setting value is updated by +1. If the set value exceeds the upper limit of 6, the value is set to 1 (step S2107). After that, the process returns to the calling process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value indicating the setting change is not recorded in the setting status management area (that is, the setting confirmation mode is set) or the setting change switch 972 is not operated, the setting value is updated. Without returning to the processing of the calling source.

When determining the operation of the setting change switch 972 (immediately before or immediately after), it may be determined whether the setting key 971 is turned on. In this way, when the operation of the setting key 971 is determined when the setting change switch 972 is operated, the setting change mode is in effect when a power failure occurs, and even when the setting key 971 is not turned on when the power is restored, the setting change switch 972 It is possible to prevent the setting from being changed by the operation.

FIG. 193 is a flowchart of the setting display process. The setting display process is executed in step S2069 of the timer interrupt process.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2110). If the value indicating the RAM abnormality is not recorded in the setting state management area, the output of the segment terminal of the LED is set so that the current setting value is displayed on the base display 1317 (step S2111). On the other hand, if the value indicating the RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the output of the segment terminal of the LED is set so that the error is displayed on the base display 1317 (step S2112).

After that, the LED common signal corresponding to the LED common counter is output (step S2113), and the driver is driven to output the display data (segment signal) corresponding to the set value or the error display to the base display 1317 (step S2114). , Return to the processing of the calling source.

FIG. 194 is a flowchart of the power-on setting process. The power-on setting process is a subroutine, and is called and executed in step S2038 of the power-on process (FIG. 187) and S2104 of the setting process.

First, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command, and sets the created command in the transmission information storage area (step S2120). The power-on operation command is, as shown in FIG. 202(A), a command for notifying the recorded contents of the setting state management area.

Next, the bit corresponding to the setting key 971 and the bit corresponding to the setting change switch 972 in the input level data 2 area are set to 1 which is the initial value. In addition, 0 may be set to the other bits (step S2121). The bit corresponding to the setting key 971 of the input level data 2 area and the bit corresponding to the setting change switch 972 are set to 1 because the bit of the switch is detected by 1 at the next timer interrupt and the ON edge is incorrect. This is to prevent it from being made.

Then, it is determined whether or not a value (00H) indicating the game startable state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2122). If the value indicating the game startable state is not recorded in the setting state management area, it is either the setting change mode, the setting confirmation mode or the RAM abnormality, so the power-on setting process is terminated and the calling source is called. Return to processing.

On the other hand, if the value (00H) indicating the game startable state is recorded in the setting state management area, it means that the normal game can be started, so the work in the game control area depends on whether or not the main control RAM 1312 is initialized. The area is initialized (step S2123).

After that, a power-on state command is created and the created command is stored in the transmission information storage area (step S2124). As shown in FIG. 202(B), the power-on state command is a command for notifying whether or not the normal game startable state is based on the recorded contents of the setting state management area.

Then, a power-on return destination command is created, and the created command is set in the transmission information storage area (step S2125). The power-on return destination command is, as shown in FIG. 202(C), a command for notifying the gaming state regarding the special symbol.

Further, a set value command is created, and the created command is set in the transmission information storage area (step S2126). The set value command is a command for notifying the set value, as shown in FIG.

It should be noted that a power-on state command, a power-on return destination command, and a set value command are transmitted together with a special symbol hold number command indicating the hold number of the special symbol variable display game, and the function display unit 1400 and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 are transmitted. In, the hold number display may be restored to the state before the power failure occurred. Note that the special symbol hold number command is sent in the order in which the power-on state command, the power-on return destination command, and the set value command are transmitted, and even before these commands are transmitted, during transmission of these commands. May be.

After that, the process returns to the calling process.

The power-on setting process is executed when the power is restored and is not in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, or when the setting change mode ends or the setting confirmation mode ends. , Power-on status command, power-on return destination command, and setting value command) are transmitted at the time of a power failure recovery that is not in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, at the end of the setting change mode, or at the end of the setting confirmation mode.

FIG. 195 is a flowchart of the random number update process 2. The random number update process 2 is executed in step S2041 of the main process (FIG. 188) and mainly updates random numbers other than the random numbers for making a winning decision in the special lottery and the ordinary lottery.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets interruption prohibition (step S2131), updates the initial value random number (step S2132), and sets interruption permission (step S2133). Since the initial value random number is also updated in the random number updating process 1 of step S2063 of the timer interrupt process, the interrupt is prohibited before the initial value random number updating process so that the timer interrupt process does not interrupt the initial value random number updating process. Interrupts are enabled after the initial value random number update process. The initial value random number is a big hit determination random number for lottery of big hits of special symbols, a random number for lottery of ordinary symbol hits, a type of symbol at the time of big hit of special symbols (low probability/high probability/time saving/non-time saving etc.) ) Is a random number for changing the initial value for each cycle such as a random number that determines ).

After that, random numbers other than the winning random number (excluding the initial value random number) are updated (step S2134), and the process returns to the calling source.

FIG. 196 is a flowchart of another example of the timer interrupt processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. The same processing steps as those in the timer interrupt processing described above with reference to FIGS. 181 and 182 are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In another example 1 described below, the main control RAM 1312 may be initialized in the setting confirmation mode as in the setting change mode. In this modified example 1, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected when the power is restored, the main control RAM 1312 is initialized in both the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, the RAM clear switch 954 is set to the setting change mode or the setting change mode. It does not switch the confirmation mode, but has only a function as an operation for changing the set value.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1, switches register banks (step S2060), and executes switch input processing 3 (step S2141). The details of the switch input processing 3 will be described later with reference to FIG. 197. To do. Note that in step S2141, the switch input process 1 of S2062 may be applied instead of the switch input process 3 described in FIG.

Then, the random number update process 1 is executed (step S2063), and the setting change/confirmation process is executed (step S2142). Details of the setting change/confirmation processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Subsequently, the switch input process 2 is executed (step S2080), the timer updating process is executed (step S2081), and the prize ball control process is executed (step S2082). Subsequently, the frame command reception process is executed (step S2083), the injustice detection process is executed (step S2084), and the switch passing command output process is executed (step S2085).

Then, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game control area (step S2086), the base display output process is executed (step S2087), and the flag register saved in the stack area in the game control area is restored (step S2086). S2088). Subsequently, the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing is executed (step S2089), the normal symbol and ordinary electric auditors product control processing is executed (step S2090), and output data setting processing is executed (step S2091). Further, the peripheral board command transmission process is executed (step S2070), the watchdog timer is cleared (step S2071), and the register bank is switched (step S2072) by the return command (for example, RETI), and the process before the interrupt is returned. To do.

FIG. 197 is a flowchart of the switch input process 3. The switch input processing 3 is executed in step S2141 of the timer interrupt processing, reads various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311, creates ON edges, and inputs the main control RAM 1312 as input information. Store in the information storage area.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the start address of the switch winning information data (step S2160), and acquires the number of times the process is repeated from the switch winning information data (step S2161). The number of times the process is repeated is the number n of blocks in the switch winning information data table. Then, the input port address specified by the switch winning information data is acquired (step S2162), and the input level data area address specified by the switch winning information data is acquired (step S2163). Furthermore, the input information is read from the acquired input port address (step S2164), and the read input information is corrected using the logical correction value designated by the switch winning information data (step S2165).

Then, it is determined whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set by referring to the value recorded in the setting state management area (step S2166). If it is not the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the correction value is masked by the mask value during the normal game specified in the switch winning information data (step S2167). With this mask, it is possible to acquire the bits of the input port used during the normal game.

On the other hand, if it is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the correction value is masked by the mask value during the setting change/confirmation designated in the switch winning information data (step S2168). With this mask, only the bits used in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode of the input port can be acquired.

After that, input level data is generated from the bits acquired by the mask processing, and the input level data area designated by the switch winning information data is updated (step S2169).

Then, the edge data of the change from OFF to ON is generated from the input level data, and the input edge data area designated by the switch winning information data is updated (step S2170).

After that, it is set in the next block as the switch winning information data (step S2171), and it is determined whether the processing of all switch input ports is completed (step S2172). If it is determined that the processing for all switch input ports is not completed, the process returns to step S2162 to process the next input port. On the other hand, when it is determined that the processing of all switch input ports is completed, the switch input processing 3 is ended and the processing before the interruption is returned to.

FIG. 198(A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a switch winning information data table.

The switch winning information data table shown in FIG. 198(A) is divided into n blocks (n is the number of times the process is repeated), and each block has an input port address, a logical correction value, and a normal game mask. The value, the mask value during setting change/confirmation, and the address of the input level data area are included.

FIG. 198(B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the switch input level/edge data area.

The switch input level/edge data area includes n sets of the address of the input level data area and the address of the input edge data area.

Since the address of the input edge data area is set to the next address of the input level data area as shown in the figure, it is not designated in the switch winning information data. When the input level data area and the input edge data area are not arranged consecutively, the address of the input edge data area is set in the same table together with the input level data area. Although the address of the input level data area and the input edge data area is a 16-bit (2 byte) value, it is set as the address of the input level data area and the input edge data area set in the switch winning information data table. The value may be a lower 8-bit (1 byte) value. That is, since the upper byte of the address is a fixed value that does not change with the value of the input level data area or the input edge data area, the upper byte is the upper byte of the address in the RAM area and only the lower byte needs to be set. Can be reduced.

199 is a diagram showing another configuration example of the switch winning information data table, FIG. 199 (A) shows a configuration example of the switch winning information data table used in the normal gaming state, FIG. 199 (B) Shows an example of the configuration of the switch winning information data table used in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode.

The switch winning information data table shown in FIG. 199 is divided into n blocks (n is the number of times the process is repeated), and each block has an input port address, a logical correction value, a mask value, And the address of the input level data area. The switch winning information data table used in the normal gaming state and the switch winning information data table used in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode include ports having different logical correction values and mask values. That is, in the switch prize information data table shown in FIG. 198(A), the mask value is set to be different between the setting change mode (and the setting confirmation mode) and the normal game state, but the switch prize information data table shown in FIG. 199. Then, different switch prize information data can be acquired by using different switch prize information data tables in the setting change mode (and the setting confirmation mode) and the normal game state.

In order to deal with such a configuration, the switch input processing 3 (FIG. 197) is changed as follows. For example, in step S2160, it is determined whether it is the setting change mode (or the setting confirmation mode) or the normal gaming state, and the start address of the switch winning information data corresponding to the determination result is set. Then, in step S2166, the correction value is masked with the mask value specified in the switch winning information data in step S2167 without determining whether the mode is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

FIG. 200 is a flowchart of the setting change/confirmation process. The setting change/confirmation process is executed in step S2142 of the timer interrupt process. In the setting change/confirmation processing shown in FIG. 200, the same processing steps as those in the timer interrupt processing described above with reference to FIGS. 181 and 182 are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not a value (00H) indicating a game start is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2064). If a value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the setting change/confirmation processing is ended and the processing before interruption is returned to. On the other hand, if the value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, the LED common port is turned off (step S2065), the security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2066), and the test signal is output. (Step S2067). Then, the setting process (FIG. 192) is executed (step S2068), and the setting display process (FIG. 193) is executed (step S2069).

FIG. 201(A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the switch input port 2.

The switch input port 2 is one of a group of ports to which outputs of various switches and sensors are input, and is composed of 8 bits. In the illustrated example, in bit 7, a reception confirmation signal (ACK) from the payout control board 951 is detected at level 1. In bit 6, the power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is detected at level 0. In bit 5, when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated, the signal level becomes 1. In bit 4, when the setting key 971 is turned ON, the signal level becomes 0. In bit 3, the signal level becomes 1 when the door opening sensor detects the opening of the door frame 3. In bit 2, the level becomes 0 when the magnetic detection switch (magnetic detection sensor) detects magnetism. Bits 1 and 0 are unused.

FIG. 201(B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the setting status management area.

As shown in FIG. 201(B), the setting state management area is a 1-byte storage area in which the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded. For example, the lower 4 bits are used and the upper 4 bits are defined. Not not. Specifically, 00H is recorded in the normal game state, 01H in the setting confirmation mode, 02H in the setting change mode, and 08H is recorded if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312.

The setting state management area is not updated to 00H by the RAM clear processing by operating only the RAM clear switch 954, and the current value is maintained. When the setting confirmation mode ends, the value is updated from 01H to 00H, and when the setting change mode ends, the value is updated from 02H to 00H. Further, when the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, when the setting change mode is entered by the next setting change operation at power-on, the value is updated from 08H to 02H, and when the setting change mode is ended, it is updated from 02H to 00H.

FIG. 202A is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on operation command. The power-on operation command is a command for notifying the recorded contents of the setting status management area. For example, the power-on operation command is composed of 2 bytes, the upper byte is A0H, and the lower byte is the recorded content of the setting state management area. The value of the lower byte stores the value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the setting status management area. This is because the value of the setting status management area is 00H during normal play, so if the value sent as a command is 00H, it cannot be distinguished from a hardware error with an output of 0. Is set to 1.

The power-on operation command is generated at least once in the power-on processing. Specifically, it is created once in the case of hot start, RAM clear, and RAM abnormality, and twice in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, that is, processing at power-on and completion of setting change/confirmation.

When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on operation command, the peripheral control board 1510 gives a notification in the above-described manner according to the setting confirmation mode, the setting change mode, and the RAM abnormality state (see FIG. 184).

If the peripheral control board 1510 receives the game command during the normal game without receiving A001H as the power-on operation command, the game state may be inconsistent, so the received game command is It is determined to be invalid, and the game operation (effect, etc.) for the game command is not started. However, if the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the game command during the normal game is continuously transmitted a predetermined number of times), the peripheral control board 1510 may have missed the power-on operation command (A001H). It is preferable to cancel the invalidation of the received game command and perform the effect corresponding to the game command.

In addition, in the state where the game command is invalidated, among the received game commands, an effect satisfying a predetermined condition is performed (for example, a symbol operation, a lamp, a movable body, a voice, etc., is an effect corresponding to the received command. Then, the background of the display device or a predetermined lamp may be used to notify that the game state mismatch occurs. Further, it may be notified with a small volume that the mismatch of the game state occurs. This is a player who does not understand that the game state is inconsistent without performing any effect until the predetermined condition is reached, and the special symbol variation display game does not start even if the player wins the starting opening. This is to prevent such a trouble of the pachinko machine 1 that may occur in the hall. Even if the peripheral control board 1510 invalidates the game command, the main control board 1310 is executing the normal game processing, so that the function display unit 1400 normally displays the function display such as the special symbol or the normal symbol. To be done.

FIG. 202(B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on state command. The power-on state command is a command for notifying whether or not the normal game startable state is based on the recorded contents of the setting state management area. For example, the power-on state command is composed of 2 bytes, and the upper byte is 30H and the lower byte is 01H, which indicates that the normal game can be started. The low-order byte of the power-on status command may be used to notify the series code of each pachinko machine model. For example, bits 6-4 can be used to identify eight different series. The power-on state command may be another example shown in FIG. 220(C). Using the power-on state command shown in FIG. 220(C), the peripheral control board 1510 can be notified of the information recorded in the power-on buffer (game state before power failure).

FIG. 202(C) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on return destination command. The power-on return destination command is a command for notifying the game state regarding the special symbol, for example, the power-on return destination command is composed of 2 bytes, the upper byte is 31H, the lower byte indicates the game state regarding the special symbol. Show. The power-on return destination command notifies the state of the special symbol and the operating state of the special electric accessory when a power failure occurs. The power-on return destination command is transmitted once when the power is turned on.

FIG. 202(D) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the setting value command. The set value command is a command for notifying the set value. For example, the set value command is composed of 2 bytes, the upper byte indicates A1H, and the lower byte indicates the set value. The set value command is transmitted when the power is restored and the setting change mode ends or the setting check mode ends, which is not the setting change mode or the setting check mode. In addition, when the special symbol fluctuation starts, or when the game state changes (big hit, certain change, start and end such as time saving), it is transmitted. Thereby, the peripheral control board 1510, even if the setting value command transmitted at the time of power-on is missed, in the subsequent game (for example, the start of the variation of the special symbol), the setting value is changed to the correct setting value, so that the setting is incorrect. The production is not performed based on the value. The effect based on the set value is an effect that suggests the set value using an effect device such as a display, a lamp, a voice, and a movable body, and with a predetermined probability, an effect mode that is difficult to occur (or does not occur) in normal times. By generating it, the set value is suggested. This set value suggestion effect may include effects in other forms of the effects exemplified below, and may include a gaze. As the set value suggesting effect, the main liquid crystal display device 1600, which is an example of a display device, displays an effect such as a notice corresponding to the setting value, and changes the pattern variation mode from the normal time (for example, variation of the left and right middle symbols). The timing of start and confirmation will be different from the normal timing (normally each symbol starts changing at the same time, in the case of high setting, it starts changing in the order of left, middle, right, etc.), voice If you use, the notification sound corresponding to the set value will be generated with a certain probability when the start mouth winning, and the sound during production will be different from the normal sound (male voice in normal time, female voice in high setting Voice, etc.), etc.

FIG. 203 is a diagram showing commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in various states. In the following description, n is a counter value indicating a processing state relating to a special symbol/special electric accessory, and m is a value according to a set value.

As shown in the figure, in the hot start in which the normal game state is activated, a power-on operation command (A001H)→a power-on state command (3001H)→a power-on return destination command (310nH)→a set value command (A10mH) Sent in order.

When the main control RAM 1312 is initialized by operating only the RAM clear switch 954, a power-on operation command (A001H)→a power-on state command (3001H)→a power-on return destination command (3101H)→a set value command ( A10 mH).

In the setting change mode, first, after the power-on operation command (A003H) is transmitted, the setting value is changed in the setting change mode, the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position, and then the power-on operation is performed. The command (A001H)→the power-on state command (3001H)→the power-on return destination command (3101H)→the set value command (A10mH) are transmitted in this order.

In the setting confirmation mode, first, after the power-on operation command (A002H) is transmitted, the set value is confirmed, the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position, and then the power-on operation command (A001H). -> Power-on state command (3001H) -> Power-on return destination command (310nH) -> Set value command (A10mH).

When the RAM is abnormal, first, the power-on operation command (A009H) is transmitted, and the setting change mode is activated by the setting change operation (the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are turned on) when the power is restored after the power is cut off. The power-on operation command (A003H) is transmitted. After that, after the operation of returning the setting key 971 to the normal position, a power-on operation command (A001H)→a power-on state command (3001H)→a power-on return destination command (3101H)→a set value command (A10mH) in order. Sent.

When the RAM is abnormal, first, the power-on operation command (A009H) is transmitted, and if the setting change operation is not performed when the power is restored after the power is shut off, the RAM abnormal condition continues and the power-on operation command (A009H) continues. ) Is sent. After that, after the operation of returning the setting key 971 to the normal position, a power-on operation command (A001H)→a power-on state command (3001H)→a power-on return destination command (3101H)→a set value command (A10mH) in order. Sent.

As described above, when the main control board 1310 is activated in the normal game state, a command group (combination of a plurality of commands in a predetermined order) in which a plurality of commands indicate the return of the power supply is peripheral at a predetermined timing. It is transmitted to the control board 1510. Therefore, it is determined that the normal game state can be started after all the series of commands A001H to A10 mH have been received, and when some commands of the series of commands cannot be received (missed), It is determined that the normal game state cannot be started, and the fact that the normal game state cannot be started is notified.

That is, like the effect in the state where the game command described above is invalidated, among the received game commands, the effect satisfying the predetermined condition is performed (for example, the operation of the symbol, the lamp, the movable body, the voice, etc. are received. The effect corresponding to the command is performed), and the fact that the game state mismatch occurs may be notified by using the background of the display device or a predetermined lamp.

If the peripheral control board 1510 does not receive the set value command, the set value command transmitted at the start of the special symbol variation display game is used to supplement the set value command missed at power-on to start the normal game. You may.

If the peripheral control board 1510 does not receive the set value command, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the set value command when the peripheral control board 1510 is powered on with a predetermined initial value (for example, setting 1) as the set value. You may update to the setting value corresponding to a command.

The power-on operation command (A0001H) and the power-on state command (3001H) both notify the normal game startable state, and are normally transmitted continuously, so either of them is the main control. All you have to do is send it to the board.

FIG. 204 is a diagram showing the state transition of values set after the power is restored from the state before the power is shut off in the setting state management area.

The operation of the pachinko machine having the setting function when the power is turned on differs depending on whether the RAM clear switch 954 is operated or the setting key 971 is operated. There are several patterns for convenience.

<Pattern 1>
An example of the operation shown in FIG. 204(A) in the case of the normal game state (VALID_PLAY=00H) at the time of the last power-off and the main control RAM 1312 being normal at the time of power failure recovery will be described. First, when the power is turned on, the RAM clear switch 954 is operated to be ON, and the setting key 971 is operated to be ON, the main control RAM 1312 is a game control including the whole area stack area other than the set value and the base value. Initialize the area used as the area. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 02H. In addition, the base display 1317 displays the set value associated with the setting change.

If the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (OFF) and the setting key 971 is operated to be ON when the power is turned on, the stored contents of the main control RAM 1312 are not initialized. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting confirmation mode, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 01H. The base display 1317 also displays the current set value for confirming the setting.

When the RAM clear switch 954 is operated to be ON when the power is turned on and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF), the main control RAM 1312 is a game control area including all areas stack area other than the set value and the base value. Initialize the area used as. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the normal gaming state, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 00H. In addition, the base display 1317 displays a base value indicating the performance of the pachinko machine after performing a display (for example, all blinking for 5 seconds) indicating that the performance display has been switched as an initial display when the power is turned on.

If the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (OFF) and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF) when the power is turned on, the stored contents of the main control RAM 1312 are maintained in the state before the power failure. In addition, even if all the stored contents in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 are not maintained, at least an area in which information for returning to the game state before the power failure is stored (memory in which information regarding the game is stored Area (special design, normal design area, prize ball area, random number generated by program (fluctuation pattern random number, initial value random number, etc.)) should be maintained, and it is necessary to return to the game state before power failure. The area in which the non-information is stored may be in a state different from that before the power failure after the power is restored. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the normal gaming state, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 00H. The same value (00H) may be set regardless of the original value. In addition, the base display 1317 displays a base value indicating the performance of the pachinko machine after performing a display (for example, all blinking for 5 seconds) indicating that the performance display has been switched as an initial display when the power is turned on.

<Pattern 2-1>
As shown in FIG. 204(B), in the operation example 1 in the setting change mode at the time of immediately before power-off, and the main control RAM 1312 is normal at the time of power failure recovery, in the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 at the time of power-on. Regardless of whether or not the setting key 971 is operated, the main control RAM 1312 initializes an area used as a game control area including a stack area other than the set value and the base value. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 02H. The same value (02H) may be set regardless of the original value. In addition, the base display 1317 displays the set value associated with the setting change.

Initialization of the main control RAM 1312 in the pattern 2-1 may be performed by initializing an area used as a game control area including a stack area together with a storage area initialized by the initialization processing already executed when a power failure occurs. Good. For example, when the power is cut off during the initialization processing of the main control RAM 1312, the remaining storage area that has not been initialized may be initialized. On the other hand, regardless of the progress of the initialization processing at the time of power failure, the area used as the game control area including the stack area of the main control RAM 1312 may be initialized after the power is restored.

When a power failure occurs during the initialization processing, an area (for example, a RAM clear processing flag) for storing whether the main control RAM 1312 is in the initialization processing is provided, and while the RAM clear processing flag is set, It is advisable to prohibit writing of data to the storage area that is the target of the initialization process.

Further, the process of monitoring a power failure in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode may be repeatedly executed. Therefore, in addition to the main loop (steps S36 to S40 in FIG. 22), for example, a timer interruption may be used to monitor the power failure notice signal.

The power outage monitoring process and the power-off process can be executed in common in any of the setting change mode, the setting confirmation mode, and the normal gaming state, or can be executed in a separate process. It may be executed by a common process in the mode, and may be executed by another process in the normal game state. That is, the power failure monitoring process and the power-off process may be common to at least two of the three or more states (operation modes) in the operation of the pachinko machine.

As described above, in the pattern 2-1 when the power is shut off in the setting change mode and the main control RAM 1312 is normal when the power is restored, the setting is always performed regardless of the operation of the setting key 971 or the RAM clear switch 954. Start in change mode. For example, if a power failure occurs during the setting change work in the hall, the setting change mode may be activated even when the power is restored. However, the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 for activating the setting change mode when the power is restored may not be operated. Therefore, by controlling as in the pattern 2-1, it is possible to prevent an unintended state (different from the setting change mode) when the power is restored.

For example, if only the setting key 971 is operated when the power is restored (the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated), the setting confirmation mode is started instead of the setting change mode, or only the RAM clear switch 954 is operated. When the setting key 971 is not operated, the main control RAM 1312 is initialized and the normal game state is activated, or when neither switch is operated, the normal game state is activated. However, if the control is performed as in pattern 2-1, regardless of the operation of the setting key 971 or the RAM clear switch 954, the control is always started in the setting change mode.

<Pattern 2-2>
If the main control RAM 1312 is in the setting change mode when the power is cut off immediately before, and the main control RAM 1312 is normal when the power is restored, even if the main control RAM 1312 operates according to another pattern shown in FIG. Good. When the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on and the setting key 971 is turned on when the power is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 is used as a game control area including a stack area other than the set value and the base value. Area is initialized. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 02H. The same value (02H) may be set regardless of the original value. In addition, the base display 1317 displays the set value associated with the setting change.

When the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 at the time of turning on the power is other than the above, at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF) at the time of turning on the power, the main control RAM 1312. The memory content of does not change. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the game stopped state, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 08H indicating the abnormality of the main control RAM 1312. The base display 1317 also displays an error (for example, an error code). The game stopped state may be a game stopped by executing an infinite loop on the main control MPU 1311, or a game stopped by not executing the normal game processing.

That is, in pattern 2-1, the setting key and the RAM clear switch are unconditionally shifted to the setting change mode after the power is restored, but in pattern 2-2, the setting is performed when the power is restored. When the operation to activate the setting change mode with the key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 is performed, the setting change mode is activated, and when the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are in other states, the game cannot be executed (RAM abnormality) And That is, in the pattern 2-2, even if at least one of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 at the time of power restoration is operated, the normal game is not started as the RAM abnormal state and the normal operation is performed after the setting change mode. Start the game. For this reason, when the operation to activate the setting change mode is not performed, the normal game is not executed in a state different from the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode such as a RAM abnormality, and the game stop state is notified to notify the hall. The employee may be prompted to operate the setting change mode.

When the value (08H) indicating the RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and the stack area in the game control area are not initialized until the next setting change operation is performed. Stand by with the game stopped. The game stopped state may be a game stopped by executing an infinite loop on the main control MPU 1311, or a game stopped by not executing the normal game processing. After that, the power is cut off once, the setting key and the RAM clear switch are operated in the setting change mode, and the power is turned on, so that the value of the setting state management area is updated to 02H, and the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is changed. Clear the stack area in the game control area and start the setting change mode.

<Patterns 3-1 and 3-2>
An example of the operation shown in FIG. 204(D) when the power supply is cut off immediately before is in the setting confirmation mode and the main control RAM 1312 is normal when the power is restored will be described. First, when the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on and the setting key 971 is turned on when the power is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 serves as a game control area including a stack area other than the set value and the base value. Initialize the area used. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 02H. In addition, the base display 1317 displays the set value associated with the setting change.

If the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (OFF) and the setting key 971 is operated to ON when the power is turned on, the stored contents of the main control RAM 1312 do not change. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting confirmation mode, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 01H. The same value (01H) may be set regardless of the original value. The base display 1317 also displays the current set value for confirming the setting.

When the RAM clear switch 954 is operated to be ON when the power is turned on and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF), the main control RAM 1312 is used as a game control area including a stack area other than the set value and the base value. Initialize the area to be deleted. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the normal gaming state, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 00H. In addition, the base display 1317 displays a base value indicating the performance of the pachinko machine after performing a display (for example, all blinking for 5 seconds) indicating that the performance display has been switched as an initial display when the power is turned on.

If the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (OFF) and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF) when the power is turned on, the stored content of the main control RAM 1312 does not change. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the normal gaming state, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 00H. In addition, the base display 1317 displays a base value indicating the performance of the pachinko machine after performing a display (for example, all blinking for 5 seconds) indicating that the performance display has been switched as an initial display when the power is turned on. In this case, as in the pattern 3-2 shown in FIG. 204(E), the main control MPU 1311 may be activated in the setting confirmation mode, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 01H (the original value). The same value (01H) may be set regardless of the value), and the base display 1317 may display the current set value for confirming the setting.

<Pattern 4>
As shown in FIG. 204(F), an operation example when the main control RAM 1312 has an abnormality at the time of power failure recovery will be described. First, when the power is turned on, the RAM clear switch 954 is operated to be ON, and the setting key 971 is operated to be ON, the main control RAM 1312 is a game control including the whole area stack area other than the set value and the base value. Initialize the area used as the area. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area becomes 02H. In addition, the base display 1317 displays a display for changing the setting.

When the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 at the time of turning on the power is other than the above, that is, when at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF) at the time of turning on the power, the main operation is performed. The contents stored in the control RAM 1312 do not change. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the game stopped state, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 08H. The same value (08H) may be set regardless of the original value. The base display 1317 also displays an error (for example, an error code).

If there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 when the power is cut off immediately before, if the main control RAM 1312 is initialized before the power is cut off, the main control RAM 1312 is not initialized again when the power is restored, and Initialize the devices built in the main control MPU 1311. (2) Restart the hardware random number. (3) The main loop may be executed after at least one of setting the interrupt permission is executed.

Further, even if the main control RAM 1312 has an abnormality at the time of the last power-off, when the power is turned on, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are set before the determination whether the state before the power failure is the RAM abnormality (step S211 in FIG. 179). The presence or absence of the operation of is determined. Then, when the setting change operation (RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is turned on) is detected when the power is turned on, the setting change mode is started, but even when the setting change operation is not performed when the power is turned on (the setting confirmation mode is In any of the case where the operation for starting is performed, the RAM clear switch 954 is operated, and neither is operated), the state of the RAM abnormality is maintained. That is, normally, when the setting change mode is started and when the setting check mode is started, the setting change mode process and the setting check mode process are executed within the timer interrupt process, but the power is turned off and then turned on again in the abnormal RAM state. If so, different processing is executed in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. In other words, when the power is turned off and on again to recover from the RAM abnormal state, when starting in the setting change mode, the processing of the setting change mode is executed in the timer interrupt processing as usual, but it is started in the setting confirmation mode. When doing so, processing different from normal is executed within the timer interrupt processing.

In this way, when the value (08H) indicating the RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the game cannot be started even if the power is turned on again. However, since the main control RAM 1312 has already been initialized, it is not necessary to initialize the main control RAM 1312 again.

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 1 and its variations will be described using a time chart. The outline of the time chart described below is as follows.
・Time chart for normal setting changes (Fig. 205)
・Time chart for normal setting confirmation (Fig. 206)
-Time chart in the case of shifting to the setting change mode when the setting key 971 is OFF and the RAM clear switch 954 is OFF after the power is restored in the setting change mode during a power failure (Fig. 207)
-Time chart when the setting key 971 is ON and the RAM clear switch 954 is OFF after the power is restored in the setting change mode during power failure, and the setting change mode is entered (Fig. 208).
-Time chart for transition to the setting confirmation mode when the setting key 971 is OFF and the RAM clear switch 954 is OFF after the power is restored in the setting confirmation mode during a power failure (Fig. 209)

FIG. 205 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 205, since the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on and the setting key 971 is turned on when the power is turned on, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting change mode.

First, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply rises (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335 and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check, and starts the main control program at timing T3. After that, at timing T4, the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register, and the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited until timing T5.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, the customer control effect is started. The peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1311 reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register at timing T5 when the peripheral control board activation waiting time has elapsed, records 02H in the setting state management area, and sets it. Move to change mode. Further, the main control MPU 1311 turns on all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400. Further, the main control MPU 1311 starts outputting a security signal. The display mode of the function display unit is as described in FIG. 184 described above.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating the shift to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes an effect (notification) in the setting change mode shown in FIG. 184 described above in accordance with the received power-on command.

When the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated in the setting change mode, the main control MPU 1311 detects that the RAM clear switch 954 is ON, updates the set value from N to N+1, and displays the base display. 1317 displays the updated set value N+1 (T6). Further, by the second operation of the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972), the main control MPU 1311 detects that the RAM clear switch 954 is ON, updates the set value from N+1 to N+2, and updates the base display 1317. The subsequent set value N+2 is displayed (T7). That is, in the setting change mode, the set value is changed in the range of 1 to 6 each time the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated, and is updated to 1 when the set value exceeds 6. It

The employee of the hall operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position when the setting value has been changed. When detecting the OFF edge of the setting key 971, the main control MPU 1311 ends the setting change mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, creates a power-on operation command (A0001H), and shifts to the normal game state. Yes (T8). The generated power-on operation command (A0001H) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing. By recording 00H in the setting state management area, it becomes possible to execute the process during the normal game in the timer interrupt process. Further, the main control MPU 1311 finishes all the lighting of the function display unit 1400 and starts the display in the normal gaming state. Further, the base display 1317 blinks all LEDs for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) and then displays the base value in the normal gaming state. In this way, by displaying the base display 1317 in a predetermined mode at the start of the normal gaming state, the end of the setting change mode can be clearly understood, and operation mistakes at the end of the setting change mode can be reduced. Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on return destination command (3101H), and a set value command (A10mH) to the peripheral control board 1510. Since the main control RAM 1312 is initialized in the setting change mode, the lower byte of the power-on return destination command becomes 01H. M of the set value command (A10 mH) is a numerical value of 1 to 6 according to the set value as shown in FIG. Both the power-on operation command (A0001H) and the power-on state command (3001H) are for notifying the normal game startable state, and are normally transmitted continuously, so either one of them is the main control board. Just send it to.

The peripheral control board 1510 learns from the received power-on state command that the normal game can be started, and executes the effect in the normal game state (for example, customer waiting effect). The peripheral control board 1510 stops the notification effect during the setting change after the lapse of a predetermined delay time after learning that the normal game can be started by the power-on state command, and the effect in the normal game state ( For example, the production may be switched to start the customer waiting production. In addition, during a predetermined delay time, it is advisable to perform a notification effect of setting change by some effect devices, for example, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and sound are returned to the effect in the normal gaming state, and the setting of the decoration lamp is being changed. The notification effect of is continued. In addition, even if some of the decoration lamps (for example, the frame side) continue the notification effect and the other decoration lamps (for example, the panel side) continue the notification effect by the decoration lamp, even if the normal play state is returned to the effect. Good.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 stops the output of the security signal after a predetermined time (for example, 50 milliseconds) is delayed from the end of the setting change mode (T9). This is because if the setting change mode ends in an extremely short time and the security signal is output at all or only for a short time, the hall computer cannot know the transition to the setting change mode, so the minimum output time of the security signal is This is to ensure.

FIG. 206 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting confirmation mode.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 206, the normal game state or the setting confirmation mode is set when the power is turned off immediately before, the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated when the power is turned on, and the setting key 971 is turned on. The main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting confirmation mode.

First, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply rises (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335 and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check, and starts the main control program at timing T3. After that, at timing T4, the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register, and the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited until timing T5.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, the customer control effect is started. The peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1311 reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register at timing T5 when the peripheral control board activation waiting time has elapsed, and records 01H in the setting state management area for setting. Switch to confirmation mode. Further, the main control MPU 1311 turns on all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400. Further, the main control MPU 1311 starts outputting a security signal.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A002H) indicating the shift to the setting confirmation mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect in the setting confirmation mode according to the received power-on command.

The employee of the hall operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position when the confirmation of the setting value is completed. When detecting the OFF edge of the setting key 971, the main control MPU 1311 ends the setting change mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, and shifts to the normal gaming state (T6). By setting the value of the setting state management area to 00H, the process during the normal game can be executed in the timer interrupt process. Further, the base display 1317 displays all the LEDs in a blinking manner for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), and then displays the base value in the normal gaming state.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on return destination command (310nH), and a set value command (A10mH) to the peripheral control board 1510. M of the set value command (A10 mH) is a numerical value of 1 to 6 according to the set value as shown in FIG. In the setting confirmation mode, since the main control RAM 1312 is not initialized in principle, the state before the power failure is transmitted as the lower byte of the power-on return destination command.

The peripheral control board 1510 learns from the received power-on state command that the normal game can be started, and executes the effect in the normal game state (for example, customer waiting effect). The peripheral control board 1510 stops the notification effect during the setting change after the lapse of a predetermined delay time after learning that the normal game can be started by the power-on state command, and the effect in the normal game state ( For example, the production may be switched to start the customer waiting production. In addition, during a predetermined delay time, it is advisable to perform a notification effect of setting change by some effect devices, for example, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and sound are returned to the effect in the normal gaming state, and the setting of the decoration lamp is being changed. The notification effect of is continued. In addition, even if some of the decoration lamps (for example, the frame side) continue the notification effect and the other decoration lamps (for example, the panel side) continue the notification effect by the decoration lamp, even if the normal play state is returned to the effect. Good.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 stops the output of the security signal after a predetermined time (for example, 50 milliseconds) is delayed from the end of the setting confirmation mode (T7).

FIG. 207 is another time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 207, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting change mode because it is in the setting change mode when the power supply was cut off immediately before. Note that, as shown in FIG. 204(B), in the setting change mode at the time of immediately before power-off, the main control MPU 1311 is in the setting change mode regardless of the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 at power-on. It shows the case of starting.

First, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply rises (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335 and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check, and starts the main control program at timing T3. After that, at timing T4, the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register, and the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited until timing T5.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, the customer control effect is started. The peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1311 reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register at timing T5 when the peripheral control board activation waiting time has elapsed, records 02H in the setting state management area, and sets it. Move to change mode. Further, the main control MPU 1311 turns on all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400. Further, the main control MPU 1311 starts outputting a security signal.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating the shift to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect in the setting change mode according to the received power-on command. The peripheral control board 1510 resets the operating state by shutting off the power and returns to the initial state. Therefore, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on operation command transmitted from the main control board 1310 and continues the setting change state.

When the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated in the setting change mode, the main control MPU 1311 detects that the RAM clear switch 954 is ON, updates the set value from N to N+1, and displays the base display. 1317 displays the updated set value N+1 (T6).

After that, when the power supply to the main control board is stopped, the main control MPU 1311 detects a power failure and executes the power-off processing (T7). Then, the output of the reset signal from the reset circuit 1335 is stopped, the display of the set value on the base display 1317 disappears, and the output of the security signal is stopped (T8). In the power-off process, the security signal output may be stopped and the base display 1317 may be turned off. For example, by turning off the security signal output port and the output port to the base display 1317 by the power-off processing program, the output of the security signal can be stopped and the base display 1317 can be turned off.

By turning off the output port in the power-off processing, it is possible to reduce power consumption during the power-off processing, and to prevent resetting due to the power supply (5 V) dropping before the power-off processing is completed. For example, it is effective to turn off the output port before calculating the checksum in the power-off process. The output port of the signal to the solenoid for controlling the opening/closing of the special winning openings 2005, 2006, the second starting opening 2004, etc. may be turned off to stop the drive signal of the solenoid.

After that, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply rises (T9), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335 and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T10).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 performs a security check, starts the main control program at timing T11, and then stores the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 in a register at timing T12. , Waits until the peripheral control board 1510 is activated until timing T13.

The main control MPU 1311 refers to the value in the setting status management area. In the example shown in FIG. 207, since 02H is recorded in the setting state management area, the setting change mode is set at the timing T13 when the peripheral control board startup waiting time has elapsed regardless of the operation of the setting key 971 or the RAM clear switch 954. Move to. When shifting to the setting change mode, the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and the stack area in the game control area are re-initialized as in the case of shifting to the normal setting change mode. It should be noted that since the power failure is monitored after the initialization of the main control RAM 1312 is completed and the power failure processing is executed thereafter, the RAM clear processing is not interrupted by the power-off processing, and thus the setting change mode is in the power failure mode. In this case, since the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has already been initialized, it is possible not to initialize the game control area by executing the RAM clear processing when the power is restored. After the initialization is performed again, the main control MPU 1311 turns on all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and starts the output of the security signal.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating the shift to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect in the setting change mode according to the received power-on command. The peripheral control board 1510 resets the operation state to the initial state by shutting off the power supply, and therefore receives the power-on operation command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the power is restored and continues the setting change state.

When the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated in the setting change mode, the main control MPU 1311 detects that the RAM clear switch 954 is ON, updates the set value, and then sets the updated set value as a base. It is displayed on the display 1317.

The employee of the hall operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position when the setting value has been changed. When detecting the OFF edge of the setting key 971, the main control MPU 1311 ends the setting change mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, and shifts to the normal gaming state (T14). By recording 00H in the setting state management area, it becomes possible to execute the process during the normal game in the timer interrupt process. Further, the base display 1317 displays all the LEDs in a blinking manner for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), and then displays the base value in the normal gaming state. Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on return destination command (3101H), and a set value command (A10mH) to the peripheral control board 1510. M of the set value command (A10 mH) is a numerical value of 1 to 6 according to the set value as shown in FIG.

The peripheral control board 1510 learns from the received power-on state command that the normal game can be started, and executes the effect in the normal game state (for example, customer waiting effect). The peripheral control board 1510 stops the notification effect during the setting change after the lapse of a predetermined delay time after learning that the normal game can be started by the power-on state command, and the effect in the normal game state ( For example, the production may be switched to start the customer waiting production. In addition, during a predetermined delay time, it is advisable to perform a notification effect of setting change by some effect devices, for example, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and sound are returned to the effect in the normal gaming state, and the setting of the decoration lamp is being changed. The notification effect of is continued. In addition, even if some of the decoration lamps (for example, the frame side) continue the notification effect and the other decoration lamps (for example, the panel side) continue the notification effect by the decoration lamp, even if the normal play state is returned to the effect. Good.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 stops the output of the security signal after a delay of a predetermined time (for example, 50 milliseconds) from the end of the setting change mode (T15). This is because when the setting change mode ends in an extremely short time and the security signal is output at all or only for a short time, the transition to the setting change mode cannot be grasped by the hall computer. This is to secure the output time.

FIG. 208 is another time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 208, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in a different operation mode depending on the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 when the power is turned on even in the setting change mode immediately before the power is turned off.

First, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply rises (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335 and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check, and starts the main control program at timing T3. After that, at timing T4, the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register, and the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited until timing T5.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, the customer control effect is started. The peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1311 reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register at timing T5 when the peripheral control board activation waiting time has elapsed, records 02H in the setting state management area, and sets it. Move to change mode. Further, the main control MPU 1311 starts outputting a security signal.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating the shift to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect in the setting change mode according to the received power-on command. The peripheral control board 1510 resets the operating state by shutting off the power and returns to the initial state. Therefore, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on operation command transmitted from the main control board 1310 and continues the setting change state.

When the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated in the setting change mode, the main control MPU 1311 detects that the RAM clear switch 954 is ON, updates the set value from N to N+1, and displays the base display. 1317 displays the updated set value N+1 (T6).

After that, when the power supply to the main control board is stopped, the main control MPU 1311 detects a power failure and executes the power-off processing (T7). Then, the output of the reset signal from the reset circuit 1335 is stopped, the display of the set value on the base display 1317 disappears, and the output of the security signal is stopped (T8). In the power-off process, the security signal output may be stopped and the base display 1317 may be turned off. For example, by turning off the security signal output port and the output port to the base display 1317 by the power-off processing program, the output of the security signal can be stopped and the base display 1317 can be turned off.

By turning off the output port in the power-off processing, it is possible to reduce power consumption during the power-off processing, and to prevent resetting due to the power supply (5 V) dropping before the power-off processing is completed. For example, it is effective to turn off the output port before calculating the checksum in the power-off process. The output port of the signal to the solenoid for controlling the opening/closing of the special winning openings 2005, 2006, the second starting opening 2004, etc. may be turned off to stop the drive signal of the solenoid.

After that, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply rises (T9), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335 and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T10).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 performs a security check, starts the main control program at timing T11, and then stores the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 in a register at timing T12. , Waits until the peripheral control board 1510 is activated until timing T13.

The main control MPU 1311 reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register at the timing T13 when the peripheral control board activation waiting time has elapsed, and reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch. The operation mode is changed depending on the level of the signal 954. In the example shown in FIG. 208, the RAM clear switch 954 is turned off and the setting key 971 is turned on so as to be in the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on again. However, the state before the power failure recorded in the setting state management area is Since the value indicates the setting change (02H), the main control MPU 1311 restarts in the setting change mode at the timing T13 when the peripheral control board startup waiting time has elapsed, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 02H. To be done. The same value (02H) may be set regardless of the original value. When shifting to the setting change mode, the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and the stack area in the game control area are re-initialized as in the case of shifting to the normal setting change mode. It should be noted that since the power failure is monitored after the initialization of the main control RAM 1312 is completed and the power failure processing is executed thereafter, the RAM clear processing is not interrupted by the power-off processing, and thus the setting change mode is in the power failure mode. In this case, since the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has already been initialized, it is possible not to initialize the game control area by executing the RAM clear processing when the power is restored. For example, in the above-described FIG. 186, if the state before the power failure is the setting change, YES is obtained in step S2015, and the process branches to RESET_P_5A (step S2030 in FIG. 187) to execute the RAM abnormal time initialization process (step S2034). However, if the process branches to RESET_P_7 (S2036 in FIG. 187), the state before the power shutdown is continued without executing the RAM abnormal initialization process step S2034. After the initialization is performed again, the main control MPU 1311 turns on all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and starts the output of the security signal. That is, in the time chart shown in FIG. 208, the setting change mode can be activated even if the setting key 971 is not turned ON. In other words, as for the setting change mode, the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are activated by turning on the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 when the power is turned on. The setting change mode can be started even if it is not ON.

Note that when the RAM clear switch 954 is turned off and the setting key 971 is turned off when the power is turned on again, it is indicated by a broken line at the timing T12, unlike the time chart shown in FIG. 00H may be recorded and restarted in a state where the normal game cannot be executed (for example, RAM abnormality) without returning to the setting change mode. That is, in the operation pattern shown in FIG. 208, even in the setting change mode at the time of power failure, if the setting change operation is not performed when the power is restored, the system is restarted in the state of the RAM abnormality. In other words, if the power is cut off during the setting change mode, the normal game cannot be started unless the setting change mode is normally terminated at some point.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating the shift to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect in the setting change mode according to the received power-on command. The peripheral control board 1510 resets the operating state by shutting off the power and returns to the initial state. Therefore, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on operation command transmitted from the main control board 1310 and continues the setting change state.

When the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated in the setting change mode, the main control MPU 1311 detects that the RAM clear switch 954 is ON, updates the set value, and then sets the updated set value as a base. It is displayed on the display 1317 (T14).

The employee of the hall operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position when the setting value has been changed. When detecting the OFF edge of the setting key 971, the main control MPU 1311 ends the setting change mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, and shifts to the normal gaming state (T15). By recording 00H in the setting state management area, it becomes possible to execute the process during the normal game in the timer interrupt process. Further, the base display 1317 displays all the LEDs in a blinking manner for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), and then displays the base value in the normal gaming state. Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on return destination command (3101H), and a set value command (A10mH) to the peripheral control board 1510. Since the main control RAM 1312 is initialized in the setting change mode, the lower byte of the power-on return destination command becomes 01H. M of the set value command (A10 mH) is a numerical value of 1 to 6 according to the set value as shown in FIG. The power-on operation command (A0001H) and the power-on state command (3001H) both notify the normal game startable state, and are normally transmitted continuously, so either of them is the main control. All you have to do is send it to the board.

The peripheral control board 1510 learns from the received power-on state command that the normal game can be started, and executes the effect in the normal game state (for example, customer waiting effect). The peripheral control board 1510 stops the notification effect during the setting change after the lapse of a predetermined delay time after learning that the normal game can be started by the power-on state command, and the effect in the normal game state ( For example, the production may be switched to start the customer waiting production. In addition, during a predetermined delay time, it is advisable to perform a notification effect of setting change by some effect devices, for example, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and sound are returned to the effect in the normal gaming state, and the setting of the decoration lamp is being changed. The notification effect of is continued. In addition, even if some of the decoration lamps (for example, the frame side) continue the notification effect and the other decoration lamps (for example, the panel side) continue the notification effect by the decoration lamp, even if the normal play state is returned to the effect. Good.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 stops the output of the security signal after a delay of a predetermined time (for example, 50 milliseconds) from the end of the setting change mode (T16). This is because when the setting change mode ends in an extremely short time and the security signal is output at all or only for a short time, the transition to the setting change mode cannot be grasped by the hall computer. This is to secure the output time.

FIG. 209 is another time chart from the start to the end of the setting confirmation mode.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 209, in the setting confirmation mode when the power supply is cut off immediately before, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting confirmation mode regardless of the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 when the power supply is turned on.

First, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply rises (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335 and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check, and starts the main control program at timing T3. After that, at timing T4, the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register, and the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited until timing T5.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, the customer control effect is started. The peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1311 reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register at timing T5 when the peripheral control board activation waiting time has elapsed, records 02H in the setting state management area, and sets it. Move to change mode. Further, the main control MPU 1311 starts outputting a security signal.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A002H) indicating the shift to the setting confirmation mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect in the setting confirmation mode according to the received power-on operation command.

After that, when the power supply to the main control board is stopped, the main control MPU 1311 detects a power failure and executes the power-off processing, and the main control MPU 1311 stops its operation (T7). Then, the output of the reset signal from the reset circuit 1335 is stopped, the display of the set value on the base display 1317 disappears, and the output of the security signal is stopped (T8). In the power-off process, the security signal output may be stopped and the base display 1317 may be turned off. For example, by turning off the security signal output port and the output port to the base display 1317 by the power-off processing program, the output of the security signal can be stopped and the base display 1317 can be turned off.

By turning off the output port in the power-off processing, it is possible to reduce power consumption during the power-off processing, and to prevent resetting due to the power supply (5 V) dropping before the power-off processing is completed. For example, it is effective to turn off the output port before calculating the checksum in the power-off process. The output port of the signal to the solenoid for controlling the opening/closing of the special winning openings 2005, 2006, the second starting opening 2004, etc. may be turned off to stop the drive signal of the solenoid.

After that, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply rises (T9), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335 and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T10).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 performs a security check, starts the main control program at timing T11, and then stores the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 in a register at timing T12. , Waits until the peripheral control board 1510 is activated until timing T13.

The main control MPU 1311 refers to the value in the setting status management area. In the example shown in FIG. 209, the RAM clear switch 954 is turned off and the setting key 971 is turned on so as to be in the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on again. However, the state before the power failure recorded in the setting state management area is Since the value indicates the setting confirmation (01H), the peripheral control board is restarted in the setting confirmation mode at the timing T13 when the waiting time for starting the peripheral control board has elapsed, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 01H. The same value (01H) may be set regardless of the original value. After that, the main control MPU 1311 starts outputting the security signal. That is, in the time chart shown in FIG. 209, the setting confirmation mode can be activated even if the setting key 971 is not turned ON. In other words, the setting confirmation mode is activated when the setting key 971 is turned on and the RAM clear switch 954 is turned off when the power is turned on, and the setting key 971 is not turned on when the power is turned on. It is also possible to activate the setting confirmation mode.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A002H) indicating the shift to the setting confirmation mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect in the setting confirmation mode according to the received power-on command.

In the setting confirmation mode, even if the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated and the main control MPU 1311 detects that the RAM clear switch 954 is ON, the set value is not updated and the set value is displayed on the base display. It is continuously displayed at 1317.

The employee of the hall operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position when the confirmation of the setting value is completed. When detecting the OFF edge of the setting key 971, the main control MPU 1311 ends the setting confirmation mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, and shifts to the normal gaming state (T15). By recording 00H in the setting state management area, it becomes possible to execute the process during the normal game in the timer interrupt process. Further, the base display 1317 displays all the LEDs in a blinking manner for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), and then displays the base value in the normal gaming state. Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on return destination command (310nH), and a set value command (A10mH) to the peripheral control board 1510.

The peripheral control board 1510 learns from the received power-on state command that the normal game can be started, and executes the effect in the normal game state (for example, customer waiting effect). The peripheral control board 1510 starts an effect in the normal game state (for example, customer waiting effect) after a lapse of a predetermined delay time after knowing that the power-on state command indicates that the normal game can be started. May be. Further, the peripheral control board 1510 stops the notification effect during the setting change and effects in the normal game state after a predetermined delay time elapses after knowing that the normal game start is possible by the power-on state command. For example, the production may be switched so as to start the customer waiting production. In addition, during a predetermined delay time, it is advisable to perform a notification effect of setting change by some effect devices, for example, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and sound are returned to the effect in the normal gaming state, and the setting of the decoration lamp is being changed. The notification effect of is continued. In addition, even if some of the decoration lamps (for example, the frame side) continue the notification effect and the other decoration lamps (for example, the panel side) continue the notification effect by the decoration lamp, even if the normal play state is returned to the effect. Good.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 stops the output of the security signal after a predetermined time (for example, 50 milliseconds) has been delayed from the end of the setting confirmation mode (T16). This is because when the setting change mode ends in an extremely short time and the security signal is output at all or only for a short time, the transition to the setting change mode cannot be grasped by the hall computer. This is to secure the output time.

210 to 212 are diagrams showing a configuration example of the jackpot determination threshold value table. The jackpot determination threshold value table stores a hit determination threshold value of a jackpot determination random number value for randomly selecting a jackpot for a special symbol.

The jackpot threshold judgment table shown in FIG. 210 includes a set value table selection address table and a set value judgment threshold table. The jackpot determination threshold value table shown in FIG. 210 is an example of determining a jackpot when the jackpot determination random number value is larger than the threshold value defined in the table.

In the setting value table selection address table, the pointer address of the determination threshold value table selected for each setting value is defined, and each data may be configured as a 2-byte value. If the upper byte has a fixed value, only the lower byte may be defined. The determination threshold value table for each set value stores a threshold value at a low probability (normal state) and a threshold value at a high probability (probability change state).

At the time of jackpot determination, the pointer address defined in the address table for setting value table selection is acquired, and this value is used as an offset to select the threshold setting table for the current setting value. Then, using the probability variation state flag (0: low probability, 1: high probability) as an offset, the threshold for jackpot determination is acquired from the selected threshold determination table. Then, when the random number for jackpot determination acquired at the time of winning the starting mouth is equal to or larger than the acquired threshold value, it is determined to be a jackpot, and when it is less than the threshold value, it is determined to be a deviation.

The jackpot determination threshold table shown in FIG. 211 includes a set value table selection address table and each set value determination threshold table. The jackpot determination threshold value table shown in FIG. 211 is an example in which the jackpot determination random number value is determined to be a jackpot when the value is in the range from the lower limit to the upper limit defined in the table.

In the setting value table selection address table, the pointer address of the determination threshold value table selected for each setting value is defined, and each data may be configured as a 2-byte value. If the upper byte has a fixed value, only the lower byte may be defined. The determination threshold value table for each set value includes a lower threshold value at a low probability (normal state), an upper threshold value at a low probability (normal state), a lower threshold value at a high probability (probability change state), and a high probability (probability change state). Stores the upper threshold.

At the time of jackpot determination, the pointer address defined in the address table for setting value table selection is acquired, and this value is used as an offset to select the threshold setting table for the current setting value. Then, the probability variation state flag (0: low probability, 1: high probability) is used as an offset to determine whether the selected threshold judgment table has a low probability block or a high probability block, and a lower limit threshold and an upper limit for jackpot judgment. Get the threshold. Then, the jackpot determination random number value obtained at the time of winning at the starting opening is determined to be a jackpot when the obtained lower limit threshold value is equal to or more than the upper limit threshold value, and is deviated when it is out of the lower limit threshold value to the upper limit threshold value.

The big hit determination threshold value table shown in FIG. 212 is a low probability setting value table selecting address table, a low probability setting value determining threshold table, a high probability setting value table selecting address table, and a high probability setting. It is composed of a judgment threshold table for values. The big hit determination threshold value table shown in FIG. 211 is configured with a low probability table and a high probability table integrally, but the big hit determination threshold value table shown in FIG. 212 is composed of a low probability table and a high probability table. It is configured separately.

The low-probability set value table selection address table defines the pointer address of the determination threshold table that is selected for each low-probability (normal state) set value. Defines the pointer address of the determination threshold value table selected at each set value of high probability (probability change state). The data defined in each setting value table selection address table may be configured as a 2-byte value. If the upper byte has a fixed value, only the lower byte may be defined. The determination threshold value table for each setting value for low probability stores the lower limit threshold value at low probability (normal state) and the upper limit threshold value at low probability (normal state). The determination threshold value table for each set value for high probability stores the lower limit threshold value at high probability (normal state) and the upper limit threshold value at high probability (normal state).

At the time of a big hit judgment, it is decided by the probability change state flag (0: low probability, 1: high probability) whether it is the address table for selecting the setting value table for low probability or the address table for selecting the setting value table for high probability. The setting value is acquired as an offset from the address table for selecting the setting value table, and the determination threshold value table corresponding to the current setting value is selected by the acquired offset. Then, the jackpot determination random number value obtained at the time of winning at the starting opening is determined to be a jackpot when the obtained lower limit threshold value is equal to or more than the upper limit threshold value, and is deviated when it is out of the lower limit threshold value to the upper limit threshold value.

[12-17. Another example of setting change/confirmation processing 2]
Next, another embodiment of the pachinko machine having a setting changing function will be described. In the embodiment described below, the setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972. However, the original function of the RAM clear switch 954 for initializing the main control RAM 1312 and In order to describe the function separately from the setting change function, the operation for changing the set value may be described as the setting change switch 972.

213 and 214 are flowcharts of power-on processing executed by the main control MPU 1311 when power is turned on.

First, the main control MPU 1311 starts from the process of the address 8000 which is the start address of the program code when the reset signal is released by turning on the power. Disable protection and disable area of main control RAM 1312 are set in the RAM protect register (step S2200). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating a use area of the main control RAM 1312 and resetting the access control unit when it determines that an prohibited area other than the designated area is accessed. In order to cancel the reset function by accessing the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312, the prohibited area is set to be invalid so that all areas of the main control RAM 1312 can be accessed. It should be noted that an unused area in the main control RAM 1312 is designated as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is enabled, and when access to the designated prohibited area is detected, the main control MPU 1311 is reset. Good.

Next, the simple clear mode timer for a predetermined time is set to the watchdog timer (step S2201) and the watchdog timer is cleared (step S2202). After that, the power failure clear signal is set to ON (step S2203), and the power failure clear signal is set to OFF (step S2204). By once setting the power failure clear signal to ON and then setting it to OFF, the power failure signal stored in the latch can be set to a normal value.

Next, the signal levels of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are read from the PF port and stored in the register (step S2205). As the register, any one of a plurality of general-purpose registers (storage means for temporarily storing information related to calculation in calculation of processing) provided in the main control MPU 1311 in advance may be used. The general-purpose registers are divided into bank 0 and bank 1, and the register of bank 0 is used in step S2205. The register is provided in the main control RAM 1312 and is erased without holding information at the time of power failure, and is different from the RAM area where information is backed up at the time of power failure. The main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are operated, so that the hall control unit 1510 waits until the peripheral control board 1510 is activated. If the employee of the above mistakes the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 by mistake, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are determined in a state not intended by the employee of the hall. Therefore, the input state (level) of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is stored in a register or the like which is a temporary storage means at an early stage after the power-on process is started, and the peripheral control board 1510 ends the standby state. Even if an employee of the hall accidentally interrupts the key operation at an early stage after the power is turned on, the state of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 stored in the register or the like which is a temporary storage means is determined later. The operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 during the power-on operation is surely detected.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power failure notice signal indicates that there is a power failure (step S2206). If the power failure notice signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine is not normal, and thus the process waits until the power supply voltage stabilizes in step S2206.

After that, a sub-start waiting timer (for example, about 2 seconds) is started, the watchdog timer is continuously cleared until the timer expires, and the peripheral control board 1510 is started (step S2207). The waiting for activation of the peripheral control board 1510 may be any time during the period from power-on until the first command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

After that, it is determined again whether or not the power failure notice signal is in the power failure state (step S2208). If the power failure notice signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine 1 is abnormal, and thus the process waits in step S2208.

After that, the set value confirmation process is executed to determine whether the set value is within the normal range and whether the value of the setting state management area is within the normal range (step S2209). Details of the setting value confirmation processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 215.

After that, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game control area (step S2210). This is because in order to ensure independence between the processing outside the game control area and the processing inside the game control area, the information used in one processing does not affect the other processing. After that, when the power is turned on, the RAM confirmation processing outside the game area is executed to determine an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2211). Details of the RAM confirmation processing outside the game area at power-on will be described later with reference to FIG. 216. Then, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game control area is restored (step S2212).

After that, the RAM abnormality determination result value is provisionally set in the C register (step S2213), and the RAM abnormality value (03H) in the setting state management area is provisionally set in the B register (step S2214). The B register and C register used in steps S2213 and S2214 are general-purpose registers. Note that the general-purpose register of bank 0 is used in the process when the power is turned on.

The value set in the setting status management area in the second modification is different from that shown in FIG. 201(B) in the above-described embodiment, and if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 as shown in FIG. 220(A). 03H is recorded. That is, the setting state management area of the second example is a 1-byte storage area in which the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded. For example, the lower 4 bits are used and the upper 4 bits are not defined. Specifically, 00H is recorded in the normal game state, 01H in the setting confirmation mode, 02H in the setting change mode, and 03H is recorded if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312.

The setting state management area is not updated to 00H by the RAM clear processing by operating only the RAM clear switch 954, and the current value is maintained. When the setting confirmation mode ends, the value is updated from 01H to 00H, and when the setting change mode ends, the value is updated from 02H to 00H. Further, when the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, when the setting change mode is entered by the next setting change operation at power-on, the value is updated from 03H to 02H, and when the setting change mode is ended, it is updated from 02H to 00H.

Further, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the determination result is stored in the C register (steps S2215 and S2216), and the process proceeds to step 2219. Specifically, a checksum calculated and stored from the data (excluding the data saved in the stack) used as the game control area in the area backed up in the internal RAM 1312 at the time of the previous power shutdown, The checksum calculated using the same area is compared, and if they are different, it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 has an abnormality. In addition, if the value of the power failure flag indicating that the power is properly backed up (the processing at the time of power failure was normally executed) is not stored in the backup flag area, the data in the main control RAM 1312 is normally backed up when the power failure occurs. It is determined that the main control RAM 1312 has an abnormality because the power-off processing has not been normally performed.

If there is no abnormality inside or outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the RAM normality determination result value is temporarily set in the C register (step S2217), and the information of the setting state management area is set in the B register. (Step S2218), and the process proceeds to step 2219.

Then, the value (03H) indicating the RAM abnormality is temporarily recorded in the setting state management area (step S2219).

Then, the bits of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 of the register value in which the value of the PF port is recorded are masked (step S2220). As the register for storing the value of the PF port, a general-purpose register different from the register temporarily set in S2213 and S2214 is used. After that, it is determined using the value stored in the register whether the setting key 971 has been operated to be ON and the RAM clear switch 954 has been operated to be ON when the power was turned on (step S2221). If the setting key 971 is turned ON and the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON, it is determined that the setting change operation is performed, and the process proceeds to step S2230.

On the other hand, if the setting key 971 is not operated and the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated, it is determined whether or not the mode is the setting change mode when the power failure occurs (step S2222). For example, when the value of the setting status management area is the setting change mode (02H), it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the setting change mode.

When it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the setting change mode, the process proceeds to step S2230.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the power failure has not occurred during the setting change mode, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the game control area and outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2223). For example, an abnormality in the game control area can be determined using the determination result stored in the C register in steps S2213 and S2217 described above. As a result, if there is an abnormality in either the game control area or the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process proceeds to step S2236.

On the other hand, if there is no abnormality in both the game control area and the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, it is determined whether a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing (step S2224). For example, if the value of the saved setting status management area is a value indicating the RAM abnormality (03H), it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing.

When it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, the process proceeds to step S2236. On the other hand, when it is determined that the power failure has not occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, the value (00H) indicating the normal game state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2225). By recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2225, the value (03H) indicating the RAM abnormality temporarily recorded in the setting state management area in step S2214 is returned to the normal state. Further, by recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2225, the values of the setting state management area when jumping from step S2226 and step S2231 to step S2235 are different. In this way, since the values in the setting state management area are different between the normal RAM clearing process and the RAM clearing process associated with the setting change process, the caller can be distinguished even if the programs for both RAM clearing processes are common. The size of the program size can be reduced without the need to separately provide a program.

Then, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 954 has been operated to be ON when the power is turned on by using the value stored in the register (step S2226). If the RAM clear switch 954 has been operated to be ON, the process proceeds to step S2235.

In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the processing is distributed based on the operation of the RAM clear switch 954, the operation of the setting key 971, and the value recorded in the setting state management area. For example, when it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, 03H is recorded in the setting state management area and 03H is maintained until the power is cut off, so that the normal game process cannot be executed. At this time, if the power is turned off and then the setting is changed to turn on the power, the RAM abnormality can be cleared. That is, when it is determined in step S2221 that both the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated (setting change operation), the setting state management area changes from the value indicating the RAM abnormality (03H) to the value indicating the setting change. It is updated to (02H) (step S2230), and the RAM abnormal state ends. As described above, the recovery from the RAM abnormality is always via the setting change. In other words, it is determined whether or not the setting change operation is performed before it is determined whether the state at the time of the power failure is the RAM abnormality. Therefore, the RAM abnormality can be resolved only when the setting value is changed.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated, in order to recover the state before the occurrence of the power outage, the information on the game state at the time of the power outage is stored in the power-on state buffer (step S2227).

Then, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has been operated to be ON when the power is turned on, using the value stored in the register (step S2228). If the setting key 971 is operated to ON, it is determined that the setting confirmation operation has been performed, the value (01H) indicating the setting confirmation mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2229), and the process proceeds to step S2236. .. That is, even if the state at the time of power failure is the setting confirmation mode, if the setting key 971 is not operated when the power is turned on, the normal game state is set. When the power failure occurs in the setting confirmation mode, and the setting key 971 is not operated when the power is turned on, the state may be shifted to the same power failure confirmation mode as before the occurrence of the power failure instead of the normal game state.

Since steps S2225 to S2229 are processing executed when at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is not operated, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 954 is operated (step S2226) and the setting key 971. Any of the operation determination (step S2228) may be performed first. That is, as illustrated, the operation of the setting key 971 may be determined (step S2228) after the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is determined (step S2226), or the operation of the setting key 971 may be determined (step S2228). The operation of the RAM clear switch 954 may be determined (step S2226).

If YES is determined in step S2221 or step S2222, the value (02H) indicating the setting change mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2230). Then, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2231). For example, the abnormality outside the game control area can be determined based on the RAM abnormality determination result set in the RAM abnormality determination area outside the game area in step S2266 described above. As a result, if there is no abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process proceeds to step S2235.

On the other hand, if there is an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, RAM clear processing outside the game control area is executed. That is, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game area (step S2232), and the game area outside RAM abnormality processing is executed (step S2233). The details of the out-of-game area RAM abnormality processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 217. After that, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game area in step S2232 is restored (step S2234).

Then, the setting values in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, areas other than the setting state management area, and the stack area in the game control area are initialized (step S2235). In other words, the RAM clear processing outside the game control area will not be executed unless the setting is changed. When the RAM is out of the game control area, 03H is recorded in the setting status management area, as in the case of the RAM in the game control area, and the game is stopped. Therefore, if the setting is not changed, the RAM recovers from the abnormal status. You can't. However, the condition of RAM clear outside the game control area is only setting change, while the condition of RAM clear inside the game control area is setting change and RAM clear switch 954 operation (if no RAM abnormality occurs When the RAM is forcibly cleared by the employee's operation).

In the RAM clearing process in the game area in step S2235, the setting value and the setting state management area are excluded. If the setting value becomes high due to an illegal RAM clearing operation by the player, the hole side is damaged. This is because if a problem (RAM abnormality) occurs during the game with the high setting and the game is stopped, the RAM clear operation changes the high setting to the low setting, which causes damage to the player.

After that, all command buffers are initialized (step S2236). This is because when the power is restored without clearing the RAM after the power is cut off while the command is stored in the command buffer, the untransmitted command stored in the command buffer is transmitted. For example, the power is cut off during the transmission of the variation command, so that the symbol command is transmitted, but the subsequent variation pattern command may not be transmitted. If only the variation pattern command is transmitted when the power is turned on, the peripheral control board 1510 may be determined to be abnormal. Further, when an untransmitted command in the process related to the setting change is stored in the command buffer, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the command by transmitting the untransmitted command during the setting process after the power is restored. There is a possibility that the game state is set and malfunction occurs. In order to prevent the occurrence of such an abnormality, the command buffer is initialized in step S2236.

Although the command buffer is initialized in step S2236, the command buffer may be cleared only when the setting change process and the setting confirmation process are started. In the setting change process, the command buffer is cleared along with the initialization of the main control RAM 1312, so it is not necessary to clear the command buffer separately, but the main control RAM 1312 is not initialized in the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, it is recommended to clear the command buffer when shifting to the setting confirmation mode.

After that, the functions of the devices (CTC, SIO, etc.) built in the main control MPU 1311 are initialized (step S2237), and the hardware random number (for example, winning random number) built in the main control MPU 1311 is activated (step S2238). By starting the hardware random number in step S2238, the hardware random number is also updated in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. However, the hardware random number is started when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends. May be. Then, the power-on setting process is executed (step S2239). Details of the power-on setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Finally, the timer interrupt is set to enable (step S2240), and the process proceeds to the main process on the main control side (FIG. 221).

FIG. 215 is a flowchart of the set value confirmation process. The set value confirmation process is executed in step S2209 of the power-on process (FIG. 213) to determine whether the set value of the set state management area is within the normal range and whether the value of the set state management area is within the normal range. To do. The setting value confirmation process may be executed when the power supply is turned on, when the setting change mode ends, or when the setting confirmation mode ends. Further, it may be executed at the time of starting the special symbol variation or at the time of changing the game state (at the start and end of a big hit, a certainty change, a time saving, etc.).

In the set value confirmation processing, first, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a value other than the value originally recorded in the set state management area is set (step S2250). As shown in FIG. 220(A), 00H to 03H are recorded in the setting state management area. Therefore, if a value of 04H or more is set, it is abnormal and the process advances to step S2252.

On the other hand, if a normal value (03H or less) is set in the setting status management area, it is determined whether the setting value is within a predetermined range (step S2251). For example, in the pachinko machine 1 that can be selected in the stages of setting 1 to 6, the value of the work in which the set value is stored corresponds to 0 to 5 (setting 1=0, setting 6= In the case of 5), if a value of 6 or more is stored, it is determined to be outside the predetermined range.

If the set value is out of the predetermined range, the value (03H) indicating the RAM abnormality is recorded in the set state management area (step S2252), the set value is initialized to 0 (step S2253), and the process returns to the power-on process. .. On the other hand, if the set value is within the predetermined range, the process returns to the power-on process.

Regarding the value recorded in the setting state management area and the setting value, whether or not the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal is determined even during the progress of the game (every change start, when switching the game state, etc.). For this reason, the condition that is determined to be a RAM abnormality regarding the setting state management area and the setting value during the game, the RAM abnormality when the power is turned on (the work area in the game area excluding the setting state management area and the setting value, and the outside of the game area) The two conditions, that is, the condition (work RAM abnormality), are different. The two RAM abnormality determination conditions may be partially the same. For example, when it is determined whether the setting state management area and the setting value are abnormal even when the power is turned on, it can be said that the two determination conditions are partially the same.

In this way, the RAM abnormality determination conditions are different. If the RAM abnormality determination regarding the set value is performed only when the power is turned on, when the set value is changed due to misbehavior or malfunction due to noise, etc., a hall or a game is played. This is because it is disadvantageous to the person, and it is desirable to detect the abnormality early and shorten the period in which the disadvantage occurs.

In addition, by making a subroutine of the RAM abnormality determination processing relating to the setting state management area and the set value during the game, and calling the subroutine as needed during the progress of the game to determine the RAM abnormality, a plurality of the same programs are executed. It is possible to reduce the size of the program without providing it in place.

Further, although the setting state management area is excluded from the RAM abnormality determination target when the power is turned on, it may be treated as the RAM abnormality determination target in the same manner as other areas of the main control RAM 1312. By setting the setting state management area as the RAM abnormality determination target at the time of power-on, in the setting change mode before the power failure, and when it is determined that the RAM abnormality occurs when the power is restored, the RAM abnormality is prioritized. Therefore, if the value in the setting state management area is abnormal (that is, RAM abnormality), it is desirable to initialize the value recorded in the setting state management area. In this case, the storage area of the main control RAM 1312 in which the set value is stored may be the RAM abnormality determination target when the power is turned on or the RAM abnormality determination target.

The priority in the determination at the time of power-on is that the RAM abnormality has the highest priority, and the normal gaming state has the lowest priority. Further, the setting change mode has a higher priority than the setting confirmation mode and the RAM clear processing is executed by the RAM clear operation. As described above, by executing the determination process in order of the priority of the derived states, it is possible to accurately derive the state with the high priority even when a plurality of conditions are satisfied after the power is restored.

FIG. 216 is a flowchart of the game area outside RAM confirmation processing when the power is turned on. The power-on game area outside RAM confirmation processing is executed in step S2211 of the power-on processing (FIG. 213) to determine an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312.

First, the main control MPU 1311 stores the stack pointer value in the SP save buffer outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2260), and sets the stack pointer value outside the game area value to the stack pointer (step S2261). , All the register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the processing of the calling source are stored in the register save buffer outside the game area (step S2262). The stack area outside the game control area may be used as a save buffer for storing all the registers in the processing executed outside the game control area.

Then, it is determined whether or not the outside of the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized by turning on the power for the first time or the like (step S2263). Specifically, if the value of the power down check area (EX_PDIND) is 5 AH, it can be determined that the outside of the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized by the first power-on or the like.

If the main control RAM 1312 has not been initialized by turning on the power for the first time or the like, the process proceeds to step S2266 without executing steps S2264 to S2265. On the other hand, if the outside of the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has already been initialized by turning on the power for the first time, a checksum outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is calculated (step S2264), and the calculated checksum is normal. Is determined (step S2265).

If the calculated checksum is normal, the process advances to step S2267. On the other hand, if the calculated checksum is abnormal, the RAM abnormality determination result value (01H) is set in the RAM abnormality determination area outside the game area (step S2266), and the process proceeds to step S2271. It should be noted that the RAM abnormality outside the game control area is determined in S2231 based on the value set in the RAM abnormality determination area outside the game area in S2266.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the checksum calculated in step S2265 is normal, the LED check timer is set to 5 seconds, the LED check timer is activated (step S2267), and the LED blinking cycle timer sets the blinking cycle value (600 (Milliseconds) is set (step S2268), and the mode switching time (5 seconds) is set in the mode switching time timer (step S2269). The LED blinking cycle timer is a timer for blinking and displaying the upper two digits (or all four digits) of the base display 1317, and one blinking cycle occurs when the LED blinking cycle timer expires. The mode switching time timer is a timer for controlling mode switching in the base display 1317, and when the mode switching time timer times out, the mode is switched to the base display mode.

After that, 0 is set in the performance display monitor display management area for initialization (step S2270), and the process proceeds to step S2271.

Then, the power down check area is initialized to 00H (step S2271).

Then, all the register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the processing of the calling source saved in the register save buffer outside the game area are restored (step S2272), and the SP save buffer outside the game area is restored. The saved stack pointer value is restored (step S2273), and the process returns to the power-on process.

FIG. 217 is a flowchart of the out-of-game-area RAM abnormality process. The out-of-game area RAM abnormal time process is executed in step S2233 of the power-on process (FIG. 214) to initialize the area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312.

First, the main control MPU 1311 stores the stack pointer value in the SP save buffer outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2280), and sets the outside game area stack pointer value to the stack pointer (step S2281). All the register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the calling process are stored in the register save buffer outside the game area (step S2282). The stack area outside the game control area may be used as a save buffer for storing all the registers in the processing executed outside the game control area.

Then, the outside-use-area RWM initialization process is executed to initialize the area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2283). Details of the outside-use-area RWM initialization processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 218.

After that, the RAM normality determination value (00H) is set in the RAM abnormality determination area (EX_RWMERROR) outside the game area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2284). Based on the value set in the RAM abnormality determination area outside the game area in step S2284, it is determined in step S2231 whether the area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal at the next power-on.

Then, the LED check timer is set to 5 seconds, the LED check timer is started (step S2285), the blinking cycle value (600 milliseconds) is set to the LED blinking cycle timer (step S2286), and the mode switching time timer is set to the mode. The switching time (5 seconds) is set (step S2287). These timer values are initial settings for displaying the base value on the base display 1317.

Then, all register values saved in the register save buffer outside the game area (register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the processing of the calling source saved in step S2262) are restored (step S2288). The stack pointer value saved in the SP save buffer outside the game area is restored (step S2289), and the process returns to the power-on process of the calling source.

FIG. 218 is a flowchart of the outside-use-area RWM initialization process. The outside-use-area RWM initialization processing is executed in step S2283 of the outside-game-area RAM abnormality processing, and the area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is initialized.

First, the main control MPU 1311 writes 00H to the work area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 to initialize it (step S2290). Then, 00H is written and initialized in the stack area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2291). After that, the process returns to the out-of-game area RAM process.

FIG. 219 is a flowchart of the power-on setting process. The power-on setting process is a subroutine, and is executed in step S2239 of the power-on process (FIG. 214) to execute the power-on initialization.

First, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command, and sets the created command in the transmission information storage area (step S2300). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 220(B), the power-on operation command is a command composed of 2 bytes that notifies the recorded contents of the setting state management area. The upper byte is A0H and the lower byte is the setting state management. It is a value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the area.

Next, the bit corresponding to the setting key 971 and the bit corresponding to the setting change switch 972 in the input level data 2 area are set to 1 which is the initial value. It should be noted that the other bits may be set to 0 (step S2301). The bit corresponding to the setting key 971 of the input level data 2 area and the bit corresponding to the setting change switch 972 are set to 1 because the bit of the switch is detected by 1 at the next timer interrupt and the ON edge is incorrect. This is to prevent it from being made.

Next, the backup flag is cleared (step S2302).

Then, it is determined whether or not the value (00H) indicating the game startable state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2303). If the value indicating the game startable state is not recorded in the setting state management area, it is either the setting change mode, the setting confirmation mode or the RAM abnormality, so the power-on setting process is terminated and the calling source is called. Return to processing.

On the other hand, if the value (00H) indicating the game startable state is recorded in the setting state management area, it means that the normal game can be started, so the work in the game control area depends on whether or not the main control RAM 1312 is initialized. The area is initialized (step S2304).

After that, a power-on state command is created, and the created command is stored in the transmission information storage area (step S2305). As shown in FIG. 220(C), the power-on state command is a command composed of 2 bytes, where the upper byte is 30H and the lower byte is the state before the power failure.

Then, a power-on return destination command is created, and the created command is set in the transmission information storage area (step S2306). As shown in FIG. 202(C), the power-on return destination command is a command composed of 2 bytes that notifies the gaming state regarding the special symbol, and the upper byte is 31H and the lower byte is special when a power failure occurs. The state of the symbol and the operating state of the special electric accessory are shown. The power-on return destination command is transmitted once when the power is turned on.

Further, a set value command is created, and the created command is set in the transmission information storage area (step S2307). As shown in FIG. 202(D), the set value command is a 2-byte command for notifying the set value. The upper byte indicates A1H and the lower byte indicates the set value.

In addition, a power-on state command, a power-on return destination command, and a set value command are transmitted together with a special symbol hold number command indicating the hold number of the special symbol variable display game, and the hold number display is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. You may restore to the state before the power failure. The transmission order of the special symbol hold number command is as follows: after sending the power-on state command, power-on return destination command and setting value command, before sending these commands, or during sending these commands. May be.

After that, the process returns to the calling process.

The power-on setting process is always executed regardless of the setting change mode. The power-on setting process is called from the setting process (FIG. 224) when the setting key 971 is turned off and the setting change/confirmation process ends. At this time, since 00H is recorded in the setting state management area, all the processes from S2300 to S2307 are executed.

When the setting change/confirmation process is executed, the power-on setting process is called from step S2239 of the power-on process and step S2355 of the setting process, so the power-on operation command is transmitted twice. On the other hand, when the setting change/confirmation process is not executed, the power-on operation command is transmitted once only by the power-on setting process called from step S2239 of the power-on process. The power-on operation command is transmitted for the peripheral control board 1510 to identify the state of the main control board 1310 (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, RAM abnormality, etc.). By receiving the command, the peripheral control board 1510 gives a notification corresponding to the state such as the setting change mode, the setting confirmation mode, and the RAM abnormality.

In the setting/confirmation change mode, the setting adjustment function by the player (for example, the adjustment of the volume and brightness by operating the button provided on the door frame 3) is stopped, and the adjustment by the employee of the hall (peripheral board box 1520). The adjustment of the volume and the brightness by the volume provided in (1) may be effective. Specifically, the setting adjustment function by the player may be stopped until the power-on operation command indicating the normal game state is received.

Further, in both the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the entire screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 may be used to display the setting change mode, the setting confirmation mode, or the RAM abnormal state. .. In this case, a voice message indicating the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode may be output. Furthermore, you may notify using some or all lamps (all the lamps provided in the door frame 3 may be included).

FIG. 220(B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the power-on operation command. The power-on operation command is a command for notifying the recorded contents of the setting status management area, and the value of the lower byte stores the value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the setting status management area. Unlike the one shown in FIG. 202(A), in another example 2, the lower byte becomes 04H when a RAM abnormality occurs.

Specifically, the power-on operation command is composed of 2 bytes, the upper byte indicates A0H, and the lower byte indicates the recorded contents of the setting state management area. The value of the lower byte stores the value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the setting status management area. This is because the value of the setting status management area is 00H during normal play, so if the value sent as a command is 00H, it cannot be distinguished from a hardware error with an output of 0. Is set to 1.

The power-on operation command is generated at least once in the power-on processing. Specifically, the command of A001H or A004H is created once in response to hot start, RAM clear, and RAM abnormality. In the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the command of A002H or A003H is created by the power-on process. After that, it is created twice as a command of A001H at the time of ending the setting change/confirmation.

When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the operation command at power-on, the peripheral control board 1510 responds to the normal game startable state (A001H), the setting confirmation mode (A002H), the setting change mode (A003H), and the RAM abnormal state (A004H). The notification is performed in this manner (see FIG. 184). The notification of the normal game startable state is not shown in FIG. 184, but a demo screen is displayed or a standby state effect for explaining the game contents is performed.

If the peripheral control board 1510 receives the game command during the normal game without receiving A001H as the power-on operation command, the game state may be inconsistent, so the received game command is It is determined to be invalid, and the game operation (effect, etc.) for the game command is not started. However, if the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the game command during the normal game is continuously transmitted a predetermined number of times), the peripheral control board 1510 may have missed the power-on operation command (A001H). It is preferable to cancel the invalidation of the received game command and perform the effect corresponding to the game command.

In addition, in the state where the game command is invalidated, among the received game commands, an effect satisfying a predetermined condition is performed (for example, a symbol operation, a lamp, a movable body, a voice, etc., is an effect corresponding to the received command. Then, the background of the display device or a predetermined lamp may be used to notify that the game state mismatch occurs. Further, it may be notified with a small volume that the mismatch of the game state occurs. This is a player who does not understand that the game state is inconsistent without performing any effect until the predetermined condition is reached, and the special symbol variation display game does not start even if the player wins the starting opening. This is to prevent such a trouble of the pachinko machine 1 that may occur in the hall. Even if the peripheral control board 1510 invalidates the game command, the main control board 1310 is executing the normal game processing, so that the function display unit 1400 normally displays the function display such as the special symbol or the normal symbol. To be done.

FIG. 220C is a diagram showing a configuration example of the power-on state command. Unlike the one shown in FIG. 202(B) in the above-described embodiment, the power-on state command of the second example defines four states 01H, 02H, 03H, 04H. That is, the power-on state command is a command for notifying whether or not the normal game startable state is based on the recorded contents of the power-on state buffer, and further for notifying the state before the power failure. For example, when the power-on state command is composed of 2 bytes, the upper byte is 30H and the lower byte is 01H, it indicates that the main control RAM 1312 is initialized to notify the RAM clear. If the lower byte is 02H, it indicates that the state before the power failure is the low probability/non-time saving state, the main control RAM 1312 is restored without being initialized, and the normal game startable state is set. If the lower byte is 03H, it indicates that the state before the power failure is the high probability/time saving state, the main control RAM 1312 is restored without being initialized, and the normal game start is possible. If the lower byte is 04H, the state before the power failure is the low probability/time saving state, the main control RAM 1312 is restored without being initialized, and the normal game startable state is indicated.

Also, the power-on state buffer is a storage area that stores information on the game state at the time of the power outage in order to recover the state before the power outage, as described above. The value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the power-on state buffer is stored. For example, in the low probability non-time saving, 1 is stored in the power-on state buffer, and 2 obtained by adding 1 to this value is stored in the power-on state command. When the main control RAM 1312 is initialized, since the power-on state buffer is 0, 1 is stored in the power-on state command, and it can be notified that the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized.

FIG. 221 is a flowchart of main processing on the main control side executed by the main control MPU 1311. The main processing on the main control side is executed after step S2240 of the power-on processing (FIG. 214).

First, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a power failure notification signal and determines whether a power failure has occurred depending on whether the power failure notification signal is ON (step S2310). In another example 2, the power failure is monitored in the main processing, but the power failure processing may be executed when the power failure is detected by monitoring the power failure with the timer interrupt processing. For example, at least at the start and end of the timer interrupt, it is determined whether the power failure warning signal is ON, the period during which the power failure warning signal is continuously output is counted, and the count result becomes a predetermined value. It may be determined that there is a power outage.

If the power failure notice signal is not ON, the power is being supplied normally, so the random number update process 2 is executed (step S2311). The random number update process 2 may be the same as that described with reference to FIG. 195, and mainly updates random numbers other than the random numbers for determining the winning in the special lottery and the ordinary lottery.

On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is detected, the power-off processing (steps S2312 to S2319) is executed. In the power-off process, a process of backing up data for returning to the state before the power outage is executed. Specifically, first, interruption is prohibited (step S2312). As a result, the timer interrupt processing described later is not performed. Further, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output port and stops the operation of the device controlled by the output from each port (step S2313). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is output to the solenoid/power failure clear/ACK output port. Note that not all output ports may be cleared, and for example, output ports for controlling solenoids and motors that consume a large amount of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, it is possible to reduce power consumption until the main-board-side power-off process is completed, and to reliably complete the main-board-side power-off process.

After that, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game area (step S2314), the power-off processing is executed, and necessary processing is executed before the power is cut off (step S2315). Details of the power-off processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 222. Then, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game area is restored (step S2316).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum of the work area in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 for determining whether or not the data stored in the work area to be backed up is normally held, The data is stored in a predetermined checksum storage area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2317). This checksum is used to judge whether the data backed up in the work area is normal. The target area for which the checksum is calculated is the work area in the game control area, which may be changed after the power is turned on and before the main processing on the main control side is executed. And the value of the setting status management area), the backup flag, and the value of the checksum area may be excluded.

Further, a value (5AH) indicating that the power-off processing has been normally executed is stored in the backup flag area as a power failure flag (step S2318). This completes the storage of the game backup information. Finally, RAM protection valid (write prohibited) and invalid area invalidity are written to the RAM protect register to prohibit writing to a predetermined area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2319), and wait until recovery from power failure. (infinite loop). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating a use area of the main control RAM 1312 and resetting the access control unit when it determines that an prohibited area other than the designated area is accessed. Therefore, by disabling the prohibited area of the RAM protect register, the reset function by the access to the main control RAM 1312 is canceled (not reset), and the entire area can be accessed. It should be noted that an unused area in the main control RAM 1312 is designated as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is enabled, and when access to the designated prohibited area is detected, the main control MPU 1311 is reset. Good.

FIG. 222 is a flowchart of the processing when the power is turned off. The power-off processing is executed in step S2315 of the main processing on the main control side (FIG. 221), and necessary processing is executed before the power is turned off.

First, the main control MPU 1311 stores the stack pointer value in the SP save buffer outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2320), and sets the outside game area stack pointer value to the stack pointer (step S2321). All register values are stored in the register save buffer outside the game area (step S2322).

Subsequently, a checksum outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is calculated and stored in the outside checksum storage area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2323). After that, 5 AH is set in the power down check area (EX_PDIND), and it is recorded that the RAM area outside the game area of the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized (step S2324). If 5 AH is recorded in the power down check area, the power outage process is normally executed. In this sense, the power-down check area and the RAM backup flag in the game control area are substantially the same. Since the power outage process is normally executed, it is already determined that the area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is normal, and as a result, if the power down check area is set to 5AH, the main control Initialization of the area outside the game control area of the RAM 1312 has been completed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, two types of flags indicating that the power outage process has been normally executed are provided inside the game control area and outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312. .. This is for making double determinations in the game control area and outside the game control area, and since the one storage area is not shared between the game control area and the outside of the game control area, independently. This is because processing is desirable. For example, if there is only one flag indicating that the power outage process has been normally executed, and if the flag is set to 5AH by mistake, and if the power is restored without performing the power outage process, it is erroneously determined that the power outage process was successfully executed. Will be judged. By thus making the double determination, the possibility of erroneous determination is reduced.

Furthermore, the two flags should be provided in separate areas (for example, the lower byte (**00H to **FFH) of the address or the upper byte (00**H or 01**H) does not overlap). By this, even if the data is rewritten due to a noise or the like, the data can be restored correctly.

Then, all the register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the processing of the calling source saved in the register save buffer outside the game area are restored (step S2325), and the SP save buffer outside the game area is restored. The saved stack pointer value is restored (step S2326), and the process returns to the calling source.

FIG. 223 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the main control MPU 1311.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2330). The main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for calculation, one of which can be used as a register group of bank 0, and the other of which can be used as a register group of bank 1 for performing bank switching. Without being configured, the registers in both banks cannot be used. Register bank 0 is used in the main processing on the main control side, and register bank 1 is used in the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, the instruction to switch the bank to 1 is executed at the start of the timer interrupt processing, but it is not necessary to execute the instruction to switch the bank to 0 at the end of the timer interrupt processing. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the state of the bank in the flag register (for example, the register in which the Z flag and the C flag are set), and the flag register is saved in the stack area at the start of interrupt and Execution of an instruction returns from the stack area. Therefore, by executing the RET instruction, the bank flag of the register stored in the flag register also returns to its original state. When the configuration in which the bank state is not stored in the flag register is adopted, the bank switching instruction is executed at the end of the timer interrupt processing, and the bank is returned to bank 0.

Since the flag register also stores a flag for controlling whether or not to allow an interrupt, it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after setting interrupt permission. The flag for controlling the availability of interrupts is set to the interrupt disabled state after stacking the flag register at the start of the timer interrupt process. Therefore, the interrupt is not enabled unless the interrupt is permitted (EI instruction or the like) during the timer interrupt processing or the RETI instruction is executed.

Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. If the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, it is set to 0 (step S2331).

Next, switch input processing 1 is executed (step S2332). In the switch input processing 1, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, ON edges are created, and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312.

The switch input process 1 in step S2332 is a process related to a winning signal, and the switch input process 2 in step S2080 in FIG. 191 is a process related to input of a fraud detection sensor (magnet sensor, radio wave sensor, vibration sensor, etc.). Therefore, in the timer interrupt processing executed in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, since NO is determined in step S2335, the prize is detected, but the injustice by the injustice detection sensor is not detected. Even if the winning is detected, the payout of the prize balls, the variable display, etc. are not executed. This is because the setting change operation and the setting confirmation operation are performed by the employees of the hall, and it is considered preferable that the illegality is not detected in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, and the illegality is not detected. For example, since the operation of changing the setting and confirming the setting is performed with the door open, the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 connected to the outer frame 2 by the hinge member are easily shaken. Vibration may be erroneously detected. Therefore, such false notification can be prevented by stopping the fraud detection by the fraud detection sensor in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. In addition, the employee in the hall possesses a magnet for collecting the ball falling on the floor, and it is possible to prevent an erroneous notification of the magnet held by the employee during the operation of changing the setting or confirming the setting. That is, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has means for invalidating (or limiting, restricting, suppressing, etc.) fraud detection, and after shifting to normal game processing (for example, initial setting processing at power-on). Fraud detection is enabled), and fraud detection is invalidated (or restricted, regulated, suppressed, etc.) by the means in a specific game state (for example, during setting processing).

Even in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, some fraud detection sensors (for example, radio wave sensors) may be detected in the switch input process 1 to monitor a particular type of fraud. In this way, it is possible to detect a fraud in which a person who intends to perform a fraudulent act (master Goto) forcibly activates the setting change mode by irradiating a radio wave.

Subsequently, the random number update process 1 is executed (step S2333). In the random number update process 1, the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are updated. In addition to these random numbers, in order to change the initial values of the big hit symbol determining random numbers and the small hit symbol determining random numbers updated in the random number updating process 2 of the main control side main process shown in FIG. Update the random number for initial value determination. In the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 223, the random number is updated even when the setting process for changing the set value is executed. This is because the hardware random number that determines the winning or losing is updated regardless of whether the setting change or setting confirmation process is in progress, so the random number generated by software is also updated at the same timing as the activation of the hardware random number, that is, By updating even during the process of changing settings and confirming settings, inconsistencies between hardware random numbers and software random numbers are unlikely to occur, and the expected value of the performance in games and the design value of the expected value at which a big hit is derived at a particular performance The deviation from can be suppressed.

Then, the set value confirmation process (FIG. 215) is executed to determine whether the set value is within the normal range (step S2334). Note that the set value confirmation process is executed periodically in the timer interrupt process, but even if the set value confirmation process is not executed in the timer interrupt process, at the start of fluctuation, at the time of switching the game state (for example, the jackpot probability It is advisable to carry out a specific condition such as switching, a big hit game start or end, a time saving state start or end), fraud detection (for example, door opening, magnetic detection), or the like. The resource consumption of the main control MPU 1311 can be suppressed if the determination is made when the specific condition is satisfied, even if the determination is not performed periodically in a short cycle such as when the timer interrupt process is executed.

Then, it is determined whether or not the value (00H) indicating the game start is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2335). By confirming the value of the setting state management area after the setting value confirmation process (step S2334, FIG. 215), when the setting value is determined to be abnormal, the value of the immediately following setting state management area is confirmed (S2335). It is controlled so that the normal game processing is not executed. If the value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the process proceeds to step S2080 in FIG. On the other hand, if the value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, the LED common port is turned off (step S2336). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of timer interrupt processing, the time until the LED common signal is turned on, that is, the LED turn-off time is secured, and the ghost phenomenon in which the display before and after the display switching of the LED appears mixed To prevent LED flickering.

After that, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2337), and the flag register is saved in the game area stack area (step S2338). Then, the test signal output process is executed to output the test signal (step S2339). Then, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game area (step S2340). Before and after the start of execution of the processing for outputting the test signal, the stack pointer and the register are saved as in the other out-of-game-area processing, and the processing is restored after the end of the processing. Since the test signal processing does not control the progress of the game, it is executed as processing outside the game control area. The test signal processing may be executed as the processing in the game control area as long as it does not affect the game even if it is executed as the processing in the game control area. When the test signal processing is executed as the processing in the game control area, it is not necessary to save and restore the flag register (steps S2337 and S2340) before and after the test signal output processing (step S2339).

Then, the setting process is executed (step S2341). Details of the setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After that, the setting display process is executed (step S2342). Details of the setting display process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, peripheral board command transmission processing for outputting the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit is executed (step S2343). The transmission information storage area is a storage area for temporarily storing the generated transmission command. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read in step 2070 and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a transmission information storage area of a multi-byte FIFO format. The transmission information storage area stores a command generated each time a command is generated, and the values (commands) stored in the transmission information storage area are sequentially transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The generated command may be directly stored in the transmission information storage area in the FIFO format of the serial communication circuit each time the command is generated.

After that, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2344). Since the watchdog timer uses the simple clear mode, the watchdog timer is cleared by setting 1 word. After that, the bank of the register is switched by a return instruction (for example, RETI) (step S2345), and the process before the interruption is returned.

The process after it is determined in step S2335 that the value indicating the game start is recorded in the setting state management area is the same as the process described above with reference to FIG. After executing the output data setting process in step S2091, the process advances to step S2343 in FIG. 223.

FIG. 224 is a flowchart of the setting process. The setting process is executed in step S2341 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 223) when the setting state management area does not have the value (00H) indicating the normal gaming state, and mainly the process of changing the setting value is performed.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not a value (03H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2350). If a value indicating RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, a power-on command is created (step S2351), and the process returns to the calling source.

As a result, in the case of the RAM abnormality, the power-on operation command (A004H) indicating the RAM abnormality is transmitted for each timer interrupt until the RAM abnormality is cleared. This is because if the power-on operation command indicating the RAM abnormality is sent only once, the RAM abnormality re-notification is not sent when the command is missing, so the peripheral control board 1510 cannot know the state of the gaming machine. Is. Further, since the function display unit 1400 is completely turned off, if the peripheral control board 1510 does not know the state of the gaming machine, the abnormality notification is not performed, so that it is possible to prevent the state of the gaming machine from being confirmed from the outside. Further, when the RAM is abnormal, a game is not played, so commands other than the power-on operation command are not transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, as long as the RAM abnormal state continues, the power-on operation command is repeatedly transmitted. doing.

That is, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, a command (for example, a power-on operation command) of the same system is triggered a predetermined number of times (for example, a timer interrupt process) to be executed at regular intervals (timer interrupt process). A small number of times such as one, two, three times) and a second case in which the pachinko machine is in operation, the second is repeatedly transmitted every predetermined period without limiting the number of times. In the second case, the same command is repeatedly transmitted regardless of whether or not the peripheral control board 1510 correctly receives, and other game-related commands are not transmitted when the normal game is stopped. But the command is sent.

When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the command relating to the RAM abnormality, it notifies the RAM abnormality. Even if the same command is received again during the RAM abnormality notification, the received command relating to the RAM abnormality may be invalidated and the notification currently being performed may be continued. By invalidating the subsequent command, for example, it is possible to prevent the voice notification from being repeated from the beginning, and normal notification can be performed.

The command relating to the RAM abnormality may always be the same, but may differ depending on the transmission timing. The command consistency may be determined by changing the command relating to the RAM abnormality according to the timing of transmission. For example, by using the power-on operation command (A004H) transmitted when the RAM is abnormal at power-on and the power-on operation command (A005H) transmitted when the RAM is abnormal at normal timer interruption, When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command (A004H) after the power-on command (A004H), it can determine that the RAM abnormality at power-on continues. On the other hand, when the power-on command (A005H) is received without receiving the power-on command (A004H), the set value and the setting state management area recorded in the main control RAM 1312 after the power is restored (for example, during the normal game) Can be determined to have become abnormal. In this way, the notification mode can be made different in each of the two determined states. For example, it is possible to notify the RAM abnormality when the RAM abnormality at the time of power-on continues and to notify the setting value abnormality when the RAM abnormality occurs after the power is restored.

It should be noted that during the RAM abnormality notification, the setting adjustment function by the player (for example, adjustment of volume and brightness by operating a button provided on the door frame 3) may be stopped. This is because the setting adjustment operation by the player during the RAM abnormality notification is considered to be an erroneous operation. Specifically, the setting adjustment function by the player may be stopped until the power-on operation command indicating the normal game state is received.

When it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the setting process will be repeatedly executed, so the process related to the special symbol or the normal symbol is not executed, and the game cannot be performed at all. This RAM abnormality is a setting change state when the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated to activate the setting change mode when the power is turned off and then the power is turned off and then the power is turned on again. And the RAM abnormality is eliminated. Then, by returning the setting key 971 to the original position, the setting change mode ends and the normal game can be started.

Further, when the power is turned on again, if the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated other than to activate the setting change mode, the value (03H) indicating the RAM abnormality in the setting state management area is maintained, RAM abnormal condition continues, normal game cannot be started. In other words, in order to eliminate the RAM abnormality and enter the normal game state, it is necessary to go through the setting change mode without fail.

On the other hand, if the value indicating the RAM abnormality is not recorded in the setting state management area, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position (step S2352). Specifically, it is detected whether the setting key 971 has an edge from ON to OFF, or whether a predetermined period has passed since the setting key 971 changed from ON to OFF.

When it is determined that the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position (determination of setting change or setting confirmation completion), the output time is set in the security signal output timer (step S2353), and the setting state management area is initialized (step S2353). (S2354), the power-on setting process shown in FIG. 219 is executed (step S2355), and the process returns to the calling process.

When the operation for ending the setting change mode (setting key 971 is turned off) is performed, the delay time until the security signal is turned off after the setting change mode is ended by setting the output time value in the security signal output timer. Set up. Therefore, even if the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends in a short time (for example, within one timer interrupt processing), only the shortest output signal of the security signal is set as the output time value in the security signal output timer. It can be secured and the hall computer can reliably detect the security signal.

Further, when a fraud is detected during the delay time until the security signal is turned off, the security signal may be output for a period or time corresponding to the newly detected fraud while maintaining the security signal.

Furthermore, if a power failure occurs during the delay time until the security signal is turned off, when the power is restored and hot start is performed in the normal game state, the security signal for the remaining time is output and the RAM clear switch is operated to clear the RAM. Alternatively, when the RAM is cleared by changing the setting, the security signal for the remaining time is not output. This is because the security signal output timer value is reset by the initialization of the main control RAM 1312, and the output of the security signal accompanying the initialization of the main control RAM 1312 is started.

When the power is turned on after a power failure occurs during the output of the security signal, one of the five patterns of hot start, RAM clear, setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, and RAM abnormal state continuation occurs.

When the mode is changed to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the activated mode ends and the security signal is output until the delay time elapses. If the RAM abnormality continues, the setting change operation has not been performed even when the power is restored, so that the security signal due to the continuous RAM abnormality is output. When the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and a power failure occurs before the delay time elapses, or a hot start is performed after the power is restored, the security signal is output for the remaining time.

Even when the security signal is continuously output, the output of the security signal is stopped by the power-on reset signal when the power is turned on, and the timer interrupt process is performed after the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, during the startup waiting time of the peripheral control board 1510). After the shift, the output of the security signal is restarted. That is, in the following cases, even when the security signal is continuously output after a power failure occurs during the security signal output, a period during which the security signal output is stopped is provided for a predetermined period after the power is restored.
-When power is restored by hot start after a power failure occurs during security signal output due to illegal detection, etc.-After a power failure occurs during security signal output due to RAM failure, power is restored and RAM failure continues. When: ・The power is restored after a power failure occurs while the security signal is being output in the setting change mode, and the setting change mode continues.・The power is restored after a power failure occurs while the security signal is being output in the setting confirmation mode. And the setting confirmation mode continues

In this way, even when the security signal is continuously output after a power failure occurs while outputting the security signal, the security signal output is stopped for a predetermined period after the power is restored, so that the security signal is generated on the hall computer side. It is possible to determine whether there is an abnormality or the state associated with the output of the security signal is released.

In the setting confirmation mode in which only the setting key 971 is operated, the security signal is output until the setting confirmation mode ends, regardless of the remaining time when the security signal is output, and the delay time after the setting confirmation mode ends. The output of the security signal is stopped after a lapse of time. In addition, the same processing as the setting confirmation mode may be performed in the setting change mode in which the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2352 that the setting key 971 has not returned to the OFF position, it is determined whether or not a value (02H) indicating the setting change is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2356), and the setting change is performed. When it is determined that the mode is set, it is determined whether the setting change switch 972 is operated (step S2357). The setting change switch 972 may also be configured to be used as the RAM clear switch 954. As a result, when it is determined that the value indicating the setting change is recorded in the setting state management area and the setting change switch 972 is operated, the setting value is updated by +1 (step S2358). When the set value exceeds the upper limit 6, the value is set to 0 (steps S2359 and S2360). After that, the process returns to the calling process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value indicating the setting change is not recorded in the setting status management area (that is, the setting confirmation mode is set) or the setting change switch 972 is not operated, the setting value is updated. Without returning to the processing of the calling source.

When determining the operation of the setting change switch 972 (immediately before or immediately after), it may be determined whether the setting key 971 is turned on. In this way, when the operation of the setting key 971 is determined when the setting change switch 972 is operated, the setting change mode is in effect when a power failure occurs, and even when the setting key 971 is not turned on when the power is restored, the setting change switch 972 It is possible to prevent the setting from being changed by the operation.

FIG. 225 is a flowchart of the setting display process executed by the main control MPU 1311. The setting display processing is executed in step S2342 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 223) when the setting status management area does not have the value (00H) indicating the normal gaming status, and the processing of displaying the setting value is executed.

First, the main control MPU 1311 clears the LED segment port (step S2370).

Then, it is determined whether or not the value (03H) indicating the RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2371). If the value indicating the RAM abnormality is not recorded in the setting state management area, the output of the segment terminal of the LED is set so that the current setting value is displayed on the base display 1317 (step S2372). On the other hand, if the value indicating the RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the output of the segment terminal of the LED is set so that the error is displayed on the base display 1317 (step S2373).

After that, the LED common signal corresponding to the LED common counter is output (step S2374), and the driver is driven to output the display data (segment signal) corresponding to the set value or the error display to the base display 1317 (step S2375). , Return to the processing of the calling source.

[12-18. Another example of setting change/confirmation processing 3]
Next, another embodiment of the pachinko machine having a setting changing function will be described. In another example 3 described below, the point that the timer interrupt process for the setting change process is provided separately from the timer interrupt process for the normal game is the main difference from the another example 2 described above. The processes other than those described below are the same as those in the second example described above.

Note that, as in the second modification, in the third modification, the setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972. However, the original main control RAM 1312 of the RAM clear switch 954 is selected. In order to describe the initialization function and the setting change function separately, the operation for changing the set value may be described as the setting change switch 972.

226 and 227 are flowcharts of the power-on process executed by the main control MPU 1311 when the power is turned on.

First, the main control MPU 1311 starts the process from the start address 8000 of the program code when the reset signal is released by turning on the power. The protect invalidity and the prohibited area invalidity of the main control RAM 1312 are set in the RAM protect register (step S2400). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating a use area of the main control RAM 1312 and resetting the access control unit when it determines that an prohibited area other than the designated area is accessed. In the third modified example, in order to release the reset function by accessing the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312, the prohibited area is set to be invalid so that the entire area of the main control RAM 1312 can be accessed. It should be noted that an unused area in the main control RAM 1312 is designated as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is enabled, and when access to the designated prohibited area is detected, the main control MPU 1311 is reset. Good.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 954 is operated, a predetermined area of the main control RAM 1312 is immediately initialized. However, if the checksums do not match, or if the backup flag is not set normally, the setting change operation is not performed after the function of the gaming machine is stopped as a RAM error and the game is disabled. Then, the main control RAM 1312 is controlled so that it is not initialized and the game is not executed.

Therefore, when the prohibited area of the RAM protect register is set to be valid, a reset occurs due to an erroneous access to the prohibited area of the RAM due to malfunction or failure, and when the main control MPU 1311 executes the power-on processing, Since the power failure process is not executed, the checksum is not calculated, and the backup flag is not set, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal. If it is judged that the RAM is abnormal, not only the game is initialized by the RAM clearing process, but also the game cannot be resumed unless the employee in the hall releases the RAM error (setting change operation), so the RAM protect register is prohibited. It is desirable to set the area to "invalid".

The prohibited area may be set to be valid. By setting the prohibited area to be valid, when the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312 is accessed due to fraud or the like, the game cannot be restarted unless the hall clerk performs the RAM abnormal cancellation operation (setting change operation). Therefore, resistance to fraud can be improved.

Next, the simple clear mode timer of a predetermined time is set to the watchdog timer (step S2401) and the watchdog timer is cleared (step S2402). After that, the power failure clear signal is set to ON (step S2403), and the power failure clear signal is set to OFF (step S2404). By setting the power failure clear signal to ON and then to OFF, the power failure notice signal stored in the latch can be set to a normal state (not a power failure).

Next, the levels of the signals of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are read from the PF port and stored in the register (step S2405). The main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are operated, so that the hall control unit 1510 waits until the peripheral control board 1510 is activated. If the employee of the above mistakes the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 by mistake, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are determined in a state not intended by the employee of the hall. Therefore, the input state (level) of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is stored in a register or the like which is a temporary storage means at an early stage after the power-on process is started, and the peripheral control board 1510 ends the standby state. Even if an employee of the hall accidentally interrupts the key operation at an early stage after the power is turned on, the state of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 stored in the register or the like which is a temporary storage means is determined later. The operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 during the power-on operation is surely detected.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power failure notice signal is in the power failure state (step S2406). If the power failure notice signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine is not normal, and thus the process waits until the power supply voltage stabilizes in step S2406. Since the watchdog timer is not cleared in the loop of step S2406, the watchdog timer resets unless the power failure is released. In the reset by the watchdog timer, the program is immediately started from the start address without performing the security check like the system reset, and the power-on process is executed. Therefore, unless the power failure notice signal is released in the loop of step S2406, the loop does not exit.

In this way, the power failure determination processing for detecting the power failure warning signal is as follows: the first is steps S2406 and S2408 during power-on processing, and the second is step S2450 of main processing on the main control side during normal game. Running in place. In the latter (step S2450), the power outage process after step S2462 is executed by detecting the power outage, but in the former (steps S2406 and 2408), the power outage process is not executed even if the power outage is detected. Since the checksum value and the backup flag value are maintained during the loop period, the state at the time of the power failure can be correctly restored without executing the power failure process.

The reset in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment includes a system reset generated by a reset circuit and a user reset generated by an access outside the designated area of the watchdog timer or the game control RAM 1312. In the system reset, the program is started after a security check of several hundred milliseconds is executed, whereas in the user reset, the program is started immediately without executing the security check when the reset is released.

Therefore, for example, if a reset occurs due to the watchdog timer during normal game processing, power failure processing is not executed, the checksum is not calculated, and the backup flag is not set, so it is determined that the RAM is abnormal. It When it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the game state is initialized by the RAM clearing process, and the game cannot be restarted unless the RAM clerk in the hall performs the RAM abnormality canceling operation (setting changing operation). On the other hand, in steps S2406 and S2408 during the power-on processing, even if the watchdog timer causes a reset, the RAM clerk in the hall does not perform the RAM abnormality release operation (setting change operation), and the state at the time of the power failure occurs correctly. I can return.

As described above, with respect to the reset generated by the watchdog timer, the case where the setting change operation for canceling the RAM abnormality in order to restart the pachinko machine 1 is necessary and the case where it is not necessary are usually set. Occurrence of reset by the watchdog timer during the time game is when a software failure occurs, the data stored in the main control RAM 1312 is destroyed, and the contents different from the game state at the time of the power failure are stored. Therefore, it is desirable to initialize the main control RAM 1312. On the other hand, the occurrence of the reset by the watchdog timer in the power-on process is when a hardware failure occurs, and the data stored in the main control RAM 1312 is unlikely to be destroyed. Therefore, the main control RAM 1312 is initialized. This is because there is little need to convert it into a product.

Although the reset generated by the watchdog timer has been described above, the same processing is performed for other types of user resets other than the reset generated by the watchdog timer. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, there are a plurality of reset factors, and the process described above can be executed by a reset (for example, a user reset by a watchdog timer) that occurs with one of the reset factors.

After that, a sub-start waiting timer (for example, about 2 seconds) is started, the watchdog timer is continuously cleared until the timer expires, and the peripheral control board 1510 is started (step S2407). The waiting for activation of the peripheral control board 1510 may be any time after the power is turned on until the first command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, not after the setting value is determined.

Then, it is determined again whether or not the power failure notice signal is in the power failure state (step S2408). If the power failure notice signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine 1 is abnormal, and thus the process waits in step S2408. It should be noted that the determination of whether or not the power outage notification signal is in the power outage may be made in either of steps S2406 and S2408, or in either of them.

Then, the setting value confirmation process shown in FIG. 215 is executed to determine whether the setting value is within the normal range (step S2409).

After that, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game control area (step S2410), the game area outside RAM confirmation processing at power-on shown in FIG. 216 is executed, and an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is determined. (Step S2411). Then, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game control area is restored (step S2412).

After that, the RAM abnormality determination result value is provisionally set in the C register (step S2413), and the RAM abnormality value (03H) in the setting state management area is provisionally set in the B register (step S2414).

The value set in the setting status management area in the third example is different from that shown in FIG. 201(B) in the above-described embodiment, and if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 as shown in FIG. 220(A). 03H is recorded. That is, the setting state management area of the third example is a 1-byte storage area in which the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded. For example, the lower 4 bits are used and the upper 4 bits are not defined. Specifically, 00H is recorded in the normal game state, 01H in the setting confirmation mode, 02H in the setting change mode, and 03H is recorded if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312.

The setting state management area is not updated to 00H by the RAM clear processing by operating only the RAM clear switch 954, and the current value is maintained. When the setting confirmation mode ends, the value is updated from 01H to 00H, and when the setting change mode ends, the value is updated from 02H to 00H. Further, when the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, when the setting change mode is entered by the next setting change operation at power-on, the value is updated from 03H to 02H, and when the setting change mode is ended, it is updated from 02H to 00H.

Further, it is determined whether the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal (steps S2415 and S2416). Specifically, a checksum calculated and stored from the data (excluding the data saved in the stack) used as the game control area in the area backed up in the internal RAM 1312 at the time of the previous power shutdown, The checksum calculated using the same area is compared, and if they are different, it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 has an abnormality. In addition, if the value of the power failure flag indicating that the power is properly backed up (the processing at the time of power failure was normally executed) is not stored in the backup flag area, the data in the main control RAM 1312 is normally backed up when the power failure occurs. It is determined that the main control RAM 1312 has an abnormality because the power-off processing has not been normally performed.

Then, if there is an abnormality in either the game control area or the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process proceeds to step S2419. On the other hand, if there is no abnormality in both the game control area and the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the RAM normality determination result value is provisionally set in the C register (step S2417), and the information of the setting state management area is set in the B register. (Step S2418) and the process proceeds to step 2219. As a result, the determination result of whether or not the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal is set in the C register, and therefore the RAM abnormality is determined as the determination of "RAM abnormality" and "game state before power interruption" in the subsequent processing. The size of the program can be reduced because it is not necessary to re-execute the processing (processing for determining whether the checksum and the backup flag match).

Further, the value of the setting state management area at the time of a power failure or the determination result (RAM abnormal value) of the main control RAM 1312 at the time of power restoration is set in the B register, and the RAM abnormal value is temporarily set in the setting state management area in step S2419. By setting, unnecessary processing can be deleted and the size of the program can be reduced. For example, unless the RAM abnormal value is temporarily set in the setting state management area in step S2419, the RAM abnormal value is set in the setting state management area when YES is determined in each of the determinations in steps S2423 and S2424, and step S2436 is performed. Need to execute a JUMP instruction to. However, since the RAM abnormal value has already been provisionally set in the setting state management area in step S2419, by specifying S2436 as the JUMP destination at the time of determination in step S2423, as shown in the source code example below, JUMP Orders can be reduced.

Example of source code when RAM abnormal value is not temporarily set in step S2419
AND A,30H ;S2420
CP A,30H ;S2421 (when bit5: setting key, bit4: RAM clear SW)
JR Z,RESET_P_6;

CP B,02H ;S2422
JR Z,RESET_P_6;

CP C,00H ;S2423
JR Z,$111;
$000:
LD W,03H ;S2419 equivalent
LD (VALID_PALY),W;
JR S2436; Jump instruction to S2436
$111:
CP B,03H ;S2424
JR Z,$000;

XOR W,W ;S2425
LD (VALID_PALY),W;

Example of source code for temporarily setting RAM abnormal value in step S2419
LD W,03H ;S2419
LD (VALID_PALY),W;
AND A,30H ;S2420
CP A,30H ;S2421
JR Z,RESET_P_6;

CP B,02H ;S2422
JR Z,RESET_P_6;

CP C,00H ;S2423
JR NZ,S2436;

CP B,03H ;S2424
JR Z,S2436;

XOR W,W ;S2425
LD (VALID_PALY),W;

Then, in step S2419, a value (03H) indicating a RAM abnormality is provisionally recorded in the setting state management area (step S2419).

Then, the bits of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 of the register value in which the value of the PF port is recorded are masked (step S2420). After that, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has been operated to be ON and the RAM clear switch 954 has been operated to be ON at the time of turning on the power by using the value stored in the register (step S2421). If the setting key 971 is turned on and the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on, it is determined that the setting change operation is performed, and the process proceeds to step S2430.

On the other hand, if the setting key 971 has not been operated and the RAM clear switch 954 has not been operated, it is determined whether or not the setting change mode was in effect when a power failure occurred (step S2422). For example, when the value of the B register set in step S2418 is the setting change mode (02H), it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the setting change mode.

When it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the setting change mode, the process proceeds to step S2430.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the power failure has not occurred during the setting change mode, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the game control area and outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2423). For example, the abnormality in the game control area can be determined using the determination result stored in the C register in step S2413 described above. As a result, if there is an abnormality inside or outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process proceeds to step S2436.

On the other hand, if there is no abnormality in both the game control area and the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, it is determined whether a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing (step S2424). For example, if the value of the setting status management area set in the B register in S2418 is a value indicating the RAM abnormality (03H), it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing.

If it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, the process advances to step S2436. On the other hand, when it is determined that the power failure has not occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, the value (00H) indicating the normal gaming state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2425). By recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2425, the value (03H) indicating the RAM abnormality temporarily recorded in the setting state management area in step S2419 is reset to 00H as a temporary setting value. Further, by recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2425, the values of the setting state management area when jumping from step S2426 and step S2431 to step S2435 are different. Therefore, since the values of the setting state management area are different between the normal RAM clearing process and the RAM clearing process associated with the setting change process, the callers can be distinguished even if the programs for both RAM clearing processes are common. , It is not necessary to separately provide a program, and the program size can be reduced.

As shown in the source code example below, at the timing of step S2425, it is not determined whether 01H or 00H is recorded in the setting state management area. The determined value should be set in the setting state management area at the time of determination, but if this is done, 00H is set in the setting state management area after the RAM clear processing when it is determined that the RAM clear switch 954 is operated to ON. A recording process is required. Therefore, since the processing contents are different between the power-on processing and the RAM clearing processing when the settings are changed, a dedicated processing is required for each portion other than the processing for initializing the main control RAM 1312. Therefore, in order to make the process of initializing the main control RAM 1312 common when the setting is changed and when only the RAM clear switch 954 is operated, 00H is provisionally set in step S2425.

Example of source code when 00H is not provisionally set in the setting status management area in step S2425
CP A,10H ;S2426 (PF register information is stored in A register)
JR NZ,$000 ;(bit5: setting key bit4: RAM clear SW)

LD A,(JOTAI_BF) ;S2427
LD (POWER_BF),A;

CP A,20H ;S2428
JR NZ,$111;

LD W,01H ;S2429
LD (VALID_PALY),W;
JR S2436;

$000:
XOR W,W ;S2425 equivalent
LD (VALID_PALY),W;
JR S2435 ;Increase

$111:
XOR W,W; increment
LD (VALID_PALY),W; increment
JR S2436 ;Increase

S2430:
LD W,02H ;S2430
LD (VALID_PALY),W;
...
S2435:
[RAM clear processing] ;S2435
S2436:
[Initialize all command buffers] ;S2436

Example of source code for temporarily setting 00H in the setting status management area in step S2425
XOR W,W ;S2425
LD (VALID_PALY),W;

CP A,10H ;S2426
JR NZ,S2435;

LD A,(JOTAI_BF) ;S2427
LD (POWER_BF),A;

CP A,20H ;S2428
JR Z,S2436;

LD W,01H;
LD (VALID_PALY),W;
JR S2436;
S2430:
LD W,02H ;S2430
LD (VALID_PALY),W;
...
S2435:
[RAM clear processing] ;S2435
S2436:
[Initialize all command buffers] ;S2436

After that, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 954 has been operated to be ON when the power is turned on by using the value stored in the register (step S2426). If the RAM clear switch 954 has been operated to be ON, the process proceeds to step S2435.

In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the processing is distributed based on the operation of the RAM clear switch 954, the operation of the setting key 971, and the value recorded in the setting state management area. For example, when it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, 03H is recorded in the setting state management area and 03H is maintained until the power is cut off, so that the normal game process cannot be executed. At this time, if the power is turned off and then the setting is changed to turn on the power, the RAM abnormality can be cleared. That is, when it is determined in step S2421 that both the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated (setting change operation), the setting state management area changes from the value indicating the RAM abnormality (03H) to the value indicating the setting change. It is updated to (02H) (step S2430), and the RAM abnormal state ends. As described above, the recovery from the RAM abnormality is always via the setting change. In other words, it is determined whether or not the setting change operation is performed before it is determined whether the state at the time of the power failure is the RAM abnormality. Therefore, the RAM abnormality can be resolved only when the setting value is changed.

When it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the game processing may be started by initializing the work area and the stack area in the area inside the game control area and the area outside the game control area. In this way, even if it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, it can automatically return to the normal game state.

In addition, when it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the game is stopped, after the power is shut off, when the work area of the region inside the game control region and the region outside the game control region is determined to be normal when the power is restored, The game processing may be started by initializing the work area and the stack area in the area inside the game control area and the area outside the game control area. By doing this, it is possible to return to the normal game state by the ON/OFF operation of the power switch.

In addition, when it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the game is stopped, and after the power is turned off, it is determined that the work areas of the area inside the game control area and the area outside the game control area are normal when the power is restored, and the RAM is cleared. When the switch is operated, the work area and the stack area in the area inside the game control area and the area outside the game control area may be initialized to start the game processing. By doing this, it is possible to return to the normal game state by operating the RAM clear switch 954 after the power is cut off.

If it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the game is stopped, the power is shut off, and then the power is restored, it is determined that the work areas of the area inside the game control area and the area outside the game control area are normal, and the setting is made. When the key 971 is operated, the work area and the stack area of the area inside the game control area and the area outside the game control area may be initialized to start the game processing. By doing this, it is possible to return to the normal game state by operating the setting key 971 after the power is cut off.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated, in order to recover the game state before the power outage, the game state information at the time of the power outage is stored in the power-on state buffer (step S2427). In this way, the peripheral control board 1510 side, each game state (for example, a low probability state or a high probability state, a time saving state or a non-time saving state) corresponding production (background, decorative pattern mode (low probability time) And a high probability at the time of using a decorative pattern of a different mode) is prepared for restoration.In step S2300 of the power-on setting process (INITIAL_SET) executed in step S2439, power-on operation command Used in creating.

After that, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has been operated to be ON when the power is turned on by using the value stored in the register (step S2428). If the setting key 971 has been operated to ON, it is determined that the setting confirmation operation has been performed, the value (01H) indicating the setting confirmation mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2429), and the process proceeds to step S2436. .. That is, regardless of whether the state at the time of a power failure occurs is the setting confirmation mode, if only the setting key 971 is operated (the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated), the setting confirmation mode is entered.

Since steps S2425 to S2429 are processing executed when at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is not operated, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 954 is operated (step S2426) and the setting key 971. Any of the operation determination (step S2428) may be performed first. That is, as shown in the figure, the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 may be determined (step S2426) and then the operation of the setting key 971 may be determined (step S2428), or the operation of the setting key 971 may be determined (step S2428). The operation of the RAM clear switch 954 may be determined (step S2426).

If YES is determined in step S2421 or step S2422, the value (02H) indicating the setting change mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2430). Then, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the work area of the main control RAM 1312 outside the game control area (step S2431). For example, using the determination result stored in the C register in step S2413 described above, an abnormality outside the game control area can be determined. As a result, if there is no abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process proceeds to step S2435.

On the other hand, if there is an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game area (step S2432), and the outside-game-area RAM abnormality processing shown in FIG. 217 is executed (S2433). After that, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game area in step S2432 is restored (step S2434).

Then, the work area other than the set value and setting state management area in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and the stack area in the game control area are initialized (step S2435). The unused area provided between the work area and the stack area may be initialized together.

After that, all command buffers are initialized (step S2436). This is because if the power is restored without clearing the RAM after the power is cut off while the command is stored in the command buffer, the untransmitted command stored in the command buffer is transmitted. For example, the power is cut off during the transmission of the variation command, so that the symbol command is transmitted, but the subsequent variation pattern command may not be transmitted. If only the variation pattern command is transmitted when the power is turned on, the peripheral control board 1510 may be determined to be abnormal. Further, when an untransmitted command in the process related to the setting change is stored in the command buffer, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the command by transmitting the untransmitted command during the setting process after the power is restored. There is a possibility that the game state is set and malfunction occurs. In order to prevent the occurrence of such an abnormality, the command buffer is initialized in step S2436.

Although the command buffer is initialized in step S2436, the command buffer may be cleared when the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is started. In the setting change process, the command buffer is cleared along with the initialization of the main control RAM 1312, so there is no need to clear the command buffer separately, but in the setting confirmation process, the main control RAM 1312 is not initialized. Therefore, it is recommended to clear the command buffer when shifting to the setting confirmation.

After that, the functions of the devices (CTC, SIO, etc.) built in the main control MPU 1311 are initialized (step S2437). Specifically, a timer interrupt cycle time is set in CTC0 for setting change processing, and CTC0 is set to enable interrupts. The time of CTC1 for controlling the timer interrupt process in the normal game state is not set, and the interrupt of CTC1 for the normal game remains set to be prohibited.

Then, a hardware random number (for example, a winning random number) built in the main control MPU 1311 is activated (step S2438) to start updating the hard random number, and the power-on setting process shown in FIG. 219 is executed (step S2439).

Finally, the timer interrupt is set to enable (step S2440), and the process proceeds to the main process on the main control side (FIG. 228).

FIG. 228 is a flowchart of main processing on the main control side executed by the main control MPU 1311. The main process on the main control side is executed after step S2440 of the power-on process (FIG. 227).

First, the main control MPU 1311 executes the first main loop process (steps S2450 to S2453) for the setting change process. In the first main loop processing, first, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a power failure notice signal and determines whether a power failure has occurred depending on whether the power failure notice signal is ON (step S2450). In the third example, the power failure is monitored in the main processing, but the power failure processing may be executed when the power failure is detected by monitoring the power failure with the timer interrupt processing. For example, at least at the start and end of the timer interrupt, it is determined whether the power failure warning signal is ON, the period during which the power failure warning signal is continuously output is counted, and the count result becomes a predetermined value. It may be determined that there is a power outage. In another example 3, since the timer interrupt processing for the setting processing and the timer interrupt processing for the normal game processing are separately provided, the power interruption may be monitored by any of the timer interrupt processing, and by both timer interrupt processings. You may monitor for power outages. Therefore, the power failure monitoring processing and the power failure processing are made into subroutines, and these subroutines (power failure monitoring processing and power failure processing) are executed in each of the two timer interrupt processing, so that the same program (code ) Does not need to be included in each timer interrupt process, and the size of the program can be reduced.

When the power outage notice signal is detected, the power-off processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed.

On the other hand, if the power failure notice signal is not ON, the power is being supplied normally, so interrupts are set to be prohibited (step S2451), and whether a value (00H) indicating the game start is recorded in the setting state management area is checked. A determination is made (step S2452). If the value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the process proceeds to step S2454 to start the normal game. On the other hand, if the value indicating the game start is not recorded in the setting state management area, the interrupt is set to allow (step S2453), the process returns to step S2450, and the first main loop process for the setting change process is repeatedly executed. ..

When it is determined in step S2452 that the value indicating the game start is recorded in the setting state management area, the interrupt timer is switched to the normal game, and then the second main loop process for the normal game (steps S2457 to S2458). To execute. Before executing the second main loop process, first, the timer interrupt cycle time is set in the CTC1 for normal game (step S2454), the CTC0 interrupt (timer interrupt for setting process) is stopped, and the CTC1 interrupt ( A timer interrupt for normal game processing) is activated (step S2455) and interrupt permission is set (step S2456).

After that, the power failure notice signal is acquired, and it is determined whether a power failure has occurred depending on whether the power failure notice signal is ON (step S2457). When the power outage notice signal is detected, the power-off processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed. On the other hand, if the power failure notice signal is not ON, the power is being supplied normally, so the random number update process 2 is executed (step S2458). The random number update process 2 may be the same as that described with reference to FIG. 195, and mainly updates random numbers other than the random numbers for determining the winning in the special lottery and the ordinary lottery. After that, returning to step S2457, the second main loop process for normal game is repeatedly executed.

When a power failure advance notice signal is detected in steps S2450 and S2457, power-off processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed. In the main processing on the main control side shown in FIG. 228,
In the power-off process, a process of backing up data for returning to the state before the power outage is executed. Specifically, first, interruption is prohibited (step S2462). As a result, the timer interrupt processing described later is not performed. Further, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output port and stops the operation of the device controlled by the output from each port (step S2463). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is output to the solenoid/power failure clear/ACK output port. Note that not all output ports may be cleared, and for example, output ports for controlling solenoids and motors that consume a large amount of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, it is possible to reduce power consumption until the main-board-side power-off process is completed, and to reliably complete the main-board-side power-off process.

After that, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game area (step S2464), the processing at the time of power OFF is executed, and the processing necessary before the power is cut off for the work area outside the game area is executed (step S2465). ). The details of the power-off processing are as shown in FIG. 222. Then, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game area is restored (step S2466).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum of the work area in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 for determining whether or not the data stored in the work area to be backed up is normally held, The data is stored in a predetermined checksum storage area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2467). This checksum is used to judge whether the data backed up in the work area is normal. The target area for which the checksum is calculated is the work area in the game control area, which may be changed after the power is turned on and before the main processing on the main control side is executed. And the value of the setting status management area), the backup flag, and the value of the checksum area may be excluded.

Further, as the power failure flag, a value (5AH) indicating that the power-off processing has been normally executed is stored in the backup flag area (step S2468). This completes the storage of the game backup information. Finally, the RAM protect valid (write prohibited) and the set value for invalidating the prohibited area are written in the RAM protect register to prohibit writing to the main control RAM 1312 (step S2469), and wait until recovery from power failure ( infinite loop). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating a use area of the main control RAM 1312 and resetting the access control unit when it determines that an prohibited area other than the designated area is accessed. In this embodiment, the reset function by the access to the prohibited area is released and the entire area can be accessed. When an access is detected in the specified prohibited area by designating an unused area in the main control RAM 1312 as a prohibited area and setting the prohibited area in the RAM protect register as valid, the main control MPU 1311 determines It may be reset.

In the process described above, the process of clearing the output port (step S2463), the process of turning off the power (step S2465), calculating the checksum (step S2467), and setting the backup flag (step S2468) is executed in this order. However, the execution order of these four processes is not limited to the illustrated order, and may be another order.

In addition, in another example 3, the main processing on the main control side monitors the occurrence of the power outage, but the timer interrupt processing may monitor the occurrence of the power outage and execute the power outage processing based on the monitoring result. For example, in each of the two main loops, check the power failure signal at least at the start and end, measure the period during which the power failure signal is continuously output, and when the measurement result reaches a predetermined value. It is good to detect the occurrence of a power failure.

In the main control side main processing shown in FIG. 228, two main loops are provided corresponding to each of the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing and the timer interrupt for normal game, and always for setting change processing once. There is an opportunity to execute the timer interrupt processing of. In addition, at this execution timing, the timer interrupt process for the setting change process may not be executed (for example, in the case of branching to YES in step S2454). By providing two main loops in this way, the process for calculating the base value is executed in the main loop for normal games (timer interrupt processing), and the unnecessary base value is calculated in the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing. The process of calculating the base value can be switched so as not to execute the process. In another example 3, since the timer interrupt processing for the setting processing and the timer interrupt processing for the normal game processing are separately provided, the power interruption may be monitored by any of the timer interrupt processing, and by both timer interrupt processings. You may monitor for power outages. Therefore, the power failure monitoring processing and the power failure processing are made into subroutines, and these subroutines (power failure monitoring processing and power failure processing) are executed in each of the two timer interrupt processing, so that the same program (code ) Does not need to be included in each timer interrupt process, and the size of the program can be reduced.

FIG. 229 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process for the setting process executed by the main control MPU 1311.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2470). The main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for calculation, one of which can be used as a register group of bank 0 and the other of which can be used as a register group of bank 1, and the banks can be switched. According to the configuration, either bank can be used. In this embodiment, register bank 0 is used in the main processing on the main control side, and register bank 1 is used in the timer interrupt processing for the setting processing or the normal game. Therefore, the instruction to switch to bank 1 is executed at the start of the timer interrupt processing, but it is not necessary to execute the instruction to switch to bank 0 at the end of the timer interrupt processing. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the state of the bank in the flag register (for example, the register in which the Z flag and the C flag are set), and the flag register is saved in the stack area at the start of interrupt and Execution of an instruction returns from the stack area. Therefore, by executing the RET instruction, the bank flag of the register stored in the flag register is also restored. When the configuration in which the bank state is not stored in the flag register is adopted, it is necessary to execute the bank switching instruction at the end of the timer interrupt processing and return to the bank 0.

Since the flag register also stores a flag for controlling whether or not to allow an interrupt, it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after setting interrupt permission. The flag for controlling the availability of interrupts is set to the interrupt disabled state after stacking the flag register at the start of the timer interrupt process. Therefore, the interrupt is not enabled unless the interrupt is permitted (EI instruction or the like) during the timer interrupt processing or the RETI instruction is executed.

Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. If the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, it is set to 0 (step S2471).

Next, switch input processing 1 is executed (step S2472). In the switch input processing 1, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, ON edges are created, and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312.

Since the switch input process 1 in step S2472 is a process related to the winning signal, in the timer interrupt process executed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, since NO is determined in step S2473, the winning detection is performed. , No fraud is detected. Even if the winning is detected, the payout of the prize balls, the variable display, etc. are not executed. This is because the setting change operation and the setting confirmation operation are performed by the employees of the hall, and it is considered preferable that the illegality is not detected in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, and the illegality is not detected.

Even in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, some fraud detection sensors (for example, radio wave sensors) may be detected in the switch input process 1 to monitor a particular type of fraud. In this way, it is possible to detect a fraud in which a person who intends to perform a fraudulent act (master Goto) forcibly activates the setting change mode by irradiating a radio wave. For example, while an employee in the hall is performing a setting change or setting confirmation operation, the door is open, and the sensor attached to the door is positioned so as to approach the adjacent pachinko machine. Therefore, while performing the setting change operation or the setting confirmation, it is possible to detect the goto action by the radio wave or the like in the adjacent pachinko machine.

Then, it is determined whether or not the value (00H) indicating the game start is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2473). In the timer interruption process for the setting change process, the value of the game state management area is normally other than 00H (01H to 03H), so the value (00H) indicating the game start in the setting state management area. It is not necessary to determine whether or not is recorded, but in order to prevent fraudulent actions such as illegally shifting to the setting change mode during a normal game, a determination is made.

If the value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the processing relating to the change of the setting value and the setting display (steps S2474 to S2478) is not executed, and the process proceeds to step S2479. On the other hand, if the value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, the specific output port is cleared (step S2474). For example, the signal cleared as the specific output port in step 2474 is the power failure clear signal. , A special winning opening, a solenoid signal such as an electric chute, and a response signal (ACK) when the payout control board 951 receives a command. After that, the LED common port is turned off (step S2475). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of timer interrupt processing, the time until the LED common signal is turned on, that is, the LED turn-off time is secured, and the ghost phenomenon in which the display before and after the display switching of the LED appears mixed To prevent LED flickering.

Then, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2476), and the setting process shown in FIG. 224 is executed (step S2477). After that, the setting display processing shown in FIG. 225 is executed (step S2478).

Further, the peripheral board command transmission process of outputting the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit is executed (step S2479). The transmission information storage area is a storage area for temporarily storing the generated transmission command. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a transmission information storage area which is a multi-byte FIFO-format transmission buffer, and sequentially transmits the values stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit to the peripheral control board 1510. Since the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit has a finite capacity, untransmitted commands remain in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit, and the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit is full or full. If it is close to, it may be controlled whether or not the command is stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit according to the free state of the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit. For example, it is determined whether the free space in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit is larger than the size (number of bytes) of the command stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit. It may be stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit. Also, each time the command transmission process to the peripheral control board 1510 is executed, a predetermined upper limit is set for the size of the command stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit, and the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit is stored. If the size of the command stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit exceeds the predetermined upper limit without judging the free space, all commands cannot be stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit. Also, in the peripheral board command transmission processing executed in the next timer interrupt processing, the remaining commands may be stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

It should be noted that the upper limit number may be set equal to or smaller than the amount of data that can be transmitted by the serial communication circuit (SIO) in one timer interrupt cycle. For example, when the communication speed of the serial communication circuit is 20 kbps and the timer interrupt period is 4 msec, about 80 bits of serial communication can be performed in one timer interrupt period. When one command is composed of 20 bits, 80/20=4, so it is preferable to set 4 commands as the upper limit. It should be noted that substantially one more command may be set as the upper limit. This is because the maximum length of the command is assumed to be 20 bits, but many commands have a length shorter than the maximum length.

Note that the transmission information storage area is stored in the transmission information storage area so that the transmission information storage area does not become full regardless of whether a predetermined upper limit is set for the data amount of the command stored in the transmission information storage area in one command transmission process. The capacity of the storage area in which the previous command is stored may be smaller than or equal to the capacity of the transmission information storage area.

After that, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2480). Since the watchdog timer uses the simple clear mode, the watchdog timer is cleared by setting 1 word. After that, the bank of the register is switched by a return instruction (for example, RETI) (step S2481), and the process before the interruption is restored.

Unlike the other timer interrupt processing, the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing shown in FIG. 229 does not execute the random number update processing (R_ART_K), but since the hard random number has already been activated in S2438, Similar to the random number, the random number update process may be executed in the timer interrupt process for the setting change process.

In another example 3, the test signal output process is executed in the timer interrupt process for the normal game (for example, the output data setting process S2505 in FIG. 230) but is called in the timer interrupt process for the setting change process. Good.

FIG. 230 is a flowchart of the normal game timer interrupt process executed by the main control MPU 1311.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2490). The main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for calculation, one of which can be used as a register group of bank 0 and the other of which can be used as a register group of bank 1, and the banks can be switched. Is configured so that either bank can be used. In this embodiment, register bank 0 is used in the main processing on the main control side, and register bank 1 is used in the setting processing or the timer interrupt processing for the normal game. Therefore, the instruction to switch to bank 1 is executed at the start of the timer interrupt processing, but it is not necessary to execute the instruction to switch to bank 0 at the end of the timer interrupt processing. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the state of the bank in the flag register (for example, the register in which the Z flag and the C flag are set), and the flag register is saved in the stack area at the start of interrupt and Execution of an instruction returns from the stack area. Therefore, by executing the RET instruction, the bank flag of the register stored in the flag register is also restored. When the configuration in which the bank state is not stored in the flag register is adopted, it is necessary to execute the bank switching instruction at the end of the timer interrupt processing and return to the bank 0.

Since the flag register also stores a flag for controlling whether or not to allow an interrupt, it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after setting interrupt permission. The flag for controlling the availability of interrupts is set to the interrupt disabled state after stacking the flag register at the start of the timer interrupt process. Therefore, the interrupt is not enabled unless the interrupt is permitted (EI instruction or the like) during the timer interrupt processing or the RETI instruction is executed.

Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. If the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, it is set to 0 (step S2491).

Next, switch input processing 1 is executed (step S2492). In the switch input processing 1, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, ON edges are created, and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312.

Subsequently, the random number update process 1 is executed (step S2493). In the random number update process 1, the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are updated. In addition to these random numbers, in order to change the initial values of the big hit symbol determining random numbers and the small hit symbol determining random numbers updated in the random number updating process 2 of the main control side main process shown in FIG. Update the random number for initial value determination.

After that, the switch input special processing is executed (step S2494).

After that, the timer updating process is executed (step S2495). In the timer update process, for example, the time when the special symbol display 1185 lights according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and the special electric auditors product control process, the normal symbol and the normal symbol variation determined by the normal electric auditors product control process. In addition to the time when the normal pattern display 1189 lights up according to the display pattern, a payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 951 has normally received various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311) is input. When determining whether or not the ACK signal input determination time is set, the time management such as the ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption period is set to 4 ms, so the fluctuation time is decremented by 4 ms each time this timer subtraction process is performed. Then, when the subtraction result becomes the value 0, the variation time of the variation display pattern or the normal symbol variation display pattern is accurately measured.

Subsequently, a prize ball control process is executed (step S2496). In the prize ball control processing, the input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated based on the read input information, and is written in the main control RAM 1312. Further, based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls, a self-check for creating a prize ball command for paying out game balls, and for confirming a connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. Create commands. The main control MPU 1311 transmits the created prize ball command and self-check command to the payout control board 951 as main pay serial data. The main control MPU 1311 has a two-channel output serial communication circuit, and transmits a command to the peripheral control board 1510 on one channel and a command to the payout control board 951 on another channel. The transfer rate (baud rate) of serial communication can be set for each channel. For example, in step S2437, the transfer rate of the serial communication circuit is set. For example, as the transfer rate, the transfer rate on the payout control board 951 side may be set lower than the transfer data on the peripheral control board 1510 side. This is because the prize balls controlled by the payout control board 951 are accompanied by a game value, and are thus less likely to be affected by noise or the like, and are transferred at a low speed so as not to become an abnormal prize ball command due to a command garbled or missing, etc. On the side of the peripheral control board 1510, a command for performance without a game value is transmitted, so the performance may be restored by the next command. Furthermore, a large number of commands are transmitted and the performance is performed with good response, and the game is played. It is desirable to quickly send a command to the peripheral control board 1510 so that the person does not feel uncomfortable. In addition, the response of the effect is bad (for example, even if the game ball wins the starting winning opening and the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 starts changing, the decorative pattern does not start changing in the main liquid crystal display device 1600). This is because the player feels anxiety that it is out of order.

Subsequently, a frame command reception process is executed (step S2497). The payout control board 951 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame status 1 command, an error clear navigation command, and a frame status 2 command) classified into status displays by the payout control program. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error cancellation notification command based on a detection signal of the operation switch. In the frame command receiving process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, the information for notifying the payout control board 951 is stored in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. Further, the main control MPU 1311 shapes the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (for example, a frame status display command, an error cancellation notification command, etc.), and the above-mentioned transmission information storage area Remember. Specifically, in the frame command reception process, in order to give a notification corresponding to the command received from the payout control board 951, the command received from the payout control board 951 conforms to the system of commands transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Thus, the command is stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO) like other generated commands. When the command from the payout control board 951 is normally received, a signal for controlling the output of the main ACK signal is generated. The main ACK signal is directly output from the output port to the payout control board 951 instead of the serial communication circuit. The main ACK signal may be output as a command from the serial communication circuit.

Subsequently, a fraudulent activity detection process is executed (step S2498). In the fraudulent activity detection process, an abnormal state related to fraud (magnetism, vibration, prize winning abnormality, etc.) is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read out from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and when it is not in the big hit game state, it is detected by the count switch that the game balls are entering the special winning openings 2005 and 2006, the main control program Creates a prize abnormality display command classified into notification display as an abnormal state, and stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Then, a switch passing command output process of creating a command corresponding to the passage detection of various switches related to the winning switch and the starting opening switch and setting it in the transmission information storage area is executed (step S2499).

Then, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game control area (step S2500), and the base display output process is executed (step S2501). Unlike other processing, the base display output processing is processing that is executed using the second area outside the game control area, and is common processing that is not affected by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, in order to ensure the independence of the base display output process, before and after the execution of the base display output process, the predetermined data such as the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game control area, and the base display device is saved. It is not updated in the output process. After that, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game control area is restored (step S2502).

Subsequently, the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing is executed (step S2503). In the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing, it is determined whether or not the big hit random number value matches the hit determination value stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance, and the probability variation state is set based on the big hit symbol random value. It is determined whether or not to move. When the big hit random number value matches the hit determination value, it is determined whether or not the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 are opened and closed. When the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 are opened and closed by this determination, the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 are opened (or expanded) to allow the game balls to be received in the special winning openings 2005 and 2006. As a result, the game state shifts to an advantage for the player. If the probability variation transition condition is satisfied, then the probability transition state is entered, while if the probability variation transition condition is not satisfied, the game state other than the probability variation state is entered. Here, the “probability variation state” means a state (high probability state) in which the winning probability of the above-mentioned special lottery is set relatively higher than the normal gaming state (low probability state).

Then, the normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control processing is executed (step S504). In the normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control processing, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. When the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the random number for normal symbol hit determination is extracted, and it is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control ROM (" Ordinary lottery"). Then, it is determined whether to open/close the second starting opening door member 2549 according to the result of the lottery in the ordinary lottery. When the opening/closing operation is performed by this determination, the second starting opening door member 2549 is opened (or expanded), and the starting opening 2004 becomes a game state in which the game ball can be received, which is advantageous for the player. Transition to the state.

Subsequently, output data setting processing is executed (step S2505). In the output data setting process, various signals are output from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1311. For example, when various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1311 based on the output information, a main payout ACK signal is output to the payout control board 951 or a big hit game. In the state, it outputs a drive signal to an attacker solenoid (first attacker solenoid 2113, second upper attacker solenoid 2553, second lower attacker solenoid 2556) that opens and closes the opening/closing member 2107 of the special winning openings 2005 and 2006. In addition to outputting a drive signal to the starting opening solenoid 2550 that opens and closes the starting opening (second starting opening door member 2549), as output information to the hall computer, information output signal during probability change, special symbol display information Various information (game information) signals related to games such as output signals, normal symbol display information output signals, time saving information output information, starting mouth winning information output signals, and security signals are output to the external terminal board 784. In the output data setting process, a test signal output process may be executed to output a test signal.

In the output data setting process, a signal corresponding to the number of out balls counted in the switch input special process (step S2494) is output from the external terminal board 784. For example, a pulse signal of a predetermined length may be output from the external terminal board 784 every predetermined number of out balls (10 or the like).

In the output data setting process, a test signal to be output to the inspection device connected to the pachinko machine 1 is set. The test signal includes, for example, a signal indicating a game state, a normal symbol, and a signal indicating a stop symbol of a special symbol.

Further, peripheral board command transmission processing for outputting the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit is executed (step S2506). The transmission information storage area is a storage area for temporarily storing the generated transmission command. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read in step 2070 and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a transmission information storage area which is a multi-byte FIFO-format transmission buffer, and sequentially transmits the values stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit to the peripheral control board 1510.

After that, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2507). Since the watchdog timer uses the simple clear mode, the watchdog timer is cleared by setting 1 word. After that, the bank of the register is switched by a return instruction (for example, RETI) (step S2508), and the process before the interrupt is returned.

[12-18. Another example of setting change/confirmation processing 4]
Next, another embodiment of the pachinko machine having a setting changing function will be described. In another example 4 described below, the process related to the setting change is executed in the main control side main process instead of the timer interrupt process. The processes other than those described below are the same as those in the third example described above.

Note that in the modified example 4, as in the modified example 2, the setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972. However, the main control RAM 1312 of the original RAM clear switch 954 is selected. In order to describe the initialization function and the setting change function separately, the operation for changing the set value may be described as the setting change switch 972.

FIG. 231 is a flowchart of main processing on the main control side executed by the main control MPU 1311. The main process on the main control side is executed after step S2440 of the power-on process (FIG. 227). The main control side main process of the other example 4 executes steps S2481 to S2484 instead of the step S2452 of the main control side main process of the another example 3 (FIG. 228). In the main control side main processing, the setting change and the setting confirmation processing are executed not only when the timer interrupt processing for the setting processing and the timer interrupt processing for the normal game processing are separately provided as in another example 4, It is also applicable to the other examples 1 and 2. For example, the main control main process shown in FIG. 231 includes a first main loop process for setting process (steps S2450 to S2453) and a second main loop process for normal game (steps S2457 to S2458). Even in the main loop process, one timer interrupt process (FIG. 196 of another example 1 and FIG. 223 of another example 2) is executed. The setting process (step 2068 of FIG. 190, step S2341 of FIG. 223) in the timer interrupt process. ) And normal game processing are executed. In this case, since only one timer interrupt process is executed in the main loop, it is not necessary to switch the CTCs in steps S2454 and S2455 described later.

In the main-control-side main processing shown in FIG. 231, the same processing as the main-control-side main processing (FIG. 228) of Modification 3 is denoted by the same reference numeral.

First, the main control MPU 1311 executes the first main loop process (steps S2450 to S2453) for the setting process. In the first main loop processing, first, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a power failure notice signal and determines whether a power failure has occurred depending on whether the power failure notice signal is ON (step S2450). In the other example 4, the power failure is monitored in the main processing, but the power failure processing may be executed when the power failure is detected by monitoring the power failure by the timer interrupt processing. For example, at least at the start and end of the timer interrupt, it is determined whether the power failure warning signal is ON, the period during which the power failure warning signal is continuously output is counted, and the count result becomes a predetermined value. It may be determined that there is a power outage. In the other example 4, since the timer interrupt process for the setting process and the timer interrupt process for the normal game process are separately provided, the power interruption may be monitored by any of the timer interrupt processes, and by both timer interrupt processes. You may monitor for power outages. Therefore, the power failure monitoring processing and the power failure processing are made into subroutines, and these subroutines (power failure monitoring processing and power failure processing) are executed in each of the two timer interrupt processing, so that the same program (code ) Does not need to be included in each timer interrupt process, and the size of the program can be reduced.

When the power outage notice signal is detected, the power-off processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed.

On the other hand, if the power failure notice signal is not ON, the power is being supplied normally, so the interrupt is set to disabled (step S2451), and the setting process shown in FIG. 224 is executed (step S2482). After that, the setting display process shown in FIG. 225 is executed (step S2483).

After that, it is determined whether the setting change/setting confirmation process is completed depending on whether the setting key 971 is returned to the OFF position (step S2484). Specifically, it is detected whether the setting key 971 has an edge from ON to OFF, or whether a predetermined period has passed since the setting key 971 changed from ON to OFF. If the operation of ending the setting change/setting confirmation processing is performed, the process proceeds to step S2454 to start the normal game. On the other hand, if the setting change/setting confirmation processing is not completed, the edge information of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is cleared (step S2485). By clearing the edge information, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being changed a plurality of times by one operation. This is because the first main loop process may be executed multiple times while the timer interrupt process that detects the edge of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is executed once, so the setting was changed once. This is because in the first main loop process executed later, the setting is not changed by using the same edge information as the previous one. The edge information of the setting key 971 may not be cleared, but only the edge information of the RAM clear switch 954 may be cleared. After that, the interrupt is set to permit (step S2453), the process returns to step S2450, and the first main loop process for the setting change process is repeatedly executed. The reason why interrupts are set to be disabled in the processing from S2482 to S2485 is to prevent the setting change processing and the setting confirmation processing from being interrupted by a timer interrupt.

In the first main loop processing for setting processing (steps S2450 to S2453), the edge information of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is continuously cleared, and when the normal game is started (execution of the second main loop processing). In the middle), the edge information of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is not referred to.

When it is determined in step S2484 that the setting change/setting confirmation process is completed, the second main loop process for normal game (steps S2457 to S2458) is executed. When executing the second main loop processing, first, the timer interrupt cycle time is set in the CTC1 for normal game (step S2454), the CTC0 interrupt is stopped, and the CTC1 interrupt is activated (step S2455). CTC1 is set to interrupt enable (step S2456).

After that, the power failure notice signal is acquired, and it is determined whether a power failure has occurred depending on whether the power failure notice signal is ON (step S2457). When the power outage notice signal is detected, the power-off processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed. On the other hand, if the power failure notice signal is not ON, the power is being supplied normally, so the random number update process 2 is executed (step S2458). The random number update process 2 may be the same as that described with reference to FIG. 195, and mainly updates random numbers other than the random numbers for determining the winning in the special lottery and the ordinary lottery. After that, returning to step S2457, the second main loop process for normal game is repeatedly executed. When it is detected that the setting key 971 is operated to ON during the normal game (after entering the second main loop), the main control MPU 1311 generates a command to that effect, and the peripheral control The substrate 1510 may give a notification effect to the display device. Since this notification effect is performed during the normal game, it is desirable that the mode does not hinder the progress of the normal game. For example, only a specific LED is lit and displayed, or in a narrow area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Characters or specific symbols may be displayed, or a specific character indicating that the setting key 971 is turned ON may be displayed in accordance with the progress of the game.

When a power failure advance notice signal is detected in steps S2450 and S2457, power-off processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed.

In the power-off process, a process of backing up data for returning to the state before the power outage is executed. Specifically, first, interruption is prohibited (step S2462). As a result, the timer interrupt processing described later is not performed. Further, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output port and stops the operation of the device controlled by the output from each port (step S2463). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is output to the solenoid/power failure clear/ACK output port. Note that not all output ports may be cleared, and for example, output ports for controlling solenoids and motors that consume a large amount of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, it is possible to reduce power consumption until the main-board-side power-off process is completed, and to reliably complete the main-board-side power-off process.

After that, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game area (step S2464), the processing at the time of power OFF is executed, and the processing necessary before the power is cut off for the work area outside the game area is executed (step S2465). ). The details of the power-off processing are as shown in FIG. 222. Then, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game area is restored (step S2466).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum of the work area in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 for determining whether or not the data stored in the work area to be backed up is normally held, The data is stored in a predetermined checksum storage area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2467). This checksum is used to judge whether the data backed up in the work area is normal. The target area for which the checksum is calculated is the work area in the game control area, which may be changed after the power is turned on and before the main processing on the main control side is executed. And the value of the setting status management area), the backup flag, and the value of the checksum area may be excluded.

Further, as the power failure flag, a value (5AH) indicating that the power-off processing has been normally executed is stored in the backup flag area (step S2468). This completes the storage of the game backup information. Finally, the RAM protect valid (write prohibited) and the set value for invalidating the prohibited area are written in the RAM protect register to prohibit writing to the main control RAM 1312 (step S2469), and wait until recovery from power failure ( infinite loop). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating a use area of the main control RAM 1312 and resetting the access control unit when it determines that an prohibited area other than the designated area is accessed. In this embodiment, the reset function by the access to the prohibited area is released and the entire area can be accessed. When an access is detected in the specified prohibited area by designating an unused area in the main control RAM 1312 as a prohibited area and setting the prohibited area in the RAM protect register as valid, the main control MPU 1311 determines It may be reset.

In the process described above, the process of clearing the output port (step S2463), the process of turning off the power (step S2465), calculating the checksum (step S2467), and setting the backup flag (step S2468) is executed in this order. However, the execution order of these four processes is not limited to the illustrated order, and may be another order.

In addition, in the other example 4, the main processing on the main control side monitors the occurrence of the power failure, but the timer interrupt processing may monitor the occurrence of the power failure and execute the power failure processing based on the monitoring result. For example, in each of the two main loops, check the power failure signal at least at the start and end, measure the period during which the power failure signal is continuously output, and when the measurement result reaches a predetermined value. It is good to detect the occurrence of a power failure. In the other example 4, since the timer interrupt process for the setting process and the timer interrupt process for the normal game process are separately provided, the power interruption may be monitored by any of the timer interrupt processes, and by both timer interrupt processes. You may monitor for power outages. Therefore, the power failure monitoring processing and the power failure processing are made into subroutines, and these subroutines (power failure monitoring processing and power failure processing) are executed in each of the two timer interrupt processing, so that the same program (code ) Does not need to be included in each timer interrupt process, and the size of the program can be reduced.

In the main control side main processing shown in FIG. 231, two main loops are provided corresponding to each of the timer interrupt processing for the setting change processing and the timer interrupt for the normal game, and always for the setting change processing once. There is an opportunity to execute the timer interrupt processing of. In addition, at this execution timing, the timer interrupt process for the setting change process may not be executed (for example, in the case of branching to YES in step S2454). By providing two main loops in this way, the process for calculating the base value is executed in the main loop for normal games (timer interrupt processing), and the unnecessary base value is calculated in the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing. The processing for calculating the base value can be switched so as not to execute the processing.

FIG. 232 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process for the setting change process executed by the main control MPU 1311. In another example 4, the setting change/setting confirmation process is repeatedly executed in the main loop for the setting process. For this reason, in the timer interrupt process for the setting change process in the other example 4, the setting change/setting confirmation process (steps S2477 to S2478) of the timer interrupt process for the setting change process in the other example 3 (FIG. 229) is deleted. It is a thing.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2470). The main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for calculation, one of which can be used as a register group of bank 0, and the other of which can be used as a register group of bank 1 for performing bank switching. Without being configured, the registers in both banks cannot be used. Register bank 0 is used in the main processing on the main control side, and register bank 1 is used in the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, the instruction to switch the bank to 1 is executed at the start of the timer interrupt processing, but it is not necessary to execute the instruction to switch the bank to 0 at the end of the timer interrupt processing. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the state of the bank in the flag register (for example, the register in which the Z flag and the C flag are set), and the flag register is saved in the stack area at the start of interrupt and Execution of an instruction returns from the stack area. Therefore, by executing the RET instruction, the bank flag of the register stored in the flag register also returns to its original state. When the configuration in which the bank state is not stored in the flag register is adopted, the bank switching instruction is executed at the end of the timer interrupt processing, and the bank is returned to bank 0.

Since the flag register also stores a flag for controlling whether or not to allow an interrupt, it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after setting interrupt permission. The flag for controlling the availability of interrupts is set to the interrupt disabled state after stacking the flag register at the start of the timer interrupt process. Therefore, the interrupt is not enabled unless the interrupt is permitted (EI instruction or the like) during the timer interrupt processing or the RETI instruction is executed.

Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. If the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, it is set to 0 (step S2471).

Next, switch input processing 1 is executed (step S2472). In the switch input processing 1, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, ON edges are created, and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312.

Since the switch input process 1 of step S2472 is a process related to the winning signal, in the timer interrupt process executed in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, even if the winning is detected, the payout of the prize ball, the special symbol, the normal The process related to the progress of the game such as the variable display of the symbols is not executed. In addition, although winning detection regarding the progress of the game is performed, detection regarding fraud such as a magnet and impact (vibration) is not executed. This is because the setting change operation and setting confirmation operation are performed by employees in the hall. In the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, fraud such as magnets and shocks (vibration) is not performed, and fraud caused by magnetism or vibration is prevented. This is because it is considered preferable not to detect.

Even in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, some fraud detection sensors (for example, radio wave sensors) may be detected in the switch input process 1 to monitor a particular type of fraud. In this way, it is possible to detect a fraud in which a person who intends to perform a fraudulent act (master Goto) forcibly activates the setting change mode by irradiating a radio wave.

Then, it is determined whether or not the value (00H) indicating the game start is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2473). In the timer interruption process for the setting change process, it is not necessary to judge the value of the game state management area. This is to deal with fraudulent acts that illegally shift to the setting change process. Further, it is determined whether the value (00H) indicating the game start is recorded in the setting state management area before the switch input processing 1 (step S2472), and the value indicating the game start is recorded in the setting state management area. If so, the process may proceed after the peripheral board command transmission process (step S2479).

If the value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the processing for changing and displaying the setting value (steps S2474 to S2476) is not executed, and the process proceeds to step S2479. When a value indicating the start of a game is recorded in the setting state management area, an abnormality notification command for notifying that abnormal timer interrupt processing is being executed may be generated. This is because when the value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the timer interruption process for the setting change process shown in FIG. 232 is not executed, and some abnormality has occurred. The mode of this abnormality notification may be a notification using a liquid crystal, a lamp or a sound such as a notification of a magnet, radio waves, vibration, etc., or a security signal may be output from the external terminal board 784. One or more of these notification modes may be adopted to notify by one or in combination.

On the other hand, if the value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, the specific output port is cleared (step S2474). For example, the signal cleared as the specific output port in step 2474 is the power failure clear signal. , A special winning opening, a solenoid signal such as an electric chute, and a response signal (ACK) when the payout control board 951 receives a command. After that, the LED common port is turned off (step S2475). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of timer interrupt processing, the time until the LED common signal is turned on, that is, the LED turn-off time is secured, and the ghost phenomenon in which the display before and after the display switching of the LED appears mixed To prevent LED flickering.

After that, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2476). Note that the processing of outputting the security signal may be executed in the main loop for the setting change processing of the main control side main processing shown in FIG. 231 as in the setting change/setting confirmation processing.

Further, the peripheral board command transmission process of outputting the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit is executed (step S2479). The transmission information storage area is a storage area for temporarily storing the generated transmission command. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read in step 2070 and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a transmission information storage area which is a multi-byte FIFO-format transmission buffer, and sequentially transmits the values stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral board command transmission process may be executed after the end of the process of S2480 or S2481 of the main process, instead of the timer interrupt process.

After that, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2480). Since the watchdog timer uses the simple clear mode, the watchdog timer is cleared by setting 1 word. After that, the bank of the register is switched by a return instruction (for example, RETI) (step S2481), and the process before the interruption is restored.

Unlike the other timer interrupt processing, the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing shown in FIG. 232 does not execute the random number update processing (R_ART_K). This is because it is not necessary to update the random number generated by software when the RAM is abnormal, but the random number update process may be executed.

[13. Pachinko machine equipped with light guide plate]
Next, an example of a pachinko machine equipped with a light guide plate will be described. In recent years, pachinko machines are equipped with a light guide plate that emits light by illumination on the front side of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and perform a special symbol variable display game together with the main liquid crystal display device 1600. In this type of pachinko machine, a complicated effect can be achieved by using a liquid crystal display device and a light guide plate to superimpose images, for example. Further, since the light guide plate is provided on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device, the light guide plate displays a stereoscopic effect together with the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device. In addition, there is a light guide plate capable of stereoscopic viewing using the parallax of the left and right eyes, and an effect with a greater stereoscopic effect is displayed.

However, the production using the light guide plate has become rustic, and it is necessary to improve the entertainment by new light production. Further, there is a light guide plate capable of displaying a plurality of patterns with one sheet, and it is desired to display more diverse patterns and to have a highly entertaining effect.

[13-1. Construction]
FIG. 233 is an exploded perspective view of the center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 of the game board 5 and the table production unit 2600, which are disassembled and seen from the front. FIG. 234 is a front view showing a state in which the first design is luminescently displayed in the front effect unit. FIG. 235 is a front view showing a state in which the second design is luminescently displayed in the front effect unit.

The front effect unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the center accessory 2500 so as to close the inside of the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500. The front effect unit 2600 is attached to the rear side of the center accessory 2500. The front production unit 2600 includes a transparent flat light guide plate 2610 that closes the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500, and a first pattern substrate 2611 and a second pattern substrate that are attached to the rear side of the center accessory 2500. 2612 and. A plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2613 capable of irradiating light to the right side surface of the light guide plate 2610 are mounted on the first pattern substrate 2611, and the second pattern substrate 2612 has light on the upper surface of the light guide plate 2610. A plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2614 capable of irradiating the light are mounted.

The first pattern substrate 2611 and the second pattern substrate 2612 are arranged perpendicular to the light guide plate 2610 so that the side surface of the light guide plate 2610 can be irradiated with light. Therefore, from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, only the side faces of the first design substrate 2611 and the second design substrate 2612 can be seen, and the first design substrate 2611 and the second design substrate 2612 are visible from the player side. It is getting hot and the appearance in the game area 5a is improved.

Although the light guide plate (front light guide plate) 2610 is described in this embodiment, another back light guide plate may be provided between the light guide plate 2610 and the liquid crystal display device 1600.

The light guide plate 2610 includes a first pattern 2621 (see FIG. 234) formed by an innumerable first concave/convex portion that reflects light from above toward the front side, and light from the lateral direction toward the front side. The second pattern 2622 (see FIG. 235) formed by the innumerable second reflection portions having the concave and convex shapes. In other words, when the front light production unit 2600 causes the light guide plate LEDs of the first pattern substrate 2611 to emit light 2613, the first pattern 2621 can be emitted and displayed on the light guide plate 2610, and the light guide plate LEDs 2614 of the second pattern substrate 2612 can be displayed. When the light is emitted, the second pattern 2622 is displayed on the light guide plate 2610. The plurality of LEDs 2613 and 2614 mounted on the first design substrate 2611 and the second design substrate 2612 are preferably full-color LEDs, and have a strong directivity for irradiating light in a narrow range (LED with lens). Is desirable. By using the full-color LED, the first pattern 2621 and the second pattern 2622 can be transferred onto the light guide plate 2610 with an arbitrary single color or a plurality of colors (for example, 7 rainbow colors).

On the light guide plate 2610, irregularities forming a plurality of first reflecting portions for reflecting the first pattern 2621 and irregularities forming a plurality of second reflecting portions for reflecting the second pattern 2622 are minutely formed. In the state where the light guide plate LED 2613 of the first pattern substrate 2611 and the light guide plate LED 2614 of the second pattern substrate 2612 are not emitting light, the light guide plate 2610 transmits light and is arranged on the rear side. The various ornaments of the unit 3000, the effect images displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the like can be visually recognized well. In the light guide plate 2610, even when the light guide plate LEDs 2613 and 2614 are in a light emitting state, a transparent region where the liquid crystal display device 1600 provided on the back side can be seen and the light irradiated to the light guide plate 2610 is not reflected but polished. The glass-shaped matted region, the lame region in which a reflection pattern that reflects transmitted light is formed regardless of the traveling direction of light in the light guide plate 2610, and the light emitting portion of the light guide plate LED 2613 ( That is, a moving area in which a reflection pattern is formed so that whether light is emitted changes depending on the light traveling direction in the light guide plate 2610 is provided.

As shown in FIG. 234, the first pattern 2621 becomes a part of the effect of the special symbol variable display game together with the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 as described later. The first pattern 2621 is composed of moving areas 2621a and 2621c, glitter areas 2621b and 2621d, and a mat area 2621e. The outside of the first pattern 2621 is a transparent area 2621f. In the moving areas 2621a and 2621c, a part of the light guide plate LED 2613 of the first pattern substrate 2611 is turned on, and the lighting area is switched, so that the moving area 2621a emits light or the moving area 2621c emits light. Therefore, by blinking the LED 2613 for the light guide plate, the size of the first pattern 2621 can be changed.

In the first pattern 2621 shown in FIG. 234, the moving area and the glitter area are arranged twice, but they may be repeated any number of times. By forming the first pattern 2621 by repeating the moving region and the glitter region a plurality of times, it is possible to represent a complicated movement by the first pattern 2621. In the first pattern 2621 shown in FIG. 234, the moving area and the glitter area are alternately repeated, but the characteristic (that is, the moving area emits light without sandwiching the glitter area between the moving areas). The moving regions having different light incident positions) may be arranged adjacent to each other.

By causing the LED 2613 for the light guide plate to emit light so that the emission color of the LED 2613 for the light guide plate changes, it is possible to change the color for each moving region 2621a and emit the light. Then, the light emission color of the LED 2613 for the light guide plate is sequentially changed (for example, red→orange→yellow→green→blue→indigo→purple→red, and the like is repeated) so that the pattern moves as the color changes. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 235, the second pattern 2622 is a pattern in which a plurality of light streaks extend obliquely downward. The second pattern 2622 is formed so that the obliquely extending lines of light correspond to the positions of the light guide plate LEDs 2614 mounted on the second pattern substrate 2612. In other words, when one LED 2614 for the light guide plate is made to emit light, the streak of light obliquely extending downward in the light guide plate 2610 is emitted from the upper side of the light guide plate 2610 as a starting point.

The second pattern 2622 becomes farther from the LED 2614 for the light guide plate as it goes downward in the light guide plate 2610. Therefore, the brightness of the streak of light becomes darker as it goes downward in the light guide plate 2610. As a result, when the second pattern 2622 is viewed from the front (player side), as the light guide plate 2610 is directed downward, the light streaks appear to extend rearward, and light is radiated three-dimensionally. As described above, the light-emission effect by the light guide plate 2610 can be enjoyed.

Further, it is preferable to arrange the reflecting portion so that stereoscopic viewing due to parallax between the left and right eyes is possible. For example, paying attention to one light streak constituting the second pattern 2622, the second reflecting portion that emits light for focusing the streak of light on the retina of the player is different between the left and right eyes of the light guide plate 2610. By arranging in the position, parallax between the left and right eyes of the player can be generated, and the second pattern with a depth can be shown.

As shown in FIG. 234, in the light guide plate 2610 of this embodiment, the first pattern 2621 projected by the irradiation of light from one direction is formed by the mat area 2621e that does not reflect the irradiated light and the traveling direction of the light. Instead, it is composed of lame regions 2621b and 2621d where reflection patterns for reflecting transmitted light are formed and moving regions 2621a, 2621c and 2622a where reflection patterns for reflecting light in a specific traveling direction are formed. , The first picture can be composed of a moving picture area (moving picture) that appears to move and a still picture area (static picture) that appears to be stationary.

In addition, one light guide plate 2610 can project the first pattern 2621 shown in FIG. 234 and the second pattern 2622 shown in FIG. 235 depending on the difference in the illumination direction. Therefore, light of a single color (for example, red of a single wavelength or white in which lights of a plurality of wavelengths are mixed) is emitted from the lateral direction, and light of a plurality of colors is emitted from above (for example, adjacent LED groups). (2614 emits light at different wavelengths), a single light guide plate 2610 can produce a rainbow-colored pattern (rainbow beam) shining in seven colors and a single-colored pattern.

In the light guide plate 2610 of the present embodiment, by moving light from the lateral direction, a stationary pattern in the mat area 2621e and the lame areas 2621b, 2621d of the first pattern 2621 and a moving pattern that appears to move in the moving areas 2621a, 2621c, 2622a Is reflected. In other words, the light guide plate production by both the still picture and the moving picture is performed by the first picture 2621 by irradiation of light from the lateral direction. In this case, the still picture by the first picture 2621 and the moving picture are displayed at the same time.

Unlike the above, the first pattern 2621 may be configured by a matte region and a glitter region, and the first pattern 2621 may not include the moving pattern. In this case, the light guide plate presentation is performed by the still picture by the first picture 2621 by the light irradiation from the lateral direction and the second picture 2622 by the light irradiation from the upper direction. In this case, the still picture by the first picture 2621 and the moving picture by the second picture 2622 can be displayed at different timings. That is, the moving picture may be shown after the still picture is shown, or the still picture may be shown after showing the moving picture. In this way, various effects can be performed by displaying the still picture and the moving picture at different timings. In particular, by displaying the rainbow pattern as the moving pattern and then displaying the specific character with the still pattern, it is possible to perform an effect such that the character comes down. On the other hand, by displaying the background with the still picture and then displaying the character with the moving picture, it is possible to perform an effect that the character moves at a specific place.

In the light guide plate 2610 of this embodiment, the first pattern 2621 and the second pattern 2622 may be arranged so as to overlap each other. When the light is emitted from the lateral direction and the upward direction, the reflection patterns of the two patterns are mixedly provided in the area where the two patterns are superposed on the light guide plate 2610, so that the two patterns can be recognized together. .. However, when the first pattern 2621 is a two-dimensional pattern and the second pattern 2622 is a three-dimensional pattern, stereoscopic viewing may be difficult in an area where two patterns are mixed. The reflection pattern of the first pattern 2621 is not provided, and a transmissive area 2621f is provided through which the back side (the liquid crystal display device 1600) can be seen, and when the pattern of the reflection pattern of the second pattern 2622 is projected, the second pattern 2622 is played. It is possible for a person to easily see a stereoscopic image.

In the light guide plate 2610 of the present embodiment, the first pattern 2621 and the second pattern 2622 may be arranged in different areas without overlapping. When the first pattern 2621 is a two-dimensional pattern and the second pattern 2622 is a three-dimensional pattern, stereoscopic viewing may be difficult in a region where two patterns are mixed. When the area in which the reflection pattern of the pattern 2621 is provided and the area in which the reflection pattern of the second pattern 2622 is provided are divided and the pattern based on the reflection pattern of the second pattern 2622 is projected, the second pattern is easily three-dimensionalized for the player. Can be seen.

[13-2. Light guide plate configuration]
Next, a specific configuration of the reflecting section will be described. FIG. 236 is a diagram showing the structure of the light guide plate 2610 (particularly, the arrangement of the reflecting portion).

As described above, in the light guide plate 2610, the transmissive area 2621f that the back side (the liquid crystal display device 1600) appears to be transmitted, the matted area 2621e that does not reflect the irradiated light, and the light traveling direction, Glitter areas 2621b and 2621d having reflection patterns for reflecting transmitted light and moving areas 2621a, 2621c, 2622a having reflection patterns for reflecting light in a specific traveling direction are provided.

FIG. 237 is a diagram showing a structure of the reflection section.

The reflection portion is formed of a recess provided on the back surface side of the light guide plate 2610, and the light traveling inside the light guide plate 2610 is reflected to the front surface side of the light guide plate 2610 by the reflection of light at the boundary surface (reflection surface 2651). Then, the pattern portion of the light guide plate 2610 is caused to emit light, and the player visually recognizes the pattern. Inside the light guide plate 2610, the light incident from the light guide plate LEDs 2614 travels inside the light guide plate 2610 with a certain spread (for example, ±30 degrees). The light streaks forming the second pattern 2622 are visible when the light traveling in the direction of the light streaks is reflected by the reflecting section 2650 described below.

In the reflecting portion of the moving area 2622a shown in FIG. 237(A), a plurality of reflecting portions 2650 are arranged along the streaks of light. The size of the reflecting portion 2650 is preferably several hundreds of micrometers to several millimeters, which is extremely smaller than the streak of light appearing on the light guide plate 2610, but is shown in a large size in the figure.

The reflecting portion 2650 includes a reflecting surface 2651 that reflects light, an inclined surface 2652 on the back side of the reflecting surface 2651, and a side surface 2653 formed by a curved surface. The reflection surface 2651 is arranged at an angle of about 45 degrees with respect to the surface of the light guide plate 2610, and the perpendicular of the reflection surface 2651 and the incident direction of the reflected light are about 45 degrees. Therefore, the light that travels inside the light guide plate 2610 and strikes the reflection surface 2651 of the reflection portion 2650 is reflected to the front surface side of the light guide plate 2610 as shown in FIG. 237(B).

Further, light traveling in a direction perpendicular to the streak of light appearing in the moving region 2622a, that is, light traveling along the reflecting surface 2651 and parallel to the reflecting surface 2651 does not hit the reflecting surface 2651 but is reflected by the reflecting portion 2650 and reflected by the light guide plate 2610. Does not emerge from the surface of. Similarly, the light that appears in the moving area 2622a and travels in a direction that has an angle (in particular, an acute angle) with the streaks of light hits the reflecting surface 2651, and the reflecting portion 2650 reflects only a small amount of light. Only weak light is emitted from the surface of the light plate 2610. For this reason, the light of a large reaching wavelength is visible to the player's eyes, and the pattern can be shown in the color of the light guide plate LED 2614 which emits light at a specific position.

At this time, the emitting direction of the reflected light may be slightly shifted from the vertical direction to the light guide plate 2610 to the left and right by slightly inclining the reflecting surface 2651. Since the light source that irradiates the light guide plate 2601 of this embodiment emits light having a strong directivity, the reflected light from the reflecting section 2650 also reaches the player as a beam of light having a directivity. Therefore, parallax between the left and right eyes of the player can be generated, and the second pattern with a depth can be shown. That is, since the reflection portion 2650 that reflects the light that reaches the right eye and the reflection portion 2650 that reflects the light that reaches the left eye are at different positions, there is a difference between the light that reaches the right eye and the light that reaches the left eye. There is no virtual intersection on the light guide plate 2610. That is, if the virtual intersection point of the light reaching the right eye and the light reaching the left eye is behind the light guide plate 2610, the pattern appears to be recessed, and the light reaching the right eye and the left eye are reached. If the virtual intersection with the light to be emitted is in front of the light guide plate 2610, the pattern can be seen in the front position.

The inclined surface 2652 provided on the opposite side of the reflection surface 2651 may be provided at an angle of approximately 45 degrees with respect to the surface of the light guide plate 2610 similarly to the reflection surface 2651, or light traveling inside the light guide plate 2610 may be provided. May be formed on the front side of the light guide plate 2610 at an angle that does not reflect (for example, perpendicular to the surface of the light guide plate 2610).

The side surface 2653 is processed into a curved surface. By processing the side surface 2653 into a curved surface instead of a flat surface, it is possible to prevent a pattern from being displayed by light coming from other than a specific direction without strongly reflecting the light incident from one direction.

The reflection portions 2660 of the glitter areas 2621b and 2621d shown in FIG. 238 are formed by spherical recesses provided on the back surface side of the light guide plate 2610, and travel in the light guide plate 2610 to move from a plurality of directions (that is, The light arriving at the reflecting portion 2660 is reflected by a plurality of paths and is emitted to the front surface side of the light guide plate 2610. Since the reflection part 2660 in the glitter area reflects light from the plurality of LEDs 2614 for the light guide plate, when each of the LEDs 2614 for the light guide plate blinks at different timing, the glitter area 2621b becomes glitter. When the LED 2614 for light guide plate emits light of different colors, the glitter area 2621b is mixed with a plurality of colors and shines. Further, when the LED 2614 for the light guide plate blinks in a different color, the glitter area 2621b is mixed with a plurality of colors and glitters.

It should be noted that the mat area 2621e is not provided with a reflecting portion and is processed into frosted glass irregular irregularities, and does not reflect light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 to the front side.

Up to this point, the light guide plate 2610 representing the first pattern and the second pattern has been described. Next, an embodiment of the light guide plate representing different patterns will be described. FIG. 239 is a diagram schematically showing the relationship between the LED and the reflecting portion in the light guide plate that constitutes the patterns shown in FIGS. 240 to 242.

The light guide plate 2610 shown in FIG. 239 is formed on the back surface thereof, reflects light that has entered from any of the plurality of specific light incident portions 2630 on the upper side surface of the light guide plate 2610, and emits the light to the front side of the light guide plate 2610. It has a plurality of minute reflecting portions 2670 that operate. The plurality of specific light incident portions 2630 of the light guide plate 2610 are for introducing light so that the light travels in the light guide plate 2610 from a plurality of positions. Although the plurality of specific light incident portions 2630 are illustrated as the first specific light incident portion 2630a, the second specific light incident portion 2630b, the third specific light incident portion 2630c, and the fourth specific light incident portion 2630d, The specific light incident portion 2630a to the seventh specific light incident portion are provided. This is to repeatedly provide seven specific light incident portions 2630 (LED group 2614) for a rainbow effect in which the light guide plate emits light in seven colors, and the number of the specific light incident portions may be determined according to the type of emission color. The first specific light input portion 2630a to the seventh specific light input portion (not shown) are repeated on the upper side surface of the light guide plate 2610 in the longitudinal direction (left and right direction in the drawing) from left to right (seventh specific light input portion). After that, they are arranged in the order of returning to the beginning and becoming the first specific light incident portion 2630a).

The reflecting portion 2670 extends and guides at a right angle to a straight line (a direction in which the light incident from the specific light incident portion 2630 travels in the light guide plate 2610) connected to the corresponding specific light incident portion 2630. It has a boundary surface that is inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the rear surface of the light plate 2610. The reflection portion 2670 is recessed in a pent roof-shaped triangle. The reflection portion 2670 reflects the light incident from the corresponding specific light incident portion 2630 and emits the light in a direction substantially perpendicular to the front surface of the light guide plate 2610. Further, the reflecting portion 2670 reflects the light incident from the non-corresponding specific light incident portion 2630 and emits the light in a direction inclined with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the light guide plate 2610.

As a result, as indicated by a broken line in FIG. 239, the light incident from the corresponding specific light input portion 2630 is reflected by the reflecting portion 2670 toward the front surface of the light guide plate 2610 (in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface). However, the reflecting portion 2670 is seen to emit light from the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1. On the other hand, as indicated by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 239, the light incident from the non-corresponding specific light entering portion 2630 is reflected by the reflecting portion 2670 in a direction other than the front front of the light guide plate 2610, and the pachinko machine 1 From the player seated in front of, it appears that the reflecting portion 2670 does not emit light.

In the present embodiment, the reflecting portion 2670 has a shape in which the reflecting portion 2670 is recessed in a triangle and extends in the direction perpendicular to the straight line connecting with the corresponding specific light entering portion 2630. However, it is not limited to the above and may be any one as long as it extends in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connecting with the corresponding specific light incident portion 2630.

The plurality of reflecting sections 2670 correspond to any of the plurality of specific light entering sections 2630, and the plurality of first reflecting sections 2670a and the second specific light entering section 2630b corresponding to the first specific light entering section 2630a. Corresponding to the plurality of second reflecting portions 2670b, the third specific light entering portion 2630c corresponding to the plurality of third reflecting portions 2670c, and the fourth specific light entering portion 2630d corresponding to the plurality of fourth reflecting portions. The unit 2670d and the like are included.

In addition, the light guide plate 2610 is capable of displaying a plurality of patterns 2623 that are capable of emitting and displaying in different modes by causing a specific reflection portion 2670 of the plurality of reflection portions 2670 to reflect light forward. The plurality of patterns 2623 include a pattern 2623a including a plurality of first reflecting portions 2670a, a pattern 2623b including a plurality of second reflecting portions 2670b, a pattern 2623c including a plurality of third reflecting portions 2670c, and a plurality of fourth reflecting portions. A pattern 2623d including the portion 2670d is included.

As shown in FIGS. 240 to 242, the patterns are arranged so as to sequentially and circulate from the center to the outside.

The second pattern substrate 2612 is in the form of a strip plate extending left and right, and the LEDs 2614 are mounted at positions corresponding to the specific light incident portions 2630. The plurality of LEDs 2614 includes a first LED group 2614a corresponding to the first specific light entering section 2630a, a second LED group 2614b corresponding to the second specific light entering section 2630b, and a third specific light entering section 2630c. The third LED group 2614c corresponding to, the fourth LED group 2614d corresponding to the fourth specific light entering section 2630d, and the fifth LED group corresponding to the fifth specific light entering section (not shown). (Not shown), a sixth LED group (not shown) corresponding to the sixth specific light entering section (not shown), and a seventh LED group corresponding to the seventh specific light entering section (not shown). (Not shown). In FIG. 239, the first LED group 2614a to the fourth LED group 2614d are shown, and the fifth LED group to the seventh LED group are omitted. In each LED group, a plurality of LEDs 2614 arranged in a row in the longitudinal direction (left and right direction in the figure) on the second pattern substrate 2612 are divided in the left and right direction of the second pattern substrate 2612, and the LEDs are sequentially arranged from left to right. Repeatedly (in the order of returning to the beginning after the seventh LED group to become the first LED group 2614a). In this embodiment, each LED group has six LEDs 2614.

Next, the light emission effect by the front effect unit 2600 of the present embodiment will be described in detail. When the first LED group 2614a of the second pattern substrate 2612 is caused to emit light, light is incident from the first specific light entering portion 2630a into the light guide plate 2610, and is reflected by the first reflecting portion 2670a toward the front surface of the light guide plate 2610. Since the other second reflection portion 2670b, the third reflection portion 2670c, the fourth reflection portion 2670d, and the like reflect to other than the front, only the first reflection portion 2670a appears to be shining to the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. This means that the pattern composed of the plurality of first reflecting portions 2670a can emit light.

When the second LED group 2614b of the second pattern substrate 2612 is caused to emit light, light is incident on the inside of the light guide plate 2610 from the second specific light incident portion 2630b, and reflected on the front surface of the light guide plate 2610 at the second reflection portion 2670b, Since the other first reflecting portion 2670a, the third reflecting portion 2670c, the fourth reflecting portion 2670d, etc. reflect to other than the front, only the second reflecting portion 2670b appears to the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to shine. This means that it is possible to cause the pattern composed of the plurality of second reflecting portions 2670b to emit light.

When the third LED group 2614c of the second pattern substrate 2612 is caused to emit light, light is incident on the inside of the light guide plate 2610 from the third specific light incident part 2630c, and reflected on the front surface of the light guide plate 2610 at the third reflection part 2670c. Since the other first reflecting portion 2670a, the second reflecting portion 2670b, the fourth reflecting portion 2670d, etc. reflect to other than the front, only the third reflecting portion 2670c appears to be visible to the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1. This means that the pattern composed of the plurality of third reflecting portions 2670c can emit light.

When the fourth LED group 2614d of the second pattern substrate 2612 is caused to emit light, light is incident from the fourth specific light entering portion 2630d into the light guide plate 2610, and reflected by the fourth reflecting portion 2670d toward the front surface of the light guide plate 2610. Since the other first reflecting portion 2670a, the second reflecting portion 2670b, the third reflecting portion 2670c, etc. reflect to other than the front, only the fourth reflecting portion 2670d appears to be visible to the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. This means that the pattern composed of the plurality of fourth reflecting portions 2670d can emit light.

Similarly, when each of the fifth LED group to the seventh LED group 2614 is caused to emit light, the light is incident from the corresponding specific light entering portion 2630 into the light guide plate 2610, and the corresponding reflecting portion 2670 causes the light guide plate 2610 to move. It is reflected to the front and is reflected to other than the front at the other reflectors 2670, and only the corresponding reflector 2670 appears to be shining to the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1, and is configured from the corresponding reflector 2670. It is possible to make the picture that is displayed emit light.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the plurality of patterns 2623 can be made to emit light by switching the LED groups to make them emit light, and the plurality of patterns can be made to emit light in sequence to create a moving animation. Such a luminous effect can be performed. In particular, as shown in FIG. 240, in the light guide plate 2610 on which similar patterns are superimposed, a moving effect of causing a pattern to emit light like an animation in which there is a movement that spreads from the center to the outside or contracts from the outside to the center. You can

FIG. 240 is a diagram showing an example of a picture displayed in the moving effect by the light guide plate. In the example shown in FIG. 240, the moving effect in which the size of the pattern changes is performed by switching the position of the LED group that emits light over time.

As described above, the light guide plate 2610 is provided with the first specific light incident portion 2630a to the seventh specific light incident portion 2630g, and from the first LED group 2614a corresponding to each specific light incident portion 2630a to 2630g. A seventh LED group 2614g is arranged. Note that, in FIG. 240, the position corresponding to each specific light incident part is represented by the alphabet of the last character of the code.

As shown in FIG. 240A, when the sixth LED group 2614f and the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on and light is incident from the sixth specific light incident portion 2630f and the seventh specific light incident portion 2630g, the light guide plate 2610 is irradiated. The incident light is reflected by the sixth reflection portion 2670f and the seventh reflection portion 2670g, and the pattern in which the sixth reflection portion 2670f and the seventh reflection portion 2670g are arranged emits light, which can be recognized by the player.

After that, when the fifth LED group 2614e and the sixth LED group 2614f are turned on and light is incident from the fifth specific light incident portion 2630e and the sixth specific light incident portion 2630f, the light incident on the light guide plate 2610 is reflected by the fifth reflecting portion. 2670e and the 6th reflection part 2670f reflect, the pattern in which the 5th reflection part 2670e and the 6th reflection part 2670f were arrange|positioned light-emit, and a player can recognize.

Further, as shown in FIG. 240(B), when the fourth LED group 2614d and the fifth LED group 2614e are turned on and light is incident from the fourth specific light incident portion 2630d and the fifth specific light incident portion 2630e, the light guide plate The light incident on 2610 is reflected by the fourth reflecting portion 2670d and the fifth reflecting portion 2670e, and the pattern in which the fourth reflecting portion 2670d and the fifth reflecting portion 2670e are arranged emits light, which can be recognized by the player.

After that, when the third LED group 2614c and the fourth LED group 2614d are turned on and light is incident from the third specific light incident portion 2630c and the fourth specific light incident portion 2630d, the light incident on the light guide plate 2610 is converted into the third reflection portion. 2670c and the 4th reflection part 2670d reflect, the pattern in which the 3rd reflection part 2670cd and the 4th reflection part 2670d were arrange|positioned light-emit, and a player can recognize.

Further, as shown in FIG. 240(C), when the second LED group 2614b and the third LED group 2614c are turned on and light is incident from the second specific light entering section 2630b and the third specific light entering section 2630c, the light guide plate The light incident on 2610 is reflected by the second reflecting portion 2670b and the third reflecting portion 2670c, and the pattern in which the second reflecting portion 2670b and the third reflecting portion 2670c are arranged emits light, which can be recognized by the player.

In this way, by changing the position without changing the number of LED groups (LED elements) that emit light, it is possible to change the size of the pattern and to make a moving effect in which the pattern emits light so as to move from the center to the outside. At this time, the LED groups may emit light of a single color or may emit light of different colors in each group (that is, depending on the position).

FIG. 241 is a diagram showing an example of a picture displayed in another moving effect by the light guide plate. In the example shown in FIG. 241, a moving effect in which the size of the design changes is performed by changing the number of LED groups that emit light over time.

As described above, the light guide plate 2610 is provided with the first specific light incident portion 2630a to the seventh specific light incident portion 2630g, and from the first LED group 2614a corresponding to each specific light incident portion 2630a to 2630g. A seventh LED group 2614g is arranged. Note that, in FIG. 241, the position corresponding to each specific light incident portion is represented by the alphabet of the last character of the code.

As shown in FIG. 241(A), the second LED group 2614b to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the light incident from the second specific light entering section 2630b to the seventh specific light entering section 2630g is reflected by the second reflecting section 2670b. -The 7th reflection part 2670g reflects, the pattern in which the 2nd reflection part 2670b-the 7th reflection part 2670g is arrange|positioned light-emits, and a player can recognize.

After that, the third LED group 2614c to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the light incident from the third specific light entering section 2630c to the seventh specific light entering section 2630g is reflected by the third reflecting section 2670c to the seventh reflecting section 2670g. Then, the pattern in which the third reflecting portion 2670c to the seventh reflecting portion 2670g are arranged emits light, which can be recognized by the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 241(B), the fourth LED group 2614d to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the light incident from the fourth specific light incident section 2630d to the seventh specific light incident section 2630g is subjected to the fourth reflection. The portion 2670d to the seventh reflection portion 2670g are reflected, and the pattern in which the fourth reflection portion 2670d to the seventh reflection portion 2670g are arranged emits light, which can be recognized by the player.

After that, the fifth LED group 2614e to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the light incident from the fifth specific light entering section 2630e to the seventh specific light entering section 2630g is reflected by the fifth reflecting section 2670e to the seventh reflecting section 2670g. Then, the pattern in which the fifth reflecting portion 2670e to the seventh reflecting portion 2670g are arranged emits light and can be recognized by the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 241(C), the sixth LED group 2614f to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the light incident from the sixth specific light incident section 2630f to the seventh specific light incident section 2630g is subjected to the sixth reflection. The portion 2670f to the seventh reflecting portion 2670g are reflected, and the pattern in which the sixth reflecting portion 2670f to the seventh reflecting portion 2670g are arranged emits light, which can be recognized by the player.

In this way, by changing the number of LED groups (LED elements) that emit light, it is possible to change the size (light emission range) of the pattern and to make the pattern emit light so as to shrink. At this time, the LED groups may emit light of a single color or may emit light of different colors in each group (that is, depending on the position).

FIG. 242 is a diagram showing an example of a picture displayed in another moving effect by the light guide plate. In the example shown in FIG. 242, the moving effect in which the color of the pattern changes is performed by changing the emission color of the LED group with the passage of time.

As described above, the light guide plate 2610 is provided with the first specific light incident portion 2630a to the seventh specific light incident portion 2630g, and from the first LED group 2614a corresponding to each specific light incident portion 2630a to 2630g. A seventh LED group 2614g is arranged. The first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g are composed of full-color LEDs and can emit light in multiple colors. Note that, in FIG. 242, the position corresponding to each specific light incident part is represented by the alphabet of the last character of the code.

As shown in FIG. 242(A), the first LED group 2614a is turned on in red, the red light incident from the first specific light entering section 2630a is reflected by the first reflecting section 2670a, and the first reflecting section 2670a is arranged. The displayed pattern emits red light, and the player recognizes the red pattern. Similarly, the second LED group 2614b is lit in orange, and the orange light incident from the second specific light entrance part 2630b is reflected by the second reflecting part 2670b to emit an orange pattern. In addition, the third LED group 2614c is turned on in yellow, and the yellow light incident from the third specific light entrance section 2630c is reflected by the third reflection section 2670c to emit a yellow pattern. In addition, the fourth LED group 2614d lights up in green, and the green light incident from the fourth specific light entrance portion 2630d is reflected by the fourth reflection portion 2670d and the pattern emits green light. Further, the fifth LED group 2614e lights up in blue, and the blue light incident from the fifth specific light entrance section 2630e is reflected by the fifth reflection section 2670e to emit a blue pattern. Further, the sixth LED group 2614f is turned on in indigo color, and the indigo light incident from the sixth specific light entering section 2630f is reflected by the sixth reflecting section 2670f to emit the indigo design. Further, the seventh LED group 2614g is turned on in purple, and the purple light incident from the seventh specific light entrance portion 2630g is reflected by the seventh reflection portion 2670g to emit light in purple.

After that, as shown in FIG. 242(B), the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g are lit in purple, red, orange, yellow, green, blue, and indigo, respectively, and the color of the pattern changes. When time further passes, as shown in FIG. 242(C), the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g are lit in indigo, purple, red, orange, yellow, green, and blue, respectively, and the pattern The color changes.

In this way, the emission color of the LEDs forming the LED group is changed, and the color of the pattern is changed sequentially (for example, every 0.5 seconds). Since the human eyes pay attention to the pattern that emits light of the same color, it is possible to create a moving effect in which the pattern emits light so that it moves inward.

FIG. 243 is a diagram showing the arrangement of patterns on the light guide plate 2610 and the arrangement of the LED groups 2614.

In the present embodiment, the plurality of LED groups 2614 correspond to the reflecting portion 2670 forming one pattern, and the plurality of LED groups 2614 emit light in a predetermined pattern to display one pattern. Specifically, it is controlled so that the light emitting pattern of the LED group 2614 (specific light entering unit 2630) is repeated using seven LED groups as a repeating unit. Further, the LED emits light with directivity and is configured to illuminate a predetermined angle range from the front of the LED.

That is, as shown in FIG. 243, the illumination range of the LEDs that emit light in the same pattern (which is the light emission source of the light forming one pattern) is the range shown by the fan shape in the figure, and the second pattern substrate 2612 has In the vicinity, there is a range where the light from the LED does not reach.

Therefore, the pattern is provided at a position separated from the end of the light guide plate 2610 where the light is incident by a predetermined distance. For example, when the illumination range of the LED is 60 degrees (full angle at half maximum θ=±30 degrees), the range where the light from the LED does not reach is an equilateral triangle, so the length of the repeating unit of the LED group (with the same pattern The pattern is provided so as to be spaced from the end of the light guide plate 2610 by a length 0.87 times the interval between the LEDs that emit light) α.

As a generalization, letting the length α of the repeating unit of the LED group, the illumination angle of the LED be θ, and the distance separating the pattern from the end of the light guide plate 2610 be L, the following relationships are established.
L=tan θ×α/2

In this way, when the moving picture that appears to move is composed of light from a plurality of LED groups, the moving picture must be arranged at a position separated from the end of the light guide plate 2610 by a predetermined distance. That is, the moving picture area in which a moving picture is projected is smaller than the still picture area in which a stationary picture is projected. When the light guide plate 2610 has the same size as the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1600, a moving effect by the light guide plate 2610 can be performed in an area smaller than the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1600. Therefore, in the production of the variable display game, it is possible to make the player recognize the progress of the variable display game without hindering the visual recognition of the special symbol normally displayed near the end of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1600. .. In addition, by performing the moving effect in the central portion of the liquid crystal display device 1600 that the player gazes at, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the player's excitement due to the moving effect.

In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the center accessory 2500 light guide plate 2610 of the front unit 2000 is attached has been described, but in this case, the inner frame of the center accessory 2500 (from the player located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1) In the visible window portion), a region within the predetermined distance from the end of the light guide plate 2610 in which the moving effect is impossible is created, and the region in which the moving effect is impossible can be visually recognized by the player. In addition, the area in which the moving effect can be performed is narrowed, and the effect of the effect is reduced.

Therefore, unlike the above, the light guide plate 2610 may be attached to the back unit 3000. In this case, since the light guide plate 2610 can be made larger than the inner frame of the center role object 2500, the area where the moving effect cannot be performed is hidden by the center role object 2500, and the area where the moving effect cannot be performed is the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. It is arranged on the outer side of, and the moving effect is possible in all (or most of) the inner frame of the center accessory 2500. That is, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the end portion of the light guide plate 2610 is located outside the periphery of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the outer periphery of the center accessory 2500.

Since the back unit 3000 includes various ornaments (decoration unit 3050, movable effect units 3100, 3200, 3300, 3400, 3500, etc.), the end of the light guide plate 2610 should be positioned behind these ornaments. By disposing the light guide plate 2610, the light emitting device (first pattern substrate 2611, second pattern substrate 2612) can be positioned behind the ornament. As a result, the board serving as the light source can be arranged at a position where the player cannot see, and the decorativeness can be secured.

Further, the LEDs for the light guide plate 2610 (LEDs 2613 and 2614 for the light guide plate) and the LEDs for causing the decorative body to emit light may be mounted on one substrate.

As described above, when the light guide plate 2610 is attached to the back unit 3000, the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 can be made into an area where the moving effect can be produced, and the player is made aware of the unnaturalness due to the limitation of the moving effect area. You can avoid it.

FIG. 244 is a diagram showing an example of a picture displayed in another moving effect by the light guide plate. In the example shown in FIG. 244, the moving effect in which the color of the pattern changes is performed by changing the emission color of the LED group with the passage of time.

As described above, the light guide plate 2610 is provided with the first specific light incident part 2630a to the seventh specific light incident part 2630g, and the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED corresponding to each specific light incident part. Group 2614g is located. The first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g are composed of full-color LEDs and can emit light in multiple colors. In FIG. 244, the position corresponding to each specific light incident part is represented by the alphabet of the last character of the code.

As shown in the figure, the first LED group 2614a is turned on in red, the red light incident from the first specific light entrance part 2630a is reflected by the first reflection part 2670a, and the pattern in which the first reflection part 2670a is arranged is red. The player recognizes the red pattern. Similarly, the second LED group 2614b is lit in orange, and the orange light incident from the second specific light entering part 2630b is reflected by the second reflecting part 2670b, so that the pattern emits orange. Further, the third LED group 2614c is turned on in yellow, and the yellow light incident from the third specific light entering section 2630c is reflected by the third reflecting section 2670c, so that the pattern emits yellow. Further, the fourth LED group 2614d lights up in green, and the green light incident from the fourth specific light entrance portion 2630d is reflected by the fourth reflection portion 2670d, so that the pattern emits green light. Further, the fifth LED group 2614e lights up in blue, and the blue light incident from the fifth specific light entrance part 2630e is reflected by the fifth reflection part 2670e, so that the design emits blue light. Further, the sixth LED group 2614f lights in indigo color, and the indigo color light incident from the sixth specific light entering section 2630f is reflected by the sixth reflecting section 2670f, so that the design emits indigo color. Further, the seventh LED group 2614g is turned on in purple, and the purple light incident from the seventh specific light entrance portion 2630g is reflected by the seventh reflection portion 2670g to emit light in purple.

After that, each of the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g lights up in purple, red, orange, yellow, green, blue, and indigo, and the color of the pattern changes. When the time further passes, each of the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g lights up indigo, purple, red, orange, yellow, green, and blue, and the color of the pattern changes.

In this way, the emission color of the LEDs forming the LED group is changed, and the color of the pattern is changed sequentially (for example, every 0.5 seconds). Since the human eyes pay attention to the pattern that emits light of the same color, it is possible to create a moving effect in which the pattern emits light so that the lines of light of the seven colors flow.

Although detailed description is omitted, even in the light guide plate 2610 having a pattern in which two light streaks intersect each other as shown in FIG. 235, by changing the emission color of each LED group 2614 in the same manner as described with reference to FIG. The color of the pattern (light streaks) changes, and it is possible to create a moving effect in which the light is emitted so that the seven color light streaks flow. Further, by using the left and right parallax, the streak of light is made to appear deeper or closer to the front side as the light source is separated from the light source, so that a stereoscopic pattern can be displayed.

Next, the stereoscopic pattern and the planar pattern by the light guide plate 2610 will be described.

FIG. 245 is a diagram illustrating a state in which a pattern viewed in a plan view is displayed by the light guide plate 2610.

As shown in FIG. 245(B), since the reflecting surface of the reflecting portion 2660 provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610 is a curved surface, light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 is reflected in a plurality of directions. , Reaches the player's right eye 10R and left eye 10L. In addition, the reflection unit 2660 reflects light that travels in the light guide plate 2610, reaches the reflection unit 2660 from a plurality of directions (that is, in a plurality of paths), and emits the light to the front surface side of the light guide plate 2610. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 245(A), a parallax between the left and right eyes does not occur in the pattern 2621 formed by the reflecting portion 2660, so that the player places the pattern 2621 in the planar pattern at the position of the light guide plate 2610. Will be seen as.

FIG. 246 is a diagram showing a state in which a pattern viewed in plan is displayed by the light guide plate 2610.

As shown in FIG. 246(B), the reflecting portion 2650L provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610 reflects the light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 toward the player's left eye 10L, and the reflecting portion 2650R is The light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 is reflected toward the right eye 10R of the player. However, since the reflecting portion 2650L and the reflecting portion 2650R are arranged close to each other (for example, 1 mm or less), as shown in FIG. 246(A), the left and right sides of the pattern 2621 formed by the reflecting portions 2650L and 2650R. It can be said that the parallax of the eyes is small, and the pattern for the left eye formed by the reflecting portion 2650L and the pattern for the right eye formed by the reflecting portion 2650R are arranged at the same position. Therefore, the player sees the pattern 2621 as a planar pattern at the position of the light guide plate 2610.

FIG. 247 is a diagram showing how a stereoscopically visible pattern is displayed by the light guide plate 2610.

As shown in FIG. 247(B), the reflecting surface 2651 of the reflecting portion 2650L provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610 is set to an angle that reflects the light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 toward the player's left eye 10L. The reflecting surface 2651 of the reflecting portion 2650R is set to an angle that reflects the light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 toward the player's right eye 10R. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 247(A), on the light guide plate 2610, the left eye image 2621L and the right eye image 2621R are displaced by the distance between the reflecting portions 2650L and 2650R, and the player can see the left and right eyes. A right-eye image and a left-eye image having parallax are recognized. In the state shown in FIG. 247, the light reaching the left eye 10L and the light reaching the right eye 10R of the player intersect at a point 2621C on the back surface side of the light guide plate 2610. Therefore, the player sees the pattern 2621 composed of the reflecting portions 2650L and R as a three-dimensional pattern at the rear position of the light guide plate 2610.

FIG. 248 is a diagram illustrating a manner in which a stereoscopically visible pattern is displayed by the light guide plate 2610.

As shown in FIG. 248(B), the reflecting surface 2651 of the reflecting portion 2650L provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610 is set to an angle that reflects the light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 toward the player's left eye 10L. The reflecting surface 2651 of the reflecting portion 2650R is set to an angle that reflects the light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 toward the player's right eye 10R. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 248(A), on the light guide plate 2610, the left eye image 2621L and the right eye image 2621R are displaced by the distance between the reflection portions 2650L and 2650R, and the player can see the left and right eyes. A right-eye image and a left-eye image having parallax are recognized. In the state shown in FIG. 248, the light reaching the left eye 10L and the light reaching the right eye 10R of the player intersect at a point 2621C on the surface side of the light guide plate 2610. Therefore, the player sees the pattern 2621 composed of the reflecting portions 2650L and R as a three-dimensional pattern in front of the light guide plate 2610.

As described above, according to the front production unit 2600, a plurality of different patterns can be made to emit light by one light guide plate 2610. Therefore, it is necessary to provide a plurality of light guide plates for each pattern for animation display and the like. In addition, the front-back direction thickness of the front production unit 2600 can be made as thin as possible. Further, since the light guide plate 2610 is attached to the center accessory 2500, the light guide plate 2610 can be positioned as close as possible to the player side, and it is easy to secure a large space behind the light guide plate 2610. it can. Therefore, since a large space can be secured on the rear side of the light guide plate 2610, the lower movable effect unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, etc. can be arranged on the rear side of the light guide plate 2610. This makes it possible to make the pachinko machine 1 having a good appearance in the game area 5a and having a high appealing power to the player, and in addition to the effect by the luminous display of the pattern 2623, the lower movable effect unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, and By performing the movable effect by the upper front movable effect unit 3300 or the like, it is possible to provide a variety of effects to the player and entertain the player, and suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, by disposing the light guide plate 2610 in front of the effect unit, the ornament, and the effect display device 1600, a plurality of semitransparent patterns due to the light emission of the plurality of reflecting portions 2670 emerge to show a luminous decoration that moves like an animation. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to a player who is accustomed to the light emitting effect using the conventional light guide plate, to amaze and entertain the player, and to do something good for the player. It is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation in the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, since only the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 can see the light emitting display of the picture by the light guide plate 2610 well, the light emitting display of the picture 2623 can be seen from other players far from the front. Becomes difficult to see, and it is possible to make it difficult for other players to notice that the performance using the light guide plate 2610 is being performed, and it is possible to prevent other players from paying attention. The player can play the game without hesitation, entertaining the game and suppressing a decrease in interest.

Further, since the light guide plate 2610 is attached in the frame of the center accessory 2500 in which the center accessory 2500 is attached in the center of the front view game area 5a, the patterns 2621 and 2622 are luminescently displayed by the LEDs 2613 and 2614. Also, the pattern displayed in light emission does not interfere with the game in the game area 5a, and the area where the game is actually played can be visually recognized from the player side in a good state, making it difficult to see the game. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust and to enjoy the game in a good state.

In addition, since the light guide plate 2610 is attached to the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, the periphery of the light guide plate 2610 (the first pattern substrate) can be formed by aligning the periphery of the light guide plate 2610 with the frame of the center accessory 2500. 2611, the second pattern substrate 2612) can be made hard to see from the player side, and it is difficult for the player to notice the existence of the light guide plate 2610. Therefore, the light guide plate 2610 is present when the pattern is luminescently displayed. The player can be surprised by giving a strong impact to the player, which is thought not to be present, and the light guide plate 2610 can be used to entertain the luminous display of a plurality of patterns, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

Further, since the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying the effect image is provided behind the light guide plate 2610, the light emission display of a plurality of different patterns by the light guide plate 2610 and the effect image by the effect display device 1600 are combined. Since the effects can be shown to the player, various effects can be achieved by appropriately combining them, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and also to entertain the player by the effects of the light guide plate 2610 and the effect display device 1600. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

Further, since the effect display device 1600 is arranged behind the light guide plate 2610, the distance from the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 to the light guide plate 2610 and the distance to the effect display device 1600 are different. Therefore, it is possible to display the effect image related to the plurality of patterns 2623 that are light-emitted and displayed on the light guide plate 2610, and to give the pattern 2623 that is light-emitted and displayed a sense of depth and stereoscopic effect. It is possible to show the player an effect (display effect) capable of strongly attracting interest, which can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

The LEDs 2613 and 2614 may be single color LEDs or full color LEDs. Further, the number of the specific light entering portions, the reflecting portions, and the LED groups can be appropriately selected according to the number, shape, and size of the patterns.

[13-3. Example of production]
Next, an example of effect display using the light guide plate in the special symbol variable display game will be described. 249 to 254 are diagrams showing an example of an effect using the light guide plate.

In the effect display shown in FIG. 249, the liquid crystal display device 1600 displays a moving effect of causing the light guide plate 2610 to emit light so that a predetermined pattern is reflected on the light guide plate 2610 and moving the image toward the predetermined image. This effect display may be executed in a specific special symbol variable display game (for example, as a specific reach effect or notice effect).

Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 249A, nothing is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600, and the entire screen is blackened to black. This blackout causes the player to gaze at the liquid crystal display device 1600.

Then, as shown in FIG. 249(B), the LED 2613 mounted on the first pattern substrate 2611 is turned on, and the first pattern 2621 is reflected on the light guide plate 2610. This causes the player to gaze at the first pattern 2621. Then, as shown in FIG. 249(C), a moving effect is displayed in which an image moving toward the first pattern 2621 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600. Further, as shown in FIG. 249(D), in the moving effect, the image 1611 may be moved from a plurality of positions (that is, a plurality of directions) of the liquid crystal display device 1600 toward the first pattern 2621. The image 1611 displayed by moving to the liquid crystal display device 1600 may be the same color as the first pattern 2621 or a different color. Further, the image 1611 displayed by moving to the liquid crystal display device 1600 may have the same shape (similar shape) as the first pattern 2621 as shown in FIG. 249, or may have a different shape as shown in FIG. 250. In addition, the image 1611 and the first pattern 2621 that are displayed after being moved have the same character image (the pose and face may be the same or different) or the same character (for example, the name of the character) and have different fonts and colors. It may be the same or different. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the light guide plate 2610 is arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1600, the back of the first pattern 2621 shown on the light guide plate 2610 as shown in FIG. 249(D). Also, an image may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600.

After that, as illustrated in FIG. 249E, in the moving effect, the number of images 1611 moving toward the first pattern 2621 and the ratio of the moving image 1611 to the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1600 are elapsed with time. It may be changed according to.

The mode of the first pattern 2621 displayed on the light guide plate 2610 may be changed during the moving effect. For example, as shown in FIG. 251, the color and brightness of the first pattern 2621 displayed on the light guide plate 2610 may be changed during the moving effect. The color and brightness of the first pattern 2621 may be changed continuously (gradually) or stepwise (stepwise).

Further, as shown in FIG. 252, the size of the first pattern 2621 displayed on the light guide plate 2610 may be changed during the moving effect. In this case, it is advisable to provide a plurality of light guide plates and use another light guide plate to project a pattern having a different size. Further, since the light guide plate 2610 can project a plurality of different patterns by irradiating light from different directions, a direction different from the irradiation direction (lateral direction) for projecting the first pattern 2621 having an initial size (for example, , The first pattern 2621 having a different size (large or small) may be projected by irradiating light from an oblique direction.

After performing the moving effect for a predetermined time, as shown in FIG. 249(F), the LED 2613 mounted on the first pattern substrate 2611 is turned off, and the first pattern 2621 is erased from the light guide plate 2610. Furthermore, the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 is also erased, and the entire screen is blackened (blacked out). By this blackout, the player is gazing at the liquid crystal display device 1600, and a space for improving the expectation for the next effect is created.

After that, as shown in FIG. 249(G), an image 1612 different from the first pattern 2621 or the image that is moved and displayed (for example, a character with high reliability of winning) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600. Further, as shown in FIG. 249(H), the size of the character image 1612 is changed. For example, when the size of the character image 1612 is increased, the player's expectation of hitting is increased, but when the size of the character image 1612 is decreased, the expectation of the player's hitting is decreased. The color and expression of the character image 1612 may be changed. Further, the character image 1612 may be displayed in an area overlapping the display area of the first pattern 2621. Further, together with the display of the character image 1612, the light guide plate 2610 may be illuminated from above to display a rainbow pattern (see FIG. 235).

The character image may be displayed on the light guide plate 2610. As described above, the light guide plate 2610 can project a plurality of different patterns by irradiating light from different directions. Therefore, the direction (lateral direction) different from the irradiation direction for projecting the first pattern 2621 (for example, an oblique direction). A character image may be displayed by irradiating light from the direction. In addition, a plurality of light guide plates may be provided, and the character image may be projected on the other light guide plates. If a light guide plate provided in addition to the light guide plate 2610 is used to display character images of different sizes and expressions, unlike the flat liquid crystal display device 1600, it is possible to display effects with a sense of depth.

In the above-described movement effect in which the image moves toward the first pattern 2621, the image on the liquid crystal display device 1600 moves after the first pattern 2621 is displayed, but the image on the liquid crystal display device 1600 moves. After starting, the first pattern 2621 may be displayed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 253, after the blackout (FIG. 253(A)), as shown in FIG. 253(B), before the first pattern 2621 is projected, the first pattern 2621 is The movement effect of displaying the image moving toward the displayed position on the liquid crystal display device 1600 is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 253(C), the LED 2613 mounted on the first pattern substrate 2611 is turned on, and the first pattern 2621 is reflected on the light guide plate 2610. After that, as shown in FIG. 253(D), the moving effect in which the image moves toward the first pattern 2621 is continued.

In this way, the time for which the first pattern 2621 is displayed (time for the light guide plate effect) and the effect time for moving the image 1611 (time for the moving image to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600) are the first pattern 2621. The light guide plate effect in which is reflected may start before or after the effect in which the image 1611 moves. Further, the time for the light guide plate effect in which the first pattern 2621 is displayed may be longer or shorter than the effect time in which the image 1611 moves.

Further, as shown in FIG. 254, the effect of the variable display game may be performed by switching between a moving picture in which the picture where the images are collected appears to move and a still picture in which the picture does not appear to move.

In the light guide plate effect shown in FIG. 254, when the moving picture appears, the expectation for the big hit is high, and when only the still picture appears, the expectation for the big hit is low. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 254(A), a still picture 2621 is displayed on the light guide plate 2610 as the variable display game progresses, and as shown in FIG. 254(B), the displayed still picture is displayed. A moving effect is displayed in which the image 1611 moving toward 2621 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600. Further, as the variable display game progresses, the still picture 2621 is switched to the moving picture as shown in FIG. 254(C). Further, as shown in FIG. 254(D), a moving effect may be performed in which the image 1611 is moved from a plurality of positions (that is, a plurality of directions) of the liquid crystal display device 1600 toward the first pattern 2621.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 254(E), a still picture 2621 is displayed on the light guide plate 2610 in accordance with the progress of the variable display game, and as shown in FIG. 254(F), the still picture 2621 is displayed. A moving effect of displaying the moving image 1611 on the liquid crystal display device 1600 is performed. In addition, as the variable display game progresses, as shown in FIG. 254(G), a moving effect of moving the image 1611 from a plurality of positions (that is, a plurality of directions) of the liquid crystal display device 1600 toward the design 1613 may be performed. Good. After that, as shown in FIG. 254(H), the variable display game ends with a loss without switching the still picture 2621 to the moving picture.

In the effect shown in FIG. 254, when a specific display effect (for example, a specific reach effect, a pseudo continuous effect, a specific lookahead effect) is selected in the special symbol variable display game, it is displayed in the specific display effect. The specific image 1611 produces an effect integrally with the moving effect by the first pattern 2621, and in other cases, the moving effect may not be performed on the first pattern.

Thus, in the effect of the variable display game shown in FIG. 254, since the still picture and the moving picture are selectively displayed by the light guide plate 2610, the player has an expectation for the development of the variable display game. , It is possible to suppress a decline in the entertainment appeal.

Next, an example of the effect in which the effect by the moving body is added to the effect display using the light guide plate in the special symbol variable display game will be described.

255 and 256 are diagrams showing an example of an effect using the light guide plate 2610 and the movable body 3601.

In the effect shown in FIG. 255, one picture is composed of the picture displayed on the light guide plate 2610 and the movable body 3601 that appears on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1600. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 255(A), a part of the movable body 3601 appears or disappears from the upper part of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1600 in a short period according to the progress of the variable display game. Repeatedly, increase the player's expectation of a big hit. Then, as shown in FIG. 255B, the entire movable body 3601 appears on the front surface of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1600.

After that, as shown in FIG. 255C, a moving effect is displayed in which a pattern 2621 to be superimposed on the movable body is displayed by light emission of the light guide plate 2610 and an image 1611 moving toward the movable body 3601 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600. To do. In addition, as the variable display game progresses, as shown in FIG. 255(D), a moving effect may be performed in which the image is moved from a plurality of positions (that is, a plurality of directions) of the liquid crystal display device 1600 toward the design 2621. ..

The movable body 3601 may be caused to emit light at the timing when the movement effect starts or during the movement effect. The light emitting mode (light emitting color or light emitting timing) of the movable body 3601 may be the same as or different from the light emitting mode of the light guide plate 2610.

By selectively performing either the production display in which the movable body 3601 shown in FIG. 249 does not appear or the production display in which the movable body 3601 appears in FIG. 255, the player's expectation for the development of the variable display game can be expected. It can be increased and it can be a pachinko machine with high interest.

In the above-described example, the movable body 3601 is made to appear instead of the pattern where the images are collected, but one character may be made up of the light guide plate 2610 and the movable body 3601. For example, when the movable body 3601 represents the body and the light guide plate 2610 represents the face, the facial expression can be changed by switching the pattern displayed on the light guide plate 2610. In this way, in addition to the effect by the liquid crystal display device 1600, various effects by the light guide plate 2610 can be realized.

In the effect shown in FIG. 256, the light guide plate 2610 is used as an effect that suggests the appearance of the movable body 3601. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 256(A), as the variable display game progresses, the pattern 2621 is displayed by the light emission of the light guide plate 2610, and as shown in FIG. 256(B), the light guide plate 2610 is used. A moving effect of displaying an image 1611 moving toward the displayed pattern on the liquid crystal display device 1600 is performed. Further, as the variable display game progresses, as shown in FIG. 256(C), a movement effect of moving the image 1611 from a plurality of positions (that is, a plurality of directions) of the liquid crystal display device 1600 toward the first pattern 2621 is performed. May be. After that, as illustrated in FIG. 256D, the movable body 3601 appears from the upper portion of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1600 and stops at a position overlapping with the pattern 2621 of the light guide plate 2610.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 256(E), the pattern 1613 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 in accordance with the progress of the variable display game, and as shown in FIG. 256(F), the pattern 1613 is displayed toward the displayed pattern 1613. A moving effect of displaying the moving image 1611 on the liquid crystal display device 1600 is performed. Further, as the variable display game progresses, as shown in FIG. 256(G), a moving effect of moving the image 1611 from a plurality of positions (that is, a plurality of directions) of the liquid crystal display device 1600 toward the design 1613 may be performed. Good. After that, as shown in FIG. 256(H), the movable display does not appear, and the variable display game ends with a loss.

As described above, in the effect shown in FIG. 256, the effect suggesting that the movable body comes out can be performed using the light guide plate.

[14. Pachinko machine using main control MPU with serial communication function]
The main control MPU 1311 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has a synchronous serial communication function in addition to the conventional communication function by an 8-bit parallel bus.

In the conventional pachinko machine, the input/output signals of the main control MPU 1311 in the main control board 1310 are transmitted using a parallel port in which one signal is transmitted by one signal line or an 8-bit bus. In some cases, the data output from the main control MPU 1311 is read or an illegal signal is input to the main control MPU 1311 to perform an illegal act. Therefore, it is required to have a configuration in which the input/output signals of the main control MPU 1311 are difficult to detect from the outside, and if the serial communication function of continuously transmitting data at a predetermined timing with one signal line is used, the serial communication can be performed. It is difficult to read data or input data at the line timing.

Further, the main control board 1310 is equipped with a test signal output circuit for the purpose of monitoring a signal when the inspection organization inspects the pachinko machine. For example, when inspecting the operation of a special electric accessory, in order to monitor the output signal of a solenoid that opens and closes the special electric accessory, a signal (for example, 5V on/off) input to a driver (transistor) for driving a solenoid is used. Signal) was branched and used as a signal for inspection. When the serial signal transmitted in the main control board 1310 described above is output as the inspection signal, the inspection organization needs a device for analyzing the serial signal, and thus it is difficult to use the serial signal as the inspection signal. Is. Therefore, in a pachinko machine that transmits a signal by serial communication in the main control board 1310, it is necessary to devise the output of the inspection signal. Therefore, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, by inputting one serial signal to the two serial-parallel conversion circuits connected in parallel, the inspection signal for changing the level at the same timing as the solenoid driving signal. Shall be generated. When the output transistor open collector (or open drain) of the serial/parallel conversion circuit is used, the voltage level is changed by changing the voltage (5V and 12V) applied to the two serial/parallel conversion circuits connected in parallel. Two synchronized signals can be generated.

Furthermore, it is necessary to reduce the number of steps of the program for detecting the input by serial communication to reduce the software load. In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, a part of the signal input to the main control MPU 1311 is input to the parallel/serial conversion circuit, and a part of the signal is directly input to the general-purpose port of the main control MPU 1311. It is necessary to devise whether to accept the input signal. For example, a signal whose input level needs to be determined immediately after power is turned on may be directly input to the general-purpose port of the main control MPU 1311 instead of being input to the parallel/serial conversion circuit. This is because the level of the signal input to the general-purpose port of the main control MPUI 1311 can be detected even before the interrupt processing is executed, and thus the signal level can be detected other than the timer interrupt processing immediately after the power is turned on.

Particularly, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, depending on the number of signals directly input to the main control MPU 1311, it is not necessary to use the extended I/O using chip select, and the input is made to the general-purpose port of the main control MPUI 1311. It is possible to capture the signal level for each clock in bit units and detect the signal level in real time without waiting for the reception of the serial signal.

FIG. 257 is a block diagram around the synchronous serial interface of the main control board 1310, FIG. 258 is a circuit diagram showing the connection between the serial/parallel conversion circuit and the LED, and FIG. 259 is a main control MPU 1311 and the peripheral. It is a figure which shows arrangement|positioning on the main control board 1310 of components. Note that in FIGS. 257, 258, and 259, thick lines indicate parallel signal transmission lines and thin lines indicate serial signal transmission lines.

The main control MPU 1311 of this embodiment includes an asynchronous serial communication port (asynchronous serial communication function) for communicating with other boards (peripheral control board 1510, payout control board 951, etc.) and main control board 1310. Synchronous serial communication port (synchronous serial communication function) for communicating with the interface circuit, and output of control signals of other devices (solenoid etc.) and from abnormality detection sensors such as vibration detection sensor, magnetic detection sensor, etc. It has a general-purpose port to which signals are input.

The synchronous serial communication function of the main control MPU 1311 has a plurality of transmission/reception ports and a plurality of transmission ports. The communication partner of the transmission/reception port is selected by the chip select signal output from the main control MPU 1311.

The transmission/reception port includes a serial signal transmission terminal (SERTX), a reception signal input terminal (SERRX), chip select output terminals (SERS0 to SERS3), and a synchronization signal output terminal (SERCK). The transmission port is composed of a serial signal transmission terminal (SERTXT), a chip select output terminal (SERST), and a synchronization signal output terminal (SERCKT).

As shown in FIG. 257, one parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 and two serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 are connected to the transmission/reception port. The number of parallel/serial conversion circuits connected to the transmission/reception port is not limited to that shown in the figure.

Note that a larger number of serial/parallel conversion circuits may be connected by making a connection like the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 without using the chip select terminal. In this case, the types of signals output from the serial/parallel conversion circuit do not increase.

The parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 connected to the transmission/reception port takes in parallel data input when CLEAR/LOAD (negative logic) is at 0 level, and after CLEAR/LOAD (negative logic) rises to 1, a predetermined clock The data is output from the serial port at the timing. The parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 inputs signals such as a game ball detection switch (starting winning opening, big winning opening count switch, ordinary winning opening, specific area switch, ordinary pattern gate switch, game board discharging switch) and a photo sensor. The game ball flowing down the game area 5a is mainly detected. The parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 has a 16-bit input port, but an integrated circuit having an 8-bit input port may be connected in parallel to have a 16-bit configuration.

Specifically, since the serial signal transmission terminal (SERTX) is connected to the CLEAR/LOAD (negative logic) of the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341, when the serial transmission signal output from the main control MPU 1311 is 0 level. The input output signal of the game ball detection switch is taken in, and after the serial transmission signal (SERTX) rises to 1, the serial port outputs serial data according to the level of the game ball detection switch at a predetermined clock timing. In this way, the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 captures the output signal of the game ball detection switch by using the SERTX signal as a trigger, so that the data of the ball detection sensor can be captured at any timing.

Further, both the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1342 and the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343 connected to the transmission/reception port output a signal for turning on the LED (the function display unit 1400, the base display 1317). A data transmission destination is selected by a chip select signal from the main control MPU 1311. The serial-parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 fetch the serial data input when the chip select (CS) signal is at 0 level according to a predetermined clock signal, and output the signal from the parallel port at the timing when the chip select signal rises to 1. To do. The output level from the parallel port is latched in the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343, and is maintained until the next timing when the chip select signal rises to 1.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 258, the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1342 is connected to the LED segment side, and the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343 is connected to the LED common side. The serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343 outputs a signal at a predetermined timing, thereby dynamically lighting the LED. Each of the serial-parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 has a 16-bit output port, but an integrated circuit having an 8-bit output port may be connected in parallel to have a 16-bit configuration.

The main control MPU 1311 outputs a common signal at the timing of outputting 0 from the chip select terminal (SERS0), sets the display digit of the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317, and outputs 0 from the chip select terminal (SERS1). A segment signal is output at a timing to turn on the LED.

In this embodiment, a 7-segment LED in which the anode side of the LED is the common terminal is used for the base display 1317, and when the LED is turned on, a drive current is applied from the common terminal on the anode side to the segment terminal on the cathode side. Flowing However, since the integrated circuit having the same configuration is used for the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1342 and the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343, the direction of the current output by the driver circuit in each conversion circuit 1342, 1343 (the output transistor of the driver circuit The polarity) will be the same. For this reason, a driver circuit 1344 is provided in the subsequent stage of the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343 so that current can be supplied to the common terminal on the anode side. That is, the driver circuit 1344 has a function of outputting a drive current for lighting the LED, and the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343 has a function of absorbing the drive current for lighting the LED.

The parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 and the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 may be an integrated circuit having only a parallel/serial conversion function or an integrated circuit having only a serial/parallel conversion function, respectively. Further, an integrated circuit capable of mutually converting a serial signal and a parallel signal may be used by switching between the parallel/serial conversion function and the serial/parallel conversion function.

Also, two serial/parallel conversion circuits 1345 and 1346 are connected to the transmission port of the main control MPU 1311. The serial/parallel conversion circuits 1345 and 1346, like the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 described above, fetch the serial data input when the chip select (CS) is at 0 level according to a predetermined clock signal, and the CS is 1 It is output from the parallel port at the timing of rising. The output of the parallel port is provided with a driver transistor, which switches the voltage applied to the driver transistor to generate an output signal. That is, output signals of various voltages can be generated according to the voltage applied to the driver transistor.

An external terminal board 784 is connected to the output port (PA0 to PA7) of the channel A of the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345, and a signal output from the external terminal board 784 (for example, a security signal or a ball payout signal). Is output. Further, various solenoids are connected to the output ports (PB0 to PB7) of the channel B of the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1345, and drive signals of various solenoids are output. A test terminal 1348 is connected to the output ports (PB0 to PB7) of the channel B of the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346, and a signal output from the test terminal 1348 (for example, a special electric accessory release signal, Ordinary electric accessory release signal) is output. Further, nothing is connected to the output port of the channel A of the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346.

The transmission port of the main control MPU 1311 can control only one channel (16 bits), and the same signal branched including the chip select is input to the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345 and the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346. Therefore, the same signal is output to the parallel side. Therefore, the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345 and the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346 generate a set of parallel signals that change at the same timing from one serial signal. That is, the solenoid drive signal output from the channel B output ports (PB0 to PB7) of the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1345 and the inspection port output of the channel B output ports (PB0 to PB7) of the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1346. The signal changes at the same timing. Therefore, the movement of the solenoid can be accurately output from the inspection terminal 1348. It should be noted that +12V is applied to the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345 to drive the solenoid at 12V, and +5V is applied to the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346 to output a 5V inspection signal. Thus, by using the two serial-parallel conversion circuits to which different voltages are applied, it is possible to generate synchronized signals having different voltage levels.

Of the outputs from the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345 and the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346, the pattern on the output side of the solenoid drive signal through which a relatively large current flows is made thicker, and the pattern on the output side of the inspection signal through which only a relatively small current flows flows. The pattern may be thin. It is sufficient to reduce the resistance of the pattern without thickening the pattern, and to form a pattern on both the front and back sides to increase the substantial cross-sectional area, or to form an inner layer pattern to reduce the substantial cross-sectional area. May increase.

Also, since the two serial-parallel conversion circuits 1345 and 1346 operate independently, even if the load of one conversion circuit increases, the waveform of the output signal of the other conversion circuit is not disturbed and the output signal is affected. Does not occur. That is, the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346 can output an inspection signal having the same waveform as the original waveform of the solenoid drive signal regardless of the operation of the solenoid connected to the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345, which is useful for accurate inspection. ..

Next, with reference to FIG. 259, the arrangement of the main control MPU 1311 and peripheral components on the main control board 1310 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 259, a main control MPU 1311 is mounted on the main control board 1310, and various interface circuits are arranged around it. A test circuit layout area is provided on the main control board 1310, and a serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346, an interface circuit 1347, and a test terminal 1348 are provided in the test circuit layout area. Circuit components (serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346, interface circuit 1347, inspection terminal 1348, etc.) provided in the inspection circuit arrangement area are mounted only on the pachinko machine 1 to be inspected by an inspection agency, and are generally commercially available pachinko machines. 1 is not mounted (a pattern for mounting components is provided). That is, although a connector for relaying a signal output from the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345 to the solenoid is mounted on the pachinko machine 1 that is generally commercially available, the inspection signal output from the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346 is provided. The relay inspection terminal 1348 is not mounted. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 that is commercially available, the inspection signal is not detected by the fraudulent person and used for the fraudulent activity.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 on the market, the print circuit (for example, the data bus connected to the interface circuit 1347) is provided although no component is mounted in the inspection circuit arrangement area. Therefore, noise may be induced in the data bus and cause a malfunction. Therefore, the wiring (print pattern) in the inspection circuit layout area is pulled up to the power supply (+5V) via a resistor (or to GND). Pull down) to reduce the effect of noise.

Further, from the viewpoint of preventing unauthorized modification, surface mount components are not used in the pachinko machine 1 on the market, but the circuit components provided in the inspection circuit arrangement area are not mounted on the pachinko machine 1 on the market. Surface mount components can be used. Therefore, the components of the inspection circuit can be downsized, the inspection circuit arrangement area can be reduced, and the main control board 1310 can be downsized. Similarly, from the viewpoint of preventing unauthorized modification, no components are mounted on the back side of the main control board 1310 in the pachinko machine 1 that is commercially available, but the circuit components provided in the inspection circuit layout area are commercially available pachinko machines. No components are mounted on the main control board 1310, so that components can be mounted on the back side of the main control board 1310.

Of the components of the inspection circuit, the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346 and the inspection terminal 1348 may be provided on another board arranged near the main control board 1310. This separate board is mounted only on the pachinko machine 1 to be inspected by an inspection agency, and is not mounted on the pachinko machine 1 that is generally commercially available. Also in this case, the inspection signal is not output from the pachinko machine 1 that is generally commercially available.

In this way, by collectively arranging the circuit components used for the inspection of the pachinko machine 1 in the inspection circuit arrangement area, it is easy to find the missing parts in the pachinko machine 1 for commercial use and Easy to find mounting. Further, the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346 and the interface circuit 1347 can be arranged near the inspection terminal 1348, and the main control board 1310 having high noise resistance can be configured.

Further, as shown in FIG. 259, the circuit component arranged in the inspection circuit arrangement area has a different orientation (for example, 180 degrees as shown in the drawing) from the same type of circuit component arranged in another place of the main control board 1310. It should be placed in the direction of rotation. In this way, by arranging the circuit components in different directions in the inspection circuit arrangement area and other places of the main control board 1310, it becomes possible to easily distinguish the components used for the normal game from the inspection components. In the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1 that is commercially available, it is possible to prevent erroneous mounting in which components are erroneously placed in the inspection circuit placement area.

Further, although the symbols and numbers (or combinations thereof) of the mounted circuit components are displayed on the main control board 1310 by silk printing, for example, the symbols and numbers of the circuit components arranged in the inspection circuit layout area or The numbers may be put together with symbols or numbers following the symbols or numbers of the circuit parts used for game control. For example, the integrated circuits for game control are IC1 to IC11, and the integrated circuits arranged in the inspection circuit arrangement area are given the symbols after IC12. By doing so, it is possible to attach symbols or numbers that do not skip to the game control circuit components that are mounted on the pachinko machine 1 that is commercially available, and simplify the check after mounting the circuit components on the main control board 1310. it can.

Furthermore, if the symbols and numbers of the terminals for inspection are set to be different from the symbols and numbers of the connectors that are connected to the game control parts, the connectors and inspection terminals that are connected to the game control parts can be easily It is possible to distinguish between them and prevent incorrect wiring when connecting cables incorrectly. In particular, if the symbol or number of the inspection terminal is the same as the symbol or number of the connection destination of the inspection device of the other party, it is convenient for connecting the cable at the time of inspection, and connection mistakes can be reduced.

Further, some of the general-purpose ports of the main control MPU 1311 are unused free ports, and the free ports may be arranged so as to be aggregated with the adjacent terminals of the main control MPU 1311. That is, regardless of whether the port numbers of the unused ports are continuous, it is preferable that the terminals of the empty ports are arranged at the aggregated position. By arranging the vacant terminals collectively, the area where the print pattern on the main control board 1310 is not provided is collected, and it is easy to find missing parts, and it is possible to find attachment of additional parts for fraud. It's getting easier.

Further, the terminal of the vacant port is arranged at a position close to the connector in which a relatively large current flows (for example, a solenoid is connected) in the positional relationship with the connector. That is, in the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311, connectors for inputting and outputting signals for game control are arranged on the left and right sides (upper and lower sides in the figure) on the side where the terminals of the vacant ports are located. Therefore, when adding an additional function to the pachinko machine 1, the design of the main control board 1310 can be easily changed without laying a long pattern.

As described above, by using the serial communication for signal transmission in the main control board 1310, the wiring of the data bus can be reduced, and it becomes easy to find the attachment of the additional component for fraud. In other words, a large number of data buses connected to a plurality of parallel interface circuits are eliminated, and some signal lines including a control line are replaced by wiring lines in which circuit patterns of a large number of data buses are complicatedly arranged. Therefore, it becomes a clean circuit pattern. Further, since the data line routing distance is shortened, the main control board 1310 resistant to noise can be configured.

Further, since the number of data lines is reduced, the circuits can be arranged without being influenced by the routing of the data lines, so that the I/O IC (parallel interface circuit, serial interface circuit) can be arranged near the main control MPU 1311.

Further, by reducing the circuit patterns, the number of ground patterns can be increased without changing the area of the main control board 1310, and the main control board 1310 that is more resistant to noise can be configured.

FIG. 260 is a diagram showing the arrangement of ports in the main control MPU 1311.

The parallel output port of the address D2 (chip select SERS0) is the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1343. As shown in FIG. 258, the output ports PA0 to PA3 of the channel A are the common side of the function display unit 1400 (the anode terminal of the LED). And the output ports PA4 to PA7 are connected to the common side of the base display 1317 (anode terminal of 7-segment LED). The output ports PB0 to PB7 of the channel B of the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343 are not used.

The parallel output port of the address D3 (chip select SERS1) is the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1342, and as shown in FIG. 258, the output ports PA0 to PA7 of the channel A are on the segment side (LED cathode) of the function display unit 1400. The output ports PB0 to PB7 of the channel B are connected to the segment side of the base display 1317 (cathode terminal of 7-segment LED).

The common side of the LED (the anode terminal of the LED) switches the output port to be turned on at a constant cycle (for example, interrupt every 4 ms). When paying attention to the output port of channel A, only PA0 is turned on in the timer interrupt process, only PA1 is turned on in the next timer interrupt process (after 4 ms),..., Only PA7 is in the next timer interrupt process (after 4 ms). ON is repeated at a constant cycle (4 ms x number of ports). That is, when switching 8 ports repeatedly, each port is turned on every 32 ms. Alternatively, when the output ports PA0 to PA3 and PA4 to PA7 of channel A are grouped and the output port of channel A is focused on, only PA0 and PA4 are turned on by the timer interrupt process, and the next timer interrupt process (after 4 ms). Only PA1 and PA5 are turned on,..., And in the next timer interrupt process (after 4 ms), only PA3 and PA7 may be turned on at a constant cycle (4 ms x number of ports). By making the operation of this fixed cycle serial communication, it is difficult to detect the operation timing of the main control MPU 1311.

Further, the parallel input port of the address D5 is a parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341, and a switch (ball detection sensor) for detecting a game ball is connected to the inputs PA1 to PA7 and PB0 to PB7. The outputs of these sphere detection sensors are input as serial signals to the main control MPU 1311 and read as signals at address D5.

Further, the operation information of the setting key 971, the operation information of the RAM clear switch 954, the power failure notice signal, the main payment ACK signal, and the detection signal of the frame opening detection switch are input to the general-purpose input ports INP0 to INP4 provided in the main control MPU 1311, ing. Since these signals need to be monitored in real time (at the time when the program requests them) or need to be monitored outside the timer interrupt processing (for example, immediately after power is turned on), main control is performed without going through the parallel/serial conversion circuit. It is directly input to the MPU 1311.

Further, the general-purpose input/output ports (also used for input/output) IOP0 to IOP3 provided in the main control MPU 1311, are provided with a detection signal of a radio wave detection sensor, a detection signal of a vibration detection sensor, a detection signal of a magnetic detection switch, and a detection signal of a proximity error switch. It has been entered. These signals are signals that are output when the pachinko machine 1 is abnormal (such as fraudulent activity or failure), and it is necessary to monitor in real time (at the time when the program requests). It is directly input to the main control MPU 1311 without intervention. In addition, the detection signals from these sensors and switches inform the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and sound of abnormality. By this abnormality notification, the employee of the hall comes to check the state of the pachinko machine, so that the game is substantially stopped. If this abnormality notification is an erroneous notification, it causes the player to feel uncomfortable, so it is necessary to suppress erroneous detection. Therefore, it is preferable that these signals be input to the general-purpose input/output port and detected a plurality of times in a short time (so-called double reading) to suppress erroneous detection due to the influence of noise.

In this double reading process, in one timer interrupt process, read commands are continuously executed to determine the signal level input to the general-purpose input/output port (or general-purpose input port) at short time intervals, Execute multiple read commands with several commands in between to determine the signal level input to the general-purpose I/O port (or general-purpose input port) at short time intervals, or read with multiple clocks in between. This is performed by executing an instruction and determining the signal level input to the general-purpose input/output port (or general-purpose input port) at short time intervals. For this reason, when the level of the port is continuously determined through the parallel/serial conversion circuit, the level can be detected only at intervals of tens of microseconds, whereas when the level of the general-purpose port is continuously determined, it is 1 microsecond. The level can be detected at the following intervals, and the signal level can be detected in a short cycle.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, signals of various switches and sensors that require real-time property are directly input to the general-purpose input port and the general-purpose output port without using the extended I/O using the chip select. Since it is possible to capture the level of the signal input to the general-purpose input/output port (also used for input/output) in bit units for each clock, the signal level can be detected in real time without waiting for reception of the serial signal.

Although the general-purpose input/output ports (input/output also) IOP4 to IOP7 are not used, a part of the signal input through the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 is used as the general-purpose input/output ports (input/output) IOP4 to IOP7. You may enter in.

Although not shown, the main control MPU 1311 may have a general-purpose output port.

If the general-purpose input port is a vacant terminal, pull up to 5V via a resistor or pull down to GND to prevent the terminal from reaching an intermediate potential, and to prevent the influence of noise induced on the power supply line. It is better to reduce. Further, when the general-purpose output port is an empty terminal, it may be opened, but it is preferable to pull it up to 5 V through a dummy resistor or pull it down to GND so that the level change of the output port does not cause noise.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the inspection signal is output from the general-purpose port of the main control MPU 1311, and the signal used for game control is output via the serial/parallel conversion circuit. Therefore, the winning ball detection signals are collected and input to one port, which makes it easy to handle in the game control program.

Further, among the signals input to the main control MPU 1311, signals that need to be detected a plurality of times in a short time (so-called double reading) are input to the general-purpose port, and signals that do not need to be read twice are serialized. It is input to the main control MPU 1311 via the parallel conversion circuit. Since the general-purpose port can confirm the signal level in real time, it is possible to detect the signal level multiple times in a short time and eliminate the influence of noise to make a determination. If the general-purpose input port is vacant, the port may be assigned so that a signal that does not need to be read twice is input to the general-purpose port.

A signal input to the main control MPU 1311 can be assigned to the general-purpose input port, but a signal input to the main control MPU 1311 and a signal output from the main control MPU 1311 are allocated to the general-purpose input/output port (also used as input/output). Since all of them can be assigned, the general-purpose input/output port is highly versatile with respect to changes in specifications. Therefore, a general-purpose input/output port (also used as input/output) is desirable as a port left as a spare for adding a new function, and it is desirable to preferentially allocate the general-purpose input port.

Next, with reference to FIG. 261, the timing of outputting and fetching data by the synchronous serial signal will be described.

When the main control MPU 1311 outputs 0 (LOW) from the chip select terminal SERS0, the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343 is selected, and the main control MPU 1311 outputs the common side selection signal of the base display 1317. In the figure, PA7 (COM4) is selected from PA7 to PA4. After that, the main control MPU 1311 outputs a selection signal on the common side of the function display unit 1400 from the serial signal transmission terminal SERTX. In the figure, PA3 (LED-C4) is selected in PA3 to PA0.

Since the output is not assigned to the B channel port of the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1343, originally nothing is output at the data fetch timing of PB7 to PB0 and 1 (HIGH) is maintained. However, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the serial transmission signal SERTX output from the main control MPU 1311 is connected to the CLR/LOAD terminal that determines the data capture timing of the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341, and this signal is 0 ( When LOW), data is taken in from PA0 to PB7. Therefore, the serial transmission signal SERTX is set to 0 (LOW) at any timing of PB7 to PB0, and data is taken in from PA0 to PB7 of the parallel-serial conversion circuit 1341.

The parallel-serial conversion circuit 1341 takes in the data and, after the serial transmission signal SERTX rises to 1 (HIGH), outputs the serial data from the serial signal output terminal (Q8C) according to the clock signal. During this period, the serial transmission signal SERTX is maintained at 1 (HIGH) so that new data is not captured.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the transmission signal of the vacant output port is used as a trigger for capturing the output of the game ball detection sensor, so that the data of the ball detection sensor can be captured at any timing.

Next, another arrangement of the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 will be described with reference to FIGS. 262 and 263.

It is desirable that the main control board 1310 is commonly used by a plurality of models without redesign. However, the input/output signals of the main control board 1310 may differ depending on the model and specifications. Therefore, in this embodiment, the input/output interface of the main control board 1310 that differs depending on the model is mounted on another board (the input/output board 1351), and the periphery of the main control MPU 1311 that is common to each model is mounted on the main control board 1310. To be configured. Performance (for example, noise resistance) is evaluated by making the main control board 1310 common to a plurality of models, that is, by making the board size, the circuit design, the artwork of the printed board, the component arrangement, and the like the same. The main control board 1310 of stable quality can be commonly used by a plurality of models without redesign.

Further, when the input/output interface of the main control board 1310 is mounted on another input/output board 1351, there is a problem of where to divide the circuit. One is a method of separating with a serial signal line, and the second is a method of separating with a parallel signal obtained by converting a serial signal. In the former case, the number of wirings between the substrates can be reduced more than in the latter case, which is desirable. Further, in the serial signal, even if the signal itself is acquired, it is difficult to know the order in which the data is transmitted, and it is unknown at which timing what data is transmitted. Further, the serial clock is output at a speed synchronized with the clock, and the synchronous clock may be different from the operation clock of the main control MPU 1311 and can be changed. Therefore, it is difficult to estimate the data rate from the outside, and it is difficult to know the content of the transmitted data even if the serial signal is acquired. Therefore, it is preferable to connect the main control board 1310 and the input/output board 1351 with a serial signal line.

As shown in FIG. 262, an input/output board 1351 attached to the main control board 1310 is provided, and the main control board 1310 and the input/output board 1351 are mounted in the main control board box 1320. The main control board box 1320 is made of a transparent resin that accommodates the main control board 1310 and the input/output board 1351 in a sealable structure that cannot be opened without breaking once closed. The input/output board 1351 is provided with a parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 and a serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345. The main control board 1310 and the input/output board 1351 (main control MPU 1311, parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 and serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345) are connected by a serial communication line, and are connected by a parallel bus or a general-purpose port. Substrates can be connected with a smaller number. The serial signal line may be connected by an electric wire or an inter-board connector.

Further, if the boards are serially communicated with each other, it is difficult to analyze the data even if the signal is acquired. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the content of the transmitted data is known to a fraudster. In addition, since the input/output board 1351 for inputting/outputting signals for game control is configured separately from the main control board 1310, and the input/output signal that changes depending on the model is set in the input/output board 1351, the main control board 1310 is modified. The number of models that can be applied without doing so increases, and the versatility of the main control board 1310 can be improved.

Furthermore, by housing the main control board 1310 and the input/output board 1351 in one main control board box 1320, the signal line for serial communication can be shortened.

When the main control board 1310 is used for another model, the design of the input/output board 1351 may be changed, and the relationship between the connector of the main control board 1310 and the main control MPU 1311 does not change depending on the model. The main control board 1310 whose design quality is stable and whose performance (for example, noise resistance) has been evaluated can be easily designed. Further, the conventional main control board box 1320 can be used without redesigning the main control board box 1320 unless the size of the input/output board 1351 and the positions of the mounting holes are changed. Further, the countermeasure against noise that changes for each model may be taken by the input/output board 1351 instead of the main control board 1310.

The serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 which output the drive signal of the base display 1317 are preferably arranged on the main control board 1310. When the base display 1317 is arranged on the input/output board 1351, the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 are arranged on the input/output board 1351 and signals for driving the function display unit 1400 are input/output board. It is good to output from 1351.

Further, the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346 that generates the inspection signal may be arranged on the main control board 1310. That is, the inspection circuit arrangement area and the inspection terminal 1348 may be provided on the main control board 1310. This is because a part of the signal output from the inspection terminal 1348 is output from the main control MPU 1311 via a parallel bus. Therefore, when the inspection terminal 1348 is arranged on the input/output board 1351, the input/output with the main control board 1310 is performed. This is because the number of connecting lines with the substrate 1351 increases.

Further, as shown in FIG. 263, the main control board 1310 may be housed in the main control board box 1320, and the input/output board 1351 may be attached to the outside of the main control board box 1320.

In the form shown in FIG. 263, since the input/output board 1351 is provided outside the main control board box 1320, the main control board box 1320 can be used in common even if the size of the main control board box 1320 changes. Further, since the input/output board 1351 and the main control board 1310 are housed in different board boxes, the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the boards is improved. If the main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and the input/output board box 1350 that houses the input/output board 1351 are provided separately, each board box becomes smaller and the board installation position becomes free. .. Further, since the main control board 1310 is provided with a base display 1317, an LED for displaying an error code and a setting key 971, it is necessary to appear on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, but the input/output board 1351 is a pachinko machine. Since it does not need to be visually recognized from the back side of the machine 1, the substrate installation position is free. Thus, the form shown in FIG. 263 can improve the degree of freedom in design.

In the form shown in FIG. 263, the serial signal output from the main control MPU 1311 is output to the outside of the main control board box 1320. The main control MPU 1311 outputs data from the data bus in addition to the serial signal. In the pachinko machine, it is desirable not to output the data bus output from the main control MPU 1311 to the outside of the sealed main control board box 1320 in order to prevent an illegal person from detecting the operation of the pachinko machine. .. However, even if the serial signal output from the main control MPU 1311 is output to the outside of the main control board box 1320, it is unlikely that a fraudulent person will detect the operating status of the pachinko machine. This is because the data bus outputs data in accordance with the operation clock of the main control MPU 1311, and the data rate is constant, so that the data rate can be easily estimated from the outside, and as a result, the signal transmitted by the data bus is acquired. Sometimes. However, the serial signal is output at a speed synchronized with the clock for the serial signal, and the speed of this synchronous clock may be different from the operation clock of the main control MPU 1311 and can be changed. Therefore, it is difficult to estimate the data rate from the outside, and it is difficult to know the content of the transmitted data even if the serial signal is acquired.

In the above, the example in which the input/output board 1351 is provided separately from the main control board 1310 and the input/output function of the model-dependent signal is mounted on the input/output board 1351 has been described. It may be mounted on the input/output board 1351 as long as there is a portion where resistance to fraud and noise does not decrease even if it is arranged. For example, output of a signal that requires a drive current for a solenoid or motor attached to the game board 5, output of a drive signal of the function display unit 1400, various sensors (winning ball detection, radio wave sensor, magnetic sensor, vibration sensor) The input of the signal is a function that may be mounted on the input/output board 1351. Further, communication with the payout control board 951, output of a signal output from the external terminal board 784, power failure detection, input of the setting key 971 (setting key 971 itself may be provided outside the main control board 1310), base display The output to 1317 is a function that should be mounted on 1310 on the main control board.

Further, in the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 and the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345 mounted on the input/output board 1351, when a dummy signal (0 V or 5 V) is input to the empty input terminal or a dummy resistor is connected to the empty output terminal. Good. This is because if nothing is connected to the empty terminal, noise may be taken in and the circuit may malfunction.

In particular, if some of the multiple signals that a fraudulent person wants to acquire are transmitted through a parallel bus or general-purpose port and other signals are transmitted as serial signals, it is difficult to analyze the serial signals. It is necessary for the fraudster to obtain signals from a plurality of locations including the main control board 1310 and the input/output board 1351, and the deterrence against fraud can be enhanced.

[15. Slot machine]
Up to this point, the arrangement of the programs and data stored in the ROM of the pachinko machine has been described, but subsequently, the arrangement of the programs and data stored in the RAM and ROM of the slot machine (spindle type gaming machine) will be described. The outline of the pachinko machine has been described with reference to FIG. 26, but programs and data are arranged in the RAM and ROM as in the case of the slot machine 4000 described below.

[15-1. Construction]
First, the structure of the slot machine 4000 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 264 is a perspective view of the slot machine 4000, and FIG. 265 is a perspective view of the slot machine 4000 with the front member 4200 opened.

As shown in FIGS. 264 and 265, in the slot machine 4000 of the present embodiment, various devices are provided inside a box-shaped housing 4100 having an open front surface, and a front member is provided on the front surface of the housing 4100. 4200 is provided so as to be openable and closable in a one-sided form. On the upper part of the front member 4200, there are provided an image display body 4500 for displaying effects and information according to the progress of the game, a speaker for performing sounds, and the like. The image display body 4500 is composed of, for example, a liquid crystal display panel, and displays various information in addition to the effect display regarding the game. Then, various effect displays and history information displays on the image display body 4500 are controlled by the effect control board 4700. That is, the image display body 4500 constitutes an effect display means capable of displaying an effect according to the progress of the game, and the effect control board 4700 functions as a display control means capable of performing display control of the effect display means. Eggplant

A front panel is provided in the center of the front member 4200 so that the rear cannot be visually recognized, and a decorative pattern or the like is drawn. The center of the front panel allows the rear to be visually recognized (for example, transparent). ) A symbol display window 4401 is formed. The front panel may be configured by a display device, and the reel 4301 can be visually recognized in a state where an image is not displayed in the symbol display window 4401, and an image that mainly directs a game is displayed around the symbol display window 4401. To do. In this case, it is also possible to display an image that produces a game in the symbol display window 4401.

Through the symbol display window 4401 (window portion), the symbols variably displayed by the rotation of the reel 4301 arranged in the housing can be visually recognized. The reel 4301 includes a cylindrical left reel 4301a, a middle reel 4301b, and a right reel 4301c, which are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. On the outer peripheral surfaces of these reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, a strip-shaped sheet in which a plurality of symbols are drawn along the longitudinal direction is wound, and a plurality of symbols are arranged in a predetermined arrangement.

Each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c is provided with a reel drive motor 4341a, 4341b, 4341c (see FIG. 266) which is a stepping motor, and the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are independently driven to rotate and stopped. It is possible to do. That is, the reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, 4341c form a drive source for the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c. Further, the reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, 4341c are controlled by the two-phase excitation method in the same manner as the payout motor 839 of the pachinko machine 1 to increase the drive torque and the static torque. As a result, a small motor can be adopted as the drive source, and the cost can be reduced.

In the following, the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are referred to as the left reel 4301a, the middle reel 4301b, and the right reel 4301c, respectively, as necessary. Then, the respective reel stop buttons 4211a, 4211b, 4211c corresponding thereto are referred to as a left reel stop button 4211a, a middle reel stop button 4211b, and a right reel stop button 4211c. Further, the reel drive motor 4341 corresponding to each reel is a left reel drive motor 4341a, a middle reel drive motor 4341b, and a right reel drive motor 4341c.

Further, by rotating the reel 4301 by the reel drive motor 4341, a plurality of types of symbols visually recognized from the symbol display window 4401 are changed so as to circulate from top to bottom (variation display). On the other hand, in a state in which the reel 4301 is stopped, a predetermined number (for example, three) of consecutive symbols for each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, that is, a total of 9 symbols of 3×3 are displayed through the symbol display window 4401. It is visible. That is, through the symbol display window 4401, the effective display portions of the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c for deriving and displaying the stop result of the game can be visually recognized.

For the 3×3 symbol matrix visually recognized from the symbol display window 4401, a predetermined enabling line is set. In this embodiment, each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c a line that crosses the middle pattern (middle line), the left reel 4301a lower-middle reel 4301b middle-right reel 4301c upper line diagonally traverses each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c. A line that diagonally crosses each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c from the upper stage of the left reel 4301a-the middle stage of the left reel 4301b-the middle stage of the reel 4301c to the lower stage of the right reel 4301c (downward right line) is an enabling line. Then, the validating line is activated by the player inserting a medal or inputting from a credit (hereinafter referred to as a "bet operation"), and based on the symbol combination mode (rollup result) formed on the valid line. The establishment/non-establishment of the winning (role) is determined.

When the winning is achieved, in addition to the case where three predetermined symbols are lined up on the activated line, there are cases where three predetermined symbols are lined up on another line in appearance. As such a line, there is a line (upper line) that crosses the symbols on the upper stages of the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c. It should be noted that a line (lower line) that traverses the lower symbols of the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, and a front portion (visible portion) facing the symbol display window 4401 of the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c other than the above should be traversed. The apparent patterns may be arranged on a virtual line located. Below, enable lines (middle row, upward right, downward right line), lines that the symbols can be aligned visually when winning (upper line), and other lines (lower line, etc.) collectively, symbol stop line (symbol alignment) Line).

The upper, middle, lower, upward right and downward right lines are activated lines, and a predetermined activated line is activated according to the number of bets, and a prize is awarded based on the symbol combination mode formed on this activated line ( Role) is established/not established. For example, when the number of bets is 1, the middle line is the effective line, when the bet number is 2, the upper line and the upper line are the effective lines, and when the bet number 3 is the upper middle lower line, the upward right and downward right lines are the effective lines. And Further, all lines may be valid regardless of the bet number (even if the bet number is 1 or 2), or only three lines may be dedicated.

A payout number display LED 4562 for displaying the number of medals to be paid out by the game is provided around (for example, below) the symbol display window 4401. A credit display for displaying the number of medals stored in the slot machine 4000 and a count display for displaying the number of games remaining in the prize may be provided.

Below the symbol display window 4401, a step portion projecting to the front side is formed, and the upper surface of this step portion is an operation portion 4202 that inclines downward toward the front side. The operation section 4202 is provided with a medal insertion slot 4203, a one-piece insertion button 4205 and a max bet button 4206 as a progress operation section for advancing the game.

The medal slot 4203 is arranged on the right side of the operation unit 4202 when viewed from the front side of the slot machine 4000. The game can be executed by the player inserting a medal into the medal insertion slot 4203 and performing a betting operation. An insertion sensor 4207b for detecting passage of medals is provided on the path through which medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203 pass, and the number of inserted medals is counted based on the detection information by the insertion sensor 4207b.

The one-sheet insertion button 4205 and the max bet button 4206 are arranged on the left side of the operation unit 4202 when viewed from the front side of the slot machine 4000. The single-push-in button 4205 can be input one by one from the credit by performing a pressing operation once. The max bet button 4206 can be input from the credit to the upper limit number of bets (for example, 3) by one pressing operation, but when the credit number is less than the upper limit number, the credit number is input as the bet number. It is like this.

A payout button 4209, a start lever 4210, a return button 4208, a reel stop button 4211, a key device 4215, and the like are provided below the operation unit 4202. The payout button 4209 is paid out by a medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203, a medal (betting medal) input as the bet number by the one-piece insertion button 4205, the max bet button 4206, or a prize is stored and stored as a credit. It is used when giving a command to return the stored medals (stored medals) to the medal tray 4201. It should be noted that when a medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203 after an automatic betting operation based on the establishment of a replay prize (replay prize), or when a medal exceeds a predetermined number that can be stored as a credit, the medal selector 4207 is used for the medal. It is returned to the saucer 4201.

The starting lever 4210 is an operation lever for starting a game of one division. The key device 4215 is for inserting a key when opening the front member 4200 or when resetting the error (for example, hopper error) state of the slot machine 4000. The return button 4208 is used to return the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203 and stuck in the medal selector 4207 to the medal tray 4201.

The reel stop button 4211 includes a left reel stop button 4211a, a middle reel stop button 4211b, and a right reel stop button 4211c, which are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the left reel 4301a, the middle reel 4301b, and the right reel 4301c. The rotation of the corresponding reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c is stopped according to the stop operation.

A decorative plate (decorative panel) forming a lower region of the front member 4200 is provided below the portion where these operation buttons are provided. Further, below the decorative plate and at the lowermost part of the front member 4200, a medal tray 4201 for storing medals, a medal payout opening, a speaker 4512 for outputting sound, and the like are provided.

A main board (game control device) 4600 (see FIG. 266) that controls the entire slot machine 4000 is arranged in the upper part of the housing. A character ratio display 1317 and a display switch 1318 are provided on the main board 4600. The accessory ratio display 1317 is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED, similarly to the pachinko machine described above. The accessory ratio indicator 1317 may be configured by a liquid crystal display device provided on the main substrate 4600.

The accessory ratio display 1317 is not provided on the main board 4600, but is also used as another display (for example, the payout number display LED 4562 or the image display 4500) provided on the front surface of the slot machine 4000, and the payout number display LED 4562 is used. Alternatively, the character product ratio may be displayed on the image display body 4500.

When the display switch 1318 is operated, the character ratio is displayed on the character ratio display 1317. It is advisable to display (print, stamp, seal, etc.) that the switch is a switch for operating the display of the accessory ratio on the printed circuit board near the display switch 1318 or on the housing 4100. The display switch 1318 is preferably provided in the vicinity of the accessory ratio display 1317. However, other than the main control unit 1300, as long as the operation is easy, another board (for example, the production control board 4700). Power supply device 4112), housing 4100, or front member 4200. Further, as will be described later, the display switch 1318 may also serve as a RAM clear switch. By providing the display switch 1318 at a position where the player cannot operate it, it is possible to prevent the player from operating it by mistake.

In addition, a symbol variation display device 4300 is provided almost in the center of the housing, and rotatable reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are placed. In addition, an external relay terminal board 4131 for outputting a signal from the main board 4600 to an external device is provided inside the housing of the slot machine 4000.

Further, a medal payout device (hopper) 4110 is arranged in the lower part inside the housing. The medal payout device 4110 receives and stores the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203 and guided by the medal selector 4207, and when a predetermined symbol combination mode is formed on the activated line and the winning is achieved, the winning is achieved. The number of medals (payout medals) corresponding to (1) or the amount of medals that exceed the upper limit of credit due to the addition when the winning is established is paid out to the medal tray 4201. By operating the payout button 4209, medals for credits are paid out to the medal tray 4201 by the medal payout device 4110. Further, to the right of the medal payout device 4110, medals that overflow from the medal payout device 4110 and flow in are stored, and the medals that flow in are stored in the medal collection mechanism of the installation island where the slot machine 4000 is installed. An overflow tank is provided for guiding.

[15-2. Internal configuration of slot machine]
FIG. 266 is a block diagram showing a configuration of various mechanical elements, electronic devices, operation members and the like provided in the slot machine 4000. The slot machine 4000 has a main board 4600 for centrally controlling the progress of the game, and a CPU 4601, a ROM 4602, a RAM 4603, an input/output interface 4604, etc. are mounted on the main board 4600.

Further, as described above, the main board 4600 is provided with the character ratio display 1317 for displaying the character ratio calculated by the CPU 4601 and the display switch 1318 for switching the display of the character ratio display 1317. The display switch 1318 may be a push button switch that performs a momentary operation, but may be another type of switch. By operating the display switch 1318, the character ratio may be displayed on the character ratio display 1317.

The above-described one-sheet insertion button 4205, max bet button 4206, start lever 4210, reel stop buttons 4211a, 4211b, 4211c, payout button 4209, etc. are all connected to the main board 4600, and these operation buttons are not shown in the figure. Is operated by the player, and the detected operation signal is output to the main board 4600. Specifically, when the start lever 4210 is operated, an operation signal for starting the above-described symbol variation display device 4300 (starting rotation of the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c) is output to the main board 4600, and the reel stop button 4211a. , 4211b, 4211c are operated, operation signals for stopping the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are output to the main board 4600.

Further, the slot machine 4000 accommodates other devices together with the main board 4600, and various signals are input to the main board 4600 from these devices. The devices include a symbol variation display device 4300, a medal payout device 4110, and the like.

As described above, the symbol variation display device 4300 includes reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, 4341c for rotating the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c (left reel drive motor 4341a, middle reel drive motor 4341b, right). Reel drive motor 4341c). The reel drive motor 4341 is composed of a stepping motor, and each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c can be independently rotated and stopped, and at the time of rotation, a plurality of types of symbols are displayed from the top in the symbol display window 4401. It is displayed continuously changing downward.

Further, each of the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c has a position sensor 4331a, 4331b, 4331c for detecting a reference position for rotation, and each of the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c has a position sensor 4331a, 4331b, 4331c. The reels are provided corresponding to each other (left reel position sensor 4331a, middle reel position sensor 4331b, right reel position sensor 4331c). By inputting detection signals (index signals) from these position sensors to the main board 4600, stop position information of each reel can be obtained on the main board 4600.

In the medal selector 4207, the solenoid 4207a and the insertion sensor 4207b described above are installed. The insertion sensor 4207b detects a medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203 and outputs a medal detection signal to the main board 4600. When the solenoid 4207a is OFF, the inserted medals are detected by the insertion sensor 4207b. On the contrary, when the solenoid 4207a is in the ON state, the passage reaching the insertion sensor 4207b in the medal selector 4207 is locked out and the insertion of medals cannot be accepted. Even if the player inserts the medals, the medal selector 4207 is not accepted. The medals that have flowed through the return trough return to the medal tray 4201. At this time, the function of the insertion sensor 4207b is also invalidated at the same time, so that neither bets nor medals are stored by inserting medals.

The medal payout device 4110 has a payout sensor 4110e for detecting the paid-out medals one by one in the discharge port, and a payout medal signal for each medal is input to the main board 4600 from the payout sensor 4110e. .. Further, the auxiliary storage box for game medals is provided with a full-medal sensor 4111a, and when the number of stored medals exceeds a predetermined number, a detection signal indicating that the medals have exceeded the predetermined number is output to the main board 4600. Output to. At this time, an error display for notifying the abnormality of the medal storage is performed by the image display 4500, the error lamp 4554, etc., and the player, the hall employee, etc. are informed that the abnormality has occurred.

On the other hand, a control signal is output from the main board 4600 to the symbol variation display device 4300 and the medal payout device 4110. That is, a drive pulse signal for controlling the start and stop of each of the reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, 4341c described above is output from the main board 4600. In addition, a drive signal is input to the medal payout device 4110 from the main board 4600 according to the type of symbol combination stopped on the activated line, and in response to this, the medal payout device 4110 performs a medal payout operation. At this time, if the number of medals required for payout is insufficient in the medal payout device 4110 or there is no medal at all, the payout sensor 4110e will be delayed in detecting the number of coins. When a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, the payout sensor 4110e outputs a payout medal abnormality signal to the main board 4600, and in response to this, the main board 4600 informs that a medal payout abnormality has occurred. Is displayed on the error lamp 4554, the image display body 4500, or the like to notify the player, the hall employee, or the like that an abnormality has occurred.

The slot machine 4000 is provided with an effect control board 4700 in addition to the main board 4600. The effect control board 4700 includes a CPU 4701, a ROM 4702, a RAM 4703, an input/output interface 4707, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 4704, and an AMP (audio amplifier). 4705, a sound source IC 4706 and the like are mounted. The effect control board 4700 receives various command signals from the main board 4600, and controls the display of the image display body 4500, the light emission (or lighting, blinking, extinction, etc.) of the lighting device 4502, and the operation of the speaker 4512.

Further, an external relay terminal board 4131 is provided, and the slot machine 4000 is connected to the hall computer 4800 in the game hall via the external relay terminal board 4131. The external relay terminal board 4131 plays a role of relaying various signals (inserted medal signal, payout medal signal, game status, etc.) transmitted from the main board 4600 to the hall computer 4800.

The power supply device 4112 creates a plurality of types of DC power supplies from an AC 24 V (AC24V) power supply supplied from the island facility. For example, three types of power sources are created: direct current +5V (hereinafter, "+5V"), direct current +12V (hereinafter, "+12V"), and direct current +24V (hereinafter, "+24V"). Three types of power supplies of +5V, +12V, and +24V created by the power supply device 4112 are supplied to each configuration included in the slot machine 4000. For example, two types of power supplies of +5V and +12V are supplied to the reel 4301 and the reel drive motor 4341. Is supplied to the symbol variation display device 4300.

In addition, the power supply device 4112 is attached with a setting change key switch 4112t, a reset switch 4112u, a power switch 4112v, and the like. None of these switches are exposed to the outside of the slot machine 4000 and can be operated only by opening the front member 4200. The power switch 4112v is for turning on and off the power supply to the slot machine 4000, and the setting change key switch 4112t is for changing the settings (for example, the settings 1 to 6) of the slot machine 4000. Further, the reset switch 4112u is for releasing an error that has occurred in the slot machine 4000, and is also operated together with the setting change key switch 4112t when changing the setting.

Further, the main board 4600 is provided with a reel drive motor voltage switching circuit 4605. When the output shaft of the reel drive motor 4341 is rotationally driven to obtain the drive torque for rotating the reel 4301, the CPU 4601 sets the logic (for example, HI) of the voltage switching signal to set the reel drive motor voltage switching circuit 4605. Is output to the reel drive motor 4341 as a motor drive voltage. On the other hand, when obtaining the static torque for maintaining the state in which the output shaft of the reel drive motor 4341 is stopped, the CPU 4601 sets the logic (for example, LOW) of the voltage switching signal to set the reel drive motor voltage switching circuit 4605. Is output to the reel drive motor 4341 as a motor drive voltage.

The above is a configuration example of the slot machine 4000. In the game by the slot machine 4000, when the player operates the start lever 4210 in a state where the number of medals has been determined, each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c rotates, and thereafter, the player stops the reels 4211a, 4211b, 4211c. When is operated, the corresponding reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are stop-controlled, and when all the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are stopped, the game result is judged from the combination mode of the symbols on the activated line and necessary. Accordingly, the prescribed number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is awarded.

As described above, each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c is provided with a reel band on which a design is drawn. Then, when all the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are stopped, the symbols corresponding to a predetermined winning combination are displayed based on the display content (the combination mode of the symbols displayed on the activated line) displayed in the symbol display window 4401. It is determined whether or not the combination mode (symbol combination) is displayed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a combination mode of symbols corresponding to a predetermined winning combination is displayed on the above-mentioned activated line in the symbol display window 4401. In addition, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed on each of the plurality of activated lines. As a result, when it is determined that the symbol combinations of the plurality of winning combinations are displayed, the medals are paid out in a quantity obtained by adding the number of payouts corresponding to each of the displayed winning combinations.

[15-3. Storage area configuration]
Next, a storage area provided by the ROM 4602, the RAM 4603, etc. provided on the main board 4600 will be described. Although the storage area of the pachinko machine has been outlined with reference to FIG. 24, it has the same configuration as that of the slot machine 4000 shown in FIGS. 267 to 270. FIG. 267 is a diagram showing details of the access area in the game control of the slot machine 4000 according to the present embodiment and the ROM area 5100 which is a storage area corresponding to the ROM 4602.

The storage area in the present embodiment is provided by a medium such as ROM 4602 and RAM 4603, and is provided as one access area to which addresses from “0000H” to “FFFFH” are given. In addition, the access area of this embodiment is divided into predetermined areas corresponding to the medium providing the access area, and includes a ROM area 5100, a RAM area 5200, an I/O area 5300, and a parameter information setting area 5400. Has been. It should be noted that each area does not necessarily correspond to the medium that provides the access area, and one area may be provided by a plurality of media, or a plurality of areas may be provided by one medium.

By configuring the access area of the present embodiment as described above, the CPU 4601 can access the program or data by designating the address without being aware of the medium that actually provides the access area. Details of the access area will be described below.

[15-3-1. ROM area]
First, the structure of the ROM area 5100 will be described. The ROM area 5100 corresponds to the storage area provided by the ROM 4602. The ROM 4602 is a non-volatile storage medium that retains stored contents even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and the stored data can be read, but updated or deleted. You can't do that. Note that the ROM 4602 may be any non-volatile storage medium, and the data stored in the ROM area 5100 may be updatable.

The ROM area 5100 is provided with addresses from "0000H" to "1FFFH". The CPU 4601 can access the data stored in the ROM 4602 by designating the address “0000H” to “1FFFH”.

The ROM area 5100 includes a first control area, a first isolation area, a first data area, a second control area, a second isolation area, a second data area, a third control area, a third isolation area and a fourth isolation area. included. A start address and an end address are set in each area.

The first control area is a game control area and stores programs for performing game control. Further, the first data area is a game data area in which data necessary for performing game control is stored. That is, the program stored in the first control area is executed, and the game is controlled while referring to the data stored in the first data area. The area used for game control (first control area, first data area) is defined as a game control area (first storage area).

The second control area stores a program for debugging the control program (function inspection). The second data area is an area for storing data for performing debugging (function inspection). The second data area is not always necessary, and data for debugging may be stored in the second control area. In addition, an area (second control area, second data area) for storing a program and data for performing debugging (function inspection) of the game control program without being used for game control is an area for debugging (inspection function) ( Second storage area).

The third control area stores a program for calculating and displaying the accessory ratio. Data for calculating the accessory ratio is also stored in the third control area. A third data area for storing data for calculating a character ratio may be provided. An area (third control area) in which a program or data for calculating the character ratio is stored without being used for game control is defined as a character ratio calculation area (third storage area). In this way, by designing the character ratio calculation/display code 13135 separately from the game control code 13131 and storing it in another area, the inspection of the character ratio calculation/display code 13135 and the game control code 13131. Can be separately performed, and the labor of inspection of the slot machine 4000 can be reduced. Further, the accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135 can be commonly used by a plurality of models regardless of the model.

The first isolated area, the second isolated area, the third isolated area, and the fourth isolated area are areas allocated between the control area and the data area, and are areas for which access is prohibited. In the processing by the CPU 4601, when the isolated area is accessed, the reset processing is forcibly executed. The first isolated area, the second isolated area, the third isolated area, and the fourth isolated area are areas that are continuous with the front and rear areas. For example, the start address of the first isolated area is next to the end address of the first control area. Address ("0A00H"), and the end address of the first isolation area is the address ("0AFFH") immediately before the first data area. Further, the third isolation area is arranged between the game control area and the debug (function inspection) area, and is treated as the game control area in FIG. 30, but the debug (function inspection) area. May be treated as Similarly, the fourth isolation region is arranged between the debug (function inspection) region and the accessory ratio calculation region, and is treated as the debug (function inspection) region in FIG. 267. You may make it handle as a thing ratio calculation area.

[15-3-2. RAM area]
Subsequently, the configuration of the RAM area 5200 will be described. FIG. 268 is a diagram showing details of the RAM area 5200 in this embodiment. The RAM area 5200 corresponds to the storage area provided by the RAM 4603. The RAM 4603 is a volatile storage medium whose stored contents are erased when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off, and the stored data can be read and written. The RAM area 5200 temporarily stores programs and data stored in the ROM area 5100, and also stores data derived by executing the programs. The RAM 4603 may be a non-volatile storage medium as long as it can read and write data. Also, when a power failure occurs, the data stored in the RAM 4603 can be retained by the backup power supply for a predetermined period.

The RAM area 5200 is provided with addresses from "3000H" to "31FFH". The CPU 4601 can access the data stored in the RAM 4603 by designating the addresses “3000H” to “31FFH”.

The RAM area 5200 includes a game control work area, a debug (inspection function) work area, a save area, and an isolation area. A start address and an end address are set in each area.

The work area for game control is a work area (temporary area) used when executing game control (first control). The debug (inspection function) work area is a work area used when executing debug control (second control) of a program. The work area for calculating the character ratio is an area for storing data for calculating the character ratio and the calculated character ratio (character ratio, continuous character ratio, advantageous section character ratio, etc.). It should be noted that the work area for debugging (inspection function) and the work area for calculating the accessory ratio do not necessarily need to secure a dedicated work area, and a work control work area may be used, or a game control work area may be used. A work area for debugging (inspection function) or a work area for calculating a character ratio may be assigned to the work area. In this case, the independence of the game control area, the debug (inspection function) control area, and the accessory ratio calculation work area is reduced. However, if the program configuration is such that the work area for debug (inspection function) or the work area for character ratio calculation is not used, the work area for debug (inspection function) or work area for character ratio calculation is not necessarily used. Good.

The save area is an area for temporarily storing data used for game control, debug (inspection function) control, or accessory ratio calculation. For example, when an interrupt occurs and a predetermined process is executed, the values of various registers (calculation register, flag register, stack pointer, etc.) of the CPU are copied to the save area before the predetermined process is executed. After the processing is completed, the copied value is returned to various registers of the CPU. The save area may be commonly used for game control, debugging (inspection function), and accessory ratio calculation, but like the work area, for game control, debug (inspection function), and accessory ratio. It may be separately calculated and calculated. Thereby, the game control, the debug (inspection function) control, and the accessory ratio calculation can be more independent.

The isolation area is between the game control work area, the debug (inspection function) work area, and the accessory ratio calculation work area, the debug (inspection function) work area, the save area, and the accessory ratio calculation save area. It is allocated between the areas and is a continuous area with each area (the area before and after). For example, the start address of the isolation area between the game control work area and the debug (inspection function) work area is the address next to the end address of the game control work area (“3076H”), and the end address is The address ("307FH") immediately before the debug (inspection function) work area is set. Further, the isolated area is an area whose access is prohibited, and is configured to forcibly execute the reset processing when accessed in the processing by the CPU 4601.

FIG. 268 shows the details of the accessory ratio calculating work area on the right side thereof. The work area for character role ratio calculation may be provided with a backup area 1 and a backup area 2 in which a copy of the data stored in the main area is stored, in addition to the main area in which the calculated result of the character role rate is stored. .. There may be one or more backup areas. A check code for detecting a data error is added to each area. The check code may be a checksum of data in each area or a predetermined value. The check code is set in the initialization process when the slot machine 4000 is powered on, set every time the data in the main area is updated in the accessory ratio calculation/display process, or the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 271). ) May be set. In particular, when the check code has a fixed value, the check code is initialized when the initialization is determined to be normal or the data is erased, and a fixed value is set in the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 271). Good. The check code may also be used as the power failure flag. That is, if a predetermined value is set for the check code in the main area, it may be determined that the power failure flag is set. Further, if a predetermined value is set in the power failure flag, it may be determined that the check code of each area is a correct value (that is, the data of each area is normal).

In the initialization process (step S1020 of FIG. 271), it is determined whether the data in the backup area is normal, and the data in the backup area determined to be normal may be copied to the main area. Further, the value of the main area may be duplicated in each backup area in the power-off processing executed when the power is cut off.

An unused space is provided between the main area and the backup area 1 and between the backup area 1 and the backup area 2. By providing an unused space between each area, the address of each area can be kept away from each other, and each area can be distinguished by the high-order digit of the address.

FIG. 269 is a diagram showing a specific structure of a work area for storing each data in the work ratio ratio calculation work area.

FIG. 269(A) shows the structure of the work area in the simplest method. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 269(A), the number of bonuses paid out, the number of continuous bonuses paid out, the total number of payouts, the percentage of bonuses, the ratio of continuous bonuses, the number of advantageous zone games, the number of non-advantageous zone games, and the advantageous zone. Store the percentage. The bonus payout number is the number of medals paid out while the bonus product is operating (for example, during the regular bonus). The number of consecutive winning prize balls is the number of medals paid out during the operation of the consecutive winnings (for example, during a big bonus). The total payout number is the number of all medals paid out by the game. The character ratio can be calculated by the number of character payouts/the total number of payouts. The continuous character ratio can be calculated by the number of continuous character payments divided by the total number of catches paid out. The number of advantageous zone games is the number of games executed in a game state advantageous to the player (for example, a game state in which the medals on hand such as ART (assist replay time) are hard to decrease), and the number of non-advantageous zone games is , The number of games executed in the game state other than the advantageous section. The advantageous section ratio can be calculated by the number of advantageous section games/(the number of advantageous section games+the number of non-advantageous section games).

Of the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 269(A), the number of accessory payouts, the number of continuous accessory payouts, the total payout number, the number of advantageous zone games and the number of non-advantageous zone games are the totals of FIG. 269(B) described later. It corresponds to a cumulative total and is a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes, respectively, and can store numerical values up to 16777215 or 429496295 in decimal. Since these data are not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a large storage area is prepared so that the data can be stored for a long time. Also, the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, and the advantageous section ratio are 1-byte storage areas, and can store up to 255 decimal numbers.

The number of character payouts, the number of consecutive character payouts, the total number of payouts, the number of advantageous section games, and the number of non-advantageous section games are updated by the area ratio calculation area update processing (step S1038 in FIG. 271), and the character ratio is calculated. The continuous character ratio and the advantageous section ratio are calculated and stored in the character ratio calculation/display processing (step S1119 in FIG. 272).

FIG. 269(B) shows a structure of a work area using a ring buffer. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 269(B), the number of re-plays, the number of prize payouts, the number of bonus payouts, the number of consecutive bonus payouts, the number of games, the percentage of bonuses, the ratio of continuous bonuses, the number of advantageous zone games, non- The number of advantageous zone games and the advantageous zone ratio are stored. The storage area of each data is configured by a ring buffer having n storage areas for every predetermined number of games (for example, 15 storage areas for every 400 games), and the number of executed games is predetermined. When the number (400 times) is reached, the write pointers for all data are moved and the storage area where the data is updated changes. Then, after the data of the predetermined number of games is stored in the nth storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area.

The write pointer and read pointer of the ring buffer are common to all data, and the write pointer for all data moves for each predetermined number of prize balls. The read pointer also moves as the write pointer moves. The read pointer points to a storage area which is one time behind the write pointer. This is because the character ratio is calculated using the data for 400 games.

The cumulative total of each data is the cumulative value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the cumulative total of the character ratio and the continuous character ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data. Yes, when the ring buffer completes one cycle and is cleared in one storage area of the ring buffer for writing new data, the cumulative value is calculated excluding the data in the cleared area. The total sum of each data is the cumulative value of the data collected in the past, and the cumulative value of the character ratio and the continuous character ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data, and the ring buffer goes round and round. Even if the data is cleared in one storage area of the ring buffer for writing new data, the total cumulative value is calculated including the data in the cleared area.

In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 269(B), each of the number of re-plays, the number of prizes paid out, the number of bonuses paid out, the number of consecutive bonuses paid out, and the number of games in the ring buffer is a 2-byte storage area, Numerical values up to 65535 can be stored. The cumulative total of the number of re-plays, the number of prizes paid out, the number of bonuses paid out, the number of consecutive bonuses paid out, and the number of games played is a storage area of 3 bytes, and a numerical value up to 16777215 in decimal can be stored. Since the total is the total of data for 400 games×n (6000 games when n=15), a large storage area is prepared. The total cumulative total of the number of re-plays, the number of prizes paid out, the number of bonuses paid out, the number of consecutive bonuses paid out, and the number of games played is a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes, and a decimal number of 16777215 or 429496295 can be stored. Since the total sum is not erased unless data is abnormal, a larger storage area is prepared so that long-term data can be stored. In addition, the cumulative total and total cumulative total of the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are 1-byte storage areas, and can store up to 255 decimal numbers. The number of advantageous zone games and the number of non-advantageous zone games are each a storage area of 3 bytes, and a numerical value up to 16777215 in decimal can be stored. The advantageous section ratio is a 1-byte storage area, and can store up to 255 decimal values.

Note that by increasing the number of games corresponding to the data stored in each storage area forming the ring buffer (for example, 600 games), the number of continuous storage areas for storing time-series data ( Even if n) is reduced to 10, the same total data of 6000 games can be stored. Therefore, the size of the storage area used as the ring buffer can be reduced.

In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 269(B), the number of accessory payouts, the number of continuous accessory payouts, the ratio of role products, the ratio of continuous role products, the number of advantageous zone games, the number of non-advantageous zone games, and the advantage zone ratio are This is the same as the description in FIG. 269(A). The number of replays is the number of games that have been replayed. The number of winning payouts is the number of all medals paid out by the game. The number of games played is the number of games played, and when this value reaches a predetermined number, the write pointer moves.

The number of re-plays, the number of winning payouts, the number of bonus payouts, the number of consecutive bonus payouts, the total number of payouts, the number of advantageous zone games, and the number of non-advantageous zone games are the area update processing for character rate calculation (step S1038 in FIG. 271). ), the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, and the advantageous section ratio are calculated and stored in the character ratio calculation/display processing (step S1119 in FIG. 272).

In the data structure shown in FIG. 269(A), when it is determined that the stored value is abnormal, the data of the work ratio calculating work area is deleted in the initialization process (step S1020 of FIG. 271). However, the data will not be erased by other triggers. Therefore, the data in the work ratio ratio work area may be deleted every predetermined period (for example, one day, one week, or January). Similarly, the total cumulative total of FIG. 269(B) may be deleted every predetermined period.

Further, the data of the work area for calculating the character ratio and the calculated character ratio are abnormal values (for example, the character ratio exceeds 100%, and the calculated result of the character ratio has changed significantly from the previous calculated value. , The number of payouts of the accessory>the total number of payouts, etc., the abnormal value may be deleted. Not only the abnormal value, but all data in the work area for calculating the accessory ratio may be deleted. In addition, if the data of the work ratio calculating work area or the calculated work ratio is an abnormal value, it may be notified that it is abnormal. Further, the check code may be used to inspect the data in the backup area, the normal backup area data may be copied to the main area, and then the accessory ratio may be calculated again.

[15-3-3. Configuration of I/O area]
Next, the I/O area 5300 will be described. An input/output port corresponds to the I/O area 5300, and each input/output port can be accessed by the CPU 4601 accessing the I/O area 5300. The input/output port corresponds to, for example, a port related to input of a switch or the like, a port related to output of a special winning opening solenoid, an LED drive signal, or the like. The setting of the input/output port (setting regarding use/non-use of input setting, output setting, etc.) is set based on the setting value of the parameter information setting area 5400.

[15-3-4. Parameter information setting area]
Next, the parameter information setting area 5400 will be described. FIG. 270 is a diagram showing details of the parameter information setting area 5400 of the present embodiment. The parameter information setting area 5400 is an area where various settings can be made. For example, various settings include start/end addresses of each control area and data area, as shown in FIG. 270. In FIG. 270, the definition of the start address and end address of each area of the third control area, the work area for character ratio calculation, and the save area for character ratio calculation is omitted, but the third control area start setting is omitted. The third control area end setting is defined similarly to the start and end settings of other control areas, and the work ratio start work area start setting and the accessory ratio calculation work area end setting are the start and end work areas of other work areas. It is defined in the same manner as the end setting, and the accessory ratio calculating save area start setting and the accessory ratio calculating save area end setting are defined in the same manner as the start and end settings of other save areas. Areas other than the area set here are unused (unset) areas. As a result, when the CPU 4601 accesses the unused area, the reset signal is forcibly input to the CPU 4601. Note that although the areas are set to be continuous in FIG. 270, the areas do not have to be continuous, and for example, parameters may be grouped and arranged at predetermined intervals.

Further, in this embodiment, when an area other than the set area (first to fourth isolated areas of the ROM 5100, isolated areas of the RAM 5200) is accessed, a reset is forcibly generated. Therefore, it is possible to initialize the program by intentionally accessing the isolated area and causing a reset. Since the slot machine executes the processing sequentially, it is possible to execute the program from the start-up processing and execute the initial setting again by accessing the isolated area after the last game processing is completed. As a result, even if the initial setting function is set to a value different from the set value due to noise or the like during the game, it is possible to reset the normal value by executing the initial setting again. Further, in the initial setting process, the RAM clear is determined by the power failure flag, but it is possible to force the RAM clear by accessing the isolated area without setting the power failure flag. Become. On the other hand, since the above-mentioned pachinko machines play games in parallel, if the game itself is initialized, it becomes impossible to continue the game, but in the case of a slot machine, it becomes unnecessary after the game ends. Since it is necessary to initialize the RAM information, it is possible to eliminate the process for initializing the RAM information by accessing the isolated area.

The value set in the parameter information setting area 5400 is not sequentially set by user program processing such as initial setting of the CPU 4601, but the address and setting value of the parameter area are set in the ROM 4602 separately from the program. Before the control program is started by the CPU 4601, the parameter information set in the ROM 4602 is sequentially set in each function setting register of the CPU. Thereby, various parameters can be set when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. Since the setting values of various parameters are information managed (determined) by the user side, they are set in the ROM 4602 in which the game control program is stored.

[15-4. Game control]
[15-4-1. System reset start processing]
Next, control of the slot machine of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 271 is a flow chart illustrating a procedure of a system reset activation process executed when the slot machine 4000 is reset. The system reset activation process is a process that is executed when the slot machine 4000 is powered on or when a power failure occurs, and is a process that is activated when a reset signal is input to the CPU 4601.

When the system reset activation process is started, the CPU 4601 first executes a parameter setting process for setting various parameters necessary for executing a game (step S1010). Specifically, the setting value stored in the parameter information setting area 5400 included in the storage area is set in each function setting register of the CPU 4601, or the address of each area assigned to the access area is set as the setting value. By setting the address of each area as a setting value, for example, a work area or a save area is allocated to the RAM area 5200 as a used area, and an area not allocated as a used area (isolated area in FIG. 268) is regarded as an unused area. Assigned. Further, the work area and the save area are divided into a game control area and a debug (inspection function) area (or other purpose), respectively. In the ROM area 5100, similarly to the RAM area 5200, an area for storing programs and data is assigned as a used area, and an area not assigned as a used area is assigned as an unused area.

Next, the CPU 4601 executes security check processing (step S1012). The security check process is a process of determining whether or not the data stored in the ROM 4602 is normal data. If the data stored in the ROM 4602 is not normal data, for example, there is a possibility that the ROM 4602 has been replaced with an illegal ROM, so the activation of the slot machine 4000 is stopped. Further, the CPU 4601 waits until the time required for the security check has passed (step S1014).

Note that the processing from the power-on of the slot machine to the end of the security check (the processing up to step S1014) is not the processing defined by the user program, but the processing configured by the hardware in the CPU that cannot be changed by the developer. Has become.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes a device initialization setting process for performing initialization (step S1016). In the device initialization setting processing, processing such as activation setting of the periodic processing (FIG. 272, timer interrupt processing) that regularly executes a predetermined processing is executed. In the present embodiment, a parameter setting process executes a function that prevents the user program from rewriting settings related to game lottery such as setting of random number function after the security check, and device initialization setting process other than these functions. Running in. In this way, by dividing the initialization of the CPU 4601 into the parameter setting process and the device initialization setting process, the degree of freedom in game control is increased and fraud is less likely to occur in the game.

Further, the CPU 4601 determines whether to initialize the RAM 4603 (step S1018). In the process of step S1018, it is determined whether to perform a cold start for initializing the RAM 4603 or a hot start for returning to the game with the backed up contents of the RAM 4603.

When performing a cold start for initializing the RAM 4603 (result of step S1018 is “Yes”), the CPU 4601 executes initialization processing for executing initialization of the RAM 4603 (step S1020). The cold start is performed when a setting change operation of the pachinko machine 1 is performed, an abnormality occurs in the contents of the RAM 4603, or when the power interruption flag is not set.

On the other hand, when performing a hot start for returning to the game based on the contents of the RAM 4603 (the result of step S1018 is “No”), the CPU 4601 executes a process for returning the game based on the backed up contents of the RAM 4603. (Step S1022). At this time, the restoration processing restores the processing interrupted at the time of power interruption. Specifically, in any of the processing from step S1024 to step S1042 of the system reset activation processing described later or from step S1110 to step S1130 of the regular processing (FIG. 272), the processing interrupted at the power interruption is restored.

In the slot machine 4000 according to the present embodiment, the checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the RAM 4603 when a power outage occurs and when the recovery process is executed. At this time, only the game control work area excluding the debug (inspection function) work area out of all areas where the checksum calculation target is used as a work (game control work area and debug (inspection function) work area) May be Calculating the checksum only in the game control work area means that the debug (inspection function) process is designed to maintain independence from the game control process, and it affects the game result. Since it is not a process, it is possible that some bugs remain due to insufficient verification. In this case, the work area for debugging (inspection function) where the information obtained by executing such process is retained Using the checksum as the calculation target may impair the reliability of normal recovery from power failure. On the other hand, since the game control processing is directly related to the game, if it is installed in the product while bugs and the like remain, it will cause a great trouble in the market. In some cases, sales may be discontinued and it may be necessary to recover the product.In this case, it is extremely likely to cause enormous damage to the manufacturer and halls in terms of cost, etc. This is because the game control work area is highly reliable as compared with the debug (inspection function) work area because the verification is carried out dynamically.

When the initialization process ends or a series of games ends, the CPU 4601 executes a game initial setting process to start a new game (step S1024). In the game initial setting process, a process of temporarily returning the information in the RAM 4603 which is no longer necessary for performing a series of game controls to the initial setting state is executed.

When the game initial setting process ends, the CPU 4601 executes an information signal 1 output process for outputting a debug (inspection function) signal at the start of the game (step S1026). In the information signal 1 output processing, processing such as setting the debug (inspection function) signal to the initial state is performed. The information signal output processing defines information signal 1 to N output processing, and a required module is called at the timing of outputting the information signal. For example, at the time of outputting a debug (inspection function) signal (information regarding start of rotation of the reel, ON of the start lever, winning combination) accompanying the start of the game in the process at the start of the game, debug regarding stop of each reel in the symbol stop process ( Inspection function) signal (stop operation signal, stopped symbol information, etc.) When outputting a debug (inspection function) signal related to a final winning combination within the winning determination process (a final winning combination stopped on each reel, payout accompanying the final winning combination) At the time of outputting the number-of-sheets information, the information of the output signal regarding the number of payouts at the time of payout (the number of payout medals, etc.), the “information signal N output processing” module required for the processing is called and executed as appropriate.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes a standby process for performing a process in a previous stage in which the player operates the start lever 4210 (step S1028). Before operating the starting lever 4210, for example, it is determined whether or not a replay (replay) execution instruction has been issued, whether or not a medal has been inserted, whether or not a medal clearing has been performed, and further, The setting values of the game are confirmed.

When the start lever 4210 is operated, the CPU 4601 executes game start processing for starting the game (step S1030). In the game start process, a random number value for performing a lottery for a game is acquired, a winning combination is determined, and the reel 4301 is started to rotate. After that, the CPU 4601 executes Wait processing for waiting until the reel 4301 reaches the normal rotation speed (step S1032).

When the reel 4301 reaches the normal rotation speed, the CPU 4601 enables the input of the reel stop button 4211 and executes the symbol stop processing for performing the processing until all reels 4301 stop (step S1034).

Further, when all the reels 4301 are stopped, the CPU 4601 executes a winning determination process for determining a winning combination based on the stopped symbols (step S1036). In the winning determination process, the winning combination is determined, and when it is determined that the winning combination is made, the setting corresponding to the winning combination is performed and the setting for executing the payout process corresponding to the winning combination is performed.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 determines the current game state, adds the number of award medals paid out as a game value to the area corresponding to the current game state, and the work area for calculating the character ratio in the RAM area 5200 (FIG. 268 (see FIG. 269)) (step S1038). The process of step S1038 can be skipped when there is no prize medal to be paid out in step S1036, and the load on the CPU 4601 can be reduced.

Even if the slot machine 4000 detects an injustice and stops the game, it executes the accessory ratio calculation area updating process (step S1038). Regardless of whether or not a fraud is detected, by executing these processes, it is possible to collect data for calculating the character ratio even during the fraud notification.

Finally, the CPU 4601 executes a game end process for performing a process at the end of the game (step S1042). In the game ending process, a payout process corresponding to a winning combination is executed. If no prize has been won, or if there is no payout, the process is skipped. When the game ending process ends, the process returns to the game initial setting process, and the main loop process from step S1024 to step S1038 is executed.

[15-4-2. Periodic processing]
Next, a periodic process that is an interrupt process that is activated at a predetermined cycle while the main loop process of the system reset initial activation process is being executed will be described. FIG. 272 is a flowchart showing the procedure of regular processing.

When the regular processing is executed, the CPU 4601 first saves the values stored in all the registers (step S1110). At this time, the data to be saved is stored in the game control save area shown in FIG. 268. As described above, since the regular process is an interrupt process that is activated while the main loop process is being executed, it is possible to continue the process after returning by saving the register of the CPU used in the main loop process. Need to

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 resets the watchdog timer incorporated in the CPU (step S1112). This allows the watchdog timer to be periodically cleared.

Next, the CPU 4601 executes switch input processing for sampling input signals from various switches (step S1114). Furthermore, a game state check process is executed (step S1116). In the game state check processing, processing relating to drive control of a driving body (stepping motor) that rotates the reel 4301 is performed. Specifically, the pulse output of the stepping motor and the detection of the origin position are performed.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes timer measurement processing for updating various timers used in game control (step S1118). Since the periodic processing is periodically executed, the set time is the execution interval of the periodic processing×the set number of times.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 determines whether or not the display switch 1318 is operated. If the display switch 1318 is operated, the character ratio calculation/display processing is called, and the medal stored in the character ratio calculation work area. Calculate the character ratio by referring to the number of payouts. Then, the calculated accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 (step S1119). The character ratio calculation/display processing is the same as the character ratio calculation/display processing (FIGS. 24 and 25) described in the embodiment of the pachinko machine 1. The specific method of calculating the character ratio and the specific method of displaying the character ratio are the same as those described in the embodiment of the pachinko machine 1. In this way, by calling the character ratio calculation/display process in the timer interrupt process and calculating the character ratio, the character ratio (the gambling property of the slot machine 4000) based on the latest data can be confirmed.

When the display switch 1318 is operated, all types of values (characteristic ratio, continuous character ratio, total, total cumulative total) may be calculated, but display is performed for each operation of the display switch 1318. You may calculate only the value which is carried out. Further, the accessory ratio may be calculated regardless of whether the display switch 1318 is operated, and the calculated accessory ratio may be displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 in response to the operation of the display switch 1318.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes an LED output process for controlling the LED (step S1120). The LED to be controlled is the one controlled by the main board 4600, and is, for example, the payout number display LED 4562. Further, it outputs data for displaying the accessory ratio on the LED.

The CPU 4601 executes an information output process of outputting a signal to the external relay terminal board 4131 (step S1122). The output signal is transmitted to the hall computer 4800 via the external relay terminal board 4131. Further, the CPU 4601 outputs the command stored in the command buffer to the effect control board 4700 (step S1124).

The CPU 4601 executes random number update processing for updating the random number used in the game (step S1126). In the random number update process, the random number to be generated by the software process is updated. Here, in addition to random numbers generated only by software, update processing of soft random numbers built in the CPU is executed. With the software random number built into the CPU, the count itself is executed by hardware, but the trigger for update is determined in this process. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the program processing related to the random number update.

When the random number update process ends, the CPU 4601 performs a process for returning to the interrupted process (main loop process). Specifically, the value of the register saved in the process of step S1110 is restored (step S1128). Further, execution of interrupt is permitted (step S1130). Even if a new timer interrupt occurs during the periodic processing (timer interrupt processing), the new timer interrupt is pending, and the timer interrupt processing executed immediately before is normally completed and the interrupt is enabled. It is supposed to be executed. Therefore, the regular processing (timer interrupt processing) is configured so as not to be executed in a multiple manner.

[15-4-3. Information signal output processing]
Next, the information signal output process executed in the system reset activation process and the like will be described. The information signal output processing is provided according to each function (1 to N) of the output signal, and is configured by a plurality of modules. For example, there are "condition device output signal (signal output related to condition device operation)", "lottery determination processing (signal output related to lottery)", and the like. Although the signals to be output are different, the configuration of each information output process is basically the same, so the description of each flow will be omitted. FIG. 273 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the information signal output process of this embodiment.

When the information signal output process is started, the CPU 4601 first saves the values of all the registers of the CPU (step S1210). This is to prevent the values set in the registers from being destroyed by executing the information signal output processing (to ensure that the values are restored even if they are destroyed), and save the values of all registers in the stack area. It is designed to let you. In addition, the stack area used at this time is allocated to the save area for debugging (inspection function), and is allocated to a different area separated from the save area for game control.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 acquires, from the RAM 4603, information to be referred to for selecting (ON/OFF) the output information signal (debugging (inspection function) signal) (step S1212). In each information signal output process, only the information stored in the RAM 4603 is referred to, data is not written to the RAM 4603 in the process, and when writing is necessary, the information is output to the work area for debugging (inspection function). A dedicated work is provided, and the work is configured not to be used (including reference) in processes other than the information signal output process. As a result, even if the program for executing the information signal output process is arranged in a different place from other game control programs, it is possible to ensure independence from other game control programs without using a common area. ..

Next, the CPU 4601 generates an information signal to be output based on the information acquired in the process of step S1212 (step S1214), and outputs the generated signal to the corresponding port (step S1216). Furthermore, it waits until the information signal output time, which is the time for maintaining the output signal, elapses (step S1218). The information signal output time is predetermined, and by setting a sufficient time, the debug (inspection function) signal can be reliably transmitted to the destination. After that, the values of all the registers saved in the processing of step S1210 are restored (step S1220), and this processing ends.

As described above, the information signal (debugging (inspection function) signal) is generated and output by the processing from step S1210 to step S1220. Then, the processes from step S1210 to step S1220 are executed by the amount of the debug (inspection function) signal to be output. Different types and numbers of signals are output for each function (1 to N) of the output signal. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of information signal output processing are defined for each function, but a table defining output signals corresponding to the functions is stored in the debug (inspection function) area as a table. The information signal output processing may be made common by preparing in two data areas and selecting and outputting a signal corresponding to the function specified by the calling source.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the program (signal output program) for executing the information signal output processing and the like is stored in an area that is clearly distinguished from the area (game control area) that stores the game control program. By providing the area (area for debug (inspection function)), a program for the purpose of debugging (inspection function) of the pachinko machine 1 can be independently arranged. The signal output program is used for the purpose of debugging (inspection function) of the pachinko machine 1, is a process that does not affect the result of the game, and does not impair the fairness of the game. In addition, for other purposes (for example, to arrange a game control program or a general-purpose program to compensate for the lack of capacity in the game control area), the program should not be placed in the debug (inspection function) area. It has become.

The signal output program is executed after being statically called from the game control program, and at this time, the address of the call destination is specified. Furthermore, the signal output program is modularized for each function, and protects all registers used in the game control area when called. Also, as described above, when program processing of the game control area is being executed, access to the work area for debug (inspection function) is prohibited, and program processing for the debug (inspection function) area is executed. When it is, only the reference of the game control work area is permitted, and the writing is prohibited. Furthermore, it is configured to prohibit calling of modules (including subroutines) arranged in the game control area from the debug (inspection function) area. The program arranged in the debug (inspection function) area including the signal output program is always called in the subroutine format, and after the completion of the subroutine, the program is returned immediately after being called by the return instruction. The modules stored in the debug (inspection function) area are configured for each purpose. With this configuration, the execution of the game control program is not affected by the execution of the signal output program (the program arranged in the debug (inspection function) area).

In the embodiment of the slot machine 4000, the erase timing of the RAM (work area for game control, work area for character ratio calculation) may be the same as steps S18 to S26 of FIG. 21 of the embodiment of the pachinko machine 1. The slot machine 4000 does not have a RAM clear switch, and erases the backup data in the gaming state when the setting change key switch 4112t is operated.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, in addition to the effects described in the examples of the pachinko machine described above, it is possible to accurately calculate the accessory ratio of the slot machine in operation, and to improve the gambling property of the game machine in operation. I can confirm.

Although the present invention has been described in detail above with reference to the accompanying drawings, the present invention is not limited to such specific configurations, and various modifications and equivalents within the spirit of the appended claims The configuration is included.

Among the inventions disclosed in this specification, the following are typical ones from the viewpoint of the invention other than those described in the claims.

(0) A gaming machine that adds gaming value to a player,
A main controller that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
And an accessory ratio display for displaying information about the game value given,
The accessory ratio display has a display device and a driver circuit for driving the display device,
The main controller is
Transmitting data for displaying on the accessory ratio display to the driver circuit by serial communication,
After the power is turned on, for serial communication with the driver circuit, a synchronization method, a communication rate, whether to use a parity, and whether to use a stop bit is set, the game according to the preceding paragraphs, Machine.

(1) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein communication between the main control device and the driver circuit is slower than communication between the main control device and peripheral control device.

In this way, it is possible to suppress the incorrect display of the accessory ratio due to the garbled data during communication.

(2) The main controller is
It has a work RAM that retains data related to the progress of games and data for calculating accessory ratios even while the power is cut off.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the setting for the serial communication is executed after the work RAM is cleared.

As a result, it is possible to prevent incorrect display of the accessory ratio by using the RAM data having incorrect contents.

(3) The main controller is
It has a function to transmit the data accumulated in the FIFO buffer by serial communication,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein after the power is turned on, a data storage amount that determines the timing of sending data from the FIFO buffer is set.

This allows data to be transmitted from the FIFO buffer with an arbitrary number of bits.

(4) A gaming machine that adds gaming value to a player,
A main controller that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
And an accessory ratio display for displaying information about the game value given,
The accessory ratio display has a display device and a driver circuit for driving the display device,
The main controller, the display device, and the driver are arranged such that the length of a signal line connecting the main controller and the driver circuit is longer than the length of a signal line connecting the driver circuit and the display device. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that a circuit is arranged.

By lengthening the signal line that connects the main control unit and the driver circuit, it is easy to find unauthorized modifications without arranging parts around the main control unit, and further, the signal line that connects the driver circuit and the display device. Is shorter than the signal line connecting the main control device and the driver circuit, the influence of noise can be reduced and the accessory ratio can be displayed more accurately.

(5) The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the main controller and the accessory ratio indicator are housed in one case.

This makes it easy to find an unauthorized modification without disposing other parts around the main control device and further reduce the influence of noise.

(6) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the main controller and the accessory ratio display are arranged on one printed circuit board.

This makes it easy to find an unauthorized modification without disposing other components on the printed circuit board around the main control device, and further to reduce the influence of noise.

(7) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the accessory ratio display is configured by housing the display device and the driver circuit in one package.

Thereby, the influence of noise on the signal line connecting the driver circuit and the display device can be reduced. Further, the signal line connecting the driver circuit and the display device can be shortened.

(8) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein a guard pattern (ground pattern or power supply pattern) is provided along a signal line that connects the main control device and the driver circuit.

As a result, it is possible to reduce the influence of noise on the signal line that connects the main control device and the driver circuit.

(9) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the display direction of the accessory ratio display is the same as the display direction of the model number on the surface of the main control device.

With this, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the main control device is replaced and the displayed accessory ratio without taking an unreasonable posture.

(10) The driver circuit has a standby mode in which characters and numbers are not displayed on the display device and power consumption is reduced.
The game machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the main controller sets the driver circuit to a standby state when the accessory ratio indicator is in a closed state where the game machine ratio display is not visible in the installed state of the game machine. Machine.

Thereby, it is possible to prevent unnecessary power consumption of the gaming machine when the display of the accessory ratio is unnecessary.

(11) A gaming machine, which gives a player a prize ball as a game value by winning a game ball launched toward a game area into a predetermined winning opening,
A main controller that controls the progress of the game,
With a character ratio indicator that displays information about prize balls,
The winning opening has a general winning opening in which the shape of the entrance does not change depending on the gaming state, and an electric winning opening in which the opening opens or expands depending on the gaming state,
The main control device determines the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player, at least, by the number of first prize balls to be paid out when the prize is given to the general prize-winning opening and the prize-winning to the electric prize-winning opening. Separately counting the number of second prize balls to be paid out,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the accessory ratio indicator displays information regarding a ratio between the number of the first prize balls and the number of the second prize balls.

(12) The main controller stores the counted number of prize balls in a memory,
The memory stores a check code for verifying the stored number of prize balls,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the main controller erases the number of prize balls stored in the memory when the check code is not normal.

As a result, it is possible to detect an abnormality in the number of prize balls stored in the memory and suppress the display of an incorrect accessory ratio (ratio between the number of first prize balls and the number of second prize balls).

(13) The main controller is
The memory has a first backup area and a second backup area in which the stored contents are retained even when the power is cut off,
Store the game control data in the first backup area,
Data of the number of prize balls for calculating the character ratio is stored in the second backup area,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the data stored in the first backup area and the data stored in the second backup area are erased under different conditions.

As a result, when at least one of the data for game control and the data for the number of prize balls for calculating the character ratio is normal, only the abnormal data can be erased and the normal data can be left.

(14) The main controller is
The memory has a first backup area and a second backup area in which the stored contents are retained even when the power is cut off,
Store the game control data in the first backup area,
Data of the number of prize balls for calculating the character ratio is stored in the second backup area,
If the RAM clear switch is operated when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the data stored in the first backup area is erased, but the data stored in the second backup area is not erased. A gaming machine according to item.

If the character ratio calculation/display data 13136 can be deleted by operating the RAM clear switch, the character ratio calculated by the gaming machine can be deleted at any timing. Therefore, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up character ratio calculation/display data 13136 is prevented from being erased, and the character ratio calculation/display data 13136 is prevented from being erased by the operation of the attendant at the game arcade. It is possible to prevent concealment in a state where the ratio of the accessory is high. Therefore, it is possible to easily detect the gaming machine that has been modified to have a high character ratio, and prevent concealment of the character with a high character ratio.

(15A) A gaming machine that adds gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game,
Display means for displaying information about the game value provided,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the control means updates the information on the gaming value to be displayed on the display means upon the input/output of a predetermined signal.

(15B) The information regarding the game value is a base,
The control means is
Control the progress of the game by switching between the special game state in which the player can obtain many game values and the normal game state other than the special game state,
The number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal game state is the number of consumed balls consumed by the player in the normal game state (for example, the number of game balls launched in the game area, the game discharged from the gaming machine). The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the base is calculated by dividing the number by the number of balls, the number of gaming balls that have passed through the outlet, and the number of winning balls.

(15C) The control means receives, as the predetermined signal, a winning detection signal for detecting a prize at a winning opening, a timing for receiving a reception confirmation signal of a prize ball payout command or a prize ball payout completion signal, or a prize ball The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the number of prize balls used for calculating the base to be displayed on the display means is updated at the timing of transmitting the prize ball payout command instructing the payout.

(15D) The control means is
Stores the total number of prize balls used to calculate the base,
In the normal game state, when receiving a signal detecting the winning of the game ball to the winning opening provided in the game area, calculate the number of winning balls defined corresponding to the winning opening,
Updating the total number of prize balls using the calculated number of prize balls,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

(15E) A payout control means for controlling payout of prize balls to the player is provided,
The control means is
Stores the total number of prize balls used to calculate the base,
In the normal game state, when the winning of the game ball is detected in the winning opening provided in the game area, the number of prize balls defined corresponding to the winning opening is calculated,
Instructing the payout control means to pay out the calculated number of prize balls to the player,
Updating the total number of prize balls using the number of prize balls instructed to the payout control means,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

(15F) A payout control means for controlling payout of prize balls to a player is provided,
The control means is
Stores the total number of prize balls used to calculate the base,
In the normal game state, when the winning of the game ball is detected in the winning opening provided in the game area, the number of prize balls defined corresponding to the winning opening is calculated,
Instructing the payout control means to pay out the calculated number of prize balls to the player,
Receiving confirmation of receipt of the instruction from the payout control means,
Update the total number of prize balls using the number of prize balls corresponding to the instruction received the confirmation of receipt,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

(15G) A payout control means for controlling payout of prize balls to the player is provided,
The control means is
Stores the total number of prize balls used to calculate the base,
In the normal game state, when the winning of the game ball is detected in the winning opening provided in the game area, the number of prize balls defined corresponding to the winning opening is calculated,
Instructing the payout control means to pay out the calculated number of prize balls to the player,
Receiving completion of payout of prize balls according to the instruction from the payout control means,
Updating the total number of prize balls using the number of prize balls corresponding to the instruction that has received the completion of the payout,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

(15H) The control means, triggered by the input/output of a predetermined signal, updates the information on the game value to be displayed on the display means, and the display means on the updated information on the game value. The game machine according to each of the preceding items, further comprising: a processing and displaying unit that processes (statistically processes) and displays the result of the arithmetic processing performed when updating the information.

According to the inventions of 15A to 15H, the process relating to the acquisition of the game medium can be accurately executed.

(16A) A gaming machine that adds gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game,
Display means for displaying information about the game value provided,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the control means updates information regarding a gaming value to be displayed on the display means in association with a game situation satisfying a predetermined condition.

(16B) The information regarding the game value is a base,
The control means is
Control the progress of the game by switching between the special game state in which the player can obtain many game values and the normal game state other than the special game state,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the base is calculated at a timing when the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal gaming state reaches a predetermined number.

(16C) The control means is
Stores the total number of prize balls used to calculate the base,
In the normal game state, when the winning of the game ball is detected in the winning opening provided in the game area, the number of winning balls defined corresponding to the winning opening is calculated and stored in the buffer,
The predetermined number is moved from the buffer to the total number of prize balls at a predetermined timing, and the total number of prize balls is consumed by the player in the normal game state (for example, the number of game balls launched in the game area). The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the base is calculated by dividing by the number of gaming balls discharged from the gaming machine, the number of out-passing balls and the number of winning balls).

(16D) The predetermined timing is a timing when the number of prize balls in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number,
When the number of prize balls in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number, the control means subtracts the predetermined number from the buffer and adds the predetermined number to the total number of prize balls to obtain the total prize balls from the buffer. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the predetermined number is moved to a number.

(16E) The control means, triggered by the input/output of a predetermined signal, updates the information on the game value to be displayed on the display means, and the display means on the updated information on the game value. The game machine according to each of the preceding items, further comprising: a processing and displaying unit that processes (statistically processes) and displays the result of the arithmetic processing performed when updating the information.

According to the inventions of 16A to 16E, it is possible to accurately execute a process different from the game property while maintaining the game property under the restriction of the main control device in the rule.

(17A) A gaming machine that adds gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game,
Display means for displaying information about the game value provided,
The control means is
Count the number of balls consumed by the player,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that information regarding the gaming value to be displayed on the display means is updated in association with the fact that the counted number of consumed balls satisfies a predetermined condition.

(17B) The control means is
Control the progress of the game by switching between the special game state in which the player can obtain many game values and the normal game state other than the special game state,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the information about the gaming value is calculated at a timing when the number of consumed balls in the normal gaming state reaches a predetermined number.

(17C) The control means uses the number of game balls launched in the game area, the number of game balls ejected from the gaming machine, or the sum of the number of game balls that have passed through the outlet and the number of prize balls, and the number of consumed balls. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that

(17D) The information regarding the game value is a base,
The control means is
Stores the total number of out balls used to calculate the base,
Calculate the number of balls consumed in the normal game state, and store it in a buffer,
The base is calculated by moving a predetermined number from the buffer to the total number of out balls at a predetermined timing, and dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal gaming state by the total number of out balls. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that.

(17E) The predetermined timing is a timing when the number of balls consumed in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number,
When the number of spheres consumed in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number, the control means subtracts the predetermined number from the buffer and adds the predetermined number to the total number of out balls so that the total out balls from the buffer. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the gaming machine is moved by a predetermined number.

(17F) The control means is
With the winning of the starting winning opening as a trigger, execute a special symbol variable display game for deriving the special gaming state,
When the pending storage of the special symbol variable display game is an upper limit value, the number of prize balls is counted without storing the winning in the starting winning opening, and the gaming machine according to each of the preceding items.

(17G) The control means, triggered by the input/output of a predetermined signal, updates the information on the game value to be displayed on the display means, and the display means on the updated information on the game value. The game machine according to each of the preceding items, further comprising: a processing and displaying unit that processes (statistically processes) and displays the result of the arithmetic processing performed when updating the information.

According to the inventions of 17A to 17G, it is possible to accurately execute a process different from the game property while maintaining the game property.

(18A) A gaming machine that adds gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game,
Display means for displaying the information about the given game value,
And a main body frame to which a game board having a game area in which the game is played is detachably attached,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the display means displays the information regarding the gaming value even when the main frame is closed.

(18B) The main body frame is rotatably attached to an outer frame attached to an island facility of a game arcade,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the display means is provided on a back surface side of the gaming machine that is visible when the main body frame is opened.

(18C) The control means is attached to the body frame,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the display means is provided in the case of the control means so as to be visible from the back side of the gaming machine.

According to the inventions of 18A to 18C, it is possible to suppress a decrease in hole sales.

(19A)
A gaming machine that adds gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game,
Display means for displaying information about the game value provided,
The control means is
Information updating means for updating information about a game value to be displayed on the display means in association with satisfying a predetermined condition in the game,
It has a game execution means for executing a special symbol variable display game triggered by winning the start winning hole,
Even when the predetermined condition is satisfied while the special symbol variable display game is being played by the game executing means, the information regarding the game value is updated, The game machine described.

(19B) The information on the game value is a base,
The control means, as the predetermined condition, at the timing of any one of the detection of the winning of the winning opening, the transmission of the prize ball payout command, the reception of the receipt confirmation of the prize ball payout command and the reception of the prize ball payout completion signal. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the number of prize balls used for calculating the base to be displayed on the display means is updated.

According to the inventions of 19A to 19B, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which sufficient countermeasures against fraud are provided even during a variable display game.

(20A) A gaming machine that adds gaming value to a player,
Main control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game,
Production control means for controlling the production of the special symbol variable display game which is carried out with the winning of the winning opening as a trigger,
And a game value information display means for displaying information about the game value given,
The effect control means,
Control the transition to the low power mode in which the power consumption of the gaming machine is reduced from the normal mode,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that a display mode that reduces the power consumption of the game value information display means is not changed during the low power mode.

(20B) The effect display means for displaying the effect of the special symbol variable display game and including liquid crystal display means having a backlight,
The effect display means reduces the brightness of the backlight during the low power mode,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the game value information display means is configured by a light emitting diode and does not reduce the brightness even during the low power mode.

(20C) Equipped with effect display means for displaying the effect of the special symbol variable display game,
The effect display means controls the display mode to the low power mode when a predetermined time elapses after the pending storage of the special symbol variable display game is exhausted,
The game value information display means does not change the display mode such that the power consumption is reduced even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the reserved storage of the special symbol variable display game has been exhausted. The gaming machine described in the preceding items.

According to the inventions of 20A to 20C, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having a rich energy saving mode.

(21A) A gaming machine that adds gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game,
Display means for displaying information about the game value provided,
The control means is
A normal game state and a game state control means for controlling the game state to one of a plurality of advantageous game states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal game state,
The information regarding the game value is calculated and updated by dividing the number of prize balls in the normal game state by the number of balls consumed by the player in the normal game state, and is updated. Game machine.

(21B) The control means, by any one of the number of game balls hit in the game area, the number of game balls discharged from the gaming machine, and the sum of the number of game balls that have passed through the outlet and the number of winning balls. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the number of consumed balls in the normal gaming state is counted.

(21C) The control means is
When the special symbol variable display game is a big hit, the advantageous game state is derived, and the player controls to open a winning opening from which many game values can be obtained.
From the jackpot determination by the special symbol variable display game to the start of the next special symbol variable display game, the advantageous game state is set, and the number of prize balls and the number of consumed balls during this period are excluded from the calculation of the information on the game value. The gaming machine described in the preceding items.

(21D) The control means is
In the advantageous game state, the player controls to open a winning opening through which many game values can be obtained,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the number of gaming balls won in the winning port is excluded from the number of gaming balls launched in the gaming area, and the number of consuming balls in the normal gaming state is counted.

According to the inventions of 21A to 21D, accurate information can be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

(22A) A game machine which gives a game ball when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game,
A display means for displaying information about the given game balls,
In the game area where the launched game balls roll, there is a starting opening that triggers a special game state that facilitates the acquisition of a large amount of game balls, and a trigger that derives an open state from the closed state of the starting opening. There is at least a passage opening that becomes,
The control means is
It is also possible to control to a special game state where it is easy to derive the open state of the starting opening,
The number of award balls given to the player is excluded by excluding the number of award balls given and the number of balls consumed by the player when controlled to either the special game state or the special game state. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the information about the game ball is calculated and updated by dividing by the number of balls consumed by a person.

(22B) The control means may be one of the number of game balls hit in the game area, the number of game balls discharged from the gaming machine, and the sum of the number of game balls that have passed through the out port and the number of winning balls. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the number of consumed balls in the normal state is counted.

(22C) The control means sets the expanded state from the hit confirmation by the normal symbol variable display game to the start of the next normal symbol variable display game, and determines the number of prize balls and the number of consumed balls during this period with respect to the game ball. The gaming machine described in the preceding paragraphs, which is excluded from the calculation of information.

(22D) The control means counts the number of consumed balls in the normal state by excluding the number of game balls winning the starting opening from the number of game balls launched in the game area. The gaming machine described in each item.

According to the inventions 22A to 22D, accurate information can be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

(23A) A launcher which is operable by a player and launches a game ball toward a game area,
Prize ball giving means for giving a predetermined number of prize balls when the game balls are detected at a winning opening provided in the game area,
Main control means for executing a lottery whether or not to give an advantageous game state advantageous to the player, when the game ball is detected at a predetermined prize hole of the prize holes,
A gaming machine comprising: peripheral control means for determining an effect to be displayed based on the information transmitted from the main control means,
The main control means has an information updating means capable of updating the information about the assigned game balls to both increase and decrease,
A first state in which the information about the assigned game balls can be updated by the information updating means, and a first state in which the information about the provided gaming balls can be updated by the information updating means. There is at least a second state in which the rate at which the information regarding the given game balls is updated to increase is suppressed as compared with the 1 state,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the peripheral control means determines the appearance of a special effect that indicates that the first state has transitioned to the second state.

(23B) The information about the game value is a base,
The main control means,
Control the progress of the game by switching between the special game state in which the player can obtain many game values and the normal game state other than the special game state,
The base is calculated by dividing the number of prize balls in the normal game state by the number of balls consumed by the player in the normal game state,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the peripheral control means determines the appearance of the adversity effect by setting the timing at which the base is likely to decrease as the second state.

(23C) The main control means is
Write information about the game sphere in the storage area at every predetermined time, every predetermined number of prize balls or every predetermined number of consumed balls,
By comparing the information about the game ball written in the storage area with the information about the game ball stored in the storage area before the writing, it is determined whether the information about the game ball is increased or decreased.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the peripheral control means determines the appearance of the adversity effect according to the determined increase or decrease.

According to the inventions of 23A to 23C, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest even if the variable display game is discontinued for a long time.

(24A) A gaming machine that adds gaming value to a player,
Control means for repeatedly executing a program for controlling the progress of the game,
Display means for displaying the information about the given game value,
Prize ball number acquisition means for acquiring the number of prize balls to be acquired by the player at a predetermined timing,
And a consumption ball detecting means for detecting consumption balls consumed by the player,
The control means is
When the predetermined timing and the detection of the consumed sphere by the consumed sphere number detection means occur within the same repetition, the number of prize balls acquired at the predetermined timing and the detected consumed sphere number within the same repetition. Count with
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, characterized in that information regarding the gaming value is calculated using the counted number of prize balls and the number of consumed balls.

(24B) The information about the game value is a base,
The control means is
Control the progress of the game by switching between the special game state in which the player can obtain many game values and the normal game state other than the special game state,
The total number of prize balls in the normal game state and the number of game balls consumed by the player in the normal game state are counted within the same repetition,
Information regarding the game value is calculated by dividing the total number of prize balls in the normal game state by the number of game balls consumed by the player in the normal game state. Machine.

According to the inventions of 24A to 24B, the information on the number of game media acquired by the player can be quickly displayed.

(25A) A gaming machine that adds gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game,
Display means for displaying the information about the given game value,
Out mouth detection means for detecting a game ball that has passed through the out mouth provided at the bottom of the game area,
And a winning ball detecting means for detecting a winning ball to a predetermined winning opening,
The control means is
There is a game state control means for controlling to any one of the normal game state and the special game state in which the player can obtain more game value than the normal game state,
Counting the number of game balls that have passed through the outlet from the output of the outlet detection means,
Counting the number of winning balls from the output of the winning ball detecting means,
By the sum of the number of game balls that have passed through the outlet and the number of winning balls, the number of balls consumed by the player is counted,
The game value information is calculated by dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal game state at a predetermined timing by the number of consumed balls in the normal game state. , The gaming machine described in the preceding items.

(25B) A gaming machine that adds gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game,
Display means for displaying the information about the given game value,
And a detection means for counting the number of game balls hit in the game area,
The control means is
There is a game state control means for controlling to any one of the normal game state and the special game state in which the player can obtain more game value than the normal game state,
Counting the number of game balls that have been launched into the game area from the output of the detection means, to count the number of game balls consumed by the player,
The game value information is calculated by dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal game state at a predetermined timing by the number of consumed balls in the normal game state. , The gaming machine described in the preceding items.

(25C) A gaming machine that adds gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game,
Display means for displaying the information about the given game value,
And a detection means for counting the number of game balls discharged from the gaming machine,
The control means is
There is a game state control means for controlling to any one of the normal game state and the special game state in which the player can obtain more game value than the normal game state,
Counting the number of game balls discharged from the gaming machine from the output of the detecting means, counting the number of balls consumed by the player,
The game value information is calculated by dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal game state at a predetermined timing by the number of consumed balls in the normal game state. , The gaming machine described in the preceding items.

According to the inventions of 25A to 25C, the process relating to the acquisition of the game medium can be accurately executed.

(26A) A gaming machine that adds gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game,
Display means for displaying information about the game value provided,
The control means is
Game state control means for controlling to any one of the normal game state and the special game state in which the player can obtain more game value than the normal game state,
A prize ball number counting means for counting the number of prize balls excluding the number of prize balls given when a game ball launched toward the right side of the game area is won in a winning opening in which winning is possible,
It has a consumption ball number counting means for counting the number of consumption balls consumed by the player excluding the number of game balls launched toward the right side of the game area,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the control means updates the information regarding the gaming value by using the counted number of prize balls and the number of consumed balls.

(26B) The information about the game value is a base,
Excluding the number of prize balls that are awarded when the game balls launched toward the right side of the game area are awarded in the winning opening, and the number of prize balls in the normal game state is counted,
Counting the number of consumed balls in the normal game state excluding the number of game balls launched toward the right side of the game area,
The control means calculates the information regarding the game value by dividing the counted number of prize balls in the normal game state by the number of consumed balls in the normal game state, wherein each of the preceding paragraphs is characterized. Game machine.

(26C) The control means, for a predetermined period of time after detecting a passage of a game ball of a gate portion provided on the right side of the game area or a winning of a winning opening provided on the right side of the game area, The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, which is excluded from the number of prize balls and the number of consumed balls.

(26D) The control means determines the predetermined period by either a predetermined time period from the last detection, a time period in which a predetermined number of game balls are consumed, or a time period in which a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. The gaming machine described in the preceding items.

(26E) The control means excludes the number of passing balls of a gate portion provided on the right side of the game area and the number of winning balls to a winning opening provided on the right side of the game area, and the number of winning balls and The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the number of consumed balls is counted.

According to the inventions of 26A to 26E, accurate information can be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

(27A) A gaming machine that adds gaming value to a player,
Main control means for deriving a gaming state that is advantageous to the player based on the result of the winning lottery in the game,
First data setting means for setting the first data according to the result of the game,
Second data setting means for setting second data that does not depend on the result of the game,
Third data setting means for setting third data according to the result of the game,
First conversion means for obtaining first converted data from the first data set by the first data setting means and the second data set by the second data setting means;
Second conversion means for obtaining second conversion data from the first conversion data obtained by the first conversion means and the third data set by the third data setting means;
And a display unit for displaying the second conversion data without displaying the first conversion data.

(27B) The game machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the display means does not display the second conversion data when the second conversion data is a numerical value in a predetermined range.

(27C) The first conversion means is a multiplication means, and at a timing when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the first conversion data is multiplied by the second data to obtain first conversion data. The gaming machine described in the preceding items.

(27D) The second conversion means is a division means, and at a timing when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the first conversion data is divided by the third data to obtain second conversion data. , The gaming machine described in the preceding items.

(27E) The first data is a game value (for example, the number of prize balls) given to the player,
The third data is a game value consumed by the player (for example, the number of out balls),
The second conversion means divides the first conversion data by the third data to obtain information about the given game value as second conversion data,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the display displays information (for example, a base) about a gaming value obtained by the second converting means.

According to the inventions of 27A to 27E, the information regarding the result of the game can be displayed accurately and quickly. In particular, the base value required for evaluation of the gaming machine can be accurately displayed in real time. Further, by using the second conversion means (division means), it is possible to accurately display the information on the game value (for example, the base value) in real time while suppressing an increase in the processing load of the control means.

(28A) A gaming machine that adds gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing a regular process for controlling the progress of the game,
Display means for displaying the information about the given game value,
And a conversion unit that calculates information about the game value,
The control means is
An argument is passed to the conversion means at a predetermined timing, and a result converted by the conversion means based on the argument is obtained from the conversion means,
A game machine characterized in that the process of passing the argument and the process of acquiring the result of the conversion can be executed within one regular process.

(28B) The conversion means is
An arithmetic circuit that performs a division operation,
A divisor register into which the divisor is input, a dividend register into which the dividend is input, and a result register for outputting the quotient of the division operation,
The control means is
Write an argument to the divisor register and the dividend register,
After a lapse of a predetermined time from writing the argument, read the quotient from the result register,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, characterized in that the process of writing an argument to the divisor register and the dividend register is executed before the predetermined time from the end of the repeatedly executed program.

(28C) Prize game medium number counting means for counting the game medium given to the player in a predetermined game state,
And a consumed game medium number counting means for counting the game medium consumed by the player in the predetermined game state,
The control means is
A value obtained by multiplying the number of prize game media counted by the prize game medium number counting means by 100 is written in the dividend register,
Writing the consumption game medium number counted by the consumption game medium number counting means in the divisor register,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein a base value is read from the result register.

According to the inventions of 28A to 28C, the information regarding the result of the game can be displayed accurately and quickly. In particular, since the process of passing an argument to the conversion circuit and the process of acquiring the conversion result from the conversion circuit are executed within one iteration process (timer interrupt process), it is possible to prevent the control from becoming complicated.

(29A) A gaming machine that adds gaming value to a player,
With a winning opening where game balls can be won,
Control means for controlling the progress of the game,
Display means for displaying the information about the given game value,
A consumed ball counting means for counting the consumed balls consumed by the player,
And a prize ball counting means for counting prize balls to be given to the player,
At least one of the winning openings is a specific winning opening that can be switched between an open state where game balls are easily won and a closed state where winning is difficult,
The control means is
Based on the counted number of consumed balls and the number of prize balls, the information about the game value to be displayed on the display means is updated,
If a winning is detected in the specific winning opening even though the specific winning opening is in the closed state, it is determined that the winning is abnormal, and when the determination is made, the number of winning balls involved in the winning abnormality. Is excluded from the number of consumed balls, and the information about the game value to be displayed on the display means is updated.

(29B) At least one of the winning prize holes is a starting winning prize hole that serves as an opportunity to derive a special game state that facilitates acquisition of a large amount of game balls.
The control means, when the winning in the starting winning opening is detected when the starting winning opening is closed, determines that the winning is abnormal, and excludes the number of winning balls related to the winning from the number of consuming balls. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that information regarding a gaming value to be displayed on the display means is updated.

(29C) At least one of the winning holes is a large winning hole opened in a special game state,
The control means, when a prize to the special winning opening is detected in a closed state of the special winning opening, determines that the winning is abnormal, and excludes the number of winning balls related to the winning from the number of consuming balls. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that information regarding a gaming value to be displayed on the display means is updated.

(29D) has a consumption ball detecting means for detecting consumption balls consumed by the player,
The consumed ball counting means subtracts the number of winning balls involved in the winning abnormality from the number of consumed balls detected by the consumed ball number detecting means, and counts the consumed balls consumed by the player. A gaming machine according to item.

(29E) The control means stores the total number of consumed balls used for calculating the information regarding the game value,
The consumed sphere counting means adds the consumed sphere number detected by the consumed sphere number detection means to the total consumed sphere number, subtracts the number of winning spheres involved in the winning abnormality from the total consumed sphere number, and calculates the consumed sphere. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, which counts.

(29F) The control means stores the total number of consumed balls used for calculating the information regarding the game value,
The consumed sphere counting means adds a value obtained by subtracting the consumed sphere count related to the winning abnormality from the consumed sphere count detected by the consumed sphere count detection means to the total consumed sphere count to count the consumed spheres. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, which is characterized.

(29G) The winning opening can be switched between an open state where it is easy to win a game ball and a closed state where it is difficult to win a game ball,
The control means, when the winning of the winning opening is detected in the closed state, and the prize balls are not paid out in association with the winning, it is determined that the winning is abnormal, and the number of winning balls for the winning is determined. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, which is excluded from the number of consumed balls and updates the information about the gaming value to be displayed on the display means.

(29H) When an abnormality in winning at the winning opening is detected a plurality of times within a predetermined period, the control means excludes the number of winning balls involved in the abnormality of winning from the number of consumed balls and displays it on the display means. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that information regarding a gaming value for playing is updated.

According to the inventions of 29A to 29H, the information regarding the result of the game can be displayed accurately and quickly. In particular, it is possible to accurately display the information regarding the game value (for example, the base value) in real time by excluding the number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality from the number of out balls.

(30) A gaming machine which gives a player a gaming medium as an award,
A game area with multiple winning openings,
When a game medium is detected at each of the winning openings, a prize giving means for giving a predetermined specific prize out of a plurality of prizes,
Arithmetic processing means for executing a predetermined arithmetic processing using the number of game media flowing into the game area and the number of game media awarded as a prize by the award imparting means,
Processing means for processing the result of the arithmetic processing executed by the arithmetic processing means;
Display means for displaying the result of the arithmetic processing processed by the processing means on a predetermined display device,
When a particular prize among the plurality of prizes is generated in the game, the prize giving means gives the particular prize, and the display means displays the result of the arithmetic processing so as not to change. Amusement machine.

According to the thirty invention, the information regarding the result of the game can be displayed accurately and quickly. In particular, the award (for example, the award ball paid out in accordance with the award to the award winning opening (the general award winning opening or the large award winning opening with a large number of award balls, etc.) to which a high-value award is given) occurs when a specific award is generated. Even if it is given, it can be displayed so that the result of the calculation processing (calculated base value) does not change, and it is easy to determine whether the gaming machine is exhibiting the prescribed performance (for example, whether it is the set payout rate). it can.

(31A) A game provided with main control means including lottery means for executing a lottery related to winning when a specific condition is satisfied, and peripheral control means for controlling a predetermined effect based on a signal from the main control means. Machine,
The peripheral control means,
Temporary storage means for storing information based on a signal received from the main control means,
An information storage unit that is updated by the information stored in the temporary storage unit;
By providing at least a part of the information stored in the information storage means to the outside when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
A game machine characterized in that the history of the game machine can be grasped.

(31B) Even if it is not in a special game state, it has a general winning opening through which a game ball launched in the game area can win.
The signal transmitted from the main control means to the peripheral control means includes a signal indicating the winning of the general winning opening,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the first information output means outputs information regarding winning in the general winning opening to the outside when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

(31C) When a predetermined condition is satisfied, an external output means for outputting information based on the predetermined condition to an external terminal board,
If the predetermined condition is satisfied, an information storage unit that stores more detailed information than the information output toward the external terminal board,
An information presenting means for presenting the information stored by the information storing means, and the gaming machine according to the preceding paragraph.

(31D) A first initialization means for initializing the state of the gaming machine is provided,
The peripheral control means,
Storage means for storing information based on a signal received from the main control means,
The limited initializing means that does not initialize a part of the information stored in the storage means even when initialized by the first initializing means, and the game described in the preceding paragraphs. Machine.

(31E) First initialization means for initializing the state of the gaming machine,
Second initialization means for initializing the storage contents of the information storage means,
The information storage means can retain the stored contents even when the power of the gaming machine is cut off,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the first initialization unit does not initialize the storage content of the information storage unit but initializes the storage content of the temporary storage unit.

(31F) The gaming machine according to the preceding item, wherein the peripheral control means stores the type of the signal received from the main control means and the time when the signal is received in the information storage means.

(31G) The signal transmitted from the main control means to the peripheral control means is a signal regarding a counting event counted according to the progress of the game and a signal regarding a state change event that triggers a change in the state of the gaming machine. Including
The peripheral control means,
Temporary storage means for storing information based on a signal received from the main control means,
An information storage unit that is updated by the information stored in the temporary storage unit;
A first information output means for outputting at least a part of the information stored in the information storage means to the outside when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
The peripheral control means,
Counting the counting event based on the signal received from the main control means, storing the counting result in the temporary storage means,
When a signal relating to the state change event is received from the main control means, the state change event is stored in the information storage means, and the counting result of the counting event stored in the temporary storage means is stored in the information storage means. The gaming machine described in the preceding items, characterized in that

(31H) The signal transmitted from the main control means includes a signal regarding a counting event counted for management of the gaming machine and a signal regarding a state change event that triggers a change in the state of the gaming machine,
The information storage means stores the counting result of the counting event for each state of the gaming machine,
The peripheral control means,
Counting the signal related to the counting event received from the main control means, and stored in the temporary storage means,
When a signal related to the state change event is received from the main control unit, the type of the signal related to the state change event, the time when the signal is received, and the information storage unit are stored, and the counting event stored in the temporary storage unit is stored. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the counting result of (1) is added to the counting result of the counting event stored in the information storage means.

(31I) The signal transmitted from the main control means includes a signal regarding a counting event counted for management of the gaming machine and a signal regarding a state change event that triggers a change in the state of the gaming machine,
The information storage means stores the counting result of the counting event for each state of the gaming machine,
The peripheral control means,
Counting the signal related to the counting event received from the main control means, and stored in the temporary storage means,
When a signal relating to the state change event is received from the main control means, the counting result of the counting event stored in the temporary storage means is added to the counting result of the counting event stored in the information storage means. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items.

According to the inventions of 31A to 31I, it is possible to know how the payout has changed. In particular, according to the inventions of 31D and 31E, the information about the game can be properly stored.

(32) A gaming machine which gives a player a prize gaming medium as a gaming value,
Control means for executing a regular process for the progress of the game,
A consumed game medium counting means for counting the consumed game medium consumed by the player;
Prize game medium counting means for counting prize game media to be given to the player,
Calculating means for calculating information regarding the given game value using the counted number of consumed game media and number of prize game media;
A first light emitting element group including a plurality of light emitting elements for displaying information about a game including variable display of symbols,
A second light emitting element group including a plurality of light emitting elements for displaying information about the given game value,
The first light emitting element group includes a first terminal to which one terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is commonly connected, and a plurality of second terminals to which the other terminals of the plurality of light emitting elements are respectively connected. Has and
The second light emitting element group includes a third terminal to which one terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is commonly connected and a plurality of fourth terminals to which the other terminals of the plurality of light emitting elements are connected. Has and
The first terminal of the first light emitting element group and the third terminal of the second light emitting element group are connected to one output driving means,
The control unit outputs the selection signal at a timing common to the first terminal and the third terminal, but at least one of the first light emitting element groups is in the period in which the selection signal is output. A signal output to the plurality of second terminals for lighting one light emitting element and a signal output to the plurality of fourth terminals for lighting at least one light emitting element of the second light emitting element group; Are output at different timings to display-control the first light-emitting element group and the second light-emitting element group within one regular process.

According to the thirty-second invention, the circuit for displaying the information about the game value to be given (for example, the base value or the accessory ratio) can be simply configured, and the information about the game value can be displayed quickly and accurately.

(33) A gaming machine which gives a player a prize gaming medium as a gaming value,
Control means for executing a regular process for the progress of the game,
A consumed game medium counting means for counting the consumed game medium consumed by the player;
Prize game medium counting means for counting prize game media to be given to the player,
Calculating means for calculating information regarding the given game value using the counted number of consumed game media and number of prize game media;
A first light emitting element group including a plurality of light emitting elements for displaying information about a game including variable display of symbols,
A second light emitting element group including a plurality of light emitting elements for displaying information about the given game value,
The first light emitting element group includes a first terminal to which one terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is commonly connected, and a plurality of second terminals to which the other terminals of the plurality of light emitting elements are respectively connected. Has and
The second light emitting element group includes a third terminal to which one terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is commonly connected and a plurality of fourth terminals to which the other terminals of the plurality of light emitting elements are connected. Has and
At least one light emitting element of the first light emitting element group corresponding to the selection signal output to the first terminal of the first light emitting element group and the selection signal output to the first terminal of the first light emitting element group; A signal output to the plurality of second terminals for lighting, a selection signal output to the third terminal of the second light emitting element group, and a selection signal output to the third terminal The signal output to the plurality of fourth terminals for lighting at least one light emitting element of the second light emitting element group in response to the A process of outputting a selection signal output to one terminal and a signal output to the plurality of second terminals corresponding to the selection signal; and a selection signal output to the third terminal and the selection signal The process of outputting the signals output to the corresponding plurality of fourth terminals is characterized in that the signals are output at different timings in the regular process by different processes in the same regular process. ..

According to the thirty-third invention, it is possible to simply configure the circuit for displaying the information regarding the provided game value. Therefore, information about the game value can be displayed quickly and accurately.

(34A) A game machine which gives a player a prize game medium as a game value,
Control means for controlling the progress of the game,
A consumed game medium counting means for counting the consumed game medium consumed by the player;
Prize game medium counting means for counting prize game media to be given to the player,
Calculating means for calculating information regarding the given game value using the counted number of consumed game media and number of prize game media;
And a calculation result display unit for displaying information on the game value calculated by the calculation unit,
The control means is
A control device that executes processing for game control,
Timing means for generating a signal (for example, a clock signal or a reset signal) that determines the operation timing of the control device;
Controlled by the control device, at least having an output drive means for outputting a control signal for displaying on the calculation result display means,
On the board on which the control device is mounted, the timing means is arranged in one direction when viewed from the control device, and the output drive means and the calculation result display means are arranged in another direction different from the one direction, A game machine characterized by being arranged apart from the timing means.

(34B) A connection line between the control device and the timing means and a connection line between the control device and the output drive means are arranged on the substrate so as not to intersect each other. And the gaming machine described in the preceding items.

(34C) The timing means has a reset circuit that generates a reset signal that is input to the control device, and an oscillation circuit that generates a clock signal that is input to the control device,
On the printed circuit board on which the control means is realized, the reset circuit is arranged in the same direction as the oscillation circuit from the processor, and the driver circuit and the display device are arranged separately from the reset circuit and the oscillation circuit. The gaming machine described in each of the above items.

According to the inventions of 34A to 34C, it is possible to suppress the interference between the signal regarding the game control and the signal for displaying the information regarding the game. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the influence on the game control and display the information about the game value quickly and accurately.

(35A) A gaming machine which gives a player a prize gaming medium as a gaming value,
Control means for controlling the progress of the game,
A consumed game medium counting means for counting the consumed game medium consumed by the player;
Prize game medium counting means for counting prize game media to be given to the player,
Calculating means for calculating information regarding the given game value using the counted number of consumed game media and number of prize game media;
A display unit that is controlled by the control unit and displays information about the game value;
The control means is
A control device that executes processing for game control,
And a memory for storing at least information regarding the game value, which the control device accesses when executing the processing,
The gaming machine is provided with input means for instructing initialization of the memory,
The control means is
A first initialization unit that determines whether or not the data stored in the memory is normal at a predetermined timing, and initializes a predetermined first area of the memory when it is determined to be abnormal. ,
When the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the input unit is operated, and if it is determined that the input unit is operated, a second initialization unit that initializes a predetermined second area of the memory is provided. Have,
The first region initialized by the first initialization unit and the second region initialized by the second initialization unit are the second regions initialized by the first initialization unit. Including overlapping areas that are commonly initialized by
At least the first region includes a region that does not overlap with the second region,
The game machine is characterized in that the information about the game value is stored in the first area other than the overlapping area.

(35B) In the first area, data used for calculating the information regarding the game value is stored,
Data used for controlling the progress of the game is stored in the second area,
The control means is
When it is determined that the data stored in the first area is abnormal, the first area is initialized,
When it is determined that the data stored in the second area is abnormal, the second area is initialized,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein when it is determined that the input unit is operated, the second area is initialized without initializing the first area.

(35C) The first area stores data used for calculation of the information about the game value,
Data used for controlling the progress of the game is stored in the second area,
The control means is
When it is determined that the data stored in the first area is abnormal, the first area and the second area are initialized,
When it is determined that the data stored in the second area is abnormal, the first area and the second area are initialized,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein when it is determined that the input unit is operated, the second area is initialized without initializing the first area.

(35D) The control unit determines whether or not the data stored in the first area is abnormal each time the periodical processing repeatedly executed at a predetermined time interval is executed. Gaming machine described in.

(35E) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the control means determines whether or not the data stored in the first area is abnormal every time the information regarding the gaming value is calculated. ..

(35F) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the control means determines whether the data stored in the first area is abnormal when the gaming machine is powered on.

According to the inventions of 35A to 35F, it is possible to appropriately control the memory for storing the information (base value and accessory ratio) about the game value to be given. Therefore, information about the game can be displayed accurately and quickly.

(36A) A game machine which gives a player a prize game medium as a game value,
Control means for controlling the progress of the game,
A consumed game medium counting means for counting the consumed game medium consumed by the player;
Prize game medium counting means for counting prize game media to be given to the player,
Calculating means for calculating information regarding the given game value using the counted number of consumed game media and number of prize game media;
Display means for displaying information on the game value,
An electric accessory operated by the control means,
Under a specific condition, when a plurality of game media wins during the operation of the electric accessory triggered by one hit, some of the game media won the prize-related information of the game value. A game machine, which is used for calculation and is not used for calculation of information on the game value for other game media, but can be a trigger for the variable display game for any of the game media.

(36B) The control means is
Run the variable display game when the specified starting conditions are met,
Depending on the result of the variable display game, a first game state (time saving, high probability state, big hit, etc.) that is advantageous to the player, and a second game state (normal state) that is less advantageous than the first game state And control to either
When a plurality of game media wins during one operation of the electric accessory, the game media won in the second game state are used to calculate the information regarding the game value, and the first game The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein a gaming medium that has won a prize is not used for calculating the information about the gaming value, but any gaming medium can be a trigger for the variable display game.

(36C) The control means is
Detects multiple types of errors that occur in gaming machines,
When a plurality of game media are won during one operation of the electric accessory, the game media won in a state where the predetermined type of the error is detected should be used for calculating the information regarding the game value. However, the game media won in a state where the predetermined type of the error has not been detected is used to calculate the information regarding the game value, but any of the game media can be a trigger for the variable display game. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items.

According to the inventions of 36A to 36C, it is switched whether to use the game medium for calculating the information on the game value according to the state of the gaming machine, so that the information on the game value can be displayed quickly and accurately.

(37A) A gaming machine provided with an outer frame, a main body frame which is openably and closably supported with respect to the outer frame and on which a game board is provided, and a setting change operation unit for changing a setting state related to a game. hand,
When the body frame is closed with respect to the outer frame, it is difficult to change the setting, which makes it difficult to operate the setting change operation unit, compared to when the body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame. A gaming machine characterized by having an activating means.

(37B) The outer frame, the main body frame which is openably and closably supported with respect to the outer frame and on which the game board is provided, and when the setting change operation for changing the setting state related to the game is performed, the changed setting state is changed. A game machine provided with a setting status display section for displaying,
A gaming machine, comprising: a visibility-hardening unit that makes it difficult to visually recognize the display content of the setting status display unit when the main body frame is closed with respect to the outer frame.

(37C) An outer frame, a main body frame that is openably and closably supported with respect to the outer frame and on which a game board is provided, and a setting determination operation unit that performs a setting determination operation that determines a setting state related to a game. It was a gaming machine,
A gaming machine comprising: a decision making device that makes it difficult to operate the setting decision operating unit when the main body frame is closed with respect to the outer frame.

(37D) A game machine including an outer frame, a main body frame that is supported to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame and on which a game board is provided, and a setting change operation unit for changing a setting state related to a game. hand,
The setting change operation unit has a setting key insertion unit into which a setting key is inserted,
When the main body frame is in a closed state with respect to the outer frame, it is configured to prevent insertion of the setting key into the setting key insertion portion by a specific portion of the outer frame. A gaming machine to do.

According to the inventions of 37A to 37D, it is possible to make it difficult for an improper person to illegally change the setting state and to improve the reliability of the gaming machine.

(37E) A gaming machine that gives a predetermined gaming profit when performing variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the start condition and deriving a winning result as the variable display result of the symbols,
Variation time determining means for determining the variation time of the symbol,
A setting information determination unit that determines predetermined setting information regarding a game to any one of a plurality based on an operation on the specific operation unit;
The gaming machine characterized in that the variation time determining means can determine a specific variation time when the setting information is determined to be the specific information based on an operation on the specific operation unit.

(37F) A gaming machine that gives a predetermined gaming profit when performing variable display of symbols based on establishment of a start condition and deriving a winning result as the variable display result of the symbols,
Variation time determining means for determining the variation time of the symbol,
A probability determining unit that determines the probability that the hit result will be derived to any one of a plurality of probabilities based on an operation on a specific operating unit,
The gaming machine, wherein the variation time determining means can determine a specific variation time when the probability determined based on an operation on the specific operation unit is a specific probability.

(37G) A gaming machine that gives a predetermined gaming profit when performing variable display of symbols based on establishment of a start condition and deriving a winning result as the variable display result of the symbols,
Variation time determining means for determining the variation time of the symbol,
A setting information determination unit that determines predetermined setting information regarding a game to any one of a plurality based on an operation on the specific operation unit;
The fluctuation time determining means may determine a common fluctuation time regardless of the setting information or a different fluctuation time depending on the setting information.
A probability that different variable times are determined according to the setting information is set lower than a probability that the common variable time is determined.

(37H) A gaming machine that gives a predetermined gaming profit when performing variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the start condition and deriving a winning result as the variable display result of the symbols,
Variation time determining means for determining the variation time of the symbol,
A setting information determining unit that determines predetermined setting information regarding a game to any one of a plurality of pieces based on an operation on the specific operation unit,
An effect control unit that performs a predetermined effect,
The fluctuation time determining means can determine different fluctuation times according to the setting information,
When the specific variation time is determined by the variation time determining means in correspondence with the specific setting information of the setting information, the effect control unit displays the variation display of the symbol within the specific variation time. A game machine characterized by sequentially performing a result suggesting effect that suggests a result and a setting suggesting effect that suggests the content of the setting information determined by the setting information determining unit.

According to the inventions of 37E to 37H, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by making the player perceive the setting state in a new mode.

(37I) A main control board provided with a game control section for performing control related to a game, another control board connected to the main control board, and provided with a control section different from the game control section, and the game control A game machine provided with a setting-related operation unit for changing a setting state relating to a game performed by a unit,
The game control unit has a setting change permissible state generation unit that permits an operation relating to the change of the setting state with respect to the setting related operation unit,
A game machine characterized in that the setting change permissible state generation means permits an operation related to the change of the setting state when the information transmitted from the another control board to the main control board is specific information. ..

According to the invention of 37I, it is possible to make it difficult for a fraudulent person to illegally change the setting state and improve the reliability of the gaming machine.

(37J) A game control section for controlling the game and a setting change operation section for changing the setting state for the control performed by the game control section, and the game area is operated by the player by operating a predetermined firing operation section. A gaming machine that gives a gaming profit by winning a game ball launched toward
When the setting change operation unit is operated and the setting state is changed, the setting operation unit is provided with a shooting disabling unit that disables the shooting of the game ball by the operation of the shooting operation unit for a predetermined period. Amusement machine.

According to the invention of 37J, the act of illegally changing the setting state can be suppressed.

(38A) A gaming machine provided with a game control section for performing control relating to a game and a setting operation section for changing settings relating to control performed by the game control section,
A game machine characterized in that a game control board constituting the game control section and a setting board constituting the setting operation section are housed in one case.

(38B) In the case, in place of the setting operation unit, a dummy unit that cannot perform an operation for changing a setting can be housed together with the game control unit. Amusement machine.

(38C) The setting operation unit is
A first operation unit for starting a setting state in which the setting can be changed;
A second operation unit for confirming the setting and ending the setting state;
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, further comprising a setting display device that displays the contents of the setting.

(38D) The game machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the dummy unit does not have any of the first operation unit, the second operation unit, and the setting display unit.

According to the inventions of 38A to 38D, the specifications of the gaming machine having the setting function and the gaming machine not having the setting function can be made common, and efficient design and production can be achieved.

(39A) A game control unit having a processor for executing a program for controlling a game and a memory accessed by the processor,
A clear switch for initializing a predetermined area of the memory,
A gaming machine comprising a setting operation unit for changing settings relating to control performed by the game control unit,
The setting operation unit has a setting change operation unit for starting a setting state in which the setting can be changed,
The game control unit,
When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the operation of the clear switch and the operation of the setting change operation unit are detected,
A gaming machine, wherein the setting state is started when the clear switch is operated and the setting change operation unit is operated.

(39B) The gaming machine according to any of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the game control section initializes the first area of the memory after the setting state ends.

(39C) In the second area, which is at least partially different from the first area, when the clear switch is operated and the setting change operation part is not operated, The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, which initializes a memory.

According to the inventions of 39A to 39C, it is possible to prevent erroneous operation of setting change.

(40A) A game machine including a game control unit that performs control related to a game, and a setting operation unit that changes settings related to control performed by the game control unit,
The game control unit has a game value display means for displaying information about the given game value,
The setting operation unit has a setting change operation unit for starting a setting state in which the setting can be changed, and setting display means for displaying the contents of the setting,
The gaming machine is characterized in that, in the setting state, the gaming value display means and the setting display means display so as not to be confused with each other.

(40B) The game machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the game control unit and the setting operation unit are housed in one case.

(40C) The game machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the game value display means and the setting display means are constituted by one display.

(40D) The game value display means displays the information about the given game value on the display unit without delay as the game progresses,
The game machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the setting display means displays information regarding the setting on the display instead of the information regarding the game value given in the setting state.

(40E) The game machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the game value display means and the setting display means are configured by different displays.

(40F) The game value display means,
In other than the setting state, the information about the given game value is displayed without delay as the game progresses,
In the setting state, display any of the characters, numbers, or figures that are not displayed in the setting state,
The game machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the setting display means displays information regarding the setting in the setting state.

(40G) The game value display means,
In other than the setting state, the information about the given game value is displayed without delay as the game progresses,
In the setting state, off or all lights,
The game machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the setting display means displays information regarding the setting in the setting state.

According to the inventions of 40A to 40G, confusion of a plurality of displays arranged on the substrate can be prevented.

(41A) a lottery means for performing a lottery on winning based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the starting opening,
Production determination means for determining any production from a plurality of productions based on the result of the lottery,
Production execution means for executing the production determined by the production determination means,
When a predetermined operation is performed on a predetermined operation unit, setting information determining means for determining the predetermined setting information regarding the game to any one of a plurality of,
When an operation different from the predetermined operation is performed, the setting information confirmation unit that displays the setting information determined by the setting information determination unit on a predetermined display unit,
The plurality of effects includes a setting suggesting effect capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determining means,
A game machine characterized in that it is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect even if the different operation is performed when the effect deciding means decides to perform the setting suggestion effect.

(41B) a lottery means for performing a lottery on winning based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the starting opening,
When a predetermined operation is performed on a predetermined operation unit, setting information determining means for determining the predetermined setting information regarding the game to any one of a plurality of,
Production determination means for determining any production from a plurality of productions based on the result of the lottery,
Production execution means for executing the production determined by the production determination means,
Error detection means for detecting errors,
An error notifying unit for notifying an error detected by the error detecting unit,
The plurality of effects includes a setting suggesting effect capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determining means,
The game machine characterized in that the effect execution means can execute the setting suggestion effect during a period in which the error notification means notifies an error satisfying a predetermined condition.

(41C) Lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on establishment of the start condition,
Based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, determination means for determining whether or not a win,
Special symbol fluctuation executing means for executing special symbol fluctuation based on the establishment of the start condition,
When the satisfaction of the starting condition is satisfied but the satisfaction of the starting condition is not satisfied, a holding means for storing and holding the lottery information with a predetermined number as an upper limit,
Based on an operation on a predetermined operation unit, setting information determination means for determining predetermined setting information regarding a game to any one of a plurality of,
Display means for displaying a predetermined effect,
The effect includes an expected suggestion effect for the determination result by the determination unit, and a setting suggestion effect capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determination unit,
During the fluctuation period of the special symbol fluctuation in which it is decided that the expected suggestion effect is executed, or when the starting condition is newly satisfied while the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation is held, the newly established condition A game machine characterized by limiting the execution of the setting suggestion effect in the special symbol variation corresponding to the starting condition.

(41D) Lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on the establishment of the start condition,
Based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, determination means for determining whether or not a win,
Special symbol fluctuation executing means for executing special symbol fluctuation based on the establishment of the start condition,
When the satisfaction of the starting condition is satisfied but the satisfaction of the starting condition is not satisfied, a holding means for storing and holding the lottery information with a predetermined number as an upper limit,
Based on an operation on a predetermined operation unit, setting information determination means for determining predetermined setting information regarding a game to any one of a plurality of,
Display means for displaying a predetermined effect,
The effect includes an expected suggestion effect for the determination result by the determination unit, and a setting suggestion effect capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determination unit,
During the fluctuation period of the special symbol fluctuation in which it is decided that the expected suggestion effect is executed, or when the starting condition is newly satisfied while the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation is held, the newly established condition A gaming machine characterized in that the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect can be executed in a special symbol variation corresponding to the starting condition.

(41E) Lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on the establishment of the start condition,
Based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, determination means for determining whether or not a win,
Special symbol fluctuation executing means for executing special symbol fluctuation based on the establishment of the start condition,
When the satisfaction of the starting condition is satisfied but the satisfaction of the starting condition is not satisfied, a holding means for storing and holding the lottery information with a predetermined number as an upper limit,
Based on an operation on a predetermined operation unit, setting information determination means for determining predetermined setting information regarding a game to any one of a plurality of,
Display means for displaying a predetermined effect,
The effect includes an expected suggestion effect for the determination result by the determination unit, and a setting suggestion effect capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determination unit,
When the start condition is newly established during the fluctuation period of the special symbol fluctuation in which it is decided that the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed, or while the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation is held. The gaming machine characterized by limiting the execution of the setting suggestion effect in the special symbol variation corresponding to the newly established starting condition.

(41F) Lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on the establishment of the start condition,
Based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, determination means for determining whether or not a win,
Special symbol fluctuation executing means for executing special symbol fluctuation based on the establishment of the start condition,
When the satisfaction of the starting condition is satisfied but the satisfaction of the starting condition is not satisfied, a holding means for storing and holding the lottery information with a predetermined number as an upper limit,
Based on an operation on a predetermined operation unit, setting information determination means for determining predetermined setting information regarding a game to any one of a plurality of,
Display means for displaying a predetermined effect,
The effect includes an expected suggestion effect for the determination result by the determination unit, and a setting suggestion effect capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determination unit,
When the start condition is newly established during the fluctuation period of the special symbol fluctuation in which it is decided that the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed, or while the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation is held. , A gaming machine characterized by limiting execution of the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect in a special symbol variation corresponding to the newly established starting condition.

(41G) Lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on establishment of the start condition,
Based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, determination means for determining whether or not a win,
Special symbol fluctuation executing means for executing special symbol fluctuation based on the establishment of the start condition,
When the satisfaction of the starting condition is satisfied but the satisfaction of the starting condition is not satisfied, a holding means for storing and holding the lottery information with a predetermined number as an upper limit,
Based on an operation on a predetermined operation unit, setting information determination means for determining predetermined setting information regarding a game to any one of a plurality of,
Display means for displaying a predetermined effect,
The effect includes an expected suggestion effect for the determination result by the determination unit, and a setting suggestion effect capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determination unit,
When the start condition is newly established during the fluctuation period of the special symbol fluctuation in which it is decided that the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed, or while the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation is held. The gaming machine characterized in that the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect can be executed in a special symbol variation corresponding to the newly established starting condition.

According to the inventions of 41A to 41G, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

(42A) A gaming machine including main control means for deriving a gaming state advantageous to a player based on a result of a lottery in a game,
The main control means,
Program storage means for storing the first program and the second program;
Computing means for performing a required computing process by the first program and the second program;
First storage means having a plurality of storage areas for temporarily storing data in the arithmetic processing;
A second storage unit having a storage area having the same configuration as the first storage unit,
Access permission/prohibition is switched so that either the first storage means or the second storage means can be accessed,
The calculation means is
Using the first storage means when executing the first program,
A game machine characterized in that the second storage means is used when the second program is executed.

(42B) A game machine characterized in that the first storage means and the second storage means are switched between accessible and non-accessible by one instruction inputted to the arithmetic means.

(42C) An instruction for switching the first storage unit to be accessible and an instruction for switching the second storage unit to be accessible are different in at least one of an instruction (opcode) and an argument (operand). Amusement machine.

(42D) The first program is a program (in a game control area) for performing a winning lottery in a game,
The second program is a program (outside of the game control area) for calculating information about a game value given in the game, and is called and executed from the first program.

(42E) A gaming machine having main control means for deriving a gaming state advantageous to a player based on a result of a winning lottery in a game,
The main control means,
Program storage means for storing the first program and the second program;
Computing means for performing a required computing process by the first program and the second program;
First storage means having a plurality of storage areas for temporarily storing data in the arithmetic processing;
A second storage unit having a storage area having the same configuration as the first storage unit,
Access permission/prohibition is switched so that either the first storage means or the second storage means can be accessed,
The calculation means is
When executing the first program, the first storage means is used,
At the start of the second program, the second program is switched to be inaccessible to the first storage means and accessible to the second storage means,
A game machine characterized by using the second storage means when the second program is executed.

(42F) The gaming machine characterized in that, at the end of the second program, the arithmetic means switches the second program to be inaccessible to the second storage means and accessible to the first storage means.

(42G) A gaming machine including main control means for deriving a gaming state advantageous to a player based on a result of a winning lottery in a game,
The main control means,
Program storage means for storing the first program and the second program;
Computing means for performing a required computing process by the first program and the second program;
First storage means having a plurality of storage areas for temporarily storing data in the arithmetic processing;
A second storage unit having a storage area having the same configuration as the first storage unit,
Access permission/prohibition is switched so that either the first storage means or the second storage means can be accessed,
The calculation means is
When executing the first program, the first storage means is used,
When starting the second program, the first program is switched to be inaccessible to the first storage means and accessible to the second storage means,
A game machine characterized by using the second storage means when the second program is executed.

(42H) The arithmetic means switches the second program to the inaccessible to the second storage means and to the accessible to the first storage means in the first program restored from the second program after the end of the second program. A gaming machine characterized by.

According to the inventions of 42A to 42H, data can be saved at high speed with a simple instruction when processing is transferred between programs, and cautions at the time of program creation can be reduced.

(43A) A gaming machine that adds gaming value to a player,
Main control means for deriving a gaming state that is advantageous to the player based on the result of the winning lottery in the game,
Peripheral control means for controlling the effect in the game based on an instruction from the main control means,
A display device that is controlled by the peripheral control means to perform an effect display,
A display panel that displays a production pattern,
A light emitting device that is controlled by the peripheral control means and emits light so as to travel through the display panel from a plurality of positions lateral to the display panel,
The display panel includes a plurality of first reflecting portions that reflect light traveling in a specific path in the display panel toward a front side of the gaming machine, and light traveling in a plurality of paths in the display panel. Having a plurality of second reflecting portions that reflect on the front side of the gaming machine,
The peripheral control means,
By causing the light emitting device to emit light in a predetermined pattern and changing the light reflected by the first reflecting section, a dynamic picture is displayed on the display panel,
A game machine characterized in that a static pattern is displayed on the display panel by reflecting the light from the light emitting device by the second reflecting section.

(43B) The light emitting device has a plurality of light emitting elements that emit light from a plurality of positions to the side of the display panel,
The peripheral control unit changes the emission colors of the plurality of light emitting elements according to the passage of time so that light of different colors travels in different paths in the display panel, and the plurality of first reflections. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the colors of the patterns displayed by the plurality of first reflecting portions are changed with the passage of time by emitting light of different colors from the portions.

(43C) The light emitting device has a plurality of light emitting elements that emit light from a plurality of positions to the side of the display panel,
The peripheral control unit switches lighting of the plurality of light emitting elements according to the passage of time, controls a path of light in the display panel, and emits light from at least a part of the plurality of first reflection units. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the color of the pattern displayed by the plurality of first reflecting portions is changed according to the passage of time.

(43D) The light emitting device has a plurality of light emitting elements that emit light from a plurality of positions to the side of the display panel,
The peripheral control unit switches the number of light emitting elements that emit light among the plurality of light emitting elements according to the passage of time, controls the path of light in the display panel, and controls the plurality of first reflecting units. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the color of the pattern displayed by the plurality of first reflecting portions is changed according to the passage of time by emitting light from at least a part.

According to the inventions of 43A to 43D, it is possible to display a moving pattern and a stationary pattern on one light guide plate, so that it is possible to suppress deterioration of the enjoyment of the game.

(44A) A gaming machine that adds gaming value to a player,
Main control means for deriving a gaming state that is advantageous to the player based on the result of the winning lottery in the game,
Peripheral control means for controlling the effect in the game based on an instruction from the main control means,
A display device that is controlled by the peripheral control means to perform an effect display,
A display panel that displays a production pattern,
A light emitting device, which is controlled by the peripheral control means, emits light so as to travel through the display panel from a plurality of positions lateral to the display panel,
The display panel includes a plurality of first reflecting portions that reflect light traveling in a specific path in the display panel toward a front side of the gaming machine, and light traveling in a plurality of paths in the display panel. Having a plurality of second reflecting portions that reflect on the front side of the gaming machine,
The first reflector includes a plurality of first right-eye reflectors that reflect light traveling in a specific path in the display panel in a direction reaching the player's right eye, and the player's left eye. And a plurality of first left-eye reflectors that reflect in a direction reaching
The plurality of first right-eye reflectors are arranged on the display panel so as to form a right-eye pattern,
The plurality of first left-eye reflectors are arranged on the display panel so as to form a left-eye pattern at a position different from the right-eye pattern.
The peripheral control means,
By causing the light-emitting device to emit light so that the light emitted in the same pattern reaches the first reflection part for the right eye and the first reflection part for the left eye, the pattern for the right eye and the pattern for the left eye. Is displayed on the display panel to allow the player to recognize a stereoscopic pattern in which parallax between the left and right eyes occurs,
A game machine characterized by displaying a flat pattern in which parallax between left and right eyes does not occur on the display panel by reflecting light from the light emitting device by the second reflecting section.

(44B) The second reflector is a front surface side of the gaming machine, in which light traveling in a plurality of paths in the display panel reaches the player's right eye and the player's left eye. The game machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the plane pattern is displayed on the display panel by being reflected on the display panel.

(44C) The second reflector includes a plurality of second right-eye reflectors that reflect light traveling in a specific path in the display panel in a direction reaching the player's right eye, and the second reflector of the player. A plurality of second left-eye reflectors that reflect in a direction reaching the left eye,
The plurality of second right-eye reflectors are arranged on the display panel so as to form a right-eye pattern,
The plurality of second left-eye reflectors are arranged on the display panel so as to form a left-eye pattern at the same position as the right-eye pattern.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the plane pattern is displayed on the display panel by light reflected by the second reflecting section.

According to the inventions of 44A to 44C, it is possible to display a three-dimensional pattern and a two-dimensional pattern with one light guide plate, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

(45A) A gaming machine that adds gaming value to a player,
Main control means for deriving a gaming state that is advantageous to the player based on the result of the winning lottery in the game,
Peripheral control means for controlling the effect in the game based on an instruction from the main control means,
A display device that is controlled by the peripheral control means to perform an effect display,
A display panel that displays a production pattern,
A light emitting device, which is controlled by the peripheral control means, emits light so as to travel through the display panel from a plurality of positions lateral to the display panel,
The peripheral control means,
It is possible to display a dynamic pattern and a static pattern on the display panel by causing the light emitting device to emit light,
A gaming machine characterized by performing an effect that suggests the result of the winning lottery by combining the display of the dynamic picture and the display of the static picture.

(45B) The display panel includes a plurality of first reflecting portions that reflect light traveling in a specific path in the display panel and emit the light to the front side of the gaming machine, and a plurality of paths in the display panel. And a plurality of second reflecting portions that reflect the traveling light and emit to the front side of the gaming machine,
The peripheral control means,
By causing the light emitting device to emit light in a predetermined pattern, the path of the light traveling in the display panel is changed, and the light reflected by the first reflecting portion is changed, whereby a changing pattern is displayed on the display panel. Displayed on
By displaying the stationary pattern on the display panel by reflecting the light from the light emitting device by the second reflecting portion,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein an effect that suggests a result of the winning lottery is performed by combining the display of the changing pattern and the display of the stationary pattern.

According to the inventions of 45A to 45B, a moving pattern and a stationary pattern can be displayed on a single light guide plate, which can prevent a decrease in amusement of the game.

(46A) A gaming machine that adds gaming value to a player,
Main control means for deriving a gaming state that is advantageous to the player based on the result of the winning lottery in the game,
Peripheral control means for controlling the effect in the game based on an instruction from the main control means,
A display device which is controlled by the peripheral control means to display an effect image,
A display panel that displays a production pattern,
A light emitting device, which is controlled by the peripheral control means, emits light so as to travel through the display panel from a plurality of positions lateral to the display panel,
The display panel has a plurality of reflecting portions that reflect light traveling in the display panel to the front side of the gaming machine,
The peripheral control means,
By causing the light emitting device to emit light, a target pattern is displayed on the display panel,
A gaming machine characterized by displaying an image moving toward the target pattern on the display device.

(46B) The game machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the picture displayed on the display panel and the image displayed on the display device represent the same character or characters.

(46C) The peripheral control means displays the target pattern on the display panel, and then displays an image moving toward the target pattern on the display device. Machine.

(46D) The peripheral control means displays the image moving toward the target pattern on the display device, and then displays the target pattern on the display panel. Machine.

According to the inventions of 46A to 46D, it is possible to display a plurality of patterns and patterns of different modes with one light guide plate, and it is possible to suppress deterioration of the enjoyment of the game.

(47A) A game control means for performing a lottery of a special game that is beneficial to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
A setting machine that is operated to change or confirm a setting value related to the control performed by the game control means,
The game control means,
The power-on process executed when the game machine is powered on, and the regular process executed at every predetermined cycle are executed.
When the power to the gaming machine is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, the setting change capable of changing the set value in the power-on process according to the operation state of the setting operation means Execute the setting corresponding to the status or the setting confirmation status where the setting value cannot be changed,
In the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, after the setting corresponding to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is executed, the process corresponding to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state can be executed in the regular process. A gaming machine characterized by the following.

(47B) The regular process is common to at least two of the processes related to the change of the set value, the process related to confirmation of the set value, the process related to the normal game, and the plurality of processes. The game machine according to each of the preceding items, including:

(47C) The regular process is composed of at least a first repetitive process that executes a process related to the normal game and a second repetitive process that executes a process related to the change of the setting.
The game machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the game control means selectively executes the first repeating process and the second repeating process depending on an operation mode of the game machine.

(47D) The memory includes a setting state management area for recording the operating state of the gaming machine in an area where the stored contents are backed up when the power is cut off,
The game control means,
In the setting change mode, as the predetermined condition, the fact that the setting change mode is set in the setting state management area,
In the setting confirmation mode, as a predetermined condition, the fact that the setting confirmation mode is set is set in the setting state management area.

(48) A game control means for performing a lottery for a special game which is beneficial to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
A setting machine that is operated to change or confirm a setting value related to the control performed by the game control means,
The game control means,
The power-on process executed when the game machine is powered on, and the regular process executed at every predetermined cycle are executed.
When the power to the gaming machine is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, the setting change capable of changing the set value in the power-on process according to the operation state of the setting operation means Execute the setting corresponding to the status or the setting confirmation status where the setting value cannot be changed,
The regular processing enables execution of a normal game processing related to a normal game and a setting processing related to setting change or setting confirmation,
The normal game process is configured by a plurality of processes, and a specific process among the plurality of processes is a process that can be commonly executed by the normal game and the setting process.

(49A) A game control means for performing a lottery for a special game which is beneficial to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
Setting operation means that is operated to change or confirm a setting value related to control performed by the game control means,
A gaming machine comprising:
The setting operation means includes at least a first setting operation means and a second setting operation means,
The game control means,
Equipped with storage means capable of storing information related to games,
In a power-on process executed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the output signal of the setting operation means is stored and held in a specific storage means of the storage means,
In the power-on process, when determining whether or not the setting operation means is operated, it is determined based on the information stored and held in the specific storage means without reading the output signal of the setting operation means. Then
The second setting operating means stores the storage means when the first setting operating means is not operated and only the second setting operating means is operated in the power-on process. A means for initializing
In the power-on process, when the first setting operation means is not operated and only the second setting operation means is operated, when the storage means is initialized, A game machine characterized by not initializing storage means.

(49B) A peripheral control unit for controlling the effect on the display device is provided,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the gaming control means determines a mode for activating the gaming machine based on an output signal stored in the memory after the peripheral control means is activated.

(50A) A game control means for performing a lottery of a special game which is beneficial to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
Setting operation means that is operated to change or confirm a setting value related to control performed by the game control means,
A gaming machine comprising:
The setting operation means includes at least a first setting operation means and a second setting operation means,
The game control means,
A storage means having at least a first storage area capable of storing information relating to a game and a second storage area different from the first storage area,
The first storage area is an area for storing the setting value,
The second storage area is an area for storing various parameters used in the game,
The game control means,
When it is determined that the set value is not a normal value, the first storage area and the second storage area are initialized,
If it is determined that the first setting operation means of the setting operation means is not operated and the second setting operation means is operated, the first storage area is not initialized. A gaming machine characterized by initializing the second storage area.

(50B) The memory further includes a third storage area,
The game control means initializes the first storage area, the second storage area and the third storage area when the third condition is satisfied. The game machine described.

(50C) The third storage area is a storage area other than an area for storing various parameters used in a normal game,
When the data backed up in the memory is erased when a power failure occurs, the game control means determines that the third condition is satisfied, and the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area. The game machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the storage area of the game machine is initialized.

(51A) A game control means for performing a lottery for a special game which is beneficial to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
Setting operation means that is operated to change or confirm a setting value related to control performed by the game control means,
A gaming machine comprising:
The game control means,
Equipped with storage means that can hold information related to games even when the power is cut off,
The power-on process executed when the game machine is powered on, and the regular process executed at every predetermined cycle are executed.
When the power to the gaming machine is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, the setting change capable of changing the set value in the power-on process according to the operation state of the setting operation means Execute the setting corresponding to the status or the setting confirmation status where the setting value cannot be changed,
The storage means has a setting state management area in which a value set in correspondence with the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is stored according to the operation state of the setting operation means at least in the power-on process. A game machine characterized by including.

(51B) A setting operation unit that is operated to start in a setting change mode for changing the setting value related to the control performed by the game control unit,
The game control means,
When an operation for starting the game machine in the setting change mode is performed in a state where a RAM abnormality is stored in the setting state management area, the setting change mode is recorded in the setting state management area and stored in the memory. When a predetermined area is initialized and the setting operation means terminates the setting change mode, the normal game state is recorded in the setting state management area, and the game is performed in the normal game state in which a game ball can be shot. Machine,
When an operation for starting the game machine in the setting confirmation mode is performed in a state where a RAM abnormality is stored in the setting state management area, the RAM abnormality recorded in the setting state management area is continued, The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the normal gaming state is not recorded in the setting state management area even if an operation for ending the setting confirmation mode is performed by the setting operation means.

(52) A game control means for performing a lottery of a special game which is beneficial to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
Setting operation means that is operated to change or confirm a setting value related to control performed by the game control means,
A gaming machine comprising:
The game control means,
A power-on process executed when the game machine is powered on, a first periodic process executed every predetermined first cycle, and a second periodic process executed every predetermined second cycle are executed. Enable and
In the power-on process, it is determined whether or not an operation associated with the setting operation is performed in the setting operation means,
When it is determined that the setting operation means is performing an operation associated with the setting operation, a setting change state in which the setting value can be changed or a setting confirmation state in which the setting value cannot be changed according to the operation state. Run the settings corresponding to
When it is determined that the setting operation means has not performed an operation associated with the setting operation, a setting corresponding to a setting change state in which the setting value can be changed or a setting confirmation state in which the setting value cannot be changed is performed. Without, it is possible to execute normal game start processing,
The first periodic process is executed after the setting corresponding to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is executed in the power-on process,
A game machine characterized in that the second regular processing is executed after enabling a normal game start processing in the power-on processing.

(53A) Game control means for controlling the progress of the game,
An accessory controlled according to a control signal output from the game control means,
A first driver circuit that outputs a drive signal for driving the accessory,
A gaming machine capable of mounting an inspection signal generation circuit for outputting an inspection signal used for inspecting a gaming machine,
The inspection signal generation circuit,
A second driver circuit which receives the same control signal as that of the first driver circuit and generates an inspection signal from the control signal;
Including an inspection connector for outputting the generated inspection signal,
The first driver circuit converts a control signal output as a serial signal from the game control means into a drive signal for driving the accessory,
A gaming machine characterized in that the second driver circuit converts a control signal output as a serial signal from the game control means into the inspection signal.

(53B) Each of the first driver circuit and the second driver circuit has an output transistor that switches an input power source to generate an output signal,
The first driver circuit and the second driver circuit are input with different voltages, and independently generate signals of different voltages that change at the same timing.

(53C) The game machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein a connector connected to the first driver circuit is mounted and a connector connected to the second driver circuit is not mounted.

(53D) The game machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the connector connected to the first driver circuit is a discrete part and the connector connected to the second driver circuit is a surface mount part. ..

(53E) Game control means for executing a regular process at a predetermined cycle in order to control the progress of the game,
Of the events related to the progress of the game, first detection means for detecting an event taken in by the game control means in the regular processing,
A gaming machine comprising: a second detection means for detecting an event taken in by the game control means in a process other than the regular process among the events relating to the progress of the game,
The game control means,
Converting means for converting the signal from the first detecting means into a serial signal;
A serial input port to which a serial signal is input,
A general-purpose input port to which the signal of the first detection means or the second detection means is individually input,
The signal of the first detection means is input to either the general-purpose input port or the serial input port via the conversion means,
The game machine characterized in that the signal of the second detecting means is inputted to the general-purpose input port.

(53F) The first detection means is a ball detection means for detecting a game ball that has been launched toward the game area,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the second detection means is a setting operation means that is operated to change or confirm a set value related to control performed by the game control means.

(53G) An accessory driven according to a control signal output from the game control means,
A first driver circuit that outputs a drive signal for driving the accessory,
The serial input port is a serial input/output port capable of inputting a serial signal and outputting a serial signal,
The game control means outputs a control signal for driving the accessory from the serial input/output port,
The game machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the first driver circuit converts the control signal into the drive signal.

(53H) In order to control the progress of the game, a game control means for executing a regular process in every predetermined cycle,
A gaming machine comprising a first detection means and a second detection means for detecting an event relating to the progress of the game,
The game control means,
Converting means for converting the signal from the first detecting means into a serial signal;
A serial input port to which a serial signal is input,
A general-purpose input port to which the signal of the first detection means or the second detection means is individually input,
The first detecting means determines the signal level based on the result of detecting the signal once in the regular processing once.
The second detection means determines a signal level based on a result of detecting a signal a plurality of times within the one periodic processing,
The signal of the first detection means is input to either the general-purpose input port or the serial input port via the conversion means,
The signal of the second detection means is input to the general-purpose input port,
A game machine characterized in that the game control means determines a signal level by detecting a signal from the second detection means a plurality of times within one regular processing.

(53I) The first detection means is a ball detection means for detecting a game ball that has been launched toward the game area,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the second detection means is a setting operation means that is operated to change or confirm a set value related to control performed by the game control means.

(53J) Game control means for controlling the progress of the game,
A display device driven according to a control signal output from the game control means,
A gaming machine comprising a first driver circuit for outputting a drive signal for driving the accessory,
The game control means is mounted on the first printed circuit board,
The first driver circuit converts a control signal output as a serial signal from the game control means into a drive signal for driving the display device, and is mounted on a second printed circuit board. Cage,
The first printed circuit board and the second printed circuit board are connected by a serial communication line that transmits a serial signal converted from a signal repeated at the predetermined cycle from the first printed circuit board side. Amusement machine.

(53K) It is possible to mount a test signal generation circuit for outputting a test signal used for testing a gaming machine,
The inspection signal generation circuit,
A second driver circuit which receives the same control signal as that of the first driver circuit and generates an inspection signal from the control signal;
Including an inspection connector for outputting the generated inspection signal,
The second driver circuit converts a control signal output as a serial signal from the game control means into the inspection signal, and is mounted on the first printed board. Amusement machine.

(53L) The game machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the first printed board and the second printed board are housed in a single board box.

(53M) The first printed board and the second printed board are housed in different board boxes,
The gaming machine according to the preceding items, wherein the first printed circuit board is sealed by a caulking mechanism.

(53N) Each of the first driver circuit and the second driver circuit includes an output transistor that switches an input power source to generate an output signal,
The first driver circuit and the second driver circuit are input with different voltages, and independently generate signals of different voltages that change at the same timing.

1 Pachinko machine (gaming machine)
2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 930 Power supply board box 951 Discharge control board 1300 Main control unit 1310 Main control board 1311 Main control MPU (CPU)
1312 RAM
13121 Operation circuit 1313 ROM
1314 Main control I/O port 1317 Character ratio display (base display)
1510 Peripheral control board 1600 Main liquid crystal display device 2002 First starting port 2004 Second starting port 4000 Slot machine (gaming machine)
4210 Starting lever 4211 Reel stop button 4300 Symbol variation display device 4301 Reel 4341 Reel drive motor 4500 Image display body 4600 Main board (game control device)
4601 CPU
4602 ROM
4603 RAM
4700 Production control board 5100 ROM area 5200 RAM area 5300 I/O area 5400 Parameter information setting area

Claims (1)

A game control means for executing a lottery process for performing a lottery of a special game which is beneficial to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied, in a regular process which is regularly executed at a predetermined cycle ,
An initialization unit that is operated to initialize at least a part of a storage area of the storage unit that can store information related to the game that the game control unit has,
A gaming machine comprising: setting operation means operated to change a setting value related to control performed by the game control means,
The storage means has at least a first storage area capable of storing information related to a game, and a second storage area different from the first storage area,
The first storage area is a storage area that can be initialized when a setting process operable by the setting operation means is executed and when an operation of the initialization means is detected at a predetermined timing . ,
The second storage area is initialized when the second storage area is determined to be abnormal, but is detected when the operation of the initialization unit is detected and the first storage area is determined to be abnormal. Storage area that is not initialized in either case,
The game control means,
When the second storage area is initialized by determining that the second storage area is abnormal, the execution of the lottery processing executed in the regular processing is prohibited, and the lottery processing is performed. Oite during recovery from power failure that occurs after prohibits execution, when the setting change operation is determined not to be made, while allowing the execution of the regular processing, the lottery executed in the periodic processing The process is prohibited from execution ,
When it is determined that a setting change operation has been performed, execution of the regular process is permitted, and the lottery process executed in the regular process is executable.